Final self reflection
Published by:
Flat World Knowledge, Inc.
1111 19th St NW, Suite 1180
Washington, DC 20036
© 2014 by Flat World Knowledge, Inc. All rights reserved. Your use of this work
is subject to the License Agreement available here
http://www.flatworldknowledge.com/legal.
No part of this work may be used, modified, or reproduced in any form or by any
means except as expressly permitted under the License Agreement.
Jason S. Wrench
About the Authors
Jason S. Wrench (EdD, West Virginia University) is an
associate professor and chair of the Department of
Communication at the State University of New York at
New Paltz. Dr. Wrench specializes in workplace learning
and performance, or the intersection of instructional
communication and organizational communication. His
varied research interests include communibiology,
computer-mediated communication, empirical research
methods, humor, risk/crisis communication, and supervisor-
subordinate interactions. Dr. Wrench regularly consults with individuals and
organizations on workplace communication and as a professional speech coach
for senior executives.
Dr. Wrench has published eight previous books: Intercultural Communication:
Power in Context, Communication, Affect, and Learning in the
Classroom (2000, Tapestry Press); Principles of Public Speaking (2003, The
College Network); Human Communication in Everyday Life: Explanations and
Applications (2008, Allyn & Bacon); Quantitative Research Methods for
Communication: A Hands-On Approach (3rd ed., 2016, Oxford University
Press); The Directory of Communication Related Mental Measures (Summer
2010, National Communication Association); Stand Up, Speak Out: The
Practice and Ethics of Public Speaking (2011, Flat World
Knowledge); Communication Apprehension, Avoidance, and
Effectiveness (2013, Allyn & Bacon); and Training & Development: The
Intersection of Communication & Talent Development in the Modern Workplace
(2014, Kendall Hunt). Dr. Wrench is also the editor of four books on the subject
of organizational communication: Casing Public Relations, (2014, Kendall
Hunt) Casing Organizational Communication (2011, Kendall Hunt), Workplace
Communication for the 21st Century: Tools and Strategies that Impact the
Bottom Line: Vol. 1. Internal Workplace Communication, and Vol. 2. External
Workplace Communication (2013, both with Praeger). Furthermore, Dr. Wrench
has published more than thirty research articles that have appeared in various
journals, including: Communication Quarterly, Communication Research
Reports, Education, Human Communication, Journal of Homosexuality, Journal
of Intercultural Communication, Southern Communication Journal, The Source:
A Journal of Education, and The NACADA Journal (National Association of
Campus Advising).
Narissra Maria Punyanunt-Carter (PhD, Kent State University, 2002) is an
associate professor in the department of communication studies at Texas Tech
University. Narissra teaches interpersonal communication, gender, nonverbal,
and romantic relationships. Dr. Punyanunt-Carter's research interests include
romantic relationships, computer-mediated communication, father-daughter
Narissra Maria
Punyanunt-Carter
communication, and mass media portrayals of romance.
She is a consultant for several book publishers, such as
Bedford St. Martin’s, Rowan & Littlefield, Oxford,
MCGraw-Hill, and Wadsworth. She has published many
articles, which have been featured in Southern
Communication Journal, Howard Journal of
Communication, Communication Research Reports, and
Communication Quarterly. She has devoted an
extraordinary amount of work towards her discipline,
department, the university, and the community of Lubbock.
She has served as a permanent or ad-hoc reviewer for ten different peer-reviewed
journals. She have been an advisor for more than five different Texas Tech
University student organizations and one national honor society. She was
awarded Advisor of the Year 2013 by the National Society of Collegiate
Scholars (honor society). She is the TTU advisor for Delta Phi Omega and Delta
Epsilon Psi (the first sorority and fraternity for Asian Americans). She has
published nine book chapters, forty-five journal articles, one book review, and
one book. She has been listed as a lead article writer many times. She has also
received a top paper award at a regional conference. She served as a mentor for
Mentor Tech (for ten years) as well as for the teaching, learning, professional,
and developmental center. She was recently elected as Vice-Chair Elect of the
Mass Communication division of the National Communication Association.
Recently, she was awarded by the Honors College as the “Faculty Member of the
Year.”
Mark Ward Sr.
Mark Ward Sr. (PhD, Clemson University) is an assistant
professor of communication at the University of Houston-
Victoria in Victoria, Texas, where he teaches organizational
and business communication, public relations, leadership,
conflict management, intercultural communication, and
communication theory. His recent book, Deadly Documents
(2014, Baywood Publishing), examines the organizational
culture of the Holocaust through analyses of everyday Nazi
bureaucratic documents, and his work on the subject has
appeared in the Journal of Business and Technical
Communication, Journal of Technical Writing and Communication, and
Holocaust Studies. Dr. Ward’s research interests include ethnography of religious
organizations and intersections of religion and media. He serves on the Editorial
Board of the Journal of Communication and Religion and Executive Council of
the Religious Communication Association, which named his ethnography of
religious media its 2014 Article of the Year. His work on religious organizations
and media has been published in Intercultural Communication Studies, Journal
of Communication and Religion, International Journal of Nonprofit and
Voluntary Organizations, Journal of Media and Religion, Journal of Radio and
Audio Media, and other venues. Author of two books on the history of religious
broadcasting, he is editor of the multivolume series, The Electronic Church in
the Digital Age: Cultural Impacts of Evangelical Mass Media (in press,
Praeger). Before entering academe, Dr. Ward was communications director and
journal editor for several national and international nonprofits and industry trade
associations. He continues to write regularly as an independent business
journalist.
Acknowledgments
The authors wish to thank their friends, family, and colleagues along with all of
those at Flat World Knowledge who have shepherded this book along the way.
The authors would also like to thank the following colleagues who have
reviewed the text and provided comprehensive feedback and suggestions for
improving the material:
Janice W. Anderson, SUNY – New Paltz
Michael Bannon, University of Pittsburgh
Jaime Bochantin, Western Illinois University/DePaul University
Susan Easton, Rollins College
Francine Edwards, Delaware State University
Cerise Glenn, University of North Carolina at Greensboro
Sandy Hanson, The University of North Carolina at Charlotte
Stephanie Klatzke, Northern Kentucky University
Amber Messersmith, University of Nebraska-Kearney
Diane Monahan, Saint Leo University
Tracy Nichols, Austin Peay State University
Chad O’Connor, Northeastern University
Jennifer Ohs, Saint Louis University
James Parker, Austin Peay State University
Brian Richardson, University of North Texas
Sergei Samoilenko, George Mason University
Suchitra Shenoy, DePaul University
Preface
The face of business as we know it is rapidly changing, so to keep up with these
changes, organizations are forced to look for new strategies that are often
completely “outside the box.” As a necessity, many organizations are now forced
to compete in a global market. For example, one small business in Berlin, Ohio,
Memory Lane Magnets, the retail/wholesale division of the Catalpa Trading
Company, began by making and selling magnets out of an old-fashioned malt
shop. However, when the business decided to put itself on the Internet, the
business quickly found that many of their orders were international. In essence, a
small business went from being a very local establishment to an international
retailer very quickly because of the Internet. However, it’s not just small
businesses that have global presences.
Dr. John S. Pemberton of Atlanta, Georgia, created a formula for a new drink in
1886, which was a household staple starting in 1895. He created a sugary syrup
that when combined with carbonated water became what is widely known today
as Coca-Cola. Today, Coca-Cola has more than 400 beverage brands in more
than 200 countries. According to Shenkar and Lou, Coca-Cola “relied on
international markets for 73 percent of its gallon volume in 2005. At 29.4
percent of the total, net operating revenue was highest for the European Union in
the same year, followed by North America with 28.4 percent, and 19.5 percent
for North Asia, Eurasia, and the Middle East (combined).” [1] This process of
taking a corporation from one small community and making it a global
phenomenon is called globalization, or “the acceleration and extension of
interdependence of economic and business activities across national
boundaries.” [2] In fact, Kearney demonstrated that 62 countries accounted for 96
percent of the accumulated gross domestic product (GDP). [3] All 62 countries
have very active globalization among their corporate sectors. As a result of
globalization, the need for people skilled in international business has become a
necessity. According to Shenkar and Lou, international business refers to
“business activities that involve the transfer of resources, goods, services,
knowledge, skills, or information across national boundaries.” [4] According to
the IBM Global CEO study in 2008, one of the skills necessary for international
business is recognizing “the importance of social connections within and across
organizations.” [5] Specifically, “Social networking and real-time collaboration
tools improve communication and close the distance between people in different
locations. Good ideas develop and spread quicker, and problems are solved
faster.” [6] In essence, IBM’s study of more than 1,000 chief executive officers
(CEOs) in international businesses found that effective communication is one of
the most important parts of globalization.
Effective communication is not only important for international business, but
highly bankable as well. IBM’s 2008 study on global human capital related the
case of the Maybank Group, a leader in the banking industry in Malaysia. In
2007, Maybank instituted a corporate training program for mid-level managers
that emphasized skills in communication, coaching, and leadership. While the
initial group of trainees consisted of seventy-five midlevel managers, those
managers have subsequently trained more than three thousand individuals in
communication, coaching, and leadership. The Maybank Group estimates that as
a result of this skills training “an estimated US$20 million in business impact
has already been achieved.” [7]
Ultimately, understanding organizational communication is necessary for all
organizations. This book is titled Organizational Communication: Theory,
Research, and Practice. The subtitle of this book really explains the approach we
took when writing this book. Our goal was really examine the intersection
among organizational communication as an actual practice, the theoretical basis
within the field of organizational communication, and the wealth of research
related to organizational communication both within the field of communication
studies but also within closely related fields like industrial psychology, talent
development, organizational behavior, etc.
This book will explore the best in organizational communication theory,
research, and practice. Chapter 3 and Chapter 4 will introduce a wide range of
both historic and modern theories related to organizational communication.
Theories help organizational communication scholars understand how
communication within, between, and among organizational stakeholders occurs.
A theory is a well-substantiated system of scientific facts that explains a natural
phenomenon. In essence, theories stem from previous scientific research in an
effort to help scientists explain, predict, and control a natural phenomenon. We
will discuss more of the concept of the word theory and what it implies in
Chapter 3. While Chapter 3 and Chapter 4 will introduce you to the core theories
in organizational communication, a variety of other theories will be introduced
throughout the text when appropriate. Obviously, this book cannot introduce you
to every communication theory or even every organizational communication
theory, so please understand that the theories discussed in this book are just the
highlights of an ongoing body of research.
In addition to making sure that the book is full of theories to help organizations
explain, predict, and control organizational communication phenomena, this
book will examine the best of historical and modern research in organizational
communication. Obviously, the whole book is based on organizational
communication research, but we will periodically highlight individual
researchers who have made important contributions to the field and new avenues
of research being undertaken by organizational communication scholars. Our
goal with this text is to introduce you to both the classic research and the current
research that is shaping the field of organizational communication.
Lastly, this book will introduce you to a series of “best practices” in
organizational communication. According to Webster’s New Millennium
Dictionary of English, a best practice is “a practice which is most appropriate
under the circumstances, esp. as considered acceptable or regulated in business;
a technique or methodology that, through experience and research, has reliably
led to a desired or optimum result.” [8] In essence, when we use the term “best
practice,” we are talking about how to implement the concepts discussed in this
book in a realistic manner in your organization. Some of the best practices
discussed in this book are from a subordinate’s perspective, and others are from
a supervisor’s perspective. Whether one is a low-level employee or a CEO, there
are practices that research has shown will increase both the quality and quantity
of communication within an organization.
Students Read This
According to the Microsoft Office Personal Productivity Challenge, which
surveyed 38,000 employees in 200 countries, the biggest challenges
organizations face are unclear objectives, lack of team communication, and
ineffective meetings. Furthermore, the study found that workers average only
three productive days out of a typical five-day work week. Whether reading
the numerous e-mails one gets every day (42 e-mails per day internationally;
56 e-mails per day in the United States) or spending an average of 5.6 hours
per week sitting in meetings that 69 percent of those surveyed say are useless,
people are bombarded by communication opportunities in modern
organizations. As a student taking your first or second course in
organizational communication, you will no doubt spend a huge portion of the
rest of your life working within, volunteering for, or utilizing organizations.
As such, understanding organizational communication is ultimately in your
best interest.
Even corporate America has come to the realization that organizational
communication is very important. Type the phrase “communication skills”
into any job-search database on the Internet, and you will find thousands of
potential employers realizing the necessity of good communication skills. For
example, we typed “communication skills” into Monster.com and found over
five thousand jobs that used the phrase. When we typed “organizational
communication” into Monster.com, we received over one thousand job
advertisements. We even found more than three hundred job advertisements
for the phrase “business communication.” This process could be done in any
online job search tool (e.g., monster.com, indeed.com).
Furthermore, in the business-book industry, communication is a frequently
addressed topic. Type the phrase “business communication” into a library or
book distributor’s search engine, and you are likely to find thousands of titles.
We typed “business communication” into Barnes & Noble’s website and
found more than fifteen thousand titles that address the subject. While some
of these books are textbooks, most are not. For example, Morrison and
Conaway’s book Kiss, Bow, or Shake Hands: The Bestselling Guide to Doing
Business in More than 60 Countries helps individuals navigate the world of
nonverbal communication in international business. [9] Crowley and Elster’s
book Working with You Is Killing Me: Freeing Yourself from Emotional Traps
at Work is all about how to communicate and interact with coworkers who are
driving you crazy. [10] There’s even a book that attempts to explain how to
understand all the double-talk and nonsense that one hears in modern
business: Why Business People Speak like Idiots: A Bullfighter’s Guide, by
Fugere, Hardaway, and Warshawsky. [11] In essence, there are a lot of people
out there saying they know a thing or two about effective communication in
organizations.
So, how is this book different from other books on the market? First, this book
is based in scientific evidence and not the authors’ experiences and opinions.
Although we do offer our experiences to help illustrate various concepts, we
do not recommend behaving in a specific way within an organization because
it has worked for us. Instead, the concepts and information within this book
have been researched by qualified social scientists in a variety of fields.
When there is conflicting information about a specific topic, we will let you
know that not everyone has found the same thing, which does happen.
Second, this book is designed to tell it like it is and not how we wish it was.
The fact is, organizations are often messy and do not follow “the guidelines.”
Organizations can be downright cruel and unethical places, and it is highly
likely that at some point you’ll find yourself in a less-than-perfect
organization. For this reason, we will discuss topics like bullying,
harassment, and discrimination. Lastly, we try to make this book as relevant
to your life as humanly possible. We realize that the information within this
book can have a real impact on your future. We often have students who are
able to take the information taught in organizational communication and
immediately start applying it to their own lives. However, there are also some
foundational concepts that may not be as clearly applicable. Often,
foundational concepts exist within textbooks as a way to prepare you for
more complicated material later in the book. For example, we take a
historical approach to various concepts in this book. We strongly believe that
understanding where something came from will help you understand how and
why it is used in modern business today. The simple fact is that concepts
often build on one another, so to understand a current concept you need to
understand where that concept came from in the first place. For example, in
Chapter 2 we will examine a number of theories of organizational
communication. Each new generation of theory came about to some extent
because of problems with the previous one, so to understand the most recent
organizational theories, you must understand the historic organizational
theories as well.
Overall, we hope that you find this book enriching both in your academic life
and in your professional life. The book contains various features that will
help you learn the content. Each chapter starts with a set of objectives and
ends with a series of brief case studies and discussion/review questions. The
objectives can help you see the major concepts in the chapter right up front.
You can also use the objectives after you’ve completed reading the chapter to
make sure you understand its major components. The case studies are
designed to help you see how content within the chapter is actually practiced
in the modern business world. Each case study is followed by a series of
questions designed to help you critically use the chapter’s content. Lastly,
each chapter has a set of discussion/review questions, which are also
designed to help you think more critically about the chapter’s content.
As for your professional life, we hope that the information contained within
this book will help you manage the organizational world. While one book
cannot save your life or guarantee you career success, money, or eternal
happiness, we can guarantee that this book will prove practical and useful.
Whatever kind of organization you become involved with in life, the
information within this book will help you navigate and understand
organizational communication.
Instructors Read This
We know that choosing the appropriate textbook for your classroom is always
a time-consuming process. If you’re considering adopting this book, thank
you for taking the time to look at this textbook and compare it to other books
on the market. If you’ve already adopted this book, thank you very much, and
we hope you find this book very useful in your own classroom.
Organizational Communication: Theory, Research, and Practice has a lot of
content that is available in other books while including content not available
in other organizational communication books on the market. We’ve also
included a number of pedagogical features in the book to make the reading
experience more meaningful.
The field of organizational communication has undergone an interesting
history over the past century. Starting out as simple how-to manuals for
business speaking and developing into the full-fledged discipline that it is
today, organizational communication is a unique area of study with its own
history, trends, and research methodologies. When selecting an organizational
communication textbook, many professors struggle with finding a book that
is theoretically strong, current, and relevant to their students. First, this book
examines both the historical and modern theories of organizational
communication. While there are clear theory chapters (Chapter 2 and Chapter
3), the book also incorporates other theories throughout the book when
examining various issues. To make this book theoretically strong, we have
included one chapter that examines the historic theories of organizational
communication and one that examines modern theories of organizational
communication. We believe a strong theoretical foundation is important for
any student studying organizational communication.
Second, this book contains information about the history of the field, while
demonstrating the new ideas and avenues of research currently being
undertaken. We believe students should have a firm grasp of this history of
the field, but they also need to know the current state of the field. Throughout
the book, we examine the history behind concepts and then show how those
concepts are currently being used in research.
Lastly, we wanted our book to be relevant to your students. One of the
greatest challenges current professors have is teaching a generation of
students more concerned with how knowledge will impact their lives than
with the process of learning. For this reason, we incorporated our own
personal anecdotes from working in various professions and used a variety of
case studies from real organizations to help students see how the information
contained within the book is actually exhibited within the real working
environment. Furthermore, each chapter ends with a set of discussion/review
questions that ask students to relate and apply the content of the chapter.
In addition to being theoretically strong, current, and relevant to students, we
incorporated three clear directions within this book: an international focus,
communication ethics, and the interdisciplinary tradition of organizational
communication. In a world where multinational corporations and
globalization are commonplace, preparing individuals for interacting with
others in organizations around the world is increasingly important. All three
of the authors of this book have extensive international experience that
includes living abroad and studying international business. Many of the
anecdotes and case studies included in this book use a very specific
international focus to demonstrate how the book’s concepts can be applied to
international organizational communication.
Second, we strongly believe that ethics is an extremely important part of the
modern landscape of organizations. While some books include specific
chapters examining ethics, we’ve decided to include issues of ethics at every
turn in this book. Understanding how to be an ethical communicator in a
modern organization is an extremely important reality in today’s business.
Lastly, our book embraces the interdisciplinary tradition of organizational
communication. While we strongly believe that communication scholars add
a unique perspective to the discussion of organizational communication, we
also realize that there are many scholars in industrial/organizational
psychology, organizational behavior, and organizational sociology who have
strongly impacted our view of organizational communication and continue to
add to the discussion of organizational communication. While this is a book
that first and foremost examines organizational communication, we believe it
is necessary to include numerous variables that appear in modern
organizational communication research but have not made their way into
other organizational communication textbooks (e.g., organizational justice,
organizational citizenship, organizational charlatanism).
In addition to being theoretically strong, current, and relevant to students, we
incorporated three clear directions within this book: an international focus,
communication ethics, and the interdisciplinary tradition of organizational
communication. In a world where multinational corporations and
globalization are commonplace, preparing individuals for interacting with
others in organizations around the world is increasingly important. All three
of the authors of this book have extensive international experience that
includes living abroad and studying international business. Many of the
anecdotes and case studies included in this book use a very specific
international focus to demonstrate how the book’s concepts can be applied to
international organizational communication.
Second, we strongly believe that ethics is an extremely important part of the
modern landscape of organizations. While some books include specific
chapters examining ethics, we’ve decided to include issues of ethics at every
turn in this book. Understanding how to be an ethical communicator in a
modern organization is an extremely important reality in today’s business.
Structure of the Book
Chapter 1 is designed to introduce the world of organizational
communication. Specifically, this chapter provides definitions for both
“organization” and “communication,” followed by a history of the field and
an explanation of the three research traditions used in organizational
communication.
Chapter 1 introduces you to some of the major terms necessary for
understanding organizational communication. The chapter also explores the
history of organizational communication and the major methodological tools
organizational communication scholars have at their disposal to understand
organizational communication.
Chapter 2 specifically delves into the world or organizational communication
ethics. The chapter is broken into three distinct sections: business ethics,
communication ethics, and organizational communication ethics. Ethics is a
very important part of the organizational communication landscape today.
Chapter 3 and Chapter 4 respectively introduce classical and modern theories
of organizational communication. These two chapters demonstrate how the
field has progressed historically in terms of perspectives on organizational
structure and management.
Chapter 5 examines how communication formally and informally occurs
within organizations. Additionally, this chapter provides a brief introduction
to the research practice of communication network analysis.
Chapter 6 delves into the area organizational climate, culture, and
globalization. It’s important in today’s world to understand the importance
that both an organizations climate and culture have on organizational
members. Furthermore, the days when organizations existed in isolation
within specific nation-states are rapidly disappearing. The book looks at both
the nature of globalization and its impact around the world.
Chapter 7 introduces the concept of the importance of leadership within an
organization and its various practices. Furthermore, the chapter delves into
the importance of followership. Too often, leadership discussions focus on
the leader without really investigating the importance of followership.
Chapter 8 delves into the issues of both identity and diversity. The chapter
starts by investigating different approaches that have been applied to
understand individual identities within organizations. The chapter then ends
with a discussion of diversity within the modern organization. As the
demographics within the United States are changing, it’s important for
organizations to celebrate difference.
Chapters 9, 10, 11, and 12 examine how communication actually occurs
within an organization. A variety of different facets related to organizational
communication are examined in these chapters including team/group
communication; organizational socialization; technology; and stress, conflict,
and negotiation.
Chapter 13 is a chapter not normally found in introductory textbooks in
organizational communication – the dark side. Organizations are often
cauldrons of politics, backstabbing, bullying, discrimination, and a range of
other dysfunctional behaviors. Ultimately, we believe that it is important to
look at both the good and the bad aspects of organizational life.
Chapter 14 examines how organizations interact and communicate with
external stakeholders. Specifically, the chapter examines the processes related
to the field of corporate communications (public relations, marketing, sales,
etc.) and the importance of strategic communication (issue management, risk
communication, and crisis communication).
Chapter 15 is designed to introduce students to the professional side of
organizational communication. The chapter examines everything from
organizational development and communication audits to corporate training
and human performance improvement. The goal of this chapter is to show
students some of the possibilities that exist in the professional side of
organizational communication.
The final chapter in this book is designed to help students think about how
Best Practices:
Stakeholders:
they can apply everything within the book to their own professional lives.
The chapter discusses how to sell a degree in organizational communication
to potential employers while also examining basic competencies necessary
for professional corporate communicators. Furthermore, the chapter discusses
more basic issues like resume writing and interviewing for a job.
Overall, these sixteen chapters are designed to give you an overview of the
field of organizational communication. We sincerely hope that this book will
be the first step you take in your journey into the world of organizational
communication. We hope that you are able to avoid ethical pitfalls and strive
for organizational communication that edifies individuals in the workplace
instead of tearing them down. Remember, no organization is perfect because
the people within an organization are never perfect. We cannot expect
organizations to be perfect, but there’s nothing wrong with striving for
perfection.
KEY TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
A practice which is most appropriate under the circumstances, esp. as considered acceptable or regulated in business; a technique or methodology that, through experience and research, has reliably led to a desired or optimum result.
Any party that has an interest in an organization. Stakeholders of a company include stockholders, bondholders, customers, suppliers, employees, and so forth.
[1] Shenkar, O., & Lou, Y. (2007). International business (2nd ed.).
Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage, p. 1.
[2] Shenkar, O., & Lou, Y. (2007). International business (2nd ed.).
Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage, p. 2.
[3] Kearney, A. T. (2005, January/February). Globalization’s last hurrah?
Foreign Policy, 128, p. 39.
[4] Shenkar, O., & Lou, Y. (2007). International business (2nd ed.).
Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage, p. 9.
[5] IBM. (2008). The enterprise of the future: IBM global CEO study.
Somers, NY: IBM Global Business Services, p. 43.
[6] IBM. (2008). The enterprise of the future: IBM global CEO study.
Somers, NY: IBM Global Business Services, p. 43.
[7] IBM. (2008). Unlocking the DNA of the adaptable workforce: The
global human capital study 2008. Somers, NY: IBM Global Business
Services, p. 24.
[8] Best practice. Webster’s new millennium dictionary of English,
preview edition (v 0.9.7). Dictionary.com. Retrieved from
http://dictionary.reference.com/browse/best practice
[9] Morrison, T., & Conaway, W. A. (2006). Kiss, bow, or shake hands:
The bestselling guide to doing business in more than 60 countries (2nd
ed.). Cincinnati, OH: Adams Media.
[10] Crowley, K., & Elster, K. (2006). Working with you is killing me:
Freeing yourself from emotional traps at work. New York, NY: Business
Plus.
[11] Fugere, B., Hardaway, C., & Warshawsky, J. (2005). Why business
people speak like idiots: A bullfighter’s guide. New York, NY: Free Press.
Chapter 1
Introduction to Organizational Communication: Why Communication Matters
© Thinkstock/iStock
We welcome you to the study of organizational communication. In writing this
book, we assume that you have some background in the field of human
communication and probably some exposure to the world of organizations. In
the preface of this book, which we strongly encourage you to read, we discussed
reasons why studying organizational communication matters in the twenty-first
century.
The average employed person in the United States works 7.5 hours per day (7.9
hours per day during the week, 5.5 hours per day on the weekend). [1] The US
Department of Labor further noted that these are just the hours a person spends
in a traditional working environment. People further spend on average about 36
minutes a week interacting with an educational organization, about 43 minutes
shopping, and about 16 minutes attending religious services or volunteering.
When people traditionally hear the word organization, they most often jump
right to the idea of a workplace. However, organization is a much broader term
and covers a lot more ground than just someone’s workplace. As such, hours
spent in an educational environment, shopping, attending religious services, and
volunteering are also examples of someone interacting with or in an
organization.
This book looks at organizational communication as a broad term that
encompasses a wide array of organizational types, which we’ll explore in more
detail elsewhere in this chapter. Even if you take just the average of 7.5 hours
per day that an individual spends “working” in an organization, you will end up
in an organizational environment a little over 111 days per year. If you work for
forty years, you’ll basically spend four of those years at work. We don’t tell you
this to scare you, but to help you understand the importance of knowing how to
interact and behave in organizations. So let’s get started.
[1] US Department of Labor. (2010). American time-use survey—2010
results [Press release]. Retrieved from
http://www.bls.gov/news.release/pdf/atus.pdf.
1.1 What is an Organization?
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
1. Understand the three common components of the various
definitions of the term organization.
2. Differentiate among the four types of organizations: mutual
benefit, business concerns, service, and commonweal.
As with any academic endeavor, you must understand what you are studying
before you can delve into the specifics and intricacies of the subject. For this
reason, we are going to start you with a basic definition for the term
organization. Later, in Chapter 4, we will explore alternative definitions. But for
now, let’s begin with a traditional conception of organization and then look at
three ways to categorize organizational types. These concepts will provide you a
natural bridge to the classical theories of organizational communication
discussed in Chapter 3.
Defining Organization
Many people have attempted to define what is meant by the word organization.
The Defining Organization sidebar contains a partial list taken from common
dictionary definitions and definitions proposed by business, psychology,
economics, and communication scholars.
Dictionary Definition
(1) the act of organizing or the state of being organized; (2) an organized
structure or whole; (3) a business or administrative concern united and
constructed for a particular end; (4) a body of administrative officials, as of a
political party, a government department, etc.; (5) order or system; method. [1]
General Business Definitions
“A system of consciously coordinated activities of two or more persons.” [2]
“The accomplishment of an objective requires collective effort, men set up an
organization designed to coordinate the activities of many persons and to
furnish incentives for others to join them for this purpose.” [3]
“A social unit of people, systematically structured and managed to meet a
need or to pursue collective goals on a continuing basis. All organizations
have a management structure that determines relationships between functions
and positions, and subdivides and delegates roles, responsibilities, and
authority to carry out defined tasks. Organizations are open systems in that
they affect and are affected by the environment beyond their boundaries.” [4]
“A Body of individuals working under a defined system of rules,
assignments, procedures, and relationships designed to achieve identifiable
objectives and goals.” [5]
Organizational Behavior Definitions
“A social unit within which people have achieved somewhat stable relations
(not necessarily face-to-face) among themselves in order to facilitate
obtaining a set of objectives or goals.” [6]
“An organization is a complex system, which includes as subsystems: (1)
management, to interrelate and integrate through appropriate linking
processes all the elements of the system in a manner designed to achieve the
organizational objectives, and (2) a sufficient number of people so that
constant face-to-face interaction is impossible.” [7]
Economics Definition
A shorthand expression for the integrated aggregation of those persons who
are primarily involved in “(1) the undertaking or managing of risk and the
handling of economic uncertainty; (2) planning and innovation; (3)
coordination, administration and control; (4) and routine supervision” of an
enterprise. [8]
Industrial/Organizational Psychology Definition
“Work consists of patterned human behavior and the ‘equipment’ consists of
the human beings.” [9]
“Lively sets of interrelated systems [task, structure, technology, people, and
the environment] designed to perform complicated tasks.” [10]
Organizational Communication Definitions
“Social collectives in which people develop ritualized patterns of interaction
in an attempt to coordinate their activities and efforts in the ongoing
accomplishment of personal and group goals.” [11]
“Including five critical features—namely, the existence of a social
collectivity, organizational and individual goals, coordinated activity,
organizational structure, and the embedding of the organization with an
environment of other organizations.” [12]
“Communicative structures of control.” [13]
“An organized collection of individuals working interdependently within a
relatively structured, organized, open system to achieve common goals.” [14]
“An aggregate of persons, arranged in predetermined patterns of
relationships, in order to accomplish stated objectives.” [15]
After reading this laundry list of definitions for the word organization, you may
wonder which is best. To be honest, we think they all have something to offer.
When you look at the various definitions for the word organization, you will
start to see a certain pattern of consistent themes. Jason Wrench [16] examined a
similar list of definitions and concluded that three primary features run through
all definitions of the term organization: structures, goals, and people. Let’s look
now at each of these features.
Organizational Structures
The first major theme commonly seen in the various definitions of the word
organization has to do with structure. When we talk about how organizations
are structured, we are talking primarily about how they function in terms of both
what happens within an organization and how an organization functions within
its external environment. For our purposes, we will look at structure in terms of
four basic processes: external environment, input, throughput, and output (Figure
1.1).
Figure 1.1 Organizational Structures
External Environment
The first factor to consider in thinking about an organization is the external
environment in which it exists. The external environment consists of all
vendors, competitors, customers, and other stakeholders who can have an impact
on the organization itself but exist outside the boundaries of the organization.
Changes in the external environment where an organization exists will have an
effect on the organization itself. For example, the government might impose new
regulations on your industry, and these new regulations will affect how your
organization must function. When it comes to how an organization interacts with
its external environment, we often refer to two different types of boundaries. An
organization with open boundaries allows for the free flow of information to
the organization and is more likely able to adapt to changes that occur within the
environment. Closed boundaries, on the other hand, occur when an organization
tries to insulate itself from what is occurring within its environment. When an
organization has closed boundaries, the organization ends up being less aware of
what is going on within the external environment and sets itself up for major
problems or even becoming obsolete. For most organizations, closed boundaries
simply are not realistic or possible, which is why most organizations have open
boundaries. At the same time, there are a couple of real reasons why some
organizations may need to have tightly controlled boundaries that are pretty
closed. If you are in the information world with lots of proprietary or sensitive
information (e.g., the Federal Bureau of Investigation, Central Intelligence
Agency, National Security Agency), you may have real, legitimate reasons to
keep the boundaries as closed as humanly possible to prevent leaks. Other
organizations may need to clamp down on some facets of communication
because opening themselves up to information flow (especially technologically)
could make the organization vulnerable to computer viruses or electronic
intrusions. In the past few years, many organizations have been hacked and had
sensitive and proprietary information stolen (e.g., Adobe, JetBlue, JCPenney,
Target, Visa). As information security becomes increasingly important,
organizations are forced to develop new rules and protocols for how information
is or is not accessible.
Input
The next major aspect of an organization’s environment involves inputs. Inputs
are those resources that an organization brings in from the external environment
in order for the organization to accomplish its goals. Typically, resources can be
discussed in three general categories: physical materials, people, and
information. First, an organization brings in physical materials that it needs to
accomplish its goals. Whether it is computers, desks, light fixtures, or supplies
necessary to build silicon microchips, organizations rely on a variety of vendors
in the external environment to provide physical materials.
The second type of input necessary from the external environment involves
people. An organization relies on skilled workers to accomplish its goals. One of
the biggest complaints of many organizations is a lack of skilled or qualified
workers. Depending on the organization, skills or qualifications can run from
specific college degrees, to specific industry experience, to specific technical
knowhow. According to Julian Alssid, executive director of the Workforce
Strategy Center in New York, “Employers seem to be less willing to invest in
training in this economy. Again, it is the combination of the right credential and
practical experience they look for.” [17]
The final type of input an organization needs is information. Information refers
to any data that is necessary for an organization to possess in order to create
knowledge. [18] According to the American Society for Training and
Development (ASTD), data “is raw and without context and can exist in any
form, usable or not.” [19] Often organizations end up with piles of data, including
customer service reports, market trends, and other material typically in the raw,
numerical form. Organizations then turn this data into information by giving the
data meaning through some kind of interpretation. While most people think of
data as purely numerical, there are other nonnumerical types of data that can be
important to turn into information. For example, if the US Congress passes a
new law that impacts how your organization must handle customer records, the
law may not specifically say how your organization must comply with the law.
In this case, the new law is data and your organization must turn that law into
usable information in the form of its own policies and procedures. When you
combine information with understanding that leads to action, information is
transformed into knowledge.
How do organizations go about acquiring data that can lead to action? ASTD
discusses two types of external environment scanning processes that
organizations can employ: proactive and reactive. [20] First, proactive scanning
occurs when an organization actively looks for data or existing information that
could be transformed into usable knowledge. For example, doing research on
your competitors in an effort to stay on top of your market is an example of
proactive scanning. Second, reactive scanning occurs when an organization
faces a specific problem and then makes sense out of the data/information that
arises from the problem, or searches the external environment for
data/information that could be useful in addressing the problem. Ideally, if an
organization does a good job with proactive scanning, reactive scanning will not
be necessary very often. When an organization is forced to use reactive
scanning, time is wasted in the attempts to find data/information and turn it into
actionable knowledge.
Throughput
Throughput is what an organization ultimately does, within its own confines,
with the inputs it receives. Throughput can range from the use of physical
materials, people, and information, to how organizations internally structure
themselves to create goal-oriented throughput. While we cannot discuss every
possible way an organization can utilize inputs, we should note that the issue of
internal organizational structure is very important at this level of an organization.
For this reason, we must discuss two ways that organizations commonly
structure themselves.
A hierarchy is a categorization system in which individuals/departments are
ranked over other individuals/departments based on their respective skills,
Figure 1.2
Hierarchies
centrality, and status. First, organizations can place people/departments over
others because of specific skill sets. For example, managers are placed over
workers because of their skills in managing people. While we know this isn’t
always why people get promoted, the general idea of a management class of
people is because managers can help organize employees toward the
organization’s goals. Second, people can be ranked over others because of their
centrality to the organization’s goals. For example, if your organization is a tech
company, the product developers may be ranged structurally over people in
customer support or marketing, because without the product developers there is
no need for customer support or marketing. Lastly, organizations can be
organized based on status—an individual’s relative position to others as a result
of esteem, privilege, or responsibility. When someone gets promoted to a higher
position, her or his status increases in terms of a formal hierarchy. Whether that
promotion is a result of esteem, privilege, or responsibility doesn’t matter at this
point; only the elevation within the hierarchy matters.
Now that we’ve discussed what hierarchy is, let’s talk about the two common
ways that organizations are typically patterned—flat versus tall hierarchies
(Figure 1.2).
Image A in Figure 1.2 represents a tall hierarchy, so called
because it has many hierarchical layers between those at
the bottom and those at the top. Two commonly discussed
tall hierarchies are the Catholic Church and the US military.
Within the Catholic Church, you have the average
parishioner at the bottom of the hierarchy and the Pope at
the top. In the US military, you have the average enlisted
soldier at the bottom of the hierarchy and the president of
the United States, as commander in chief, at the top. In both
cases, the people at the bottom have little or no
communication with those at the top.
Image B in Figure 1.2 represents flat hierarchies where only a couple of layers
separate those at the bottom and those at the top. Think of organizations like
mom-and-pop restaurants. In a typical small restaurant, the owner may also
serve as the chef and may have only a handful of waitstaff, table busers, and dish
cleaners as employees. In these hierarchies, it is very easy for those at the bottom
of the hierarchy to communicate with those at the top.
Output
The final aspect related to organizational structure is output, which is the
ultimate product or service that an organization puts back into the external
environment. One organization may create the components that go into a TV
remote, while another may send to your home the technician who hooks up your
cable or satellite. Every organization is designed to produce some kind of service
or product for the external environment. Even nonprofit organizations like the
American Red Cross are producing a range of both products and services for the
external environment.
Organizational Goals
Organizations have many goals, but it helps clarify those goals into a simple
typology (i.e., a classification into ordered categories). Edward Gross examined
the various types of organizational goals and created a simple typology
consisting of five distinct goals: output goals, adaptation goals, management
goals, motivation goals, and positional goals. [21]
Output
The first common type of organizational goal is called an output goal, or an
organizational goal that is “reflected, immediately or in the future, in some
product, service, skill or orientation which will affect (and is intended to affect)
that society.” [22] While Gross was initially discussing goals in terms of
educational organizations, the goals also apply to other organizational types as
well. In essence, every organization has some type of output goal that will be
released back into the external environment. For a pizza chain, the output goal
could be the pizza it delivers to your house (product), the customer service it
gives customers (service), or the expertise in pizza making that the chain brings
to the enterprise (skill).
Adaptation
The second type of organizational goal is what Gross called adaptation goals, or
goals for adapting to the external environment. [23] All organizations exist in
environments that change, and successful organizations will change and adapt to
that external environment. One of the biggest risks many organizations face if
they do not adapt to the external environment is obsolescence, which “occurs
when there is a significant decline in customer desire for an organization’s
products or services.” [24] Many organizations become so focused on making a
specific product that the product eventually is no longer wanted or needed by
customers, which will lead to the eventual death of an organization.
Management
Management goals are the next type discussed by Gross. These goals involve
three decisions: (1) who will manage the organization, (2) how conflict will be
managed, and (3) what output goals have priority. [25] First, organizations need
to decide on the organization’s formal structure and who will exist at various
rungs of the hierarchy. In addition to determining the formal structure, these
goals also determine the type of organizational hierarchy and who holds power
within it. Second, managerial goals focus on how conflicts within the
organization will be handled. Organizations have a vested interest in keeping the
organization running smoothly, so too much conflict can lead to interpersonal or
interdepartmental bickering that has negative consequences for the organization.
Lastly, management goals determine the overarching direction of the
organization itself. As the saying goes, someone has to steer the ship. We’ll
discuss different types of leaders in Chapter 7. But for now, we’ll just note that
having a clear direction and clear priorities is vital to the health of an
organization. If an organization tries to do too much, the organization may end
up scatterbrained and not function as a cohesive whole. If the organization tries
to do one and only one thing, the organization may become obsolete. Overall,
prioritizing output goals must by high on management’s to-do list.
Motivation
The fourth common goal for organizations is ensuring that employees are
satisfied with and loyal to the organization. [26] Gross called these motivational
goals. A wealth of research demonstrates the link between employee motivation,
job satisfaction, and worker productivity. [27] Whitman, Van Rooy, and
Viswesvaran surveyed seventy-three studies that affirm that satisfied employees
are more productive. [28] In addition, motivated employees are more likely to
remain loyal. According to Hart and Thompson, employee loyalty is “an
individual’s perception that both parties to a relationship [employee and
organization] have fulfilled reciprocal expectations that (1) denote enduring
attachment between two parties, (2) involve self-sacrifice in the face of
alternatives, and (3) are laden with obligations of duty.” [29] By this definition,
employees are loyal because they knowingly enter into a relationship with an
organization, sacrifice part of themselves to the organization (and vice versa),
and thus feel a sense of obligation or duty to the organization (a phenomenon we
explore fully in Chapter 8). Of course, loyalty only works when an employee
feels that the organization is standing up to its end of the reciprocal expectations.
If an employee feels that an organization is not meeting its basic obligations,
then the employee will view that organization unkindly and loyalty will diminish
over time. [30] As such, an organization must meet its basic obligations to
employees in order to foster loyalty.
Positional
The final type of organizational goal is positional goals. According to Gross,
these goals attempt to position an organization vis-à-vis other organizations in
the same market. [31] For example, an automotive tool manufacturer will attempt
to position itself against other automotive tool manufacturers. There are two
common ways to position an organization within a specific market: (1) higher
volume at a lower price or (2) higher quality at a higher price. The first strategy
offers more products or faster services at a cheaper cost, while the second offers
a luxury product or service for which people are willing to pay more. This
difference was illustrated in a 2011 report by PCWorld, which found that 56
percent of new cell phone users purchased Android devices and 28 percent
bought iPhones. [32] Androids are cheaper and sold in more versions, while
iPhones are made by Apple, which historically positions itself as a luxury brand.
Thus, while iPhones accounted for only 4 percent of the overall cell phone
market, their products accounted for 52 percent of industry profits. [33] Though
iPhones were not capturing a large percentage of the market, they were still
beating the competition.
Organizational People
After structures and goals, people are the final characteristic common to various
definitions of the word “organization.” In Jason Wrench’s original discussion of
the three common themes related to people, he discussed interdependency,
interaction, and leadership. [34] For our purposes, we also list a fourth notion—
control—as an important factor related to the people in an organization.
Interdependency
The first term associated with people in organizations is interdependency,
which means mutual dependence, or depending on one another. In organizations,
this means people depend on one another to achieve the organization’s goals. If
one part of the organization stops functioning properly, it will affect the other
parts. For example, imagine that you are a copy editor for a New York publisher.
If you get behind on your job, then the graphic designers, marketing
professionals, printers, and other groups of people will also get behind. At the
same time, interdependency can also help an organization. If you work with a
solid group of colleagues then, even when something happens to set you back,
the others can help pick up the slack and keep the work on schedule. Overall,
people impact each other in organizations.
Interaction
Our interactions with others help define and create what is an organization.
Without the interactions we have with our coworkers, customers, and other
stakeholders, an organization really doesn’t exist. For this reason, you can almost
say that the “thing” we call an organization doesn’t really exist because it’s not a
physical structure, but rather an outcome of our interactions with others. (We
will have more to say about this in Chapter 4.) An organization may have
physical objects within it (desks, computers, pencils, etc.), but the actual
organization is ultimately the people that make it exist.
At the same time, people within an organization also interact with each other in
various roles in an effort to accomplish the organization’s goals. People within
organizations and people who come in contact with organizations are constantly
in a state of interaction. As we will learn in Chapter 14, organizations have many
different stakeholders (an individual or group that has an interest in the
organization), and each requires different communication strategies. Ultimately,
communicative interaction is one of the most basic functions of any
organization.
Control
Organizations are, as Dennis Mumby pointed out, inherently entities that must
control the behaviors of members, even while members generally strive to meet
their own needs. [35] When one group has one set of needs and desires, and
another has a different set of needs and desires, we refer to these groups as being
in dialectical tension. Table 1.1 contains many of the dialectical tensions that
exist between an organization and its various members.
Table 1.1 Dialectical Tensions
What the Organization Needs/Wants What the Workers Need/Want
Minimize costs Maximize salary/benefit package
Systematization of job duties Autonomy to do one's job
Ability to streamline the organization Job stability
Agreement Dissent
Transparency Privacy
Conventionality Innovation
Organization-focused Self-focused
Permanence Change
Rights of the organization Rights of the individual
Work life Social life
As a result of these inherent dialectical tensions, an organization tries to stack
the deck in its favor to maximize its needs and desires and subsequently
minimizes the needs and desires of workers in the process. Let’s briefly examine
each of these dialectical tensions in turn.
Minimize costs versus maximize salary/benefits. The first dialectical tension
occurs when organizations try to keep their overhead costs low while workers try
to maximize what they earn in terms of both salary and benefits (health
insurance, stock options, retirement, etc.).
Systemization versus autonomy. Organizations like stability, so they prefer
workers who learn how to do a specific task and then systematize that task in the
most efficient manner. As such, organizations (especially in manufacturing
contexts) will provide explicitly detailed training in exactly how an employee
should accomplish a task. Workers, on the other hand, prefer to have autonomy
when making decisions for how best to accomplish their daily work and do not
enjoy being micromanaged.
Streamlining versus stability. Organizations are fundamentally focused on the
bottom line and therefore often want to have the ability to streamline the
organization in an attempt to maximize profits. If an organization can lay off
workers and maintain maximum productivity, then it’s often in the organization’s
best interest to do so. While streamlining is good for an organization, it can
create a chaotic environment for employees who crave job stability. Workers
want to know that their work is appreciated and that it will keep them employed.
Agreement versus dissent. The next dialectical tension listed here is agreement
versus dissent. In this tension, organizations prefer for workers to follow blindly
and do what organizational leaders dictate. Workers, on the other hand, want to
have a voice to articulate when they disagree with the dictates of leaders or with
the general direction of the organization. We’ll explore the area of organizational
dissent more in Chapter 5.
Transparency versus privacy. In our world today, organizations increasingly
want to know what workers are doing in the workplace. As such, organizations
expect that employee’s work lives are completely transparent. An organization
will do everything from monitoring e-mail and telephone calls to installing
software on workers’ computers that logs and monitors key strokes made on a
keyboard. Workers, on the other hand, are increasingly demanding some privacy,
especially in their digital lives.
Conventionality versus innovation. Organizations are innately slow-moving
organisms that do not like change, so it’s very common to hear, “But we’ve
always done it that way.” Workers, on the other hand, want to bring their own
creative problem-solving skills to the table and to think of new and innovative
processes and procedures that could benefit both the organization and the
workers. While not all worker ideas are spot on, organizations that stick to
conventional ways of thinking may end up losing a lot of employees who prefer
more freedom to be innovative.
Organization focus versus self-focus. Organizations innately want workers to
focus on their jobs and improve their productivity. Workers, on the other hand,
want to focus on themselves and improve themselves. Many organizations will
support self-improvement as long as it has a clear benefit for the organization,
but workers often want to focus on their own improvement even if that
improvement has no benefits for the organization or may lead the worker to find
a new organization.
Permanence versus change. When looking at the permanence/change dialectic,
organizations strive to maintain knowledge and thus keep people who are hard
workers for the long haul. Often, organizations call this employee loyalty.
Workers, on the other hand, desire change and can get very bored doing the same
work day in and day out. Often workers become pigeonholed in specific jobs
with specific duties, and there is no way to get out but to leave the organization.
Overall, an organization in our society has many more tools at its disposal to get
its way than do workers.
Organizational versus individual rights. Ultimately, when it comes to
organizations the focus is on the organization and its rights and less on the
individual’s rights. Workers believe that their human rights shouldn’t stop at the
front door of the organization. For example, many workers are shocked when
organizations fire them for posts made on social networking websites. Workers
believe these posts are, by rights, private. An organization, on the other hand,
may believe looking at social networking site posts is a completely appropriate
behavior and well within its rights as an organization. While this specific
example also overlaps with the transparency/privacy dialectic, the focus here is
on whose rights are more important.
Work versus social life. The last dialectical tension associated with
organizational control is the focus on work versus social life (a subject we
explore further in Chapter 8). Organizations believe that workers should be
focused purely on their work life. As a result of digital technology, it has become
increasingly easier for people to be on call 24/7 by their organizations. Workers,
on the other hand, believe they are entitled to a social life that does not involve
one’s organization. Furthermore, workers often believe that as long as their
private, social-life behavior does not impact their work life, the organization
should stay out of their personal lives. Many organizations go so far as to include
“morality clauses” in contracts that enable them to fire employees whose
personal-life behavior is deemed inappropriate for organizational members.
Leadership
The last term associated with people in organizations is leadership. Any
organization must have an individual or clearly discernible group that guides the
organization toward accomplishing its goals. Without such leadership, individual
members of an organization must puzzle over how to accomplish the
organization’s goals. When leadership is unsettled and people are pulling in
different directions, the organization is unlikely to accomplish much. For an
organization to thrive, it must have effective leadership that fosters effective
“followership.” In Chapter 7, we’ll examine leadership and followership in more
detail.
Types of Organizations
The last factor to realize in understanding organizations is that there are
numerous types of organizations. A good overview of the different systems that
have been proposed to categorize organizations is provided by Carper and
Snizek. [36] Here we will use the categories proposed by Peter Blau and W.
Richard Scott. [37] Blau and Scott created a classification system with four
distinct categories: mutual benefit associations, business concerns, service
organizations, and commonweal organizations.
Mutual Benefit Associations
The first type of organization is the mutual benefit association, which is
focused on providing services to its members. Examples are “political parties,
unions, fraternal associations, clubs, veterans’ organizations, professional
associations, and religious sects.” [38] People generally join these types of
organizations because of the benefits they receive. When these organizations are
first being created, organizational members are generally very involved in the
creation of the organization. However, once such an organization has been
around for a while, the majority of the members become passive and let the
minority run the organization. Whether you belong to a sorority or fraternity or
even the forensic team at your college or university, most people belong to at
least one mutual benefit association.
Business Concerns
The second type of organization is the business concern, which is focused on
doing well for itself. According to Blau and Scott, the “dominant problem of
business concerns is that of operating efficiency—the achievement of maximum
gain at minimum cost in order to further survival and growth in competition with
other organizations.” [39] Most for-profit organizations are business concerns.
These organizations face problems associated with “maximizing operating
efficiency in a competitive situation.” [40] Because of their need to cut costs and
maintain a competitive advantage, these organizations may even be cold and
callous in how they treat employees and customers. Everything from Walmart to
the New York Times is a business concern.
Service Organizations
Blau and Scott describe service organizations as those “whose basic function is
to serve [their own] clients.” [41] Service organizations can include “social-work
agencies, hospitals, schools, legal aid societies, and mental health clinics.” [42]
The basic problem that service organizations face is “the conflict between
professional service to clients and administrative procedures [that] are
characteristic of service organizations.” [43] Often service organizations are
steeped in organizational hierarchies and procedures that prohibit providing the
easiest and fastest service to potential clients. As a student, you’re currently
involved in a service organization—namely, your college or university. But most
of us also interact with doctors, clinics, dentists, optometrists, and more on a
semiregular basis. All these last organizations are profit driven, but their basic
purpose is to serve their clients.
Commonweal Organizations
The last type of organization discussed by Blau and Scott is commonweal
organizations, whose “prime beneficiary is the public-at-large.” [44] Examples
include “the State Department, the Bureau of Internal Revenue, military
services, police and fire departments, and also the research function as
distinguished from the teaching function in universities.” [45] All these
organizations were created because they represent areas where the general public
needs some level of protection or knowledge, or the organization serves the
administrative purposes of the government. Overall, the crucial problem posed
“by commonweal organizations is the development of democratic mechanisms
whereby they can be externally controlled by the public.” [46] One reason we pay
taxes is so we can have quick and easy access to many commonweal
organizations.
In the United States, firefighting has not always been a commonweal
organization. Until the mid-1800s, private gangs often controlled firefighting
brigades in large towns and cities. These gangs might set fires and then extort
building owners for money to put the fires out. On the other hand, some
buildings might burn to the ground while firefighting gangs fought over which
brigade controlled that neighborhood. One such riot broke out near Cincinnati,
Ohio, in 1851 and involved ten rival gangs. Two years later, Cincinnati became
the first US city to publicly fund its firefighters. Today, we cannot imagine that
firefighting is anything but a common good for all.
KEY TAKEAWAY
When one analyzes a variety of definitions for the term
organization, three common themes tend to emerge: the
structure, the goal, and the people. Organizational structure
examines how an organization functions both internally and within
its larger external environment. The goal is the general purpose a
group of people is trying to achieve. Lastly, the people refer to the
various internal and external stakeholders associated with the
organization.
There are four common organizational types: mutual benefit,
business concern, service, and commonweal. Mutual benefit
organizations are designed to help the individuals who belong to
the group (e.g., fraternities, sororities, clubs). Business concern
organizations are primarily concerned with turning a profit for the
organization and its shareholders (e.g., anything from Walmart
and Citibank to your local grocery store or restaurant). The third
type of organization is the service organization, which is geared
toward providing a specific service to people (e.g., hospitals,
legal-aid societies). Lastly, commonweal organizations are those
that are generally run by the government for the greater good of
society (e.g., the military, fire/police departments, department of
education).
Information :
Inputs :
Throughput :
Business Concern:
Commonweal Organizations:
EXERCISES
1. Think of an organization you currently belong to (or have
belonged to in the past). Looking at Figure 1.1, how has your
organization interacted with its environment with regard to input,
throughput, and output?
2. Of the ten dialectical tensions discussed in Table 1.1, which one
do you think has the strongest impact on an organization you
currently belong to (or have belonged to in the past)? Why do you
think this dialectical tension causes the greatest imbalance of
control?
3. From your own organizational interactions, find two different
organizations that fit into each of the four types of organizations:
mutual benefit, business concern, service, and commonweal.
KEY TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
Any data necessary for an organization to possess in an effort to create knowledge.
Those resources that an organization brings in from the external environment in order for the organization to accomplish its goals.
What an organization does with inputs within the confines of the organization itself.
Organization focused on doing well profitably for an organization and its stakeholders. /html>
Organization designed to benefit society at large.
External Environment:
Flat Hierarchies:
Hierarchy :
Interdependency:
Mutual Benefit Association:
Open Boundaries:
Output:
Proactive Scanning:
Reactive Scanning :
Service Organizations:
Structure:
Tall Hierarchy:
All the vendors, competitors, customers, and other stakeholders who can have an impact on the organization itself but exist outside the boundaries of the organization.
Hierarchy with only a couple of hierarchical layers between those at the bottom and those at the top of the hierarchy.
A categorization system where individuals/departments are ranked over other individuals/departments based on skills, centrality, and status.
Mutual dependence, or depending on one another.
Organization focused on providing for its membership.
Organizations that allow for the free flow of information to the organization and are more likely able to adapt to changes that occur within the environment.
The ultimate product or service that an organization disseminates to the external environment.
When an organization actively looks for data or existing information that could be transformed into usable knowledge.
When an organization faces a specific problem or crisis and then either makes sense of data/information it poses or searches the external environment for data or information that could be useful.
Organization whose prime concern is providing products or services for a specific public clientele.
How an organization functions in terms of what happens both within the organization itself and within its external environment.
Hierarchy with many layers between those at the bottom of the hierarchy and those at the top of the hierarchy.
[1] Organization. (2009). In Collins English dictionary (10th ed.).
Dictionary.com. Retrieved from
http://dictionary.reference.com/browse/organization.
[2] Barnard, C. I. (1938). The functions of the executive. Cambridge, MA:
Harvard University Press, p. 73.
[3] Blau, P. M., & Scott, W. R. (1962). Formal organizations: A
comparative approach. San Francisco, CA: Chandler, p. 5.
[4] Organization. (n.d.). In BusinessDictionary.com. Retrieved from
http://www.businessdictionary.com/definition/organization.html.
[5] Greenwald, H. P. (2008). Organizations: Management without control.
Los Angeles, CA: Sage, p. 6.
[6] Litterer, J. A. (1963). Organizations: Structured behavior. New York,
NY: Wiley, p. 5.
[7] Lundgren, E. F. (1974). Organizational management: Systems and
process. San Francisco, CA: Canfield Press, p. 7.
[8] Harbison, F. (1959). Entrepreneurial organization as a factor in
economic development. Quarterly Journal of Economics, 70, 364–379, p.
365.
[9] Katz, D., & Kahn, R. L. (1978). The social psychology of
organizations. New York, NY: Wiley, p. 55.
[10] Levitt, H. J. (1972). Managerial psychology: An introduction to
individuals, pairs, and groups in organizations. Chicago, IL: University of
Chicago Press, p. 265.
[11] Kreps, G. L. (1986). Organizational communication. New York, NY:
Longman, p. 5.Kreps, G. L. (1986). Organizational communication. New
York, NY: Longman, p. 5.
[12] Miller, K. (2012). Organizational communication: Approaches and
processes (6th ed.). Boston, MA: Wadsworth-Cengage, p. 11.
[13] Mumby, D. (2013). Organizational communication: A critical
approach. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage, p. 4.
[14] Richmond, V. P., & McCroskey, J. C. (2009). Organizational
communication for survival: Making work, work (4th ed.). Boston, MA:
Allyn & Bacon, p. 1.
[15] Redding, W. C. (1964). The organizational communicator. In W. C.
Redding & G. A. Sanborn (Eds.), Business and industrial communication:
A source book (pp. 29–58). New York, NY: Harper & Row, p. 33.
[16] Wrench, J. S. (2013). Communicating within the modern workplace:
Challenges and prospects. In Workplace communication for the 21st
century: Tools and strategies that impact the bottom line: Vol. 1. Internal
workplace communication (pp. 1-38). Santa Barbara, CA: Praeger.
[17] Balderrama, A. (2010, February 22). Available jobs, not enough
skilled workers [Online article]. Retrieved from
http://www.careerbuilder.com/Article/CB-1497-Who-is-Hiring-Available-
Jobs-Not-Enough-Skilled-Workers/, ¶ 7.
[18] Atwood, C. G. (2009). Knowledge management basics: A complete
how-to guide. Alexandria, VA: ASTD Press.
[19] ASTD. (2006). Managing organizational knowledge. In E. Biech
(Series ed.), ASTD Learning System, Vol. 8. Alexandria, VA: ASTD
Press, p. 2.
[20] ASTD. (2006). Managing organizational knowledge. In E. Biech
(Series ed.), ASTD Learning System, Vol. 8. Alexandria, VA: ASTD
Press.
[21] Gross, E. (1969). The definition of organizational goals. British
Journal of Sociology, 20, 277–294.Gross, E. (1969). The definition of
organizational goals. British Journal of Sociology, 20, 277–294.
[22] Gross, E. (1969). The definition of organizational goals. British
Journal of Sociology, 20, 277–294, p. 287.
[23] Gross, E. (1969). The definition of organizational goals. British
Journal of Sociology, 20, 277–294.
[24] Wrench, J. S. (2012). Casing organizational communication.
Dubuque, IA: Kendall-Hunt, p. 11.
[25] Gross, E. (1969). The definition of organizational goals. British
Journal of Sociology, 20, 277–294.
[26] Gross, E. (1969). The definition of organizational goals. British
Journal of Sociology, 20, 277–294.
[27] Latham, G. P. (2007). Work motivation: History, theory, research, and
practice. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
[28] Whitman, D. S., Van Rooy, D. L., & Viswesvaran, C. (2010).
Satisfaction, citizenship behaviors, and performance in work units: A
meta-analysis of collective construct relations. Personnel Psychology, 63,
41–81. doi:10.1111/j.1744-6570.2009.01162.x
[29] Hart, D. W., & Thompson, J. A. (2007). Untangling employee loyalty:
A psychological contract perspective. Business Ethics Quarterly, 17, 297–
323, p. 300.
[30] Hajdin, M. (2005). Employee loyalty: An examination. Journal of
Business Ethics, 59, 259–280. doi:10.1007/s10551-005-3438-4
[31] Gross, E. (1969). The definition of organizational goals. British
Journal of Sociology, 20, 277–294.
[32] Kellog, D. (2011, September 26). In U.S. market, new smartphone
buyers increasingly embracing Android [Press release]. Retrieved from
http://blog.nielsen.com/nielsenwire/online_mobile/in-u-s-market-new-
smartphone-buyers-increasingly-embracing-android.
[33] Hamburger, E. (2011, December 7). These charts tell the real story
of Android vs. iPhone. Business Insider. Retrieved from
http://www.businessinsider.com/android-vs-iphone-charts-2011-12.
[34] Wrench, J. S. (2013). Communicating within the modern workplace:
Challenges and prospects. In Workplace communication for the 21st
century: Tools and strategies that impact the bottom line: Vol. 1. Internal
workplace communication (pp. 1-37). Santa Barbara, CA: Praeger.
[35] Mumby, D. (2013). Organizational communication: A critical
approach. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
[36] Carper, W. B., & Snizek, W. E. (1980). The nature and types of
organizational taxonomies: An overview. Academy of Management
Review, 5, 65–75.
[37] Blau, P. M., & Scott, W. R. (1962). Formal organizations: A
comparative approach (2004 printing). Stanford, CA: Stanford University
Press.
[38] Blau, P. M., & Scott, W. R. (1962). Formal organizations: A
comparative approach. San Francisco, CA: Chandler, p. 45.
[39] Blau, P. M., & Scott, W. R. (1962). Formal organizations: A
comparative approach. San Francisco, CA: Chandler, p. 49.
[40] Blau, P. M., & Scott, W. R. (1962). Formal organizations: A
comparative approach. San Francisco, CA: Chandler, p. 43.
[41] Blau, P. M., & Scott, W. R. (1962). Formal organizations: A
comparative approach. San Francisco, CA: Chandler, p. 51.
[42] Blau, P. M., & Scott, W. R. (1962). Formal organizations: A
comparative approach. San Francisco, CA: Chandler, p. 51.
[43] lau, P. M., & Scott, W. R. (1962). Formal organizations: A
comparative approach. San Francisco, CA: Chandler, p. 43.
[44] Blau, P. M., & Scott, W. R. (1962). Formal organizations: A
comparative approach (2004 printing). Stanford, CA: Stanford University
Press, p. 44.
[45] Blau, P. M., & Scott, W. R. (1962). Formal organizations: A
comparative approach. San Francisco, CA: Chandler, p. 54.
[46] Blau, P. M., & Scott, W. R. (1962). Formal organizations: A
comparative approach (2004 printing). Stanford, CA: Stanford University
Press, p. 43.
1.2 What is Communication?
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
1. Define and explain what is meant by the term human
communication as introduced in this chapter.
2. Explain the SMCR model of communication and how it applies to
the organizational context.
© Thinkstock/iStock
There is no agreed-upon definition of communication. Scholars have examined
the term and found a vast array of approaches. [1] Frank Dance surveyed ninety-
five definitions of communication and broke them down into fifteen types. [2]
“Human communication,” he concluded, “is indeed a dappled thing, swift, slow,
sweet, sour, adazzle, dim. The search for its essence and the study of its meaning
is a search rich in the doing, not in the done.” [3]
In this introductory chapter, however, our challenge is to start you off with a
definition of “communication” that will help you get an initial grasp on
organizational communication. To do that, we begin with a definition that
accomplishes two things. First, our definition will help you understand that
communication is not something that just “happens” and that people simply “do”
like a knee-jerk reaction. Our beginning definition will introduce you to basic
components that go into human communication. Second, we are starting you off
with a definition of communication that will form a natural bridge to Chapter 3
and its discussion of classical theories of organizational communication. This is
because the model reviewed here embodies assumptions about human
communication that are reflected in classical theories. Later, when we review
modern theories of organizational communication in Chapter 4, we will discuss
other models of communication whose assumptions have guided modern
theorists.
But for now, our task is to introduce a model that will help you get an initial,
basic grasp of human communication, which you can then use as a foundation to
understand the classical theories in Chapter 3. As such, we begin here with a
definition of human communication as the process whereby one individual (or
group of individuals) attempts to stimulate meaning in the mind of another
individual (or group of individuals) through intentional use of verbal, nonverbal,
and/or mediated messages. [4] If we extend this to organizations, then we have a
starting definition of organizational communication as the process whereby an
organizational stakeholder (or group of stakeholders) attempts to stimulate
meaning in the mind of another organizational stakeholder (or group of
stakeholders) through intentional use of verbal, nonverbal, and/or mediated
messages. And what is a “stakeholder”? According to the American Heritage
Dictionary of Business Terms, a stakeholder is “any party that has an interest in
an organization. Stakeholders of a company include stockholders, bondholders,
customers, suppliers, employees, and so forth.” [5] An organization must also
interact with its external environment: competitors, community members,
governmental agencies, and more. Every organization has a wide range of
stakeholders with which it must communicate.
The definition of communication offered here can be broken down into what is
called the “SMCR” model of communication—source, message, channel, and
receiver. [6] Figure 1.3 represents this model in the context of publicspeaking, but
it is easily applied to organizational communication. Let’s briefly break down
the SMCR model into five basic concepts: process, source, message, channel,
and receiver.
Figure 1.3 SMCR Model of Communication
Image courtesy of Wrench, J., Goding, A., Johnson, D., and Attias, B. (2011). Stand Up, Speak Out: The
Practice and Ethics of Public Speaking, Irvington, NY: Flat World Knowledge.
Process
Anyone studying human communication must remember it is a process. There is
no distinct beginning or distinct end to our communications. Instead,
communication is a series of interactions that change over time and that produce
changes in those who are interacting. Success or failure at informing or
persuading can alter how people interact with each other in the future. Many
external factors also influence the process and are constantly in play. For
example, your cultural background can affect how you approach the
communicative process.
Source
The source in the SMCR model of communication is the individual, or group of
individuals, who attempts to stimulate meaning. In organizational
communication, the source may be conveying the ideas of a single person or the
ideas of an entire group. For example, if you are evaluating an employee’s job
performance, the message you are sending may come from you and you alone.
However, if you are a corporate CEO delivering a press conference, the message
may be coming out of your mouth but may represent dozens of individuals
involved in crafting the message. Furthermore, in the position as a CEO, you
would also be viewed as the mouthpiece of the organization, so anything you say
is also attributed to the organization, which could represent thousands of people.
Message
The basic goal of the source is, in the SMCR model, to take an idea in her or his,
or the group’s, mind and then transmit that same idea to another person (or
persons). The “idea” someone is trying to send is the message. We refer to this
transmission of a message from the source to the receiver as “stimulating
meaning” because, according to this view of communication, the source is
attempting to transmit her or his idea so that the receiver will understand the idea
in the same way as the source. One of the biggest mistakes novice managers can
make is to assume that if they tell an employee something, the message was
understood as intended. As such, it’s very important to ensure a receiver
understands the intended meaning of a message.
One of our coauthors was recently involved in a labor negotiation. Employees
believed the organization had a stash of funds that could be used to raise their
pay. But accounting standards mandated the funds be expended only for a
specific purpose and otherwise could not be touched. Our coauthor
recommended that the organization have its auditors craft a specific message to
this effect. Thus, where the employee negotiators saw the organization’s refusal
as biased, they understood the independent auditors’ message and backed down
on their demands. This case illustrates the need to ensure that the recipients of a
message correctly understand its meaning. The example also illustrates another
common problem: receivers of a message must see the source as credible and
trustworthy or they may dismiss the message.
Channel
A channel is “the means by which a message is carried from one person to
another.” [7] When a source decides to create a message, he or she can rely on
three primary channels to send that message: verbal, nonverbal, and mediated.
Verbal
The verbal channel consists of specific spoken sounds that represent real
phenomena or ideas. Yet when we say the word “office,” the letters o-f-f-i-c-e
may represent either an actual physical location (“Please come to my office!”) or
the general idea of a location in which work occurs (“I’m going in to the office
today”). Thus, for understanding to occur, the source and the receiver must have
similar understandings for the intended meanings of words. Ensuring that people
in an organization are using the same lexicon is such a common problem that
numerous humor books have been written on the subject. [8]
Nonverbal
The second channel through which people can transmit a message is the
nonverbal channel. This channel encompasses any stimuli that can elicit
meanings not contained in words themselves. Everything from how someone
gestures, looks, sounds, or smells can impact how others will view that person.
Research has indicated that 65 to 95 percent of a person’s understanding of a
verbal message is dependent upon the nonverbal behavior associated with the
verbal message. [9] For example, you walk into a colleague’s office and find she
is clearly red-faced and that her fists are clenched. You ask how she’s doing and
she flatly responds, “Fine!” If you pay attention only to the verbal message sent
(“Fine!”) you will interpret her message to mean that she’s excellent (like fine
wine). However, when you interpret her nonverbal behavior, you’ll quickly
ascertain that she is far from “excellent” but may not want to talk about what
happened at the moment.
Mediated
The last channel through which a source can send a message is a mediated
channel. A mediated message is any message that is sent using some kind of
technology such as print, audio, or video. Some of the earliest studies of
organization communication explored the use of employee newsletters. Today,
we increasingly depend at work on computer-mediated communication via e-
mail, Skype, Twitter, LinkedIn, blogs, vlogs, and who knows what comes next.
Receiver
While we’ve discussed the receiver of a message throughout this section, we
should note that the receiver(s) is ultimately, according to the SMCR model, the
person interpreting and understanding a source’s message. When a receiver
attends to a source’s message, he or she must interpret that message in light of
his or her understanding of the message. If the source uses unfamiliar words, the
receiver may not accurately interpret the message in the intended way. For this
reason, a source must consider any feedback the receiver sends about the
message to ensure that understanding has been achieved.
A Closing Thought
The SMCR model introduces communication concepts in an easily digestible,
linear fashion. Yet in most communicative contexts, you actually function as
source and receiver simultaneously. If you are speaking, you are also gauging the
verbal and nonverbal reactions of your colleagues; if you are listening, you are
also sending continuous feedback—a smile, a frown, a nod, an erect posture, a
slouch, verbal interjections of assent or dissent—about the message and its
source. The definition and model of human communication presented in this
introductory chapter are only starting points. You can build on this introduction
as you take up classical theories of organization communication in Chapter 3 and
then expand your horizons and consider alternative definitions and models
proposed by modern theorists in Chapter 4.
KEY TAKEAWAY
As an introductory definition, think of human communication as
the process whereby one individual (or group of individuals)
attempts to stimulate meaning in the mind of another individual (or
group of individuals) through intentional use of verbal, nonverbal,
and/or mediated messages. This can be extended to
“organizational communication” as the process whereby an
organizational stakeholder (or group of stakeholders) attempts to
stimulate meaning in the mind of another organizational
stakeholder (or group of stakeholders) through intentional use of
verbal, nonverbal, and/or mediated messages. A stakeholder is
any person or group that has an interest in the organization.
The SMCR model of communication examines four basic
components: source, message, channel, and receiver. The source
of a message is the individual or group originating an idea and
attempting to transmit that idea to another person or persons. The
message is the idea that is attempting to be transmitted. The
channel is the specific method of communication an individual
uses to convey a specific message: verbal (the use of words),
Channel :
Human Communication:
nonverbal (communicative characteristics outside of the words
themselves), and mediated (the use of technology to convey a
message). Lastly, the receiver is the individual who is targeted for
a message who receives the message and then has to make
sense of the message itself.
EXERCISES
1. Look at the introductory definition of human communication
provided in this chapter. Do you think this definition accurately
reflects how humans communicate with one another? Why or why
not? Do you think the introductory definition of organizational
communication presented here accurately reflects the nature of
how people in organizations communicate? Why or why not?
2. Imagine you’ve been asked to run a meeting consisting of five
people. Explain how a meeting of five people would relate to the
SMCR model of communication.
KEY TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
The means by which a message is carried from one person to another.
Defined here as the process whereby one individual (or group of individuals) attempts to stimulate meaning in the mind of another individual (or group of individuals) through intentional
Mediated :
Message:
Nonverbal :
Organizational Communication:
Receiver:
Source :
Verbal :
use of verbal, nonverbal, and/or mediated messages.
Any message that is sent using some kind of technology such as print, audio, or video.
The “idea” someone is trying to send to a receiver.
Any stimuli that could elicit meanings not contained in words themselves.
Defined here as the process whereby an organizational stakeholder (or group of stakeholders) attempts to stimulate meaning in the mind of another an organizational stakeholder (or group of stakeholders) through intentional use of verbal, nonverbal, and/or mediated messages.
The person interpreting and understanding a source’s message.
The individual (or group of individuals) who attempts to stimulate meaning.
Specific spoken sounds that represent real phenomena or ideas.
[1] For example, see Dance, F. E. X. (1970). The “concept” of
communication. Journal of Communication, 20, 201–210; Dance, F. X.
(1984). What is communication? Nailing Jello to the wall. Association for
Communication Administration Bulletin, 48, 4–7; Losee, R. M. (1999).
Communication defined as complementary informative processes.
Journal of Information, Communication and Library Science, 5(3), 1–15;
Nilsen, T. R. (1957). On defining communication. Speech Teacher, 6(1),
10–17.
[2] Dance, F. E. X. (1970). The “concept” of communication. Journal of
Communication, 20, 201–210.Dance, F. E. X. (1970). The “concept” of
communication. Journal of Communication, 20, 201–210.
[3] Dance, F. E. X. (1980). Swift, slow, sweet, sour, adazzle, dim: What
makes human communication human. Western Journal of Speech
Communication, 44, 60–63, p. 63.
[4] Wrench, J. S., McCroskey, J. C., & Richmond, V. P. (2008). Human
communication in everyday life: Explanations and applications. Boston,
MA: Allyn & Bacon.
[5] Scott, D. L. (Ed.). (2009). Stakeholder. In The American heritage
dictionary of business terms. Boston, MA: Houghton Mifflin Harcourt, p.
503.
[6] Berlo, D. (1960). The process of communication. New York, NY: Holt,
Rinehart & Winston.
[7] Wrench, J. S., McCroskey, J. C., & Richmond, V. P. (2008). Human
communication in everyday life: Explanations and applications. Boston,
MA: Allyn & Bacon, p. 10.
[8] For example, Beckwith, L. (2006). The dictionary of corporate bullshit:
An A to Z lexicon of empty, enraging, and just plain stupid office talk. New
York, NY: Broadway Books; Fugere, B., Hardaway, C., Warshawsky, J.
(2005). Why business people speak like idiots: A bullfighter’s guide. New
York, NY: Free Press.
[9] Wrench, J. S., McCroskey, J. C., & Richmond, V. P. (2008). Human
communication in everyday life: Explanations and applications. Boston,
MA: Allyn & Bacon.
1.3 History of Organizational Communication
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
1. Explain the three different ways the term organizational
communication can be understood, according to Stanley Deetz.
2. Define the term organizational communication as it is used within
this section.
3. Identify some of the major historical events in the creation of the
field of organizational communication.
Now that we’ve introduced some beginning definitions, let’s switch gears. To
help you get an initial grasp of “organizational communication,” we’ll explore
three ways of viewing the term and then offer a brief history of the field.
Viewing Organizational Communication
Stanley Deetz argued that defining what is meant by the term organizational
communication is only half the question: “A more interesting question is, ‘What
do we see or what are we able to do if we think of organizational communication
in one way versus another?’ Unlike a definition, the attempt here is not to get it
right but to understand our choices.” [1] Instead, Deetz recommends that we
grasp three different ways to conceptualize organizational communication: as a
discipline, as a way to describe organizations, and as a phenomenon within
organizations.
Organizational Communication as Discipline
The first way the term organizational communication is defined is as a specific
subfield of the communication field. However, organizational communication is
not an academic area of study unique to the field of communication studies. The
ways that people within organizations communicate, and how organizations
corporately communicate, are also of interest to fields such as management
science, organizational behavior, and industrial psychology. Organizational
communication is a unique discipline, observed Dennis Mumby and Cynthia
Stohl, because it attracts a “community of scholars [who] constitute a
disciplinary matrix when they share a set of paradigmatic assumptions about the
study of a certain phenomenon.” [2] In other words, organizational
communication is a discipline because people who study it share certain core
ideas about the subject. Mumby and Stohl go on to note, “This does not mean
that there is a consensus on every issue, but rather that scholars see objects of
study in similar ways, and use the same language game in describing these
phenomena.” [3] In fact, you may find your teacher or even yourself disagreeing
with our interpretation of certain aspects of organizational communication,
which is very much a normal part of any academic discipline.
Organizational Communication as Descriptor
The second way we can view the term organizational communication is as
descriptor for what happens within organizations. Deetz explains, “In the same
way that psychology, sociology, and economics can be thought of as capable of
explaining organizations’ processes, communication might also be thought of as
a distinct mode of explanation or way of thinking about organizations.” [4] As
you will quickly see in this book, organizational communication is a hybrid
field—people in a variety of different academic areas conduct research on the
topic. Scholars in anthropology, business, psychology, sociology, and other
academic areas conduct research that is fundamentally about organizational
communication. Communication scholars differ in how we approach
organizational communication because our training is, first of all, in human
communication. So we bring to the study of organizational communication a
unique history and set of tools that other scholars do not possess.
Organizational Communication as Phenomenon
The final way one can view the term organizational communication is as a
specific phenomenon, or set of phenomena, that occurs within organizations. For
example, when two employees get into a conflict at work, they are enacting
organizational communication. When the chief financial officer of an
organization is delivering a PowerPoint presentation on the latest quarterly
earnings to the organization’s board of directors, he or she is engaging in
organizational communication. The latest advertisement campaign an
organization has created for the national media is another example of
organizational communication.
A History of Organizational Communication
Instead of providing a long, drawn-out history of the field of organizational
communication as we know it today, we’ve provided a brief timeline dating back
to the 1750s when the Industrial Revolution began in the United Kingdom. The
introduction of steam-powered machinery forever changed the way businesses
operated and led to the eventual creation of the modern corporation. Table 1.2 is
a summary of the major events in the history of organizational communication as
a field of study. This table is not meant to be an exhaustive list, but only a
representative list of key moments in the study of organizational communication.
Table 1.2 Major Events in Organizational Communication
c.
1750
The Industrial Revolution starts in the United Kingdom and quickly transforms the nature of
business.
1908
A. E. Phillips publishes the first public speaking book specifically aimed at businessmen,
Effectively Speaking.
Harvard Business School becomes the first academic program to focus on the scholarship of
business.
1910
The first meeting of the Eastern Public Speaking Conference is held. The association changed itself
to the Speech Association of the Eastern States in 1950 and then to the Eastern Communication
Association in 1973.
1914
The National Association of Academic Teachers of Public Speaking is formed and holds its first
convention the following year. This association changes its name four times over the next one
hundred years: National Association of Teachers of Speech, 1923; Speech Association of America,
1946; Speech Communication Association, 1970; and National Communication Association, 1997.
1919 Edward Bernays and Doris Fleishman open the first public relations firm.
1929 William Phillips Sandford and Willard Hayes Yeager are the first speech scholars to publish a
public speaking book aimed at business professionals, titled Business and Professional Speaking.
1937 W. Charles Redding publishes an article titled “Speech and Human Relations” in the academic
journal The Speaker. Redding is widely considered the father of organizational communication.
1938 Chester Barnard publishes The Functions of the Executive and argues, “The first function of the
executive is to develop and maintain a system of communication.” [5]
1941
Paul Lazarsfeld publishes the first review of the discipline of communication based on his and
others’ research at the Bureau of Applied Social Research and determines that communication can
be broken into four categories: (1) who, (2) said what, (3) to whom, and (4) with what effect.
1942 Alexander Heron argues that successful communication with one’s employees is necessary for
good business in his book Sharing Information with Employees.
1945 University of Denver holds the first graduate-level seminar in industrial communication.
1949 Claude Shannon and Warren Weaver publish The Mathematical Theory of Communication, which
provides the first major model of human communication (source, message, receiver, noise).
1952
The first dissertation specifically in industrial communication is completed by Keith Davis in the
Department of Business at Ohio State University. The title of the manuscript is “Channels of
Personnel Communication within the Management Setting.”
1953 Ohio State University and the University of Nebraska offer the first PhD degrees conferred by
speech departments in industrial communication.
1961 Lee Thayer, a speech professor with an interest in communication in businesses, publishes
Administrative Communication, the first true textbook in organizational communication.
1963 The Journal of Business Communication is started by the American Business Communication
Association.
1964
W. Charles Redding and George Sanborn publish Business and Industrial Communication: A
Source Book, which compiles copies of previously published articles on a wide range of
organizational communication topics. The publication of this book is generally seen as the true
start of the field of organizational communication.
1967
The first “Conference on Organizational Communication” is held at Marshall Space Flight Center
in Huntsville, Alabama. At the conference, Philip Tompkins reviews the state of organizational
communication and divides the types of research into two categories: (1) informal and formal
channels of communication and (2) superior-subordinate relationships. Tompkins’s presentation
marks the official acceptance of the term organizational communication.
Henry Voos publishes Organizational Communication: A Bibliography, sponsored by the Office of
Naval Research.
1968
Division IV, organizational communication, becomes an officially recognized group by the
National Society for the Study of Communication, which becomes the International
Communication Association in 1970.
1972
W. Charles Redding publishes his book Communication with the Organization: An Interpretive
Review of Theory and Research. In this monograph, he poses ten basic postulates of organizational
communication.
1973 The Academy of Management authorizes a new division within its association, titled
Organizational Communication.
1982
The Western Journal of Communication publishes a series of articles based out of a conference
held in Alta, Utah, “The Summer Conference on Interpretive Approaches to the Study of
Organization Communication.” This series of articles argues for the importance of incorporating
interpretive methods in the study of organizational communication.
1983
Linda Putnam and Michael Pacanowsky publish Communication and Organizations: An
Interpretive Approach. This edited book further solidifies the importance of interpretive research
methods in organizational communication.
1987 Fredric Jablin, Linda Putnam, Karlene Roberts, and Lyman Porter publish the Handbook of
Organizational Communication: An Interdisciplinary Perspective.
1991
Stacia Wert-Gray, Candy Center, Dale Brashers, and Rene Meyers publish an article titled
“Research Topics and Methodological Orientations in Organizational Communication: A Decade
in Review.” The authors find that of the 289 articles published in the 1980s, 57.8% were social
scientific, 25.9% were qualitative, 2.1% were critical, and 14.2% were categorized as other.
1993
Dennis Mumby articulates an agenda for critical organizational communication research in an
article titled “Critical Organizational Communication Studies: The Next 10 Years” in
Communication Monographs.
2001 Fredric Jablin and Linda Putnam publish The New Handbook of Organizational Communication:
Advances in Theory, Research, and Methods.
2004
Elizabeth Jones, Bernadette Watson, John Gardner, and Cindy Gallois publish an article titled
“Organizational Communication: Challenges for the New Century” in the Journal of
Communication. In the article, they identify six challenges organizational communication scholars
face in the twenty-first century: (1) innovate in theory and methodology, (2) acknowledge the role
of ethics, (3) move from the microlevel to macrolevel issues, (4) examine new organizational
structures, (5) understand the communication of organizational change, and (6) examine diversity
and intergroup communication.
KEY TAKEAWAY
Stanley Deetz articulated three different ways the term
organizational communication can be understood: the discipline,
ways to describe/explain organizations, and a phenomenon within
organizations. His first perspective describes organizational
communication as an academic discipline that consists of an
intellectual history, textbooks, courses, degrees, and so on. The
second way to describe organizational communication is as a way
of describing organizations. Under this perspective, organizational
communication is used to describe and/or explain how
organizations function. Lastly, organizational communication is a
specific set of behaviors exhibited within an organization itself.
People interact with one another, which is a form of organizational
communication, and through these interactions we actually create
the phenomenon that is an organization.
The history of organizational communication is a complicated one.
Starting with the Industrial Revolution and the evolution of the
modern corporation, the idea of organizational communication
ultimately crystallized in the 1950s and 1960s. During the early
years, most of the research examining communication within an
organization was conducted from a social-scientific perspective,
but starting in the 1980s with the work of Linda Putnam,
organizational communication research has become more
diversified to include both interpretive and critical perspectives.
EXERCISES
1. Find two examples of how you could use the term organizational
communication for each of Stanley Deetz’s three
Discipline:
Hybrid Field:
conceptualizations of the term. Did you find this process easy or
difficult? Why?
2. Since the 1960s, which decade do you think has been the most
important in the transformation of the field of organizational
communication? Why?
KEY TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
A community of scholars who share core ideas about an object of study.
A field of study in which research is conducted by scholars from a variety of academic areas.
[1] Deetz, S. (2001). Conceptual foundations. In F. M. Jablin & L. L.
Putnam (Eds.), The new handbook of organizational communication:
Advances in theory, research, and methods (pp. 3–46). Thousand Oaks,
CA: Sage, p. 4.
[2] Mumby, D., & Stohl, C. (1996). Disciplining organizational
communication studies. Management Communication Quarterly, 10, 50–
72, p. 52.
[3] Mumby, D., & Stohl, C. (1996). Disciplining organizational
communication studies. Management Communication Quarterly, 10, 50–
72, p. 52.
[4] Deetz, S. (2001). Conceptual foundations. In F. M. Jablin & L. L.
Putnam (Eds.), The new handbook of organizational communication:
Advances in theory, research, and methods (pp. 3–46). Thousand Oaks,
CA: Sage, p. 5.
[5] Barnard, C. I. (1938). The functions of the executive. Cambridge, MA:
Harvard University Press, p. 226.
1.4 Approaches to Organizational Communication
Research
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
1. Explain what is meant by the social-scientific approach to
organizational communication.
2. Explain what is meant by the interpretive approach to
organizational communication.
3. Explain what is meant by the critical approach to organizational
communication.
© Thinkstock/iStock
In this first chapter, we have so far provided you with introductory concepts for
organization, communication, and organizational communication. The goal of
your Organizational Communication class is not only to learn but to apply these
concepts—and that means doing research, whether in the scholarly sense or in
the everyday sense of exploring and critically analyzing the world of
organizations all around you. So in this concluding section, we’ll give you a
brief and basic introduction to three approaches for researching organizations. In
Table 1.2, you read a basic history of organizational communication as an
academic discipline. The earliest years of the field were predominantly marked
by thought-pieces on the subject or were driven by social-scientific/quantitative
research. Then in the 1980s, new voices emerged that brought
interpretive/qualitative and critical approaches to the field. We believe it is
important to briefly describe these approaches in the first chapter because you’ll
be hearing much more about them as you read this book. We want you, as
readers, to critically analyze the research we present and to understand how the
different methodological traditions impact our understanding of the phenomenon
that is organizational communication.
Social-Scientific/Quantitative Approach
The first major research tradition in organizational communication is the social-
scientific/quantitative approach. Through the 1950s, most work in organizational
communication focused on effective business speaking or came from outside the
field of communication studies. Then, in the 1960s, the field started to solidify
and create professional boundaries that differentiated organizational
communication from business, psychology, sociology, and speech. During these
formative years, organizational communication research aspired to be scientific.
Researchers would reference theories, form hypotheses, and test their hypotheses
through experimental observations. Outcomes of these observations helped
researchers revise the original theory, which inevitably led to new research
questions and new hypotheses. The predominant research methodology of the
time was rooted in social psychology and therefore based in statistics. Even
today, the bulk of research is conducted from a social-scientific/quantitative
perspective. [1]
Social science follows a distinctive epistemology, or belief about how things are
“known.” (We will have much more to say about epistemology in Chapter 4.)
Amedeo Giorgi has broken down the epistemology of social scientists into seven
general beliefs: (1) social phenomena must be reduced to operational definitions
for ease of study, (2) social phenomena result from causes that can be duplicated,
(3) the goal of research is to predict behavior, (4) the researcher must be
independent from phenomena under study and strive for objectivity to avoid
influencing the data, (5) only data that can be observed or obtained from
participants is worthy of analysis, (6) other researchers should be able to
replicate the results, and (7) all phenomena should be numerically measured. [2]
Survey Research
The first common type of social-scientific method utilized in organizational
communication is probably the most common in communication research as a
whole—the survey. Surveys involve a series of questions that are designed to
measure individuals’ personality/communication traits, attitudes, beliefs, and/or
knowledge on a given subject. Surveys are popular because they yield massive
amounts of information from a wide array of people very quickly. However,
researchers must always question whether or not a survey is measuring the right
types of participants for a specific study. For example, using a group of college
students to discuss workplace violence may not be very accurate because of the
limited exposure of the average student to the world of work. In this case, the
researcher would be better off to survey people who are not in school and who
work for a living outside the college environment.
Experimental Research
The second common type of social-scientific/quantitative research in
organizational communication is the experiment. As in the physical sciences, the
goal of an experiment is to manipulate some facet of a participant’s experience
to determine how that participant responds. For example, in a study examining
the impact that an initial handshake has on job interviewers, the researcher could
hire and train someone to enter various job interviews as a “candidate” and
alternately shake hands with each interviewer weakly, aggressively, or with
average firmness. The interviewers, however, would not know that the
“candidate” is working for the researcher. The goal of this (hypothetical) study
would be to determine if interviewers’ experiences with the “candidate” differed
based on the type of handshake used at the beginning of an interview. The
researcher would manipulate the type of handshake used in each job interview,
but do so randomly so that the results are unintentionally biased. Experiments
generally involve much planning and time to pull off competently.
Content Analysis
The final type of social-scientific/quantitative research common to
organizational communication is content analysis. A content analysis involves
taking a series of artifacts and numerically coding information contained within
the artifacts to see if a discernible pattern emerges. Here, the term artifacts refers
to objects made by organizational members that capture their communication.
For example, the speeches of CEOs found on YouTube could be artifacts, or
press releases from Fortune 500 corporations, or policy manuals, annual reports,
or company newsletters. Second, the artifacts are scanned for specific contents.
For example, the researcher might analyze speeches made by Fortune 500 CEOs
and scan for references to patriotic themes: duty, honor, country, America, and so
on. The scan would then yield a numerical count of these patriotic references.
Next, the researcher might analyze how often these thematic references occur in
CEO speeches across different industries: automotive, banking, and so forth. In
this case, the goal would be to discover if CEOs are more or less likely to invoke
images of patriotism according to their respective industries.
For more information on conducting quantitative research, we recommend
reading Wrench, Thomas-Maddox, Richmond, and McCroskey’s Quantitative
Research Methods for Communication: A Hands-On Approach. [3]
Example of Social-Scientific/Quantitative Research
Individual Differences in Managers’ Use of Humor: Subordinate Perceptions
of Managers’ Humor
By Brian J. Rizzo, Melissa Bekelja Wanzer, and Melanie Booth-Butterfield [4]
In this study, Rizzo, Wanzer, and Booth-Butterfield set out to examine
subordinates’ perceptions of their manager’s use of humor in the workplace.
The researchers recruited 151 participants in introductory communication
courses, graduate communication courses, and master’s of business
administration (MBA) courses. All participants were either current or past
part-time (fewer than forty hours per week) or full-time (forty hours per week
or more) employees of some organization.
The researchers used three mental measures in this study: (1) self and
manager humor orientation (individual’s use of humor in interpersonal
interactions—completed once for self and once for the manager), (2) humor
behaviors (individual’s use of humor strategies in the workplace—completed
once for self and once for the manager), (3) manager affect (degree to which
a subordinate likes her or his manager), (4) and manager effectiveness
(degree to which a subordinate perceives her or his manager as effective).
The researchers had four hypotheses in this study:
•H1: High humor-oriented individuals will report using more humorous
behaviors in the workplace than low humor-oriented individuals.
•H2: High humor-oriented individuals will perceive more types of humorous
behaviors as appropriate for their manager to use in the workplace than will
low humor-oriented individuals.
•H3: Subordinates’ perceptions of managers’ humor orientation will be
positively associated with liking toward these managers.
•H4: Employees’ perceptions of managers’ humor orientation will be
positively related to perceptions of managerial effectiveness.
The Results
First, employees who rated themselves as using large amounts of humor in
their daily interactions with others used more humorous behaviors in the
workplace than those individuals who did not rate themselves as humorous.
Second, employees who rated themselves as using large amounts of humor in
their daily interactions with others believed that managers could use a wider
array of humor strategies in the workplace than those individuals who did not
rate themselves as humorous.
Third, employees’ perceptions of their manager’s use of humor in her or his
interactions with others were positively related to subordinates’ liking of that
manager.
Lastly, employees’ perceptions of their manager’s use of humor in her or his
interactions with others were positively related to subordinates’ perceptions
of the effectiveness of that manager.
In essence, all four of this study’s hypotheses were supported.
Interpretive/Qualitative Approach
While the essential question of the social scientist is to ask how phenomena
should be measured, observed Giorgi, the interpretive/qualitative researcher
asks, “What do the phenomena mean?” [5] Or as John Van Maanen noted,
qualitative research is “an umbrella term covering an array of interpretive
techniques which seek to…come to terms with the meaning, not the frequency,
of…phenomena in the social world.” [6] Given the variety of research techniques
that come under the larger title of “qualitative,” scholars often distinguish
between two major threads of qualitative inquiry: interpretive and critical. [7]
We’ll explore strictly interpretive research in this section and then review the
critical approach in the next section.
Chesebro and Borisoff have divided interpretive research into three foci: (1)
observing “how people communicate in their own natural environments,” (2)
discovering “when they are guided by their own personal objectives,” and (3)
learning “how they give meaning to their communication, especially…for those
pragmatic objectives that determine and control day-to-day existence.” [8] Let’s
review each aspect one at a time.
Communicating in Natural Environments
One goal of interpretive research is the desire to see how people communicate in
their natural environments rather than in a laboratory setting. Interpretive
researchers in organizational communication ideally want to observe people
going about their daily communicative routines with coworkers in a normal
fashion. [9] Interpretivists believe that communication in one’s natural
environment will be unforced and resemble how people actually communicate
instead of how they perceive their communication “should” be (which is an
inherent problem with some social-scientific research, especially surveys).
Guided by Personal Objectives
Second, interpretivists want to observe participants as they go about their daily
lives doing what they normally would do without altering their behaviors for the
researcher(s). One of the inherent differences between social-scientific research
and interpretive research is that interpretivists do not go into the research
encounter expecting to “see” anything specific. Social scientists set specific
hypotheses, determine how to test those hypotheses, and test the hypotheses;
thus, social scientists go into a research setting expecting to “see” something
very specific. Interpretivists, on the other hand, go into a research encounter to
observe and learn and ultimately see what their participants show them. Instead
of going in with a preset agenda, interpretivists watch how people behave when
the participants are guided by their own personal objectives and not those of the
researcher.
Giving to Their Own Communication
Lastly, interpretivists are interested in how people understand, and give meaning
to, their own communicative behavior. Humans generally behave and
communicate for an array of reasons and thus understand and ascribe a variety of
meanings to their communication. Interpretive researchers are less concerned
with attaching some kind of meaning to participants’ communications than they
are with understanding how participants view their own communicative
behaviors. As an outsider looking in, we can ascribe all kinds of incorrect
meanings to an individual’s communicative behavior. But when we get inside a
communicative interaction from the participant’s point of view, we can begin to
understand why someone is communicating in a specific manner and why that
communication is important to her or him. In an organizational setting, an
interpretive researcher might be interested in understanding how people view the
balance between their work lives and personal lives. Only after engaging with
people in the organization can the researcher start to develop a better idea of how
subjects view the work-life balance. Renee Cowan and Mary F. Hoffman did just
this in their study, reviewed in the accompanying sidebar, of how people view
their work and personal lives.
For more information on conducting interpretive research, two excellent
resources are Lindlof and Taylor’s [10] and Tracy’s [11] books on interpretive
research methods.
Example of Interpretive/Qualitative Research
The Flexible Organization: How Contemporary Employees Construct the
Work/Life Border
By Renee Cowan and Mary F. Hoffman [12]
In this study, the researchers set out to qualitatively examine how individuals
manage their work lives and their personal lives with each other. Specifically,
the researcher had one overarching research question in this study:
RQ1: How do employees of today define the terms flexibility and
permeability in regard to work/life balance?
The researchers recruited 30 participants. All participants had to be at least 18
years of age and currently employed in an organization that provided benefits
(e.g., retirement, stock options, health care). Ninety-nine percent of the
sample were permanent employees, 44 percent were female, and 56 percent
were male. Seventy percent of the sample were married, and 76 percent of the
sample had children.
All the participants agreed to take part in an interview about their
“perceptions and definitions of work/life balance, what balancing work/life
issues meant and looked like in their lives, what their company did that made
it easy or difficult to balance work/life issues, and any stories they had heard
about people using work/life benefits in their company” (p. 39). Ultimately,
the thirty interviews generated 112 single-spaced pages of transcribed text for
analysis.
Overall, the researchers found that the terms flexibility and permeability were
used interchangeably by the participants. Furthermore, these issues can be
broken into four distinct themes: time, space, evaluation, and compensation.
Time flexibility. Employees wanted to have flexibility in how their time was
calculated by the organizations. This included flex-time issues (instead of
coming in at eight and leaving at four, you could come in at ten and leave at
six), and the possibility of examining time over a larger period (not always
counting up forty hours within one work week, but averaged over the entire
year).
Space flexibility. Employees saw space issues as a two-pronged construct:
physical space and mental space. Physical space flexibility is the notion that
individuals should have the ability to telecommute and work from home
when possible. Mental space is the notion that individuals should be allowed
to think about work at home and think about home at work.
Evaluation flexibility. Employees believed that the evaluation of one’s work
should be based on the quality of the work itself and not on the amount of
time an individual spends in the office doing the work.
Compensation flexibility. Employees believed that their quality work should
receive extra financial compensation (bonuses, increase in pay, etc.) or time
compensation (increased number of vacation days, telecommuting options,
etc.).
Critical Approach
Traditional social-scientific research wants to make hypotheses and test them;
interpretive research wants to study how people communicate in a natural
environment and how they understand that communication. Critical research is
less concerned with explaining or understanding organizational communication
than it is with “analyzing values and judging, or criticizing, them.” [13] As the
word “critical” entails, critical research is about seeing how society—or for our
purposes, organizations—exists in a world of power imbalances. Within most
groups, there are those with power and those without. Critical researchers
strongly believe those with power inherently prevent those without from
achieving equality. As such, “critical scholarship tends to stand on the side of
‘weaker’ parties when studying or commenting upon relations of dominance.” [14]
Mats Alvesson and Karen Ashcraft have described critical research in four
dimensions: (1) critically questioning ideologies, institutions, interests, and
identities (the “four I’s”) that dominate a society or organization, are in some
way harmful, and yet are often unchallenged because the power imbalance is
made to seem natural; (2) “denaturalizing” the four I’s and “rearticulating” a new
vision; (3) inspiring social reform by resisting efforts of the four I’s to have
people accept the status quo as natural; and (4) recognizing that “real” conditions
may constrain choice and action in the contemporary organizational world. [15]
Questioning the Four I's
The first dimension in critical research identified by Alvesson and Ashcraft is
critically questioning ideologies, institutions, interests, and identities that appear
dominant and are in some way problematic. [16] Let’s look at each of these four
I’s in turn.
Ideologies
First, ideologies are the beliefs, myths, and doctrines that guide an individual,
group, or organization. Critical researchers examine whether or not ideologies
developed in an organization are fundamentally harmful, especially to workers.
Furthermore, they look to see if specific ideologies are unchallenged. For
example, much that is done within some organizations in the name of “profits”
can subordinate worker interests; yet the ideology that making a profit is good
for management and labor alike can seem only natural and thus be unquestioned.
Critical theorists look at a variety of ideologies that exist (and get
communicated) within an organization to shed light on how ideologies function
to preserve the power and dominance of management.
Institutions
Second, critical researchers examine whether various institutions that are
dominant in society impose ideological structures—such as racism and sexism—
that favor those in power and harm the general worker. Lammers and Barbour
have defined institutions as “constellations of established practices guided by
enduring, formalized, rational beliefs that transcend particular organizations and
situations.” [17] Thus, for example, systems of government, economy, or religion
are institutions. Organizations are, in fact, one of the key institutions of modern
society and therefore draw considerable attention from critical researchers. In
particular, they critique the structures that organizations create to maintain
managerial power. We’ll talk more about this idea in Chapter 4.
Interests
Third, critical researchers strive to expose the various interests that operate
within an organization, even when it outwardly seems stable and unified.
Specifically, critical researchers examine how an individual or group of
individuals maintains its power and advances its agenda, even though that
agenda may be hidden. In fact, the interests of those in power are often not the
same as those without power.
Identities
Lastly, critical researchers examine various identities that could be harmful or
underchallenged. For critical purposes, identity refers to the state of being or
believing that you are the same person or thing described or claimed by those
with power. For example, you might be labeled a “good worker” so you won’t
question the expectation of putting in fifty or sixty hours a week at your job.
Further, use of the “good worker” label may be a veiled threat that “bad
workers” get fired and only “good workers” get promoted. As such, workers
often adopt either the good or bad worker identity without ever realizing that it is
a tool of managerial control.
Denaturalization and Rearticulation
After identifying relevant ideologies, institutions, interests, and identities, a
critical researcher must “articulate an alternative position that challenges
conventional representations and critically probes (rather than taking at face
value) the reported views and experiences of research participants.” [18] In
essence, critical researchers hold up ideologies, institutions, interests, and
identities that have come to seem normal and natural and “denaturalize” them as
creations of people in power that can be altered. This leads to reopening the
discussion and articulating a new vision for ideologies, institutions, interests, and
identities that is more egalitarian and based on a truly informed consensus
between management and workers.
Inspiring Social Reform
After reopening ideologies, institutions, interests, and identities that had
previously been unchallenged, the next step is seeking change at a societal level.
Critical researchers do not stop at merely noticing the problems that exist in
society. They desire to change the power imbalances that exist by helping people
see new ideas, selves, motives, and practices. In the organizational context, the
goal is to emancipate workers or “break away from structures and ideologies that
tend to constrain forms of consciousness into prespecified routes that stifle
imagination.” [19]
Constraints on Choice and Action
While it would be wonderful if modern organizations could be utopian
enterprises where everyone was truly equal, critical researchers realize that
overly revolutionary or radical perspectives on organizing the modern workplace
may not be realistic or helpful. [20] Instead, critical researchers focus on the real
lives and experiences of people in modern organizations. This isn’t to say that
researchers must always be strictly “realistic” but, rather, that critical scholarship
“seeks to acknowledge how realizing ideals such as class, gender, race, and
ecological justice may have drastic consequences for the material functioning of
organizations alongside effects on member subjectivities.” [21]
Overall, critical research offers a proactive perspective on organizational
communication scholarship. For more information on conducting critical
research, we recommend Swartz’s (1996) [22] book on critical research methods
in communication.
Example of Critical Research
The Communicational Basis of the Organizational Text as Macroactor:
A Case Study of Multilevel Marketing Discourse
By Walter J. Carl [23]
In this study, Carl wanted to examine a macroactor (an individual who is
empowered to speak on behalf of a large number of people). In this specific
analysis, the macroactor was a letter to the editor in Forbes magazine by Ken
McDonald, the managing director of Quixtar, Inc. Prior to this letter, Karen J.
Bannan had written an article in Forbes titled “Amway.com” that discussed
how the notorious multilevel-marketing firm Amway was the sister company
of Quixtar, along with the perils of multilevel marketing. McDonald’s letter
in response to the Bannan letter to the editor took issue with the article
because it “ ‘did not provide an accurate picture of the company,’ citing an
inaccurate understanding of the corporate relationship among Amway,
Quixtar, and Alticor, unfair representations of Quixtar business meetings as
‘cult-like,’ and only publishing accounts from dissatisfied ‘Independent
Business Owners’” (p. 23).
The purpose of Carl’s analysis of McDonald’s letter was to demonstrate that
the letter is a clear piece of organizational rhetoric. While the organization
attempts to hide its actions in the voice of a single individual speaking out,
the very act of this letter is clearly a message with backing from the
institution itself. To aid in the development of his argument, McDonald
examined four major issues: “(1) the features of the text that make it a letter
to the editor and not, for example, a press release or news story or some other
kind of text [company logo, date, salutation, name of author, author identity,
etc.]; (2) the issue of authorship and its authorizing function [the signature on
the letter with the company’s logo makes the letter act as a function of the
organization itself]; (3) the presuppositions that, though absent, are necessary
for the text to ‘make sense’ to its audience [the primary presupposition is that
the reporter did not provide a fair, accurate, and objective account of
Quixtar]; and (4) how the text is constructed to orient to these
presuppositions and to build up a rhetorical case imputing motive to Forbes
magazine [the letter systematically explains why Quixtar felt the need to
respond]” (pp. 23–24).
Comparing the Three Traditions
Now that we’ve explained how each of the three methodological traditions
approaches organizational communication, let’s see how they compare side by
side. Table 1.3 charts how social-scientific/quantitative, interpretive/qualitative,
and critical research differ in their respective understandings and approaches to
organizational communication.
Table 1.3 How the Three Methodologies Compare
Methodological Traditions
Issue Social Science Interpretive Critical
Basic Goal
The goal of social scientific
research is to classify
organizational communicative
phenomena, measure them, and
construct statistical models to
explain the phenomena.
The goal of
interpretive research is
a complete, detailed
description of the
organizational
communication
phenomenon
examined.
The goal of critical research is
to examine how organizations
exist in a world of power
imbalances.
View of
Organization
Organizations are naturally
existing phenomena open to
description, prediction, and
control.
Organizations are
social entities with
day-to-day talk, rites,
rituals, and stories that
develop their own
unique culture with
Organizations are inherently
places of power imbalances.
Workers are typically
subjugated by superiors who
have implicit or expressed
aspects similar to other
cultures.
power.
Study
Purpose
Social-scientific researchers
have a very clear idea what
they are examining at the start
of a research study.
Interpretive
researchers generally
only have a vague idea
of what they are
looking for at the start
of a research study and
prefer to view
organizational
phenomena from the
viewpoint of their
participants.
Critical researchers generally
select artifacts from
organizations or about
organizations and analyze
those artifacts in an effort to
see how power is
communicated and utilized
within an organization.
Research
Design
Social-scientific research
designs are very carefully
planned before the data are ever
collected.
Interpretive research
designs develop over
the course of data
collection.
Critical researchers can follow
very stringent ways of
analyzing artifacts or create
the ways of analysis while
examining the data.
Tools of
Research
Scientific/quantitative
researchers use a variety of
measurement devices (e.g.,
questionnaires) as the primary
tool of data collection.
Interpretive/qualitative
researchers collect
their data themselves
through interviews and
observation, so the
researcher is the
primary tool of data
collection.
Critical researchers do not
need data sources beyond the
act (an actual communication
event) or artifact (the record of
a communication event) being
analyzed.
Writing
Style
Numbers and statistics are the
primary forms of data. Writing
tends to be very formal.
Words, pictures, and
artifacts are the
primary forms of data.
Writing tends to be
very narrative.
Acts and artifacts are the
primary forms of data. Writing
tends to be narrative.
Research
Scope
Social-scientific research tends
to be more succinct and quickly
conducted and can be
generalized to larger groups
than the sample utilized in the
study.
Interpretive research
tends to be more
detailed, time
consuming, and
limited to the group
the researcher studied.
Critical research tends to be
detailed in its analysis, but the
findings should help
researchers understand
organizational communication
in an effort to move toward
egalitarian power structures.
View of
Research
Social-scientific research is
more objective and able to
achieve a more detached view
of the communication
phenomena.
Interpretive research is
more subjective and
able to achieve an
insider’s point of view
of the communication
phenomena.
Critical research is highly
subjective to the individual
point of view of the critic. As
such, critics with differing
political persuasions will view
the same acts and artifacts in
differing ways.
Purpose of
Theory
Scientific/quantitative
researchers view theory as the
guiding metaphor for research.
As such, research starts with
theoretical ideas, then poses
and tests hypotheses, and
makes revisions to the theory.
Interpretive/qualitative
data collection ends
with the creation of
hypotheses and the
generation of theory.
Theory can either guide a
critical study or be arrived at
through the process of
analyzing an artifact.
Critiques
A lot of social-scientific
research is prescription based
and looks at skills people need
to have in modern
organizations. However, the
researcher is ultimately
responsible for which skills are
analyzed. Furthermore, there
tends to be little research
examining skills interculturally.
Interpretive research is
often very subjective.
Furthermore, there is a
serious debate as to
whether the
information gained
from one organization
can or should impact
how we view another
organization.
Critical research is often very
subjective and open to
interpretation based on one’s
political persuasion.
Furthermore, critical research
tends to err on the side of those
who are without power and are
in the minority, so the innate
political bias can be
problematic for some.
Wrench, J. S. (2013). Communicating within the modern workplace: Challenges
and prospects. In J. S. Wrench (Ed.), Workplace communication for the 21st
century: Tools and strategies that impact the bottom line: Vol. 1. Internal
workplace communication (pp. 1-38). Santa Barbara, CA: Praeger.
The current state of organizational communication research was suggested in a
2007 study by Patric Spence and Colin Baker. [24] They surveyed 153 scholarly
articles, published between 1998 and 2004 by major communication journals,
that addressed the subject of organizational communication. Their survey,
depicted in Figure 1.4, found that nearly half of the articles presented findings
from quantitative research, while about a third presented qualitative (i.e.,
interpretive and critical) research. Thus, organizational communication research
today attracts a wide range of scholars and methodologies.
Figure 1.4 Types of Research Conducted
KEY TAKEAWAY
The social-scientific/quantitative approach to organizational
communication research starts with the decision to test a specific
theory about organizational communication, which leads to
hypotheses being made, data being gathered and interpreted,
and the data leading to further generalizations that help refine the
original theory. Social scientists typically conduct research using
surveys, experiments, or content analysis that can be analyzed
using statistical reasoning.
The interpretive/qualitative approach to organizational
communication research is concerned not with measuring the
frequency of social phenomena but with interpreting their
meaning. Although many research techniques fall under the
“qualitative” label, they share three foci: observing how
participants communicate in their natural environments rather
than a laboratory setting, observing participants going about their
normal routines without altering their behaviors for the researcher,
and learning the meanings that participants give to their own
communicative behavior. Unlike social scientists who expect to
“see” a specific result, interpretive researchers enter a research
encounter to observe and learn what participants show them.
The critical approach to organizational communication research
seeks to expose the power imbalances in organizations and the
wider society. As such, critical researchers question the “four
I’s”—namely, the ideologies, institutions, interests, and identities
that dominate an organization; are in some way harmful; and yet
are often unchallenged because the power imbalance is made to
seem normal and natural. Critical researchers strive to
“denaturalize” organizational power imbalances, articulate new
possibilities that were previously excluded, and thus inspire
resistance and reform. At the same time, critical researchers
recognize that “real” conditions may constrain choice and action
in the contemporary organizational world.
EXERCISES
1. Create an experiment testing the impact that verbal, nonverbal, or
mediated messages have on whether or not an organization’s
Surveys :
employees or members understand a new organizational policy.
2. Choose an organization to which you belong. The organization
need not be your workplace; a club, community group, or house of
worship will do just as well. Now get a sense of
interpretive/qualitative research by stepping back for a moment, as
best you can, observing with fresh eyes the members’ natural
communication with each other, their normal communicative
routines and behaviors, and the meanings they give to their
communication. What did you observe about communication in your
group that previously you had taken for granted and not even
thought about because it seemed natural to communicate that way?
3. Think again of the organization you chose for Exercise 2 above.
What are its dominant ideology, dominant interest, and dominant
identity? How do these employ communication to preserve
imbalances of power and make those imbalances seem normal and
natural? What ideologies, interests, and identities are silenced or
subjugated by this communication? What resistance is realistically
possible? How could you employ communication to help reform the
organization?
KEY TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
Form of social-scientific research based on a series of questions designed to measure individuals’ personality/communication traits,
Content Analysis:
Experiment :
Identities :
Ideologies :
Institutions :
Interests :
attitudes, beliefs, and/or knowledge on a given subject.
Form of social-scientific research based on taking a series of artifacts and numerically coding information contained within the artifacts to see if a discernible pattern emerges.
Form of social-scientific research based on the manipulation of some facet of a participant’s experience to determine how that participant responds.
The state of being or believing that you are the same person or thing described or claimed by those with power.
The beliefs, myths, and doctrines that guide an individual, group, or organization.
Structures of established practices that transcend any single organization.
Whether or not an individual (or group of individuals) has a clear advantage or advancement of a personal or group agenda that is not necessarily clearly articulated to everyone within an organization.
[1] Spence, P. R., & Baker, C. R. (2007). State of the method: An
examination of levels of analysis, methodology, representation, and
setting in current organizational communication research. Journal of the
Northwest Communication Association, 36, 111–124.
[2] Giorgi, A. (1971). Phenomenology and experimental psychology. In A.
Giorgi, W. F. Fischer, & R. Von Echartsberg (Eds.), Duquesne studies in
phenomenological psychology (Vol. 1, part 1). Pittsburgh, PA: Duquesne
University Press.
[3] Wrench, J. S., Thomas-Maddox, C., Richmond, V. P., & McCroskey, J.
C. (2008). Quantitative research methods for communication: A hands-on
approach. New York, NY: Oxford University Press.
[4] Rizzo, B. J., Wanzer, M. B., & Booth-Butterfield, M. (1999). Individual
differences in managers’ use of humor: Subordinate perceptions of
managers’ humor. Communication Research Reports, 16, 360–369.
[5] Giorgi, A. (1971). Phenomenology and experimental psychology. In A.
Giorgi, W. F. Fischer, & R. Von Echartsberg (Eds.), Duquesne studies in
phenomenological psychology (Vol. 1, part 1). Pittsburgh, PA: Duquesne
University Press, p. 21.
[6] Van Maanen, J. (1979). Reclaiming qualitative methods for
organizational research: A preface. Administrative Science Quarterly, 24,
520–526, p. 520.
[7] Fink, E. J., & Gantz, W. (1996). A content analysis of three mass
communication research traditions: Social science, interpretive studies,
and critical analysis. Journalism & Mass Communication Quarterly, 73,
114–134.
[8] Chesebro, J. W., & Borisoff, D. J. (2008). Interpretive research. In J.
S. Wrench, C. Thomas-Maddox, V. P. Richmond, & J. C. McCroskey
(Eds.), Quantitative research methods for communication: A hands-on
approach (pp. 449–486). New York, NY: Oxford University Press, p. 451.
[9] Yanow, D., & Ybema, S. (2009). Interpretivism in organizational
research: On elephants and blind researchers. In D. A. Buchannan & A.
Bryman (Eds.), The SAGE handbook of organizational research methods
(pp. 39–60). Los Angeles, CA: Sage.
[10] Lindlof, T. R., & Taylor, B. C. (2002). Qualitative communication
research methods (2nd ed.). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
[11] Tracy, S. J. (2013). Qualitative research methods. Malden, MA:
Wiley-Blackwell.
[12] Cowan, R., & Hoffman, M. F. (2007). The flexible organization: How
contemporary employees construct the work/life border. Qualitative
Research Reports in Communication, 8, 37–44.
[13] Fink, E. J., & Gantz, W. (1996). A content analysis of three mass
communication research traditions: Social science, interpretive studies,
and critical analysis. Journalism & Mass Communication Quarterly, 73,
114–134, p. 115.
[14] Alvesson, M., & Ashcraft, K. L. (2009). Critical methodology in
management and organization research. In D. A. Buchannan & A.
Bryman (Eds.), The SAGE handbook of organizational research methods
(pp. 61–77). Los Angeles, CA: Sage, p. 61.
[15] Alvesson, M., & Ashcraft, K. L. (2009). Critical methodology in
management and organization research. In D. A. Buchannan & A.
Bryman (Eds.), The SAGE handbook of organizational research methods
(pp. 61–77). Los Angeles, CA: Sage, p. 63.
[16] Alvesson, M., & Ashcraft, K. L. (2009). Critical methodology in
management and organization research. In D. A. Buchannan & A.
Bryman (Eds.), The SAGE handbook of organizational research methods
(pp. 61–77). Los Angeles, CA: Sage.
[17] Lammers, J.C., & Barbour, J. B. (2006). An institutional theory of
organizational communication. Communication Theory, 16, 356-377; p.
357.
[18] Alvesson, M., & Ashcraft, K. L. (2009). Critical methodology in
management and organization research. In D. A. Buchannan & A.
Bryman (Eds.), The SAGE handbook of organizational research methods
(pp. 61–77). Los Angeles, CA: Sage, p. 64.
[19] Alvesson, M., & Ashcraft, K. L. (2009). Critical methodology in
management and organization research. In D. A. Buchannan & A.
Bryman (Eds.), The SAGE handbook of organizational research methods
(pp. 61–77). Los Angeles, CA: Sage, p. 64.
[20] Alvesson, M., & Ashcraft, K. L. (2009). Critical methodology in
management and organization research. In D. A. Buchannan & A.
Bryman (Eds.), The SAGE handbook of organizational research methods
(pp. 61–77). Los Angeles, CA: Sage.
[21] Alvesson, M., & Ashcraft, K. L. (2009). Critical methodology in
management and organization research. In D. A. Buchannan & A.
Bryman (Eds.), The SAGE handbook of organizational research methods
(pp. 61–77). Los Angeles, CA: Sage, p. 65.
[22] Swartz, O. (1996). Conducting socially responsible research: Critical
theory, neo-pragmatism, and rhetorical inquiry. Thousand Oaks, CA:
Sage.
[23] Carl, W. J. (2005). The communicational basis of the organizational
text as macroactor: A case study of multilevel marketing discourse.
Qualitative Research Reports in Communication, 6, 21–29.
[24] Spence, P. R., & Baker, C. R. (2007). State of the method: An
examination of level of analysis, methodology, representation, and setting
in current organizational communication research. Journal of the
Northwest Communication Association, 36, 111–124.
1.5 Chapter Exercises
REAL-WORLD CASE STUDY
Around the world, this nonprofit has many different names: in
Albania, Rruga Sesam; in Egypt, Alam Simsim; in India, Galli Galli
Sim Sim; in Indonesia, Jalan Sesama; in Israel, Rechov Sumsum; in
Palestine, Shara’a Simsim; in Serbia, Ulica Sezam; in South Africa,
Takalani Sesame; and in the United States, Sesame Street. In all,
twenty versions of Sesame Street are produced through the
Sesame Workshop, the nonprofit organization behind Sesame
Street. The goal of the Sesame Workshop is to improve the lives of
children and their societies in four specific domains: health and
wellness, respect and understanding, literacy and numeracy, and
emotional well-being.
In the 2006 documentary The World According to Sesame Street,
the filmmakers introduce you to a world coping with violence
(Kosovo), AIDS (South Africa), poverty (India), and gender
inequality (Egypt). And all over the globe, the Sesame Workshop
teaches students their alphabets and numbers because the Sesame
Workshop realizes that the only way to ensure a child’s future is
through education.
1. Of the four types of organizations discussed by Blau and Scott,
which type of organization is the Sesame Workshop? Why?
2. The Sesame Workshop is constantly attempting to address local
issues with their international programs. If you were going to
create a Sesame Street for corporations, what lessons do you
think they need to learn?
3. If you were producing a new Sesame Street in Iraq, what kind of
inputs from the environment do you think you would need?
REAL-WORLD CASE STUDY
Erik Lie and Randall Heron, two University of Iowa associate
professors in finance, conducted a research study in 2005 that
determined many CEOs were manipulating their stock-option
accounting rules in order to increase their annual salaries. In fact,
Lie and Heron found that upward of 29 percent of all public
corporations had major stock-option irregularities. Basically,
organizations were delaying their stock paperwork for months in an
attempt to look back and select the most lucrative dates for
reporting, which is a violation of federal law. Lie and Heron found a
way to actually determine whether or not an organization was
perpetrating this type of fraud. When the researchers realized what
they had found, they contacted the United States Securities and
Exchange Commission and showed the Wall Street Journal how to
use options records to look for fraud.
As a result of their research, Lie and Heron established a consulting
firm that examines whether accounting irregularities are simple
paperwork mistakes or something more fraudulent. The two make
more than $400 an hour examining corporations’ accounting records
and working with plaintiffs’ lawyers as expert witnesses. In a world
where CEOs are often being led out of their corporations in
handcuffs, organizations and lawyers are forced to take Lie and
Heron’s research findings very seriously.
1. While this specific case study examines accounting problems, do
you think there are any communication problems that can lead to
lawsuits?
2. Do you think a university researcher should be able to financially
profit from her or his research?
3. While more than two thousand organizations have been found to
have options irregularities, Lie and Heron suspect that some of
those organizations may be innocent. Could putting their research
out for the public have a negative effect on innocent
organizations? Do you think putting innocent organizations under
more scrutiny in order to find guilty organizations is justifiable?
REAL-WORLD CASE STUDY
On October 9, 2007, Harris Interactive found that in the United
States (32 percent) and Spain (28 percent), the most important
aspect of one’s job was salary. While salary was found to be
important elsewhere in Europe, Great Britain (33 percent), France
(30 percent), Italy (29 percent), and Germany (25 percent),
Europeans found the interesting nature of their jobs more important:
Great Britain (36 percent), France (44 percent), Italy (37 percent),
and Germany (44 percent). In the United States (28 percent) and
Spain (25 percent), lower percentages of people found the
interesting nature of their job to be the most important.
The study also asked the international participants to what degree
they liked their current bosses. In the United States (65 percent),
Great Britain (56 percent), and France (52 percent), the majority of
individuals polled liked their bosses. However, in Italy (48 percent),
Spain (34 percent), and Germany (47 percent), the majority of
individuals polled did not like their bosses.
1. Why do you think individuals in the United States and Spain
consider salary more important than the interesting nature of the
job?
2. Why do you think individuals in Great Britain, France, Italy, and
Germany find the interesting nature of the job more important
than their salary?
3. Does it surprise you that individuals in the United States are
considerably more satisfied with their bosses than the other
countries polled?
END-OF-CHAPTER ASSESSMENT
1. Joana works for an organization that prides itself on openness and transparency. However, the organization tends to actually insulate itself from what’s going on with its various competitors, its local community, and even governmental regulations. Based on this information, what can you say accurately about Joana’s organization’s relationship with its external environment?
a. the organization has open boundaries b. the organization has closed boundaries c. the organization has a tall hierarchy d. the organization has a flat hierarchy e. the organization has limited outputs
2. Stewart sat down with a set of spreadsheet data and quickly realized that if his coffee shop was going to last the summer, he really needed to spend more time focusing on business from tourists because they were his only real potential for growth. Which of Edward Gross’s organizational goals is Stewart faced with?
a. output goals b. adaptation goals c. management goals d. motivation goals e. positional goals
3. Diana works for an organization that on the surface says it’s very creative and always looking for new ways of doing business. However, every time Diana brings up a new idea she’s immediately shot down with a “but we’ve always done it this way” attitude from her management. Which of the dialectical tensions of control is Diana facing?
a. systemization vs. autonomy b. agreement vs. dissent c. conventionality vs. innovation d. organization vs. self-focused e. organizational vs. individual rights
4. Who is considered to be the Father of Organizational Communication?
a. Elton Mayo b. Chester Barnard c. Lee Thayer d. Fredric M. Jablin e. W. Charles Redding
5. Which of the three methodologies used by organizational communication scholars uses survey, experiments, and content analyses to examine organizational communication phenomena?
a. social-scientific b. qualitative c. interpretive d. critical e. rhetorical
Answer Key
1. b
2. b
3. c
4. e
5. a
Chapter 2
Organizational Communication Ethics
© Thinkstock/iStock
Why Ethics?
In this chapter, we examine how the philosophical world of ethics can be applied
to organizational communication. When people hear the word ethics used in
modern society, many different images and incidents quickly come to mind.
Sadly, the twenty-first century has already been plagued with many ethical
lapses in the business sector. Turn to any major global news station, newspaper,
magazine, or podcast and you’re likely to hear about some business that is
currently in a state of crisis due to lapses in ethical judgment. Table 2.1 contains
a short list of organizations and their various ethical lapses in judgment.
Table 2.1 Modern Ethical Lapses in Organizations
Organization Ethical Lapse
Arthur Andersen Accounting fraud; shredding documents wanted in a criminal investigation
Boeing Industrial espionage
Bridgestone-
Firestone Delayed a recall of defective tires
Catholic Church Sex abuse and cover-up
Coca-Cola Took groundwater from local farmers in India
Enron Accounting fraud
Halliburton Overbilled for products and services
Martha Stewart,
Inc.
CEO convicted of insider trading
McDonald’s Eight individuals provided family and friends with winning tickets in McDonald’s
sweepstakes promotion
Merrill Lynch Lied to investors
Napster Digital copyright violations
Parmalat Accounting fraud
Sanlu Group Knowingly distributed tainted baby formula
Tyco CEO convicted of embezzling
US military Abused prisoners of war in Iraq and Afghanistan
WorldCom Accounting fraud
Xerox Exaggerated revenues
In this chapter, four distinct areas of ethical understanding will be explored: the
nature of ethics, business ethics, communication ethics, and organizational
communication ethics.
2.1 Nature of Ethics
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
1. Define the term ethics and how it relates to both means and ends.
2. Explain the four different ethical frameworks discussed in the
ethical matrix.
3. Differentiate among the eleven philosophical perspectives of
ethics and how they apply to both business ethics and
communication ethics.
According to the Oxford English Dictionary, the word ethics derives from the
Greek word ethos, which means the nature or disposition of a culture. [1] Ethics
is further characterized as both a field of study concerned with moral principles
and as the moral principles that govern or influence human behavior. Parhizgar
and Parhizgar define ethics as the “critical analysis of cultural values to
determine the validity of their vigorous rightness or wrongness in terms of two
major criteria: truth and justice. Ethics is examining the relation of an
individual to society, to the nature, and or to God. How do people make ethical
decisions? They are influenced by how they perceive themselves in relation to
goodness and/or excellence.” [2]
Based on this definition, the study of ethics is “concerned with cultural value
systems that are operable, either with intending to do something or actually
doing something in the realm of goodness.” [3] As we will see in this chapter,
determining “goodness” is not always black and white. To help illustrate this
point, consider the following four scenarios below. In an effort to win a new
client for your business, you choose to do one of the following:
Scenario 1: Deliver a well-supported presentation demonstrating that your
company is better able than your competitor’s to help the prospective client
expand its market share; the client signs a contract and you help increase its
market share.
Scenario 2: Lie during a presentation to impress the prospective client, who
then signs a contract with your company; ultimately, you cause the client to
lose market share.
Scenario 3: Lie during a presentation to impress the prospective client, who
then signs a contract with your company; despite the lie, you help the client
expand its market share.
Scenario 4: Deliver a well-supported presentation arguing that your
business is better able than your competitor’s to help the prospective client
expand its market share; after the client signs a contract, however, you must
acknowledge that a competitor is actually a better fit for the client and, in
fact, you are causing the client to lose market share.
Each scenario can be broken down into two parts: means and ends. According to
McCroskey, Wrench, and Richmond, means are the tools or behaviors employed
to achieve a desired outcome, while ends are the outcomes that one desires to
achieve. [4] Both means and ends can be evaluated as either good or bad.
Remember, Parhizgar and Parhizgar’s definition of ethics involves the intent to
behave, and to actually behave, in the realm of goodness. [5] McCroskey took
this a step further to suggest that, in addition to the intent and the behavior, the
goodness of the outcome is also a vital ethical consideration. [6] From this ethical
framework (later expanded by McCroskey, Wrench, and Richmond [7]) we can
derive the ethical matrix shown in Figure 2.1. The matrix combines “good” and
“bad,” plus “means” and “ends,” to produce four possibilities we have labeled
Ethical Behavior, Unethical Behavior, Machiavellian Ethic, and Subjective
Ethic.
Figure 2.1 The Ethical Matrix
Good Means/Good End: Ethical Behavior
Scenario 1 is an example of a “good” mean leading to a “good” end, or what is
termed ethical behavior in the ethical matrix. In this case, you developed a clear
argument based on facts to persuade a client (means). As a result of signing with
your company, the client increased its market share (end). In essence, you had a
good means (factually supported argument) that led to a good end (increased
market share). Behavior that contains both a good means and a good end is
considered ethical behavior.
Bad Means/Bad End: Unethical Behavior
Scenario 2 illustrates a “bad” means leading to a “bad” end, or what is termed
unethical behavior in the ethical matrix. To gain the contract you lied to the
client (means). After the client was duped into signing with your company, the
client lost market share (end). In this case, you had a bad means (lying to the
client) that led to a bad end (decreased market share). When a bad means leads
to a bad end, the behavior is considered unethical.
The first two quadrants in the ethical matrix are obvious and easily discerned in
the world of business. Often, however, determining the ethical nature of behavior
is not as clear as in the first two examples. The next two examples provide the
last two variations in the ethical matrix.
Bad Means/Good End: Machiavellian Ethic
Scenario 3 describes a “bad” means that leads to a “good” end, or what is termed
the Machiavellian ethic in the ethical matrix. In this case, you purposely lied to
the client in an effort to win the contract. Despite this, the client actually gained
market share. Here we have a situation where there was a bad means (lying to
the client) that led to a good end (increased market share). When a bad means
leads to a good end, we refer to this as the Machiavellian ethic. The term
Machiavellian ethic derives its name from Niccolò Machiavelli, whose book The
Prince was written in 1513. The Prince was written during a dark period in
Machiavelli’s life after he had been imprisoned and tortured for his alleged role
in a conspiracy to assassinate a member of the ruling Medici family. Banished to
the Tuscan countryside, Machiavelli set about writing a treatise to help the
Medicis stay in power. While some ethicists claim that a bad means is always
unethical, others claim that “the end justifies the means.” Machiavelli argued in
The Prince that, while leaders should, if possible, avoid the hatred of their
subjects, it is better for leaders to be feared than loved. Since Machiavelli
believed that a leader’s primary job is to foster order and protect the people, a
prince must use any means necessary to achieve those ends. Although
Machiavelli never actually wrote “the end justifies the means,”
Machiavellianism is closely aligned with this general notion.
Good Means/Bad End: Subjective Ethic
Scenario 4 depicts a “good” means that leads to a “bad” end; this is termed a
subjective ethic in the ethical matrix. In this case, you presented a clear case to
the client based on your interpretation of the facts (means). But the client, after
signing with you, lost market share (end). When a good means (clear argument)
leads to a bad end (decreased market share), we refer to this as a “subjective”
ethic because your intent (as the presenter) is ultimately known only to you. On
the one hand, you may have honestly believed your interpretation of the facts,
even though the eventual outcome was not as you hoped. On the other hand, you
may have “spun” the facts to your advantage, despite knowing that lost market
share was a possible outcome if your interpretation proved wrong. Indeed, it is
even possible that you honestly presented the facts to the client, but all along
intended to win the contract and then undermine the client’s market position. So
your intention in making a clearly presented argument might alternatively have
been sincere, self-serving, or malicious. This is why we call this ethical situation
subjective, because it depends on the person’s intent.
While a discussion of means and ends is a helpful way to frame ethical thoughts,
many philosophical traditions have explored the nature of ethics. Table 2.2 lists
eleven major philosophical perspectives that have been used to determine what
is and is not ethical.
Table 2.2 Major Ethical Perspectives
Ethical Perspective Basic Premises Business Application Communication
Application
Altruism
The standard is based on
doing what is best or good for
others.
Ethical business behavior
must be good for other
people.
Communicative
behavior must lead
to a good end for
the receiver.
Categorical
Imperative/Deontology
The standard is based on the
notion that moral duties
should be obeyed without
exception. This perspective is
very clear on what is good and
what is bad—no middle
ground.
There are clear business
behaviors that are and are
not ethical, so all
individuals should avoid
behaving unethically in
business.
There are some
communicative
behaviors that are
never ethical (e.g.,
deception).
Communitarianism
The standard is based on
whether behavior helps to
restore the social fabric of
society.
Business must behave in a
manner that helps the
social fabric of society.
Communicative
behavior must help
the social fabric of
society.
Cultural Relativism
The standard is an individual’s
cultural or legal system of
values. These standards differ
from culture to culture.
(1) The law determines
business ethics.
(2) One’s nationalistic
culture determines what is
ethical.
(3) One’s organizational
culture determines what is
ethical.
Our legal system
and
cultures/cocultures
define ethical
communication.
Ethical Egoism
The standard is an individual’s
self-interest. Emphasis is on
how one should behave; it
encourages people to look out
People in business should
behave in whatever
manner is most effective
to achieve their self-
People should
communicate in
whatever manner is
most effective for
achieving their
for their own self-interests. interests. communicative
goals.
Justice
The standard is based on three
principles of justice: (1) each
person has a right to basic
liberties; (2) everyone ought
to be given the same chance to
qualify for offices and jobs;
and (3) when inequalities
exist, a priority should be
given to meeting the needs of
the disadvantaged.
Business decisions should
be made on how the
decisions will affect all
relevant stakeholders’
equally. However, when
stakeholders’ needs are in
conflict, priority should be
given to meeting the needs
of those in subjugated
stakeholder groups.
People should
communicate in a
manner that is
consistent with a
range of
stakeholders.
Nihilism
Ethics innately prevent
individuals from creating new
ideas and values that
challenge the status quo, so
individuals of superior
intellect should disavow any
attempt by others to subject
them to an ethical perspective.
Smart business people
should not be hampered in
their behavior by any
archaic or contemporary
notions of good and bad
business behavior.
Smart
communicators
know that what
matters is
achieving one’s
communicative
goals, so they
should not adhere
to any prescribed
notions of good
and bad
communicative
behavior.
People in business People actually
communicate in
Psychological Egoism
The standard is an individual’s
self-interest. Emphasis is on
how one actually behaves;
everything we do is influenced
by self-interested motives.
actually behave in
whatever manner is most
effective to achieve their
self-interests.
whatever manner is
most effective for
achieving their
communicative
goals.
Social Relativism
The standard is the interests of
an individual’s friends, group,
or community.
People in business should
behave in a manner
consistent with the
interests of their social
networks and
communities.
People in business
should
communicate in a
manner consistent
with the interests of
their social
networks and
communities.
Subjectivism
The standard is based on an
individual’s personal opinion
of moral judgment. For this
reason, perceptions of ethics
differ from person to person.
Whatever an individual in
business determines is
ethical for her or his
behavior is ethical for that
individual.
Individual
communicators
determine what is
and is not ethical
from their own
individual vantage
point.
Utilitarianism
The standard is the greatest
good for the greatest number
of people.
People in business should
behave in a manner that
does the greatest amount
of good for the greatest
People should
communicate in a
manner that does
the greatest amount
of good for the
number of people. greatest number of
people.
The eleven philosophical traditions described in Table 2.2 illustrate both the
great variety of ethical perspectives and that philosophers do not agree on any
single ethical system. [8] The rest of this chapter will focus on three contexts
where ethical thought has been applied: business, human communication, and
organizational communication.
KEY TAKEAWAY
The term ethics is a complicated one and has been defined by a
wide range of scholars over the years. Ultimately, ethics is an
examination of whether an individual uses “good” or “bad” means
in an attempt to achieve a desired outcome that could be deemed
“good” or “bad.” As simplistic as this may sound, actually studying
and determining whether behavior is ethical can be a daunting
task.
The ethical matrix examines the intersections of means and ends
by examining four distinct categories where ethical behavior may
occur. First, behavior is deemed ethical if an individual uses a
good means to achieve a good end. Second, behavior is deemed
unethical if an individual uses a bad means to achieve a bad end.
Third, behavior is referred to as the Machiavellian ethic when an
individual uses a bad means to achieve a good end. Lastly, when
an individual uses a good means to achieve a bad end, the
behavior is referred to as the subjective ethic.
There are many different philosophical traditions in the study of
ethics. Table 2.2 outlines eleven different ethical perspectives.
This table briefly explains each philosophical perspective and
then demonstrates how it can be applied both in a business
context and to organizational communication specifically.
EXERCISES
1. Look at a recent copy of Bloomberg Businessweek, the Wall
Street Journal, Fast Company, Forbes, or any other business-
oriented publication. Find articles that specifically discuss ethical
areas in modern business. How would you apply the definition of
ethics to these articles?
2. Look at a recent copy of Bloomberg Businessweek, the Wall
Street Journal, Fast Company, Forbes, or other business-oriented
publication. Find examples of each of the four different types of
ethical possibilities described by the ethical matrix.
3. Look at the list of major ethical lapses in business discussed at
the beginning of this chapter. Analyze one of the ethical lapses
listed, using three of the eleven philosophical perspectives on
ethics. How does filtering one’s ethical framework based on a
specific philosophical perspective alter how you view those ethical
Machiavellian Ethic:
Ends :
Ethical Behavior:
Ethics :
Means :
Subjective Ethic:
Unethical Behavior:
lapses?
KEY TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
Component of the ethical matrix in which an individual employs bad means that lead to a good end.
Component of ethical analysis in which one examines the outcomes that an individual or group of individuals desires to achieve.
Component of the ethical matrix in which an individual employs good means that lead to a good end.
The philosophical study and evaluation of the means and ends of human behavior.
Component of ethical analysis in which one examines the tools or behaviors that an individual or group of individual employs to achieve a desired outcome.
Component of the ethical matrix in which an individual employs good means that lead to a bad end.
Component of the ethical matrix in which an individual employs bad means that lead to a bad end.
[1] Ethics. The Oxford English Dictionary. (1963). Oxford, UK: Clarendon.
[2] Parhizgar, K. D., & Parhizgar, R. (2006). Multicultural business ethics
and global managerial moral reasoning. Lanham, MD: University Press of
America, p. 77.
[3] Parhizgar, K. D., & Parhizgar, R. (2006). Multicultural business ethics
and global managerial moral reasoning. Lanham, MD: University Press of
America, p. 77.
[4] McCroskey, J. C., Wrench, J. S., & Richmond, V. P. (2003). Principles
of public speaking. Indianapolis, IN: College Network.
[5] Parhizgar, K. D., & Parhizgar, R. (2006). Multicultural business ethics
and global managerial moral reasoning. Lanham, MD: University Press of
America, p. 77.
[6] McCroskey, J. C. (2006). An introduction to rhetorical communication:
A Western rhetorical perspective (9th ed.). Boston: Allyn & Bacon.
[7] McCroskey, J. C., Wrench, J. S., & Richmond, V. P. (2003). Principles
of public speaking. Indianapolis, IN: College Network.
[8] Lewis, P. V., & Speck, H. E. (1990). Ethical orientations for
understanding business ethics. Journal of Business Communication,
27(3), 213–232.
2.2 Business Ethics
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
1. Identify Cherrington and Cherrington’s typology of ethical lapses
in business.
2. Understand how Cherrington and Cherrington’s typology of ethical
lapses applies to the modern workplace.
3. Explain how computer-mediated social networking and
generational differences impact ethics in the modern organization.
© Thinkstock/iStock
Table 2.1 lists a number of ethical lapses perpetrated by various organizations
during the first decade of the twenty-first century. Business ethics is such a hot
topic that, since 2000, more than a thousand books have been written with the
phrase “business ethics” in the title. One could easily be misled, then, into
thinking that the idea of ethical business behavior and practices is a creation of
the twenty-first century. But discussion of ethical and unethical business
behavior is as old as the marketplace itself. Closer to our own day, the Center for
Business Ethics at Bentley College was founded in 1976 and a year later held the
first academic conference on the subject. [1] The published proceedings of that
conference became the first text on business ethics and an international
bestseller. [2] In 1982, the Journal of Business Ethics was launched. We mention
this brief history to show that the idea of ethics and ethical violations in
organizations is not a new academic endeavor or corporate phenomenon. To
more fully understand the subject of business ethics, we will examine the most
common ethical lapses in organizations and present a series of survey results that
suggest the current state of business ethics.
Typology of Ethical Lapses
While most organizations believe that their specific ethical dilemmas are unique,
Cherrington and Cherrington found that most organizations face very similar
ethical dilemmas. [3] In so doing, they developed a typology, or classification
system, of twelve specific issues in business. The following ethical issues are
illustrative statistics taken from the annual Deloitte Ethics & Workplace Survey [4] and from surveys conducted by the Ethics Resource Center: [5]
1. Stealing ranges from taking a box of pencils home for personal use, to
conducting personal business (such as making phone calls, playing
computer games, and chatting on Facebook) on company time, to skimming
millions of dollars from corporate accounts.
2. Lying may be rationalized as a way to get a job, keep a job, or win a
promotion. Some occupations even encourage deception as an integral part
of the work. [6]
3. Fraud and deceit, which Cherrington and Cherrington distinguish from
general lying, is the attempt to create a false impression by representing
yourself or your organization as something it is not. For example, you
might pretend to be successful, when in reality, you are not, to gain the
confidence of a potential employer or client. This ethical lapse can also be
passive, as when you fail to set the record straight when someone praises
you for work done by others or when someone blames others for errors you
made.
4. Bribes, payoffs, and kickbacks are attempts to influence decision makers
into making decisions that favor the party who is offering the payments.
Such influence buying creates a conflict of interest for the decision maker,
who has allowed personal interests to interfere with professional judgments. [7]
5. Hiding versus divulging information raises a significant ethical question,
as those who possess information can greatly impact an organization by
their decisions about what to do with that information. Would you sell a
client what is technically the “latest” version of your product, even though
you know a better version is about to be released? If you were hired by a
competing company, would you give them inside information about your
old company?
6. Cheating is the attempt to gain an unfair advantage and thus the power to
control the outcome of a situation. Consider three examples: a company that
exploits its monopoly on a lifesaving drug, a CEO who receives a
multimillion-dollar bonus when hundreds of company employees are being
laid off, and an executive who promotes her son when other employees are
more qualified. In all three of these situations, people are taking unfair
advantage of the positions they hold.
7. Personal decadence was much in the news during the 2008 recession
when, for example, auto industry executives flew their corporate jets to
Washington and then asked Congress for billions of dollars to bail out their
companies. Yet personal decadence can be an ethical lapse for ordinary
employees who purposely work at a slow pace, use drugs or alcohol at
work, or otherwise indulge themselves at their organization’s expense.
8. Interpersonal abuse encompasses “physical violence, sexual harassment,
emotional abuse, abuse of one’s position, racism, and sexism” between
individuals in the workplace. [8]
9. Organizational abuse concerns the organization’s treatment of its
members, whereas interpersonal abuse occurs between individuals.
Examples include “inequity in compensation, performance appraisals that
destroy self-esteem, transfers or time pressures that destroy family life,
terminating people through no fault of their own, encouraging loyalty and
not rewarding it, and creating the myth that the organization will
benevolently protect or direct an employee’s career.” [9]
10. Rule violations in organizations can be a gray area. In society,
transgressing rules such as religious commandments and government laws
often has clear consequences. But in organizations, rules are typically
handed down in the form of an employee manual. At times, the
organization may benefit if the rules are “flexibly” applied; at other times, a
“zero-tolerance” approach is best. Many companies “bend” the rules on
personal phone calls a bit if the call is necessary and the employee keeps it
brief; no organization, however, should tolerate sexual harassment.
11. Abetting unethical acts occurs when an individual knows that another
person intends to commit, or has committed, an ethical violation and
decides to become an “accessory” by passively doing nothing or actively
going along. Those who find themselves in the accessory position face the
ethical dilemma of whether or not to report the violation.
12. Moral balance is a philosophical concept that refers to the possibility that a
good outcome may later have bad repercussions. For example, an
organization might introduce a product that can save thousands of lives
(primary outcome) but in the process will harm the ecosystem and make it
less able to sustain the next generations (secondary outcome). On the other
hand, a decision not to introduce the product will preserve the ecosystem
for future generations (primary outcome) but lead to a substantial loss of
life in the present (secondary outcome). How do you decide which option is
ethical? Decisions involving moral balance are often the most difficult to
make.
Social Networking and Generational Differences
Thus far we have examined basic issues related to business ethics and the
various types of ethical violations that commonly occur. Recent literature on the
subject of business ethics has focused on two emerging areas of concern: social
networking and generational differences.
The Ethics of Social Networking
With the invention of Web 2.0 technologies like YouTube, Facebook, and blogs,
organizations have faced ethical issues that previously did not exist. People have
always talked about their organization, and some would even go so far as to
publish articles in a local newspaper about an organization. However, with
today’s social media, the ability to easily and quickly write and/or say negative
things about one’s organization or to divulge private organizational information
to a wide public has grown exponentially. The 2012 National Business Ethics
Survey indicates that more than 70 percent of workers today engage in some
form of online social networking activity at work (among these workers, 95
percent are active during work hours on Facebook, 43 percent on Twitter, 37
percent on LinkedIn, 37 percent on Google+). [10] The Ethics Resource Center
breaks social networkers into three workplace categories: active (10 percent of
employees who spend at least 30 percent of their workday on social networking
sites), moderate (62 percent who spend less than 30 percent of their workday),
and nonwork social networkers (28 percent who do not use social media at
work). Most employers would regard excessive social networking on company
time as stealing from the organization. Jason Lundy [11] has listed eleven
concerns related to the ethics of social media use in the workplace:
1. Misuse of work time
2. Misuse of company equipment
3. Security risks to company computer systems, network, or data
4. Disclosure of confidential or other nonpublic information
5. Disparaging, harassing, or bullying coworkers online
6. Conflicts of interest (e.g., blogging about a product without mentioning you
work for the company; putting out information that makes it appear as if
you are communicating on behalf of the organization when you are not)
7. Unfair competition (e.g., posting Amazon reviews for your organization’s
products and services without saying you work for the organization;
disparaging a competitor’s products and services online without saying
whom you work for)
8. Records maintenance (e.g., sending work-related e-mails from a personal e-
mail account; using social media to distribute organizational
communications)
9. Espionage or fraud (e.g., acting like a customer with a competitor to see
what that organization is doing; posting false reviews of a competitor’s
products and services online without saying whom you work for)
10. Privacy (e.g., posting personal information of a colleague, client, or other
stakeholder; forwarding internal organizational communications without
permission)
11. Damage to reputation (e.g., disparaging your organization online in a way
that causes financial harm, recruitment problems, or other negative effects)
Although 79 percent of workers are employed in organizations that block access
to some (or all) social networking sites, people still find ways to access them
through their personal devices. Those individuals who are active social
networkers tend to be more lax in other ethical areas as well (e.g., retaining
confidential work documents that could be used in a future job, using company
credit cards for personal reasons, taking home company software). [12] As the
idea of keeping our personal lives private diminishes in society as a whole,
companies fear that employees may start to take a similar view of their
organizations’ privacy.
Although social media raises new ethical issues, the technology can be used for
work-related purposes in beneficial ways. Many organizations promote the use
of social networking for training, professional development, marketing, and
other purposes. The Ethics Resource Center [13] has identified a number of ways
organizations can positively utilize social networking to enhance their interaction
with various stakeholders:
Present a positive brand to external stakeholders
Externally promote new products, programs, and/or services
Demonstrate what the organization is doing positively for its community
Announce new business deals and ventures
Interact with customers/clients to better handle customer complaints
Recruit potential new clients and organizational members
Build internal loyalty among organizational members
Facilitate teamwork
Communicate employee achievements, performance, and personal
milestones
Allow leaders to directly communicate organizational values to members
Foster discussions of organizational ethics
From this list, you can see that the ethics of social networking are not black and
white. There is no clear-cut, one-size-fits-all model for handling social
networking ethics within the workplace. However, organizations today must
develop clear policies that describe and explain what constitutes ethical and
unethical social networking in the workplace.
Generational Differences and Business Ethics
Before too long, we will have five different generations of people working in the
modern organizational environment—and potentially five ways of approaching
work. [14] Although Generation Z has not entered the workforce for the most
part, we are starting to get an idea of how this postmillennial generation will
view work. [15] Table 2.3 presents a snapshot of how each of the five generations
views work.
Table 2.3 Generational Differences at Work
Generation
Workplace
Characteristic
Traditionalists
(Greatest
Generation)
1922–45
Baby Boomers
1946–64
Generation X
1965–80
Generation
Y
(Millennials)
1981–2000
Z
(iGeneration,
Plurals)
2000+
Work is a(n)… Obligation Adventure Challenge Means to an
end
Expression of
one’s self
Work values
Dedication, hard
work, respect for
authority
Team-oriented,
personal growth,
involvement
Diversity,
technoliteracy,
self-reliance
Optimism,
confidence,
sociability
Pleased,
energized,
indifferent
Communication Formal memo In person Direct, to the
point
E-mail, voice
mail Continuous
Motivation To be respected To be valued Freedom Environment Balance
View of
authority Respectful Love/hate Unimpressed Polite Respectful
Leadership by Hierarchy Consensus Competence Teamwork Independence
Based on research by Zemke, R., Raines, C., & Filipczak, B. (2013).
Generations at work: Managing the clash of Boomers, Gen Xers, and Gen Yers
in the workplace (2nd ed.). New York, NY: AMACOM; and Frank N. Magid
Associates. (2012, April 30). The first generation of the twenty-first century: An
introduction to the Pluralist generation. Retrieved from http://magid.com
The generations’ differing approaches to work naturally drive some differences
in how each views business ethics. Figure 2.2 illustrates some of these
differences that exist between the Traditionalists, Boomers, Gen Xers, and
Millennials. You’ll notice that this table does not have information about
Generation Z, because they were not actively in the workforce when this study
was published in 2013.
Figure 2.2 Generational Differences at Work
Note on reading table: Colors indicate statistically significant differences. Green indicates most favorable
result; yellow is more favorable than red, and less favorable than green; and red is the least favorable
result. Light gray indicates the result is equal to all other groups.
Reprinted with permission of the Ethics Resource Center © 2013.
As you can see from this chart, differences exist among the generations about
ethics in the workplace. No one generation is “right.” Nevertheless,
organizations today face the challenge of promulgating codes of ethics that all
generations will support. Not an easy task! Still, every generation would likely
agree that organizational leaders must model the ethical behavior they expect of
everyone else.
KEY TAKEAWAY
Cherrington and Cherrington proposed a typology of twelve
ethical lapses that are common in modern business: (1) stealing,
(2) lying, (3) false impressions, (4) conflicts of interest, (5)
hiding/divulging information, (6) cheating, (7) personal
decadence, (8) interpersonal abuse, (9) organizational abuse,
(10) rule violations, (11) abetting unethical acts, and (12) moral
balance.
Surveys have found examples of all twelve ethical lapses. While
some lapses are clearly more common (e.g., 77 percent of
participants admitted to stealing corporate time by using
technology for personal uses), others did not appear to be
frequent ethical lapses (e.g., 6 percent took credit for someone
else’s work, 4 percent misused corporate finances).
Social media use in the workplace is an emerging issue in
business ethics. Excessive use lowers productivity and exposes
the organization to security risks. As employees expect less
privacy in their personal lives, companies fear their employees
may not fully respect expectations of organizational privacy. At the
same time, however, many organizations encourage social media
use at work for purposes of work-related training and professional
networking. Organizations today must develop clear policies for
what constitutes ethical and unethical social media use at work.
We now have five generations in the workplace: traditionalists
(born between 1922 and 1945), baby boomers (1946–64),
Generation X (1965–80), Generation Y (1982–2000), and
Generation Z (after 2000). Each generation has different views
about the meaning of work and its place in their lives, which may
drive different views of workplace ethics. Organizations must
develop codes of ethics, however, that all generations will
support. This process necessarily begins as leaders model the
ethical behaviors they expect of everyone else.
EXERCISES
1. Which of the twelve ethical lapses in modern business described
Moral Balance:
by Cherrington and Cherrington contain communication
components?
2. Of these ethical lapses, which one is the most pervasive in your
current workplace? Which one is the least pervasive? If you were
the CEO of your organization, what would you do to combat the
ethical lapses you identified as most systematic?
3. Look at a recent copy of Bloomberg Businessweek, the Wall
Street Journal, Forbes, or any other business publication. Find
examples of the twelve ethical lapses discussed by Cherrington
and Cherrington.
4. If you were a CEO, how would you go about developing a
company policy for social media use?
5. If you were a CEO, how would you go about developing a
company code of ethics that all five generations in the workplace
—Traditionalists, Baby Boomers, and Generations X, Y, and Z—
would support?
KEY TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
The philosophical debate that occurs when an individual is faced with the possibility that a good primary outcome may lead to a bad secondary outcome.
[1] Hoffman, W. M. (1982). Introduction. Journal of Business Ethics, 1,
79–80.
[2] Hoffman, W. M. (1977). The proceedings of the first national
conference on business ethics: Business values and social justice—
compatibility or contradiction? Waltham, MA: Center for Business Ethics.
[3] Cherrington, J. O., & Cherrington, D. J. (1992). A menu of moral
issues: One week in the life of the Wall Street Journal. Journal of
Business Ethics, 11, 255–265.
[4] Statistics cited in this section are derived in part from Deloitte. (2006).
Business ethics and compliance in the Sarbanes-Oxley era: A survey by
Deloitte and Corporate Board Member magazine; Deloitte. (2007).
Leadership counts: Deloitte & Touche USA 2007 ethics & workplace
survey results; Deloitte. (2008). Transparency matters: Deloitte LLP 2008
ethics & workplace survey results; Deloitte. (2009). Social networking and
reputational risk in the workplace: Deloitte LLP 2009 ethics & workplace
survey results; Deloitte. (2010). Trust in the workplace: Deloitte LLP 2010
ethics & workplace survey results. All surveys available online at
http://www.deloitte.com
[5] Statistics cited in this section are derived in part from Ethics Resource
Center (2012). 2011 national business ethics survey: Workplace ethics in
transition; Ethics Resource Center (2013a). Generational differences in
workplace ethics: A supplemental report of the 2011 national business
ethics survey; Ethics Resource Center (2013b). National business ethics
survey of social networkers: New risks and opportunities at work. All
surveys available online at http://www.ethics.org/nbes
[6] Shulman, D. (2007). From hire to liar: The role of deception in the
workplace. Ithaca, NY: ILR Press.Shulman, D. (2007). From hire to liar:
The role of deception in the workplace. Ithaca, NY: ILR Press.
[7] Desjardins, J. (2009). An introduction to business ethics (3rd ed.).
Boston: McGraw-Hill.Desjardins, J. (2009). An introduction to business
ethics (3rd ed.). Boston: McGraw-Hill.
[8] Cherrington, J. O., & Cherrington, D. J. (1992). A menu of moral
issues: One week in the life of the Wall Street Journal. Journal of
Business Ethics, 11, 255–265, p. 256.
[9] Cherrington, J. O., & Cherrington, D. J. (1992). A menu of moral
issues: One week in the life of the Wall Street Journal. Journal of
Business Ethics, 11, 255–265, pp. 256–257.
[10] Ethics Resource Center. (2013b). National business ethics survey of
social networkers: New risks and opportunities at work. Retrieved from
http://www.ethics.org/nbes
[11] Lundy, J. (2010). Managing the workplace ethics of social media.
Retrieved from http://www.corporatecomplianceinsights.com/
[12] Ethics Resource Center. (2012). 2011 national business ethics
survey: Workplace ethics in transition. Retrieved from
http://www.ethics.org/nbes
[13] Ethics Resource Center. (2013b). National business ethics survey of
social networkers: New risks and opportunities at work. Retrieved from
http://www.ethics.org/nbes
[14] Zemke, R., Raines, C., & Filipczak, B. (2013). Generations at work:
Managing the clash of Boomers, Gen Xers, and Gen Yers in the
workplace (2nd ed.). New York, NY: AMACOM.
[15] Frank N. Magid Associates. (2012, April 30). The first generation of
the twenty-first century: An introduction to the pluralist generation.
Retrieved from http://magid.com
2.3 Communication Ethics
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
1. Understand Andersen’s three viewpoints for communication
ethics.
2. Differentiate the three ways that individuals understand ethics as
described by Arnett, Harden Fritz, and Bell.
“Stick and stones may break my bones, but names will never hurt me!” We all
know that playground chant from our childhoods. Yet the fact is that name-
calling does hurt, perhaps even with lifelong psychological consequences. Just as
ethical decision making must guide our actions, so also our words. At a
minimum, observed Johannesen, Valde, and Whedbee, ethics must be considered
when a communicative behavior (1) “could have a significant impact on other
persons,” (2) “involves conscious choice of means and ends,” and (3) “can be
judged by standards of right and wrong.” [1] As we learned in Chapter 1—and
will discuss more in Chapter 4—human communication is a complex behavior.
The introductory model of communication we reviewed in Chapter 1 describes a
source who crafts a message, selects a channel, attempts to stimulate in the
minds of receivers an accurate interpretation of the message, and considers
feedback. All these actions are complexly interrelated. For that reason, argued
James McCroskey, simple debate over means and ends cannot lead to “viable
systems for evaluating the ethics of human communication.” [2]
Three Viewpoints for Ethical Communication
Ethics must be seen, noted Kenneth Andersen, as “a dimension that is relevant
to all the actors in the communication process—the source or the originator, the
person that initiates communication; the person who receives, interprets, hears,
reads the communication; and the people who, in effect, are further agents of
transmission.” [3] In essence, Andersen described three viewpoints that must be
considered: the source, the receiver, and the larger society.
Source Ethics
The ethics of the source come down to her or his intent toward the receivers of
the message. More than two millennia ago, Aristotle was the first to write on this
subject. For him, the techniques of rhetoric and persuasion were neutral, tools
that could be used by a speaker to produce predictable effects in an audience. If
the tools are neutral and the effects predictable, then “ethical judgments in
rhetorical communication should be based exclusively on the intent of the source
toward the audience.” [4]
Receiver Ethics
The ethics of the receivers involve their individual choices of how to process the
message being sent by the source. This “receiver ethic” starts with the notion
that receiving a message should be an active, not passive, process. Each receiver
has “a 100 percent responsibility to listen, to be critical, to evaluate, to reject, to
demand more information, to reject, whatever the case may be.” [5] Active
listening, however, first requires objective reception rather than forming snap
judgments based on initial perceptions of the source or the message. When these
perceptions interfere with our ability as a receiver to listen, be critical, evaluate,
or reject a message, we are not ethically attending to a message.
Society Ethics
The larger society is, for Kenneth Andersen, composed of third parties who are
not directly involved in a communicative exchange and yet are listening.
Whether you eavesdrop on a restaurant conversation at the next table or
inadvertently hear the couple next door fighting at three in the morning, you too
have ethics to consider. In both cases, your dilemma is what you should do with
the information you received. If you overhear gossip at the table next to you, is it
ethical to pass on that information to others? If you hear one partner next door
physically abusing the other, do you have an ethical obligation to call the police?
“[Your] responsibilities in every case will be unique to the situation, unique to
one’s ability to fulfill the role of intermediary.” [6]
Three Understandings of Ethics
A survey of business communicators discovered that most “come to the job with
a sense of ethics developed chiefly through the influence of their mothers and
fathers,” then “look to colleagues and supervisors as sources of continuing
moral guidance,” and ultimately “make their moral choices according to
feelings and conscience.” [7] The “intuitive ethics” practiced at work by these
professionals derive from “a composite of cultural lessons” whose values and
ideologies are routinized “until their adoption simply becomes common place.” [8] This aptly illustrates what Arnett, Harden Fritz, and Bell have called the
“commonsense” understanding of ethics. But rather than remain at this lowest
level of ethical understanding, they encourage communicators to engage with
theory and, at the highest level, dedicate themselves to ethical learning. [9]
Commonsense Understanding
Arnett, Harden Fritz, and Bell define commonsense as “the commonly
understood, taken-for-granted assumptions about the way the world works and
expected communicative behaviors one will meet in navigating that world in
daily life.” [10] Yet commonsense varies over time and across cultures. For
example, one researcher found that adults in a blue-collar Chicago neighborhood
were expected to physically correct rather than “communicate” with children,
while affluent parents in the Pacific Northwest urged children to “communicate”
their feelings. [11] The commonsense of many Middle Eastern cultures, on the
other hand, is that women should not speak to men they do not know. Nonverbal
communication is likewise governed by a culture’s commonsense. In the MTV
reality show Road Rules: The Quest, a female character was stoned when she
wore shorts on the streets of an Islamic city—a violation of the community’s
religious law and commonsense dress code. The enormous variety of
“commonsense expectations is neither good nor bad, but simply a defining
reality of our time.” [12]
Theoretical Understanding
Ethical theories of communication offer a step up from commonsense. As we
saw in Table 2.2, many theories have been proposed to guide individuals in their
ethical choices. But adopting any one theory of communication ethics cuts two
ways, for though it “opens the world, permitting us to see with clarity,” by
providing only a single frame it “simultaneously occludes our vision.” Thus “a
theory both illuminates and obscures.” [13]
Learning and Understanding
Given the limits of commonsense and even of theorizing, ethical communicators
must commit themselves to learning. First, ethical communicators must learn not
to assume that their own commonsense and their favorite theories are universal
truths acknowledged by all. Then, ethical communicators must take the lack of
consensus as an opportunity to seek out and learn from the many ways that
different cultures perceive and understand communicative ethics. “Learning and
understanding different standpoints is a pragmatic communication ethics act.” [14] Such a commitment to “diversity of perspective” and “to understand and
respect other communicators before evaluating and responding to their
messages” is captured in the National Communication Association Credo for
Ethical Communication, which can be found here: NCA Credo.
KEY TAKEAWAY
Andersen argued that ethical decisions about communicative
behavior must be made not only by the sender of a message but
also by the receiver and by the larger society. The sender’s
ethical responsibility relates to his or her intention toward the
receivers. The receivers’ ethical responsibility relates to their
decisions about how to process the message, whether to give it
fair consideration and make a snap judgment. The larger society
—or those who were not directly involved in a communicative
exchange but heard the message—must decide what to do with
the information received.
Arnett, Harden Fritz, and Bell described three levels of
understanding in communication ethics. The lowest level is
commonsense, or understanding communication according to the
commonsense of one’s culture. The next level is theoretical
understanding, which rises above commonsense and allows one
to see more clearly but also limits the communicator to a single
framework. The highest level of understanding is attained through
learning, in which the ethical communicator seeks to learn from
diverse perspectives on communication.
EXERCISES
1. Look at a recent copy of Bloomberg Businessweek, the Wall
Street Journal, Forbes, or another business-oriented publication.
Commonsense :
Find an example of communication ethics and then describe that
example from the viewpoint of the source’s ethics, the receivers’
ethics, and the ethics of those (such as yourself) in the larger
society who were not directly involved in the exchange but have
heard the information.
2. Why do you think Arnett, Harden Fritz, and Bell (2009) argue that
learning is the first principle of ethics? Why is learning more
valuable than either common sense or theories?
KEY TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
“The commonly understood, taken-for-granted assumptions about the way the world works and expected communicative behaviors one will meet in navigating that world in daily life.”
[1] Johanessen, R., Valde, K. S., & Whedbee, K. E. (2008). Ethics in
human communication. Long Grove, IL: Waveland, p. 1.
[2] McCroskey, J. C. (2006). An introduction to rhetorical communication:
A Western rhetorical perspective (9th ed.). Boston: Allyn & Bacon, p. 239.
[3] Andersen, K. E. (2007). A conversation about communication ethics
with Kenneth E. Andersen. In P. Arneson (Ed.), Exploring communication
ethics: Interviews with influential scholars in the field (pp. 131–142). New
York, NY: Peter Lang, p. 132.
[4] McCroskey, J. C. (2006). An introduction to rhetorical communication:
A Western rhetorical perspective (9th ed.). Boston: Allyn & Bacon, p. 295.
[5] Andersen, K. E. (2007). A conversation about communication ethics
with Kenneth E. Andersen. In P. Arneson (Ed.), Exploring communication
ethics: Interviews with influential scholars in the field (pp. 131–142). New
York, NY: Peter Lang, p. 132.
[6] Andersen, K. E. (2007). A conversation about communication ethics
with Kenneth E. Andersen. In P. Arneson (Ed.), Exploring communication
ethics: Interviews with influential scholars in the field (pp. 131–142). New
York, NY: Peter Lang, p. 133.
[7] Dragga, S. (1997). A question of ethics: Lessons from technical
communicators on the job. Technical Communication Quarterly, 6, 161–
178, p. 173. See also Dragga, S. (1996). “Is this ethical?” A survey of
opinion on principles and practices of document design. Technical
Communication, 43, 255–265.
[8] Faber, B. (1999). Intuitive ethics: Understanding and critiquing the role
of intuition in ethical decisions. Technical Communication Quarterly, 8(2),
189–202, p. 193.
[9] Arnett, R. C., Harden Fritz, J. M., & Bell, L. M. (2009). Communication
ethics literacy: Dialogue and difference. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
[10] Arnett, R. C., Harden Fritz, J. M., & Bell, L. M. (2009).
Communication ethics literacy: Dialogue and difference. Thousand Oaks,
CA: Sage, p. 62.
[11] Philipsen, G. (1975). Speaking “like a man” in Teamsterville: Culture
patterns of role enactment in an urban neighborhood. Quarterly Journal
of Speech, 61(1), 13–22; Katriel, T., & Philipsen, G. (1981). “What we
need is communication”: “Communication” as a cultural category in some
American speech. Communication Monographs, 48(4), 301–317.
[12] Arnett, R. C., Harden Fritz, J. M., & Bell, L. M. (2009).
Communication ethics literacy: Dialogue and difference. Thousand Oaks,
CA: Sage, p. 68.
[13] Arnett, R. C., Harden Fritz, J. M., & Bell, L. M. (2009).
Communication ethics literacy: Dialogue and difference. Thousand Oaks,
CA: Sage, p. 70.
[14] Arnett, R. C., Harden Fritz, J. M., & Bell, L. M. (2009).
Communication ethics literacy: Dialogue and difference. Thousand Oaks,
CA: Sage, p. 62.
2.4 Organizational Communication Ethics
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
1. Differentiate among the components of Redding’s (1996) typology
of unethical organizational communication.
2. Understand the four phases of the feminist perspective of
organizational communication ethics proposed by Mattson and
Buzzanell (1999).
3. Describe why Montgomery and DeCaro (2001) believe that
human performance improvement can help organizations in
improving organizational communication ethics.
4. Assess the implementation of an organizational communication
ethics intervention using a human performance improvement
model.
The preponderance of everyday problems that plague all organizations is either
problems that are patently ethical or moral in nature, or they are problems in
which deeply embedded ethical issues can be identified. And this proposition is
ethically significant, of course, when we recall the axiom that communication is
a prerequisite for the very existence of any organization. [1]
This statement was written by W. Charles Redding, widely considered the father
of organizational communication as an academic discipline, who published this
shortly before his death. While he did not believe that organizational
communication scholars and practitioners need to become trained ethicists, he
urged anyone studying the subject to become versed in different theoretical
perspectives on ethics. Such familiarity could, he advised, help organizational
communicators address four basic questions:
1. “What messages or other communication events are perceived by which
perceivers as unethical?”
2. “Why? That is, what criteria are cited for making specific ethical
evaluations?”
3. “In what respects do these criteria appear to be grounded in organizational
(or other) cultures?”
4. “What are the consequences of unethical communication? What, in other
words, are the relationships between unethical communication and other
organizational and societal phenomena?” [2]
Identifying Unethical Communication
Redding was also keenly aware that theory must be translated into practice. For
as Matthew Seeger noted, applied ethics in organizational communication
“focuses on norms and guidelines of professional practice, methodologies for
promoting ethical decision-making, various codes of conducts and how these
function to promote discussion, informal decisions, and resolve practical ethical
problems.” [3] To aid organizations on an everyday level, Redding proposed a
typology—summarized in Table 2.4—for identifying unethical organizational
communication: coercive, destructive, deceptive, intrusive, secretive, and
manipulative/exploitative.
Table 2.4 Redding's Typology of Unethical Communication
An organizational communication act is
unethical if it is… Such organizational communication unethically…
Coercive
• Abuses power or authority
• Unjustifiably invades others’ autonomy
• Stigmatizes dissents
• Restricts freedom of speech
• Refuses to listen
• Uses rules to stifle discussion and complaints
Destructive
• Attacks others’ self-esteem, reputations, or feelings
• Disregards others’ values
• Engages in insults, innuendoes, epithets, or
derogatory jokes
• Uses putdowns, backstabbing, and character
assassination
• Employs so-called truth as a weapon
• Violates confidentiality and privacy to gain an
advantage
• Withholds constructive feedback
Deceptive
• Willfully perverts the truth to deceive, cheat, or
defraud
• Sends evasive or deliberately misleading or
ambiguous messages
• Employs bureaucratic euphemisms to cover up the
truth
Intrusive
• Uses hidden cameras
• Taps telephones
• Employs computer technologies to monitor
employee behavior
• Disregards legitimate privacy rights
Secretive
• Uses silence and unresponsiveness
• Hoards information
• Hides wrongdoing or ineptness
Manipulative/Exploitative
• Uses demagoguery
• Gains compliance by exploiting fear, prejudice, or
ignorance
• Patronizes or is condescending toward others
Redding’s list easily correlates to concepts of ethics that we reviewed earlier in
this chapter. Notice how the communicative acts described by Redding take us
back to Aristotle’s notion that the intent of a speaker is the key to judging a
communication. Many items on Redding’s list recall Cherrington and
Cherrington’s typology, as the latter includes lying, creating false impressions,
hiding information, and interpersonal and organizational abuse. And since
Redding wrote two decades ago, the potential for unethically intrusive
organizational communication has vastly increased. A 2005 survey by the
American Management Association [4] revealed the following:
36 percent of respondents reported that their organizations monitor at least
some of their computer keystrokes
50 percent reported some or all or their computer files are monitored
76 percent reported their workplace Internet activity is monitored
26 percent reported their organization had fired workers for misusing the
Internet
25 percent reported their organization had fired workers for misusing e-mail
3 percent reported their telephone calls are recorded
8 percent reported their physical whereabouts are monitored through GPS,
8 percent through employee identification cards, and 5 percent through
company cell phones
Courts in the United States have legalized all these procedures without
employees being forewarned. In the European Union, although employees must
be notified prior to monitoring, organizations may legally monitor their
workforces. Such secretiveness may be an understandable response to the
explosion of new communication and information-sharing technologies. But in
so doing, organizations have made what Thomas Nilsen called a significant
choice. “When we communicate to influence the attitudes, beliefs, and actions of
others,” he wrote, “the ethical touchstone is the degree of free, informed, and
critical choice on matters of significance in their lives that is fostered by our
speaking.” [5] Thus organizations make a significant choice when they follow or
deviate from this standard. Nilsen readily admitted that decision makers cannot
feasibly allow every possible vantage point to be fully discussed. Nor can every
possible alternative and contingency be explored. Instead, Nilsen argued that
ethical communication lies “not in expecting the individual speaker to be more
objective and informative, but in having many different speakers present their
conceptions of the issues under consideration, thus providing adequate
information for intelligent decision-making.” [6]
Because communication is so central to organizational processes, acknowledged
Dennis Mumby, organizations “must control the systems of signification in the
organization; that is, the process by which meaning becomes ‘attached’ to
organizational practices.” [7] In other words, organizations have a clear stake in
how people—both within and out—interpret what is going on in the
organization. Where organizations must make a “significant choice” is in
balancing the need for control with the ethical obligation to providing clear and
adequate information to all stakeholders. To us, reading this book, this
imperative seems clear. How could anyone disagree? Yet N. L. Reinsch made a
key point. [8] Some years ago he surveyed the literature on business
communication ethics and discovered a surprising finding from the research:
unethical business communication can sometimes be effective in the short run. If
unethical behavior was never effective, there would be no reason for anyone to
engage in it. But the simple fact is that, quite often, unethical behavior can help
people get ahead in life and in business. Nevertheless, the longer someone
engages in unethical communicative behavior, the greater the likelihood that
others will notice, thus leading to diminishing returns for further unethical
behavior. Does this mean you (or your organization) should communicate
unethically as long as you can get away it and as long as you can keep getting
some benefit? Not in the least! But perhaps now you can see the challenge.
A Feminist Communication Ethic
In Chapter 1, we reviewed the critical approach to organizational communication
research, an approach that looks for imbalances of power that favor dominant
interests and often seem “natural” and thus go unchallenged. Feminist scholars
Marifran Mattson and Patrice Buzzanell did just that by taking a second look at
Redding’s typology of unethical organizational communication. They concluded
that Redding’s typology reflects the dominant managerial ideology that links
communication to individual productivity and organizational effectiveness. In
other words, under Redding’s system, “to communicate unethically would create
situations in which managers do not receive crucial information and would leave
the firm vulnerable to productivity problems, strikes, and litigation.” [9] By
contrast, they believe organizational communication should afford a voice—that
is, the ability to both construct and articulate knowledge—to all.
As an alternative to Redding, Mattson and Buzzanell adapted Linda Steiner’s [10]
feminist ethic to the problem of organizational communication. While traditional
ethical systems focus on prescribing how individuals should act, a feminist ethic
strives “toward a vision of value transformation (equitable power-sharing and
decision-making)” and holds that being ethical “involves being a part of the
envisioning and struggling.” [11] Mattson and Buzzanell then created a four-
dimensional framework for ethical decision making, which is summarized in
Figure 2.3.
Figure 2.3 Mattson and Buzzanell’s Feminist Ethic
Between Redding’s typology and Mattson and Buzzanell’s framework, we may
be left with an ambiguity. While Mattson and Buzzanell’s framework is humane
and inclusive, we are still left to puzzle the question, What is the most ethical
action to take? On the other hand, Redding’s typology is concrete but leaves us
absolutist solutions that may not always fit the situation. Mark Ward has termed
this the difference between prescriptive and descriptive ethics, or between an
ethic that prescribes what a person should do and an ethic that describes the
structures of power that condition people’s responses. [12] In other words,
prescriptive ethics may tell us what to do but they don’t explain anything,
whereas descriptive ethics may explain things but they don’t tell us what to do.
To synthesize the two approaches, Ward suggested that ethical action should not
be viewed as a point on a line—as in “the” decision to “do” some single action
—but as latitude or a band of possibilities. Each of us sets ethical thresholds that
create the boundaries of that latitude. On one side of the boundary are ethical
decisions that are too trivial to be dilemmas (e.g., “Should I return that paper
clip to my office?”). On the other side are decisions of too great a magnitude and
significance to be real dilemmas (e.g., “Should I murder my boss?”). In between
are the ethical dilemmas that bedevil us. Ward proposed that traditional
prescriptive ethics can help us set our ethical boundaries, while critical
descriptive ethics can help us when a situation falls inside the band of
possibilities that present true ethical dilemmas.
Ethical Performance Improvement
So far we have introduced you to a traditional approach to organizational
communication ethics and a feminist approach based on critical theory. Finally,
we offer a human performance improvement (HPI) approach to organization
communication ethics, a perspective advocated by Daniel Montgomery and Peter
DeCaro. Just like any other performance issue, they argued, “Ethical problems
or dilemmas have behavioral consequences. Analysis can measure and monitor
the behaviors leading to the unethical act, or the act, itself. By analyzing the
antecedents and consequences, [organizations] can then design an intervention
to correct the behavior.” [13] Often, human performance interventions related to
ethics happen in hindsight: an ethical violation occurs and the human
performance improvement experts backtrack to determine how and why the
ethical violation occurred. At other times, human performance interventions start
with a written policy, such as the National Communication Association Credo
for Ethical
Communication, (https://www.natcom.org/uploadedFiles/About_NCA/Leadership_and_Governance/Public_Policy_Platform/PDF-
PolicyPlatform-NCA_Credo_for_Ethical_Communication.pdf) or the
International Association of Business Communicators (IABC) Code of
Ethics (https://www.iabc.com/about-us/leaders-and-staff/code-of-ethics/),
followed by suggestions for ensuring policies are observed.
As you can see, human performance improvement “is a results-based,
systematic process used to identify performance problems, analyze root causes,
select and design actions, manage workplace solutions, measure results, and
continually improve performance within an organization.” [14] HPI professionals
digest academic research from various fields and help organizations translate
that research into practice. They can identify “knowledge gaps when it comes to
business ethics” and ask such questions as the following:
Does the workforce know how the organization’s code of ethics applies to
them?
Do they know what to do if they become aware of a violation of the code of
ethics?
Does the organization’s code of ethics meet accepted standards?
Does a code of ethics even exist? [15]
HPI professionals often serve in four roles: analyst (to determine gaps between
organization policy and employee knowledge), intervention specialist (to close
the performance gaps), change manager (to coordinate initiatives for closing
the gaps), and evaluator (to determine if the gaps have been closed). [16] Figure
2.4 graphically represents this process, based on the American Society for
Training and Development’s HPI Model and the International Society for
Performance Improvement’s Human Performance Technology Model. [17]
Figure 2.4 Human Performance Improvement Model
Thus, if the goal is to improve organizational communication ethics, the HPI
professional would start by analyzing performance gaps between any ethical
lapses and where the organization should be in terms of ethical communication.
The analysis would seek out the causes of the gaps. For example, are employees
communicating unethically because they are unfamiliar with or do not
understand the organization’s code of conduct? Are they communicating
unethically because the organization rewards them for success and not ethics? Or
are they communicating unethically because they are not disposed toward ethical
communication?
Once the analysis is complete and the root causes of the performance gaps are
identified, the HPI professional slips into the second role of intervention
specialist. Now the goal is to determine the most appropriate methods for
reaching the organization’s goal or at least decreasing performance gaps. To
improve performance in organizational communication ethics, the appropriate
intervention might be employee training sessions or promulgating a company-
wide code of communication ethics.
In the third role of change manager, the HPI professional “coordinates
implementation and roll out of solutions, especially complex or big efforts that
may involve multiple initiatives” and “works to build buy-in and support” from
all levels of the organization. [18] Then, in the final role of evaluator, the HPI
professional must evaluate the intervention to determine whether or not
performance has actually improved—and that the time and money spent have
helped the organization.
KEY TAKEAWAY
Redding’s typology of unethical organizational communication
consists of six distinct types of communicative acts: (1) coercive—
abuse of power or authority; (2) destructive—behavior that attacks
a receiver; (3) deceptive—behavior that is intentionally false; (4)
intrusive—monitoring behavior; (5) secretive—purposefully not
disclosing information; and (6) manipulative-exploitative.
Mattson and Buzzanell proposed that organizational
communication should be examined through four basic phases.
First, you should define the situation by identifying ethical issues
in context. Second, examine values (voice, community, and
fairness) and ideals. Third, apply the ethical principle while paying
attention to a person’s emotional reaction. Last, develop a
solution paying special attention so that vulnerable people are
least affected.
Montgomery and DeCaro argue that human performance
improvement procedures can help organizations improve
organizational communication ethics. This process involves
analyzing gaps between the organizational goal and actual
performance, designing an appropriate intervention to close the
gaps, managing the intervention, and then evaluating whether the
intervention closed the gaps.
EXERCISES
1. Thinking about your own organization, which of Redding’s
typology of unethical organizational communication do you think
is the most common? If you were the top leader in your
organization, how would you go about stopping this specific lapse
in ethical communication?
2. Look at a recent copy of Bloomberg Businessweek, the Wall
Street Journal, Forbes, or another business-oriented publication.
Look for a discussion of an issue that has ethical overtones and
Analyst :
Change Manager:
Coercive:
Deceptive:
Destructive:
then walk through Mattson and Buzzanell’s four dimensions of
feminist thinking when determining a specific solution. How do
you think Mattson and Buzzanell’s four dimensions would lead
you to different decisions than if you took a more traditional
stance on decision making?
3. Using an organization that you belong to, think about a specific
business or communication ethical dilemma your organization is
facing. Walk through the Human Performance Improvement
Model and think about how you could implement a change in your
organization’s thinking about ethics.
KEY TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
Role taken on by a human performance improvement specialist when he or she helps determine relevant gaps that exist in individuals’ behavior, knowledge, and/or attitudes.
Role taken on by a human performance improvement specialist when he or she coordinates implementation and execution of solutions while building buy-in and support from all levels of an organization’s hierarchy.
Category of unethical acts that describes communication events or behavior reflecting abuses of power or authority and resulting in the diminishing of another person’s autonomy.
Category of unethical acts that describes communication events or behavior reflecting a willful perversion of the truth in order to deceive, cheat, or defraud.
Category of unethical acts that describes communication
Evaluator :
Human Performance Improvement:
Intervention Specialist:
Manipulative/Exploitative:
Secretive:
Significant Choice:
events or behavior that attacks a receiver’s self-esteem, reputation, or deeply held feelings.
Role taken on by a human performance improvement specialist when he or she (1) examines if intervention is actually improving performance and (2) demonstrates the effectiveness of the intervention to the organization.
The systematic process for identifying and analyzing human performance problems and designing results-oriented interventions to improve people, processes, and organizations.
Role taken on by a human performance improvement specialist when he or she determines the most appropriate method for getting the organization to its goal or decreasing the performance gap.
Category of unethical acts that describes communication events or behavior that takes place when the source purposefully prevents the receiver from knowing the source’s actual intentions behind a communicative message.
Category of unethical acts that describes communication events or behavior that is undisclosed even when disclosing the information could be in an organization’s best interest.
The degree to which decisions are made (1) free from coercion, (2) with all available information, (3) through an examination of reasonable alternatives and short-term and long-term consequences, and (4) with an openness toward personal motives.
[1] Redding, W. C. (1996). Ethics and the study of organizational
communication: When will we wake up? In J. A. Jaksa & M. S. Pritchard
(Eds.), Responsible communication: Ethical issues in business, industry,
and the professions (pp. 17–40). Cresskill, NJ: Hampton, p. 18 (emphasis
in original).
[2] Redding, W. C. (1996). Ethics and the study of organizational
communication: When will we wake up? In J. A. Jaksa & M. S. Pritchard
(Eds.), Responsible communication: Ethical issues in business, industry,
and the professions (pp.17–40). Cresskill, NJ: Hampton, p. 24.
[3] Seeger, M. W. (2001). Ethics and communication in organizational
contexts: Moving from the fringe to the center. American Communication
Journal, 5(1), para. 18. Retrieved from http://ac-
journal.org/journal/vol5/iss1/special/seeger.htm
[4] AMA E-Policy Institute. (2005). 2005 electronic monitoring and
surveillance survey. American Management Association. Retrieved from
http://www.amanet.org
[5] Nilsen, T. R. (1974). Ethics of speech communication (2nd ed.). New
York, NY: Bobbs-Merrill, p. 46.
[6] Nilsen, T. R. (1974). Ethics of speech communication (2nd ed.). New
York, NY: Bobbs-Merrill, p. 43.
[7] Mumby, D. K. (1988). Communication and power in organizations:
Discourse, ideology, and domination. Norwood, NJ: Ablex.
[8] Reinsch, N. L., Jr. (1990). Ethics research in business communication:
The state of the art. Journal of Business Communication, 27, 251–272.
[9] Mattson, M., & Buzzanell, P. M. (1999). Traditional and feminist
organizational communication ethical analyses of messages and issues
surrounding an actual job loss case. Journal of Applied Communication
Research, 27, 49–72, p. 62.
[10] Steiner, L. (1997). A feminist schema for analysis of ethical
dilemmas. In F. L. Casmir (Ed.), Ethics in intercultural and international
communication (pp. 59–88). Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum.
[11] Mattson, M., & Buzzanell, P. M. (1999). Traditional and feminist
organizational communication ethical analyses of messages and issues
surrounding an actual job loss case. Journal of Applied Communication
Research, 27, 49–72, p. 62.
[12] Ward, M., Sr. (2010). The ethic of exigence: Information design,
postmodern ethics, and the Holocaust. Journal of Business and Technical
Communication, 24, 60–90.
[13] Montgomery, D. J., & DeCaro, P. A. (2001). Organizational
communication ethics: The radical perspective of performance
management. American Communication Journal, 5(1) [online journal],
para. 32. http://ac-journal.org/journal/vol5/iss1/special/decaro.htm
[14] Beich, E., Holloway, M., & McGraw, K. (2006). Improving human
performance: ASTD learning system—Module 3. Alexandria, VA:
American Society for Training and Development, p. 1.
[15] Rothwell, W. J., Hohne, C. K., & King, S. B. (2007). Human
performance improvement: Building practitioner competence (2nd ed.).
Boston: Butterworth-Heinemann, pp. 180–181.
[16] Willmore, J. (2004). Performance basics. Alexandria, VA: American
Society for Training and Development.
[17] Rothwell, W. J. (2000). ASTD models for human performance
improvement: Roles, competencies, and outputs (2nd ed.). Alexandria,
VA: ASTD Press.
[18] Willmore, J. (2004). Performance basics. Alexandria, VA: American
Society for Training and Development, p. 20.
2.5 Chapter Exercises
REAL-WORLD CASE STUDY
For the February 6–12, 2012, edition of Bloomberg Businessweek,
the editors decided on a shocking cover. The cover story for the
magazine was about the merger of United and Continental Airlines.
In an interesting twist, the magazine cover had a United Airlines
plane being mounted by a Continental Airlines plane with the tag
line “Let’s Get It On.” (http://loyaltylobby.com/2012/02/05/bloomberg-
businessweek-article-about-united-continental-merger/) The sexual
overtones of this cover shocked many readers. In the following
weeks, many readers wrote to the magazine conveying their dismay
at the organization’s choice to run this cover. [1]
One reader put it this way: “Offensive…displeasing…indecent…
abominable…obscene…objectionable…that’s what I have to say
about your Feb. 6–12 cover. You should be ashamed.” [2] Another
subscriber said, “Your cover page is so subtle it should have a
condom over the dominant top plane (should be United) and a
diaphragm shield inside the tail of the submissive bottom one
(should be Continental). You will lose several subscriptions…Who
was the genius who sent this around legal without thinking?”
Furthermore, Joseph Cirillo, vice president for reporting and
planning at Blyth, had this to say about the cover: “Your Feb. 6–12
cover page was in extremely poor taste. You made it even worse
with the headline ‘Let’s Get It On.’ Surely you could have described
the business events going on between Continental and United in a
better fashion, and not by showing two planes having sex with each
other on the cover of an important business magazine.” While there
were some people who found the cover humorous, the negative
reactions clearly outnumbered the positive.
1. Why do you think so many people reacted so negatively to the
sexual portrayal of a merger of two major airlines? Was this move
unethical or just in bad taste on the part of the editors of
Bloomberg Businessweek?
2. Using Andersen’s three viewpoints for ethics (sender, receiver,
and the larger society), analyze this cover from an ethical
perspective.
3. Would this cover have received as many negative responses if it
had been on the cover of a fitness magazine or a comic book?
END-OF-CHAPTER ASSESSMENT
1. Paul is preparing to deliver an address to his board of directors. He knows that if he explains the full costs of a new project, the board will block the project. However, Paul realizes that the project will have a huge return on its
investment. As such, Paul decides not to disclose the actual cost of the project. Which of the types of ethics discussed in the ethical matrix is Paul representing?
a. ethical behavior b. unethical behavior c. Machiavellian ethic d. subjective ethic e. rejective ethic
2. When Maxine interacts with various stakeholders in her organization, she is always very even handed and treats everyone the same. In fact, people often remark at how consistent her communicative behavior is with all people. What philosophical perspective described in Table 2.2 most closely resembles Maxine’s approach to communication?
a. communitarianism b. altruism c. ethical egoism d. justice e. social relativism
3. Hiro knows that his coworker is stealing from the petty cash fund at work. However, reporting this behavior to his superiors will only result in increased paperwork and decreased trust from his peers around the office. As such, Hiro decides not to tell anyone and instead just wait for his coworker to get caught. Hiro’s behavior is an example of which of Cherrington and Cherrington’s typology of twelve ethical lapses common in modern business?
a. abetting unethical acts b. rule violations c. stealing
d. false impressions e. unfair advantage
4. As a CEO, Danna believes everyone under her is an idiot. As such, her primary mode of leadership involves manipulating people to do her bidding by exploiting her followers’ fears, prejudices, or areas of ignorance. Which of Redding’s typology of unethical organizational communication is Danna illustrating?
a. coercive b. destructive c. deceptive d. intrusive e. manipulative-exploitative
5. Which of the three values described by Mattson and Buzzanell refers to the ability to both construct and articulate knowledge?
a. community b. fairness c. hope d. voice e. wisdom
Answer Key
1. c
2. d
3. a
4. e
5. d
[1] http://loyaltylobby.com/2012/02/05/bloomberg-businessweek-article-
about-united-continental-merger/
[2] Feedback: Our cover story on United-Continental merger draws some
passionate reactions. (2012, February 20). BusinessWeek. iPad version.
Chapter 3
Classical Theories of Organizational Communication
Information sharing is vital for effective decision making and should include the
full range of creativity, experience, and insight from employees.
What Is Theory?
In this chapter, we are going to explore classical theories in organizational
communication. Classical theories focus on organizational structure, analyzing
aspects such as optimal organizational performance plans, organizational power
relationships, and compartmentalizing different organizational units. [1] As
organizational communication scholars, these theories help us better appreciate,
recognize, and comprehend interactions and behaviors. We will discuss how
these theories work and apply to effectiveness of organizational communication.
What is theory? The word theory derives from the Greek word theoria, θεωρία,
which roughly translated means contemplation or speculation. Modern
understandings of the word theory are slightly different from the ancient Greeks,
but the basic idea of contemplating an idea or speculating about why something
happens is still very much in line with the modern definition. A theory is a
“group of related propositions designed to explain why events take place in a
certain way.” [2] Let’s break this definition down into its basic parts. First, a
theory is a “group of related propositions,” which are a series of statements
designed to be tested and discussed. Ultimately, these statements propose an
explanation for why events take place and why they occur in specific fashions.
For example, Sir Isaac Newton (of the claimed apple falling on his head) created
the modern theory of gravity to explain why the planets and stars didn’t go
crashing into each other (a very simplistic summation of his theory). While
Newton’s theory of gravity was pretty good, it couldn’t account for everything,
so ultimately Albert Einstein’s theory of relativity came on the stage to further
our understanding of how gravity actually works. In both cases, we have two
well-respected researchers attempting to understand a basic phenomenon of our
physical world—gravity. Just as physicists have been trying to understand why
the planets rotate and don’t crash into each other, organizational scholars have
attempted to create theories for how and why organizations structure themselves
the way they do, why people behave the way they do in organizations, why
leaders’ and followers’ interactions lead to specific outcomes, and so on.
Eric Eisenberg and Lloyd Goodall wrote that “the way we talk about a problem
directly influence the solutions we can articulate to address the problem.
Theories of organization and communication should enhance our ability to
articulate alternative ways of approaching and acting on practical issues.” [3] They further noted that theories have two basic qualities: metaphorical and
historical. [4] When we say that theories are metaphorical, we mean that
theories provide a linguistic means of comparing and describing organizational
communication and function. As you know from studying English, a metaphor is
a figure of speech where a word or phrase is applied to an object or action, but
Theories Are Historical:
Theories Are Metaphorical:
the word does not literally apply to the object or action. In this chapter and
Chapter 4, we’ll see theories comparing organizational phenomena to machines
and biological organisms. On the other hand, when we say that theories are
historical, we perceive theories in terms of the period in which they were
created and were popular. Theories are historical because they are often a
product of what was important and prevalent during that time. Hence each
theory is partial in addition to historical and metaphorical. In this chapter, we’ll
examine three different theoretical periods commonly referred to as the classical
perspective, human relations, and human resources. Each of these three
groupings exists primarily as an opportunity for retrospective analysis. In other
words, when we look back over the history of theoretical development in
organizational communication, these three periods jump out as being uniquely
different, so we ultimately group different ideas and important thought leaders
together because of similarities in their theoretical approaches to organizing.
KEY TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
The notion that we perceive theories in terms of the period in which they were created and were popular.
The notion that theories provide a linguistic means of comparing and describing organizational communication and function.
[1] Fisher, D. (2000). Communication in organizations (2nd ed.). New
York, NY: Jaico.
[2] Infante, D., Rancer, A., & Womack, D. (2003). Building communication
theory (4th ed.). Long Grove, IL: Waveland, p. 356.
[3] Eisenberg, E. M., & Goodall, H. L., Jr. (1993). Organizational
communication: Balancing creativity and constraint. New York, NY: St.
Martin’s Press, p. 53.
[4] Eisenberg, E. M., & Goodall, H. L., Jr. (1993). Organizational
communication: Balancing creativity and constraint. New York, NY: St.
Martin’s Press.
3.1 The Classical Perspective
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
1. Understand Frederick Taylor’s scientific management.
2. Explain the bureaucratic theory.
3. Describe Max Weber’s types of authority.
4. Discuss the implications of each classical perspective.
To understand classical theories, a brief history of industrialization is necessary.
Industrialization, or the Industrial Revolution, refers to the “development and
adoption of new and improved production methods that changed America and
much of Europe from agrarian to industrial economies.” [1] So how did both
Europe and America transform themselves from agrarian-, or farming, based
economies to industrial ones? To pinpoint a single event or invention that really
created the Industrial Revolution is almost impossible. From approximately 1750
to 1850, a variety of innovations in agriculture, manufacturing (both iron and
textiles), mining, technology, and transportation altered cultural, economic,
political, and social realities. For the first time in history, people stopped
working on family farms or in small family-owned businesses and started
working for larger organizations that eventually morphed into the modern
corporation. While there had been models of large organizations with massive
influence, such as the Catholic Church, these organizations had been very
limited in number. As more and more people left the family farm or local weaver
in hopes of bettering their lives and the lives of their families through
employment in larger organizations, new tools and models for managing these
workers had to be developed.
Perhaps the most widely known theories of organizational communication are
those from the classical period that stemmed out of the Industrial Revolution.
The main idea of the classical perspectives of organizational communication is
that organizations are similar to machines. Hence if you have a well-built and
well-managed machine, then you will have a very productive and effective
organization. The assumption is that each employee is part of a large machine,
which is the organization. If one part fails, then the entire machine fails.
Frederick Taylor's Scientific Management
In 1913, Frederick Taylor published Principles of Scientific Management, [2]
ushering in a completely new way of understanding the modern organization.
Taylor was trained as an engineer and played a prominent role in the idea of
scientific management. Scientific management is a management-oriented and
production-centered perspective of organizational communication. [3] Taylor
believed that the reason most organizations failed was that they lacked
successful systematic management. He wrote, “The best management is true
science resting upon clearly defined laws, rules, and principles, as a foundation.” [4] He further noted, “Under scientific management arbitrary power, arbitrary
dictation ceases, and every single subject, large and small, becomes question for
scientific investigation, for reduction to law.” [5] Taylor believed that any job
could be performed better if it was done scientifically. He created time-and-
motion studies that resulted in organizational efficiency.
Working as a foreman for the Bethlehem Steel Works in the 1900s, Taylor
observed how workers could do more with less time. He analyzed coal shoveling
at the organization. He noticed several workers would bring different-sized
shovels from home. Workers who brought small shovels could do more but it
took them longer, and workers who brought big shovels could do less but it was
faster. He observed that the best size of shovel was one that weighed about
twenty pounds. Hence he ordered the organization to provide all the workers
with the same size shovel. He also provided pay incentives for workers who
could shovel more coal. By making these changes, the organization was able to
increase production drastically.
Taylor believed that several steps were involved in getting to a more productive
organization. First, one must examine the job or task. Second, one needs to
determine the best way to complete the job or task. Third, one must choose the
most appropriate person for the task, at the same time properly compensating
that person. Lastly, one must be able to train the person to do the task efficiently.
Taylor believed that by using these scientific steps, organizations would have
fewer misuses of human effort.
Taylor’s idea of scientific management originated during the time in history
when most training of workers was based on apprenticeship models. In an
apprenticeship, a person would be taught and schooled by a more experienced
person, who would illustrate the task so that the inexperienced person could
model the behavior. Taylor believed that this was a very ineffective way of
training, because he felt that workers would differ in terms of tasks that were
performed, and the effectiveness of the tasks would be dependent on the type of
training received. Taylor argued that there should be only one way to explain the
job and one way to execute the task. He did not believe that it should be left up
to the expert to train apprentices on the task.
Overall, Taylor felt that employees were lazy and needed constant supervision.
He posited, “The tendency of the average [employee] is toward working at a
slow easy gait.” [6] In other words, he noted that this tendency is called natural
soldiering, which is affected by systematic soldiering, which occurs when
employees decrease their work production based on input or communications
from others. According to Taylor, systematic soldiering happens when
employees feel that more production will not result in more compensation. In
addition, if employees are paid by the hour and want to increase their income,
then they might demonstrate that it takes more time in order to get compensated
more than they would if they exerted more effort. Because Taylor thought
employees were inherently lazy, he thought employees also impacted the rate of
production.
Taylor is known for his idea of time and motion. Time and motion refers to a
method for calculating production efficiency by recording outcomes and time to
produce those outcomes. Taylor believed that if each task was designed
scientifically and the workers could be trained, then production could be
measured by timing the labor the workers performed. It was his intention to
create a work benchmark that could be quantified to improve efficiency and
production outcomes. We should also mention that Taylor’s ideas on time and
motion were ultimately furthered by the research of Frank Gilbreth, who filmed
workers in action in an effort to gain a better idea of physical movements. [7] In
the following video, you can see the work of Frank Gilbreth, along with his wife,
Lillian, as they attempted to use time-and-motion techniques to make
bricklaying more effective, productive, and profitable.
Video Link
Gilbreth Time and Motion Study in Bricklaying
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=lDg9REgkCQk
In this video, the original configuration of the scaffolding required a lot of
bending motion on the part of the bricklayers. The bending motion not only took
more time but also increased worker fatigue over a long day, which would make
workers less effective and productive. After completing the time-and-motion
study, you see the second half of the video where the workers have actually
created scaffolding for the bricks that does not involve bending over to pick up
the bricks. Ultimately, this simple example clearly illustrates the impact that
time-and-motion study techniques could have on making workers better at their
jobs.
Taylor felt that it would be ideal if organizations were run like machines,
because all tasks were clear-cut and simple. At the same time, these tasks
typically did not allow for flexibility, creativity, or originality. In addition, there
is a clear-cut distinction between managers who think and workers who labor.
Thus this perspective does not account for work motivations, relationships, and
turbulence in organizations.
Another key factor of Taylor’s scientific method is the style of communication.
Taylor did not feel the need to build rapport among workers. Rather, he felt that
managers needed to communicate clearly and candidly. Further, employees did
not need to provide input, they just needed to know how to execute their jobs.
While Taylor’s ideas took off like wildfire, they were not without their
detractors. As early as 1912, the US Commission on Industrial Relations was
expressing skepticism about scientific management, or what many were just
calling Taylorism:“To sum up, scientific management in practice generally tends
to weaken the competitive power of the individual worker and thwarts the
formation of shop groups and weakens group solidarity; moreover, generally
scientific management is lacking in the arrangements and machinery necessary
for the actual voicing of the workers’ ideas and complaints and for the
democratic consideration and adjustment of grievances.” [8]
Think about fast-food restaurants or package-delivery companies. These
organizations still use scientific management to run their businesses efficiently.
Each worker has a designated job and is required to do the same task over and
over again. Even though this is an old idea, it is still used in current workplaces.
Bureaucratic Theory
Max Weber and Henri Fayol were two other theorists known for their work in
the classical perspectives to organizational communication. These two theories
focus on the structure of the organization rather than the organizational activities.
Many of their ideas are around today.
Max Weber
Max Weber defined bureaucracy as the ideals to which organizations should
aim and aspire. [9] Weber was influenced by socialist philosophy. He developed
the idea of bureaucracy when he noticed several corrupt and unethical behaviors
of leaders. He felt that organizational leadership should center on task
proficiency and impersonal relationships. Even though many people associate
bureaucracy with red tape and ineffective organizations, this is not the outcome
of bureaucracy. According to Weber, bureaucracy should be synonymous with
order, consistency, reason, and reliability. In order to aspire to these traits,
organizations need to have specific rules and emphasize impersonality. He noted
that bureaucratic organizations must have the following characteristics:
Specialization and division of labor. Specific, set tasks allow an employee
to achieve his or her own objective. Thus every worker did not have to do
many jobs but an exclusive task that was assigned to that worker. This
helped to alleviate multiple trainings and increase production.
Rules and procedures. Written policies help manage and direct the
organization. Managers spend a majority of their time on how these policies
help to guide and function in the organization. These procedures would
serve as a guide and resource for the organization.
Hierarchy of authority. Organizations need to have a chain of command
that is shaped like a pyramid. There are levels of supervisors and
subordinates. Each worker answers to her or his corresponding superior.
This would assist in creating a direct line of communication and better
efficiency in the organization.
Formal communication. All decisions, rules, regulations, and behaviors
are recorded. This information and communication are shared in terms of
the chain of command. Hence everything is documented and accounted.
There is no question about what needs to be done, because it is written
down and passed through formal communication channels (a very top-down
approach to communication).
Detailed job descriptions. The organization has clear and concise
definitions, directions, and responsibilities of each position. Each worker is
aware of her or his task.
Employment based on expertise. The organization assigns workers
positions that fit their competencies. Hence workers are placed in the
organization where they can maximize production.
Impersonal environment. Relationships need to be impersonal and
separate so that workers’ personal thoughts or feelings do not affect or bias
decisions. Workers just need to work, and they do not need to interact with
others. Interpersonal relationships may jeopardize the organization’s
outcomes.
Weber categorized three types of authority: traditional, bureaucratic, and
charismatic. [10] Traditional authority is related to the backgrounds and traditions
of an environment. This leadership is usually passed down from one family
member to another with little regard to who is more apt or capable. Thus
authority is given to another based on custom or tradition. Think of family-
owned businesses and how those businesses usually do not let outsiders interfere
unless they are related to the family.
Charismatic authority is founded on the idea that the best candidate for this
position will be the one who can exert authority. This person is usually
charismatic, hence the name. If this person ever leaves the position, then their
authority does as well. According to Weber, charismatic leaders can lead to
insecure and unpredictable organizations, because there is a vague idea of who
will replace their position.
Another type of authority is bureaucratic. Weber felt that bureaucratic authority
was the best way to delegate authority in an organization. Bureaucratic authority
is founded on set objectives and criteria. Hence the best leaders were
bureaucratic leaders because they were picked in terms of the guidelines set out
for that organization’s mission. Weber believed that bureaucratic authority was
the ideal way to select authority because it thwarted ideas of nepotism,
preferential treatment, prejudice, and discrimination. Hence a candidate would
be selected in terms of job competency and not lineage or personality.
Table 3.1 Weber's Types of Authority
Traditional Charismatic Bureaucracy
Based on Family lineage Personality Rules and actions
Specialization None Charisma Technically qualified
Hierarchy Seniority Preferences Authority
Leadership Succession Family Popularity Most appropriate for the position
Communication Depends Depends Is written and has numerous records
Viewed as Nepotism Partisan Systematic
Fayol’s principles of management are similar to the military because there is unity in direction, unity in
command, subordination of individual interests to the general interest, and order.
© Thinkstock/iStock
Henri Fayol
Henri Fayol [11] managed a French mining company called Comambault, which
he was able to transform from an almost bankrupt organization to a very
successful one. Originally, he worked there as an engineer, then moved into
management, and later leadership. Similar to Weber, Fayol felt that there needed
to be division of labor, hierarchy, and fair practices. Fayol believed that there
were principles of management that included the following:
Unity of direction. The organization should have the same objectives, one
plan/goal, and one person of leadership/authority.
Unity of command. Employees should get orders from only one person.
Therefore, there would not be a chain of command. One person would be
the person in charge and be responsible.
Authority. Managers are entitled to provide orders and obtain compliance.
No other individuals in the organization have the privilege of power.
Order. The organization must have set places for workers and resources.
These should be in the right place at the correct time.
Subordination of individual interest to the general interest. The interest
of the organization is most significant and not that of the group or
individuals working for the organization.
Scalar chain. There is a hierarchical order of authority. There is a sequence
and succession to how communication is transferred from one person to the
other. This is similar to horizontal communication where workers of the
same level communicate with each other.
Even though Fayol’s principles may appear strict, he was one of the first
theorists to grasp the idea that having unconditional compliance with an
organization may lead to problems. Hence he also noted that each organization
must determine the most favorable levels of authority.
All in all, communication in the classical perspective has two functions: control
and command. Fayol believed that organizations must limit their
communication to precise and explicit words for task design and
implementation. Thus communication is not spontaneous and is more centralized
in a classical organization.
Workers need to feel their input is valued or they will strike.
© Thinkstock/iStock
Fayol also believed there were certain management activities, specifically five
activities that are applied to the administration unit of an organization. These
activities included planning, organizing, commanding, coordinating, and
controlling. As explained by Fayol, planning is where managers create plans for
the organization and predict future organizational needs. Next, organizing occurs
when organizations employ people and materials to complete their plans.
Commanding is what managers do to get the optimal output in production and
efficiency. Coordinating is where managers bring together the labors of all of
their employees. Last, controlling determines the accuracy of the organization’s
efforts and its plan. Fayol’s work still has a big influence on the climate,
structure, and leadership of many of today’s organizations. For instance, the
military is a great example of the ideas presented by Fayol, because there are so
many chains of command and so much structure. Communication in the military
is usually downward, and leadership is very important to its core.
KEY TAKEAWAY
Theories help us understand and predict communication and
behaviors.
Frederick Taylor created the idea of “scientific management,”
which is a management style that focuses on producing outcomes
and has a high orientation on management.
Max Weber felt that bureaucracy was the best way to select
authority. It is based on criteria and standards for the task rather
than other variables such as family relationship or popularity.
Henri Fayol believed that there are principles of management,
which include unity of direction, unity of command, authority,
order, subordination of individual interest to the general interests,
and scalar chain. He also felt that classical perspectives have two
functions: control and command.
EXERCISES
Scientific Management:
1. Determine how these classical perspectives are similar to and
dissimilar from each other. Create a chart or table to highlight
these differences.
2. Discuss the pros and cons of utilizing each classical perspective
in your current occupation and/or your dream job. Is the classical
perspective effective or ineffective? Why or why not?
3. Contact someone who is currently part of or has been a part of
the military. Ask them specific questions regarding the military as
an organization and types of communications in the military. Do
you see relationships between the military and the organizational
theories presented in this chapter?
4. Divide the class into small groups. Each group must select a
classical organizational perspective. They will act out their role in
front of the class, and the class must guess which perspective is
being acted. If the class is in an online format, ask students to
create a visual presentation of an organizational perspective with
the pros and cons of that perspective.
KEY TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
This type of organization emphasizes a management-oriented and production-centered perspective of organizational communication. This approach believes that organizations should be run like machines. Worker must do labor, and managers must do the thinking. There is limited communication.
Bureaucracy :
Control And Command:
Time And Motion:
Time-And-Motion:
Ideals that organizations should try to attain. The term also refers to selecting authority based on criteria and standards rather than popularity or family relation. Hence it makes organizational decisions harder to execute, but it also protects workers from mistreatment, because there is order and structure to the communication.
Organizations must limit their communication to precise and explicit words for task design and implementation. At the same time, communication is not spontaneous and is more centralized in a classical organization.
Methods for calculating production efficiency by recording outcomes and time to produce those outcomes. A researcher can determine how long a worker needs to yield an expected result by measuring workers’ movements over time.
Methods for calculating production efficiency by recording outcomes and time to produce those outcomes. A researcher can determine how long a worker needs to yield an expected result by measuring workers’ movements over time.
[1] Scott, D. L. (Ed.). (2009). Industrial revolution. The American heritage
dictionary of business terms. Boston, MA: Houghton Mifflin Harcourt, p.
259.
[2] Taylor, F. (1913). Principles of scientific management. New York, NY:
Harper.
[3] Eisenberg, E. M., & Goodall, H. L., Jr. (1993). Organizational
communication: Balancing creativity and constraint. New York, NY: St.
Martin’s Press.
[4] Taylor, F. (1913). Principles of scientific management. New York, NY:
Harper, p. 19.
[5] Taylor, F. (1913). Principles of scientific management. New York, NY:
Harper, p. 211.
[6] Taylor, F. (1913). Principles of scientific management. New York, NY:
Harper, p. 19.
[7] Nadworny, M. J. (1957). Frederick Taylor and Frank Gilbreth:
Competition in scientific management. Business History Review, 31, 23–
34.
[8] US Commission on Industrial Relations (1912). A government
evaluation of scientific management: Final report and testimony.
Washington, DC: Government Printing Office, p. 136.
[9] Weber, M. (1947). The theory of social and economic organization
(A.M. Henderson and T. Parsons, Trans.). London, England; Collier
MacMillan.
[10] Weber, M. (1947). Essays on sociology. New York, NY: Oxford
Press, pp. 196–198.
[11] Fayol, H. (1949). General and industrial management. London, UK:
Pitman.
3.2 Human Relations Theories
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
1. Understand the human relations approach.
2. Identify key people in the human relations approach.
3. Explain the implications of the human relations approach.
During the 1930s, the world was in the middle of the worst economic
depressions. During this period, workers started to dislike and question scientific
methods and bureaucracy in organizational settings. In this section, we will
introduce the human relationship approach. We will discuss the historical and
cultural backgrounds of this approach.
The Great Depression, which occurred between 1929 and 1940, caused
economic and social struggles for many Americans. Many governmental policies
were changing, such as Social Security, welfare, and public improvement
projects. The Depression caused many families to move from drought-stricken
farming areas to the West Coast and from poor Southern cities to more enriched
areas of the North. These families were looking for a better life. However, the
increase of workers to these areas led to more competition. Moreover, it led to
many types of worker abuse by corrupt and immoral managers. It was during
this time that many people advocated for human rights, labor unions, better
wages, and improved work conditions. “Fair wages” was defined by how much
workers produced as output. In turn, this increased output usually led to more
injuries, illnesses, and deaths. Human rights were defined as having twelve-hour
workdays, working six days a week, and getting a thirty-minute break for lunch.
These perspectives concerning “fair” and “human rights” were seen differently
by managers and employees. The difference in perspectives caused tense and
strained relationships between managers and workers.
World War II changed everything. There was an increase of employment in the
private sector and the military. These changes resulted in a more human relations
approach to communication in organizations, because there was an increase in
well-educated workers. These new workers encouraged an awareness of the
worker’s needs, such as feeling important and appreciated as a worker and an
individual. To better understand how new management ideas ultimately started
to transform the face of the workplace, we will first discuss a number of key
ideas in the group of theories labeled under the term human relations, followed
by an analysis of two of the major theorists in this category: Elton Mayo and
Kurt Lewin.
Key Ideas in Human Relations
Before we jump in and discuss the major theoretical thinkers who spawned the
human-relations movement, we need to understand the basic characteristics of
the theoretical developments in this time period. As with many theoretical
movements, the notion of “human relations” was drawn by researchers after the
fact. Specifically, Raymond E. Miles, a business professor at the University of
California at Berkeley, is responsible for much of the work on crystallizing the
notion of “human relations.” [1]
Miles, in a famous article in the Harvard Business Review, [2] discussed human
relations as the natural knee-jerk reaction that many management theorists
(along with workers and managers as well) had to Frederick Taylor’s scientific
management. Where Taylor viewed people as parts of a working machine, the
human-relations approach shifted the viewpoint from the task to the worker. For
the first time, workers were viewed as an important part of the organization that
should be viewed holistically instead of as bundles of skills and aptitudes. As
Miles noted, managers “were urged to create a ‘sense of satisfaction’ among
their subordinates by showing interest in the employees’ personal success and
welfare.” [3] Most importantly, the goal of human relations was to make workers
feel as though they belonged to something bigger than themselves, and thus the
workers’ work was important to the overall effort of the organization.
For communication scholars, the human relations approach is important because
it is the first time that two-way communication was encouraged; communication
between a worker and a manager was like a dialogue instead of a unidirectional
communication from the manager targeted at the worker. Furthermore, the
human-relations perspective sees communication as a tool that can be used by
management to “buy” cooperation from subordinates. Robert Dubin [4] coined
the term privilege pay to refer to a tool managers can utilize with subordinates
when the manager provides subordinates departmental information and allows
the subordinate to engage in open communication about various departmental
issues with the manager. Dubin sees this as a form of payment a manager makes
in order to “buy” cooperation from subordinates. The manager must give up
some of her or his access to private information and control over subordinates,
because this process enables subordinates to engage in some self-direction.
In sum, the human-relations perspective on organizational management notes
that the world would be easier for managers if they could just make decisions
and have subordinates follow those decisions. However, because employees are
more productive when they are satisfied, it becomes the job of the manager to
engage with subordinates. As Miles notes, “This model suggests, the manager
might do better to ‘waste time’ in discussing the problem with subordinates, and
perhaps even to accept suggestions that he believes may be less efficient, in
order to get the decision carried out.” [5]
Key People in Human Relations
Now that we’ve explored some of the theoretical underpinnings of the human-
relations approach to management, we will explore two of the most important
thinkers who are seen as falling into this category: Elton Mayo and Kurt Lewin.
Elton Mayo
Elton Mayo was a Harvard professor with a huge interest in Frederick Taylor’s
work. He was interested in learning ways to increase productivity. In 1924, Elton
Mayo and his protégé, Fritz Roethlisberger, were awarded a grant by the
National Research Council (NRC) of the National Academy of Science to study
productivity and lighting at the Hawthorne Works of the Western Electric
Company. The Hawthorne experiments, as Elton Mayo’s body of work became
known, are a series of experiments in human relations conducted between 1924
and 1932 at Western Electric Company’s Hawthorne Works in Cicero, Illinois.
Illumination Study
The first study at Hawthorne Works was designed to explicitly test various
lighting levels and how the lighting levels affected worker productivity. The
original hypothesis of the illumination study was that as lighting increased,
worker productivity would increase. The opposite was also predicted, as lighting
decreased, worker productivity would decrease. The original push behind the
study was the electric power industry, who believed that if they could
demonstrate the importance of artificial lighting, organizations around the
country would adopt artificial lighting in place of natural lighting to ensure
worker productivity.
The research began in the fall of 1924 and continued through the spring of 1927
as three different groups of workers were put through the experiment: relay
assembly workers, coil-winding workers, and inspectors. [6] After three different
testing conditions were concluded, the researchers were perplexed by their
findings. It did not matter if the researchers increased or decreased light in the
company; the workers’ productivity increased. This finding was true even when
the researchers turned down the lights to where the workers could barely see.
The researchers later realized that lighting did not affect worker productivity;
rather, the researchers’ presence had an impact. That’s why production outcomes
were similar to those in the lighting study—because workers were influenced by
the attention they got from the researchers. [7] This incident was labeled the
Hawthorne effect.
Figure 3.1 Hawthorne Studies Findings
Relay-Assembly Study
To further clarify the impact of a variety of factors on productivity, a second set
of tests was designed to evaluate rest periods and work hours on productivity.
The goal of this study was to determine how fatigue impacted worker
productivity. Six women operators volunteered to participate in the relay-
assembly study. The women were given physical examinations at the beginning
of the study and then every six weeks to ensure that the experiment was not
adversely affecting their health.
The six women were isolated in a separate room away from other Hawthorne
workers, where it was easier to measure experimental conditions like output and
quality of work, temperature, and humidity. The specific task in the relay-
assembly test was an electromagnetic switch consisting of thirty-five parts that
had to be put together by hand.
The experimenters introduced a variety of changes to the workers’ environment:
pay rates, bonuses, lighting, shortened workdays/weeks, rest periods, and so
forth. Surprisingly, as the test period quickly spanned from an original testing
period of a couple of months to more than two years, no matter what the
experimenters did, productivity increased. In fact, productivity increased more
than 30 percent during the first two and a half years of the study and then
plateaued for the duration of the tests. The physicals the workers received every
six weeks also showed that the women had improved physical health and their
absenteeism decreased during the study period. Even more important, the
women regularly expressed increased job satisfaction.
Once again the researchers were stumped. They quickly tried to determine what
was causing the increased productivity and quickly ruled out all the manipulated
conditions and settled on something considerably more intangible—employee
attitudes.
Employee-Interview Study
In the middle of the relay-assembly studies, a group of Harvard researchers led
by Elton Mayo and F. J. Roethlisberger joined the team of engineers at
Hawthorne Works to add further expertise and explanation to the studies under
way. One of the most important contributions Mayo made was during the
follow-up to the illumination and relay studies when workers at Hawthorne
Works were interviewed.
From 1928 to 1931, the Harvard researchers interviewed more than twenty-one
thousand workers in an attempt to gauge worker morale and determine what job
factors impacted both morale and job satisfaction. The researchers predicted,
based on the illumination and relay studies, that if they could increase worker
morale and satisfaction, then the workers would be more efficient and productive
as well. The interview study definitely posed some new challenges for the
researchers. Mayo thought that the “experience itself was unusual; there are few
people in this world who have had the experience of finding someone intelligent,
attentive, and eager to listen without interruption to all that he or she has to
say.” [8] To this end, Mayo trained a series of interviewers to listen and not give
advice as they took descriptive notes of what was being told to them by the
workers.
After the interviewing study was completed, the researchers attempted to make
sense of the mounds of data they had accumulated. One interesting side effect
was noted. After being interviewed by a researcher about the employee’s
working conditions, the employee reported increased satisfaction. Ultimately, the
very act of being asked about their working conditions made the employees
more satisfied workers and ultimately more productive. One of the interesting
outcomes of this study is the practice of employee-reaction surveys, which are
still widely used in organizations today.
Bank-Wiring Observation Study
One of the findings of the interview study was that workers tended to create an
informal standard for output that was predetermined by the group but never
clearly stated. These productivity standards were never really in line with the
ones communicated by either efficiency engineers or managers. To examine the
influence of informal group rules on worker productivity, Mayo and his team
created the bank-wiring observation study.
Fourteen bank wiremen (nine wirers, three smolders [individuals who fused
metal parts together using high temperatures], and two inspectors) were placed
in a room and told to complete their individual tasks. The men in the room were
putting together automatic telephone exchange components that consisted of
three thousand to six thousand individual terminals that had to be wired. The
workers spent a lot of time on their feet. To ensure that the men were not
affected by the Hawthorne effect, the researchers never let the men know they
were being studied. However, a researcher named W. Lloyd Warner, a trained
anthropologist with an interest in group behavior, was present in the room, but
he acted like a disinterested spectator and had little direct interaction with the
wiremen. In the experimental condition, pay incentives and productivity
measures were removed to see how the workers would react. Over time, the
workers started to artificially restrict their output and an average output level
was established for the group that was below company targets. Interestingly
enough, the man who was considered the most admired of the group also
demonstrated the most resentment toward management and slowed his
productivity the most, which led to cascading productivity of all the other men in
the group.
The researchers ultimately concluded that the wiremen created their own
productivity norms without ever verbally communicating them to each other. For
the first time, the researchers had clear evidence that within any organization
there exists an informal organization that often constrains individual employee
behavior. The bank-wiring observation study was stopped in spring of 1932 as
layoffs occurred at Hawthorne Works because of the worsening Great
Depression.
Conclusion
The Hawthorne Studies and the research of Mayo and Roethlisberger reinvented
how organizations think about and manage workers. Contrary to Taylor’s
perspective, Mayo and Roethlisberger felt that interpersonal relationships were
important. Moreover, they thought that society is composed of groups and not
just individuals; individuals do not act independently with their own interests but
are influenced by others; and most workers’ decisions are more emotional than
rational. We cannot overstress the importance that Mayo and Roethlisberger
have had on management theory and organizational academics. Overall, these
studies demonstrated the importance that communication has in subordinate-
supervisor interactions, the importance of peer relationships, and the importance
of informal organizations.
While the Hawthorne Studies revolutionized management theory, they were also
quite problematic. For example, most of the major studies in this series consisted
of very small samples of workers (six in the relay study and thirteen in the bank-
wiring study), so these results are definitely suspect from a scientific vantage
point. Furthermore, some people would argue that Hawthorne effects were really
the result of workers who were afraid of unemployment rather than
communication relationships. [9] Regardless of potential errors of the studies, the
conclusion that Mayo, Roethlisberger, and Dickson found was quite
extraordinary. Relationships have a significant impact on the quality of
organizational performance.
Kurt Lewin
Kurt Lewin was another person who explored the human-relations side to
organizational communication. Lewin was a refugee from Nazi Germany. He
adored democracy and had a passion for applying psychology to improving the
world. [10] During World War II, Lewin was at the University of Iowa. The US
government asked him to research ways to advise housewives against purchasing
meat, because there was such a short supply. [11] Lewin felt that there was a huge
barrier because housewives were expected to buy meat as their families, friends,
and parents anticipated being served meat. Lewin hypothesized that if
housewives were able to talk with other housewives about their meat-buying
tendencies, they would be able to overcome this barrier. Lewin and his cohorts
performed the experiments and found support for his hypothesis. Housewives
who were able to talk about their meat purchasing with other housewives were
ten times more likely to change their behavior.
Lewin felt he could analyze these same principles in an organization. Lester
Coch and John R. P. French [12] found that workers in a pajama factory were
more likely to espouse new work methods if they were given the opportunity to
discuss them and exercise some influence on the decisions that affected their
jobs. These new findings helped organizations realize the benefits of group
formation, development, and attitudes. Lewin’s ideas helped influence future
organizational communication theorists by emphasizing the importance of
communication. Lewin helped identify the fact that workers want to have a voice
and provide input about their tasks.
KEY TAKEAWAY
Elton Mayo and his research associates studied how lighting
affects production. They later realized that the workers were not
affected by lighting but by the researchers’ presence.
Kurt Lewin felt that group dynamics impacted behavioral
outcomes. If workers can talk about their tasks with others, it
impacts the organization.
Workers usually tended to create an informal standard for output
that was never stated but also predetermined by the group.
EXERCISES
Hawthorne Effect:
Privilege Pay:
1. What are the advantages and disadvantages of the human
relations approach?
2. Can you think of how group dynamics impact behavior outcomes?
Is this true from your experience? How so?
3. Do you believe that group dynamics are important in an
organization? Why or why not? Can you provide some specific
examples?
KEY TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
Workers’ behaviors were affected by the attention they received rather than by other variables such as lighting or temperature. Once workers felt as though they were being noticed or recognized, it influenced their productivity. Group norms were also affected.
A tool managers can utilize with subordinates when the manager provides subordinates departmental information and allows the subordinate to engage in open communication about various departmental issues with the manager.
[1] Miles, R. E. (1965). Human relations or human resources? Harvard
Business Review, 43(4), 148–157.
[2] Miles, R. E. (1965). Human relations or human resources? Harvard
Business Review, 43(4), 148–157.
[3] Miles, R. E. (1965). Human relations or human resources? Harvard
Business Review, 43(4), 148–157, p. 149.
[4] Dubin, R. (1958). The world of work. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-
Hall. Dubin, R. (1958). The world of work. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-
Hall.
[5] Miles, R. E. (1965). Human relations or human resources? Harvard
Business Review, 43(4), 148–157, p. 150.
[6] Roethlisberger, F. J., & Dickson, W. J. (1939). Management and the
worker. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
[7] Roethlisberger, F. J., & Dickson, W. J. (1939). Management and the
worker. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
[8] Mayo, E. (1945). The social problems of an industrial civilization.
Boston, MA: Harvard Business School, p. 163.
[9] Rice, B. (1982). The Hawthorne defect: Persistence of a flawed
theory. Psychology Today, 16(2), 70–74.
[10] Tannenbaum, A. S. (1966). Social psychology of the work
organization. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth, p. 86.
[11] Lewin, K. (1958). Group decision and social change. In E. F.
Maccoby, T. M. Newcomb, & E. L. Hartley (Eds.), Readings in social
psychology (pp. 197–211). New York, NY: Holt, Rinehart & Winston.
[12] Coch, L., & French, J. R. P., Jr. (1948). Overcoming resistance to
change. Human Relations, 1, 512–532.
3.3 Human Resources Theories
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
1. Define and understand the differences between human relations
and human resources.
2. Identify key people in human-resources theories.
3. Discuss motivation theories.
4. Discuss and explain Douglas McGregor’s Theory Y and Theory X.
In Section 2, you were introduced to the research of Elton Mayo and Kurt Lewin
under the banner of human-relations theories. In this section, we’re going to
further our understanding of theory in organizations by examining those
theoretical perspectives that fall into the human-resources camp.
The notion of human resources as a general category for a variety of
management-related theories was originally proposed by Raymond Miles. [1] First and foremost, Miles’s human-resource theories posit that all workers are
reservoirs of untapped resources. Miles believed that every worker comes into an
organization with a variety of resources that management can tap into if they try:
“These resources include not only physical skills and energy, but also creative
ability and the capacity for responsible, self-directed, self-controlled behavior.” [2]
Under this perspective then, managers should not be focused on controlling
employees or getting them to “buy in” to decisions, which are the hallmarks of
scientific management and human relations. Instead, the primary task of
management should be the creation of a working environment that fosters
employee creativity and risk taking in an effort to maximize and tap into the
resources employees bring to the job. As such, communication in this
perspective must be constant and bidirectional, and participation in decision
making must include both management and workers. Miles explains that his
human resources model “recognized the untapped potential of most
organizational members and advocated participation as a means of achieving
direct improvement in individual and organizational performance.” [3] To help
us understand human resources, we will describe how human resources differ
from human relations and discuss some key people in human resources.
Human-Relations versus Human-Resources Theories
To understand the notions of human relations and human resources is to
understand Raymond Miles’s [4] original ideas on both concepts. Miles, as
explained earlier, articulated a very clear theoretical perspective that was high on
communication, high on tapping into employee resources, and high on employee
input in decision making. These ideas were not his, but he did create a clear
categorization scheme where he delineated between two groups of researchers
whom he labeled “human relations” and “human resources.” Although Miles
believes these two groups exist, he also admits that these groups exist primarily
in how managers interpret and apply various the ideas of various innovators
within the field of management, so the researchers who fall into the human-
relations camp often discuss concepts that seem to fall within Miles’s own
human-resources framework. Table 3.2 provides a list of the major differences
that Miles believed existed between human relations and human resources.
Table 3.2 Human Relations versus Human Resources
Human Relations Human Resources
Worker
Needs
Workers need to belong, be liked,
and be respected.
While workers need to belong, be liked, and be
respected, workers also want to creatively and
effectively contribute to worthwhile goals.
Worker
Desires
Workers really desire to feel as
though they are a useful part of the
organization.
Workers really desire to exercise initiative,
responsibility, and creativity, so management should
allow for these.
Outcomes
If worker needs and desires are
filled, they will willingly cooperate
and comply with management.
Management should tap into worker capabilities and
avoiding wasting untapped resources.
Job
Satisfaction
When employees’ needs and
desires are met, they’ll be more
satisfied.
When employees feel that they have self-direction
and control and are able to freely use their creativity,
experience, and insight, they will be more satisfied.
Productivity
Job satisfaction and reduced
resistance to formal authority will
lead to more productive workers.
When employees feel that they have self-direction
and control and are able to freely use their creativity,
experience, and insight, they will be more
productive.
Management
Goals
Managers should strive to ensure
that all employees feel like they are
part of the team.
Managers should help employees discover hidden
talents and ensure that all workers are able to fully
use their range of talents to help accomplish
organizational goals.
Decision
Making
Management should allow
employees to offer input on routine
decisions and be willing to discuss
these decisions, but management
should keep important decisions to
themselves.
Management should allow and encourage employees
to freely participate in the decision-making process
with all types of decisions. In fact, the more
important the decision is, the more the manager
should seek out employee resources in the decision-
making process.
Information
Sharing
Information sharing is a useful tool
when helping employees feel like
they are part of the group.
Information sharing is vital for effective decision
making and should include the full range of
creativity, experience, and insight from employees.
Teamwork
Management should allow teams to
exercise moderate amounts of self-
direction and control.
Management should encourage teamwork and
continually look for areas where teams can exercise
more control.
This table is based on Miles’s models of participative leadership. Miles, R. E.
(1965). Human relations or human resources? Harvard Business Review, 43(4),
148–157, p. 151.
Key People in Human-Resources Theories
As we see in Table 3.2, there some key differences between human-relations and
human-resources theories. These differences can be broken down into two basic
categories: motivation and decision making. The rest of this section surveys both
of these areas and the key people who researched these phenomena.
Motivation Theories
Abraham Maslow's Hierarchy of Needs
Many theorists tried to explain the importance of the human resources approach.
One of these individuals was Abraham Maslow. [5] He is widely known for his
creation of Maslow’s hierarchy of needs. In order to get employees to work, he
tried to understand what motivates people. He knew that managers and
consultants were aware that certain aspects of work were more appealing than
others for workers. Workers can rank what they feel is most important for them
as an individual. With this information, Maslow came up with five needs that
need to be satisfied at one stage before moving on to another stage. Maslow felt
that needs vary from person to person and that individuals want their needs
fulfilled. One must determine what is the motivational factor.
Physiological Needs. The first level of Maslow’s hierarchy of needs is
physiological, which means that physical needs such as food and water need to
be met before moving to the next level. If workers do not make enough money to
buy food and water, then it will be hard for them to continue working.
Safety Needs. The second level is safety. Workers need to be in a safe
environment and know that their bodies and belongings will be protected. If
workers don’t feel secure, then they will find it hard to work efficiently. Think of
the many occupations that are highly unsafe. According to an article on the CNN
Money website, [6] the top ten most dangerous jobs in the United States are as
follows:
1. Fisherman
2. Logger
3. Airplane pilot
4. Farmer and rancher
5. Mining machine operator
6. Roofer
7. Sanitation worker
8. Truck driver/delivery person
9. Industrial machine repair person
10. Police officer
According to Maslow’s basic theoretical premise, these individuals will have a
harder time worrying about needs at the higher levels unless they can overcome
the inherent lack of safety within these jobs.
Love, Affection, and Belongingness Needs. The third layer is called love,
affection, and belongingness needs. Maslow believed that if an individual met
the basic physiological and safety needs, then that individual would start
attempting to achieve love, affection, and belongingness needs next. “He [sic]
will hunger for affectionate relations with people in general, namely, for a place
in his [or her] group, and he [or she] will strive with great intensity to achieve
this goal.” [7] Maslow believed that organizations would have better worker
retention and satisfaction if they kept their employees in a cohesive environment.
Furthermore, if a worker feels isolated or ostracized from the work environment,
then he or she feels less motivated to work, which will lead to a decrease in
overall productivity.
Esteem Needs. The fourth layer is called esteem, and is represented by two
different sets of needs, according to Maslow. First, individuals are motivated by
the “desire for strength, for achievement, for adequacy, for confidence in the
face of the world, and for independence and freedom.” [8] Maslow goes on to
discuss a second subset of esteem needs: “We have what we may call the desire
for reputation or prestige (defining it as respect or esteem from other people),
recognition, attention, importance or appreciation.” [9] While Maslow originally
separated these two lists from each other, they clearly have more in common
than not. If employees do not feel that their input is valued at the organization,
they will seek out other places of employment that will value their input, because
humans have an intrinsic need to be appreciated for their efforts.
Self-Actualization Needs. The fifth layer is called self-actualization, and it is
the hardest to attain. Self-actualization “refers to the desire for self-fulfillment,
namely, to the tendency for [a person] to become actualized in what he [sic] is
potentially. This tendency might be phrased as the desire to become more and
more what one is, to become everything that one is capable of becoming.”
Maslow goes on to explain, “A musician must make music, an artist must paint,
a poet must write, if he [or she] is to be ultimately happy. What a man [or
woman] can be, he [or she] must be. This need we may call self-actualization.” [10] Maslow felt that if individuals could have their needs met in order of the
layers, then they would both be motivated and seek opportunities to excel.
All in all, Maslow’s hierarchy of needs helps us understand how to motivate
workers to strive for more in the organization. Hence communication is very
important, because we need to understand what our employees need in order to
motivate them to work more proficiently and productively. In organizational
communication, we must understand that people will be more responsive to the
organization if their needs are fulfilled in order. If they are not fulfilled, then
workers will be frustrated and unable to work efficiently.
Figure 3.2 Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs
Source: http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/File:Maslow's_Hierarchy_of_Needs.svg
Frederick Herzberg's Motivation-Hygiene Theory
Another researcher to enter the fray of human motivation was Frederick
Herzberg. Originally trained as a clinical psychologist, Herzberg switched focus
over the course of his career and became one of the first researchers in the
growing field of industrial psychology. The original notion of Frederick
Herzberg’s motivation-hygiene theory was that traditional perspectives on
motivation, like Maslow’s, only looked at one side of the coin—how to motivate
people. Herzberg and his original colleagues [11] theorized that what ultimately
motivated individuals to work were not necessarily the same factors that led to
demotivation at work. In Herzberg’s worldview, motivation on the job should
lead to satisfied workers, but he theorized that satisfaction and dissatisfaction
were not opposite ends of one continuum. Instead, he predicted that the factors
that lead to positive job attitudes (and thus motivation) were different from the
factors that lead to negative job attitudes (and thus demotivation). For the
purposes of his theory, he called the factors that led to positive job attitudes
motivators and those factors that led to negative job attitudes hygiene factors.
In Table 3.3, the basic motivators and hygiene factors are listed. Notice that the
motivators are all centered on ideas somewhat similar to the esteem needs and
self-actualization needs of Abraham Maslow. On the other hand, the hygiene
factors all examine the context of work.
Table 3.3 Motivators and Hygiene Factors
Motivators Hygiene Factors
Achievement Policy and administration
Recognition Micromanagement
Advancement Relationships (supervisor, peers, and subordinates)
The work itself Job security
Responsibility Personal life
Potential for promotion Work conditions
Potential for personal growth Status
Salary Salary
Upon looking at Table 3.3, you may notice that Salary is entered for both
motivators and hygiene factors. In The Managerial Choice, Herzberg reversed
his previous thinking that salary was purely a hygiene factor: “Although
primarily a hygiene factor, it [salary] also often takes on some of the properties
of a motivator, with dynamics similar to those of recognition for achievement.” [12]
Decision Making
Douglas McGregor's Theory X and Theory Y
As we discussed earlier, the classical perspective felt that leadership should
control and order subordinates. Then, in the human-relations approach, we
learned that superiors need to cultivate and support their employees. Douglas
McGregor, [13] a management professor at the Massachusetts Institute of
Technology in the 1950s and 1960s, felt that there are two different perspectives,
which he termed Theory X and Theory Y. These theories were based on
assumptions that managers have about their workers.
McGregor defined a Theory X manager as one who believes that most people do
not like work. Workers are not smart or creative. People do not care about the
organization, and will adequately work when there are promises for rewards and
potential punishments. Moreover, a Theory X manager believes that people want
to have direction in order to evade responsibility.
On the other hand, Theory Y managers feel that people want to do what is best
for the organization and can direct themselves under the right conditions. Table
3.4 illustrates the differences between Theory X and Theory Y.
Table 3.4 Differences between Theory X and Theory Y
Theory X Theory Y
Workers:
• dislike work and find ways to avoid it
• avoid responsibility
• want direction
• resist change
• are not intelligent
• are not creative
Workers:
• perceive work as natural and find it enjoyable
• want responsibility
• prefer self-direction
• want to work toward organizational goals
• have the potential to develop and adapt
• are intelligent
• believe managers must control, reward, and/or
punish employees to maintain performance
• are creative
• believe work conditions need to be set to
achieve worker and organizational goals
KEY TAKEAWAY
Human resources encourages an environment where employees
have the ability to be creative and take risks in order to maximize
outcomes.
Human resources places an emphasis on more communication
than does human relations.
Maslow’s hierarchy of needs helps us to understand what
motivates people in organizations.
McGregor’s Theory X and Theory Y are assumptions that
managers have about their employees. They differ in the type of
communication involved, as well as the expectations of workers.
EXERCISES
1. Describe what you think are the most important characteristics of
human relations and human resources. Which do you prefer?
Why?
2. Think of examples where you see scientific management
principles, for example, “time is money,” being implemented today.
Maslow’s Hierarchy Of Needs:
Theory X:
Theory Y:
Hygiene Factors:
Motivators :
3. Create your own hypothetical Maslow’s hierarchy of needs. What
would motivate you to work in an organization? Use Figure 3.2 as
a guide when creating your pyramid.
4. Do you agree or disagree with the statement “The happy worker
is a productive worker”? Why or why not? Discuss your answers
as a group to determine if happiness is associated with
productivity in the workplace.
KEY TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
Model that suggests there are certain levels of human motivation and each level must be met before moving to the next level. Shaped like a pyramid, the model shows that humans’ most basic needs from lowest to highest are physical, then safety, love/belonging, esteem, and self-actualization.
This approach is similar to the scientific-management approach, where workers are expected only to work. In this perspective, managers believe that workers are apathetic toward work and people need direction. In addition, managers believe that workers are not smart, do not seek advancement, and avoid responsibility.
This approach is similar to the human-relations approach. In this perspective, managers believe that people want to succeed and they can excel if you give them the right to be creative. In addition, people want to work, seek direction, and are ambitious.
The list of factors that lead to negative job attitudes according to motivation theorist Frederick Herzberg.
The list of factors that lead to positive job attitudes according to motivation theorist Frederick Herzberg.
[1] Miles, R. E. (1965). Human relations or human resources? Harvard
Business Review, 43(4), 148–157.
[2] Miles, R. E. (1965). Human relations or human resources? Harvard
Business Review, 43(4), 148–157, p. 150.
[3] Miles, R. E., & Ritchie, J. B. (1971). Participative management:
Quality vs. quantity. California Management Review, 13(4), 48–56, p. 48.
[4] Miles, R. E. (1965). Human relations or human resources? Harvard
Business Review, 43(4), 148–157.
[5] Maslow, A. H. (1943). A theory of human motivation. Psychological
Review, 50, 370–96.
[6] Christie, L. (2011, August 26). America’s most dangerous jobs: The 10
most dangerous jobs in America. CNNMoney [website]. Retrieved from
http://money.cnn.com/galleries/2011/pf/jobs/1108/gallery.dangerous_jobs/index.html
[7] Maslow, A. H. (1943). A theory of human motivation. Psychological
Review, 50, 370–96, p. 381.
[8] Maslow, A. H. (1943). A theory of human motivation. Psychological
Review, 50, 370–96, p. 381.
[9] Maslow, A. H. (1943). A theory of human motivation. Psychological
Review, 50, 370–96, p. 381–382.
[10] Maslow, A. H. (1943). A theory of human motivation. Psychological
Review, 50, 370–96, p. 382. Emphasis in original.
[11] Herzberg, F., Mausner, B., & Snyderman, B. S. (1959). The
motivation to work. New York, NY: Wiley.
[12] Herzberg, F. (1976). The managerial choice: To be efficient and to be
human. Homewood, IL: Dow-Jones-Irwin, p. 71.
[13] McGregor, D. (1960). The human side of enterprise. New York, NY:
McGraw-Hill.
3.4 Chapter Exercises
REAL-WORLD CASE STUDY
McDaniel’s Burger Restaurant is a family-owned restaurant located
in a small town in Texas. The family has had the restaurant for three
generations. People come from far and wide to eat at the restaurant,
because McDaniel’s takes pride in cooking each burger to the
customer’s wants and needs. The restaurant prides itself in having
the most selections for meat and vegetarian burgers. In addition,
they carry a wide variety of toppings, such as ordinary toppings like
tomatoes, bacon, cheese, onions, and lettuce, but also unique
toppings like cucumbers, salsa, salad dressing, pineapple, and
sprouts. Customers can decide how they would like their burger
cooked: grilled or fried. Everyone in town loves McDaniel’s Burgers
because they are personalized and delicious.
Lately, business has been increasing because the population has
increased. The McDaniel family can no longer keep up with the
demand and decided to sell their business to a bigger firm, Burger
Business. Burger Business has many establishments and is used to
catering to large crowds. Burger Business executives liked
McDaniel’s Burgers but felt that the restaurant was not very efficient,
because customers would have to wait a long time before their
order was completed. Over time, the executives and consultants of
Burger Business felt that they needed to have five different stations.
The first station was for meat selection. For instance, the customer
can choose from beef, bison, elk, chicken, or veggie patty. The
second station was for meat preparation. The customer can choose
if they want their meat fried or grilled and to what degree. The third
station was for toppings. An attendant would help the customer with
the toppings for their burger. The fourth station was the side bar,
where customers could choose drinks and sides such as French
fries. The last station was the cashier, where customers would pay
for their meal. Most of the employees of McDaniel’s Burgers were
already trained in all areas of operations. Hence they could work in
any station and in any order. The Burger Business executives felt
that this would help with employee satisfaction because they could
work in a variety of stations and they could have more flexibility.
However, over time, the profits for McDaniel’s Burgers were not very
high. Moreover, employee retention was at an all-time low. However,
executives felt they could replace workers, because the task was so
simple. In addition, several customers no longer liked dining in the
restaurant as in the past. More customers were requesting to take
their orders home. The executives were confused because they felt
they had made productive and efficient changes. Initially, the
executives felt that the reason customers felt negative about the
business was because certain stations tended to have longer lines,
such as the toppings and sides bar. Hence they divided the toppings
stations into original toppings and unique toppings. They also
divided the sides bar into fries and drinks. The executives also
decided to get rid of toppings that customers rarely ordered, such as
anchovies and sauerkraut. Overall, the executives were happy with
the changes they made and felt that they could open more
McDaniel’s Burgers in other locations.
1. In the end, Burger Business executives had a positive perspective
of the future of McDaniel’s Burgers. Do you agree? Why? What
are some potential risks or pitfalls that the executives need to be
cautious about? What could they do to motivate workers?
2. Can you identify some of the classical theories presented in this
case study? What are some of the advantages and
disadvantages of these theories in this case study?
3. Let’s pretend Burger Business hired you as a communication
consultant for McDaniel’s Burgers. What information would you
collect? How will this information help you predict the future
outcome of this business? What would you expect the findings to
be? How would you use this information to make suggestions to
the executives?
4. Pretend you are a customer of McDaniel’s Burgers. How do you
feel communication can be improved for the customers of
McDaniel’s Burgers? What would customers prefer or dislike with
this establishment?
5. Pretend you are an employee of McDaniel’s Burgers. How do you
feel that communication can be improved? Why is there such a
high employee turnover rate? How can executives help with the
employee retention rate?
REAL-WORLD CASE STUDY
Clancey Shoe Factory has a reputation for good shoes made with
pride and love. Clancey Shoe Factory is a small family business that
supports many of the businesses in the major metropolitan area of
Lubbock, Texas. However, a new generation of Clancey children
would like to see their business grow and have expanded their
market online. Now, the business is getting even busier. More and
more orders are coming in every day from all around the world. To
keep up with the demand, the Clancey family had to hire more
workers to make shoes. However, with more workers also come
more problems. In order to keep production moving in an efficient
and timely order, they had three main work areas. The first station
was in charge of advertising and taking orders and inventory. The
second station was in charge of shoe development and creation.
The third station was in charge of shoe delivery and order
completion. Every worker had different perceptions about the other
stations and believed that their own work was harder. Hence they
wanted more compensation and more benefits compared to the
other workers in the various stations. Within stations, there was
friction among the workers with more experience or higher customer
satisfaction. At first, everyone was paid the same amount. However,
workers felt that was not fair due to their personal tasks or
experiences. The Clanceys have many orders to fill, but they will
lose business if they cannot satisfy their workers.
1. Pretend you have been asked to be a human-resources expert for
the company. What can you do to improve the company?
2. How can you fix this problem? What changes can be made to the
company?
3. If you were a worker for this company, what would you want?
Why?
4. If you were the owner of this company, what would you do? Why?
END-OF-CHAPTER ASSESSMENT
1. The word theory originally derives its name from a Greek word theoria, θεωρία, which roughly translated means:
a. generalization b. affiliation c. contemplation d. harmonization e. actualization
2. Sara gets a job where she has to stamp letters all day. She is given no other task or opportunity to talk with others. What classical perspective best describes her job?
a. scientific management b. bureaucracy c. Theory Y d. Hawthorne effect e. authority
3. Weber stated that the best way to select authority was:
a. bureaucracy b. traditional ways c. charismatic d. b and c e. all of the above
4. Fayol believed that there is a hierarchical order of authority, a sequence and succession to how communication is transferred from one person to another. This is known as:
a. scalar chain b. subordination of individual interests to general interest c. order d. authority e. unity of command
5. All of the following are characteristics of the human relations
approach except:
a. workers’ desire to feel as though they are a useful part of the organization
b. if workers’ needs are filled, they will comply c. when employee needs and desires are met, they are more
satisfied d. management should tap into worker capabilities e. management should allow employees to offer input but
keep important decisions to themselves
Answer Key
1. c
2. a
3. a
4. a
5. d
Chapter 4
Modern Theories of Organizational Communication
Expanding Your View
Up to now, your introduction to organizational communication has been fairly
straightforward. The definition of an “organization” presented in Chapter 1
emphasized aspects of the workplace that you probably expected, such as
structure, goals, and personnel. Likewise, the definition of “communication”
featured elements that can be easily understood—source, message, channel,
receiver. Then in Chapter 3, we explored classical theories of organizational
communication that are driven by attitudes you have likely encountered on the
job—your supervisor’s desire for machinelike efficiency, your company’s view
of employees as “human resources” that must be beneficially managed.
In this chapter, however, we are going to complicate these pictures. Yet by
expanding your view of “organization” and “communication,” you can better
understand the often bewildering and messy realities of everyday life on the job.
Modern theories of organizational communication—the subject of this chapter—
are driven by a recognition that “real life” in the workplace seldom conforms to
such ideals as smoothly operating hierarchies and clearly transmitted messages.
For example, has your boss ever yelled at you? Irrational behavior can be
difficult to square with classical theories of organization and communication.
Though a message is obviously being transmitted from a source (your boss) to a
receiver (you), insults generate far more mental stimulation than is necessary
and, in fact, introduce inaccuracies that will likely cause you to misinterpret the
message. Cursing hardly reflects the scientific management advocated by
Frederick Taylor, the impersonal environment espoused by Max Weber, and the
precise wording of commands favored by Henri Fayol. So by these lights, your
boss’s yelling is inefficient and counterproductive. Neither are curses and insults
conducive to good human relations in the workplace or to satisfying your
hierarchy of needs, or giving you positive motivation and enjoyment in your job,
or encouraging your involvement in workplace decisions. By all these accounts,
yelling and cursing is bad management and yet, as we will see in Chapter 13, it
occurs daily in organizations worldwide. One study estimated that 37 percent of
workers will be subjected to workplace bullying in the course of their careers. In
the United States alone, that amounts to more than fifty-six million people. [1]
In this chapter, we will expand our view of organization and communication in
ways that allow us to consider some new perspectives: Did your boss yell to
assert power over you? Was this assertion of power rooted in historical
prejudices or in attitudes that prevail in the surrounding society? Is aggression
tied to the very nature of organizing itself? Or is aggression rooted in the culture
of your particular organization, a pattern that employees past and present have
established, so that yelling is a way that people “make sense” of a
supercompetitive work environment?
Learning about modern theories of organizational communication will help us
explore such questions. Before describing these theories, however, we must
revisit the assumptions that we have built up in the preceding chapters. This is
because modern theories are often based on different assumptions about the
nature of organizations and communication than are classical theories. We are
not asking you to discard classical thinking; the theories of Taylor, Weber and
Fayol, and those of human relations and human resources, address real issues in
the workplace and remain influential. Rather, we are asking you to build on the
foundation of classical theory and now expand your view.
[1] Namie, G. (2010). 2010 U.S. workplace bullying survey. Workplace
Bullying Institute. Retrieved from
http://www.workplacebullying.org/wbiresearch/2010-wbi-national-survey
4.1 Rethinking the Organization
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
1. Differentiate among the four approaches to theorizing about
organizations: postpositive, interpretive, critical, and postmodern.
2. Understand how these approaches are driven by three decisions
about ontology (how things exist), epistemology (how things are
known), and axiology (what is worth knowing).
In Chapter 1, we read fifteen representative definitions of “organization” (see
“Defining Organization” sidebar). All fifteen contained one or more of the
following words (or their variants): system, structure, unit, collective, pattern,
coordination.
When we think of a “system” or “structure,” we usually think of an object, a
thing that exists independently of the people in it. People come and go, but the
system endures. Yet when we think of a system as a “thing,” we are thinking
metaphorically. As noted in the introduction to Chapter 3, a metaphor is not a
literal description but rather a linguistic means to grasp a concept by comparing
it to something from the real world. Thus we think of time as an object in such
metaphors as “time flies” and “time is money.” [1] In the same way, although a
system is not an actual, literal, physical object that you can hold in your hands,
thinking of it that way helps you picture how a system functions.
Similarly, when you think of an “organization,” you probably think of it as an
object with its own existence. Most people do. A corporation, for example, is
considered a “person” under US law for purposes ranging from taxation to free
speech. Clearly, however, thinking of an organization as an object is a metaphor.
Nevertheless, the way that we conceptualize an “organization” has very real
consequences for organizational communication theory.
Three Decisions about Theory
The assumption that an organization is an object with an independent existence
—that is to say, it has an “objective” rather than “subjective” reality—is
characteristic of the postpositive (sometimes called positivist or functionalist)
tradition in organizational communication scholarship. In this section we will
review the postpositive perspective and then, as alternatives, introduce the
interpretive, critical, and postmodern perspectives on organizations. Each
approach to how we conceive of organizations involves different assumptions.
For theorists, their assumptions imply three decisions: ontology, epistemology,
and axiology.
Ontology: How things Exist
Our ontology is how we think about the nature of being. Do we think of an
organization as having its own existence and own behaviors that continue
independently of the various managers and employees who come and go over
time? Or do we believe these individuals create and continuously recreate the
organization and therefore drive its behaviors? Or is our concept of the
organization, and our expectations for the form it should take and what it should
do, determined by larger historical and cultural forces?
Epistemology: How Things Are Known
Our epistemology is our philosophy of how things come to be known. Do we
believe that knowledge about an organization is attained by observing collective
actions and measuring aggregate behaviors? Or by listening to individual
members of an organization and interpreting organizational life on their terms?
Or by tracing the historical and cultural forces that have shaped people’s
expectations for what an organization should be and the roles that managers and
employees should play?
Axiology: What is Worth Knowing
Our axiology is what we believe is worth knowing, a decision that involves a
value judgment. Many social scientists believe that only empirical evidence, or
what can be directly and impartially observed and measured, is worth knowing.
Others ask whether any research is truly value neutral or can be based on “just
the facts.” Does not the choice of research method influence what is found?
Indeed, is not a decision to accept only what can be measured in itself a value
judgment? Where some scholars strive to produce impartial knowledge that
organizational management can use to improve results, others believe such a
goal implicitly supports the current system and those in power. Furthermore,
where some researchers measure aggregate responses, others strive to hear
organizational members on their own terms while giving voice to the powerless
and thereby effecting social change.
All three issues—ontology, epistemology, and axiology—are deeply implicated
in both classical and modern theories of organizational communication.
Four Questions about Organizations
What is now called the postpositive (or sometimes positivist or functionalist)
approach dominated organization studies through the 1970s. [2] Most scholars in
the field took it for granted that organizations could, and should, be studied
through scientific methods. Then in 1979, Gibson Burrell and Gareth Morgan
published an influential work that proposed new paradigms for organizational
studies. [3] They started with four basic questions about the assumptions of social
science:
1. Do social realities, such as organizations, have objective or subjective
existence; that is, do they exist on their own or only in people’s minds?
2. Can one understand these social realities through observation or must they
be directly experienced?
3. Is knowledge best gained by scientific methods or by participating in a
social reality from the inside?
4. Do people have free will or are they determined by their environments?
According to Burrell and Morgan, these issues boil down into two fundamental
debates: whether social realities exist objectively or subjectively and whether
their basic state is order or conflict. These two questions form the axes of a 2x2
matrix, which we have adapted from Burrell and Morgan and show in Figure
4.1.
Figure 4.1 Burrell and Morgan’s Approaches to Organizations
During the 1980s and beyond, scholars used Burrell and Morgan’s matrix to
flesh out new approaches for organizational research. [4] More recently, Stanley
Deetz took stock of how the field has developed since Burrell and Morgan’s
original analysis. [5] For him, the two fundamental issues in research are whether
order or conflict is the natural state of an organization and whether researchers
apply “knowledge to” or derive “knowledge from” an organization—that is,
whether they start with an existing theory and see how an organization might fit
or study an organization on its own terms. Thus some researchers begin with a
general theory of why organizations produce order (or conflict) and then apply
the theory to explain a specific case. Other researchers, however, first study a
specific organization to discover its patterns of order (or conflict) and then
explain these patterns by citing an existing theory or proposing a new one.
Our own survey of the literature suggests that theorizing about organizations is
governed by two basic questions. First, do social realities (such as organizations)
have objective or subjective existence? In other words, do social phenomena
“have a reality that is independent of their being perceived by someone” or
“exist only in relation to some point of view”? [6] Second, what is the source of
structure? Here, theorists debate the issue of structure versus agency—or
whether people are determined by their environments (structures) or have free
will (agency). Applied to an organization, the question is whether its structures
are determined by larger social forces or created by its members. From our two
basic questions—the nature of reality, the source of structure—we derive the
four approaches to modern organizational communication theory that are used
throughout this book:
1. Postpositive theorists hold that an organization’s structures, although
originally created by its members, literally take on a life of their own and
over time become objectively real.
2. Interpretive theorists hold that an organization’s structures exist
subjectively (i.e., only in relation to its members’ perceptions) and so are
constantly created and recreated.
3. Critical theorists hold that an organization’s structures are objectively real,
but they believe these structures originate in the larger social environment,
which determines who is privileged and who is not.
4. Postmodern theorists hold that structure is subjective and, further, is
constantly in flux because organization members are preconditioned by
competing social forces to perceive reality in competing ways.
Thus a postpositive researcher might study how an organization’s hierarchy
endures even as individual managers and employees come and go; an
interpretive researcher would investigate how managers and employees
constantly adapt the hierarchy to changing needs. On the other hand, a critical
researcher might demonstrate how an organization’s hierarchy reflects
unquestioned assumptions of male domination that prevail throughout society,
and a postmodern researcher might show how power relations in a given
organization are constantly shaped and reshaped by members’ competing
perceptions.
As we will describe later, your task is not to choose one “best” approach to
organizational communication but to appreciate and draw from each. Toward
that end, let us now explore each of the four approaches in more detail. In so
doing, we will focus on their ontologies, epistemologies, and axiologies, which
are summarized for you in Figure 4.3 at the end of this section. For now, we are
only describing the approaches and not specific theories within each approach.
Postpositive Approach
The word postpositive suggests the approach is a successor to a “positive”
philosophy. The two terms have specific meanings in the history of science. As
Steven Corman explained, where positivist scientists of the early twentieth
century believed reality matters only when it can be perceived, today’s
postpositivists hold that reality exists independently of perception. [7] Thus as we
have already seen, the postpositive approach holds that an organization is
objectively “real” and does not depend for its existence on its members’
subjective perceptions.
Lex Donaldson succinctly captured the implications of this approach: “In any
situation, to attain the best outcome, the decision-makers must choose the
structure that best fits that situation…with the ideas of the decision-makers
making no independent contribution to the explanation of the structure.” Since
an organization can survive only if it performs well, managers are ultimately
forced—no matter how they individually perceive the problem—to choose the
course of action that gets the best results. Even when managers choose second-
best options, the resulting performance deficit forces managers to correct the
mistake. In the end, “the consciousness of the actors [is] superfluous” because
“there will be an irresistible tendency for organization managers to choose
options that conform to the situational imperative…with no moderation by
managerial ideas.” [8] In other words, because the organization is objectively
“real,” no matter what any single individual thinks, the needs of the organization
come first.
The same holds true when managers communicate; they are forced, in the end, to
choose messages and channels that best contribute to the bottom line. In the
postpositive view, then, the purpose of organizational communication is
instrumental—that is, an instrument for achieving results. Accurate messages
and precise instructions are therefore seen as the best guarantors of optimal
performance.
Given this conception of the organization, we can see how the postpositive
approach exhibits a distinctive ontology (belief in how things exist),
epistemology (belief in how things are known), and axiology (belief in what is
worth knowing). Because the organization has an independent reality, its
imperatives—to survive, to get the best results—drive what people do (rather
than vice versa). And because individual mind-sets ultimately do not matter,
researchers learn about an organization by observing its aggregate behaviors.
Thus Frederick Taylor’s classical theory of scientific management is based on
the assumption that what comes out of the organization is a function of what
went in. This idea is expressed in the popular acronym GIGO, for “garbage in,
garbage out.” So when managers observe poor output, they must scientifically
adjust input so their metaphorical well-oiled machine can work at maximum
capacity. The goal, not only for managers but for postpositive organizational
theorists, is to move from description and explanation to prediction of causes
and effects, which implies the ability to control effects by adjusting causes.
Figure 4.2 illustrates this progression. In organizational research, studies
undertaken from a postpositive perspective are often intended to generate
knowledge that can be applied to improving management practices.
Figure 4.2 Goals for Postpositive Research
Even as Taylor did a century ago with his time-and-motion studies, those today
who study organizations from a postpositive perspective see themselves as social
scientists. They practice nomothetic research methods that emphasize scientific
testing of hypotheses and employ quantitative methods, such as surveys and
experiments, which generate numerical data. For postpositive researchers, this is
the only data worth knowing; they disfavor the ideographic data generated by
such qualitative methods as ethnographic fieldwork, interviews, journals, and
diaries. Postpositive scholars believe that ideographic data is inherently
subjective and thus unable to describe the objective reality of organizational
communication. The ultimate goal of nomothetic research is to discover general
laws that, ideally, can be applied to all cases. Classical examples of the
nomothetic approach to research are described in Chapter 3, including the
Hawthorne Studies of Elton Mayo and the pajama factory study of Kurt Lewin.
In fairness, we must point out that people who conduct postpositive research
generally do not use that term. Since the field of organizational communication
arose in the early twentieth century as an outgrowth of management science,
scholars today who draw on that tradition in their studies of communication call
themselves social scientists—as do their counterparts in allied fields such as
industrial psychology and organizational behavior. Even today, the social-
scientific approach to organizational communication accounts for nearly half of
the research published within the field. [9] As noted earlier, you can refer to
Figure 4.3 for a summary of postpositive ontology (how things exist),
epistemology (how things are known), and axiology (what is worth knowing).
Interpretive Approach
Where postpositive theorists believe the organization drives what its people do,
interpretive theorists believe the reverse: that people drive what their
organizations do and, in fact, what their organizations are. As Dennis Mumby
and Robin Clair put it, “Organizations exist only in so far as their members
create them through discourse,” with discourse being “the principal means by
which organization members create a coherent social reality that frames their
sense of who they are.” [10] In other words, communication is not just one
activity, among many others, that an organization “does.” Rather, the
organization itself is constituted through its members’ communication; it does
not exist objectively, but only in relation to its members’ points of view.
This explains the ontology of interpretive theorists, or their belief in how
organizations have being. Their epistemology, or how these theorists believe
knowledge is gained, is expressed by the word interpretive. Recall that
postpositive theorists believe the mind-sets of individuals do not matter since
they are irresistibly forced to choose the most effective courses of action; thus to
know an organization it is sufficient to observe its aggregate behaviors. By
contrast, interpretive theorists believe that simple observation is insufficient; the
mind-sets of organization members must also be interpreted. Hence this
approach to studying organizational communication is called interpretive.
But how do you interpret what is going on inside someone’s mind? Many
methods are used. These usually begin with collecting primary data such as
interviews with people at various levels of the organization and copies of
organizational documents such as mission statements, annual reports, policy
manuals, internal memoranda, and the like. Researchers who engage in
organizational ethnography do fieldwork in which they may spend a year or
more visiting an organization, attending weekly staff meetings, participating in
rituals such as office parties and company picnics, joining in ordinary
conversations around the water cooler, and then recording their observations.
Techniques for analyzing these ideographic data are also varied and may include
discourse analysis, conversation analysis, genre analysis, rhetorical analysis, and
other methods.
These analytical methods involve an examination of how organization members
use language to construct a shared social reality. By interpreting how language is
used (e.g., company slang, recurring phrases, common metaphors, use of active
and passive voice, what arguments employees find persuasive, how people
address one another, how people take turns in talking), researchers uncover the
underlying assumptions within an organization that its people take for granted
and may not explicitly verbalize. Interpretive researchers, then, believe that
organizational communication is not merely an instrument for getting results.
Rather, people in organizations communicate with each other to make sense of
their workplace and negotiate their places within the organization. Though
managers may believe that precise instructions maximize productivity, directives
that ignore employee perceptions can be disregarded, misinterpreted, and even
counterproductive.
The axiology of interpretive scholars is evident from their research. Where
postpositive researchers do not regard organization members’ individual mind-
sets (which cannot be directly observed or measured) as worth knowing,
interpretive researchers believe these data and their interpretation are essential to
understanding organizational life. Moreover, where the goal of postpositive
researchers is to move from description and explanation to prediction of
organizational behaviors, interpretive scholars believe that studying an
organization on its own terms means producing a description and interpretation
of organizational life that is faithful to its members’ own understandings.
Interpretive researchers can, and do, make their findings about an organization’s
communication and culture available to their subjects; in turn, organizations may
use this information to address negative perceptions and to change a
dysfunctional company culture into a more humane one. Interpretive researchers
see their role not as changing the status quo but describing it. Yet identifying the
unspoken assumptions that circulate within an organization may be the first step
in addressing inhumane practices. For a summary of interpretive ontology (how
things exist), epistemology (how things are known), and axiology (what is worth
knowing), see Figure 4.3.
Critical Approach
A generation ago, you might have read a company manual that stated, “When an
employee is late to work, he must report immediately to his supervisor.” Today
we read that sentence and, right away, notice its use of sexist language. But at
the time, it was common to use the masculine pronoun as an inclusive reference
for both sexes. For decades, even centuries, the practice was so widely accepted
as natural and self-evident that people did not question this use of the masculine
pronoun. In the 1960s, for example, the mission of the starship Enterprise in the
Star Trek television series was “to boldly go where no man has gone before.”
Not until a sequel series debuted in the late 1980s was the mission statement
rephrased, “To boldly go where no one has gone before.” Living in the twenty-
first century, we now wonder how an earlier generation could have accepted
sexist language without question. Yet consider this: which of our own
assumptions will someday seem “unenlightened” to our children and
grandchildren?
Think of some things we take for granted about the workplace. If someone asked
you who “owns” the company you work for, you would answer with the name of
person who is the “owner” in a financial sense. It just seems natural and self-
evident that the one who holds the purse strings is the owner—even though you
too have a tangible stake in the company and help make its activities possible.
And in a free enterprise economy, we take for granted the notion that increased
profits benefit everyone. Even college students, before they enter the workforce,
accept this premise. Most young people attend college to “make more money”
by learning job skills that will fit them into the needs of money-making
corporations. Therefore, as corporations and their employees all make more
money, everyone wins.
These assumptions illustrate what critical theorists call the reification and
universalization of managerial interests. Reification is the process by which
something historical is made to seem natural. For example, what we call the
profit motive did not always exist; it emerged under specific historical conditions
as premodern feudal economies gave way to modern capitalist economies. But
we have so reified the profit motive that its pursuit seems natural, normal, self-
evident, and beyond questioning. This process of reification produces a “double
move” by ensuring that managerial interests are considered the only legitimate
interests, while simultaneously hiding the domination of those interests by
making them seem perfectly natural. Thus the interests of management are
universalized and represented as identical to everyone’s interests. To speak of
“company interests” is, in reality, to speak of managerial interests. Such
distortion becomes, from a critical perspective, the very purpose of
organizational communication—that is, the operation of dominant interests to
create a “false” consensus between management and employees.
Critical theorists, like the postmodern theorists we will review later in this
section, see the organization as created by larger forces of history and society.
But unlike postmodern theorists who see the organization in constant flux within
the swirling streams of those forces, critical theorists tend to see the structures of
power and domination as being so reified that they constitute “a concrete,
relatively fixed entity.” [11] Again, this requires a decision about ontology or the
nature of existence—in our case, about the nature of organizational existence.
In addition to reification and universalization, critical theorists are concerned
with two more questions: how reasoning in organizations becomes grounded in
“what works” and how dominant managerial interests gain the consent of
subordinate interests. Jurgen Habermas noted how the modern age has
increasingly supplanted practical reasoning that seeks mutual consensus with
technical reasoning that calculates the means and controls needed to accomplish
a desired end. [12] Critical theorists have applied this insight to organizational life
by critiquing how corporations make technical reasoning—or determination of
“what works” in achieving managerial interests—appear to be the only rational
approach. Practical reasoning that fosters mutual determination of organizational
goals either is made to seem irrational or is even leveraged by management as
another “technique” to further its own interests. Thus ideas such as promoting
worker participation are either dismissed as inefficient or used as a new means to
bring workers into alignment with corporate interests. Why do workers consent
to such domination? Critical theorists have looked at bureaucratic forms,
coercions and rewards, and organizational cultures. These structures may
provide no chance for alternative modes of thinking—or may cause employees
to identify so completely with an organization, they no longer require control but
willingly discipline themselves.
But if organizational structures have been made to seem natural, then how,
according to critical scholars’ epistemology, can these taken-for-granted
structures become known? Most critical-organization researchers engage in
ideology critique. These researchers bring to their subjects an existing theory
and then use it as a framework to expose how a dominant ideology has operated
to reify and universalize its interests. A good example is provided by Karl Marx,
the originator of ideology critique. He theorized that differences between capital
and labor are built into the very structure of the capitalist system and its
ideology. Then he employed his theory to explain how the few (who owned
capital) could not only exploit the many (who owned only their labor) but also
make their domination appear legitimate and natural. Notions of economic class
differences remain an influential strand of ideology critique. Yet other bases for
criticism have also become important. More recently, feminist theory offers
another example of ideology critique as researchers bring theories about gender-
based structures of domination and use these as frameworks to expose or
“denaturalize” the patriarchal assumptions that organizations take for granted.
In addition to ideology critique, a second stream of critical scholarship has
emerged that follows the theories of Jurgen Habermas about “communicative
action.” [13] Where critical scholars have traditionally plumbed the ways that
meaning, thought, and consciousness itself are distorted by dominant discourses,
Habermas began in the late 1970s to explore how communication is distorted.
He proposed that, ideally, a communicative act should satisfy three conditions:
participants should have equal opportunities to speak, should be heard without
preconceptions of what is “true” or preconceptions of what is “proper,” and
should be able to speak according to their own lived experiences. Scholars, then,
can critique how organizations distort these conditions. The following are
examples:
Managers have more opportunities to speak.
“Bottom-line” considerations are a privileged form of knowledge and seen
as the only rational basis for resolving issues.
The organization’s structure dictates, in advance, the proper relations
between management and labor.
Discussions of workplace concerns must take place within the context of
“company” (i.e., managerial) interests.
Yet Habermas’s model for communicative action also suggests possibilities for a
positive agenda. A number of scholars have proposed how legitimate
organizational communication can be restored through democratization of the
workplace. [14]
As we learned previously in this section, postpositive and interpretive theorists
look for order to emerge in organizations. Postpositive researchers look for the
ways that organizational imperatives for efficiency and productivity bring
members into alignment; interpretive researchers look for the ways that members
create, through their communication, stable communities and shared cultures. By
contrast, critical theorists believe that organizations are sites where historical and
societal ideologies are in conflict and where reified structures produce dominant
and subordinate discourses. Other researchers may look for surface stability, but
critical theorists’ axiology regards an organization’s submerged voices—
workers, women, people of color—as worth knowing. Critical theorists’
scholarship aims to recover these marginalized voices, lay bare an organization’s
reified structures for all to see, reopen possibilities previously foreclosed by
those structures, and replace false consensus with true consensus. Given that
emancipation is their goal, critical researchers combine scholarship with
activism. Again, you can see Figure 4.3 for a summary of critical ontology (how
things exist), epistemology (how things are known), and axiology (what is worth
knowing).
Postmodern Approach
Many critical theorists hold that larger social forces produce structures of power
—such as male domination or racial discrimination—with fixed and objective
existences. But postmodern theorists of organizational communication take a
different view. “Reality” constantly fluctuates in the ongoing contests among
competing social forces or “discourses.” Humans themselves are sites of
competition between these discourses. So, despite our conceit that we have an
independent “self” and control our own intentions, we are products of the
multiple voices that shape and condition us. As Robert Cooper and Gibson
Burrell explained, postmodern theorists “analyze social life in terms of paradox
and indeterminacy, thus rejecting the human agent as the center of rational
control and understanding.” In contrast to the modernist approach in which the
“organization is viewed as a social tool and an extension of human rationality,”
the postmodern approach sees the “organization [as] less the expression of
planned thought and calculative action and more a defensive reaction to forces
extrinsic to the social body which constantly threaten the stability of organized
life.” [15]
Perhaps an analogy can help. Imagine the sweep of great historical and cultural
discourses as an ocean. Its constantly swirling waves and currents determine the
actions and perceptions of all who sail upon it. An organization, then, is like a
flotilla of ships that negotiate a temporary agreement to sail as a convoy until
land is reached. Though an organization may last for decades, rather than days or
weeks, in time the currents of history and society that brought it together will
pull it apart. Postmodern theorists therefore reject the notion that, as a social
object, the “organization” has an objective and enduring existence.
As postmodern theories of organizational communication have developed over
the past generation, several themes have emerged. First is the centrality of
discourse, so that an organization is regarded as a “text” that postmodern
analysts can “read.” The goal in “reading” this “text” is to unravel the underlying
—and hidden—historical and cultural discourses reflected in the organization.
This focus on discourse also means that postmodern scholars view language,
rather than thought or consciousness, as the decisive factor in the social shaping
of organizations. Individuals are not the bearers of meaning but are caught in
webs of meaning that language creates.
Following on this idea, a second theme emerges. Organizations are said to be
decentered; the free will of their members is not the central driving force since
people are preconditioned by language. Moreover, since organizations are only
clusters of temporary consensus between competing discourses, over time these
discourses tend to produce fragility rather than unity. Different levels of
organization—from executives and middle managers to office employees and
field personnel—look at things according to their own experiences and interests.
These multiple voices generate varying perspectives, producing multiple social
realities rather than a single organizational culture. Thus postmodern scholars
say that organizations are fragmented. Nor is clash of voices without effect on
individuals, who are shaped by the multiple discourses operating across the
organization and surrounding society. For this reason, postmodernists say
individuals’ organizational identities are overdetermined and therefore
precarious and unstable.
Given that each organization is a unique “text” that is ever fluid, a third theme in
postmodern analysis is what Jean-François Lyotard called an “incredulity toward
metanarratives.” [16] In contrast to critical scholars who look at organizations
through the prism of an overarching theory—such as Marx’s theories about class
struggle or Habermas’s theories about communicative action—postmodern
scholars deconstruct the “text” of an organization for what it is; they do not fit
the “text” into an existing theory or “metanarrative.” Thus a fourth theme in the
postmodern approach to organizations is the need to deconstruct the particular
connections, within each organization, between knowledge and power.
Organizational communication, then, amounts for postmodernists to the ongoing
contest between discourses. The dominant interest works to sustain its power by
ensuring that organizational knowledge is rendered on its own terms; any other
interpretations are made to seem unnatural. Postmodern scholars strive to reopen
taken-for-granted discourses of knowledge and power, trace their formation, and
help recover the voices that have been marginalized.
In tracing out the knowledge-power connection, many postmodern
organizational scholars follow the work of French philosopher Michel Foucault. [17] Like Foucault, these scholars are concerned with the ways that modern
organizations have eliminated the need to enforce discipline through physical
punishment and real-time surveillance but have “manufactured consent” and
thereby “produced” employees who willingly discipline themselves.
Nevertheless, Foucault did not see power only in terms of constraint. Power also
enables action by charting possibilities and the channels to realize them.
Postmodern scholarship lays bare the power relations within organizations,
putting these relations back into play and helping marginalized voices restructure
the field of action to open up previously foreclosed possibilities. [18]
Figure 4.3 Approaches to Organizational Theory and Research
Combining Approaches
Until the 1970s, organizational research mostly proceeded from what we have
called a postpositive approach. Articulating new paradigms, Stanley Deetz
noted, “gave legitimacy to fundamentally different research programs and
enabled the development of different criteria for the evaluation of research.” [19]
At the same time, however, labeling has created distinct communities of
researchers that each favor a particular paradigm and can sometimes ignore or
even dismiss the work of others.
The authors of this textbook individually take different approaches to
organizational communication research. Yet we believe all perspectives make
valuable contributions. For example, we share a common interest in
communication by members of organized religions. Jason Wrench and Narissra
Punyanunt-Carter are postpositive researchers who have conducted, with other
colleagues, extensive surveys of religious believers to produce an aggregate
statistical picture of their communication behaviors. [20] By contrast, Mark Ward
is an interpretive researcher who spent several years visiting local congregations,
participating in worship and rituals, observing communication firsthand, and
learning how members talk among themselves. [21] Yet we see these different
approaches not as an “either/or” choice but as complementary. The more detailed
case studies we have, the more possible it is to build reliable theories about
organizational communication. And the more reliable our theories become, the
more we can make sense of individual cases.
KEY TAKEAWAY
Different conceptions of an “organization” are behind different
approaches to theorizing about organizational communication.
The postpositive approach holds that an organization has an
objective existence; people come and go, but the organization
endures. The interpretive approach holds that an organization has
a subjective existence—people create and sustain it through their
communication. The critical approach holds that the structures of
power within an organization have a fixed existence and reflect
larger historical and cultural forces. The postmodern approach
also holds that the power relations within an organization reflect
larger historical and cultural discourses, but that these discourses
are fluid and ever changing.
Theories of organizational communication reflect assumptions
with regard to ontology (how things, including social phenomena
such as organizations, have existence), epistemology (how things
become known), and axiology (what is worth knowing). In the
previous takeaway, the ontologies of the four approaches to
theorizing about organizational communication are described. The
postpositive approach holds that organizations are known through
scientific inquiry and that only empirical findings are worth
knowing. The interpretive approach holds that organizations are
known by directly experiencing them and that individuals’
perceptions (though these cannot be measured) are worth
knowing. The critical approach holds that hidden power structures
are exposed by applying general theories about domination and
that the voices of marginalized groups are worth knowing. The
postmodern approach also holds that marginalized discourses are
worth knowing, but that hidden power relations are exposed by
deconstructing, or tracing back, how various discourses have
formed in a given organization.
EXERCISES
1. Think of the college or university that you are attending. Then
imagine a prospective student asking you, “What is the best way
to find out what your school is really like?” Would you advise the
prospect to take a survey of current students, or to spend some
time living on campus and participating in school activities? What
is the reason for your advice? Could you imagine how a
combination of both methods could be useful? Explain your
reasoning.
2. We described in this section how most students go to college to
“make more money,” taking for granted that higher education is
about fitting into the needs of corporations. Can you think of other
ways that the corporate world has influenced college students so
that you might think in ways that serve corporate interests? Why
might these thoughts seem natural to you, so that you do not
Critical:
Interpretive:
Postmodern :
Postpositive:
Axiology :
question them?
3. Which approach to theorizing organizational communication—
postpositive, interpretive, critical, or postmodern—makes the most
sense to you? Why? Explain your answer.
KEY TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
An approach to organizational communication that employs theory as a framework to expose the hidden power structures in organizations and the ways that dominant interests distort meaning, thought, consciousness, and communicative action to maintain their domination by marginalizing alternative expressions.
An approach to organizational communication holding that organizations have subjective existences and, in fact, are constituted through their members’ communication. As such, it is not enough to observe aggregate behaviors; individual mind-sets must be also be interpreted.
An approach to organizational communication holding that organizations come into existence as temporary combinations of interests against the threatening fluidity of larger historical and cultural discourses. As a reflection of these discourses, the organization is a “text” that can be “read” in order to trace back how its hidden power relations were formed.
An approach to organizational communication holding that organizations have objective existences. Since the imperative to optimize performance governs the organization, individual mind-sets ultimately are superfluous. Organizational behaviors are therefore best studied in the aggregate through empirical observations that lead to measurable results.
Philosophy of what is worth knowing. Some researchers accept only knowledge gained empirically through observation and measurement of aggregate behaviors; others believe that people’s
Decentered:
Deconstruct :
Epistemology :
Fragmented:
Ideographic :
Ideology Critique:
Nomothetic :
Ontology :
perceptions must be analyzed.
Because postmodernists believe that individuals are not autonomous but are shaped by language, they hold that individual free will is not the central driving force of an organization.
Postmodernists believe that an organization is a “text” that can be “read.” Deconstruction is the method by which analysts trace back the discourses that have formed the power relations within an organization.
Philosophy of how things are known. Some researchers believe it is sufficient to observe and measure an organization’s aggregate behaviors; others believe that the mind-sets and interactions of individuals must also be interpreted.
Because postmodernists believe that organizations are temporary and fluid combinations of differing interests, they hold that the various discourses of the interests do not produce the stability of a single unified pattern but instead generate multiple social realities that lead to organizational fragility and fragmentation.
An approach to knowledge that takes each case on its own terms by considering qualitative data such as ethnographic fieldwork, interviews, journals, and diaries.
An approach to critical scholarship that employs theory to expose how dominant interests distort meaning, thought, and consciousness to simultaneously legitimize and hide their domination.
An approach to knowledge that emphasizes scientific testing of hypotheses and employs quantitative tests, such as surveys, which generate numerical data. The ultimate goal of nomothetic research is to discover laws that can be generally applied across many cases.
Philosophy of how things have being. Some theorists believe an organization exists independently from how people perceive it; others believe an organization exists only in relation to the perceptions of its people or in relation to society.
[1] Lakoff, G., & Johnson, M. (1980). Metaphors we live by. Chicago, IL:
University of Chicago Press.
[2] Redding, C., & Tompkins, P. (1988). Organizational communication—
Past and future tenses. In G. Goldhaber & G. Barnett (Eds.), Handbook
of organizational communication (pp. 5–34). Norwood, NJ: Ablex.
[3] Burrell, G., & Morgan, G. (1979). Sociological paradigms and
organizational analysis. London, UK: Heinemann.
[4] For example, see Redding, C., & Tompkins, P. (1988). Organizational
communication—Past and future tenses. In G. Goldhaber & G. Barnett
(Eds.), Handbook of organizational communication (pp. 5–34). Norwood,
NJ: Ablex; Putnam, L. (1982). Paradigms for organizational
communication research. Western Journal of Speech Communication,
46, 192–206.
[5] Deetz, S. (2001). Conceptual foundations. In F. M. Jablin & L. L.
Putnam (Eds.), The new handbook of organizational communication:
Advances in theory, research, and methods (pp. 3–46). Thousand Oaks,
CA: Sage. See also Deetz, S. (1994). Representative practices and the
political analysis of corporations. In B. Kovacic (Ed.), Organizational
communication: New perspectives (pp. 209–242). Albany: State
University of New York Press.
[6] Corman, S. R. (2005). Postpositivism. In S. May & D. K. Mumby
(Eds.), Engaging organizational communication theory and research:
Multiple perspectives (pp. 15–34). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage, p. 25.
[7] Corman, S. R. (2005). Postpositivism. In S. May & D. K. Mumby
(Eds.), Engaging organizational communication theory and research:
Multiple perspectives (pp. 15–34). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
[8] Donaldson, L. (2003). Organization theory as a positive science. In H.
Tsoukas & C. Knudsen, The Oxford handbook of organizational theory:
Meta-theoretical perspectives (pp. 39–62). Oxford, UK: Oxford University
Press, pp. 44–45.
[9] Spence, P. R., & Baker, C. R. (2007). State of the method: An
examination of level of analysis, methodology, representation and setting
in current organizational communication research. Journal of the
Northwest Communication Association, 36, 111–124.
[10] Mumby, D. K., & Clair, R. P. (1997). Organizational discourse. In T. A.
van Dijk (Ed.), Discourse as structure and process, Vol. 2 (pp. 181–205).
London, UK: Sage, p. 181.
[11] Deetz, S. (2001). Conceptual foundations. In F. M. Jablin & L. L.
Putnam (Eds.), The new handbook of organizational communication:
Advances in theory, research, and methods (pp. 3–46). Thousand Oaks,
CA: Sage, p. 27.
[12] Habermas, J. (1971). Knowledge and human interests (J. Shapiro,
Trans.). Boston: Beacon. Habermas, J. (1971). Knowledge and human
interests (J. Shapiro, Trans.). Boston: Beacon.
[13] Habermas, J. (1984). The theory of communicative action: Vol. 1.,
Reason and the rationalization of society (T. McCarthy, Trans.). Boston:
Beacon; Habermas, J. (1987). The theory of communicative action: Vol.
2, Lifeworld and system. Boston: Beacon.
[14] For example, see Cheney, G. (1995). Democracy in the workplace:
Theory and practice from the perspective of communication. Journal of
Applied Communication Research, 23, 167–200; Deetz, S. (1992).
Democracy in the age of corporate colonization: Developments in
communication and the politics of everyday life. Albany: State University
of New York Press; Harrison, T. (1994). Communication and
interdependence in democratic organizations. In S. Deetz (Ed.),
Communication yearbook 17 (pp. 247–274). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
[15] Cooper, R., & Burrell, G. (1988). Modernism, postmodernism, and
organizational analysis: An introduction. Organization Studies, 9, 91–112,
p. 91.
[16] Lyotard, J.-F. (1984). The postmodern condition: A report on
knowledge (G. Bennington & B. Massumi, Trans.). Minneapolis:
University of Minnesota Press, p. xxiv.
[17] See Foucault, M. (1977). Discipline and punish: The birth of the
prison (A. Sheridan, Trans.). New York, NY: Pantheon; Foucault, M.
(1980). The history of sexuality (R. Hurley, Trans.). New York, NY:
Pantheon; Foucault, M. (1988). Technologies of the self. In L. H. Martin,
H. Gutman, & P. H. Hutton (Eds.), Technologies of the self: A seminar
with Michel Foucault (pp. 16–49). Amherst: University of Massachusetts
Press.
[18] Foucault, M. (1982). The subject and power. Critical Inquiry, 8, 777–
795, p. 791.
[19] Deetz, S. (2001). Conceptual foundations. In F. M. Jablin & L. L.
Putnam (Eds.), The new handbook of organizational communication:
Advances in theory, research, and methods (pp. 3–46). Thousand Oaks,
CA: Sage, p. 8.
[20] Punyanunt-Carter, N. M., Corrigan, M. W., Wrench, J. S., &
McCroskey, J. C. (2010). A quantitative analysis of political affiliation,
religiosity, and religious-based communication. Journal of
Communication and Religion, 33, 1–32; Punyanunt-Carter, N. M.,
Wrench, J. S., Corrigan, M. W., & McCroskey, J. C. (2008). An
examination of reliability and validity of the Religious Communication
Apprehension Scale. Journal of Intercultural Communication Research,
37, 1–15; Wrench, J. S., Corrigan, M. W., McCroskey, J. C., &
Punyanunt-Carter, N. M. (2006). Religious fundamentalism and
intercultural communication: The relationship among ethnocentrism,
intercultural communication apprehension, religious fundamentalism,
homonegativity, and tolerance for religious disagreements. Journal of
Intercultural Communication Research, 35, 23–44.
[21] Ward, M., Sr. (2009). Fundamentalist differences: Using ethnography
of rhetoric (EOR) to analyze a community of practice. Intercultural
Communication Studies, 18, 1–20; Ward, M., Sr. (2010). “I was saved at
an early age”: An ethnography of fundamentalist speech and cultural
performance. Journal of Communication and Religion, 33, 108–144;
Ward, M., Sr. (2013). Managing the anxiety and uncertainty of religious
otherness: Interfaith dialogue as a problem of intercultural
communication. In D. S. Brown (Ed.), Interfaith dialogue: Listening to
communication theory. Lanham, MD: Lexington; Ward, M., Sr. (in press).
Cognition, culture, and charity: Sociolinguistics and “donor dissonance” in
a Baptist denomination, Voluntas: International Journal of Voluntary and
Nonprofit Organizations; Ward, M., Sr (in press). The PowerPoint and the
glory: An ethnography of pulpit media and its organizational
impacts. Journal of Media and Religion.
4.2 Rethinking Communication
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
1. Differentiate among the three models for how communication
functions—linear, interactional, and transactional—and the
limitations of each model.
2. Differentiate among the seven traditions of communication theory
and understand how each approaches the nature of
communication and how meaning is exchanged.
In Section 1, we challenged you to rethink the concept of organization. Now we
turn to “communication.” You were introduced in Chapter 1 to the SMCR
(source, message, channel, receiver) model of communication. For two good
reasons, numerous textbooks in communication begin with this longstanding
model. First, its components—source, message, channel, receiver—are easy to
grasp. In our modern world of phones, computers, networks, and mass media,
we encounter the basic idea of the SMCR model on a daily basis. Second, the
model is effective in getting students to think—often for the first time—about
communication as more than just a reflex action, more than something that just
“happens.”
Now, however, we will consider two questions: how communication works and
what communication is. The SMCR model, for example, suggests
communication works by traveling in a straight line from source to receiver. But
scholars have largely moved beyond this simple linear model and have
described communication as an interactional or, more recently, a transactional
process. In “How Communication Works: Three Models, we will review these
three models of how communication works. Yet an even more basic question
concerns what communication is. The SMCR model belongs to a body of
theories that conceive of communication as information processing, an approach
that is called a “cybernetic” concept of communication. Yet the cybernetic
concept is not the only body of communication theories. Robert Craig has
described seven distinct traditions of communication theory. [1] Since modern
theories of organizational communication are often built on a different concept
of communication than a cybernetic one, later in this section we will review the
seven approaches to answering this question: what is communication?
How Communication Works: Three Models
At the most basic level, the three models of how communication works—linear,
interactional, and transactional—can be represented by the three graphics in
Figure 4.4. The linear model originated in the 1940s, the interactional in the
1950s, and the transactional in the 1970s. That the original linear model of
communication remains influential is attested to by its inclusion in so many
introductory textbooks, including this one. But theorists have long noted its
limitations: the assumptions that listeners are passive, that only one message is
transmitted at a time, and that communication has a beginning and an end. In
fact, a source could transmit a confusing or nonsensical message rather than a
meaningful one, and the linear model would work just as well; there is no
provision for gauging whether a message has been understood by its receivers.
Neither is the context of a communication situation taken into account.
Nevertheless, the linear model introduces helpful concepts and terms that are the
basis for understanding, as we will see later, the interactional and transactional
models of communication.
Figure 4.4 Three Concepts of Communication
Linear Model
Inspired by postwar research at Bell Laboratories on telephone transmissions,
Claude Shannon and Warren Weaver developed the “mathematical model” of
human communication shown in Figure 4.5. [2] In their model, successful
sending and receiving of a message is a function of the channel’s capacity to
handle signal degradation caused by static noise on the line. When applied in
general to human communication, “noise” can be physical (background noises
that make the message harder to hear), physiological (impairments such as
hardness of hearing), semantic (difficulties in understanding choices of words),
and psychological (predispositions and prejudices that affect how the message is
interpreted). As you can see in Figure 4.5, communication travels in a straight
line.
Figure 4.5 Shannon and Weaver’s Linear Model of Communication
A decade after Shannon and Weaver, David Berlo adapted their concepts into the
now-familiar SMCR model. [3] This is the model we introduced in Chapter 1 and
have reproduced in Figure 4.6. Berlo’s adaptation was “tremendously
influential” in offering a more flexible and “humanized conception of Claude
Shannon’s model” that facilitated its application to oral, written, and electronic
communication. [4] Moreover, the notion of feedback provided a means for
gauging reception and understanding of the message. Yet, as we will see in the
descriptions of the interactional and transactional models, subsequent theorists
have attempted to show how communication is better understood as circular
rather than linear, how listeners are also active participants in communication,
how multiple messages may be sent simultaneously, and how context and culture
impact understanding.
Figure 4.6 Berlo’s Linear Model of Communication
Interactional Model
Only a few years after Shannon and Weaver published their one-way linear
model, Wilbur Schramm proposed an alternate model that portrayed
communication as a two-way interaction. [5] Writing several years before Berlo,
he was the first to incorporate feedback—verbal and nonverbal—into a model of
communication. The other important innovations in Schramm’s interactive
model, which we have adapted in Figure 4.7, were the additions of the
communication context (the specific setting that may affect meaning) and of
“fields of experience” (the frames of reference and the cultures that each
participant brings to the communication).
Figure 4.7 Schramm’s Interactional Model of Communication
With Schramm’s model, communication moves from a linear to a circular
process in which participants are both senders and receivers of messages. Yet the
model portrays communication like a tennis match: one participant serves up a
message and the other participant then makes a return. Each waits, in turn,
passively for the other. Thus communication goes back and forth as one person
(on the left of Figure 4.7) initiates a message and waits until the other (on the
right) responds. But if you think about times when you have engaged in
conversation, you will recognize how the other person is simultaneously sending
messages—often nonverbally—while you are talking. Unlike a tennis match,
you do not wait passively until the “ball is in your court” before acting
communicatively. To demonstrate the simultaneity of communication, we move
next to a transactional model.
Transactional Model
Perhaps the first model to portray communication as a simultaneous transaction
is attributed to Dean Barnlund. [6] Later theorists have developed this idea of
simultaneity, which is illustrated in Figure 4.8. As you can see, messages and
feedback are being exchanged at the same time between communicators. And
because they are engaged together in the transaction, their fields of experience
overlap. Useful concepts such as noise and context can likewise be added to the
model.
Figure 4.8 Transactional Model for Communication
An expanded view of how communication functions can help us to better
understand how individuals within organizations communicate. But for a firmer
grip on modern theories of organizational communication, we will now go
beyond message-centered models and take a meaning-centered approach.
What Communication Is: Seven Traditions
You have probably heard the proverbial question, If a tree falls in the forest and
no one is around to hear, does it make a sound? Similarly, we might ask, If you
send a message that the receiver does not understand, has communication taken
place? This question introduces the idea of meaning into the equation. Let us
borrow from the SMCR model one more time to explore the place of meaning in
communication.
Some theorists believe (as you probably do) that the meaning of a message lies
in the sender. You think up a message and transmit it, and then the receiver must
decode what you mean. But other theorists believe the meaning of a message is
something that the sender and receiver construct together as they interact
through their communication. Still other theorists believe that meaning resides in
the channel—perhaps in the signs and symbols that, over time, humans invest
with implied meanings, or perhaps in the larger structures of history and culture
that condition how we perceive the world. As noted at the start of this section,
Craig has identified seven traditions in communication, each of which will be
described in this section. [7] Each tradition wrestles with the question of how
people derive meaning from a communication. And if we grant that
communication only takes place when meaning is exchanged, then the issue of
how people derive meaning is another way of putting the question: what is
communication?
A helpful way of grasping the seven theoretical traditions is to pose a single
communication scenario and then consider it from each of the seven approaches.
For our purposes, we will pick a common scenario from organizational life—
namely, the annual employee recognition luncheon in which awards are given to
those who reach five, ten, or fifteen years of service, and so on up until
retirement. During this festive event a catered lunch is served in a large room,
speeches are made by key executives, long-serving employees come forward as
their names are called and receive a certificate or plaque, and the luncheon
concludes on a light note as employees organize a mock ceremony to give out
humorous awards. For our overview of the seven traditions, let us begin with the
tradition to which you have already been introduced—the cybernetic tradition—
and see how it might explain our communication scenario.
Cybernetic Tradition
Theorists in the cybernetic tradition start with the assumption that an
organization is a system composed of many parts that mutually depend on each
other and therefore must communicate to share and process information.
Cybernetic theorists chart the pathways that information travels within an
organization and how a system continually makes adjustments to sustain itself.
Indeed, the word cybernetics was coined from the Greek word for “steersman”
by Massachusetts Institute of Technology scientist Norbert Wiener. [8] In
devising a new antiaircraft firing system during World War II, he addressed a
major problem: though existing systems could feed back information on firing
trajectories, targets would pass by before human operators could make
adjustments. He saw that the new system must regulate itself by acting on its
own feedback, a principle Wiener then extended to human societies.
Communication theorists picked up on this idea by casting the communication
process as a self-regulating system in which feedback loops connect the various
parts of the system into networks so that people can adjust their messages,
gradually eliminate distortions, and arrive at intended meanings. Now, let’s see
how the annual employee awards luncheon shows this cybernetic process in
action.
A Cybernetic Take on the Awards Luncheon
Consider all the parts of the organization that must communicate to
successfully stage the annual employee awards lunch: executives who make
speeches and set policies for giving awards; managers who implement the
policies; the human resources department that generated the list of
employees eligible for awards and organized the luncheon; the corporate
communications department that will issue a news release after the event;
the accounting department that processed purchase orders and payments to
the caterer; the information technology department that set up the
audiovisual equipment for the ceremony; the maintenance department that
prepared the room and will clean up afterward; and the employees who
attended the luncheon, received awards, and put on the humorous
entertainment.
Each part depended on communicating with another part: for example,
human resources needed feedback from maintenance on the room setup and
from the accounting department on the event budget; corporate
communications needed feedback from top executives on the desired theme
of the press release; and so on. Through all these avenues of organizational
communication, the system processes the information it needs to keep going.
Phenomenological Traditional
According to the phenomenological tradition of communication theory, you
derive meaning by directly experiencing a particular phenomenon. Thus you
come to know your organizational world by directly and consciously engaging in
it, pondering the organization’s meaning for you, interpreting that meaning
through language to define and express it through dialogue (another important
phenomenological concept) with coworkers, and then continually reconstructing
the interpretation in light of new experiences. As you will see, phenomenology
—though far different from cybernetics—offers another productive framework
for understanding the annual awards luncheon.
A Phenomenological Take on the Awards Luncheon
Imagine yourself as a new employee attending the luncheon for the first time.
As you watch the first group of honorees go forward and accept their five-
year service certificates, you picture yourself in their shoes and ponder, “Is
this company a place I want to be in five years? Or is it a stepping stone?”
Then you see the ten-year honorees and think, “Wow, ten years! If I’m still
here in ten years, that means I’m committed long term.” Also, you notice that
ten-year employees tend to be people who have better job titles and higher
pay, so longevity has its rewards. Finally, you see plaques handed out to
retirees and say to yourself, “I can’t even relate! What will my career have
been like when I look back on it someday? What do I want to be known for?”
In the days after the luncheon, you run into some five- and ten-year honorees
you know, tactfully engage them in conversation, and try to feel out their
answers to the question, “Is it worth it to stay long enough to earn a service
award?”
At the luncheon, then, you were confronted with the phenomenon of
employee loyalty and longevity. Based on this experience, you weigh your
perceptions. The annual luncheon was a dialogue as you listened to the
various speeches and presentations. And after the event, you dialogued with
coworkers who had been honored for their long service. Through these
dialogues, you open yourself to the experiences of others and can integrate
this into your own experience.
Sociopsychological Tradition
In Chapter 1, you were introduced to a definition of human communication as a
“process whereby one individual (or group of individuals) attempts to stimulate
meaning in the mind of another individual (or group of individuals) through
intentional use of verbal, nonverbal, and/or mediated messages.” We offered
this definition in the opening chapter because it is a good place to start. For one,
the definition is held by many communication theorists. For another, it accords
with what most laypeople (probably including you) believe about
communication and about personhood. You likely see yourself as a distinct
individual—your mind is your own. This is the basic assumption of
sociopsychological theories about communication—that people control their
own intentions. Human communicative behaviors are thus seen as rooted in
human psychologies since, by definition, communication is one person’s
intention to impact another person’s intention. If that is so, the task of the
researcher is to discover what stimuli elicit what responses. Consider, then, how
the sociopsychological tradition might explain the annual employee recognition
luncheon.
A Sociopsychological Take on the Awards Luncheon
Consider first the speeches given by top executives to celebrate company
values and, by implication, the loyalty these values merit from employees.
One theory suggests that, psychologically, you are more likely to be
persuaded if sufficiently motivated to carefully consider the arguments and
less likely if the speakers utter clichés you’ve heard before. [9] Another theory
claims that opinions are best understood not as a single point on a line, but as
a continuum between acceptable and unacceptable; the more that the execs
pitch their arguments on company loyalty toward the edge of this continuum,
the more likely they can push the boundaries of what you will accept.
[10] Still another leading theory proposes that if the speakers can make you
feel an inner conflict between self-interest and group loyalties, you will be
psychologically driven to resolve the conflict rather than feel torn. [11]
Then there are the conversations you had with longer-tenured coworkers. One
theory of interpersonal communication holds that people’s personalities are
structured like the layers of an onion. To elicit your coworkers’ inner feelings
about staying long term with the company, you had to go beyond mere
chitchat about sports and the weather and instead penetrate their goals,
convictions, fears, fantasies, and, at the deepest level, their self-concepts. [12] Another theory claims that people experience an ongoing psychological
tension between their need to be connected and need to feel unique, and
between their need to be open and need to keep some things to themselves. [13] In order to elicit coworkers’ true feelings about their service with the
company—and to expose your own concerns—you must navigate both of
these tensions.
Sociocultural Tradition
For the sociopsychological theorist, the meaning of a communication resides in
each individual. But for the sociocultural theorist, the meaning of a
communication arises from interaction as people engage in discourse and
socially construct what they jointly perceive to be real. George Herbert Mead, a
founder of the sociocultural tradition, noted more than a century ago that—in
contrast to the prevailing view that each individual is autonomous—people only
develop a sense of self by being around other people. Further, since speech is the
means by which people interact, then people develop their sense of self through
communication. Indeed, without language—which arose because humans exist
in society—there would be no thought. [14] Another theorist in the sociocultural
tradition, Erving Goffman, likened social interaction to a drama. Imagine
yourself in an ordinary conversation and (being honest) think how you take a
role (anything from clown to peacemaker) and “play to the audience” by
communicating in ways that (you believe) will make you socially acceptable. [15] W. Barnett Pearce and Vernon Cronen have described conversational
interaction as a “coordinated management of meaning” in which people not only
coconstruct a social world but are, in turn, shaped by that world. [16]
Given these assumptions, theorists in the sociocultural tradition look at the ways
communication is used by people in interactions to produce—and then reproduce
—stable patterns of social order. Sociocultural theorists of organizational
communication, then, are interested in how organizational cultures arise as their
members communicate with one another. And they would take a keen interest, as
we can see next, in the annual employee awards luncheon.
A Sociocultural Take on the Awards Luncheon
The event is a ritual where the people on the platform speak and act in ritual
sequences (an employee’s name is called, he or she comes forward, and the
certificate is given with praise, smiles, and handshakes) that ultimately pay
homage to the company. Second, the awards ceremony constitutes a story that
fosters a “loyalty myth.” As the myth is enacted, the audience learns how
they too are expected to fit into the story. Third, the awards ceremony is a
“social drama” in which awardees gain honor by their perseverance, thus
showing the audience how they can likewise win approval and continue to
belong.
Organizational cultures are maintained not only through public events but
also in natural conversation as employees spontaneously use “insider” talk.
Such talk begins to form patterns that unconsciously express the assumptions
of an organization culture. [17] Over time, the patterns seem so natural that
employees use the talk without thinking and take the underlying assumptions
for granted. So perhaps the employee awards luncheon featured talk about the
company as a “family,” or praised award recipients for being “customer
oriented,” or continually referred to “aggressive” growth, “aggressive”
marketing, and so forth. If you later spoke one on one with award recipients,
chances are their use of such insider language in spontaneous conversation
reflected their integration into the organizational culture.
Semiotic Tradition
The old saying “Where there’s smoke, there’s fire” captures the essence of the
semiotic tradition in communication theory. Semiotics is the study of signs—and
a classic example, of course, is how the presence of smoke is the sign of a fire.
Charles Saunders Peirce, a founding theorist of semiotics, would have called
smoke an index, or a trace that points to another object. [18] Thus thunder is the
sign of an approaching storm, a bullet hole the sign of a shooting, a footprint the
sign of prey. Other signs are icons or abstract representations of another object—
for example, the stylized image of a pedestrian on a traffic-crossing light. Yet
other signs are symbols that have a purely arbitrary relationship to another
object. Again, to use traffic signs as an example, think of how a red octagon
means “stop” and a yellow inverted triangle means “yield.”
The most common symbols of all, of course, are words. Consider this: the word
“dog” has no inherent relation to the actual animal. Instead, as C. K. Ogden and
I. A. Richards famously pointed out, the word “dog” may connote a friendly pet
to one person and a dangerous beast to another. To explain how words work,
they proposed a triangle of meaning. [19] They theorized that meaning emerges
from the interplay between a referent (in our example, a dog), a symbol (the
word “dog”), and the reference (what a person thinks when he or she hears the
word). As such, the meaning of “dog,” whether a cute pet or dangerous animal,
resides not in the word but, rather, in the mind of the person. In this way, as
Robert Craig observed, semiotic theorists regard communication as a process of
“intersubjective mediation by signs.” [20] In other words, the meaning of a thing
is subjective for each person. Thus as we communicate about that thing, there is
an encounter between the different meanings each of us carries. The encounter is
mediated by a sign—whether the sign is a word or an image—and that sign
makes it possible for at least some meaning to be shared between
communicators. As we will see next, the annual employee recognition luncheon
is replete with signs and symbols.
A Semiotic Take on the Awards Luncheon
In addition to the many words used at the annual luncheon, shared meaning is
created by the symbols of the award certificates and plaques, the printed
program with elegant cursive script, the cake and the balloons with
congratulatory messages, the round tables that were set up rather than the
room’s usual classroom-style seating, the festive centerpieces on the tables,
the company posters and slogans posted on the walls, the formal business
attire of the executives who presented the awards, and the large company
logo that is hung on the podium and printed on items ranging from table
napkins to t-shirts.
All these symbols enable important meanings—about company values,
employee loyalty, labor-management relations—to be communicated and
shared by dozens of people, even though each brings his or her own
subjective thoughts to the event. Even the company itself morphs into a
symbol as it assumes a distinctive corporate image. Roland Barthes equated
this kind of “second-order” symbol to mythmaking. [21] Thus, for example,
Apple Corporation has come to symbolize high-tech innovation, a corporate
image that instills in its employees a strong sense of organizational identity.
Critical Tradition
Stanley Deetz, a leading critical scholar in organization studies, has described
“managerialism” as an ideology that systematically distorts communication to
produce a “discursive closure” that renders alternative views difficult to express
or even think. [22] The task of critical scholars is to “denaturalize” unjust
ideologies and structures that are taken for granted, exposing them to resistance
and discussion, and thereby reopening choices and possibilities the system had
foreclosed. Thus a critical scholar infuses research with action. Such a scholar
would have a field day with the annual employee awards luncheon and its array
of hidden meanings that favor management.
A Critical Take on the Awards Luncheon
Who decided that employee loyalty would be the only value recognized with
a special annual celebration? The decision was made by dominant interests to
maintain their power since the luncheon establishes loyalty to the company as
a taken-for-granted part of organizational life. Yet even though employees
must be loyal in order to gain approval, the company has no corresponding
obligation of loyalty to employees and may lay them off as needed. Not only
is this proposition tacitly accepted, but to suggest that a second luncheon be
held to make a public accounting of the company’s loyalty to its workers
would seem irrational. So would the suggestion that workers, rather than the
human resources director, should plan the annual luncheon and decide what
values should be recognized and what awards given. Though employees are
permitted to plan a humorous “awards” segment, that is only a parody and a
way to control workers by giving them a sense of participation without any
real substance.
Then, too, because the luncheon celebrates only those employees who have
served long term, the event actually silences the voices of traditionally
marginalized workers. Women, persons of color, persons with disabilities,
and the working poor have often lacked the ability to acquire skills that
would make them promotable in the corporate world. Put disproportionately
in low-wage jobs, they are the first to be laid off or shunted into temporary
work. Yet they do work the company needs. Why is there no event to
celebrate their contributions? Instead, the emphasis on longevity only
marginalizes them further. The system follows an ideology that, in ways
made to seem natural and inevitable, structures power relations to favor some
at the expense of others.
Rhetoric Tradition
For the last of the seven traditions in communication theory, we come to the
oldest. More than 2,300 years ago, Aristotle wrote The Rhetoric and gave us, as
many believe, the world’s first systematic treatment of human psychology. [23] He lived in Athens, one of the democratic city-states of ancient Greece
where citizens publicly stated their cases in the assemblies and courts. Alarmed
that some used oratory for personal gain rather than public good, Aristotle
examined how speakers persuaded audiences and devised a theory and method
of reasoned public address. [24] Today the phrase “That’s just rhetoric” connotes
hollow or self-serving words. Aristotle had the same concern. Thus rhetorical
theory, from classical times to the present, has concerned itself with the problem
of how things get done. In other words, rhetorical theorists—including those
who study organizational rhetoric—examine the processes by which speaker and
listeners move toward each other, decide what is best, and find common grounds
to go forward.
Studies of organizational rhetoric distinguish between external rhetoric aimed at
stakeholders outside the organization and internal rhetoric aimed at employees.
Mary Hoffman and Debra Ford classified four types of external rhetoric: to
create and maintain an organization’s public identity, to manage issues, to
manage risks, and to manage crises. Internal rhetoric, on the other hand, aims to
align employees with organizational values and imperatives so they are
motivated to do their jobs. [25] Thus the rhetoric of the annual employee
recognition luncheon is internal, an attempt by management to find common
ground with employees and persuade them to adopt company values. After the
luncheon, the company will engage in external rhetoric as the corporate
communications office issues a press release that, when carried by local media,
will hopefully reinforce the company’s image as a great workplace that inspires
employee loyalty. Rhetorical theory offers many avenues for analyzing the
speeches heard at the awards luncheon.
A Rhetoric Take on the Awards Luncheon
Aristotle held that speakers must invent a persuasive argument, effectively
arrange its points, word it in an appropriate style, deliver it in a suitable
manner, and draw on a memory of phrases and stories to extemporaneously
flesh out the argument for a given occasion or audience. Today we call this
method the five canons of rhetoric. Yet to be compelling, arguments must be
grounded on points of commonality between speaker and audience. Thus if
everyone agrees profit is good for both management and labor, speeches at
the awards luncheon can extol honorees for their contributions to the bottom
line. But if the organization is nonprofit, arguments based on profits would
fall flat. Aristotle also theorized that skillful speakers can employ three types
of proofs: logic, emotion, and speaker credibility. Executives who spoke at
the luncheon likely tried all three by stating how loyal employees are
rewarded (logic), how such employees’ dedication is admirable (emotion),
and how management can be trusted and believed (speaker credibility).
New theories have also gained wide acceptance in recent decades. Kenneth
Burke held that persuasion cannot occur without identification between
speaker and audience. [26] Thus company leaders can persuade employees to
be loyal only if the audience feels executives sympathize with their concerns.
Chaim Perelman contended that persuasion cannot occur without presence;
the speaker must highlight “elements on which the speaker wishes to center
attention.” [27] Thus management hopes its appeal for loyalty is enhanced by
staging a special yearly event. Walter Fisher contrasted persuasion through
logic with a narrative paradigm in which audiences are persuaded through
stories. [28] Thus the awards luncheon will foster loyalty only if executives
can tell a story that resonates with the lives of employees.
KEY TAKEAWAY
There are three models for how communication functions have
been proposed: linear, interactional, and transactional. The linear
model holds that a message travels in a straight line from its
source, through a channel, and to its receiver. The interactional
model holds that communication travels in a circle as a sender
transmits a message and then the receiver responds with
feedback; thus both parties become sender/receivers. The
transactional model holds that sending and receiving occur
simultaneously.
Seven traditions in communication theory have been identified by
Robert Craig. The cybernetic tradition theorizes communication
as information processing. The phenomenological tradition
theorizes communication as dialogue and the experience of
otherness. The sociopsychological tradition theorizes
communication as expression, interaction, and influence rooted in
human psychological processes. The sociocultural tradition
theorizes communication as the production and maintenance of a
social order, such as an organizational culture. The semiotic
tradition theorizes communication as intersubjective mediation by
signs, or the ways that a sign (including a word) or symbol of a
thing mediates the different thoughts that people have about the
thing and thus permit meaning to be shared. The critical tradition
theorizes communication as discursive reflection, or reflection on
the ways that discourses create dominant and marginalized
voices. The rhetorical tradition theorizes communication as the
practical art of discourse and how persuasion is accomplished.
EXERCISES
1. Your class in organizational communication is itself a type of
organization. Think about the communication that takes place in
your class, whether the class is face to face or online. Would you
say that communication between the students and the instructor
is best explained as a linear, interactional, or transactional
process? Explain your answer.
2. In the subsection “What Communication Is: Seven Traditions,” we
imagined how the annual employee awards luncheon could be
explained, in turn, by each of the seven traditions. On your own,
think of another communication scenario that occurs in
organizations (perhaps in your college or university, such as
freshman orientation or the annual commencement ceremony)
and then explain your scenario by each of the seven traditions.
Critical :
Cybernetic :
Interactional :
Linear :
Phenomenological :
Rhetorical :
Semiotic :
Sociocultural :
Sociopsychological :
Transactional :
KEY TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
A scholarly tradition that theorizes communication as discursive reflection, or reflection on the ways that discourses create dominant and marginalized voices.
A scholarly tradition that theorizes communication as information processing.
A model of communication holding that communication travels in a circle as a sender transmits a message and then the receiver responds with feedback; thus both parties become sender/receivers.
A model of communication holding that a message travels in a straight line from its source, through a channel, and to its receiver.
A scholarly tradition that theorizes communication as dialogue and the experience of otherness.
A scholarly tradition that theorizes communication as the practical art of discourse and how persuasion is accomplished.
A scholarly tradition that theorizes communication as intersubjective mediation by signs, or the ways a sign (including a word) or symbol of a thing mediates the different thoughts that people have about the thing and thus permit meaning to be shared.
A scholarly tradition that theorizes communication as the production and reproduction of a social order, such as an organizational culture.
A scholarly tradition that theorizes communication as expression, interaction, and influence rooted in human psychological processes.
A model of communication holding that sending and receiving of messages/feedback occurs simultaneously.
[1] Craig, R. T. (1999). Communication theory as a field. Communication
Theory, 9, 118–160.
[2] Shannon, C., & Weaver, W. (1949) The mathematical theory of
communication. Urbana: University of Illinois Press.
[3] Berlo, D. (1960). The process of communication. New York, NY: Holt,
Rinehart & Winston.
[4] Rogers, E. M. (2001). The department of communication at Michigan
State University as a seed institution for communication study.
Communication Studies, 52, 234–248; p. 234.
[5] Schramm, W. (1954). How communication works. In W. Schramm
(Ed.), The process and effects of communication (pp. 3–26). Urbana:
University of Illinois Press.
[6] Barnlund, D. (1970). A transactional model of communication. In K. K.
Sereno & C. D. Mortensen (Eds.), Foundations of communication theory
(pp. 83–102). New York, NY: Harper.
[7] Craig, R. T. (1999). Communication theory as a field. Communication
Theory, 9, 118–160.
[8] Wiener, N. (1954). The human use of human beings: Cybernetics in
society. Boston, MA: Houghton Mifflin.
[9] Petty, R. E., & Cacioppo, J. T. (1986). Communication and
persuasion: Central and peripheral routes to attitude change. New York,
NY: Springer-Verlag.
[10] Sherif, M., Sherif, C., & Nebergall, R. (1965). Attitude and attitude
change: The social judgement-involvement approach. Philadelphia, PA:
Saunders.
[11] Festinger, L. (1957). A theory of cognitive dissonance. Stanford, CA:
Stanford University Press.
[12] Altman, I., & Taylor, D. A. (1973). Social penetration: The
development of interpersonal relationships. New York, NY: Holt, Rinehart
& Winston.
[13] Baxter, L. A., & Montgomery, B. M. (1998). A guide to dialectical
approaches to studying personal relationships. In B. M. Montgomery & L.
A. Baxter (Eds.), Dialectical approaches to studying personal
relationships (pp. 1–15). Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.
[14] Mead, G. H. (1934). Mind, self, and society. Chicago, IL: University
of Chicago Press.
[15] Goffman, E. (1959). The presentation of self in everyday life. Garden
City, NY: Doubleday; Goffman, E. (1971).
[16] Pearce, W. B., & Cronen, V. (1980). Communication, action, and
meaning. New York, NY: Praeger.
[17] Philipsen, G. (1997). A theory of speech codes. In G. Philipsen and
T. L. Albrecht (Eds.), Developing communication theories (pp. 119–156).
Albany: State University of New York Press.
[18] Peirce, C. S. (1958). Charles S. Peirce: Selected writings (P. P.
Weiner, Ed.). New York, NY: Dover.
[19] Ogden, C. K., & Richards, I. A. (1923). The meaning of meaning.
London, UK: Kegan, Paul, Trench, Trubner.
[20] Craig, R. T. (1999). Communication theory as a field. Communication
Theory, 9, 118–160.
[21] Barthes, R. (1972). Mythologies (A. Lavers, Trans.). New York, NY:
Hill and Wang.
[22] Deetz, S. (1992). Democracy in the age of corporate colonization:
Developments in communication and the politics of everyday life. Albany:
State University of New York Press.
[23] For example, see Heidegger, M. (1962). Being and time (J.
Macquarrie & E. Robinson, Trans.). San Francisco, CA: Harper & Row, p.
178.
[24] Aristotle. (2006). On rhetoric: A theory of civic discourse (2nd ed.; G.
A. Kennedy, Trans.). Oxford, UK: Oxford University Press.
[25] Hoffman, M. F., & Ford, D. J. (2009). Organization rhetoric:
Situations and strategies. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
[26] Burke, K. (1950). A rhetoric of motives. New York, NY: Prentice-Hall.
[27] Perelman, C., & Olbrechts-Tyteca, L. (1969). The new rhetoric: A
treatise on argumentation. South Bend, IN: University of Notre Dame
Press, p. 142.
[28] Fisher, W. (1987). Human communication as narration: Toward a
philosophy of reason, value, and action. Columbia: University of South
Carolina Press.
4.3 Representative Modern Theories
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
1. Understand the basic precepts of systems theory and Karl
Weick’s theory of organizing and sensemaking.
2. Understand the basic precepts of Giddens’s structuration theory
and its applications made by Poole and McPhee to organizations.
3. Understand how, according to feminist theory, organizations are
gendered and a primary site for configuration of gender roles.
To this point, we have explored approaches to theorizing organizational
communication rather than specific theories. We believe that focusing first on
approaches is important. To speak of “interpretive organizational theory,” or
“critical organization theory,” or “postmodern organization theory” is not to
speak of any one single theory. Rather, each is—along with the postpositive
perspective—a general approach to looking at the problem of organizational
communication. Each approach is informed by its own ontology (belief about
how things exist), epistemology (belief about how things can be known), and
axiology (belief about what is worth knowing). Out of these respective beliefs
emerge specific theories. In the remainder of this section, we will describe
important modern theories of organizational communication that have emerged
from the different approaches. And by first grasping the underlying approaches
and how each looks at the problem in a different way, we believe you will be
better equipped to understand specific theories and “where they’re coming
from.” The theories described in the section, “Postpositive Approach: Systems
Theory” show the innovative work being done on vital problems of
contemporary organizational life through different approaches to organizational
communication and also through blending some aspects of those approaches.
This should persuade us that each approach has something to contribute.
Postpositive Approach: Systems Theory
Systems theory offers a good illustration of how organizational communication
research from a postpositive perspective has continued to develop and even
incorporate insights from other approaches. The story of systems theory begins
in the mid-1950s when, as we saw in Chapter 3, the heyday of classical
management theory had passed and the human-resources approach was
ascendant. In 1956, Canadian biologist Ludwig von Bertalanffy first published
his “general system theory,” which proposed that traits found in biological
systems could be applied to any system. [1] A decade later, the notion of applying
the theory to organizations was popularized in an influential book by Daniel
Katz and Robert Kahn. [2] The old metaphor of the organization as a machine
was replaced by the metaphor of a biological organism. As a result, the
conception of the organization as a closed system was replaced by that of an
open system. Where a machine operates on its own, a biological organism can
survive only by interacting with and gathering inputs from its surrounding
environment. Thus, compared to the input-output of a machine, the operations of
a biological organism involve input-throughput-output (a concept we
encountered in Chapter 1; see Figure 1.1). Through systems theory, other
principles from biology have been applied to organizations as shown in Table
4.1.
Table 4.1 Systems Applications to Organizations
Like a biological organism, an
organization…
This trait is
called… An example in an organization would be…
is not a hodgepodge of parts, but
an ordered system
hierarchical
ordering
An oil refinery has four divisions—finance,
operations, sales and marketing, human resources
—overseen by a CEO.
is composed of parts that rely on
each other to properly function interdependence
The refinery’s operations division manufactures
orders generated by sales and marketing, using
employees recruited by human resources.
is greater than the sum of its parts,
since the parts are interdependent holism
The gasoline that the refinery supplies to customers
is not merely a manufacturing output; all divisions
contribute to success, from sales and customer
service to quality control and delivery.
requires communication between
its parts to correct deviations and
spread information that fosters
growth
feedback
Balance sheets, sales reports, production reports,
time sheets, and more are generated by the week,
month, quarter, and year to keep the refinery on
track.
must trade its outputs with the
outside environment to acquire
the inputs it needs to function;
otherwise, it will feed on itself
and die
exchange
The refinery sells the products it manufactures and
generates revenue to purchase needed raw
materials, technology, labor, and market
information.
has boundaries that set it apart
from the environment, yet also
permit exchanges with the
environment
permeability
Though the refinery is legally chartered in the
United States, it purchases crude oil supplies from
around the world.
freely permits the resources it
needs to pass into its system and
thus can grow
negative
entropy
While a closed system eventually tends to break
down, an open system can reverse this tendency by
importing new resources; thus the diversity of
resources acquired and processed by the refinery
leads to greater order rather than disorder.
must be as complex as the inputs
it requires from the environment,
in order to handle those inputs
requisite variety
To refine oil into gasoline, the plant must
distinguish between light, heavy, sweet, and sour
crude.
deals with a complex environment
by having multiple means to
achieve its goals and not
depending on any single option
equifinality
Because crude supplies vary as market conditions
fluctuate, the refinery must adjust its
manufacturing processes as needed to produce
gasoline that meets industry and government
specifications.
The most influential theory to emerge from the systems approach was proposed
in the 1960s by Karl Weick and refined by him over the next three decades. [3] The theory begins with the observation that an organization’s environment
includes information as well as material resources. Since the late twentieth
century, the information environment has grown increasingly complex. Many
communication situations cannot be handled by routines and rules. Moreover,
the organization and its members both shape and are shaped by the information
environment in which they operate—a principle Weick borrowed from the
interpretive approach. Because all these factors introduce what he called
“equivocality,” the goal of organizational communication is equivocality
reduction. To meet the challenges of a complex information environment,
organization members’ natural response is the enactment of their own internal
informational culture—again, a notion taken from the interpretive approach and
yet also an aspect of the interdependency predicted by systems theory. Next,
Weick proposed a concept drawn from Charles Darwin’s theory of evolution and
natural selection. Though organization members have enacted an information
environment, they each bring different interpretations of what that environment
means. Thus a part of the organizing process is selection of the best
interpretations and then their retention to guide future enactments and selections.
This collective process of enactment, selection, and retentions is, in Weick’s
model, called retrospective sensemaking and is represented in Figure 4.9.
Organization members muddle through complexities, perceive over time what
works, and collectively reduce equivocality and make sense of their workplace.
Thus Weick has constructed a theory of organizing that is rooted in systems
theory and follows a postpositive research agenda of observing and measuring
aggregate behaviors. And yet his theory usefully draws on interpretive principles
about the social constructedness of collective environments.
Figure 4.9 Weick’s Retrospective Sensemaking
Interpretive Approach: Structuration Theory
Weick’s theory of organizing blends interpretive perspectives into a systems
theory. But a key systems concept—that the parts of a system are interdependent
—is given a new, interpretive twist through structuration theory and its
applications to organizational life. In traditional systems theories about
organizations, the parts of the system are the various departments that have been
hierarchically ordered to compose an organization. But in structuration theory,
the system is a system of human practices, where practices are understood as
patterns of activity that have meaning for participants. Thus the organizational
system is not the operations department, the marketing department, the
accounting department, and so on. Rather, the organizational system is
composed of patterns of practices—from the way that sick leave is handled, to
the way that purchase orders are processed, to the way that meetings are
conducted. At the end of this section is a brief scenario about company dress
codes and casual Fridays. In structuration theory, then, “structure” is not used in
the conventional sense of a hierarchy. Rather, structure refers to the
interrelationships between practices.
By basing notions of system and structure on practices, and defining practices as
meaningful patterns, we can see how structuration theory reflects an interpretive
approach. This move sprang from, as Marshall Scott Poole and Robert McPhee
have related, the concerns of scholars in the 1960s who felt that the
sociopsychological or individual-oriented emphasis in communication studies
did not adequately allow for group effects. “The properties of systems were most
often cast as constraints on behavior that acted from outside the individuals
involved,” such that individuals were not seen as agents involved in constructing
those systems. [4] Then in the late 1970s and 1980s, communication scholars
discovered the work of British theorist Anthony Giddens. [5] His theory of
structuration resolved the structure-versus-agency debate with an innovative
move. Giddens proposed that structure and agency are not “either/or” but are
“both/and,” or, as he put it, not a dualism but a duality. In other words, people
create a structure through their actions—but they also perpetuate, or reproduce,
the structure by acting within it. As Giddens explained, structure is both “a
medium and an outcome” of social action. Structure not only constrains action
but also enables it, even as action produces and reproduces the structure—and
thus we have the process of structuration, which gives the theory its name.
In this theory, the concept of rules and resources has special meaning.
Individuals act within the structure’s enablements and constraints by drawing on
shared rules to guide their actions, as well as resources (whether material or
nonmaterial) they can employ to take action. And as the process of structuration
goes forward, a system of practices evolves that guides signification (how things
are interpreted), legitimation (what is deemed moral and should be done), and
domination (how power is distributed to get those things done). Nevertheless,
people are mostly unaware that their actions are grounded in, and impact upon,
larger structurational process, because their actions and consequences are
separated in space and time.
Poole and McPhee outlined how structuration theory might be generally applied
to communication studies. In the early 1980s, they began exploring applications
to organizational communication. [6] First, they suggested that structuration can
explain the formation of an organization’s climate (a concept discussed in
Chapter 6) or “collective attitude, continually produced and reproduced by
members’ interactions.” [7] Climate emerges from a concept pool of shared terms
and phrases that members use to describe the organization, culminating in a
kernel climate as members adopt a commonly shared abstraction to capture their
basic understandings of the organization, and then progressing into particular
climates that guide members’ attitudes and actions in specific situations. [8]
Further developments in organizational structuration theory have asserted that
organizational communication occurs at three centers of structuration:
conception, implementation, and reception. [9] Though much overlap and
conflict can occur, top management typically dominates conceptual
communication, middle management oversees implementation, and employees
receive and enact what has been decided. These communications may be classed
into four flows that are respectively concerned with membership negotiation
(who can be a member), activity coordination (what members do), self-
structuring (how activities are organized), and institutional positioning (how the
organization differentiates itself from others). Meanwhile, structurational
processes also operate at the individual level to drive organizational identity (a
phenomenon addressed in Chapter 8). Through an identity-identification duality,
the more that organization members are linked with other members who share
the same premises, the more they will all cultivate a like identity for themselves
and, in turn, be self-actualized by relationships with like-minded individuals. [10]
Giddens’s original stucturation theory addressed processes at the societal level
and the institutions that societies create and sustain. A societal institution, he
observed, can accrue and channel great power as it becomes a nexus for
concentrating, organizing, controlling, and then projecting resources.
Structurational processes govern how things are interpreted, what is deemed
moral and should be done, and how power is distributed to do those things. This
same attention to the ways in which power operates through a system has
continued to be a concern for scholars who apply structuration theory to
organizations. In looking back on two decades of theory development, Poole and
McPhee believed, “Structuration theory…has the potential to bring a critical
edge to the analysis of organizational systems because it charges scholars to
look for the role of power and domination in structuring processes that underlie
organizations.” Further, the theory “shows how organizations are created and
sustained by human action and how, potentially, they can be changed.” [11] Thus,
they concluded, “We hope future researchers will take a more critical stance in
developing the future of the structurational perspective.” [12]
The Structuration of "Casual Fridays"
Your office observes the human practice of “casual Fridays.” Since this
implies that people don professional attire the rest of the week, your office
has an unspoken system for what people wear. The relationship between the
two practices—professional dress Monday to Thursday, casual on Friday—
provides a structure that guides daily norms and the permitted exception.
Though casual Fridays were started by a management decision several years
ago, everyone now reproduces the structure by following the rule to dress
professionally four days a week and casually on Friday, and by acquiring the
resource of a suitable personal wardrobe. Through structuration, your office
has evolved the assumption that one’s personal appearance signifies
professionalism. This structure legitimates proper attire on proper days and is
enforced through office etiquette.
The word “Friday” has entered the office concept pool as shorthand slang for
proper dress. Common putdowns are “I guess you thought it was Friday” (for
underdressed employees) and “Don’t you know it’s Friday?” (for the
overdressed). This produces a climate that guides employee dress choices.
Interestingly, ideas of “professional” and “casual” dress differ among
executives, managers, and employees. Still, talk around the office about what
to wear fosters a group consciousness, coordinates dress choices, structures
when each choice should be worn, and positions your company as different
from others that do not observe casual Fridays. Yet some employees are
starting to complain that casual Fridays have become a way to exert more
control over personal appearance. Managers can push for “higher” standards
(usually their own preferences) during the week with the excuse, “Well, you
can relax on Friday.”
Critical/Postmodern Approaches: Feminist Theory
Feminist theory provides an apt subject to conclude this chapter on modern
theories of organizational communication—and to conclude this section, which
has highlighted ways that modern theories often blend perspectives from
different approaches. First, a cohesive body of work in feminist organizational
communication studies is a newer development, having emerged only since the
1990s. Second, despite its recent pedigree, feminist theorizing about
organizational communication draws on diverse schools of thought, which have
enriched one another in innovative ways. Katherine Miller identified five distinct
approaches to feminist theorizing; [13] Marta Calas and Linda Smircich identified
seven; [14] and Michael Papa, Tom Daniels, and Barry Spiker recently identified
eight. [15] Feminist theorizing that specifically addresses organizational
communication is generally identified with the critical approach to
organizations, although Dennis Mumby also identified a postmodern strain in
feminist inquiry about organizational life. [16]
While feminist theorizing has generated a diverse body of research, some
common themes emerge. Yet before describing these, let us review some ideas
that retain a large influence on popular culture (so that you have probably heard
about them) but do not represent current directions in feminist organizational
communication studies. Karen Lee Ashcraft has recounted how research in the
1980s and 1990s frequently focused on sex differences. [17] Women were
depicted as “different” from men. Even if a “feminine style” of communication
and leadership was celebrated as valuable, the notion nevertheless perpetuated a
stereotype. Moreover, “feminine style” and “women’s concerns” were largely
equated with those of middle-class white women. Finally, the workplace was
seen as neutral territory into which individuals brought their sex differences and
societal prejudices; organizations were simply places where people played out
gender issues imported from the outside. Two decades of feminist organizational
communication scholarship has altered this picture. The workplace is no longer
viewed as neutral; instead, organizations are seen as profoundly gendered
institutions and a primary source of gendering (i.e., configuring gender roles) in
contemporary society.
To explain this phenomenon, let us begin with the basic concept of “male” and
“female.” The concept inherently lends itself to “either/or” thinking, or what
scholars call a binary mode of thought. Another binary common to Western
society is the “mind/body” dualism, which holds that the mind is nonmaterial
and the body is physical. A tendency to think in terms of binaries, feminist
scholars have shown, suffuses modern organization in ways that (as critical
theory tells us) work simultaneously to make “masculine” values dominant and
yet hide that domination by making it seem natural. For example, the modern
bureaucratic organization is based on ordered hierarchies. Such ordering
privileges the abstract (a “masculine” value) over the personal (a “feminine”
value), establishes the workplace on the basis of individual categorization rather
than egalitarian cooperation, and fosters a management/labor binary. [18] Hierarchy promotes linear modes of thinking and communication so that
organizations extol a cause/effect binary as the only rational way to make
decisions, rather than a holistic approach. [19] Indeed, the rational/emotional
binary is another mode of thought that gives a “masculine” gendering to
organizations. [20] Likewise, the leader/follower binary, which is inherent to
hierarchy, is patriarchal and fosters a dependency that “feminizes” workers. [21] Conflict management is another area where “masculine” values reign; even
when individuals agree to set aside the win/lose binary, settling their differences
through negotiation privileges the skill of bargaining. [22] Modern organizations
even configure female bodies according to masculine values, as a woman’s
“professional body” is expected to be trim and thus show discipline. [23] Finally,
Weber’s ideal of the impersonal-but-fair bureaucracy (see Chapter 3) is alive
today in the public/private binary that governs most organizations. That
“masculine” values are the standard is ensured by the rule that public workplace
performance takes precedence over private concerns. [24]
The connections between feminist theory and critical theory are clear. Today, a
growing body of feminist research employs fieldwork and ideology critique to
show how organizations reify and universalize “masculine” values. Recently,
other feminist scholars have demonstrated how a postmodern approach to
organizations can inform research by deconstructing how discourses of
domination—such as male domination—have formed over time. An example is
Ashcraft and Mumby’s study of airline pilots, a profession in which white males
predominate. They documented how early aviators were romanticized as
daredevils but, when the prospect of commercial aviation arose, celebrated
“lady” pilots made aviation seem less intimidating. As commercial flights
became a reality and the public worried about safety and reliability, the industry
promoted the image of the fatherly (white) professional pilot in a crisp naval-
style uniform. [25] Their project also explores the issue of race and illustrates
how the feminist approach to organizational communication has come to span
questions of race, class, sexuality, and ability.
As our look at systems theory, structuration theory, and feminist theory affirms,
modern theories of organizational communication are diverse. In addition, they
afford opportunities for innovative, as well as blended, approaches to explaining
problems of organizational life in the twenty-first century.
KEY TAKEAWAY
Systems theory is based on the metaphor of the organization as a
biological organism. Its parts, though hierarchically ordered, are
interdependent and the whole is greater than the sum of the parts.
Feedback between parts spreads needed information. But an
organization is an open system with permeable boundaries,
engaging in exchange with its environment to gather resources
required for growth. Because its environment is complex, the
organization must have the requisite variety to deal with that
complexity. This is aided through equifinality, or the ability to take
multiple paths for achieving the same goal. Karl Weick’s theory of
organizing holds that information is part of an organization’s
environment. Since the information is increasingly complex, a
goal of organizational communication is equivocality reduction
through processes of sensemaking.
Structuration theory provides a new answer to the question, Do
people have free will or are they determined by their
environments? Anthony Giddens theorized that structure and
agency are not a dualism but a duality. That is, people’s actions
produce structure but, by acting within a structure, they also
perpetuate or reproduce it. This is called structuration. Thus
structure is both an outcome of and a medium for social action.
For Giddens, a system is composed of human practices that have
meaningful patterns for participants. Poole and McPhee, and
subsequent scholars, have applied the theory of structuration to
explain the processes of organizational climate, organizational
communication, and organizational identity.
Feminist scholarship on organizational communication
encompasses a diversity of approaches and theories. However,
these approaches share a conception of the modern organization
as being gendered (rather than a neutral site where sex
differences and societal prejudices play out) and as a primary site
in the modern world for configuring gender roles. The male/female
distinction reflects a binary mode of thought that suffuses
organizations. Other binaries found in organizations include
cause/effect, rational/emotional, leader/ follower, win/lose, and
public/private. Bureaucratic hierarchy “feminizes” workers by
making them dependent, while basing organizational life on
individual categorization rather than egalitarian cooperation.
EXERCISES
1. Where classical theory is based on the metaphor of the
organization as a machine, systems theory is based on the
metaphor of the organization as a biological organism. Make a list
of other possible metaphors that might be used and explain how
each one can help us understand the ways that an organization
works.
2. In developing a theory of organizational structuration, Robert
McPhee proposed that communication occurs in four flows:
membership negotiation (who can be a member), activity
coordination (what members do), self-structuring (how activities
are organized), and institutional positioning (how the organization
Feminist Theory:
Systems Theory:
Binary :
differentiates itself from others). Think of an organization to which
you belong and then make a list of the types of communication
that occur within each of the four flows. Can you identify any
patterns or structures in these communication practices? Do
these structures help people in the organization get their
messages across and be understood? Or do they limit what
people can say? Or both?
3. Again, think of an organization to which you belong. Name some
examples of binary thinking (e.g., cause/effect, rational/emotional,
leader/follower, win/lose, public/private) you have observed. How
does this binary thinking affect what you have experienced in the
organization? Does this type of thinking tend to make “masculine”
values (e.g., competition, individualism, being rational, showing
no emotion, taking action) more favored than “feminine” values
(e.g., cooperation, integration)?
KEY TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
Not a single theory, but an approach to organizational communication scholarship that sees organizations as gendered and as sites for configuring gender roles.
A theory based on the metaphor of the organization as a biological organism, so that the organization is seen as an open system that interacts with its environment in order to acquire the resources it needs to survive and grow.
An opposition such as male/female, cause/effect, rational/emotional, leader/follower, win/lose, or public/private. Feminist
Enactment, Selection, And Retentions:
Equivocality Reduction:
Human Practices:
Interdependency :
Open System:
Reproduce:
Retrospective Sensemaking:
Rules And Resources:
Structuration Theory:
theory holds that binary thinking in organizations leads to the domination of “masculine” values such as competition over “feminine” values such as cooperation.
In Weick’s theory, organizations respond to equivocality in their environments by enacting their own information system, selecting their best responses for reducing equivocality, and retaining them to guide future responses.
Because modern organizations are confronted by an increasingly complex information environment then, according to Weick’s theory, they seek to reduce the amount of equivocality (uncertainty) they experience.
In structuration theory, patterns of activity that have meaning for participants.
The notion in systems theory that the parts of the system depend on one another in order to function properly.
A system that is open to its surrounding environment, as opposed to a closed system that is not. A closed system is only concerned with input and output, whereas an open system encompasses input, throughput, and output.
Structuration theory holds that individuals act within a structure by drawing on shared rules to guide their actions and by employing resources (material or nonmaterial) to take action.
Name given in Weick’s theory to the process of enactment, selection, and retention by which organization members make sense of their environment.
Structuration theory holds that individuals act within a structure by drawing on shared rules to guide their actions and by employing resources (material or nonmaterial) to take action.
A theory proposed by Giddens to answer the question, Do people have free will, or are they determined by their environments? He theorized that structure and agency are not a dualism but a duality. That is, people’s actions produce structure but, by acting within a structure, they also perpetuate or reproduce it.
Structure :
System :
In structuration theory, the interrelationships between human practices.
In structuration theory, a system is composed not of parts (such as an organization’s various departments) but of human practices.
[1] Von Bertalanffy, L. (1968). General system theory: Foundations,
development, applications. New York, NY: Braziller.
[2] Katz, D., & Kahn, R. L. (1966). The social psychology of
organizations. New York, NY: Wiley.
[3] Weick, K. (1969). The social psychology of organizing. Reading, MA:
Addison-Wesley; Weick, K. (1995). Sensemaking in organizations.
Newbury Park, CA: Sage.
[4] Poole, M. S., & McPhee, R. D. (2005). Structuration theory. In S. May
& D. K. Mumby (Eds.), Engaging organizational communication theory
and research: Multiple perspectives (pp. 171–195). Thousand Oaks, CA:
Sage, p. 171.
[5] Giddens, A. (1979). Central problems in social theory: Action,
structure, and contradiction in social analysis. Berkeley: University of
California Press; Giddens, A. (1984). The constitution of society: Outline
of the theory of structuration. Cambridge, MA: Polity.
[6] McPhee, R. D., & Poole, M. S. (1980). A theory of structuration: The
perspective of Anthony Giddens and its relevance for contemporary
communication research. Paper presented at the Speech Communication
Association annual convention, New York, NY.
[7] Poole, M. S., & McPhee, R. D. (1983). A structurational analysis of
organizational climate. In L. L. Putnam & M. Pacanowski (Eds.),
Communication and organizations: An interpretive approach (pp. 195–
220). Beverly Hills, CA: Sage, p. 213.
[8] McPhee, R. D. (1985). Formal structure and organizational
communication. In R. D. McPhee & P. Tompkins (Eds.), Organizational
communication: Traditional themes and new directions (pp. 149–177).
Beverly Hills, CA: Sage.
[9] McPhee, R. D. (1989). Organizational communication: A
structurational exemplar. In B. Dervin, L. Grossberg, B. J. O’Keefe, & E.
Wartella (Eds.), Rethinking communication: Paradigm exemplars, Vol. 2
(pp. 199–212). Beverly Hills, CA: Sage; McPhee, R. D., & Zaug, P.
(2000). The communicative constitution of organizations: A framework for
explanation. Electronic Journal of Communication, 10, 1–16.
[10] Cheney, G., & Tompkins, P. K. (1987). Coming to terms with
organizational identification and commitment. Central States Speech
Journal, 38, 1–15; Scott, C. R., Corman, S. R., & Cheney, G. (1998).
Development of a structurational model of identification in the
organization. Communication Theory, 8, 298–335.
[11] Poole, M. S., & McPhee, R. D. (2005). Structuration theory. In S. May
& D. K. Mumby (Eds.), Engaging organizational communication theory
and research: Multiple perspectives (pp. 171–195). Thousand Oaks, CA:
Sage, p. 180.
[12] Poole, M. S., & McPhee, R. D. (2005). Structuration theory. In S.
May & D. K. Mumby (Eds.), Engaging organizational communication
theory and research: Multiple perspectives (pp. 171–195). Thousand
Oaks, CA: Sage, p. 192.
[13] Miller, K. (2012). Organizational communication: Approaches and
processes (6th ed.). Boston, MA: Wadsworth.
[14] Calas, M. B., & Smircich, L. (1996). From “the women’s point of
view”: Feminist approaches to organization studies. In S. R. Clegg, C.
Hardy, & W. R. Nord (Eds.), Handbook of organization studies (pp. 218–
257). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
[15] Papa, M. J., Daniel, T. D., & Spiker, B. K. (2008). Organizational
communication: Perspectives and trends. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
[16] Mumby, D. K. (2001). Power and politics. In F. M. Jablin & L. L.
Putnam (Eds.), The new handbook of organizational communication:
Advances in theory, research, and methods (pp. 585–623). Thousand
Oaks, CA: Sage.
[17] Ashcraft, K. L. (2005). Feminist organizational communication
studies: Engaging gender in public and private. In S. May & D. K. Mumby
(Eds.), Engaging organizational communication theory and research:
Multiple perspectives (pp. 141–169). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
[18] Gilligan, C. (1982). In a different voice: Psychological theory and
women’s development. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
[19] Buzzanell, P. M. (1994). Gaining a voice: Feminist organizational
communication theorizing. Management Communication Quarterly, 7,
339–383.
[20] Mumby, D. K., & Putnam, L. L. (1992). The politics of emotion: A
critical reading. Academy of Management Review, 17, 465–486.
[21] Ferguson, K. (1984). The feminist case against bureaucracy.
Philadelphia, PA: Temple University Press.
[22] Putnam, L. L., & Kolb, D. M. (2000). Rethinking negotiation: Feminist
views of communication and exchange. In P. M. Buzzanell (Ed.),
Rethinking organizational and managerial communication from feminist
perspectives (pp. 76–104). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
[23] Tretheway, A. (1999). Disciplined bodies: Women’s embodied
identities at work. Organization Studies, 20, 423–450; Tretheway, A.
(2000). Revisioning control: A feminist critique of disciplined bodies. In P.
M. Buzzanell (Ed.), Rethinking organizational and managerial
communication from feminist perspectives (pp. 107–127). Thousand
Oaks, CA: Sage; Tretheway, A., Scott, C., & LeGreco, M. (2006).
Constructing embodied organizational identities: Commodifying,
securing, and servicing professional bodies. In B. Dow & J. T. Wood
(Eds.), Handbook of gender and communication (pp. 123–141).
Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
[24] Ashcraft, K. L. (2005). Feminist organizational communication
studies: Engaging gender in public and private. In S. May & D. K. Mumby
(Eds.), Engaging organizational communication theory and research:
Multiple perspectives (pp. 141–169). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
[25] Ashcraft, K. L., & Mumby, D. K. (2004). Reworking gender: A feminist
communicology of organization. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
4.4 Chapter Exercises
REAL-WORLD CASE STUDY
The Walt Disney Company and its theme parks have drawn the
interest of organization and management scholars for decades.
Books and articles praising Disney management began appearing in
the 1960s. The runaway 1982 bestseller In Search of Excellence, by
Thomas Peters and Robert Waterman, remains in print and lauds
the Disney organization as a “best example” of customer service
and employee relations. [1] The high profile of the Disney theme
parks in US and global culture have prompted studies not only by
industrial psychologists and management scientists but by scholars
who take interpretive, critical, and postmodern approaches to
organizational communication. [2]
One innovative study, though conducted some thirty years ago,
reads like today’s news. The Disneyland theme park in California
was dealing with the economic effects of a recent recession. Since
the park was founded in 1955, management had succeeded in
building up an unusually close-knit organizational culture. So a 1984
strike by park employees, protesting a management proposal to
freeze wages and reduce benefits, made national headlines. Two
organizational communication researchers, Ruth Smith and Eric
Eisenberg, decided to investigate these labor troubles by taking an
interpretive approach to the Disney organizational culture. [3] They
interviewed managers from several departments, reviewed
company documents, and found that management carefully
cultivated the metaphor of Disneyland as a “drama” or “show.”
Customers were “guests” and employees, as the “cast,” were
expected to play their “roles” by talking in approved phrases that
followed the “script.” Dress codes and grooming requirements were
called “costuming.” The park’s “onstage” and “backstage” areas
were clearly delineated.
Then Smith and Eisenberg interviewed striking workers and were
surprised by what they discovered. The company founder, Walt
Disney, had died in 1966. His successors worked diligently to carry
on his legacy so that the show might go on. In fact, according to
Smith and Eisenberg, management was so successful in cultivating
this idea that the park employees also took satisfaction in being
caretakers of the Disney legacy. And with Disneyland’s emphasis on
family entertainment, park employees began to see their workplace
as a “family.” When management was compelled by the recession to
emphasize the bottom line, employees believed the company was
forsaking the Disney legacy and violating the spirit of the “Disney
family.” Management responded by suggesting that families go
through hard times but to no avail. The strike lasted twenty-two
days, the union went public with its concerns, management
implemented a separate wage scale for new employees, and the
organizational culture was profoundly changed.
1. Smith and Eisenberg took an interpretive approach for their
research on the organizational culture of Disneyland by analyzing
company documents and interviewing managers and employees.
If you were a postpositive researcher, how might you have
conducted surveys of Disneyland employees to supplement the
interviews? Would such knowledge of aggregate responses alone
have helped you understand the Disneyland culture? Or would
you have needed to interpret the mind-sets of individual
managers and employees? In other words, could nomothetic
research by itself have sufficed, or was ideographic research
essential?
2. If you had worked with Smith and Eisenberg, how might you have
extended their study through ethnographic fieldwork? What
Disneyland management and employee activities and rituals
might you have observed and participated in? Smith and
Eisenberg analyzed the metaphors that managers and employees
used in their interviews; managers emphasized a “drama”
metaphor, while employees also added a “family” metaphor. How
might ethnographic fieldwork—as you participated in and directly
experienced Disneyland culture for yourself—have extended the
findings?
3. What might a critical organizational communication scholar have
said about the culture that Smith and Eisenberg found at
Disneyland? Many organization and management scholars have
praised the Disney company. But a critical scholar might ask, Did
management use its “show” discourse to reify and universalize its
interests? Was this discourse a kind of technical reasoning to gain
a desired managerial goal and make practical reasoning toward
mutual consent seem irrational? Did the discourse distort
employees’ consciousness to favor management? Did it distort
communication so that all communicative action took place on
managerial terms? And as a postmodern scholar might have
asked, did the discourse “manufacture consent” so that workers
willingly disciplined themselves? What do you think?
4. Reread the description in the case of the “show” discourse that
governed the organizational culture at Disneyland. Then reread
the discussion in this chapter about the seven traditions in
communication theory: cybernetic, phenomenological,
sociopsychological, sociocultural, semiotic, critical, and rhetorical.
Now try to explain the “show” discourse according to each
tradition.
5. Karl Weick’s system theory holds that people collectively “make
sense” of their workplace by enacting responses to its
complexities, selecting the best responses, and retaining those
responses to guide future enactments and selections. Try to
interpret the Disneyland “show” culture that Eisenberg and Smith
discovered through this framework.
6. Anthony Giddens’s structuration theory holds that even as people
create a structure, they simultaneously perpetuate or reproduce
the structure by acting within what the structure enables and what
it constrains. Try to explain our case study through this
framework. Robert McPhee’s application of structuration theory to
organizations holds that structuration occurs differently at the
executive, middle management, and employee levels. Does this
help explain why Disneyland employees went on strike?
7. What might a feminist organizational communication scholar have
said about the culture that Smith and Eisenberg discovered at
Disneyland? Does their description suggest that the organization
was gendered? Do you see any evidence of binary thinking in the
Disneyland culture that Smith and Eisenberg describe?
END-OF-CHAPTER ASSESSMENT
1. In Chapter 4, we learned that theorists must make decisions about ontology, epistemology, and axiology. Select the answer that gives the definitions of these three terms in the order of ontology, epistemology, and axiology.
a. how things are known; what is worth knowing; how things exist
b. what is worth knowing; how things exist; how things are known
c. how things exist; what is worth knowing; how things are known
d. how things exist; how things are known; what is worth knowing
e. what is worth knowing; how things are known; how things exist
2. The belief that a social phenomenon (such as an organization) has a subjective existence, and that it naturally tends toward order, is characteristic of which approach to organizations?
a. postpositive b. interpretive c. critical d. postmodern e. feminist
3. The belief that a social phenomenon (such as an organization) is known by applying prior theoretical knowledge to the phenomenon, and that it naturally tends toward conflict, is characteristic of which approach to organizations?
a. postpositive b. interpretive c. critical d. postmodern e. functionalist
4. The belief that a social phenomenon (such as an organization) exists independent of human perception, and that its structures are created through human agency, is characteristic of which approach to organizations?
a. postpositive b. interpretive c. critical d. postmodern e. social constructionist
5. Which model depicts communication as a process by which communicators send messages/feedback simultaneously to one another?
a. sociopsychological b. sociocultural c. linear d. interactional e. transactional
Answer Key
1. d
2. b
3. c
4. a
5. e
[1] Peters, T. J., & Waterman, R. H., Jr. (1982). In search of excellence:
Lessons from America’s best companies. New York, NY: Harper & Row.
[2] For example, see Boje, D. M. (1995). Stories of the story-telling
organization: A postmodern analysis of Disney as “Tamara-land.”
Academy of Management Review, 38, 997–1035; Van Maanen, J. (1991).
The smile factory: Work at Disneyland. In P. J. Frost, L. F. Moore, M. R.
Lewis, C. C. Lundberg, & J. Martin (Eds.), Reframing organizational
culture (pp. 58–76). Newbury Park, CA: Sage; Van Maanen, J. (1992).
Displacing Disney: Some notes on the flow of organizational culture.
Qualitative Sociology, 15, 5–25; Van Maanen, J., & Kunda, G. (1989).
Real feelings: Emotional expression and organizational culture. Research
in Organizational Behavior, 11, 43–103.
[3] Smith, R. C., & Eisenberg, E. M. (1987). Conflict at Disneyland: A
root-metaphor analysis. Communication Monographs, 54, 367–380.
Chapter 5
Communicating Between and Among Internal Stakeholders
© Thinkstock/iStock
Communication Structure
As discussed in Chapter 1, one of the fundamental parts of an organization is the
presence of a hierarchy. Since the 1950s, researchers have been very interested
in how information is passed around the various levels of an organization’s
hierarchy. How information is passed around an organization is commonly
referred to as communication structure, and there are three dominant
perspectives: channels, perceived networks, and observable networks. [1] The
channels perspective sees messages as concrete objects that can be passed along
clearly established channels of communication within an organization. [2] In
essence, the channels perspective focuses on how the message moves along the
channels of communication and not on the relationship between the sender and
the receiver. Under this perspective, the receiver becomes a passive individual in
the communication process. In Chapter 1, we mentioned Redding’s ten
postulates of organizational communication. [3] One of his postulates explains
that the message received, not the one sent, is the one that a receiver will
ultimately act upon in an organization. The channels perspective violates this
basic tenet of organizational communication.
The second prominent perspective of organizational communication structure
discussed is the perceived network perspective. [4] One way that some scholars
have attempted to ascertain how communication is transmitted within an
organization is to ask organizational members. In essence, this method involves
interviewing organizational members and asking them whom they talk to and
how they pass on information to their coworkers. According to Steven R.
Corman and Craig R. Scott, perceived networks are innately flawed: “This
formulation denies the existence of a network of communication, suggesting
instead that the network is a structure of perceived communication relationships.
It is a kind of latent knowledge that guides members’ manifest communication
behavior. We believe members’ reports of communication reflect this knowledge,
not their recollections of specific communication episodes.” [5]
Corman and Scott’s argument against the use of perceived networks is twofold.
First, Corman and Scott argue that when researchers ask participants about their
communication networks, the participants respond by thinking of whom they
should be communicating with, not necessarily whom they actually
communicate with at all. Second, the perceptions that participants have about
their communicative networks is more a generalized understanding of how they
communicate and not how they actually communicate during specific
communicative episodes. In other words, people often believe that they utilize
specific channels of communication within the organization, whereas in reality,
they are communicating in a completely different way.
The third prominent perspective of organizational communication structure is the
observable network perspective. [6] Another way that scholars can examine how
communication actually happens within an organization is to literally watch it
happen. While actually watching how communication occurs within an
organization provides the most accurate information, the research process is very
time consuming. When actually observing an organization’s communication
network, you cannot hope to get all the necessary information in a short period
of time. For this reason, data collection in this type of research is very laborious.
Furthermore, a researcher’s ability to observe actual communication networks is
only as good as the researcher’s access to those communication networks.
People who talk outside of work or in inaccessible areas of the organization (like
the bathroom) can lead to an incomplete picture of the actual communication
networks within the organization.
Overall, watching how people interact within an organization and how
information is transmitted within an organization is a very difficult task.
Furthermore, how researchers and organizations view communication networks
also differs. Corman and Scott noted, “We believe…there is no network of
communication in the sense analogous to a network of computers or telephones
or television stations. Instead, the network is an abstract structure of perceived
communication relationships that functions as a set of rules and resources actors
draw upon in accomplishing communication behavior.” [7] Ultimately, this
abstract structure can be broken down into two basic parts: formal
communication networks and informal communication networks. The rest of this
chapter will examine formal and informal communication networks.
[1] Papa, M. J., Daniels, T. D., & Spiker, B. K. (2008). Organizational
communication: Perspectives and trends. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
[2] Koehler, J. W., Anatol, K. W. E., & Applbaum, R. L. (1981).
Organizational communication: Behavioral perspectives (2nd ed.). New
York, NY: Holt, Rinehart & Winston.
[3] Redding, W. C. (1972). Communication with the organization: An
interpretive review of theory and research. New York, NY: Industrial
Communication Council.
[4] Papa, M. J., Daniels, T. D., & Spiker, B. K. (2008). Organizational
communication: Perspectives and trends. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
[5] Corman, S. R., & Scott, C. R. (1994). Perceived networks, activity foci,
and observable communication in social collectives. Communication
Theory, 4, 171–190, p. 174.
[6] Papa, M. J., Daniels, T. D., & Spiker, B. K. (2008). Organizational
communication: Perspectives and trends. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
[7] Corman, S. R., & Scott, C. R. (1994). Perceived networks, activity foci,
and observable communication in social collectives. Communication
Theory, 4, 171–190, p. 181.
5.1 Formal Communication Networks
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
1. Explain Weber’s (1930) beliefs on downward communication.
2. Understand Katz and Kahn’s (1966) typology of downward
communication.
3. Clarify Hirokawa’s (1979) two problems associated with
downward communication.
4. Be able to explain Hirokawa’s (1979) four functions of upward
communication.
5. Understand Katz and Kahn’s (1966) typology of upward
communication.
6. Explain the importance of employee silence and organizational
dissent.
7. Explain Fayol’s (1916/1949) perspective on horizontal/lateral
communication.
8. Understand Hirokawa’s (1979) four functions of horizontal/lateral
communication.
9. Analyze Charles and Marschan-Piekkari’s (2002) five
organizational behaviors to increase the quality and quantity of
horizontal/lateral communication in multinational corporations.
The word formal describes adherence to a set of conventional requirements of
© Thinkstock/iStock
behavior. Formal communication consists of the rules and
norms established by an organization for communicative
behavior. A communication rule is a standard or directive
governing how communication occurs within an
organization. Communication rules are explicitly stated and
may be found in your organization’s policies and
procedures manual. For example, maybe your organization
has very strict policies established for what happens in case
of an emergency. One of the authors of this book worked in
a hospital that had very explicit communication rules to be
followed if someone was accidentally stuck by a needle.
First, the individual was required to go immediately to the emergency room for
testing and the initiation of preventive pharmaceutical measures. Second, the
head of the hospital’s risk-management office was to be contacted. The risk-
management head would then investigate the matter and submit a formal report
of all accidents to the CEO of the hospital on a monthly basis. These steps were
not perceived as optional at all and were clearly written in the employee
handbook.
Communication norms, on the other hand, are standards or patterns of
communication regarded as typical. Where communication rules are explicitly
discussed within an organization, communication norms are learned only
through active observation of communicative behavior within the organization.
In fact, one of the most common ways to learn a communicative norm in an
organization is to accidentally violate the norm. For example, in the same
hospital discussed earlier, the head of risk management had to formally
communicate to the CEO on a monthly basis any accidents that had occurred.
However, the head of risk management would also send the CEO an e-mail as
soon as she had an incident report, just to keep him updated more frequently.
When the head of risk management went on a two-month leave of absence, one
of her subordinates took over the position. The subordinate followed the
guidelines as set forth in the policies and procedures manual to the letter.
However, the CEO got very angry when at the end of the month he received his
formal briefing of accidents, because he hadn’t been kept up to date throughout
the month. In this case, the subordinate had followed the formal communication
rules of the organization but had violated what had become a formal
communication norm.
Obviously, understanding how formal communication functions within an
organization is very important, which is why a considerable amount of the early
research on organizational communication examined formal communication. To
help us further understand formal communication in the organization, we’re
going to look at it by examining the three directions communication happens
within an organization: downward, upward, horizontal/lateral.
Downward Communication
Downward communication consists of messages that start at the top of the
hierarchy and are transmitted down the hierarchy to the lowest rungs of the
hierarchy. Downward communication can be considered a top-to-bottom
approach for organizational communication. The earliest thinker in the area of
downward communication was Max Weber. [1] Weber believed that there were
two ways to get employees to follow one’s directives: power and authority.
Weber defined power as the ability to force people to obey regardless of their
resistance, whereas authority occurs when orders are voluntarily obeyed by those
receiving them. Weber argued that individuals in authority-based organizations
were more likely to perceive directives as legitimate. [2] While this process
sounds simplistic, individuals in management positions have often had to
determine how to communicate with employees. Randy Hirokawa noted that
there are two general types of downward communication in modern
organizations: “(1) information concerning the current/future status of specific
aspects of the organization, new organizational policies, recent administrative
decisions, and recent changes in the standard-operating-procedures; and (2)
information of a task-related nature which generally provide subordinates with
the technical know-how to accomplish their tasks or assignments with greater
efficiency and productivity.” [3]
While Hirokawa’s two-pronged approach to downward communication is fairly
consistent with the type of communication that occurs in modern organizations,
this type of communication is not always present.
Types of Downward Communication
While numerous typologies examine the various types of messages transmitted
down a hierarchy from management, the most commonly cited typology was
created by Daniel Katz and Robert L. Kahn. [4] Katz's and Kahn’s typology
breaks downward communication into five distinct types: job instructions, job
rationales, procedures and practices, feedback, and indoctrination.
Job Instructions
The first type of message that management commonly communicates to
employees is job instructions, or how management wants an employee to
perform her or his job. Often this type of downward communication occurs
through training. Depending on the difficulty of the job, communicating to an
employee how to perform her or his job could take days, months, or years. Some
organizations will even send employees outside the organization for more
specialized training.
Job Rationales
The second type of message Katz and Kahn identified as commonly
communicated downward in an organization is job rationales. [5] A job rationale
is a basic statement of the purpose of a specific job and how that job relates to
the overarching goal of the organization. Every job should help the organization
achieve its goals, so understanding how one’s position fits into the larger scheme
of the organization is very important. Furthermore, the job rationale will also
illustrate how a single job relates to other jobs within the organizational
hierarchy.
Procedures and Practices
The third type of message Katz and Kahn identified as commonly communicated
downward in an organization is procedures and practices. [6] Procedures and
practices typically come in the form of an employee manual or handbook when
you start working within an organization. Procedures are sequences of steps to
be followed in a given situation. For example, in an organization, there may be
procedures in place for reporting sexual harassment or procedures for hiring new
members. Practices, on the other hand, are behaviors people should do
habitually. For example, maybe you are required to punch in and out using a
time clock, or you are not allowed to wear open-toed shoes. There are
procedures and practices related to policies (courses of action taken in the
organization), rules (standards or directives governing behavior), and benefits
(payment and entitlements one receives with the job).
Feedback
The fourth type of message Katz and Kahn identified as commonly
communicated downward in an organization is feedback. [7] Providing feedback
to one’s subordinates is a very important feature of any supervisory position. [8] Employees can grow and become more proficient with their jobs only if they
are receiving feedback from those above them. This feedback needs to contain
both positive and negative feedback. Positive feedback occurs when a supervisor
explains to a subordinate what he or she is doing well, whereas negative
feedback occurs when a supervisor explains to a subordinate areas that need
improvement. Furthermore, feedback should not only occur in formal review
sessions often referred to as “summative feedback.” Instead, supervisors should
utilize formative feedback, or periodic feedback designed to help an employee
grow and develop within the organization.
Employee Indoctrination
The last type of downward communication discussed by Katz and Kahn is
employee indoctrination. [9] Indoctrination is the process of instilling an
employee with a partisan or ideological point of view. Specifically, organizations
use indoctrination messages in order to help new members adopt ideological
stances related to the organization’s culture and goals. The ultimate goal of
organizational indoctrination is organizational identification, or “the extent to
which that person’s self-concept includes the same characteristics he or she
perceives to be distinctive, central, and enduring to the organization.” [10] We’ll
examine employee indoctrination in more detail in Chapter 12.
Katz and Kahn’s typology of downward communication is very useful to
remember when examining how communication in an organization is conducted. [11] Often, managers may be competent at one or two of the types of downward
communication but not as competent in the other three. When this is the case,
managers need training in how to become effective downward communicators.
Furthermore, managers must also think of the most appropriate communication
channels to use when sending downward messages. A 2004 article in
Management Report titled “Downward Communication” listed a wide range of
possibilities for communicating information downward: staff meetings, one-on-
one meetings, internal newsletters, employee information sheets, bulletin boards,
employee handbooks, and e-mail. [12] While all of these are options for
downward communication, not all of them are appropriate for every
communication situation. For example, you probably don’t want to chastise an
employee’s tardiness in a company newsletter, on a bulletin board, or during a
staff meeting; however, this form of downward communication could be
appropriately sent during a one-on-one meeting, through employee information
sheets, or in an e-mail. Ultimately, managers must be competent in how they
communicate down the hierarchy to their subordinates.
Now that we’ve looked at the types of messages sent down the hierarchy and the
different mediums a manager could use to send messages down the hierarchy,
let’s examine some of the problems with downward communication.
Problems with Downward Communication
Downward communication is an extremely important part of any organization.
However, Randy Hirokawa noted two primary problems associated with
downward communication: accuracy and adequacy. [13] Accuracy of information
refers to how truthful a message is that has been received. There are two primary
ways that the accuracy of a message can be distorted. First, some messages are
simply based on inaccurate information. For example, a manager who hears a
false rumor and then passes the rumor on to her or his subordinates has passed
on inaccurate information. Obviously, when the truth of the rumor is learned by
subordinates, the manager’s credibility will be negatively impacted, because her
or his subordinates will perceive the manager as not being a trustworthy source
of information. The second way messages can contain inaccurate information is
as a result of multiple people in the communication chain or, as W. Charles
Redding calls it, serial transmission. [14] As we know from playing the telephone
game in school, when A communicates to B and B communicates to C and C
communicates to D, the chances of the message becoming distorted with each
passing person become more likely. Even in the case of serial transmission of
information (AàBàCàD), managers who are caught communicating inaccurate
information can expect to have employees question their credibility. Another
ramification of passing on inaccurate information is that some subordinates will
start to question how connected their supervisor is to the organizational
hierarchy. Basically, if my supervisor is passing on inaccurate information, then
clearly he or she doesn’t really know what’s going on at all.
A second problem associated with downward communication refers to the
adequacy of the information being communicated. Adequacy of information
refers to whether or not the information being communicated is sufficient to
satisfy a requirement or need for information in the workplace. When discussing
adequacy, there are two possible extremes that managers could swing to:
communication underload and communication overload. Communication
underload occurs when subordinates are not provided enough information to
complete their jobs. Communication underload can come in the form of
inadequate on-the-job training, limited feedback from one’s supervisor, or
insufficient information on policies and procedures in the organization. Often,
communication underload is completely accidental and occurs as an inadvertent
omission. In this case, supervisors themselves may have too many things going
on, and information is accidentally not passed on to their subordinates in a
timely fashion or at all. At other times, communication underload can occur
because a supervisor feels the need to hoard information in an effort to secure
her or his power base. Individuals often see information as power and
transmitting that information to another person as a loss of power. [15] When
information hoarding occurs, subordinates may be given just enough information
to not make their supervisor look bad but not enough information to truly excel
at their jobs. For obvious reasons, information hoarding can be a very large
problem in organizations.
The second problem associated with adequacy of information involves
communication overload, or when subordinates are provided too much
information to complete their jobs. In an ideal work environment, supervisors
will function as gatekeepers of information and make sure that adequate
information is passed on to a subordinate to help the subordinate excel in her or
his job. Unfortunately, some supervisors do not know how to function as
gatekeepers, so they pass along any information they receive to their
subordinates without filtering information that is not useful for their
subordinates. Eventually, subordinates can become so overwhelmed with the
number of messages being received that they spend much of their workday
simply sifting through information, which decreases their ability to be
productive. [16] Other individuals faced with communication overload simply
start ignoring all the information coming in, because it’s easier to ignore
information than to sift through it all. Communication overload is generally a
product of channel capacity, or an individual’s limits to receiving information. [17] Some information is easy for an individual process, but other information
involves considerably more effort on the part of the receiver. The more technical
and complex the information, the smaller an individual’s channel capacity for
handling the information will be.
In addition to Randy Hirokawa’s two primary problems associated with
downward communication, we believe there is a third problem with downward
communication: utility. [18] Utility involves whether or not the information
provided is actually useful. Often, information that is transmitted to an
individual within an organization is completely useless to that individual. For
example, one of the coauthors of this book was paid to go to a meeting about
new computer software the organization wasn’t planning on purchasing. In this
instance, the subordinate (our coauthor) was actually sent for training on a
software package that the subordinate would never see and never use. In this
case, our coauthor not only wasted time going to this meeting, but the
organization paid our coauthor to go to this meeting, and the organization paid
the person making the presentation. In essence, both time and money were
wasted on information that had no utility to either the individual employee or the
organization.
Effective Methods for Downward Communication
Now that we’ve looked at some of the problems organizations face with
downward communication, let’s examine some best practices for downward
communication. First, individuals who are engaged in downward communication
need to make sure that the information they are passing on to those below them
is first and foremost accurate. If this means spending a little extra time verifying
information, then verify the information. A supervisor may have to spend a
couple of extra minutes verifying information, but this is a better trade-off than
having to rebuild one’s credibility.
Second, make sure that the amount of information you are passing along to your
subordinates is adequate and can be utilized. To ensure that you are avoiding
communication underload and communication overload, you should do two
things: filter and ask. The first way to ensure your subordinates are receiving
adequate information is to filter out information that isn’t necessary for your
subordinates. Filtering out information for one’s subordinates is not an easy task.
One easy way to help filter information is to ask yourself, “Will this information
help my subordinates personally or professionally?” Some information could
help your subordinates personally—workshops on avoiding stress, time
management, or conflict management. Other information can help your
subordinates professionally: information related to job duties, information on
career advancement, and information related to organizational policies and
procedures. In addition to attempting to filter information for your subordinates,
you can always ask your subordinates if they feel they are getting enough
information. Often, subordinates will be the first to tell you when they feel
under- or overinformed.
The third best practice in downward communication involves the source of the
message. Obviously, the source of the message has a strong impact on how
people interpret the importance of the message itself. For example, messages
received from the CEO of an organization will receive more weight than a
message from a midlevel manager. For this reason, important messages should
come from the top of the hierarchy and be transmitted as directly as possible to
the employees to avoid serial transmission.
The fourth best practice in downward communication involves the type of
communication channels utilized for the downward transmission of a message.
By communication channels, we are referring to the traditional notion of
communication channels commonly held in organizations. When encoding a
message for transmission through the organizational hierarchy, one needs to
think about the most expedient method for delivering the message itself. As
previously discussed, the more individuals a message is transmitted through, the
greater the likelihood that the message itself will become distorted.
The fifth best practice in downward communication involves mindfully choosing
the communicative medium utilized for downward communication. As discussed
earlier in this chapter, Katz and Kahn’s typology of downward communication
consists of five different types: job instructions, job rationales, procedures and
practices, feedback, and indoctrination. [19] When encoding various messages
related to these five types of downward communication, managers need to
realize that the same communicative medium may not be the most effective tool
for every message communicated. A variety of different types of communicative
mediums could be utilized: staff meetings, one-on-one meetings, internal
newsletters, employee information sheets, bulletin boards, employee handbooks,
e-mail, employee social networking sites, and so on. In fact, if a piece of
information is extremely important, communicating the information through
multiple mediums may also be important. One of our coauthors had a former
student named Chad who worked for a large discount chain as a frontline
customer services representative in the technology department. Chad found out
one day that he had violated a new rule set forth by the organization but that he
didn’t know existed. When he asked his manager about the new policy, Chad
was told that he should have received an e-mail about the new rule in his
employee e-mail account. To make this situation even more problematic, Chad
didn’t know that he had an employee e-mail account. Chad discovered that the
corporation had an intranet, and all employees were supposed to check their e-
mail prior to clocking in for work. Chad asked some of his coworkers if they
knew about employee e-mail accounts and found that apparently no one knew
about the e-mail accounts. This example illustrates what can happen when
organizations utilize only one communicative medium for important downward
messages.
The story about Chad also illustrates our final recommendation for best practices
in downward communication—checking for understanding. The message
received, not the one sent, is the one that a receiver will ultimately act upon in an
organization. [20] Or, as in the case of Chad, the lack of message reception is also
a problem. It’s one thing to tell someone something and completely different to
have communicated with someone. Telling is a sender-centered communicative
strategy because the sender encodes a message and transmits the message. [21] However, the sender does not make sure that a receiver actually receives the
message or correctly interprets the message itself. Furthermore, the meaning of a
message is one that is determined by the receiver, not by the sender. [22] In the
case of telling, the receiver is completely taken out of the communication
process, so the chance of misunderstandings and missed communication
increases dramatically. For this reason, we recommend that downward
communication be followed up by some kind of interaction with the individuals
being sent a message to ensure that the message is being received and interpreted
in a manner consistent with the sender’s original intent. To ascertain message
reception and interpretation, supervisors need to encourage their subordinates to
participate in upward communication.
Upward Communication
Upward communication consists of messages that start at the bottom of the
hierarchy and are transmitted up the hierarchy to the highest rungs. Upward
communication can be considered a bottom-up approach to organizational
communication. Randy Hirokawa noted that upward communication serves four
very important functions in the modern organization. [23] First, upward
communication allows management to ascertain the success of previously
relayed downward communication. Second, upward communication allows
individuals at the bottom of the hierarchy to have a voice in policies and
procedures. Hirokawa clarifies, “Perhaps even more importantly, upward
communication, because it allows subordinates to participate in the decision-
making process, also facilitates the acceptance of those decisions which they had
a part in making.” [24] Third, upward communication allows subordinates to
voice suggestions and opinions to make the working environment better. As
Elton Mayo discovered during the employee interview program as part of the
Hawthorne Works Studies, employees have a lot to say about their working
conditions and how to make the organization more efficient. [25] Furthermore,
simply asking employees for their suggestions and opinions was found to
increase job satisfaction. Lastly, upward communication allows management to
test how employees will react to new policies and procedures. Often, before
radical changes are made to an organization, management will try to use focus
groups of subordinates to gauge their reactions to impending changes. These
reactions can then be used in the framing of the communicative messages about
the impending changes to the entire organization.
As a side note, we feel it is important to also stress research examining sex
differences in upward communication. [26] The researchers noted females who
provide more upward communication are more likely to advance and be
promoted than those females who did not. As such, in a world where women are
still underpromoted in many organizations, mastering upward communication
can be very important for female workers.
Now that we’ve examined some of the basic reasons for upward communication
in organizations, we’re going to examine the types of upward communication in
organizations, problems with upward communication in organizations, and
effective methods for upward communication.
Types of Upward Communication
While numerous typologies examine the various types of messages transmitted
up a hierarchy, the most commonly cited typology was created by Katz and
Kahn. [27] Katz and Kahn’s typology breaks upward communication into four
distinct types: information about the subordinate herself or himself, information
about coworkers and their problems, information about organizational policies
and procedures, and information about the task at hand. Dennis Tourish and Paul
Robson argue that a fifth form of upward communication needs to be included in
this list: critical upward communication. [28]
Information about the Subordinate
The first form of upward communication discussed by Katz and Kahn involves
information about the subordinate herself or himself. [29] Information that can be
communicated upwardly about oneself typically falls into one of two categories:
personal information and professional information. Personal information that can
be communicated upwardly involves information that is more intimate in nature.
For example, you can talk to your supervisor about your friends and families,
hobbies, psychological/medical problems, and so forth. This information helps
subordinates establish a more understanding relationship with their supervisors.
Professional information that can be communicated upwardly involves issues
related to job performance or problems related to work. For example, maybe
you’re having a great quarter and want to communicate this to your supervisor.
On the other hand, maybe you’re really having a problem with one specific facet
of your job, and you need help or more time. Perhaps you’re supposed to write a
report, but the report keeps getting pushed further and further down your priority
list as new projects come your way.
Information about Coworkers and Their Problems
The second form of upward communication discussed by Katz and Kahn
involves information about coworkers and their problems. [30] Often managers
are completely removed from what is actually going on with their subordinates,
because the managers’ attentions are not completely focused on their
subordinates. Despite what subordinates often think, managers have their own
workloads that must be taken care of in addition to their managerial duties. For
this reason, managers are often simply unaware of what is going on with their
subordinates. In order to combat this lack of clarity, managers often rely on
subordinates to report problems. One of our coauthors worked for a medical
school overseeing medical students, interns, residents, and teaching faculty. One
of the medical interns was actually showing up to work intoxicated. The only
reason our coauthor found out about this was when one of the teaching faculty
called to report the problem. While it was our coauthor’s job to oversee
situations like these, if our coauthor had never been told there was a problem, the
problem would have continued and could have led to serious consequences both
medically and legally. Another facet of this problem occurs when subordinates
are not able to complete their job duties. People can become very adept at hiding
what they don’t know and can’t do when necessary. Others will only actively
work when they are under immediate supervision; however, once the supervision
leaves, the individuals stop working. The only way a supervisor has any chance
of finding out about either of these situations is to rely on other subordinates to
report what’s happening. While children are taught that tattling is a horrible
thing, often telling a supervisor what a coworker is or is not doing is extremely
important. Whether the coworker simply needs more training or needs to be
reprimanded, the only way a supervisor can correct behavior is if he or she
knows about the problem in the first place. To help with this process, many
organizations have actually initiated anonymous complaint/report phone lines.
Individuals who see someone behaving in a dangerous or unethical manner can
anonymously call the phone line and leave a message about the problem, and the
organization can then start an internal investigation.
Organizational Procedures and Practices
The third form of upward communication discussed by Katz and Kahn involves
information about organizational procedures and practices. [31] As previously
discussed in this chapter, procedures are sequences of steps to be followed in a
given situation, whereas practices are behaviors people should do habitually.
Within any organization there are procedures and practices related to policies
(courses of action taken in the organization), rules (standards or directives
governing behavior), and benefits (payment and entitlements one receives with
the job). Upward communication about procedures and practices can help
management see where policies, rules, and benefits can be more influential or
streamlined. Often, management creates procedures and practices for how things
ought to be accomplished without ever having to implement the procedure or
practice themselves. The only way management can know if the procedures and
practices are causing unneeded stress or loss of resources is if the people who
have to enact those procedures and practices explain the problem.
Task at Hand
The last form of upward communication discussed by Katz and Kahn involves
information about the task at hand. [32] This last form of upward communication
is specifically directed to communicate information to management that helps an
individual complete her or his job. Types of messages that could fall into this
category include asking for more information, asking to have a task clarified,
asking for additional resources to complete the task, keeping a supervisor
informed of a timetable for completion, or explaining the current status of a
project. All these different types of messages enable the subordinate to either ask
questions about the task or inform his or her supervisor about the task. While
communicating information about oneself is probably most important during the
initial stages of relationship development with one’s supervisor, communicating
information about tasks to one’s supervisor is the most common form of upward
communication and the most important over time.
Critical Upward Communication
In addition to the four forms of upward communication discussed already,
Tourish and Robson argue that a fifth form of upward communication needs to
be included in this list: critical upward communication. [33] Critical upward
communication is “feedback that is critical of organizational goals and
management behavior.” [34] Critical upward communication has been discussed
under many different terms: “employee voice, issue selling, whistle-blowing,
championing, dissent and boat rocking.” [35] Everyday individuals in
organizations around the world make decisions about whether to communicate
critically about organizational goals and management behavior. To help us
understand upward communication, let’s briefly examine two communication-
related variables: employee silence and organizational dissent.
Employee Silence
A lot of the focus in communication research is on talking, but Richard
Johannesen explained that researchers needed to start understanding the vital
role that silence can play in human communication within a variety of contexts. [36] The first researchers to examine in the organizational literature the impact
silence can have in the workplace were Elizabeth Morrison and Frances
Milliken. [37] Employee silence is fundamentally understood as a
communication phenomenon in which employees intentionally or
unintentionally withhold information that might be useful to a leader or her or
his organization. [38] Morrison and Milliken argued that employees remain silent
because of their manager’s behavior with regard to upward communication.
Specifically, “Silence is an outcome that owes its origins to (1) managers’ fear of
negative feedback and (2) a set of implicit beliefs often held by managers.” [39] Imagine you’re working in a pizza shop and you try to explain to your
manager that simply rearranging some of the ingredients would actually make
putting the pizza together faster. If the manager shoots you down or gives you
dirty looks at the suggestion, you will be less likely to offer advice in the future.
There are three common forms of employee silence: acquiescent silence,
defensive silence, and prosocial silence. [40] First, acquiescent silence occurs
because employees are disengaged in the workplace and feel they simply cannot
make a difference. As such, they withhold information or simply do not bother
offering suggestions because they believe that it is impossible to make a real
difference in their organization. Second, defensive silence occurs as a form of
self-protection for employees. If an employee believes that speaking up will put
her or him at risk, then that employee will be less likely speak up. These people
withhold information or omit facts because they fear some kind of organizational
retaliation. Lastly, prosocial silence occurs because employees want to appear
cooperative and/or altruistic in the workplace. Organizations where conflict is
discouraged or avoided can lead people to withhold information to appear
cooperative or protect “proprietary knowledge to benefit the organization.” [41]
In a study examining employee silence in the workplace, Surahmaniam
Tangirala and Rangaraj Ramanujam found that employees who were “silenced”
in the workplace perceived their working environments as unjust, did not
identify with their organizations, and were not professionally committed to their
organizations. [42] In another study, Jason Wrench operationalized a set of
theoretical items originally proposed by Morrison and Milliken into a research
measure. [43] In the study, Wrench set out to examine the relationship between
organizational politics and various other organizational constructs. Specifically
related to employee silence, Wrench found that acquiescent and defensive
silence negatively related to employee motivation and job satisfaction.
Conversely, prosocial silence positively related to employee motivation and job
satisfaction. Overall, this study demonstrates the impact that silence can have on
an individual’s happiness in the workplace.
While employee silence has received a lot of traction in academic circles since
2000, a number myths about employee silence have developed: [44]
Myth: “Women and nonprofessional employees withhold more information
than men and professional staffers because they are more concerned about
consequences or more likely to see speaking up as futile.” Reality:
Research has found no evidence that any of this is true. In fact, the studies
that have examined gender differences have turned up no evidence to
support that women and men utilize silence in the workplace to differing
degrees. Furthermore, neither education nor income is also a good predictor
of who will be silent.
Myth: “If my employees are talking openly to me, they’re not holding
back.” Reality: Research has found that 42 percent of people admit to
purposely withholding information when there is nothing to gain or
something to lose by divulging that information. [45] As such, people may
be talking, but they may not be actually giving management a complete
picture.
Myth: “If employees aren’t speaking up, it’s because they don’t feel safe
doing so, despite all my efforts.” Reality: While there are many employees
who will remain silent out of fear, 25 percent of employees withhold
information simply to avoid wasting time. [46] Unfortunately, when
employees make decisions on what is useful or nonuseful information,
those decisions may not be completely informed or accurate.
Myth: “The only issues employees are scared to raise involve serious
allegations about illegal or unethical activities.” Reality: Obviously,
whistleblowing, the act of disclosing an illegal or unethical activity, can
definitely make people a little anxious. However, 20 percent of employees
admit that “fear of consequences has led them to withhold suggestions for
addressing ordinary problems and making improvements. Such silence on
day-to-day issues keeps managers from getting information they need to
prevent bigger problems.” [47]
Overall, employee silence is a stifling behavior that has numerous negative
effects on how people communicate and interact within the workplace. Let’s
switch our attention to the other end of the communication spectrum and discuss
how employees articulate dissent within the workplace.
Organizational Dissent
Jeffrey Kassing proposed a model for what he termed organizational dissent as
having two basic processes: (1) individual employee feels apart from her or his
organization, and (2) the employee expresses disagreement about some aspect of
her or his organization’s philosophy or behavior. [48] The second of these
processes is similar to Tourish and Robson’s notion of critical upward
communication. [49] Kassing believed that dissent is a “subset of employee voice
that entails the expression of disagreement or contradictory opinions in the
workplace.” [50] Ultimately, the concept of organizational dissent stems out of
the basic American value of freedom of speech, where it is promoted that good
citizens should be able to express their disagreement. However, in the
organizational realm, employees must carefully decide whether expressing
disagreement is worth the possible ramifications of disagreeing: “employees
assess available strategies for expressing dissent in response to individual,
relational, and organizational influences and that they actually express dissent
after considering whether they will be perceived as adversarial or constructive
as well as the likelihood that they will be retaliated against.” [51] Ultimately,
Kassing argued that there are three primary types of organizational dissent:
articulated/upward, latent/lateral, and displaced. [52] The “Organizational Dissent
Scale” sidebar contains the scale created by Kassing to measure employee
dissent.
Organizational Dissent Scale
This is a series of statements about how people express their concerns about
work. There are no right or wrong answers. Some of the items may sound
similar, but they pertain to slightly different issues. Please respond to all
items. Considering how you express your concerns at work, indicate your
degree of agreement with each statement by placing the appropriate number
in the blank to the left of each item.
Strongly Disagree Disagree Neutral Agree Strongly Agree
1 2 3 4 5
1. I am hesitant to raise questions or contradictory opinions in my
organization. _____
2. I refuse to discuss work concerns at home. _____
3. I criticize the inefficiency in this organization in front of everyone.
_____
4. I do not question management. _____
5. I’m hesitant to question workplace policies. _____
6. I join in when other employees complain about organizational changes.
_____
7. I make it a habit not to complain about work in front of my family.
_____
8. I make certain everyone knows when I’m unhappy with work policies.
_____
9. I don’t tell my supervisor when I disagree with workplace decisions.
_____
10. I discuss my concerns about workplace decisions with family and
friends outside of work. _____
11. I bring my criticism about organizational changes that aren’t working to
my supervisor or someone in management. _____
12. I let other employees know how I feel about the way things are done
around here. _____
13. I speak with my supervisor or someone in management when I question
workplace decisions. _____
14. I rarely voice my frustrations about workplace issues in front of my
spouse/partner or nonwork friends. _____
15. I make suggestions to management or my supervisor about correcting
inefficiency in my organization. _____
16. I talk about my job concerns to people outside of work. _____
17. I do not express my disagreement to management. _____
18. I hardly ever complain to my coworkers about workplace problems.
_____
19. I tell management when I believe employees are being treated unfairly.
_____
20. I talk with family and friends about workplace decisions that I am
uncomfortable discussing at work. _____
Scoring
To compute your scores, follow these instructions:
1. Articulated
Step 1: Add scores for items 11, 13, 15, and 19 Step 2: Add scores for items 1, 4, 5, 9, and 17 Step 3: Add 24 to Step 1
Step 4: Subtract the score for Step 2 from the score for Step 3
2. Displaced
Step 1: Add scores for items 2, 10, 16, and 20 Step 2: Add scores for items 7 and 14 Step 3: Add 12 to Step 1 Step 4: Subtract the score for Step 2 from the score for Step 3
3. Latent
Step 1: Add scores for items 3, 6, 8, and 12 Step 2: Add scores for item 18 Step 3: Add 6 to Step 1 Step 4: Subtract the score for Step 2 from the score for Step 3
Interpreting Your Score
For Articulated Dissent, scores should be between 9 and 45. If your score is
36 or higher, you engage in above-average levels of articulated dissent. If
your score is 35 or below, you engage in below-average levels of articulated
dissent.
For Displaced Dissent, scores should be between 6 and 30. If your score is 19
or higher, you engage in above-average levels of articulated dissent. If your
score is 18 or below, you engage in below-average levels of articulated
dissent.
For Latent Dissent, scores should be between 5 and 25. If your score is 14 or
higher, you engage in above-average levels of articulated dissent. If your
score is 13 or below, you engage in below-average levels of articulated
dissent.
Source: Kassing, J. W. (1998). Development and validation of the
Organizational Dissent Scale. Management Communication Quarterly, 12,
183–229. Reprinted with permission by Jeffrey W. Kassing.
Articulated/upward dissent “involves expressing dissent within organizations
to audiences that can effectively influence organizational adjustment and occurs
when employees believe they will be perceived as constructive and that their
dissent will not lead to retaliation.” [53] Kassing further noted that subordinates
can employ five different types of dissent strategies: direct-factual appeal,
solution presentation, repetition, circumvention, and threatening resignation. [54] The first articulated dissent strategy is direct-factual appeal, which is when
“people provide factual information based on their own work experience and
their understanding of company policies and practices when they express their
disagreement to their supervisors.” [55] The second articulated dissent strategy is
solution presentation, which is when a subordinate offers a solution to a
workplace problem while raising concerns about the problem itself. The third
articulated dissent strategy is repetition, or when a subordinate raises the same
issue over and over again over a period of time. The idea behind repetition is that
if the problem is brought up repeatedly, the supervisor may be more inclined to
eventually do something about the problem. The fourth articulated dissent
strategy is circumvention, which is when a subordinate goes around her or his
immediate supervisor to someone higher up the hierarchy in an attempt to get
some kind of action taken. While circumventing one’s immediate supervisor can
be very dangerous, there are often times when it is necessary. For example, many
organizations have procedures for reporting sexual harassment. The most
common first step in sexual harassment procedures is to report any harassing
behavior to your immediate supervisor, but what if your immediate supervisor is
the one harassing you? Many organizations realize that supervisor harassment
can be a problem, so they actually designate someone within the organization as
the “go-to” person for incidents of harassment. In these cases, individuals lower
on the hierarchy are able to circumvent their supervisors and report the
harassment to someone higher on the hierarchy. The last articulated dissent
strategy is to threaten resignation. This dissent strategy is fairly simple: do what
I want or I quit. Of course, this dissent strategy is only effective if the person
dissenting is actually ready to resign. Never use threatening resignation as a
bluffing tactic, because your supervisor may just decide to call your bluff.
The second type of organizational dissent, latent/lateral dissent, consists of
communicative behavior “that involves complaining to coworkers and voicing
criticism openly within organizations.” [56] Kassing labeled this form of dissent
“latent dissent” because the term “suggests that dissent readily exists but is not
always observable and that dissent becomes observable when certain conditions
exists (i.e., when frustration mounts).” [57] This form of organizational dissent is
actually a form of horizontal or lateral organizational communication, which will
be discussed later in this chapter.
The third type of organizational dissent, displaced dissent, occurs when an
individual decides to express her or his frustration about the workplace to friends
and family members not involved in the work itself. Let’s face it, there are times
when we all need to vent about the place we work, so most people do engage in
some form of displaced dissent. Displaced dissent becomes problematic when it
is the only form of dissent expressed, because organizational leadership and
followers have no idea that there is dissent. One of our coauthors had a job
where they were disconnected and unhappy with their working conditions. Over
time, the work felt less and less interesting, so our coauthor started looking for
another job. When our coauthor finally submitted a letter of resignation,
everyone was completely surprised because no one saw it coming.
Related Research
Investigating the Relationship between Superior-Subordinate Relationship
Quality and Employee Dissent
By Jeffrey W. Kassing (2000) [58]
In this study, Kassing set out to examine the relationship between
subordinate-supervisor relationship quality and subordinate utilization of
articulated and latent dissent. He recruited 232 employees who worked in
various organizations throughout Arizona. His sample consisted of 113
females (56 percent) and 99 males (43 percent) with 1 percent not responding
to the question regarding biological sex. The mean age of the participants was
37.08, and the average length of time on their current job was 5.72 years. The
study contained individuals at various levels of organizational hierarchies: 6
percent held top-management positions, 30 percent held management
positions, 57 percent held nonmanagement positions, and 6 percent held other
organizational positions.
In this study, Kassing had two basic hypotheses he wanted to test:
H1: Subordinates who perceive having high-quality relationships with their
supervisors will report using significantly more articulated dissent than
subordinates who perceive having low-quality relationships with their
supervisors.
H2: Subordinates who perceive having low-quality relationships with their
supervisors will report using significantly more latent dissent than
subordinates who perceive having high-quality relationships with their
supervisors.
To test these two hypotheses, Kassing used his measure of organizational
dissent along with a measure of subordinate-supervisor relationship quality.
Using the measure of subordinate-supervisor relationship quality, Kassing
created two groups by taking those who scored above the median (indicating
high relationship quality) and those who scored below the median (indicating
low relationship quality). Kassing then examined if these two groups differed
in their use of articulated and latent dissent.
The results for the first hypothesis indicated that those individuals who
reported having high relationship quality with their supervisors were more
likely to engage in articulated dissent than those who reported having low
relationship quality with their supervisors. Ultimately, the first hypothesis
was supported by the results.
The results for the second hypothesis indicated that those individuals who
reported having low relationship quality with their supervisors were more
likely to engage in latent dissent than those who reported having high
relationship quality with their supervisors. Ultimately, the second hypothesis
was supported by the results.
Based on the results from this study, we learn that the quality of relationship
an individual has with her or his immediate supervisor has a direct impact on
both articulated and latent organizational dissent.
The final type of dissent is referred to as displaced dissent and occurs outside the
confines of the organization itself. When an employee feels that dissent in the
workplace could be harmful, he or she will often express dissent to friends and
family members. Ultimately, whether an individual decides to express dissent
within the organization (upward or lateral) depends on how he or she views the
risks of doing so. If someone fears retaliation, bullying, or ostracism because of
dissent, he or she will be less likely to engage in dissent within the workplace. [59]
Research has also shown a relationship between employee silence and
organizational dissent. [60] Specifically related to employee silence, Wrench
found that acquiescent and defensive silence negatively related to articulated
dissent and positively related to latent dissent. Conversely, prosocial silence
positively related to articulated dissent and negatively related to latent dissent.
Overall, this research demonstrates a clear relationship between the use of
silence within an organization and the way an employee expresses her or his
dissent.
Problems with Upward Communication
Randy Hirokawa noted two primary problems associated with upward
communication: distortion and filtering. [61] Researchers have found that 85
percent of individuals had on at least one occasion “felt unable to raise an issue
or concern to their bosses even though they felt that the issue was important.” [62] In essence, subordinates purposely do not communicate information to their
supervisors, which ultimately distorts the overall picture a supervisor has of what
is going on in the workplace. The first study conducted on the issue of upward
distortion was Glen Mellinger’s groundbreaking work on the subject. [63] Frederic Jablin summarized Mellinger’s findings in this manner: “Results of
this early inquiry into message distortion revealed that when Individual A does
not trust Individual B, Individual A will conceal his/her feelings when
communicating to B about a particular issue. Moreover, concealment of
Individual A’s true feelings was found to be often associated with evasive,
compliant, or aggressive communicative behavior on his/her part and with
under- or overestimation of agreement on the issue by individual B.” [64]
In essence, when a subordinate is not forthcoming with her or his thoughts on an
issue, a supervisor often guesses what she or he thinks about the specific issue.
Now that we’ve examined Randy Hirokawa’s first problem associated with
upward communication (distortion), [65] we need to focus on the “three possible
culprits” of failure in upward communication: trust, influence, and mobility. [66] The first reason upward distortion may happen is because a subordinate
doesn’t trust her or his supervisor. If a subordinate does not perceive her or his
supervisor as trustworthy, the subordinate is simply more likely to avoid telling
the supervisor anything other than absolutely necessary information. The second
reason upward distortion may occur is a result of subordinate perceptions of
supervisor influence over the subordinate’s future. Subordinates who perceive a
supervisor as having a great effect on their futures could react in two totally
different ways. Some subordinates will be very open with communication in an
effort to build a stronger relationship with their supervisor, whereas other
subordinates will actually go along with whatever a supervisor wants even if the
subordinate thinks it’s a bad idea. In one case, a subordinate could end up
overcommunicating, while in the other case a subordinate ends up
undercommunicating, and either way the result is upward distortion. The third
reason for upward distortion relates to an individual’s desire to move up within
the hierarchy. It’s one thing for a supervisor to have influence over your career
path and a completely different thing to either care or not care about mobility.
In one study, the researchers examined four different organizations to see the
effect of trust, influence, and mobility on the quantity of upward communication. [67] They found that trust and influence both positively related to the quantity of
upward communication, and mobility did not really play a role in the quantity of
upward communication. This study was later replicated with the same results. [68] In essence, people who trust their supervisors and perceive their supervisors
as influencing their careers engage in more upward communication.
Communicating Ethically
From a subordinate’s perspective, is upward distortion ever an ethical
communicative practice? Often supervisors will want information from a
subordinate that could harm the subordinate or her or his coworkers, so
determining whether one should distort information or not can be a hard
thing. For example, what if your supervisor asks you about the recent
performance of one of your coworkers and your coworker’s performance was
subpar? Do you tell your supervisor the truth, knowing that the coworker
could be reprimanded or fired, or do you distort the facts in an effort to
“save” your coworker? People in organizations often distort information to
help themselves or their peers, but is it ever ethical?
On the other hand, what if your supervisor asked you about her or his
performance, which has been problematic; do you tell him the truth?
Obviously, it would be easy to say that communication distortion is always
unethical, but is that really the case? Can communication distortion be
ethical?
The second problem Randy Hirokawa noted with upward communication relates
to filtering. [69] Organizations today often suffer from what they term info-glut or
data smog, which is to say communication overload. [70] Just as we discussed
earlier in this chapter that downward communication can lead to communication
overload so can receiving too much information from one’s subordinates.
Ultimately, there is a fine line between the necessity of ensuring honest upward
communication and receiving too much upward communication. Supervisors
must learn how to filter out information from all directions that isn’t necessary,
but this is a skill that takes time and energy to learn. At the same time,
subordinates also need to learn what information is necessary for their
supervisors to have and what information is not necessary.
Effective Methods for Upward Communication
While there is no magic bullet for improving upward communication within an
organization, we do believe there are four best practices that all supervisors
should engage in: establish trust, use multiple mediums, show utility, and
decrease barriers. First, and definitely the most important best practice for
ensuring quality upward communication, is establishing a trusting relationship
with one’s subordinates. As discussed earlier in this section, trust clearly leads to
an increase in upward communication from one’s subordinates. [71] [72] When
subordinates trust their supervisors, they are more likely to engage in two-way
communication that is honest and productive.
Second, Hirokawa recommends that managers utilize multiple strategies when
soliciting upward communication. [73] Supervisors should use a variety of
strategies for increasing upward communication: routine discussion meetings,
supervisor’s appraisals of individual employees, manager’s appraisals of
individual supervisors, attitude surveys, employee suggestion programs,
grievance procedures, open-door policies, and exit interviews. [74] All these
different strategies can definitely help increase upward communication.
However, not all the strategies may be the most beneficial for all types of
information a supervisor needs, so a supervisor should think critically before
implementing one strategy over another.
The third best practice for increasing upward communication is to clearly show
that subordinate input is taken seriously. Too often people become discouraged
when their feedback is given and the feedback is never acknowledged or nothing
is done with it. Obviously, not all ideas subordinates have can be legitimately
implemented; however, we do recommend establishing a method for responding
to all ideas. For example, if you have an employee suggestion program, you may
also want to implement a section for responses to employee suggestions in the
organization newsletter. When employee suggestions cannot be implemented for
legitimate reasons, simply explaining why the suggestions cannot be
implemented is the best way to make employees feel that their ideas were taken
seriously even if not implemented. Furthermore, when you implement an
employee’s suggestion, make sure to communicate to everyone that this has
occurred, because it will increase the likelihood of future upward
communication by all employees. [75]
Lastly, Hirokawa also recommends decreasing physical barriers between
superiors and subordinates in an effort to increase interaction. [76] Based on
research in Japanese organizations, Hirokawa argued that Japanese managers
have more effective upward communication with their subordinates because the
managers spend more time on the workshop floor directly interacting with their
subordinates. [77] The idea of decreasing barriers is nothing new in the United
States. Bill Hewlett and David Packard created a management strategy in the
1940s simply titled Management by Walking Around (MBWA). MBWA is an
easy way for management to increase interaction with subordinates and ward off
potential organizational problems. [78] Too often, managers are overtaxed with
duties, and overseeing people is just one of many things managers have to
accomplish during a workday. However, the only way to really establish a
trusting relationship with one’s subordinates is through consistent face-to-face
interaction. However, three conditions are necessary for MBWA. [79] First,
managers need to interact with each subordinate and be prepared for honest
feedback. During these interactions, managers can learn about potential
problems and about what individual subordinates are doing. Second, managers
should encourage dialogue about nonwork topics. If a manager sticks strictly to
work topics, subordinates may perceive her or him as distant and
noncommunicative. Lastly, managers should not be critical of subordinates while
engaging in MBWA. The goal of MBWA is to encourage subordinates to open
up and communicate. If a manager is constantly criticizing people during her or
his treks out of the office, people will start to dread seeing the manager and will
be more likely to engage in upward distortion.
Horizontal/Lateral Communication
Horizontal or lateral communication consists of messages transmitted to other
individuals on the same rung of the organizational hierarchy. In essence,
horizontal or lateral communication occurs when individuals who have roughly
the same status interact with one another in an organization. Occasionally, these
lines of communication are firmly established within the organizational
hierarchy chart, but typically these lines of communication are not part of the
traditional hierarchical chart. As discussed in Chapter 3, one of the earliest
theorists on the nature of horizontal/lateral communication was a French mining
engineer named Henri Fayol. Fayol published his treatise on administration
called Administration Industrielle et Générale in 1916, [80] but he did not reach
English readers until 1949 when the text was translated by Constance Storrs as
General and Industrial Management. Fayol had lots of ideas on how
organizations should function, but his ideas on horizontal communication are
what we are interested in here. Fayol believed that communication within an
organization should travel up and down very clear channels. In Figure 5.1, we
see an example of an organizational hierarchy with one head administrator, two
supervisors, and six subordinates. Three of the subordinates work directly under
Supervisor A and three work directly under Supervisor B. According to Fayol, if
Subordinate 3a working under Supervisor A needs to communicate something to
Subordinate 1b working under Supervisor B, the message would have to go up
the hierarchy and then back down the hierarchy. In this case, Subordinate 3a
would communicate the message to Supervisor A, who would then communicate
the message to the head administrator. The head administrator would then
communicate the message to Supervisor B, who would finally communicate the
message to Subordinate 1b. However, Fayol did believe that an alternate chain of
communication is necessary during periods of crisis. When information needed
to get to someone quickly because of a crisis, Fayol created a mechanism that
would temporarily bridge two individuals on the same level of the hierarchy.
Figure 5.2 illustrates how the Fayol Bridge would work. During a crisis,
Subordinate 3a would communicate to Supervisor A the importance of getting
the information to Subordinate 1b quickly. If Supervisor A believes that the
speed at which Subordinate 1b receives the information is important, then
Supervisor A will give permission to Subordinate 3a to transmit that information
directly to Subordinate 1b.
Figure 5.1 Scalar Chain
Figure 5.2 Fayol’s Bridge
The idea of hierarchical control over messages was very commonplace all the
way through the 1950s: “Although communication between departments on the
same level occurs, theoretically it is not supposed to be direct. Reports, desires
for services, or criticisms that one department has of another are supposed to be
sent up the line until they reach an executive who heads the organizations
involved. They are then held, revised, or sent directly down the line to the
appropriate officials and departments. The reason for this circuitous route is to
inform higher officials of things occurring below them.” [81]
When one reads this quotation from Miller and Form, one is led to believe that
vertical (upward and downward) communication is the most common channel of
communication in organizations, and it should be. [82] However, the type of
organization is the ultimate determinant of whether primarily vertical
communication or horizontal communication is occurring. [83]
By the 1960s and 1970s, researchers began to realize that the idea of primarily
vertically oriented communication was highly unrealistic and not necessarily
beneficial to organizations. Furthermore, horizontal/lateral communication
actually enabled lower-level supervisors to engage in automatic
horizontal/lateral communication. By automatic, Joseph Massie was referring to
“habitual, routine, and spontaneous reaction of managers to a problem
situation.” [84] Ultimately, enabling lower-level managers to decide courses of
action on some decisions relieved high-level administrators “not only from
making some decisions but also from consciously structuring the decision-
making pattern for lower level managers.” [85] This process of allowing
individuals at various levels of the hierarchy to participate in decision making
and implementing courses of action is called decentralization, because the
decision making is disbursed through the organization instead of being centered
at the top of the hierarchy. [86] [87] Furthermore, decentralization of decision
making greatly reduces the problems associated with serial transmission of
messages. Earlier in this chapter, we discussed how serial transmission of
messages leads to all kinds of problems, and the more rungs up and down a
hierarchy a message must travel, the greater the chance of message distortion. [88] Now that we have examined the basic perspectives on horizontal/lateral
communication, we can examine the types of horizontal/lateral communication,
problems with horizontal/lateral communication, and effective methods for
horizontal/lateral communication.
Types of Horizontal/Lateral Communication
According to Randy Hirokawa, there are four functions to horizontal
communication: task coordination, problem solving, sharing of information, and
conflict resolution. [89] The function of horizontal/lateral communication is to
help organizational members coordinate tasks to help the system achieve its
goals. Often people in different departments are completely unaware of how
their department impacts another department’s ability to function. When
different departments are brought together and shown how each department
helps the organization strive for its goals, departments are able to ascertain how
they can actually help each other more effectively.
The second function of horizontal/lateral communication is to allow
organizational members to solve problems. The basic process of “brainstorming”
is always more effective when you have numerous departments thinking about
how to solve specific problems. For example, if your entire organization is
having problems with recycling, it wouldn’t be beneficial if members from only
one department got together to talk about the problem. When there are
systemwide problems facing an organization, the organization needs systemwide
solutions.
The third function of horizontal/lateral communication is sharing information
among organizational members. As we’ve already mentioned in this chapter,
there are numerous reasons individuals may be reluctant to share information,
but when people hoard information the overall organization suffers. The need for
sharing can be explained in this way: “It is through the sharing of information
that organizational members become aware of the activities of the organization
and their collegues [sic].” [90]
The final function of horizontal/lateral communication is conflict resolution.
When individuals are in conflict, the easiest way to solve the conflict is through
direct interaction. Often, simple conflicts are a result of misunderstandings that
can become exacerbated if not handled quickly and efficiently. For this reason,
“In the presence of conflict between organizational members within a
department or section, the ability to discuss the matter of concern can often lead
to a resolution of the conflict.” [91] If an organization opts to utilize Fayol’s
(1916) ideas of horizontal communication, “One would have to go half-way
around the organizational hierarchy to get a message to a collegue [sic] if one
were to remove horizontal channels.” [92] As always, the more direct the path of
communication is, the more likely the message will remain uncorrupted.
Problems with Horizontal/Lateral Communication
As with both vertical types of communication, horizontal/lateral communication
is not without its share of problems. In fact, Valerie McClelland and Richard
Wilmot reported a study conducted by the consulting group Wilmot Associates
in which “more than 60 percent of employees in a variety of organizations say
that lateral communication is ineffective. [93] More specifically, about 45 percent
say communication between peers within departments is inadequate, and 70
percent claim that communication between departments must improve.” [94] In
fact, the literature has shown us four basic issues that negatively affect
horizontal/lateral communication within an organization: lack of rewards,
competition, intraorganizational conflicts, and lack of lateral understanding.
No Reward Structure
The first issue that can negatively affect horizontal/lateral communication within
an organization occurs as result of no reward structure for horizontal/lateral
communication. Classical theories of organizational communication didn’t even
recognize horizontal/lateral communication as an important function, let alone
something that should be openly encouraged. [95] People who work in
organizations are often given numerous tasks, and behaviors that are not
rewarded by the organization are simply ignored and seen as nonessential. For
this reason, many organizations have a serious lack in both quantity and quality
of horizontal/lateral communication.
Interdepartmental Competition
The second issue that can negatively impact horizontal/lateral communication
occurs as a result of interdepartmental competition. Both Hirokawa and
McClelland and Wilmot note that many organizations purposefully pit
departments against each other. [96] [97] When departments are forced to
compete, there should be no surprise that hoarding information becomes a
common phenomenon. Hirokawa noted that this desire for interdepartmental
competition is a uniquely American concept. In his analysis comparing
American and Japanese organizations, this sense of competition often “as long
as American management continues to stress and encourage individual initiative
and achievement, problems of restricted organizational communication and
information hoarding are bound to continue, because employees realize the
power that information gives them.” [98] Japanese organizations, on the other
hand, foster a sense of collaboration, which actually leads to an increase in both
the quality and quantity of horizontal/lateral communication.
Intraorganizational Conflicts
The third issue that can negatively impact horizontal/lateral communication
arises from intraorganizational conflicts. “Any time that individuals from
different departments within an organization interact, there is always a potential
for conflict.” [99] The most common reason for interdepartmental conflict is a
perception of incompatible goals. If the software development department wants
to take time to get the kinks out of a new product, but the marketing department
wants to get the product in customers’ hands immediately, there will be conflict.
When people perceive conflict as an innately negative endeavor, they are more
likely to resist any contact that could lead to a conflict. We will discuss the
process of conflict in much greater detail in Chapter 13.
Inadequate Lateral Understanding
The final issue that can negatively impact horizontal/lateral communication
occurs as a result of inadequate lateral understanding. [100] Lateral understanding
is the degree to which individuals within an organization understand the purpose
and functions of what individuals do in various departments throughout the
organization. Employees often waste very valuable time trying to figure out who
does what in an organization when a problem arises. As McClelland and Wilmot
wrote, “Employees don’t understand the goals, responsibilities and capabilities
of other departments…this is evident even at senior levels.” [101] There are three
major outcomes related to inadequate lateral understanding: waste of time, work
overlapping, and poor decision making. First, people ultimately waste a lot of
time attempting to determine who they should be contacting in the first place.
Second, you may end up with two employees in two departments basically
performing the exact same task without realizing that someone else is
completing the task. Lastly, managers will often make decisions that negatively
impact other departments without even knowing this has occurred.
Effective Methods for Horizontal/Lateral Communication
In an attempt to help organizations communicate more effectively, McClelland
and Wilmot devised a series of seven best practices that organizations should
adopt to improve horizontal/lateral communication: develop lateral
understanding, have a flexible chain of command, share clear and consistent
direction, set the example, institute lateral teams, ensure accountability to
departments and organization, make training available, and develop dialogue
between shifts and locations. [102] The first way to improve horizontal/lateral
communication is to increase lateral understanding. As previously discussed,
when people don’t understand what other parts of the organization are doing, the
result is people wasting time and resources, duplicating work, and/or making
decisions that negatively impact other departments. Lateral understanding should
become a priority for all individuals within an organization from the very top to
the very bottom. In fact, holding “a forum in which to provide supervisors with
an understanding of the opportunities, challenges, goals and structures of their
area of responsibility” [103] is an excellent idea. Only when people start learning
about the opportunities, challenges, goals, and structures of other departments
can they see how to improve horizontal/lateral communication.
McClelland and Wilmot’s second suggestion for increasing the quality and
quantity of horizontal/lateral communication is to establish a flexible chain of
command. [104] When organizational members are forced to adhere to rigid lines
of communication, the likelihood of productive horizontal/lateral communication
is decreased. Only when top administrators realize that Fayol’s scalar chain isn’t
effective will they stop feeling the need to micromanage information flow at all
levels of the organization. [105]
The third best practice for increasing the quality and quantity of
horizontal/lateral communication is to ensure that clear and consistent messages
are delivered downward. When all supervisors are on the same page, the chance
of mixed or conflicting messages getting sent down the hierarchy is greatly
reduced. Furthermore, when all subordinates within an organization receive the
message simultaneously, supervisors prevent the appearance of senior
administration favoring one department over another. Systematic downward
communication decreases the likelihood of mixed messages, and even though
“an inconsistent message is unintentional, it can be destructive to relationships
between employees and management.” [106] Therefore, ensuring effective
horizontal/lateral communication among supervisors and coordinating
downward messages can help to foster relationships between employees and
management.
The fourth best practice for increasing the quality and quantity of
horizontal/lateral communication is for senior administration and supervisors to
set the example. If an organization wants to increase the quality and quantity of
horizontal/lateral communication, then all members of the organization should
be actively engaged in horizontal/lateral communication. When people on the
lower rungs of the hierarchy witness effective horizontal/lateral communication
among those individuals above them in the hierarchy, they are more likely to
participate in horizontal/lateral communication as well. Ultimately, the only way
to ensure organizationwide effective horizontal/lateral communication is to start
it at the top and expect it to occur throughout the entire organization.
Another way to increase horizontal/lateral communication in organizations is to
establish lateral teams. The establishment of teams that include individuals from
various departments can help initiate contact and understanding between various
members of the organization. However, McClelland and Wilmot do recommend
that these teams actually have some level of individual autonomy to make
decisions and then be held accountable for creating tangible results. [107] When
teams are allowed to participate in the decision-making process and follow
through with those decisions, team members end up taking a considerable
amount of ownership of their decisions. Furthermore, the more an organization
utilizes lateral teams, the more adept an organization becomes at foreseeing
possible problems and warding them off.
Another important practice for improving the quality and quantity of
horizontal/lateral communication is to hold everyone accountable to the
organization. When managers are accountable for decisions that adversely affect
others, they’re more likely to work together on changes and solve problems
jointly. At the same time, all departments should also be held accountable for
making sure that they are helping the organization’s goals. The only way for
departments to demonstrate they are helping the organization’s goals is to
demonstrate how they fit into the larger piece of the puzzle, which requires them
to know what the larger puzzle actually looks like.
McClelland and Wilmot also recommend providing training for new
organizational members and existing organizational members in effective
horizontal/lateral communication, decision making, and teamwork. For many
individuals, the thought of actually interacting with individuals in other
departments is a completely new concept, so training becomes very important:
“Many employees reveal a lack of understanding about how to work with others
constructively without putting co-workers on the defensive. Through continual
involvement and interaction, they’ll be sensitized to the value of interpersonal
communication and internal networking.” [108]
The final best practice for increasing the quality and quantity of horizontal
communication in the workplace is to develop dialogue between shifts and
locations. Let’s handle these topics separately. First, increasing communication
between members of different shifts is extremely important because it allows
people to get a greater grasp of what is occurring. When people do not
communicate during shift changes, the people starting their shifts waste time
determining what needs to be accomplished during their shift. Fundamentally,
increased communication during shift changes leads to a decrease in mistakes
and an increase in efficiency.
Up to this point, most of our discussion of horizontal communication has been
framed for individuals who work within one compound of an organization.
However, in today’s global environment, many people are constantly having to
interact with people in other time zones or different countries who all belong to
the same organization. Often, multinational corporations will even have
individuals within the same department on different continents. Because of the
unique nature of multinational corporations, they have their own set of concerns
relating to horizontal/lateral communication. One of the strongest benefits of the
multinational corporation is its ability to rely on expertise and information from
across the various subsidiaries of the multinational corporation. [109] Five distinct
organizational behaviors can be used to increase the quality and quantity of
horizontal/lateral communication in multinational corporations:
1. Conducting a linguistic audit (helps the organization know where potential
language problems are)
2. Making specific comprehension proficiency a priority (often the ability to
understand a language is more important in business than being able to
speak or write in that language)
3. Encouraging staff to understand and negotiate Global Englishes (English
may be the general language of modern business, but there are multiple
variations people should be aware of)
4. Including native English speakers in communication training (native
English speakers need to be trained to limit their vocabularies and
grammatical structures and to speak slowly and clearly)
5. Avoiding cultural idioms when interacting with nonnative English speakers
and making language and communication a corporate-level function (letting
individual subsidiaries decide language and communication training can
backfire, so they should be seen as part of the corporate level) [110]
In this section, we have examined the world of formal communication networks
in organizations. Specifically, we have examined the roles, problems, and best
practices for downward, upward, and horizontal/lateral communication. In the
next section, we will shift our attention to informal communication networks.
KEY TAKEAWAY
Max Weber (1930) believed organizations had two ways to get
employees to follow one’s directives: power and authority. Power
is the ability to force people to obey regardless of their resistance,
whereas authority occurs when orders are voluntarily obeyed by
those receiving them. Weber argued that individuals in authority-
based organizations were more likely to perceive directives as
legitimate.
Katz and Kahn (1966) created a typology of downward
communication consisting of five distinct types of downward
communication: job instructions, job rationales, procedures and
practices, feedback, and indoctrination.
Hirokawa (1979) noted two primary problems associated with
downward communication: accuracy (how truthful a message is
that has been received) and adequacy (whether or not the
information being communicated is sufficient to satisfy a
requirement or need for information in the workplace).
Hirokawa (1979) believed there are four functions of upward
communication: (1) allows management to ascertain the success
of previously relayed downward communication, (2) allows
individuals at the bottom of the hierarchy to have a voice in
policies and procedures, (3) allows subordinates to voice
suggestions and opinions to make the working environment
better, and (4) allows management to test how employees will
react to new policies and procedures.
Katz and Kahn (1966) created a typology for upward
communication consisting of four distinct types: (1) information
about the subordinate herself or himself, (2) information about
coworkers and their problems, (3) information about
organizational policies and procedures, and (4) information about
the task.
Tourish and Robson (2006) argued that Katz and Kahn’s (1966)
typology for upward communication was incomplete and argued
for a fifth one they called critical upward communication, which
consists of communicative behaviors that are critical of
management behavior. Two common forms of critical upward
communication studied in communication are employee silence
(when an employee intentionally or unintentionally withholds
information that might be useful to a leader or her or his
organization) and organizational dissent (when an employee
expresses disagreement with management behavior).
Henri Fayol (1916/1949) believed that organizations needed a
very strict organizational hierarchy where all information flowed up
and down appropriate channels. During a crisis situation, a lower
employee could ask her or his immediate supervisor to
communicate information to another lower employee located on
the same rung of the hierarchy. Only if the lower-level employee’s
supervisor agreed with the urgency would that lower-level
employee be allowed to interact with someone else on the same
rung of the hierarchy.
Hirokawa (1979) noted four functions to horizontal
communication: task coordination, problem solving, sharing of
information, and conflict resolution. The function of
horizontal/lateral communication is to help organization members
coordinate tasks to help the system achieve its goals.
Charles and Marschan-Piekkari (2002) recommend five distinct
organizational behaviors to increase the quality and quantity of
horizontal/lateral communication in multinational corporations: (1)
conduct a linguistic audit (helps the organization know where
potential language problems are), (2) make specific
comprehension proficiency a priority (often the ability to
understand a language is more important in business than being
able to speak or write in that language), (3) encourage staff to
understand and negotiate Global Englishes (English may be the
general language of modern business, but there are multiple
variations people should be aware of), (4) include native English
speakers in communication training (native English speakers
need to be trained to limit their vocabularies and grammatical
structures, speak slowly and clearly, and avoid cultural idioms
when interacting with nonnative English speakers), and (5) make
language and communication a corporate-level function (letting
individual subsidiaries decide language and communication
training can backfire, so they should be seen as part of the
corporate level).
EXERCISES
1. Using Katz and Kahn’s (1966) typology of downward
communication (job instructions, job rationales, procedures and
Articulated/Upward Dissent:
Communication Underload:
practices, feedback, and indoctrination), how would you describe
the state of downward communication within your own
organization?
2. Using Katz and Kahn’s (1966) typology of upward communication
(information about the subordinate herself or himself, information
about coworkers and their problems, information about
organizational policies and procedures, and information about the
task), how would you characterize the state of upward
communication within your own organization?
3. Think of a time in your own work history that you’ve engaged in
the three types of dissent discussed by Jeffrey Kassing
(articulated, latent, and displaced). Why did you opt to use that
specific type of dissent in that communicative context?
4. Charles and Marschan-Piekkari (2002) recommend five distinct
organizational behaviors to increase the quality and quantity of
horizontal/lateral communication in multinational corporations. Do
you think Charles and Marschan-Piekkari’s ideas hold true with
the revolution of social media in the workplace?
KEY TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
Form of organizational dissent involving the expression of dissent to one’s leaders up the formal chain of the hierarchy.
When workers are not provided enough information to complete their jobs.
Downward Communication:
Employee Silence:
Formal Communication:
Horizontal Or Lateral Communication:
Upward Communication:
Indoctrination :
Acquiescent Silence:
Communication Overload:
Defensive Silence:
Displaced Dissent:
Latent/Lateral Dissent:
Prosocial Silence:
Messages that start at the top of the hierarchy and are transmitted down the hierarchy to the lowest rungs of the hierarchy.
When employees intentionally or unintentionally withhold information that might be useful to a leader or the organization.
Organizational communication that exists within the rules and norms established by an organization.
Messages transmitted to other individuals on the same rung of the organizational hierarchy.
Messages that start at the bottom of the hierarchy and are transmitted up the hierarchy to the highest rungs of the hierarchy.
The process of instilling an employee with a partisan or ideological point of view.
Form of employee silence that occurs when employees are disengaged in the workplace and feel they simply cannot make a difference.
When workers are provided too much information to complete their jobs.
Form of employee silence that occurs when an employee believes that speaking up will put her or him at risk, so the employee opts not to speak out.
Form of organizational dissent that occurs when an employee feels that dissent in the workplace could be harmful, so he or she expresses dissent to friends and family members outside the boundaries of the organization.
Form of organizational dissent consisting of communicative behaviors that include complaining to coworkers and voicing criticism openly to others on the same level of the organizational hierarchy.
Form of employee silence that occurs because employees want to appear cooperative and/or altruistic in the workplace.
[1] Weber, M. (1930). The Protestant ethic and the spirit of capitalism.
London, UK: Allen & Unwin.
[2] Gerth, H. H., & Mills, C. W. (Eds.). (1948). From Max Weber: Essays
in sociology. London, UK: Routledge.
[3] Hirokawa, R. Y. (1979). Communication and the managerial function:
Some suggestions for improving organizational communication.
Communication, 8, 83–95, p. 84.
[4] Katz, D., & Kahn, R. L. (1966). The social psychology of
organizations. New York, NY: Wiley.
[5] Katz, D., & Kahn, R. L. (1966). The social psychology of
organizations. New York, NY: Wiley.
[6] Katz, D., & Kahn, R. L. (1966). The social psychology of
organizations. New York, NY: Wiley.
[7] Katz, D., & Kahn, R. L. (1966). The social psychology of
organizations. New York, NY: Wiley.
[8] Redding, W. C. (1972). Communication with the organization: An
interpretive review of theory and research. New York, NY: Industrial
Communication Council.
[9] Katz, D., & Kahn, R. L. (1966). The social psychology of
organizations. New York, NY: Wiley.
[10] Beyer, J. M., Hannah, D. R., & Milton, L. P. (2000). Ties that bind:
Culture and attachments in organizations. In N. M. Ashkanasy, C. P. M.
Wilderom, & M. F. Peterson (Eds.), Handbook of organizational culture
and climate (pp. 323–338). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage, p. 333.
[11] Katz, D., & Kahn, R. L. (1966). The social psychology of
organizations. New York, NY: Wiley. Katz, D., & Kahn, R. L. (1966). The
social psychology of organizations. New York, NY: Wiley.
[12] Downward communications. (2004, August). Management Report,
27(8), 6–7.
[13] Hirokawa, R. Y. (1979). Communication and the managerial function:
Some suggestions for improving organizational communication.
Communication, 8, 83–95.
[14] Redding, W. C. (1966). The empirical study of human communication
in business and industry. In P. E. Reid (Ed.), The frontiers in experimental
speech-communication research (pp. 47–81). Syracuse, NY: Syracuse
University Press.
[15] Huseman, R., Lahiff, J., & Wells, R. (1974). Communication
thermoclines: Toward a process of identification. Personnel Journal, 53,
124–135.
[16] Anderson, J., & Level, D. A. (1980). The impact of certain types of
downward communication on job performance. Journal of Business
Communication, 17, 51–59.
[17] Redding, W. C. (1972). Communication with the organization: An
interpretive review of theory and research. New York, NY: Industrial
Communication Council.
[18] Hirokawa, R. Y. (1979). Communication and the managerial function:
Some suggestions for improving organizational communication.
Communication, 8, 83–95.
[19] Katz, D., & Kahn, R. L. (1966). The social psychology of
organizations. New York, NY: Wiley.
[20] Redding, W. C. (1972). Communication with the organization: An
interpretive review of theory and research. New York, NY: Industrial
Communication Council.
[21] Richmond, V. P., McCroskey, J. C., & McCroskey, L. L. (2005).
Organizational communication for survival: Making work, work (3rd ed.).
Boston, MA: Allyn & Bacon.
[22] Redding, W. C. (1972). Communication with the organization: An
interpretive review of theory and research. New York, NY: Industrial
Communication Council.
[23] Hirokawa, R. Y. (1979). Communication and the managerial function:
Some suggestions for improving organizational communication.
Communication, 8, 83–95.
[24] Hirokawa, R. Y. (1979). Communication and the managerial function:
Some suggestions for improving organizational communication.
Communication, 8, 83–95, p. 86.
[25] Mayo, E. (1933). The human problems of an industrial civilization.
Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
[26] Stewart, L. P., Stewart, A. D., Friedley, S. A., & Cooper, P. J. (1996).
Communication between the sexes: Sex differences and sex-role
stereotypes (2nd ed.). Scottsdale, AZ: Gorsuch Scarisbrick.
[27] Katz, D., & Kahn, R. L. (1966). The social psychology of
organizations. New York, NY: Wiley.
[28] Tourish, D., & Robson, P. (2006). Sensemaking and the distortion of
critical upward communication in organizations. Journal of Management
Studies, 43, 711–730.
[29] Tourish, D., & Robson, P. (2006). Sensemaking and the distortion of
critical upward communication in organizations. Journal of Management
Studies, 43, 711–730.
[30] Katz, D., & Kahn, R. L. (1966). The social psychology of
organizations. New York, NY: Wiley.
[31] Katz, D., & Kahn, R. L. (1966). The social psychology of
organizations. New York, NY: Wiley.
[32] Katz, D., & Kahn, R. L. (1966). The social psychology of
organizations. New York, NY: Wiley.
[33] Tourish, D., & Robson, P. (2006). Sensemaking and the distortion of
critical upward communication in organizations. Journal of Management
Studies, 43, 711–730.
[34] Tourish, D., & Robson, P. (2006). Sensemaking and the distortion of
critical upward communication in organizations. Journal of Management
Studies, 43, 711–730, p. 711.
[35] Tourish, D., & Robson, P. (2006). Sensemaking and the distortion of
critical upward communication in organizations. Journal of Management
Studies, 43, 711–730, p. 712.
[36] Johannesen, R. L. (1974). The functions of silence: A plea for
communication research. Western Speech, 38, 25–35.
[37] Morrison, E., & Milliken, F. J. (2000). Organizational silence: A barrier
to change and development in a pluralistic world. Academy of
Management Review, 25, 706–725. doi:10.5465/AMR.2000.3707697
[38] Johnson, M. (Producer). (2008, March 17). Employee silence on
critical work issues: Interview with Subra Tangirala [Audio podcast].
Retrieved from
http://www.obweb.org/podcasts/MikeJohnson/SubraTangirala_20080317_mh.mp3
[39] Morrison, E., & Milliken, F. J. (2000). Organizational silence: A barrier
to change and development in a pluralistic world. Academy of
Management Review, 25, 706–725, p. 705.
doi:10.5465/AMR.2000.3707697
[40] Van Dyne, L., Ang, S., & Botero, I. C. (2003). Conceptualizing
employee silence and employee voice as multidimensional constructs.
Journal of Management Studies, 40, 1359–1392.
[41] Van Dyne, L., Ang, S., & Botero, I. C. (2003). Conceptualizing
employee silence and employee voice as multidimensional constructs.
Journal of Management Studies, 40, 1359–1392, p. 1363.
[42] Tangirala, S., & Ramanujam, R. (2008). Employee silence on critical
work issues: The cross level effects of procedural justice climate.
Personnel Psychology, 61, 37–68.
[43] Wrench, J. S. (2012). The effect of office politics on employee
silence and dissent. Manuscript in Preparation.
[44] Detert, J. R., Burris, E. R., & Harrison, D. A. (2010). Debunking four
myths about employee silence. Harvard Business Review, 88, 26.
[45] Detert, J. R., Burris, E. R., & Harrison, D. A. (2010). Debunking four
myths about employee silence. Harvard Business Review, 88, 26.
[46] Detert, J. R., Burris, E. R., & Harrison, D. A. (2010). Debunking four
myths about employee silence. Harvard Business Review, 88, 26.
[47] Detert, J. R., Burris, E. R., & Harrison, D. A. (2010). Debunking four
myths about employee silence. Harvard Business Review, 88, 26.
[48] Kassing, J. W. (1997). Articulating, antagonizing, and displacing: A
model of employee dissent. Communication Research, 48, 311–332.
[49] Tourish, D., & Robson, P. (2006). Sensemaking and the distortion of
critical upward communication in organizations. Journal of Management
Studies, 43, 711–730.
[50] Kassing, J. W. (1998). Development and validation of the
Organizational Dissent Scale. Management Communication Quarterly,
12, 183–229, p. 184.
[51] Kassing, J. W. (1998). Development and validation of the
Organizational Dissent Scale. Management Communication Quarterly,
12, 183–229, p. 191.
[52] Kassing, J. W. (2011). Key themes in organizational communication
series: Dissent in organizations. Malden, MA: Polity.
[53] Kassing, J. W. (1998). Development and validation of the
Organizational Dissent Scale. Management Communication Quarterly,
12, 183–229, pp. 191–192.
[54] Kassing, J. W. (2002). Speaking up: Identifying employees’ upward
dissent strategies. Management Communication Quarterly, 16, 187–209.
[55] Kassing, J. W. (2005). Speaking up competently: A comparison of
perceived competence in upward dissent strategies. Communication
Research Reports, 22, 227–234, p. 233.
[56] Kassing, J. W. (1998). Development and validation of the
Organizational Dissent Scale. Management Communication Quarterly,
12, 183–229, p. 211.
[57] Kassing, J. W. (1998). Development and validation of the
Organizational Dissent Scale. Management Communication Quarterly,
12, 183–229, p. 211.
[58] Kassing, J. W. (2000). Investigating the relationship between
superior-subordinate relationship quality and employee dissent.
Communication Research Reports, 17, 58–70.
[59] Waldron, V. R., & Kassing, J. W. (2011). Managing risk in
communication encounters: Strategies for the workplace. Los Angeles,
CA: Sage.
[60] Wrench, J. S. (2012). The effect of office politics on employee
silence and dissent. Manuscript in Preparation.
[61] Hirokawa, R. Y. (1979). Communication and the managerial function:
Some suggestions for improving organizational communication.
Communication, 8, 83–95.
[62] Milliken, F., Morrison, E., & Hewlin, P. (2003). An exploratory study of
employee silence: Issues that employees don’t communicate upward and
why. Journal of Management Studies, 40, 1453–1476, p. 1459.
[63] Mellinger, G. D. (1956). Interpersonal trust as a factor in
communication. Journal of Abnormal Social Psychology, 52, 304–309.
[64] Jablin, F. M. (1979). Superior-subordinate communication: The state
of the art. Psychological Bulletin, 86, 1201–1222, pp. 1204–1205.
[65] Hirokawa, R. Y. (1979). Communication and the managerial function:
Some suggestions for improving organizational communication.
Communication, 8, 83–95.
[66] Roberts, K. H., & O’Reilly, C. A., III. (1974). Failures in upward
communication in organizations: Three possible culprits. Academy of
Management Journal, 17, 205–215.
[67] Roberts, K. H., & O’Reilly, C. A., III. (1974). Failures in upward
communication in organizations: Three possible culprits. Academy of
Management Journal, 17, 205–215.
[68] Blalack, R. O. (1986). The impact of trust and perceived superior
influence on upward communication: A further test. American Business
Review, 3, 62–66.
[69] Hirokawa, R. Y. (1979). Communication and the managerial function:
Some suggestions for improving organizational communication.
Communication, 8, 83–95.
[70] Edmunds, A., & Morris, A. (2000). The problem of information
overload in business organizations: A review of the literature.
International Journal of Information Management, 20, 17–28.
[71] Roberts, K. H., & O’Reilly, C. A., III. (1974). Failures in upward
communication in organizations: Three possible culprits. Academy of
Management Journal, 17, 205–215.
[72] Blalack, R. O. (1986). The impact of trust and perceived superior
influence on upward communication: A further test. American Business
Review, 3, 62–66.
[73] Hirokawa, R. Y. (1979). Communication and the managerial function:
Some suggestions for improving organizational communication.
Communication, 8, 83–95.
[74] Upward communication. (2004, October). Management Report,
27(10), 2–4.
[75] Upward communication. (2004, October). Management Report,
27(10), 2–4.
[76] Hirokawa, R. Y. (1979). Communication and the managerial function:
Some suggestions for improving organizational communication.
Communication, 8, 83–95.
[77] Hirokawa, R. A. (1981). Improving intra-organizational
communication: A lesson from Japanese management. Communication
Quarterly, 30, 35–40.
[78] Pace, A. (2008, August). Leaving the corner office. Training +
Development, 62(8), p. 16.
[79] Pace, A. (2008, August). Leaving the corner office. Training +
Development, 62(8), p. 16.
[80] Fayol, H. (1949). General and industrial management (C. Storrs,
Trans.). London, UK: Pitman. (Reprinted from Administration industrielle
et générale, 1916)
[81] Miller, D. C., & Form, W. H. (1951). Industrial sociology. New York,
NY: Harper, p. 158.
[82] Simpson, R. L. (1959). Vertical and horizontal communication in
formal organizations. Administrative Science Quarterly, 4, 188–196.
[83] Simpson, R. L. (1959). Vertical and horizontal communication in
formal organizations. Administrative Science Quarterly, 4, 188–196.
[84] Massie, J. L. (1960). Automatic horizontal communication in
management. Journal of the Academy of Management Review, 3, 87–91,
p. 88.
[85] Massie, J. L. (1960). Automatic horizontal communication in
management. Journal of the Academy of Management Review, 3, 87–91,
p. 88.
[86] Child, J. (2005). Organization: Contemporary principles and practice.
London, UK: Blackwell.
[87] Hilmer, F. G., & Donaldson, L. (1996). Management redeemed:
Debunking the fads that undermine our corporations. New York, NY: Free
Press.
[88] Redding, W. C. (1972). Communication with the organization: An
interpretive review of theory and research. New York, NY: Industrial
Communication Council.
[89] Hirokawa, R. Y. (1979). Communication and the managerial function:
Some suggestions for improving organizational communication.
Communication, 8, 83–95.
[90] Hirokawa, R. Y. (1979). Communication and the managerial function:
Some suggestions for improving organizational communication.
Communication, 8, 83–95, p. 89.
[91] Hirokawa, R. Y. (1979). Communication and the managerial function:
Some suggestions for improving organizational communication.
Communication, 8, 83–95, p. 89.
[92] Hirokawa, R. Y. (1979). Communication and the managerial function:
Some suggestions for improving organizational communication.
Communication, 8, 83–95, p. 89.
[93] McClelland, V. A., & Wimot, R. E. (1990). Improve lateral
communication. Personnel Journal, 69, 32–38.
[94] McClelland, V. A., & Wimot, R. E. (1990). Improve lateral
communication. Personnel Journal, 69, 32–38, p. 32.
[95] Hirokawa, R. Y. (1979). Communication and the managerial function:
Some suggestions for improving organizational communication.
Communication, 8, 83–95.
[96] Hirokawa, R. Y. (1979). Communication and the managerial function:
Some suggestions for improving organizational communication.
Communication, 8, 83–95.
[97] McClelland, V. A., & Wimot, R. E. (1990). Improve lateral
communication. Personnel Journal, 69, 32–38.
[98] Hirokawa, R. A. (1981). Improving intra-organizational
communication: A lesson from Japanese management. Communication
Quarterly, 30, 35–40, p. 39.
[99] Hirokawa, R. Y. (1979). Communication and the managerial function:
Some suggestions for improving organizational communication.
Communication, 8, 83–95, p. 90.
[100] McClelland, V. A., & Wimot, R. E. (1990). Improve lateral
communication. Personnel Journal, 69, 32–38.
[101] McClelland, V. A., & Wimot, R. E. (1990). Improve lateral
communication. Personnel Journal, 69, 32–38, p. 33.
[102] McClelland, V. A., & Wimot, R. E. (1990). Improve lateral
communication. Personnel Journal, 69, 32–38.
[103] McClelland, V. A., & Wimot, R. E. (1990). Improve lateral
communication. Personnel Journal, 69, 32–38, p. 36.
[104] McClelland, V. A., & Wimot, R. E. (1990). Improve lateral
communication. Personnel Journal, 69, 32–38.
[105] Fayol, H. (1949). General and industrial management (C. Storrs,
Trans.). London, UK: Pitman. (Reprinted from Administration industrielle
et générale, 1916)
[106] McClelland, V. A., & Wimot, R. E. (1990). Improve lateral
communication. Personnel Journal, 69, 32–38, p. 36.
[107] McClelland, V. A., & Wimot, R. E. (1990). Improve lateral
communication. Personnel Journal, 69, 32–38.
[108] McClelland, V. A., & Wimot, R. E. (1990). Improve lateral
communication. Personnel Journal, 69, 32–38, p. 38.
[109] Charles, M., & Marschan-Piekkari, R. (2002). Language training for
enhanced horizontal communication: A challenge for MNCs. Business
Communication Quarterly, 65, 9–29.
[110] Charles, M., & Marschan-Piekkari, R. (2002). Language training for
enhanced horizontal communication: A challenge for MNCs. Business
Communication Quarterly, 65, 9–29.
Informal Communication Networks
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
Understand Mishra’s (1990) eight reasons for the existence of
grapevines in organizations.
Differentiate among Davis’s (1969) four informal communication
networks.
Explain the relationship between social capital and
communication networks.
Understand Brass’s (1995) typology for the measurement of ties.
Understand Brass’s (1995) typology for the measures assigned to
individual actors.
Understand Brass’s (1995) typology for the measures assigned to
networks.
© Thinkstock/iStock
In the previous section of this chapter, we examined the three types of formal
communication networks that exist within organizations (downward, upward,
and horizontal/lateral). While formal communication networks are very
important for the day-to-day functioning of any organization, there exists another
set of communication networks that also dramatically impacts the day-to-day
functioning of any organization. This second set of communication networks is
informal communication networks, or communication networks that do
not exist within the structure of the organizational hierarchy. Early research in
organizational communication didn’t even acknowledge the existence or the
importance of these informal networks. However, the Hawthorne Studies
suggested that a great deal of what happens within an organization is a result of
informal communication networks. Often, informal communication networks
have been referred to as “grapevine communication” or “water cooler
communication.”
grapevine was originally coined during the Civil War because the
telegraph lines used by Army intelligence were strung through trees, and the
wires often resembled grapevines. According to Mishra, “The messages that
came over these lines were often so confusing or inaccurate that soon any rumor
was said to come from the grapevine.” [1] Today, organizational grapevines are a
standard part of anyone’s organizational life. In fact, researchers estimate that 70
percent of all communication that occurs within an organization occurs in
informal communication networks. [2] In essence, the bulk of actual
communicative behavior within an organization does not go according to the
prescribed lines of communication desired by upper management. Furthermore,
researchers found that many managers were surprisingly unaware of the informal
communication networks that existed within their organizations. [3] Only 70
percent of top-level managers, 81 percent of middle-level managers, and 92
percent of lower-level managers were even aware that a grapevine existed within
their organizations. We should also note that research has found that informal
communication networks are just as likely to exist among management as among
subordinates. In fact, “Bosses who chose not to pay attention to the grapevine
have 50 percent less credible information than those who do.” [4] Furthermore,
there are eight reasons grapevine communication exists in organizations:
Grapevines are faster than formal communication networks and can easily
bypass individuals without restraint.
Grapevines can carry useful information quickly throughout an
organization.
Grapevines can supplement information being disseminated through formal
communication networks.
Grapevines provide outlets for individuals’ imaginations and apprehensions.
Grapevines satisfy individuals’ need to know what is actually going on
within an organization.
Grapevines help people feel a sense of belonging within the organization.
Grapevines serve as early warning systems for organizational crises and
allow people to think through what they will do if the crises actually occur.
Grapevines help build teamwork, motivate people, and create corporate
identity. [5]
While grapevines are clearly beneficial to organizations and their members, there
are obvious problems with informal communication networks. The biggest
problem stems from the unreliability of information being transmitted in
informal communication networks. We should mention that research has found
that information transmitted through informal communication networks tends to
be 75 to 95 percent accurate. [6] Unfortunately, the 5 to 25 percent of the time the
informal communication network contains false information is highly
problematic for organizations.
Now that we’ve examined the nature of informal communication networks and
the reasons for informal communication networks, we need to look at the types
of informal communication networks.
Types of Informal Communication Networks
In this section, we will discuss how informal communication networks pass
information from person to person. Keith Davis found four basic types of
informal communication networks: single strand, gossip, probability, and cluster.
Informal Communication Networks
The first type of informal communication network described by Davis is the
single-strand communication network (Figure 5.3). [8] In a single-strand
network, the process of communication is very linear, and information travels
from one person to the next person. The best way to think of this type of
informal communication network is like a relay race. But instead of passing a
baton between runners, some type of information is passed from person to
person. This communication network represents the traditional notion of
serialized transmission. [9]
The second type of informal communication network Davis discussed was the
gossip communication network (Figure 5.3). [10] In a gossip network, you have
one individual who serves as the source of the message and who transmits the
message to a number of people directly.
The third type of informal communication described by Davis is referred to as
probability communication network [11] (Figure 5.3). [12] In a probability
communication network, you have one individual as the primary source of the
message, who randomly selects people within her or his communication network
to communicate the message. These secondary people then randomly pick other
people in the communication network to pass along the message. Think of this
type of informal communication network as really annoying Internet spam. In
the case of Internet spam, someone creates the e-mail and then sends it to
random people who then feel the need to forward it to other people, and so on.
There is no way for the source of the message to truly track where the message
has been sent after it is communicated, because the transmission is random.
The final form of informal communication network described by Davis is the
cluster network (Figure 5.3). [13] Cluster networks are considerably more
systematic than probability networks. In the case of a cluster network, the source
of the message chooses a number of preselected people with whom to
communicate a message. The secondary people then pass on the message to a
group of people who have also been preselected to receive the message. This
type of network is the origin of the telephone tree. In a telephone tree, one
person calls two people. Those two people then are expected to call three other
people. Those three people are then also expected to call three other people.
Before you know it, everyone who is on the telephone tree has received the
Researcher Profile: Everett M. Rogers (1931-2004)
Everett M. Rogers is generally viewed in the field of communication studies
as the father of information diffusion. Rogers grew up in Carroll, Iowa, and
ultimately earned his PhD in sociology and statistics from Iowa State
University in 1957. Over the course of his academic career, Rogers taught at
numerous universities both within the United States and abroad including
Ohio State University, Michigan State University, National University of
Colombia, and Université de Paris.
In 1962, Rogers published the first edition of his book The Diffusion of
Innovations, in which he described how, why, and at what rate new ideas and
technology spread through social groups. One of the social groups Rogers
specifically examined was organizations. Through his analysis, Rogers
proposed that there were five types of individuals involved with the diffusion
of innovations: innovators (2.5 percent), early adopters (13.5 percent), early
majority (34 percent), late majority (34 percent), and laggards (16 percent).
Innovators were people who created new ideas and technology or brought the
new ideas and technology to the social group. Early adopters were those
people who quickly latched on to the new innovations. The early majority
were those individuals who comprised the first massive wave of people
adopting a new innovation. The late majority were those individuals who
waited a little longer than the early majority. Lastly, laggards were those
individuals who put off adopting the new innovation, and some laggards
simply never would adopt the new idea or technology.
One area in which diffusion of innovations has been particularly utilized is
the field of health communication. Specifically, health communication
researchers have examined how health-related mediated messages get
transmitted between individuals within a social network, which ultimately
has been shown to lead to social change. [14] Hornik (2004) summarized
diffusion of innovations as ultimately examining four basic questions:
What is the process of invention and adaptation of technologies or ideas
subject to diffusion?
Why do some people (or collectivities) adopt before others?
What is the process that people go through as they adopt?
What are the stages they go through? What influences them at each stage (sources)?
What are the consequences with regard to social welfare (growth and
equity) given particular policies about, or patterns of, diffusion? [15]
As a diffusion scholar, Rogers was very aware of network analysis, and
during his tenure at Michigan State University (1964–1973), he actively
included information on network analysis in his courses and seminars on
diffusion. Furthermore, Rogers created the first undergraduate course in
organizational communication in 1966, which is considered to be the first
such course on the undergraduate level in the world. [16]
In 1981, Rogers, with his former student Larry Kincaid, published the
seminal work on communication network analysis titled Communication
Networks: Toward a New Paradigm for Research. In this book, Rogers and
Kincaid argue that “communication network analysis is a method of research
for identifying the communication structure in a system, in which relational
data about communication flows are analyzed by using some type of
interpersonal relationship as the unit of analysis. This distinctive emphasis of
network analysis upon communication links, rather than on isolated
individuals, as units of analysis, enables the researcher to explore the
influence of other individuals on human behavior.” [17]
Ultimately, Rogers and Kincaid’s book ushered in the modern era of
communication network analysis within the field of communication studies,
as well as the fields of business and sociology.
Analyzing Communication Networks
The last part of this chapter examines how researchers observe both formal and
informal communication networks. Peter Monge and Noshir Contractor
define communication networks as “the patterns of contact between
communication partners that are created by transmitting and exchanging
messages through time and space.” [19] Of course, these networks can range in
size from interpersonal interactions to global networks. [20] When attempting to
study communication networks within organizations, researchers complete what
network analysis. Monge and Contractor discussed the science of
network analysis: “Network analysts often identify the entities as people who
belong to one or more organizations and to which are applied one or more
communication relations, such as ‘provides information to,’ ‘gets information
from,’ and ‘communicates with.’ It is also common to use work groups, divisions,
and entire organizations as the set of entities.” [21] In essence, network analysis
is a process whereby researchers attempt to determine both the formal and
informal communication networks that exist within an organization and between
the organization and its external environment. Ultimately, four types of
communicative activities occur within networks: exchange of affect (liking,
friendship), exchange of influence and power, exchange of information, and
exchange of goods and services. [22]
In recent years, there has been a resurgence in the analysis of organizational
communication networks as a result of sociological construct social capital.
Social capital is a term that dates back to 1916 when L. J. Hanifan used it to
discuss the importance of rural communities’ involvement in schools in West [23] The first modern definition of social capital is attributed to Pierre
Bourdieu, who defined it as “the aggregate of the actual or potential resources
which are linked to possession of a durable network of more or less
institutionalized relationships of mutual acquaintance or recognition.” [24]
However, it wasn’t until James Coleman’s study examining how social capital
leads to human capital that the study of social capital became commonplace. [25]
Coleman defined social capital as “a variety of entities, with two elements in
common: they all consist of some aspect of social structures, and they facilitate
certain action of actors—whether persons or corporate actors—within the [27] In essence, social capital as a concept is innately about the
creation and utilization of communication networks to obtain specific goals.
Social networking websites are often designed to help people organize their
social networks in a much faster way. Business-oriented social networking sites
(SNSs) like LinkedIn help people gain and manage their social networks, and
thus their social capital, more efficiently.
The rest of this section examines the commonly discussed aspects of
communication networks. Specifically, we will examine the three categories
created by Daniel J. Brass for analyzing communication networks: measurement
of ties, measures assigned to individual actors, and measures assigned to
[28]
Measurement of Ties
The first category involves the typical communication network measures of ties.
ties here refers to the linkages between people. When we talk about
in network analysis we are talking about the communicative relationship
between two people. Specifically, Brass notes seven commonly utilized
measures of ties: indirect links, frequency, stability, multiplexity, strength,
direction, and symmetry.
Indirect Links
If we reexamine Figure 5.3, the last two informal communication networks
(probability and cluster) contain indirect links. In the case of probability
communication networks, we see A only communicating with E and C, and all
the people in the network receive the message from someone else. While A does
not communicate with D directly, an indirect link goes from D → I → E → A.
The same is also true in the cluster sample where A only communicates to B and
F, but everyone else in the network then receives the message from B or F.
Frequency
The second measure of ties examines the existence of the frequency of
communication between individuals within a network, which is a numerical
indicator of the quantity of communication that exists between two individuals.
In most organizations, there are some people you communicate with multiple
times a day and others you see only occasionally.
When researchers examine the stability of communication networks, they are
interested in how long a specific link has existed. Some links may exist for
decades, while other may exist for only a few hours. For example, you may have
colleagues around the country whom you are constantly in contact with, but then
you have other colleagues you only meet for a few minutes one time in a
meeting. While you may have established a link with the person in the meeting,
this link was quick and not considered stable.
Multiplexity
The concept of multiplexity refers to the number of links individuals have to one
another. In essence, people within an organization can have multiple links to
each other as a result of different relationships both within the organization and
within the environment. For example, maybe you have a colleague you work
with, you go to the same church, and your kids go to school together. In this
case, you are linked through multiple relationships.
The strength of a link refers to the “amount of time, emotional intensity,
intimacy, or reciprocal services (frequency or multiplexity often used as measure
of strength of tie).” [29] Some links within a communication network are just
bound to be stronger than other links. Maybe you and a colleague are good
friends and go shopping together, go to the theater together, and take trips
together. Obviously, if you are spending more time with and establishing
multiple links with an individual, that link will be stronger than one you have
with someone you never see outside of work.
The concept of direction is very similar to the process of vertical
communication. In essence, does communication flow one way? For example,
maybe the CEO of your organization is allowed to communicate with you, but
you are not allowed to communicate directly with the CEO.
Symmetry
The opposite of direction is symmetry, which examines whether or not
communication links are open and messages are able to go bidirectionally. In
essence, symmetry inspects whether communication is one sided or whether
both parties are actively involved in the communication.
Measures Assigned to Individual Actors
The second category involves the typical social network measures assigned to
individual actors. The term actor here is not meant in the theatrical sense.
Instead, actor is used to represent an individual participating in a communication
network. Brass identified seven different types of measures commonly assigned
to individual actors in communication networks: degree, range, closeness,
betweenness, centrality, prestige, and roles.
The topic of degree in network analysis refers to the “number of direct links with
other actors.” [30] Some individuals will have many links and others will have
very few links. Typically, links are discussed by examining the number of in-
degree links and the number of out-degree links. In-degree links examine the
number of links directed toward an actor from other actors. In other words, in-
degree links are “incoming links” and can help researchers ascertain the number
of sources of information an actor has. Out-degree links, on the other hand,
involve the number of links where a specific actor communicates information to
other actors. These are also referred to as “outgoing links” because information
is flowing away from the actor to other actors in her or his network.
Range refers to the diversity of links an individual has within her or his
communication network. This diversity can refer to dissimilar groups of
individuals or individuals on different levels of the hierarchy. In a multinational
firm, developing links around the globe can be very beneficial for an individual.
In fact, having diverse links in one’s communication network can help one
receive the best possible information because the more homogenous one’s links
are, the greater likelihood that the information one receives will be identical.
closeness refers to the number of links within a communication
network it takes for an individual to communicate with her or his entire network.
In essence, how easily can an individual actor reach everyone in her or his
network? Brass explains how closeness is analyzed by network analysts:
“Usually [closeness is] measured by averaging the path distances (direct and
indirect links) to all others. A direct link is counted as 1, indirect links receive
proportionately less weight.” [31] For example, in the communication networks
exhibited in Figure 5.3, the gossip network is much closer than the single-strand
network. In the gossip network, Person A can communicate directly with
everyone in her or his network, whereas in the single-strand network,
communication from Person A to Person D takes two extra steps (through Person
B and Person C).
Betweenness
Betweenness is the “extent to which an actor mediates, or falls between any
other two actors on the shortest path between those two actors.” [32] In essence,
is the shortest path between two individuals directly through you? For example,
maybe you’re the administrative assistant to a CEO. Everyone knows that the
only way to get to the CEO is to go through you. In this case, by being in the
position of administrative assistant, you function as the point between the CEO
and other people in the organization.
Centrality
Centrality refers to the extent to which an individual is at the core of one’s
communication network. If you examine Figure 5.3 again, Person A is clearly
the central figure in each of the forms of informal communication networks.
However, Person A is clearly more centrally located in the gossip
communication network than the other three, because in the gossip network all
the links are out-degree from Person A.
The concept of prestige in network analysis is a little ambiguous and harder to
map, because it refers to the reasons people want to be a part of an actor’s
communication network. In essence, the more people want to be part of your
communication network, the higher your prestige is within the network itself.
Within any communication network, people may exhibit a number of roles
within the network. Roles in this sense refer to specific behaviors people exhibit
within a communication network. Research in network analysis has found a
number of different types of role that are common within organizations: stars,
liaisons, bridges, gatekeepers, and isolates.
. The concept of stars existing within a communication network stemmed
from research by Thomas J. Allen and Stephen I. Cohen, who found that some
individuals just stand out and have more communication links than other people.
Michael L. Tushman and Thomas J. Scanlan examined how stars function in
communication networks. [34] One of the primary functions of stars is the ability
to cross organizational boundaries in their links. Tushman and Scanlan noted that
“boundary spanning individuals are those who are internal communication stars
(that is, they are frequently consulted on work related matters) and who have
substantial communication with areas outside their unit.” [35] Ultimately,
Tushman and Scanlan realized that there were two types of stars in
communication networks: internal stars and external stars. [36] Internal stars are
individuals who develop competence in a specific internal unit and are able to
gain and disseminate information within their communication network. Internal
stars are also referred to as opinion leaders, because they are seen as the go-to
people for information and problem solving. External stars, on the other hand,
develop competence in an area external to the organization and are able to
receive and disseminate information within their communication network
outside of the organization itself. External stars are also referred to as
cosmopolites because they have stronger ties to the external environment, and
cosmopolites bring in information to the organization from the external
environment. The last type of star identified by Tushman and Scanlan is
individuals who engage in informational boundary spanning, which are both
internal and external stars who can bridge the gap between their communication
network and other communication networks that could utilize their information.
. According to Everett M. Rogers, a liaison is “an individual who links
two or more cliques in a system, but who is not a member of any clique.” [38]
Rogers uses the word clique to refer to communication networks in this
definition. In essence, a liaison is an individual who does not belong to two
communication networks but is the between person in the middle of the two
. Bridges are individuals who link two or more communication networks
and are members of the two communication networks. In essence, a bridge is
someone who belongs to two groups and is able to send and receive information
along between those two groups.
Gatekeepers. A gatekeeper is an individual who has the ability to filter
information from the external environment to internal communication networks
or filter information that is passed from one communication network to another
communication network. [39] Because gatekeepers have the task of determining
what information is delivered within the organization, they play a very important
role in the day-to-day functioning of the organization. If gatekeepers let in too
much information, the organization will suffer from communication overload.
On the other hand, if the gatekeepers filter out too much information, the
organization will suffer from communication underload.
. The last role that people exhibit in communication networks is isolates.
Isolates are individuals who have withdrawn themselves from the
communication networks. [40] These are individuals who typically have very few
if any links. One of our coauthors worked for an organization that was located
six hours away. Our coauthor would go for weeks without having any kind of
direct contact with the organization. Many members of this organization didn’t
even know that our coauthor had been hired and was working for the
organization. In this case, our coauthor was clearly isolated from the
communication network within the organization.
Measures Assigned to Networks
The final category discussed by Brass involves the typical social network
measures used to describe networks. [41] The previous two classifications of
measures looked at more microlevel aspects of communication networks,
whereas this section examines nine measures used to describe networks on a
macro level: size, inclusiveness, component, reachability, connectedness,
density, centralization, symmetry, and transitivity.
The size of a communication network relates to the total number of actors within
a network. Some communication networks are small, involving only a handful of
actors, whereas other networks are very large and contain hundreds of actors.
Inclusiveness
The issue of inclusiveness is related to the total number of possible actors within
a communication network minus the number of isolates. The more isolates a
communication network has, the less inclusive the network is.
Component
A component within a communication network is the largest subset of actors or
groups of actors who contain multiple links. In essence, is there one group of
actors within the communication network that is clearly more linked to each
other than any other actors or subsets of the larger communication network?
Often, these components will actually have no links outside of the group of
actors. Sometimes people refer to components as the “in crowd” because the
people within the “in crowd” typically do not allow outsiders access to the
component, clearly establishing who is and who is not within the group. When
referring to groups of individuals who are highly linked within an organization,
we call these groups nodes. An organization’s total communication network will
consist of a variety of nodes.
Reachability
Reachability refers to the average number of links it takes to link any two
individuals within a communication network. Reachability is measured by
examining both direct and indirect ties.
Connectedness
Connectedness is similar to reachability, but instead of evaluating individual
actors we are evaluating groups of actors or nodes. Connectedness, then, is the
degree to which all the nodes in a communication network are reachable and is
usually determined by comparing the number of nodes that are clearly reachable
with the number of nodes that are not.
Within any communication network, most people are linked (either in- or out-
degree) to others within the network but are not linked to every possible person
within the communication network. Density refers to the number of links that
exist within a communication network as compared to the total number of links
possible within a communication network.
Centralization
The idea of centralization starts with realizing that most organizational
communication networks have one star who is the most linked person within the
organization. Centralization, then, is comparing that individual star to the rest of
the people within the communication network. In highly centralized
communication networks, the average person and the star’s number of links will
be very similar. In highly decentralized communication networks, most people
contain only a few links, and no one comes close to the number of links that the
central star has.
Symmetry
Earlier we discussed the notions of symmetry and direction in conjunction with
looking at the typical social network measures of ties. Symmetry on the network
level compares the number of symmetry ties with the number of direction ties.
The more bidirectional or symmetrical ties that exist within a communication
network, the more symmetrical the communication network is. On the other
hand, the more unidirectional or direction ties that exist within a communication
network, the less symmetrical the communication network is.
Transitivity
The concept of transitivity in communication networks refers to indirect
relationships among three people. For example, if A communicates a message to
B, and then B communicates the message to C, the three individuals are
considered transitive. In essence, A and B are directly linked, B and C are
directly linked, and A and C are indirectly linked through B. The concept of
transitivity then “is the number of transitive triples divided by the number of
potential transitive triples” within a communication network. [42]
Related Research -- Papa and Papa
Communication Network Patterns and the Reinvention of New Technology
By Wendy H. Papa and Michael J. Papa (1992) [43]
In this study, Papa and Papa (1992) wanted to examine how communication
networks impact reinvention, or a user’s likelihood of changing or modifying
a new innovation during the innovation’s period of adoption. For this study,
the researchers used an insurance office in New Jersey, because the office
planned to introduce a new computer system. There were 137 participants
who worked in the office, ranging in age from twenty-three to forty-four. The
sample consisted of sixty-four females and seventy-three males. Furthermore,
the organization consisted of thirteen departments and included five unique
hierarchical levels.
In this study, Papa and Papa had three basic hypotheses to test:
H1: A positive linear relationship exists between the activity level of an
employee’s network (as measured by interaction frequency and network size)
and the speed with which that employee implements a reinvention.
H2: A negative linear relationship exists between the integrativeness of an
employee’s network and the speed with which that employee implements a
reinvention.
H3: A positive linear relationship exists between the diversity of an
employee’s network and the speed with which that employee implements a
reinvention.
To collect their data, Papa and Papa trained the employees within the
insurance company in making accurate assessments about interactions related
to the new computer system. The participants then kept a diary of their
interactions related to the new computer system over the course of five
The results for the three hypotheses found that an individual’s network
diversity and network integrativeness positively related to an individual’s
adoption of a reinvention, but network size and interaction frequency did not.
Furthermore, the individual who initiated the reinvention (or reinventor) had
a more diverse communication network, a larger communication network,
and greater frequency of interaction and was less integrative than the average
worker within the organization.
In this chapter we have examined a number of very important concepts related to
organizational communication. Specifically, we started the chapter by examining
the three types of formal communication networks that exist in organizations
(upward, downward, and horizontal/lateral). We then looked at informal
communication networks, specifically examining communication grapevines and
rumors. The last part of this chapter contained a brief overview of the field of
communication network analysis. We examined the historical roots of network
analysis, the place of social capital, and how communication networks are
measured by organizational scholars. In Chapter 6, we will continue to examine
communication within an organization by exploring leadership.
KEY TAKEAWAY
Mishra (1990) noted eight reasons grapevine communication
exists in organizations: (1) grapevines are faster and can bypass
people, (2) grapevines carry useful information quickly, (3)
grapevines supplement formal communication networks, (4)
grapevines provide outlets for individuals’ imaginations and
apprehensions, (5) grapevines help people know what is actually
occurring, (6) grapevines make people feel like they belong, (7)
grapevines are early warning signs for looming crises, and (8)
grapevines help to build teamwork, motivate people, and create
corporate identity.
Davis (1969) proposed four basic types of informal
communication networks: single strand (one person tells one
other person), gossip (one person tells many people directly),
probability (one person tells a few people, who turn around and
tell more people), and cluster (similar to a telephone tree—one
person tells her or his designated network, who then tell their
designated networks).
An individual who has a strong and diverse social network will be
able to tap into that social network quickly in an effort to achieve
specific goals. When people tap into their social networks to help
them complete tasks, they are using their social capital.
Brass (1995) noted commonly utilized measures of ties: indirect
links, frequency, stability, multiplexity, strength, direction, and
symmetry.
Brass (1995) identified seven commonly assigned measures to
individual actors in communication networks: degree, range,
closeness, betweenness, centrality, prestige, and roles.
Brass (1995) examined nine measures used to describe networks
on a macro level: size, inclusiveness, component, reachability,
connectedness, density, centralization, symmetry, and transitivity.
EXERCISES
Think of a time you’ve tuned in to the grapevine at your
workplace. How accurate was the information you received?
Would you still trust the grapevine in your workplace today? Has
social media made grapevine communication better or worse?
Do an analysis of your own social capital. The World Bank has put
together a measure for evaluating social capital called the Social
Capital Assessment
http://siteresources.worldbank.org/INTSOCIALCAPITAL/Resources/Social-
Capital-Assessment-Tool--SOCAT-/annex1.pdf) . Work through
the SOCAT and see what your social capital looks like. You can
then compare your social capital versus the results the World
http://go.worldbank.org/C0QTRW4QF0) has on larger
samples of people.
Conduct a simple network analysis of an organization you belong
Social Capital:
Cluster Network:
Gossip Communication Network :
Informal Communication:
Probability Communication Network:
Single-Strand Communication Network:
to currently. If your organization is very large, you may want to
only analyze one division of the organization.
KEY TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
The creation and utilization of communication networks to obtain specific goals.
Term used in social networking research to refer to an individual participating in a communication network.
Type of informal communication network where the source of the message chooses a number of preselected people with whom to communicate a message, and then the secondary people pass on the message to a group of people who have also been preselected to receive the message.
Type of informal communication network where one individual who serves as the source of the message transmits the message to a number of people directly.
Organizational communication that occurs outside the structure of the formal organizational hierarchy.
The communicative relationship between two people in a communication network.
Type of informal communication network where one individual serves as the primary source of the message and randomly selects people within her or his communication network to communicate the message; then these secondary people randomly pick other people in the communication network to pass along the message.
Type of informal communication network where information travels from one person to the
person.
The linkages between people in a communication network.
Mishra, J. (1990). Managing the grapevine. Public Personnel
Management, 19, 213–228, p. 214.
DeMare, G. (1989). Communicating: The key to establishing good
working relationships. Price Waterhouse Review, 33, 30–37.
Crampton, S. M., Hodge, J. W., & Mishra, J. M. (1998). The informal
communication network: Factors influencing grapevine activity. Public
Personnel Management, 27, 569–584.
Mishra, J. (1990). Managing the grapevine. Public Personnel
Management, 19, 213–228, p. 215.
Mishra, J. (1990). Managing the grapevine. Public Personnel
Management, 19, 213–228, extrapolated from p. 215.
Davis, K. (1969). Grapevine communication among lower and middle
managers. Personnel Journal, 48, 269–272.
Davis, K. (1969). Grapevine communication among lower and middle
managers. Personnel Journal, 48, 269–272.
Davis, K. (1969). Grapevine communication among lower and middle
managers. Personnel Journal, 48, 269–272.
Redding, W. C. (1972). Communication with the organization: An
interpretive review of theory and research. New York, NY: Industrial
Communication Council.
Davis, K. (1969). Grapevine communication among lower and middle
managers. Personnel Journal, 48, 269–272.
Type of informal communication network where one individual serves
as the primary source of the message and randomly selects people
within her or his communication network to communicate the message;
then these secondary people randomly pick other people in the
communication network to pass along the message.
Davis, K. (1969). Grapevine communication among lower and middle
managers. Personnel Journal, 48, 269–272.
Davis, K. (1969). Grapevine communication among lower and middle
managers. Personnel Journal, 48, 269–272.
Smith, W. (2004). Ev Rogers: Helping to build a modern synthesis of
social change. Journal of Health Communication, 9, 139–142.
Hornik, R. (2004). Some reflections on diffusion theory and the role
of Everett Rogers. Journal of Health Communication, 9, 143–148, p. 143.
Susskind, A. M., Schwartz, D. F., Richards, W. D., & Johnson, J. D.
(2005). Evolution and diffusion of the Michigan State University tradition
of organizational communication network research. Communication
Studies, 56, 397–418.
Rogers, E. M., & Kincaid, L. (1981). Communication networks:
Toward a new paradigm for research. New York, NY: Free Press, p. xi.
Monge, P. R., & Contractor, N. (2003). Theories of networks. New
York, NY: Oxford University Press.
Monge, P. R., & Contractor, N. (2003). Theories of networks. New
York, NY: Oxford University Press, p. 440.
Harris, T. E., & Nelson, M. D. (2008). Applied organizational
communication: Theory and practice in a global environment (3rd ed.).
New York, NY: Lawrence Erlbaum.
Monge, P. R., & Contractor, N. (2003). Theories of networks. New
York, NY: Oxford University Press, p. 441.
Tichy, N. M., Tushman, M. L., & Fombrun, C. (1979). Social network
analysis for organizations. Academy of Management Review, 4, 507–
Putnam, R. (2000). Bowling alone: The collapse and revival of
American community. New York, NY: Simon & Schuster.
Bourdieu, P. (1980). Le capital social: Notes provisoires. Actes de la
Recherche en Sciences Socials, 31, 2–3, p. 2.
Bourdieu, P. (1980). Le capital social: Notes provisoires. Actes de la
Recherche en Sciences Socials, 31, 2–3, p. 2.
Portes, A. (1998). Social capital: Its origins and applications in
modern sociology. Annual Review of Sociology, 24, 1–24.
Coleman, J. S. (1988). Social capital in the creation of human
capital. American Journal of Sociology, 94(supplement), S95–S120, p.
Brass, D. J. (1995). A social network perspective on human
resources management. In G. R. Ferris (Ed.), Research in Personnel and
Human Resources Management (vol. 13, pp. 39–79). Greenwich, CT: JAI
Brass, D. J. (1995). A social network perspective on human
resources management. In G. R. Ferris (Ed.), Research in Personnel and
Human Resources Management (vol. 13, pp. 39–79). Greenwich, CT: JAI
Press, p. 44.
Brass, D. J. (1995). A social network perspective on human
resources management. In G. R. Ferris (Ed.), Research in Personnel and
Human Resources Management (vol. 13, pp. 39–79). Greenwich, CT: JAI
Press, p. 45.
Brass, D. J. (1995). A social network perspective on human
resources management. In G. R. Ferris (Ed.), Research in Personnel and
Human Resources Management (vol. 13, pp. 39–79). Greenwich, CT: JAI
Press, p. 45.
Brass, D. J. (1995). A social network perspective on human
resources management. In G. R. Ferris (Ed.), Research in Personnel and
Human Resources Management (vol. 13, pp. 39–79). Greenwich, CT: JAI
Press, p. 45.
Allen, T. J., & Cohen, S. I. (1969). Information flow in research and
development laboratories. Administrative Science Quarterly, 14, 12–19.
Tushman, M. L., & Scanlan, T. J. (1981a). Characteristics and
external orientations of boundary spanning individuals. Academy of
Management Journal, 24, 83–89.
Tushman, M. L., & Scanlan, T. J. (1981a). Characteristics and
external orientations of boundary spanning individuals. Academy of
Management Journal, 24, 83–89, p. 84.
Tushman, M. L., & Scanlan, T. J. (1981b). Boundary spanning
individuals: Their role in information transfer and their antecedents.
Academy of Management Journal, 24, 289–305.
Tushman, M. L., & Scanlan, T. J. (1981b). Boundary spanning
individuals: Their role in information transfer and their antecedents.
Academy of Management Journal, 24, 289–305.
Rogers, E. M. (1995). Diffusion of innovations (4th ed.). New York,
NY: Free Press, p. 111.
Tushman, M. L. (1977). Special boundary roles in the innovation
process. Administrative Science Quarterly, 22, 587–605.
Tichy, N. M., Tushman, M. L., & Fombrun, C. (1979). Social network
analysis for organizations. Academy of Management Review, 4, 507–
Brass, D. J. (1995). A social network perspective on human
resources management. In G. R. Ferris (Ed.), Research in Personnel and
Human Resources Management (vol. 13, pp. 39–79). Greenwich, CT: JAI
Brass, D. J. (1995). A social network perspective on human
resources management. In G. R. Ferris (Ed.), Research in Personnel and
Human Resources Management (vol. 13, pp. 39–79). Greenwich, CT: JAI
Press, p. 44.
Papa, W. H., & Papa, M. J. (1992). Communication network patterns
and the re-invention of new technology. Journal of Business
Communication, 29, 41–61.
5.3 Chapter Exercises
REAL-WORLD CASE STUDY
Bluewolf, an information technology (IT) consulting firm in New York,
grew from two individuals to over two hundred in just seven years.
In 2008, the organization made approximately $31 million in
revenues. During the process of hiring new individuals, the company
founders, Michael Kirven, age thirty-eight, and Eric Berridge, age
thirty-nine, didn’t really worry about vacation policies. The unofficial
vacation policy now states that individuals can take vacations
anytime they want for as long as they want as long as the
individual’s objectives are being met. In fact, most people in the
organization take three to four weeks of vacation a year because
much more than that would make completing objectives very
difficult.
Bluewolf didn’t stop with just their nonvacation policy. The
organization openly encourages a highly interactive and
communicative environment. Employees working on teams will often
take team trips to the gym or volunteer in community causes.
As a result of its unique structure, the organization estimates that it
saves $250,000 a year because no one is having to watch time
cards and vacation days. Furthermore, the turnover rate in the
organization is very low.
1. Do you think Bluewolf’s organizational structure could be effective
in other types of organizations? If so, in what types of
organizations do you think this organizational structure would be
the most effective?
2. How do you think the lack of a formal vacation policy increases
effective communication at Bluewolf?
3. Do you see any communicative problems that may arise out of
the organizational structure created by Bluewolf?
REAL-WORLD CASE STUDY
Starcom MediaVest Group has come to the realization that many
employees are spending a considerable amount of time during each
workday on various social networking websites (e.g., MySpace,
Facebook, Friendster, LinkedIn). In fact, research has found that 20
percent of today’s employees are actively engaging in a social
network website during the business day. Senior executives at
Starcom MediaVest decided to stop fighting the losing war against
social networking and join the social networking phenomenon.
Starcom MediaVest Group ultimately decided to create their own
social networking website specifically for their employees. The
website creators even looked to popular social networking websites
like MySpace and Facebook when creating Starcom MediaVest’s
site. For example, if you’re looking for someone who has specific
knowledge on advertising opportunities in Southeast Asia, you just
have to type the information into the website’s search engine. The
search engine then shows the individual searching as a pushpin in
the center of a bull’s eye, with surrounding pushpins indicating
people around the world in the Starcom MediaVest Group family
who have the expertise you’re looking for.
1. How do you think social networking sites are changing the
dynamics of horizontal communication within the organization?
2. Do you think organizations should limit employee access to social
networking websites during the business day?
3. What do you think some of the downsides are for an organization
having its own social networking website?
REAL-WORLD CASE STUDY
Weekends are supposed to be a time individuals can relax and not
think about what’s going on at work. However, with the invention of
e-mail, text messaging, and other forms of interactive technologies,
our ability to escape to our homes for a work-free weekend is
becoming harder and harder to accomplish. To combat this problem,
PricewaterhouseCoopers started discouraging employees from e-
mailing on the weekends.
If an employee of PricewaterhouseCoopers attempts to send an e-
mail on Saturday or Sunday, he or she is greeted with the following
pop-up message: “It’s the weekend. Help reduce weekend e-mail
overload for both you and your colleagues by working offline.”
Senior executives at PricewaterhouseCoopers argue that sending e-
mail during the weekend makes other individuals feel obligated to
respond during the weekend. Instead, employees are encouraged to
write their e-mails during the weekend but wait until Monday
morning to actually send the e-mails.
1. The pop-up message is a form of downward communication
related to communication flow. Do you think this is an effective
way to prevent weekend e-mails?
2. Do you think people are obligated to respond to e-mails they
receive during the weekend?
3. With the invention of new technology, has the idea of the workless
weekend disappeared forever?
END-OF-CHAPTER EXERCISES
1. When Jerry first started working for Capital Bank, he was told that every Friday was casual Friday. The first week he worked for the organization he wore jeans to work, only to find out that everyone else was wearing khaki pants and a Capital Bank polo shirt tucked in. What aspect of formal
communication did Jerry face in this example?
a. communication rule b. communication norms c. communication overtures d. communication overload e. communication underload
2. Which of Dover’s (1959) three eras of the history of downward communication was concerned with notices of birthdays and anniversaries, jokes, and local recreation and entertainment opportunities?
a. era of entertainment b. era of information c. era of interpretation d. era of persuasion e. era of reticence
3. Katherine is very unhappy with her organization’s stance on a new international advertising campaign. She finds the campaign racist, but she feels that if she says anything at work people may retaliate. Instead, she anonymously blogs about her uneasiness on a website for marketing professionals. According to Jeffrey Kassing, Katherine is exhibiting what type of organizational dissent?
a. articulated b. latent c. displaced d. mediated e. whistleblowing
4. What are communication networks that exist outside the formal hierarchy of an organization?
a. formal b. informal c. mediated d. social e. capitalized
5. Kalina is on the board of directors of Children International, a large nonprofit trying to alleviate worldwide hunger. Kalina is also a member of the American Farmers Association. In her two roles, Kalina is often discussing how the two organizations can help each other. According to Rogers (1995), what critical role is Kalina playing in her communication network?
a. liaison b. gatekeeper c. cosmopolitan d. isolate e. bridge
Answer Key
1. b
2. a
3. c
4. b
5. e
Chapter 6
Organizational Communication Climate, Culture, and Globalization
A Reciprocal Relationship
Imagine you’ve just walked into a room full of people. Immediately, you feel the
tension. From the way everyone talks, you know they’re sizing up one another,
angling for an advantage, certain their own opinions are the “right” ones. Now
imagine the room isn’t just a campus hallway conversation or Friday night party
—it’s your place of work. So you feel the tension every day. How would this
“climate” affect your communication with coworkers and superiors? For that
matter, how did communication (or the lack of it) contribute to this climate in the
first place? And how might communication solve it?
This scenario highlights two key factors in the study of organizational
communication—namely, organizational climate and organizational culture—
and the reciprocal relationship between them. As you might guess, there is no
one way to explain these phenomena. In Chapter 4, we reviewed four approaches
—postpositive, interpretive, critical, and postmodern—that even differ on the
fundamental question of how organizations exist. Not surprisingly, scholars in
each tradition look at climate and culture in different ways. In fact, when Eric
Eisenberg and Patricia Riley surveyed the literature, they identified seven
distinct approaches (which we will review later) to the study of organizational
culture. [1]
Yet scholars generally agree that climate, culture, and communication are
interrelated. As suggested in the opening scenario to this chapter, a tense climate
may stifle communication—and by the same token, a culture of destructive
communication likely contributed to the development of that climate in the first
place. (For more about the “dark side” of organizational communication, see
Chapter 13.) A positive climate, however, may foster a culture that leads to
quality communication—and vice versa. Thus the climate and culture of an
organization affects its communications, as well as the reverse. This reciprocity
means climate and culture shape an organization’s continual, routine
communication behaviors even as the continual, routine communication
behaviors of the organization help to strengthen, maintain, and build its climate
and culture. You can probably imagine many scenarios where office routines
affect communication: for example, when employees feel they can only speak at
meetings when it is “proper,” or must talk in a “promotional” manner to
customers, or must keep quiet around a controlling and dictatorial boss, or know
their e-mails are monitored. Even when the company says it values effective
communication skills in its employees, you can see how a negative
organizational climate and culture may limit that effectiveness.
In this chapter, we will begin with a discussion of organizational climate. For
one thing, the literature on climate predates that on culture. For another, after the
concept of organizational culture arose and was popularized in the 1980s, most
climate studies were situated within the cultural paradigm. [2] So by starting with
organizational climate, we can see how the research has developed over the past
forty years. Next, our discussion of climate will lead naturally into the different
approaches for the study of organizational cultures. Finally, the chapter will
conclude by reviewing a phenomenon that increasingly impacts organizational
cultures in the twenty-first century—namely, the globalization of economic
activity that compels organizations to communicate across cultures.
[1] Eisenberg, E. M., & Riley, P. (2001). Organizational culture. In F. M.
Jablin & L. L. Putnam (Eds.), The new handbook of organizational
communication: Advances in theory, research, and methods (pp. 291–
322). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
[2] Eisenberg, E. M., & Riley, P. (2001). Organizational culture. In F. M.
Jablin & L. L. Putnam (Eds.), The new handbook of organizational
communication: Advances in theory, research, and methods (pp. 291–
322). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage, pp. 307–308.
6.1 Organizational Climate
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
1. Understand the concept of organizational climate.
2. Distinguish between supportive and defensive climates in Gibb’s
model.
3. Delineate Redding’s SCOPE model for analyzing organizational
climates and Pace and Faules’s extension of the model.
4. Describe how organizational climate can, as Poole and McPhee
proposed, be conceived as a structurational process.
When you think of the word climate, meteorological terms like “cold,” “hazy,”
and “hot” may come to mind. Weather metaphors such as these can also be
applied to organizational climates; indeed, some scholars describe organizations
as either “warm” or “cold.” [1] The general idea of organizational climate was
defined by Gary Kreps as the “internal emotional tone of the organization based
on how comfortable organizational members feel with one another and the
organization.” [2] In turn, this overall atmosphere influences organization
members’ communicative behaviors. Positive environments foster—and negative
environments hinder—interaction and information.
To continue the weather metaphor, think of how one person can say, “This room
is freezing!” and another that “It’s rather warm in here.” People in an
organization can have different perceptions of its climate, which then affects
their communication. For example, if you have warm feelings about your school,
then you might glowingly tell a prospective student of its success in sports, the
classic beauty of the campus, the high quality of its instructors, and the vision of
its administration. But a classmate of yours might feel a chill from the school
and thus bitterly tell the prospective student that jocks rule, those classic
buildings have outdated facilities, the instructors are hard graders, and the
administration’s vision runs ahead of reality.
This example illustrates an assertion made by one of the first prominent
researchers in organizational climate, W. Charles Redding. He believed, “The
climate of the organization is more crucial than are communication skills or
techniques (taken by themselves) in creating an effective organization.” [3] Thus
you and your classmate made very different comments about your school, and
those comments were driven by your individual perceptions of its climate. The
administration may be (and probably is) constantly employing all the
communication skills and techniques at its disposal to create an effective
university. But in the end, your “vibes” about the school dictated what you said.
If the university wants its members (like you and your classmate) to
communicate effectively to its stakeholders (like that prospective student), then
it must find ways to engender positive feelings that are broadly shared within the
organization.
Supportive and Defensive Climates
Perhaps the most enduring conception of climate is also among the first
proposed. Half a century ago, Jack Gibb suggested that communication could be
usefully viewed as occurring within either a supportive or a defensive climate. [4] His 1961 article “has achieved iconic status” with a “theory of supportive
and defensive communication [that now] is both ubiquitous and enduring.” [5]
The theory is appealing because its basic tenets can be easily grasped.
Supportive climates display six characteristics, each of which has an opposite
trait found in defensive climates. This conception is shown in Table 6.1. Let us
review each pair of opposing traits, one by one, using a common workplace
situation as an illustrative example.
Table 6.1 Gibb's Supportive and Defensive Climates
Supportive Defensive
Description Evaluation
Problem orientation Control
Spontaneity Strategy
Empathy Neutrality
Equality Superiority
Provisionalism Certainty
Description versus Evaluation
You’re frantically working on a report that’s due by the end of the day. Suddenly,
you hear a loud voice in the cubicle next to yours. A coworker on a personal
phone call has gotten into a heated argument. She struggles to keep her voice
down but is distracting you from your work. Finally, after an hour she hangs up.
Though you’re now hopelessly behind on your report, you resist the temptation
to poke your head above the cubicle and shout, “You insensitive jerk!” Instead,
you gently remind your coworker that company policy requires personal calls to
be brief. Your restraint is admirable. Rather than contributing to a defensive
climate that’s characterized by frequent and negative evaluation and judgment,
you’re fostering a supportive climate in which organization members offer a
description of what they observe without attaching judgments.
Problem Orientation versus Control
After hearing numerous complaints about your coworker’s hour-long phone rant,
the supervisor decrees that all personal calls are henceforth forbidden during
work hours. Immediately, employees are in an uproar. What if a child’s daycare
arrangements fall through? Or if school lets out early due to bad weather? Or any
number of emergencies? To defuse the situation, the department head pulls the
supervisor aside and points out the company policy manual gives employees a
right to make brief personal calls. So a staff meeting is called; the supervisor
admits to overreacting and asks employees for ideas on how to enforce the
company policy. The incident illustrates that when managers exert control by
imposing solutions without regard for employee concerns, the climate of the
workplace can quickly become defensive. In contrast, managers who operate
with a problem orientation and address issues in a give-and-take manner can
foster a supportive climate as they find solutions that satisfy multiple parties.
Spontaneity versus Strategy
In some organizations, management may view all employees as dishonest and
ready to cheat the company when possible. Similarly, employees may see
management as inherently domineering and greedy. Everyone in the organization
is constantly thinking up a strategy to manipulate events and gain the advantage.
This describes your best friend’s place of work. Managers there assume
employees are lazy and—unless strictly monitored—will spend their days
making phone calls, writing personal e-mails, surfing the Internet, and playing
computer games. Not surprisingly, the organizational climate is defensive;
employees withhold information from management and constantly think of ways
around privacy restrictions. By contrast, you’re gratified that your own company
generally encourages open communication and honest self-disclosure by
everyone. The goal is to create an atmosphere where all organization members
can communicate with spontaneity—or be able to say what is on their minds—
rather than always thinking ahead about how to manipulate each situation.
Empathy versus Neutrality
Remember the supervisor who overreacted and banned all personal phone calls
at work? He reversed himself, but only under pressure from his boss. Though he
grudgingly tolerates brief personal phone calls, he does not show much concern
when employees ask for time to deal with legitimate personal emergencies. In
such a situation, a defensive climate can occur as people assume an attitude of
neutrality, or an impersonal approach to the workplace. Supervisors are
perceived as indifferent; employees just “do their jobs” as if shrugging their
shoulders and saying to themselves, “Whatever.” To turn the climate from
defensive to supportive, leaders must demonstrate their care for employees and
show empathy by looking at situations from the workers’ points of view.
Equality versus Superiority
Some organizational climates are marked by a hypercompetitive atmosphere
where everything is approached with an “us or them” mentality. In these
organizations, the climate is characterized by assertions of superiority. This
might be manifested in a superior stance taken by management—like the
supervisor who banned all personal phone calls or the company that monitors
employee e-mails and screen time. Superior attitudes can also be taken by
various cliques and coalitions within the organization, which see themselves as
more important or high minded than others. Leaders who would turn around
such a climate and foster a supportive atmosphere must stress the importance of
equality and create a level playing field for all organization members.
Provisionalism versus Certainty
Perhaps you’ve worked for a boss who declares with absolute certainty the “best
way” to achieve company goals and is dogmatic about how you and others are
supposed to behave on the job. Employees who work for a “my-way-or-the-
highway” supervisor may feel like they are walking on eggshells, fearful that a
single misstep will bring dire consequences. The antidote to such a defensive
climate is provisionalism, or a willingness to hear others’ ideas with an open
mind. When leaders and members approach organizational problems with a
provisional attitude, everyone feels safe to express ideas without fear of
retribution or humiliation. [6]
Gibb proposed his six pairs of opposing supportive and negative traits based on
his personal observations of small-group interactions over a period of eight
years. As such, noted Forward, Czech, and Lee, his theory “has received little
elaboration or empirical support, despite its iconic status…due to the fact that
Gibb himself never published a survey instrument that would enable other
researchers to explore, verify, or refine his theory.” [7] This lack of quantitative
data is troubling to postpositive researchers (see Chapter 4), who desire
statistical validation. But for now, it is more important to note that Gibb’s theory
aligns with the sociopsychological tradition that views communication behaviors
as manifestations of human psychological processes. Thus a defensive climate is
one in which an individual feels anxiety when communicating with others, while
a supportive climate is one in which that anxiety is relieved. By contrast, the
model we review next looks at how organizational climate arises not from
individual feelings but from the interactions between management and
employees.
Five Essential Elements
Taking an interpretive view (see Chapter 4), W. Charles Redding believed that
positive feelings are driven not by the content of what an organization’s
management says or the techniques used to deliver its message, but by the
character of its interactions with employees. The crucial determinant of what
employees communicate is the organizational climate produced by these
interactions, not the employees’ individual communication abilities. If
interaction is stifled—for example, if management makes employees feel that
talking about problems is generally discouraged—then frustrations will build,
the organizational climate will turn chilly, and success will be hindered. On the
other hand, if management values interaction and feedback, then a productive
climate and improved bottom line can result.
Redding proposed that five elements are essential for creating what he called the
Ideal Managerial Climate. He summarized these elements with the acronym
SCOPE for supportiveness, credibility, openness, participatory decision making,
and emphasis on high-performance goals. [8] Let us briefly review each one.
Supportiveness
The first of Redding’s five elements, supportiveness, is defined as interactions
characterized by mutual respect and constructive evaluation. Managers must
recognize and respond to employees’ needs and opinions. In this sense, a
supportive manager can be like a good coach. Teams that succeed in sports get
the most out of their players. When a player is in a slump, the coach can respond
by yelling and cursing or by publicly criticizing the player in the media. But the
best coaches respond with encouragement and by helping the player analyze and
overcome what is causing the slump. In the same way, managers should
encourage their employees and help them determine how to maximize success.
Credibility
According to Redding, a positive organizational climate is also fostered when
employees feel confident that management has a plan and is charting the best
course of action to achieve success. When management is credible in the eyes of
employees, doubt and fear are dispelled.
Openness
People do not like working for organizations in which they have limited
information. By contrast, organizational climate is improved when interactions
between supervisors and employees are characterized by a free flow of
information. Positive feelings result when people have access to information on
matters that affect them.
Participatory Decision Making
Good feelings also result when employees not only have access to information
but can participate in decisions that affect their work and employment.
Employees may not always get what they want, but they can feel positive about
having a voice and providing input that is taken seriously.
Emphasis on High-Performance Goals
The famous Hawthorne Studies, which we reviewed in Chapter 3, suggested that
workers thrive best when they have objectives to meet. Perhaps you have
belonged to a club or group where members sit around and ask, “What do you
want to do?” So you can imagine (or have experienced) a workplace where
employees simply do their jobs without any real idea of why it matters (other
than to get a paycheck). By setting high-performance goals, organizations are
more likely to achieve success and engender a sense of purpose and
accomplishment. For that reason, many organizations adopt the motto of “Strive
for Excellence.”
To illustrate, consider the example we explored at the outset of this chapter—
namely, your conversation with a prospective student who is thinking about
attending your school. How might Redding’s SCOPE model be applied? First,
the administration cannot simply tell you what a great university you attend and
then expect you to automatically communicate this message to prospects. What
you communicate to a prospective student is driven by your feelings about the
school, which in turn reflect your perceptions of the climate on campus. So the
administration must consider how its interactions with you, as a member of the
school, might encourage you to perceive a supportive climate. That could be
accomplished as the administration and faculty strive to be mentors rather than
judges, to assure you they know what they are doing, to keep information
flowing, to solicit your participation in decisions that affect you, and to inspire
and motivate you with worthy goals that give you something to shoot for.
Since Redding published his SCOPE model in the early 1970s, subsequent
scholars have suggested their own models for creating a positive organizational
climate. For example, Wayne Pace and Don Faules extended the SCOPE model
by proposing six factors that influence employee perceptions of an organization
and that impact communication. [9] These can be expressed as six questions:
1. What methods are used by managers to motivate employees?
2. Do employees feel that management uses effective methods, rather than just
chance, for solving problems?
3. Do employees believe management sees them as important?
4. Are employees given the resources to perform their jobs effectively?
5. Can employees initiate upward communication?
6. Is the quality of communication within the organization generally good?
Thus, when employees are motivated by positive rather than negative means,
when they believe management solves problems fairly and values its workers,
when they feel able to do their jobs and able to communicate with managers, and
when they feel well informed, then a productive organizational climate is more
likely to result.
So far we have reviewed three approaches to fostering a supportive climate. For
comparison, the theories of Gibb, Redding, and Pace and Faules are summarized
in Table 6.2. In the next section, however, we will move to very different
conception of organizational climate.
Table 6.2 Theories of Organizational Climate Compared
Gibb Redding Pace and Faules
What fosters a positive
climate
Description Supportiveness Positive motivation
Problem
orientation Credibility
Effective problem
solving
Spontaneity Openness Employees feel
important
Empathy Participation Sufficient resources
Equality
Emphasis on high-performance
goals
Two-way
communication
Provisionalism Quality
Communication
A Structurational Perspective
For Gibb, a supportive climate can be created if individual anxieties can be
relieved. For Redding, a supportive climate can be fostered if managers and
employees change the ways they interact. But for Marshall Scott Poole and
Robert McPhee, climate is not so much a variable that managers can manipulate
to improve communication and performance. Instead, members of an
organization engage in social interactions without full awareness of how their
actions impact the larger picture. Thus individuals not only create a climate
through their actions; their actions are, in turn, shaped by that climate through
processes of structuration. [10]
As we learned in our review of structuration theory in Chapter 4, organizational
systems are composed of human practices—including the practices that structure
an organization’s climate. Thus Poole and McPhee defined climate as the
“collective attitude, continually produced and reproduced by members’
interactions.” [11] Development of a climate begins with a concept pool out of
which members develop terms to describe the organization. This fosters a kernel
climate as members adopt a commonly shared abstraction to capture their basic
understandings of the organization. Finally, these kernel understandings are
manifested in particular climates that enable and constrain members’ actions in
specific organizational situations and settings. [12]
This structurational view of organizational climate provides a good bridge to our
discussion, later in this chapter, about organizational culture. Poole and
McPhee’s theory forces us to ask, Is climate a phenomenon that can be
consciously manipulated and, if deemed advisable, changed by management to
increase organizational effectiveness? Now replace the word “climate” with
“culture,” and you have a foundational question for the study of organizational
culture. Poole and McPhee’s theory also raises this question: Is climate uniform
throughout an organization? Or is it best to think in terms of “miniclimates” that
exist at various levels of a corporate entity? Again, replace the word “climate”
with “culture” and you have a key question for the next portion of our chapter.
These different conceptions of organizational climate—as an individual,
interactional, or structurational phenomenon—are represented in Figure 6.1.
Figure 6.1 Conceptions of Organizational Climate
Models for improving organizational climate, such as those put forward by
Redding and by Pace and Faules, generated much interest during the 1970s and
1980s. At the height of this interest, a survey of the literature identified three
main approaches to climate studies: climate as a composite of members’
individual perceptions, climate as the enduring “personality” of an organization,
and climate as generated by subgroups within an organization. [13] In the 1980s
and 1990s, however, a “paradigm war” ensued as scholars wrestled with how to
distinguish organizational climate and culture. [14] The conflict sorted itself by
the start of the new century when Eisenberg and Riley found that “the number of
climate studies undertaken has dropped significantly, [with] most recent work
positioning organizational climate in relation to [organizational] culture and
effectiveness.” For that reason, “most conceptions of organizational climate are
[now] best viewed as phenomena caused, changed, or managed by the
organization’s culture.” [15] The current consensus, noted Wienzemmer,
Franczak, and Michel, regards organizational climate as a “representation of
organizational culture.” [16] Yet this consensus does not deny our argument, with
which we began this chapter, that climate and culture have a reciprocal
relationship. Climate fosters communication; communication constructs culture;
culture sustains climate. So with that, we turn now to culture.
KEY TAKEAWAY
Kreps defined climate as “internal emotional tone of the
organization based on how comfortable organizational members
feel with one another and the organization.”
Gibb theorized that communication occurs in either a defensive or
a supportive climate. Characteristics of a defensive climate are
evaluation, control, strategy, neutrality, superiority, and certainty;
those of a supportive climate are description, problem orientation,
spontaneity, empathy, equality, and provisionalism.
Redding held that a positive organizational climate could be
fostered through SCOPE: supportiveness, (managerial) credibility,
openness, participatory decision making, and emphasis on high-
performance goals.
Pace and Faules extended the SCOPE model by proposing that
an organization’s climate is impacted by how managers motivate
employees and solve problems; by whether employees feel that
management regards them as important, provides them sufficient
resources, and permits upward communication opportunities; and
by the overall quality of organizational communication.
Poole and McPhee viewed organizational climate from the
perspective of structuration theory (see Chapter 4) and thus held
that not only is climate created by the social actions of
organization members (who are largely unaware of their effect on
the climate) but, in turn, climate also shapes their actions.
EXERCISES
1. Describe a real-life example for each of Gibb’s defensive and
Concept Pool:
Defensive :
Kernel Climate:
Organizational Climate:
supportive traits in communication climates.
2. Think for a moment about an organization to which you belong. Is
its climate supportive or defensive? Why? Analyze its climate
according to Redding’s SCOPE model and to Pace and Faules’s
six factors.
3. Now think of a defensive climate you have encountered. How
could it (or how did it) become more supportive? Use the three
models we have reviewed in this section to support your analysis.
4. Poole and McPhee’s structurational theory holds that you are
largely unaware of how your actions affect the overall
organizational climate. Think of an organization to which you
belong and then ask yourself, How do I affect its climate without
realizing it? How does the organization’s climate make it easier for
me to act but also shape what actions I take?
KEY TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
The pool of concepts that furnishes organization members with words, phrases, and terms by which to describe the organization.
The climate created when individuals feel anxiety in communicating with others.
The organizational climate that is produced, and then constantly reproduced through subsequent social actions, when members construct from their concept pool a commonly shared abstraction to capture their basic understandings of the organization.
The overall atmosphere within an organization
Particular Climates:
Supportive :
that impacts its members’ communication behaviors.
The “miniclimates” that are produced and reproduced as an organization’s kernel climate enables and constrains members’ actions in specific organizational situations and settings.
The climate created when individuals do not feel anxiety in communicating with others.
[1] Kreps, G. (1990). Organizational communication. New York, NY:
Longman, p. 193.
[2] Kreps, G. (1990). Organizational communication. New York, NY:
Longman, p. 193.
[3] Redding, C. W. (1972). Communication within the organization: An
interpretive view of theory and research. New York, NY: Industrial
Communication Council, p. 115.
[4] Gibb, J. (1961). Defensive communication. Journal of Communication,
11(3), 141–148.
[5] Forward, G. L., Czech, K., & Lee, C. M. (2011). Assessing Gibb’s
supportive and defensive climate: An examination of measurement and
construct validity. Communication Research Reports, 28, 1–15, p. 2.
[6] Punyanunt-Carter, N. M. (2010). Communicating in interpersonal
relationships. Dubuque, IA: Kendall/Hunt.
[7] Forward, G. L., Czech, K., & Lee, C. M. (2011). Assessing Gibb’s
supportive and defensive climate: An examination of measurement and
construct validity. Communication Research Reports, 28, 1–15, p. 4.
[8] Redding, C. W. (1972). Communication within the organization: An
interpretive view of theory and research. New York, NY: Industrial
Communication Council, p. 115.
[9] Pace, W. R., & Faules, D. (1990). Organizational Communication.
Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, pp. 121–122.
[10] Poole, M. S., & McPhee, R. D. (1983). A structurational analysis of
organizational climate. In L. L. Putnam & M. E. Pacanowsky (Eds.),
Communication and organizations: An interpretive approach (pp. 195–
220). Beverly Hills, CA: Sage.
[11] Poole, M. S., & McPhee, R. D. (1983). A structurational analysis of
organizational climate. In L. L. Putnam & M. E. Pacanowsky (Eds.),
Communication and organizations: An interpretive approach (pp. 195–
220). Beverly Hills, CA: Sage, p. 213.
[12] McPhee, R. D. (1985). Formal structure and organizational
communication. In R. D. McPhee & P. K. Tompkins (Eds.), Organizational
communication: Traditional themes and new directions (pp. 149–178).
Beverly Hills, CA: Sage.
[13] Falcione, R. L., Sussman, L., & Herden, R. P. (1987).
Communication climate in organizations. In F. M. Jablin, L. L. Putnam, K.
H. Roberts & L. W. Porter (Eds.), Handbook of organizational
communication: An interdisciplinary perspective (pp. 195–227). Newbury
Park, CA: Sage.
[14] Denison, D. (1996). What IS the difference between organizational
culture and organizational climate? A native’s point of view on a decade
of paradigm wars. Academy of Management Review, 2, 619–654.
[15] Eisenberg, E. M., & Riley, P. (2001). Organizational culture. In F. M.
Jablin & L. L. Putnam (Eds.), The new handbook of organizational
communication: Advances in theory, research, and methods (pp. 291–
322). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage, p. 308.
[16] Wienzemmer, L., Franczak, J., & Michel, E. (2008). Culture
performance research challenge and future directions. Journal of
Academy of Business and Economics, 8(4), 111–112.
6.2 Organizational Culture
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
1. Delineate the functional, interpretive, critical, and postmodern
approaches to understanding organizational culture.
2. Understand major functionalist theories of organizational culture
and their implications for managing organizational change.
3. Understand foundational concepts for interpretive research and
analysis of organizational culture.
4. Understand important concerns in critical and postmodern
scholarship on organizational culture.
Culture is not difficult to define. In the academic literature alone, hundreds of
definitions can be found! The difficulty is agreeing. Yet even then, many believe
that agreement is not a good thing; different perspectives on culture can each
contribute to our understandings. So how should we conceive of culture?
Perhaps you have heard the terms “high culture” (e.g., if you like classical music
and opera), “pop culture” (e.g., if you like rock and rap), and “folk culture” (e.g.,
if you like bluegrass and country). Or maybe, as a college student, the word
“culture” brings to mind an image of the anthropologist who examines the
customs and traditions of national, ethnic, or tribal societies. And chances are
that you have thought about the influences of local, regional, and national
cultures that shape your daily life. If you currently reside in the United States,
then your experience might be likened to a rich buffet where choices could range
from grits (a regional staple) for breakfast, Philly cheese steak (a local favorite)
for lunch, and a slice of apple pie (an American classic) for dessert.
These ideas are helpful when we consider organizational culture. No single
definition is universally agreed on. Just as some people in society talk of “high”
and “low” cultures, some analysts of organizations speak of “strong” and “weak”
cultures. Just as politicians often appeal to the “American culture” that draws all
citizens together, some scholars view organization culture primarily in terms of
values and practices that are broadly shared. On the other hand, those who see
America as a mix of regional and local cultures have their counterparts in
scholars who believe it is “more accurate to think of any organizational culture
as being many cultures that are blurred, overlapped, and nested to create an
organizational multiculture” so that “the way in which subcultures relate to one
another is the organization’s culture.” [1]
How you look at organizational culture really goes back to the foundational issue
of ontology—your belief in the nature of organizational existence—that we
reviewed in Chapter 4. In the broadest sense, there are two views of
organizational culture: either that culture is something an organization has or that
culture is something an organization is. [2] Thus if you believe an organization
has an objective existence that endures independently, even though particular
people come and go, then you might also believe that “culture” (as well as
“climate”) is an attribute that an organization possesses. But if you believe that
an organization has a subjective existence, that it comes into being and is
sustained through its members’ communication, you would likely see
organizational culture as emerging from those interactions.
A second key issue about organizational culture also goes back to another
question we covered in Chapter 4. You may recall that some theorists believe an
organization naturally tends toward order, and others that it naturally tends
toward conflict. For that reason, some researchers look for patterns of shared
values and practices that characterize an organizational culture, while others
investigate the complex dynamics between the many subcultures that exist
within any organization. Finally, you may recall from Chapter 4 how Stanley
Deetz noted that some researchers apply their “knowledge to” the study of an
organization, while others first study an organization and derive “knowledge
from” their observations. [3] The same is true in organizational culture studies.
Those who believe that culture is something an organization has often bring to
their studies an a priori theory about the ideal cultural traits of an effective
organization and then prescribe how managers can adjust the work environment
accordingly. But other researchers observe an organization and describe its
culture, in hopes of better understanding the workings of organizational cultures.
To make sense of it all, we can use the categories just described to construct two
matrices. The first matrix, shown in Figure 6.1, depicts four assumptions that
researchers can make about organizational culture. The second matrix, shown in
Figure 6.2, depicts four approaches researchers can take to studying
organizational culture. By using terms from the organizational communication
literature, we can label the four approaches in Figure 6.3 as functionalist,
interpretive, critical, and postmodern.
Figure 6.2 Assumptions about Organizational Cultures
Figure 6.3 Approaches to Analyzing Organizational Cultures
These categories—functionalist, interpretive, critical, and postmodern—provide
what is called heuristic value. In other words, having neat categories helps us to
grasp the overall picture, even though actual studies of organizational cultures do
not always fall so clearly into only one category. Scholars often take more than
one approach. For example, though the chief purpose of interpretive research is
description, gaining a better grasp of cultural dynamics in organizations may
give voice to the interests of workers who were previously silenced. Later in this
section, we will learn more about research that employs multiple approaches.
But for now, let us explore the four basic approaches—functionalist, interpretive,
critical, and postmodern—and review some foundational ideas in each one.
Functionalist Approaches
The notion of “organizational culture” entered the popular vernacular with two
books, both published in 1982, that took the corporate world by storm. One even
became a New York Times bestseller. The two books, Corporate Cultures by
Terrence Deal and Allan Kennedy, and In Search of Excellence (the bestseller)
by Tom Peters and Robert Waterman, popularized the idea that organizations
have cultures and corporate leaders could adjust them to boost performance. [4] Suddenly, managers were consulting these books to see if their own
workplaces measured up as “strong” (Deal and Kennedy) and “excellent” (Peters
and Waterman) organizations. The attributes of strong cultures and excellent
cultures are summarized in Table 6.3. As Eisenberg and Riley noted, “The speed
with which ‘organizational culture’ emerged as a significant lens…[to] engage
with organizations and institutions was astounding.” [5] Prescriptions for
boosting effectiveness by changing organizational culture are still a staple of the
popular business press. But academics also took note of the trend.
Table 6.3 Attributes of "Strong" and "Excellent" Organizations
Deal and Kennedy: Strong organizations have… Peters and Waterman: Excellent
organizations have…
Values that are appropriate for the organization’s business
environment:
• Organizations in an environment that calls for rapid
feedback/reward and low risk will do best with a work hard,
play hard culture (e.g., restaurant)
• Organizations in an environment that calls for rapid
feedback/reward and high risk will do best with a tough guy
macho culture (e.g., police)
• Organizations in an environment that calls for slow
feedback/reward and low risk will do best with a process culture
(e.g., insurance company)
• Organizations in an environment that calls for slow
feedback/reward and high risk will do best with a bet-the
company culture (e.g., oil company)
A bias for action so that the
organization reacts quickly without
wasting time and resources
Close relations with customers so that
actions and decisions reflect their needs
Autonomy and entrepreneurship so that
employees can voice new ideas and
take risks
Productivity through people so that
internal relations are respectful and
positive
Hands-on, value-driven approach that
commits everyone to performance and
productivity
Heroes who exemplify the organization’s values Stick to the knitting philosophy that
focuses on core strengths and avoids
overdiversification
Rites and rituals that celebrate the organization’s values
Simple form, lean staff philosophy that
avoids too much complexity in
structure and staffing
A cultural network that communicates the organization’s values
Simultaneous loose-tight properties that
foster unity of purpose and diversity for
innovation
Schein's Model of Organizational Culture
As scholars built on the growing interest in organizational culture, the work of
Edgar Schein became prominent in the field and remains influential today. The
title of his best-known book, Organizational Culture and Leadership, affirmed
his functionalist stance that founders and leaders “embed,” “transmit,” and
“teach” culture. [6] Nevertheless, Schein’s model also imparts an emergent,
group-oriented quality. His oft-quoted definition states that organizational
culture is “a pattern of shared basic assumptions that the group learned as it
solved its problems of external adaptation and internal integration, that has
worked well enough to be considered valid, and therefore, to be taught to new
members as the correct way to perceive, think, and feel in relation to those
problems.” [7]
Even if culture is taught to members as the correct way, the definition describes
culture as a group occurrence. This introduces the need for communication,
since that is how people create and share meaning. Next, Schein’s definition
brings in the belief that social phenomena—such as organizations—tend toward
order, as people naturally want predictable patterns that provide consistency and
stability. Then Schein envisions an emergent quality in organizational culture as
the group encounters problems, learns to solve them, and validates those
solutions that successfully adapt the organization to its environment and
integrate its members into a functioning group.
Through such dynamics, the organizational culture of Facebook emerged over
time as Harvard student Mark Zuckerberg launched the site in 2004 for on-
campus social networking, enlisted a team of classmates to expand Facebook to
other colleges, filed as a corporation, moved operations to California’s Silicon
Valley, and in 2006 opened enrollment to virtually anyone. But the example of
Facebook also illustrates Schein’s contention that organizations do not form
accidentally or spontaneously, but begin with the idea of a single founder.
Culture formation only starts when the founder teaches the idea to a core group.
Consider these corporate leaders: Walt Disney, Colonel Harlan Sanders, Bill
Gates, and Mary Kay Ash. Even after many decades, their original visions
continue to distinguish the organizations they founded. Sometimes, the company
founder even became the symbolic focus of an organization—think about Steve
Jobs of Apple Computers or Dave Thomas of the Wendy’s restaurant chain. This
phenomenon occurs, however, not only in well-known corporations, but in many
small businesses and family-owned firms as well.
Walt Disney
Source: http://upload.wikimedia.org/wikipedia/commons/a/a6/Walt_Disney_Snow_white_1937_trailer_screenshot_(12).jpg,
US Public Domain
Bill Gates
Source:
http://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/File:Bill_Gates_2004_cr.jpg,
Creative Commons
As the organization grows beyond the core group, the
influence of leaders is extended through what Schein called
culture-embedding mechanisms. [8] What leaders choose
to regularly emphasize, measure, and control; how leaders
react to key incidents and emergencies; how leaders
allocate resources and rewards; how they select and
promote (or terminate) employees—all have primary
impacts on organizational culture. Leadership priorities are
likewise embedded through a number of secondary
mechanisms including organizational structures, systems,
procedures, formal documents, physical spaces, rites,
rituals, stories, and myths.
Table 6.4 Schein's Culture-Embedding Mechanisms
Primary
Mechanisms
What leaders choose to focus on
How leaders respond to critical events
How leaders allocate resources
What behaviors intentionally or unintentionally model
What leaders reward and what leaders punish
Whom leaders select to hire and promote
Secondary
Mechanisms
How leaders structure the organization
What systems and procedures leaders adopt
What rites and rituals the leaders promulgate
How leaders arrange physical spaces
What stories leaders tell of the organization's heroes
and history
What formal statements of organizational philosophy
leaders make
Finally, to tie all his ideas together, Schein proposed a three-part model
(graphically represented in Figure 6.4) of organizational culture:
1. At the core are the basic assumptions that members share and, indeed, take
for granted. As in Schein’s definition of organizational culture, members
have validated solutions to the point where they assume “that’s how the
world works” and view these solutions as “the correct way to perceive,
think, and feel.” Thus one organization might assume growth should be
strictly on a pay-as-you-go basis, while another assumes that taking on debt
to fund expansion is a wise strategy.
2. The next level is an organization’s espoused values or its stated preferences
for what “should” happen. These might be expressed, for example, through
a mission statement or policy manual. By recognizing the importance of
values, Schein introduces an interpretive factor that is sometimes
overlooked in research from a functionalist perspective, since
organizational values are socially constructed from the interplay of
individual mind-sets.
3. Finally, an organization’s behaviors and artifacts is the level of culture most
readily seen. Behaviors might range from how people address one another
to how staff meetings are conducted. Artifacts encompass the whole of the
organization’s physical environment and physical outputs—from the
president’s parking space and the arrangement of offices to the company
letterhead and even the family photos employees hang in their cubicles.
Further, these three levels—basic assumptions, espoused values, behavior and
artifacts—dynamically interact. A manager who would analyze an organization’s
culture might look at whether its behaviors match its espoused values, or
whether its espoused values accurately reflect members’ taken-for-granted basic
assumptions. For example, does the company say, “The customer is always
right” when it really is driven by profits? Or do marketing campaigns for your
college or university emphasize a low student-to-teacher ratio and the
relationships students build with professors, even while the school schedules
large lecture classes and delegates lower-division courses to graduate teaching
assistants? If consistency is lacking, management can employ the culture-
embedding mechanisms at its disposal to effect change. And in fact,
“organizational change” and “change management” are major research topics for
social scientists in organizational behavior and industrial psychology.
Figure 6.4 Schein’s Organizational Culture Model
Organizational Rites and Rituals
Another frequently cited study also illustrates how a functionalist approach can
recognize the ways that organizational cultures emerge from group interactions
—even as it prescribes ways that group processes can be managed. Harrison
Trice and Janice Beyer proposed that organizational rites and ceremonials fall
into six categories: passage (transitions to new roles), degradation (reprimanding
or firing), enhancement (show approval/give awards), renewal (training and
development), conflict reduction (negotiations/conflict management), and
integration (office parties, staff retreats, onboarding, etc.). [9] These range from
rites that enhance and renew the organization, to rites that reduce conflicts, to
rites that bind members to the organization and mark their passage through (or
exit from) the system. Trice and Beyer readily acknowledged that, beyond what
is openly done and said, these rites also have a ripple effect. They gave the
example of a college professor who receives an award. Beyond affirming the
award process and the individual candidate, the rite demonstrates to other
professors what the institution values most and motivates faculty to meet those
requirements. Thus the social consequences of a rite will ripple through an
organization and impact its culture, even as the rites themselves are expressions
of that culture.
Still, these rites—and the culture they express—are seen as attributes that an
organization has, rather than what the organization is. Trice and Beyer
referenced the work of Deal and Kennedy, and Peters and Waterman, to affirm
that “Organizations with strong cultures probably have potent and well-
established rites and ceremonials.” [10] Thus, they advised, “Practicing
managers therefore could profit from learning how to evaluate their rites and
ceremonials in order to determine the degree to which they are achieving both
desired and other consequences.” Existing rites can be “domesticate[d]…to
shape their practice and manage their occurrence” and thereby “create new
ideologies that are consistent with the demands of external change.” Or,
alternatively, “managers can invent…new rites that express ideologies that
positively value change itself” until “the old rites may lose their appeal and
wither away.” [11]
Organizational Symbols
Rites and rituals, of course, have great symbolic value. In Chapter 4, we learned
that semiotics, or the study of signs and symbols, is one of the major traditions in
theorizing communication. Since the meaning of a thing is different for each
person, the common referent of a sign or symbol makes it possible for some
meaning, at least, to be shared. Gail Fairhurst and Robert Saar, for example,
advise leaders to leverage this phenomenon and develop the art of creating the
“frames” by which followers interpret organizational life. [12] In the literature on
organizations, then, symbols are strongly associated with organizational culture. [13]
Perhaps when you think of organizational symbols, the various military branches
come to mind with their uniforms, rank insignia, medals, flags, colors, and
anthems. Yet the company president who stakes out a named parking space next
to the front door—or who reserves that spot for the employee of the month—is
also creating a symbol that can influence the organization’s culture. Anat Rafaeli
and Monica Worline described symbols in organizational culture as “things that
stand for the ideas that compose the organization” and as “visible, physical
manifestations of organizations and indicators of organizational life.” [14] In the
course of their research, they identified four cultural functions served by
organizational symbols.
Reflections of Organizational Culture
Symbols provide tangible ways to create a shared perception among organization
members. For instance, if you were planning a wedding and visited a hotel
ballroom that looked rundown and dirty, you would interpret that as a reflection
of the hotel’s overall culture. The ballroom is, symbolically, the grandest space
in any hotel. So, if even its ballroom is shabby and its furnishings outdated, then
the hotel management and staff presumably must be lax. But suppose you
walked into a pristine, gorgeous ballroom with fresh flowers and polished floors
and all the things that symbolize grand style. You would take that as a symbolic
reflection of the hotel itself.
Triggers of Internalized Values and Norms
As we saw, symbols reflect organizational culture. But in turn, symbols also
shape organizational culture. Over time, symbols stimulate organization
members to act on the cultural values and norms they have internalized. Thus the
staff at the hotel with the rundown ballroom are probably stimulated (negatively)
to take a “Who cares?” attitude about maintaining the premises, while the staff at
the hotel with the stylish ballroom are stimulated to take pride in working at a
five-star property.
One type of action, of course, is communicative behavior. Rafaeli and Worline
argued that organizational symbols can encourage communications that members
deem appropriate and discourage communications deemed inappropriate. For
example, think about your last visit to a favorite restaurant. If you went to a
coffee shop with a friend, you probably relaxed in plush chairs and enjoyed an
easygoing conversation. But if you went out for fine dining, the posh
surroundings likely prompted you and your companion to speak in quieter tones
and perhaps with a bit more formality. In either case, the symbols all around you
—from the earthenware mugs at the coffee shop to the crystal wineglasses at the
gourmet restaurant—prompted you to communicate in different ways.
Frames for Conversations about Experience
Rafaeli and Worline believe the third function of symbols “is to provide a
vehicle for conversation and communication among organizational members.” [15] This idea recalls our earlier observation about the semiotic work of signs and
symbols, how they provide a common referent that allows people to share
meaning. Thus the baristas at the coffee shop stand behind the coffee bar,
underneath the hand-lettered menu board, surrounded by an earthy brown and
green color scheme, wearing aprons to match, and banter with customers and
each other about the latest trends in pop culture. They would never talk about
cutlery, linens, wine lists, and the market price for fresh fish—as would the staff
of the deluxe restaurant. In both cases, the symbolic environment provides a
frame for employees’ conversations about their organizational experiences.
Integrators of Organizational Meaning Systems
Finally, suggest Rafaeli and Worline, symbols help integrate organization
members’ individual interpretations into a shared system of meanings. This
dynamic is vividly seen in corporate logos after two companies merge. When
NationsBank and Bank of America merged, the name Bank of America was
kept, but the new logo sported the typology and color scheme of the old
NationsBank. When Citicorp and Travelers merged to become Citi, the new logo
featured a red arc that recalled the famous Travelers red umbrella symbol. And
when Nextel and Sprint merged, the new entity retained the Sprint name, but the
new logo kept the Nextel color scheme. In fact, symbols can be linguistic as well
as visual. Slogans such as “A mind is a terrible thing to waste” (United Negro
College Fund), “Be all that you can be” (United States Army), and “Eat mor
chikin” (Chick-fil-A) not only convey the values of the respective organizations
to the public, but such slogans become symbolically important for organization
members and guide how they interpret life on the job.
Ashkanasy, Wilderom, and Peterson noted that “organizational contexts shape
the meanings and actions of organizational members” and thereby suggest
“ways in which organization leaders can influence individuals by influencing the
context of values within which they work.” [16] Because organizational
communication scholars who take a functionalist approach view culture as an
attribute an organization has, they believe leaders can attempt to shape it and
increase organizational effectiveness. Yet they acknowledge that cultural
dynamics are complex, and that group processes are powerful and not easy to
“manage.” Still, their view of organizational culture prompts them to look for
shared patterns. In this, they share the outlook of interpretive scholars whose
ideas are reviewed in the next section. The difference is that the interpretive
perspective sees culture as something an organization is, rather than an attribute
to be managed.
Interpretive Approaches
In the previous section we reviewed important scholarship on organizational
culture from a functionalist perspective, or the view that culture is one attribute
(among many) that an organization has. Since functionalism remains the
perspective from which the majority of organizational research is conducted, the
works of Peters and Waterman (“excellent cultures”), Deal and Kennedy
(“strong cultures”), Schein (culture-embedding mechanisms), and Trice and
Beyer (organizational rites and rituals) continue to be widely cited and
influential. Now, however, we turn to the growing body of interpretive research
that holds an organization is its culture.
Recall that functionalists who believe culture is something an organization has
often bring to their research an a priori theory to use as a framework for their
analyses. In contrast, interpretive researchers prefer to observe an organization
and then describe the culture on its own terms, rather than fit their observations
into a predetermined theory. For this reason, acquainting you with functionalist
theories was relatively easy since major theories are readily identifiable. But the
goal of interpretive research is describing cultures of individual organizations
rather than developing general theories (although as cases accumulate, general
theories can be proposed). So in this section on interpretive approaches to
organizational culture, our review will focus less on theories and more on how
research is conducted.
Doing Ethnography: Etic versus Emic
The idea of “culture” is taken from anthropology. Yet many organization and
management researchers who borrowed the concept of culture from
anthropology were less prone to adopt the methods of anthropology. As Sonja
Sackman noted, “The introduction of an anthropological concept into the domain
of management was fostered by the notion that it may have an influence on
organizational performance. Subsequently, methods were developed to
understand, assess, and change corporate culture in the hope for better
performance and, ultimately, for gaining a competitive advantage.” [17]
In anthropology, however, the suggestion that a researcher should “assess” a
people’s culture in order to “change” and “improve” it would be rejected. The
objective of anthropologists is ethnography, which means the “writing of
culture.” Anthropologists observe a culture, sometimes as participants and
sometimes as detached observers; they interview people, engage them in natural
conversation, record their stories, join in their cultural gatherings and rituals, and
take field notes.
Some organizational researchers have adopted these ethnographic methods, often
spending a year or more “living” in an organization—attending staff meetings,
going to company picnics, conversing with and interviewing employees and
managers, observing how people address each other and what they wear, noting
office layouts and employee bulletin boards, analyzing documents that range
from policy memos, missions statements, annual reports, and official websites to
office party announcements and employee service awards. Organizational
ethnographies have been written about—among many other cases—a police
department, [18] a university, [19] an office supply firm, [20] a television station, [21] a nursing home, [22] a geriatric ward, [23] a major accounting firm, [24] a
ballpark, [25] California Disneyland, [26] Tokyo Disneyland, [27] Amway
distributors, [28] family businesses, [29] social service organizations, [30] curling
clubs, [31] and fundamentalist churches. [32]
These studies reflect—even as research in the broader field of anthropology
reflects—different assumptions about “what is” culture. Various scholars
alternatively maintain that culture is essentially material, [33] behavioral, [34] adaptive, [35] communicative, [36] performative, [37] cognitive, [38] or
symbolic. [39] Ethnographers also have varying commitments in their research
strategies: one may prefer to observe a culture as a participant and another as a
nonparticipant; one may prefer to elicit in situ natural conversation and another
prefers to conduct structured interviews under controlled conditions. Despite
these differences, however, all agree that ethnography is an “insider” approach.
One influential framework for grasping the difference between “outsider” and
“insider” research was put forward by anthropologist Kenneth Pike. [40]
Scientists employ the term phonetics for the physical production of human sound
and phonemics for the cultural interpretation of sounds. Pike extended these
approaches to language and proposed two basic approaches—which he called
etic and emic—for studying culture. In the etic approach, researchers create
systems for classifying cultures. Researchers who take an emic approach study a
single culture to discern which classifications are meaningful to its members. To
illustrate the emic approach to ethnography, Pike observed the small local church
to which he belonged. [41] He discerned that worship services could be divided
into identifiable segments that were culturally meaningful to members.
Pike’s descriptions of the etic view and emic view are summarized [42] in Table
6.5. His etic/emic distinction has drawn both admirers and critics. [43] Scholars
today agree that any “insider/outsider” dichotomy in ethnography is too
simplistic. Rather, the two approaches are best seen as dialectical: emic research
contributes detailed cases that may aid in the development of stronger general
theories, while etic frameworks can help ethnographers sift through reams of
field data. Nevertheless, the emic/etic distinction offers a useful way to grasp the
basic issues of doing organizational ethnography.
Table 6.5 Pike's Etic and Emic Views of Culture
Etic View Emic View
Detached Observer's View Normal Participant's View
Alien view: units of analysis are structured by the analyst
Domestic view: research leads to
units of analysis that correspond to
those of native participants in the
cultural system
Cross-cultural view: units of analysis are derived by comparing
many cultural systems and then abstracting and synthesizing the
units into a generally applied single scheme
Monocultural view: units of
analysis are derived from the internal
functional relations of only one
cultural system at a time
Typological view: units of analysis lead to construction of a
classifying grid through which each cultural system can in turn be
seen as composed of units related to that grid; each new cultural
system is approached with units ready to be found in that system
Taxonomic view: research leads to
units of analysis that are only known
after each new cultural system has
been analyzed
Absolute view: analytical criteria are absolute or quasi-absolute,
relative to an a priori grid
Relative view: analytical criteria are
relative to the place that the units of
analysis have in the particular
cultural system
Measurable view: units of analysis are often measurable without
reference to the cultural system in which they are embedded
Contrastive view: units of analysis
are only discernible in reference to
the responses they elicit relative to
other units within the cultural system
Conceptual view: Systems are conceptual tools created by the
analyst so that the analyst can observe data from an alien view and
deduce the structuring of a cultural system
Discovery view: Systems are
discovered by the analyst as units
reacted to, or constituting the
reactions of, native participants in
events
Analyzing Organizational Talk
Pike advised would-be ethnographers on how to conduct field research. Not
being native to the cultures they observe, ethnographers experience a sensation
of “suddenly finding themselves in a series of events which they at first do not
comprehend.” But they “gradually learn to act as normal participants, as
through contrastive situations (or by receiving instruction) they gradually learn
to make the kinds of responses to these events which elicit appropriate reactions
by other members of the community.” [44] In other words, the ethnographers
learn to “talk the talk” so that, through the trial and error of engaging others and
taking stock of the responses, the underlying cultural system is discovered.
A contemporary of Pike, the sociolinguist Dell Hymes, argued that because talk
requires social interaction, finding out how people in a culture speak to each
other is a particularly powerful way to learn the assumptions that hold the
culture together. He used the term speech communities to denote a community
of people who share the same rules for interpreting talk. [45] Hymes used the
acronym SPEAKING, detailed in Figure 6.5, to illustrate all the things about a
community that are revealed by simple acts of talking. [46]
Figure 6.5 Hymes’s SPEAKING Acronym
Imagine you are an organizational ethnographer attending the weekly staff
meeting of a medium-sized corporation. Think what you might learn about its
culture from the following observations: The physical setting is a small
auditorium in which the company president and vice presidents are in leather
chairs seated on a dais facing the staff, who are seated classroom-style in folding
chairs. You can tell right away the scene, or “psychological setting,” of the
meeting is serious rather than lighthearted; employees speak in hushed tones
even before things start. Participants include the president, vice presidents,
managers, and staff, but not maintenance personnel. The ultimate end of the
meeting, as you discover by its conclusion, is for the corporate leadership to
announce the latest management initiatives and report news about sales and
production. Toward that end, the act sequence, which imparts form and order to
the meeting, starts with a call to order by the president, followed by reports from
each of the vice presidents, policy announcements and reminders, and
concluding remarks from the president. Questions from the audience are allowed
only when people on stage are finished speaking; hands must be raised and the
employees recognized. As you listen, it is clear that the key or tone of the
meeting is fairly formal: the vice presidents, for example, are introduced by their
titles and not by their first names, while the company president enforces Robert’s
Rules of Order. Because the instrumentality of a sound system is used, talking
is dominated by those on stage who have access to microphones. Norms, or
social rules, for the meeting include business dress, use of formal titles, and
adherence to the published agenda. Beside each agenda item is the time allocated
for that topic. Finally, most of the speaking follows the conventions or genres of
the “business report” (the presentations by the vice presidents) and the “pep talk”
(the concluding remarks by the president).
One ethnographic research tradition, called ethnography of communication
(EC), is of particular interest to communication scholars. A well-known
approach to EC is the speech codes theory proposed by Gerry Philipsen. The
theory holds, “Wherever there is a distinctive culture, there is to be found a
distinctive speech code,” and “a speech code implicates a culturally distinctive
psychology, sociology, and rhetoric.” [47] The latter proposition means that a
culture’s talk expresses its underlying assumptions about the nature of people
(psychology), how they should be linked in social relations (sociology), and how
people should act symbolically (rhetoric) as persons worthy of social relations.
For example, an organizational ethnography of a university found that faculty
and administrators had different cultures. [48] Faculty used the speech code
“talking things through” to express their taken-for-granted assumption that
“colleagues” (the nature of people) can best be “peers” (how people should be
socially linked) and can best affirm (symbolically) each other as “individuals.”
On the other hand, administrators employed the speech code “put it in writing”
and tacitly assumed that people had rights (the nature of people) and
responsibilities (how people should be socially linked) that were best achieved
by (symbolically) codifying these in writing. For-profit businesses are just as
likely to have their own lingo. Perhaps the company is referred to as a “family”
(the nature of people) and employees as “associates” who are “customer
oriented” (how people should relate to one another), while its symbolic resources
are on display in its many organizational rites and rituals.
Analyzing Organizational Texts
Organizations can generate staggering amounts of written material. These range
from mission statements and policy manuals that serve as permanent references
to a vast array of everyday documents that range from sales proposals to press
releases. Loizos Heracleous argued that everyday texts such as memos and e-
mails are actually “closer to spoken discourse than written text” because they
put spoken understandings in writing. [49] Unlike other forms of writing—books,
stories, letters—whose interpretations are open ended, organizational documents
are (like speech) intended to convey a single meaning and coordinate collective
action. Since most research on everyday texts in organizational settings employs
rhetorical analysis, genre analysis, or discourse analysis, we will briefly review
each approach. [50]
Rhetorical Analysis
In Chapter 4, we encountered the rhetorical tradition in communication theory.
This tradition, the oldest in communication, began more than 2,300 years ago
when the Greek teacher Aristotle proposed a system for classifying “the
available means of persuasion.” [51] Today, scholars analyze rhetorics from
political speechmaking and consumer advertising to television broadcasts and
weblogs. And because organizations are such an essential feature of modern life,
scholarly interest in organizational rhetoric is increasing.
A rhetorical analysis of an organizational text would attempt to answer the
questions, “Why (or why not) was this text persuasive in its organizational
setting? Why (or why not) did the text persuade others to agree and act on that
agreement?” Thus how did the company press release succeed in bolstering the
organization’s public image? Why did the annual report make stockholders
happy? Why does the company mission statement achieve broad agreement
among managers and employees about the values of the organization? How does
the monthly company newsletter attempt to bring employees into alignment with
managerial interests? One scholar analyzed the rhetoric of a computer user’s
manual produced by the information technology department of her university.
While the text was only moderately effective at giving instructions, its rhetoric
helped smooth over interdepartmental turf battles and reassured users that the
new computer system was a progressive move. [52]
Mary Hoffman and Debra Ford have defined organizational rhetoric as “the
strategic use of symbols by organizations to influence the thoughts, feelings, and
behaviors of audiences important to the operation of the organization.” [53] They
broadly identified five rhetorical situations—or situations that call for a
rhetorical response—that occur in organizations: create and maintain identity,
manage issues, manage risks, manage crises, manage members. To attain their
goals in given rhetorical situations, organizations must adopt rhetorical strategies
that are appropriate for the different audiences they must reach. In turn, these
audiences may range from the general public and local communities, to
customers and clients, policymakers and the media, vendors and suppliers,
investors and stockholders, managers and employees.
The rhetorical tradition in communication theory affords many avenues for
analyzing organizational texts. Classical and neoclassical rhetorical theory
remains an enduring tradition in Western universities. But as Table 6.6
illustrates, numerous modern approaches to rhetorical analysis can be applied to
organizational activities.
Table 6.6 Approaches to Organizational Rhetoric
Approach Basic Principles Organizational
Examples
Neoclassical
Builds on Aristotelian and classical theories of rhetoric to identify how
the text is put together and what proofs and arguments the
speaker/writer uses to persuade the audience
Bureaucratic
memo from the
Holocaust [54]
Metaphor
Investigates how the text uses metaphors, a device that explains a new
object by likening it to a familiar one, to draw the audience along to the
conclusions of the speaker/writer
DaimlerChrysler
merger [55]
California
Disneyland [56]
Narrative Investigates how the text uses stories as devices to draw the audience
along to the conclusions of the speaker/writer
Teachers going
on strike [57]
Fantasy
Theme
Builds on the symbolic convergence theory of Ernest Bormann, which
holds that audiences are persuaded as they fantasize with the
speaker/writer and come to share a rhetorical vision
Alcoholics
Anonymous [58]
Women
managers [59]
Collective
bargaining [60]
Generic
Certain situations elicit certain audience expectations for a certain
rhetoric until the rhetoric becomes an established genre (e.g., eulogies,
apologia, concession speeches)
University
mission
statements [61]
Corporate
apology
statements [62]
Ideological
Goes beyond the surface structure of the text (e.g., arrangement, style,
types of proofs) and discovers the assumptions, values, and beliefs that
underlie the text
Starbucks coffee
shop layouts [63]
Dramatistic
Builds on the rhetorical theories of Kenneth Burke to identify how the
text constructs the elements of a drama: act, agent, agency, scene, and
purpose
National Park
interpretive
programs [64]
Cluster
Builds on the rhetorical theories of Kenneth Burke to identify key
subjects in a text and then chart what key words and symbols cluster
around those subjects
Church of
Scientology
public relations [65]
Scholarship today is exploring new areas that reach beyond the traditional
concerns of the Western rhetorical tradition. A growing body of literature
investigates visual rhetorics and the ways that images make arguments and
persuade audiences. [66] Non-Western rhetorics, which may base persuasion on
fundamentally different forms of argumentation than those in Western tradition,
have likewise inspired much scholarship. [67] Certainly, organizational texts
created outside North America and Europe are rightfully analyzed according to
the rhetorics of the cultural traditions that produced them.
Genre Analysis
As we saw in the Rhetorical Analysis section, one approach (among those listed
in Table 6.6) is generic criticism. Sonja Foss explained that such criticism “is
rooted in the assumption that certain types of situations provoke similar needs
and expectations in audiences and thus call for particular kinds of rhetoric.”
Thus the generic critic “seeks to discover commonalities in rhetorical patterns
across recurring situations” as a type of speech or text becomes a genre with
established conventions. [68] Scholars have analyzed a vast array of genres, from
funeral eulogies and political concession speeches to romance novels and
scientific articles. As such, generic criticism “departs from the traditional
emphasis on a single speaker or speech,” observed Carl Burgchardt. “Indeed, to
be done properly, genre criticism must examine a number of speeches or other
forms of discourse in order to draw conclusions about categories of rhetoric.” [69] Genre analysis is of special interest in studying organizational texts for three
reasons.
1. Unlike (for example) political oratory where the focus is on one person,
organizational discourses occur with a context of collective action. In fact,
organizational texts are often produced in collaboration. Thus the nature of
organizational texts already lends itself to studying multiple texts of the
same genre, either across organizations or within the same organization.
2. Since organizations must achieve continuity over time, even while their
members come and go, organizational life is replete with recurring
situations. This creates a fertile ground for generic writing that follows
established conventions—mission statements, annual reports, press
releases, advertisements, policy manuals, user manuals, safety bulletins,
legal disclaimers, executive memos, company websites, employee
newsletters, and interoffice e-mails, just to name a few.
3. Genres become established when they prove effective in dealing with
recurring organizational situations. That means an organization’s genres
point us to situations that keep cropping up with the solutions that members
have collectively validated.
Carolyn Miller and Jack Selzer analyzed the texts of a Nebraska engineering
firm. In sending proposals for two very different Illinois transportation projects
—an airport expansion and a highway traffic study—the firm included
transmittal letters with strikingly similar language. In both letters, the Nebraska
company emphasized its “commitment” to Illinois by recently building a “major
office” there, along with its intention to maintain “close” relations with clients
“throughout the duration of the project.” Proposal transmittal letters, then,
became a genre for dealing with the recurring situation of out-of-state projects
and reflected company members’ collectively validated solution of conveying
“commitment” and “closeness” through a “major” and “enduring” out-of-state
presence. Miller and Selzer advised researchers to find genres in organizational
texts by (1) comparing documents with their accompanying internal directives,
(2) comparing multiple documents from the same organization and checking for
language that recurs on different occasions, (3) examining any written guidelines
the organization has issued for its writers, (4) checking for internal
correspondence about a project or any marginalia and notes to writers that may
appear on documents, and (5) interviewing the writers. [70]
Later, Miller developed a theory of the rhetorical community, which supplies the
cultural basis for genres. Such communities arise and are sustained as members
agree on a common narrative or story, use metaphors to bridge their differences,
and establish communicative conventions that facilitate collective action. [71] Thus the Nebraska engineering firm generated a narrative about out-of-state
projects (“We are committed to Illinois and close relations for the duration of
your project”), employed a metaphor (a major office as a stand-in for the
headquarters office) to bridge differences between the central office and field
personnel, and developed the genre of the transmittal letter to structure joint
actions.
Discourse Analysis
While discourse analysis is an established discipline, organizational discourse
analysis is a relatively new area. Not surprisingly, then, “organizational
discourse is poorly defined.” Since analyses draw on “numerous theoretical
antecedents, it has few clear parameters and, as a field of study, it incorporates
a variety of diverse perspectives and methodologies reflecting its multi-
disciplinary origins.” [72] Matts Alvesson observed that organizational discourse
research and culture research often investigate the same phenomena, such as
organizational stories, myths, narratives, texts, rhetoric, and ritual. The
difference between the two approaches, he asserted, is over the question of
which comes first, language or culture? Organizational discourse analysts
assume that meaning is generated by language; as organization members use
language to identify things and then to categorize them and relate them to one
another, they construct social reality. Thus language is the bearer of meaning
through which reality is created and interpreted. Conversely, organizational
culture analysts assume that language reveals only existing, underlying cultural
meanings, which organization members take for granted and may not express in
discourse. Thus people are the bearers of meaning through which reality is
created and interpreted. [73]
One scholar who has applied principles of discourse analysis to everyday written
documents is Glenn Stillar. [74] He noted that language constructs meaning
through ideational resources since a text is “about something”; through
interpersonal resources, since a text is “to and from someone”; and through
textual resources, since a text has structure and organization that permit cohesion
and coherence. Through ideational resources, the writer of a text uses language
to represent the type of social activity being described: How and by whom is
action taken? Who is acted upon? What are the circumstances and time
perspective? Then, through interpersonal resources, the writer represents the
relationship between author and reader: What are their respective roles? What is
their orientation to each other? Who has authority? Who has obligations?
Finally, through textual resources the writer gives the text coherence by
employing the rules of the particular language in which the text is written—for
example, in English by using its rules for grammar, capitalization, punctuation,
paragraphing, and the like.
In a particularly striking application of this method, Mark Ward analyzed the
discourse of a bureaucratic memo from the Holocaust. He showed how the
writers, who proposed technical “improvements” for gassing victims, employed
ideational resources to construct a social reality in which “thinking” and
“sensing” were deemphasized and only “doing” and “being” mattered. Similarly,
the writers’ use of interpersonal resources is notable for the heavy use of modal
verbs. Thus the writers constantly shifted their killing actions out of the present
and into the past (has been, have been, etc.) or the future (will be, could be, etc.).
The writers further distanced themselves from the killing because, in the nearly
three dozen sentences that described these actions, the writers were never the
subjects (actors) of the sentences. [75]
Analyzing Organizational Stories
Interest in the stories that organization members tell, including the official stories
promoted by management and the informal stories circulated by employees, was
sparked by the work of Michael Pacanowsky and Nick O’Donnell-Trujillo. [76] In a landmark 1983 article, they noted that, as an alternative to the systems
theory (see Chapter 4) that then dominated organizational communication
research, the concept of organizational culture was quickly gaining ground. Yet
researchers at the time generally viewed organizational culture as static and
structural—or were satisfied simply to identify features of organizational culture
without digging deeper to discover the underlying cultural processes that
produced, sustained, and transformed these features. To address this gap,
Pacanowsky and O’Donnell-Trujillo proposed a new way of looking at
organizational culture—as something that members perform.
At the time Pacanowsky and O’Donnell-Trujillo were writing, the works of
sociologist Erving Goffman and anthropologist Victor Turner had gained wide
circulation among many communication scholars. As we saw in Chapter 4,
Goffman applied a dramaturgical metaphor to social interaction. People in
conversation, he surmised, take a role—perhaps the peacemaker, the initiator, or
the counselor—and then “play to the audience” by communicating in ways
calculated to gain social acceptance. [77] Turner developed the concept of
“performative anthropology.” While many anthropologists believed that rituals
were merely outward expressions of deeper cultural processes, Turner held that
rituals create culture by shaping how its members know the world. Ritual, he
argued, “actually creates, or recreates, the categories through which men [sic]
perceive reality [as rituals shape] the axioms underlying the structure of society
and the laws of natural and moral orders.” [78]
Pacanowsky and O’Donnell-Trujillo applied the theories of Goffman and Turner
to organizational cultures. They noted that organizational performances are
interactional (“always socially enacted by multiple participants”), contextual
(“situationally embedded in the very reality they bring to completion”), episodic
(“nameable as distinct events” such as a budget meeting or annual job review),
and improvisational (“the lines of organizational members are not tightly
scripted”). [79] Next, they proposed that organizational performances may be
categorized into four types of rituals: personal rituals performed by individuals
(e.g., the manager starts each morning by opening the mail), task rituals
performed as a consequence of being an organization member (e.g., a police
officer begins each pullover with “May I see your driver’s license?”), social
rituals performed by groups (e.g., going for beer every Friday night), and
organizational rituals performed collectively (e.g., the annual company picnic
and softball game). But what, exactly, is exchanged in these ritualistic
performances that has the power to create, sustain, and transform organizational
culture? Pacanowsky and O’Donnell-Trujillo suggested four answers:
storytelling, socializing, politics, and enculturation.
1. Organization stories that create culture include personal stories that
members tell of themselves to embellish their organizational identities,
collegial stories that members share about their “real” experiences of
organizational life, and corporate stories that management tells to
substantiate and glorify its ideology.
2. Socializing creates culture as members ritually exchange courtesies (e.g.,
morning greetings), pleasantries (e.g., everyday small talk), sociabilities
(e.g., joking, gossiping, griping, and talking shop), and privacies (e.g.,
confessing, consoling, supporting, criticizing).
3. Political rituals in organizational culture include performances that show
personal strength; recruit allies; bargain; and attack, defend, or concede.
4. Rituals of enculturation, which impart social knowledge required for
competent organizational membership, include performances of orientation
and initiation in which newcomers “learn the ropes” of accepted roles and
procedures.
Pacanowsky and O’Donnell-Trujillo’s proposals for analyzing the processes of
organizational culture are summarized here.
Table 6.7 Taxonomy of Organizational Performances
Traits of Performances Types of Performances What is
Exchanged
Interactional: enacted by
multiple participants
Contextual: embedded in
situations
Personal rituals: performed by members to enhance
their organizational identities
Task rituals: performed by members as a part of
Storytelling
Personal stories
Collegial stories
Corporate
stories
Socializing
Courtesies
Pleasantries
Sociabilities
Privacies
Politics
Show of
personal
Episodic: nameable as a
distinct event
Improvisational: not tightly
scripted
being a member
Social rituals: performed by groups
Organizational rituals: performed collectively
strength
Recruitment of
allies
Bargaining
Attack
Defense
Concession
Enculturation
Learning the
role
Orientation
Initiation
Learning the
ropes
Pacanowsky put his methods into practice when he spent a nine-month
sabbatical observing the culture of W. L. Gore & Associates, a sporting goods
manufacturer. [80] There he found performances, rituals, and stories galore that
created and sustained an organizational culture that passionately prized
decentralization to a degree unusual in corporate America. Since the 1980s,
many scholars have investigated organizations through the lens of ritual and
performance. O’Donnell-Trujillo published studies of a police department, [81] a
baseball park, [82] and the John F. Kennedy assassination site in Dallas, Texas. [83] A book-length ethnography by Gideon Kunda plumbed everyday rituals in
the engineering department of a large American high-tech corporation—where
corporate stories that ostensibly promoted collegiality subtly brought engineers
under greater control. [84] Stephen Banks observed commercial flight attendants’
ritual performances of onboard public service announcements; through these
rituals, attendants managed the tensions between controlling and serving
passengers and between themselves and the cockpit crew. [85] Scholarship on
organizational storytelling has taken a critical and postmodern turn through the
work of David Boje whose studies include an office supply firm, [86] the Disney
Corporation, [87] a Nike shoe factory, [88] the Enron scandal, [89] the Ronald
McDonald mascot, [90] and Walmart. [91] His work brings us, then, to a review of
critical and postmodern approaches to organizational culture.
Critical and Postmodern Approaches
In Chapter 4 on modern theories of organizational communication, we learned of
critical and postmodern approaches to the field. When scholars from these two
traditions turn to organizational culture, they often adopt methods discussed
earlier—particularly rhetorical analysis, genre analysis, discourse analysis, and
story analysis. But they do so based on their own ontological, epistemological,
and axiological assumptions. So let’s review those assumptions—that is, the
assumptions that critical and postmodern scholars bring to the study of
organizational cultures.
Critical researchers investigate how organizational cultures promote reification
and universalization of managerial interests. Because culture becomes ingrained
and taken for granted, it is a powerful means for making an organization’s
dominant interests seem natural, normal, self-evident, and beyond questioning—
until these interests are taken as the only legitimate interests. Further, critical
scholarship traces the ways that the managerial interests reflect the larger
structures of power and domination within the surrounding society. At the same
time, critical research explores how organizational processes of reification and
universalization have silenced the voices of marginalized groups—workers,
women, people of color, and others. Ultimately, a critical approach to
organizational culture seeks to recover and emancipate these marginalized
voices, by exposing processes by which domination occurs and thus reopening
for discussion the possibilities that such domination has until now foreclosed.
Postmodern scholars hold that people’s view of “reality” is preconditioned by
the larger historical and cultural discourses that surround and shape them. And
since these discourses are ever changing and competing, then “reality” too is in
constant flux. Since this same principle applies to organizational realities,
postmodern scholars say that organizations are decentered (members’ intentions
are not the main driving force since people are preconditioned by language),
fragmented (organizations are temporary responses to temporary realities,
buffeted over time by competing discourses that produce fragility rather than
unity), and overdetermined (members are shaped by competing discourses so
that their organizational identities are unstable). In tracing these phenomena
through an organization’s culture, postmodern researchers bring to their work a
commitment to the centrality of discourse. Each organization is a “text” that can
be “read” or deconstructed to reveal the underlying historical and cultural
metanarratives that are reflected in the organization. Postmodern scholars take a
particular interest in tracing the formation of discourses about knowledge and
power, laying these bare and thus reopening them to scrutiny and discussion.
To see where critical and postmodern scholarship fit in—and as an appropriate
way to conclude this part of the chapter—we return to Eisenberg and Riley’s
overview of organizational culture research. They surveyed the literature on
organizational culture perspective and found seven distinct themes summarized
in Table 6.8. [92] These themes variously theorize culture as climate,
effectiveness, cognition, identity, symbolism and performance, critique, and text.
The first three—culture as climate, effectiveness, or cognition—are often
explored from a functionalist perspective. On the other hand, the three themes of
culture as cognition, identity, or symbolism and performance often attract
interpretive researchers. The last three themes—culture as symbolism and
performance, critique, and text—often inform critical or postmodern studies of
organizations.
Table 6.8 Major Themes in Organizational Culture Research
Culture
theorized Description
Research
informed by...
as...
Climate
Some scholars see climate as the enduring “personality” traits of an
organization, while others see climate as a composite of individual
members’ perceptions of a workplace.
Functional
perspective
Effectiveness
This approach holds that organizational culture is a set of values and
practices, often established by founders and leaders, that can be
manipulated or changed by management to improve performance.
Functional
perspective
Cognition
In this approach, organizational culture is seen as a common system of
meanings that frame the ways members cognize their work
environment so that coordinated action can occur.
Functional and
interpretive
perspectives
Identity
Early research in this vein examined how individuals bring their own
national cultural identities into an organization; more recent research
looks at how people construct organizational identities.
Interpretive
perspective
Symbolism
and
performance
In this approach, organizational culture is seen as produced and
reproduced via symbols (e.g., rituals, stories, ways of speaking) that
enable members to share meanings and enact them.
Interpretive,
critical, and
postmodern
perspectives
Critique
This approach draws on critical and postmodern theory to trace how
societal discourses are manifested in organizational cultures and how
dominant interests marginalize other voices.
Critical and
postmodern
perspectives
Text
Scholars who take this approach may use literary theories to analyze
organizational documents, “read” spoken discourse like a “text,” or
construct a narrative of an organization’s culture.
Critical and
postmodern
perspectives
Thus we have seen so far in this chapter how organizational climate and culture
research was first popularized with a functionalist emphasis on how these
attributes can be “managed” to enhance organizational performance. Since then,
however, the field has grown to also encompass interpretive, critical, and
postmodern perspectives. Each adds in its own way to our understanding of
organizations. Joanna Martin has even proposed a “three-perspective view” of
organizational culture that combines elements of the different approaches. [93] At
any given time, she noted, an organization manifests the three dimensions of
integration (what organization members share), differentiation (how members
inhabit different values, practices, and subcultures that must be negotiated), and
fragmentation (how members forge temporary and issue-specific consensus
amid organizational change, confusion, and ambiguity). A comprehensive look
at an organization, then, can profitably investigate what features of
organizational life manifest order and stability, what features must be negotiated
through members’ communicative interactions, and what features tend toward
disorder and must be constantly renegotiated.
Now, in the remainder of this chapter, we turn to another question that is
increasingly urgent in our globalized economy: What happens when an
organizational culture encounters other organizational cultures?
KEY TAKEAWAY
The functional approach sees culture as something an
organization has and, particularly if managed well by leaders,
tends toward order and stability. The interpretive approach sees
culture as something an organization is and, because it emerges
from members’ interactions and sensemaking, tends toward order
and stability. The critical approach sees culture as something an
organization has, but because its culture reflects larger societal
discourses that legitimize dominant interests and marginalize
others, its culture tends toward conflict. The postmodern
approach sees culture as something an organization is, because
its culture emerges as a response to the constant flux of
competing societal discourses, but regards its culture as unstable
since competing discourses produce multiple social realities.
Interest in organizational culture was sparked by two books,
Corporate Cultures and In Search of Excellence, both published
in 1982. In the former, Deal and Kennedy described attributes of
“strong” cultures that managers could foster; in the latter, Peters
and Waterman listed traits of “excellent” cultures. Among
scholars, Schein’s functionalist model of culture has been
influential. He held that organizational cultures are manifested in
three levels: basic assumptions, espoused values, and
behaviors/artifacts. Leaders can employ culture-embedding
mechanisms to shape an effective culture. Trice and Beyer
observed that an organization’s rituals—of passage, degradation,
enhancement, renewal, conflict reduction, and integration—are a
powerful lens to analyze its culture, as effective tools for
managers to change culture. Rafaeli and Worline theorized that
organizational symbols serve four functions: reflecting
organizational culture, shaping that culture, framing talk about
organizational experience, and integrating organizational
meanings. Leaders can change culture by manipulating symbols.
While functionalist research often interprets organizational
cultures based on preconceived theories, interpretive research
tries to describe a culture on its own terms. Pike described these
two approaches respectively as etic and emic views of cultural
research. Much interpretive research is done through
ethnography, or the “writing of culture,” as the analyst observes
and/or participates in an organizational culture, takes field notes,
collects artifacts, and interview organization members.
Organizational ethnographers have given close attention to
analyzing organizational talk, texts, and stories. Methods include
rhetorical analysis, genre analysis, and discourse analysis.
Critical and postmodern scholars of organizational culture may
also employ ethnographic research to elicit data for rhetorical,
genre, and discourse analysis. However, they bring to the
analyses their own ontological, epistemological, and axiological
assumptions (which are reviewed in Chapter 4). Unlike
interpretive scholars who believe organizational culture tends
toward order and stability, critical and postmodern scholars
believe it tends toward conflict and instability. Critical scholarship
looks for ways that organizational cultures legitimize managerial
interests and marginalize other voices. Postmodern scholarship
looks for ways that multiple competing discourses create
organizational fragility and fragmentation.
EXERCISES
1. Think of an organization to which you belong—perhaps your
place of work, or a community, or the college or university you
attend. Would you describe its culture as “strong” (according to
Deal and Kennedy) and “excellent” (according to Peters and
Waterman)? Describe (according to Schein’s model) its basic
assumptions, espoused values, and noteworthy behaviors and
artifacts. Are there conflicts between its unspoken assumptions
and the values it publicly espouses? Have the organization’s
leaders employed any of Schein’s mechanisms for influencing the
culture? Describe (according to Trice and Beyer) its important
rituals. What do they reveal about its culture? Finally, think of the
organization’s major symbol—its logo, perhaps. How does it
(according to Rafaeli and Worline) both reflect and shape the
organization’s culture?
2. Think of the same organization you considered in Exercise 1. If
Collegial Stories:
Corporate Stories:
Culture-Embedding Mechanisms:
Differentiation :
Emic:
you did ethnographic observation of this organization from
(according to Pike) an emic view, what might you hope to
observe? That is, what organizational talk, texts, and stories do
you think could be most revealing about its culture? Why?
3. As in the first two exercises, think of the same organization. Could
a critical analysis reveal that its culture legitimizes the most
dominant interests, by making them seem natural and normal,
while marginalizing other interests that struggle to be heard?
Why? Could a postmodern analysis reveal that the organization’s
culture, which on the surface seems unified and stable, is actually
fragmented into multiple subcultures that each see the
organization differently?
KEY TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
Stories that organization members share of their “real” experiences of organizational life.
Stories that management tells to substantiate and glorify its ideology.
Mechanisms used by leaders (e.g., what they reward, who they promote) to embed desired traits in an organizational culture.
In Martin’s “three-perspective” theory, those aspects of organizational culture that are formed as members inhabit different values, practices, and subcultures that must be negotiated.
As described by Pike, an “insider” approach that describes a
Ethnography:
Ethnography Of Communication (EC):
Etic :
Fragmentation :
Genre :
Integration :
Personal Stories:
Speech Codes:
Speech Communities:
culture on its own terms and allows units of analysis to arise from the internal relations of that culture.
Literally “the writing of culture,” a method for researching and describing a culture by observing and participating in it.
An ethnographic research tradition that analyzes a culture’s communication patterns in order to elicit the underlying cultural assumptions the communication encodes.
As described by Pike, an “outsider” approach that brings to the analysis of a culture a preconceived classification system derived from observations of many cultures.
In Martin’s “three-perspective” theory, those aspects of organizational culture on which members must forge temporary and issue- specific consensus amid organizational change, confusion, and ambiguity.
A type of speech or text that, through recurring use in similar situations, has established conventions; organizational genres include annual reports, policy manuals, mission statements, and so forth.
In Martin’s “three-perspective” theory, those aspects of organizational culture that members share.
Stories that organization members tell about themselves to embellish their organizational identities.
Patterned ways of speaking that encode a culture’s assumptions about the nature of people (psychology), how they should be socially linked (sociology), and the symbolic actions (rhetoric) that constitute people in social relations.
According to Hymes, a community that shares the same rules for interpreting speech.
[1] Keyton, J. (2005). Communication and organizational culture.
Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage, p. 67.
[2] Smircich, L., & Calas, M. B. (1987). Organizational culture: A critical
assessment. In F. M. Jablin, L. L. Putnam, K. H. Roberts & L. W. Porter
(Eds.), Handbook of organizational communication: An interdisciplinary
perspective (pp. 228–263). Newbury Park, CA: Sage.
[3] Deetz, S. (2001). Conceptual foundations. In F. M. Jablin & L. L.
Putnam (Eds.), The new handbook of organizational communication:
Advances in theory, research, and methods (pp. 3–46). Thousand Oaks,
CA: Sage. See also Deetz, S. (1994). Representative practices and the
political analysis of corporations. In B. Kovacic (Ed.), Organizational
communication: New perspectives (pp. 209–242). Albany: State
University of New York Press.
[4] Deal, T. E., & Kennedy, A. A. (1982). Corporate cultures: The rites and
rituals of corporate life. Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley; Peters, T. J., &
Waterman, R. H. (1982). In search of excellence: Lessons from
America’s best-run companies. New York, NY: Harper & Row.
[5] Eisenberg, E. M., & Riley, P. (2001). Organizational culture. In F. M.
Jablin & L. L. Putnam (Eds.), The new handbook of organizational
communication: Advances in theory, research, and methods (pp. 291–
322). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage, p. 291.
[6] Schein, E. H. (1985). Organizational culture and leadership. San
Francisco, CA: Jossey-Bass.
[7] Schein, E. H. (2004). Organizational culture and leadership (3rd ed.).
San Francisco, CA: Jossey-Bass, p. 17.
[8] Schein, E. (2004). Organizational Culture and Leadership. (3rd ed.).
San Francisco, CA: Jossey-Bass.
[9] Trice, H. M., & Beyer, J. M. (1984). Studying organizational cultures
through rites and ceremonials. Academy of Management Review, 9, 653–
669.
[10] Trice, H. M., & Beyer, J. M. (1984). Studying organizational cultures
through rites and ceremonials. Academy of Management Review, 9, 653–
669, p. 665.
[11] Trice, H. M., & Beyer, J. M. (1984). Studying organizational cultures
through rites and ceremonials. Academy of Management Review, 9, 653–
669, p. 666.
[12] Fairhurst, G. T., & Saar, R. A. (1996). The art of framing: Managing
the language of leadership. San Francisco, CA: Jossey-Bass.
[13] Fisher, D. (2000). Communication in organizations (2nd ed.). New
York, NY: West. Fisher, D. (2000). Communication in organizations (2nd
ed.). New York, NY: West.
[14] Rafaeli, A., & Worline, M. (2000). Symbols in organizational culture.
In N. M. Ashkanasy, C. P. M. Wilderom, & M. F. Peterson (Eds.),
Handbook of organizational culture and climate (pp. 71–84). Thousand
Oaks, CA: Sage, p. 73.
[15] Rafaeli, A., & Worline, M. (2000). Symbols in organizational culture.
In N. M. Ashkanasy, C. P. M. Wilderom, & M. F. Peterson (Eds.),
Handbook of organizational culture and climate (pp. 71–84). Thousand
Oaks, CA: Sage, p. 80.
[16] Ashkanasy, N. M., Wilderom, C. P. M., & Peterson, M. F. (2000).
Handbook of organizational culture and climate. Thousand Oaks, CA:
Sage, p. 12.
[17] Sackman, S. J. (2000). Culture and performance. In N. M.
Ashkanasy, C. P. M. Wilderom, & M. F. Peterson (Eds.), Handbook of
organizational culture and climate (pp. 188–224). Thousand Oaks, CA:
Sage, p. 188.
[18] Pacanowsky, M. E. (1982). Organizational identities as
organizational products: Presentation of self among Valley View police.
Communicator, 12, 18–34.
[19] Baxter, L. A. (1993). “Talking things through” and “putting it in
writing”: Two codes of communication in an academic institution. Journal
of Applied Communication Research, 21, 313–326.
[20] Boje, D. M. (1991). The storytelling organization: A study of story
performance in an office-supply firm. Administrative Science Quarterly,
36, 106–126.
[21] Carbaugh, D. (1988). Cultural terms and tensions in the speech at a
television station. Western Journal of Speech Communication, 52, 216–
237.
[22] Deutschman, M. T. (2005). An ethnographic study of nursing home
culture to define organizational realities of culture change. Journal of
Health and Human Services Administration, 28, 246–281.
[23] Fairhurst, E. (1983). Organizational rules and the accomplishment of
nursing work on geriatric wards. Journal of Management Studies, 20,
315–332.
[24] Kornberger, M., Justesen, L., & Mouritsen, J. (2011). “When you
make manager, we put a big mountain in front of you”: An ethnography of
managers in a Big 4 accounting firm. Accounting, Organizations, and
Society, 36, 514–533.
[25] Trujillo, N. (1992). Interpreting (the work and talk of) baseball:
Perspectives on baseball park culture. Western Journal of
Communication, 56, 350–371.
[26] Smith, R. C., & Eisenberg, E. M. (1987). Conflict at Disneyland: A
root-metaphor analysis. Communication Monographs, 54, 367–380.
[27] Raz, A. E. (1999). The hybridization of organizational culture in
Tokyo Disneyland. Studies in Cultures, Organizations, and Societies, 5,
235–264.
[28] Pratt, M. G. (2000). The good, the bad, and the ambivalent:
Managing identification among Amway distributors. Administrative
Science Quarterly, 45, 456–493.
[29] Haugh, H. M., & McKee, L. (2003). “It’s just like a family”: Shared
values in the family firm. Community, Work & Family, 6, 141–158.
[30] Kosnya, K. A., & Eakin, J. M. (2008). The hazards of helping: Work,
mission and risk in non-profit social service organizations. Health, Risk &
Society, 10, 149–166.
[31] Mair, H. (2009). Club life: Third place and shared leisure in rural
Canada. Leisure Sciences, 31, 450–465.
[32] Ward, M., Sr. (2010). “I was saved at an early age”: An ethnography
of fundamentalist speech and cultural performance. Journal of
Communication and Religion, 33, 108–144.
[33] Herskovits, M. J. (1955). Cultural anthropology. New York, NY:
Knopf.
[34] Harris, M. (1968). The rise of cultural theory. New York, NY: Crowell.
[35] Hall, E. T. (1959). The silent language. Garden City, NY: Doubleday.
Hall, E. T. (1959). The silent language. Garden City, NY: Doubleday.
[36] See Keesing, R. M. (1974). Theories of culture. Annual Review of
Anthropology, 3, 73–97.
[37] Turner, V. W. (1986). The anthropology of performance. New York,
NY: PAJ.
[38] Quinn, N., & Holland, D. (1987). Culture and cognition. In D. Holland
& N. Quinn (Eds.), Cultural models in language and thought (pp. 3–40).
Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press.
[39] Geertz, C. (1973). On the interpretation of culture. New York, NY:
Basic Books.
[40] Pike, K. L. (1971). Language in relation to a unified theory of the
structures of human behavior (2nd ed.). The Hague, Netherlands:
Mouton.
[41] Pike, K. L. (1971). Language in relation to a unified theory of the
structures of human behavior (2nd ed.). The Hague, Netherlands:
Mouton.
[42] Pike, K. L. (1962). With heart and mind: A personal synthesis of
scholarship and devotion. Grand Rapids, MI: Eerdmans, pp. 36–38.
[43] Headland, T. N., Pike, K. L., & Harris, M. (Eds.). (1990). Emics and
etics: The insider/outsider debate: Frontiers of anthropology, Vol. 7.
Newbury Park, CA: Sage.
[44] Pike, K. L. (1962). With heart and mind: A personal synthesis of
scholarship and devotion. Grand Rapids, MI: Eerdmans, p. 38.
[45] Hymes, D. (1962). The ethnography of speaking. In T. Gladwin & W.
C. Sturtevant (Eds.), Anthropology and human behavior (pp. 13–563).
Washington, DC: Anthropological Society of Washington.
[46] Hymes, D. (1974). Foundation in sociolinguistics: An ethnographic
approach. Philadelphia, PA: University of Pennsylvania Press.
[47] Philipsen, G., Coutu, L. M., & Covarrubias, P. (2005). Speech codes
theory: Restatement, revisions, and response to criticisms. In W. B.
Gudykunst (Ed.), Theorizing about intercultural communication (pp. 55–
68). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
[48] Baxter, L. A. (1993). “Talking things through” and “putting it in
writing”: Two codes of communication in an academic institution. Journal
of Applied Communication Research, 21, 313–326.
[49] Heracleous, L. (2006). Discourse, interpretation, organization.
Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press, p. 6.
[50] Berkenkotter, C. A. (2002). Analyzing everyday texts in
organizational settings. In L. J. Gurak & M. M. Lay (Eds.), Research in
technical communication (pp. 47–66). Westport, CT: Praeger.
[51] Aristotle. (2007). On rhetoric: A theory of civil discourse (2nd ed.).
(G. A. Kennedy, Trans.). New York, NY: Oxford University Press.
[52] Mirel, B. (1988). The politics of usability: The organizational functions
of an in-house manual. In S. Doheny-Farina (Ed.), Effective
documentation: What we have learned from research (pp. 277–297).
Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
[53] Hoffman, M. F., & Ford, D. J. (2010). Organizational rhetoric:
Situations and strategies. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage, p. 7.
[54] Katz, S. B. (1992). The ethic of expediency: Classical rhetoric,
technology, and the Holocaust. College English, 54, 255–275.
[55] Fitzgibbon, J. E., & Seeger, M. W. (2002). Audiences and metaphors
of globalization in the DaimlerChryslerAG merger. Communication
Studies, 53, 40–55.
[56] Smith, R. C., & Eisenberg, E. M. (1987). Conflict at Disneyland: A
root-metaphor analysis. Communication Monographs, 54, 367–380.
[57] Gross, D. G. (1992). A teachers’ strike, rival stories, and narrative
agreement. Nebraska Speech Communication Association Journal, 31,
47–56
[58] Arden, L. A. (1989). Fetching good out of evil in AA: A Bormannean
fantasy theme analysis of The Big Book of Alcoholics Anonymous.
Communication Quarterly, 37, 1–15.
[59] Koester, J. (1982). The Machiavellian princess: Rhetorical dramas
for women managers. Communication Quarterly, 30, 165–172.
[60] Putnam, L. L., Van Hoeven, S. A., & Bullis, C. A. (1991). The role of
rituals and fantasy themes in teachers’ bargaining. Western Journal of
Speech Communication, 55, 85–103.
[61] Connell, I., & Galasiski, D. (1998). Academic mission statements: An
exercise in negotiation. Discourse & Society, 9, 457–479.
[62] Paystrup, P. (1995). From “we didn’t do it” to “it’s not our fault”: The
use of apologia in public relations crises. In W. N. Elwood (Ed.), Public
relations inquiry as rhetorical criticism: Case studies of corporate
discourse and social influence (pp. 117–133). Westport, CT: Praeger.
[63] Dickinson, G. (2002). Joe’s rhetoric: Starbucks and the spatial
rhetoric of authenticity. Rhetoric Society Quarterly, 32, 5–28.
[64] Dickinson, G. (2002). Joe’s rhetoric: Starbucks and the spatial
rhetoric of authenticity. Rhetoric Society Quarterly, 32, 5–28.
[65] Courtright, J. L. (1995). “I am a Scientologist”: The image
management of identity. In W. N. Elwood (Ed.), Public relations inquiry as
rhetorical criticism: Case studies of corporate discourse and social
influence (pp. 69–84). Westport, CT: Praeger.
[66] For example, see Hill, C. A., & Helmers, M. (Eds.). (2004). Defining
visual rhetorics. Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum; Hope, D. S. (Ed.). (2006). Visual
communication: Perception, rhetoric, and technology. Cresskill, NY:
Hampton; Olson, L. C., Finnegan, C. A., & Hope, D. S. (Eds.). (2008).
Visual rhetoric: A reader in communication and American culture.
Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage; Kostelnick, C., & Hassett, M. (2003). Shaping
information: The rhetoric of visual conventions. Carbondale: Southern
Illinois University Press; Kress, G., & van Leeuwen, T. (1996). Reading
images: The grammar of visual design. London, UK: Routledge;
Messaris, P. (2003). Visual communication: Theory and research. Journal
of Communication, 53, 551–556.
[67] For example, see Lu, X. (1998). Rhetoric in ancient China, fifth to
third century BCE: A comparison with classical Greek rhetoric. Columbia:
University of South Carolina Press; Hesiey, D. R. (Ed.). (2000). Chinese
perspectives in rhetoric and communication. Stamford, CT: Ablex;
Combs, S. (2005). The Dao of rhetoric. Albany: State University of New
York Press; Hussein, A.-R. (2006). Arabic rhetoric: A pragmatic analysis.
New York, NY: Routledge; Greenbaum, A., & Holdstein, D. H. (Eds.).
(2008). Jewish perspectives in rhetoric and composition. Cresskill, NY:
Hampton; Handelman, S. A. (1982). The slayers of Moses: The
emergence of rabbinic interpretation in modern literary theory. Albany:
State University of New York Press; Richardson, E. B. (2003).
Understanding African American rhetoric: Classical origins to
contemporary innovations. New York, NY: Routledge; Richardson, E. B.,
& Jackson, R. L., II (Eds.). (2004). African American rhetoric(s):
Interdisciplinary perspectives. Carbondale: Southern Illinois University
Press; Knowles-Borishade, A. F. (1991). Paradigm for classical African
orature: Instrument for a scientific revolution? Journal of Black Studies,
21, 488–500; Lake, R. (1983). Enacting red power: The consummatory
function in Native American protest rhetoric. Quarterly Journal of Speech,
69, 127–142.
[68] Foss, S. K. (2009). Rhetorical criticism: Exploration and practice (4th
ed.). Long Grove, IL: Waveland, p. 137.
[69] Burgchardt, C. R. (Ed.). (2007). Readings in rhetorical criticism (2nd
ed.). State College, PA: Strata, p. 407.
[70] Miller, C. R., & Selzer, J. (1985). Special topics of argument in
engineering reports. In L. Odell & D. Goswami (Eds.), Writing in non-
academic settings (pp. 231–249). New York, NY: Guilford.
[71] Miller, C. R. (1994). Rhetorical community: The cultural basis of
genre. In A. Freedman & P. Medway (Eds.), Genre and the new rhetoric
(pp. 67–78). London, UK: Taylor & Francis.
[72] Grant, D., Keenoy, T., & Oswick, C. (Eds.). (1998). Discourse and
organization. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage, p. 1.
[73] Alvesson, M. (2004). Organizational culture and discourse. In D.
Grant, C. Hardy, C. Oswick, & L. Putnam (Eds.), The SAGE handbook of
organizational discourse (pp. 317–335). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
[74] Stillar, G. F. (1998). Analyzing everyday texts: Discourse, rhetoric,
and social perspectives. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
[75] Ward, M., Sr. (2014). Deadly documents: Technical communication,
organizational discourse, and the Holocaust—Lessons from the rhetorical
work of everyday texts. Amityville, NY: Baywood.
[76] Pacanowsky, M. E., & O’Donnell-Trujillo, N. (1983). Organizational
communication as cultural performance. Communication Monographs,
50, 126–147.
[77] Turner, V. W. (1968). The drums of affliction: A study of religious
processes among the Ndembu of Zambia. Oxford, UK: Clarendon, p. 7.
[78] Turner, V. W. (1968). The drums of affliction: A study of religious
processes among the Ndembu of Zambia. Oxford, UK: Clarendon, p. 7.
[79] Pacanowsky, M. E., & O’Donnell-Trujillo, N. (1983). Organizational
communication as cultural performance. Communication Monographs,
50, 126–147, pp. 131–133.
[80] Pacanowsky, M. E. (1988). Communication in the empowering
organization. In J. Anderson (Ed.), Communication yearbook 11 (pp.
356–379).
[81] Trujillo, N., & Dionisopoulos, G. (1987). Cop talk, police stories, and
the social consequences of organizational drama. Central States Speech
Journal, 38, 196–209.
[82] Trujillo, N. (1992). Interpreting (the work and talk of) baseball:
Perspectives on baseball park culture. Western Journal of
Communication, 56, 350–371.
[83] Trujillo, N. (1993). Interpreting November 22: A critical ethnography
of an assassination site. Quarterly Journal of Speech, 79, 447–466.
[84] Kunda, G. (1992). Engineering culture: Control and commitment in a
high-tech corporation. Philadelphia, PA: Temple University Press.
[85] Banks, S. P. (1994). Performing public announcements: The case of
flight attendants’ work discourse. Text and Performance Quarterly, 14,
253–267.
[86] Boje, D. M. (1991). The storytelling organization: A study of story
performance in an office-supply firm. Administrative Science Quarterly,
36, 106–126.
[87] Boje, D. M. (1995). Stories of the storytelling organization: A
postmodern analysis of Disney as “Tamara-land.” Academy of
Management Journal, 38, 997–1035.
[88] Boje, D. M. (1999). Nike, Greek goddess of victory or cruelty?
Women’s stories of Asian factory life. Journal of Organizational Change
Management, 2, 461–480.
[89] Boje, D. M., & Rosile, G. A. (2003). Life imitates art: Enron’s epic and
tragic narration. Management Communication Quarterly, 17, 85–125.
[90] Boje, D. M., & Rhodes, C. (2005). The leadership of Ronald
McDonald: Double narration and stylistic lines of transformation.
Leadership Quarterly, 17, 94–103.
[91] Boje, D. M., & Rosile, G. A. (2008). Specters of Wal-Mart: A critical
discourse analysis of stories of Sam Walton’s ghost. Critical Discourse
Studies, 5, 153–179.
[92] Eisenberg, E. M., & Riley, P. (2001). Organizational culture. In F. M.
Jablin & L. L. Putnam (Eds.), The new handbook of organizational
communication: Advances in theory, research, and methods (pp. 291–
322). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
[93] Martin, J. (1992). Cultures in organizations. New York, NY: Oxford
University Press; Martin, J. (2002). Organizational culture: Mapping the
terrain. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
6.3 Globalization and Organizations
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
1. Describe major elements of globalization.
2. Understand major theories of globalization from a divergence
perspective, which investigates how organizations manifest
elements of their surrounding dominant cultures.
3. Understand major theories of globalization from a convergence
perspective, which attempts to identify driving forces behind
global integration.
Whether you believe an organization has a culture or is a culture, the idea of
organizational culture as a closed system is no longer tenable. As we learned in
Chapter 4, systems theorists have pointed out since the 1960s that an
organization cannot survive unless its boundaries are permeable enough to
permit exchanges of needed resources with its environment. And as we will see
in Chapter 11, advances in communication and information technologies are
giving rise to loosely structured “network organizations,” which can coordinate
their activities wherever an Internet connection is available. These two factors—
the simultaneous (and related) increases in resource exchange and in global
communication—have over the past generation pushed organizational activities
beyond national boundaries. As a result, American business travelers have had to
learn that a Chinese surname comes first and the given name last; that dinner
conversation may continue while a Muslim host excuses himself to pray; that a
take-charge attitude is not a universally effective way to start a meeting; and that
the “thumbs up” sign or thumb-and-forefinger “OK” is meaningless or even
offensive in some countries. [1] An American executive who asks an Indian
partner to “remember the Golden Rule” might hear in reply, “What is this
‘golden rule’ you speak of? Is there a silver rule?”
However, the rapid rise of international business contacts entails more than
simply respecting other customs or even learning other languages. A much larger
phenomenon called globalization is at work. Not only are organizations having
more contacts with international counterparts, but their activities are becoming
more integrated into an increasingly global system of commerce. One of our
coauthors (Mark Ward) remembers entering the workforce in the 1970s when
most people still expected job security in exchange for their company loyalty; in
the 1980s, however, he saw the old social contract unravel. Cynthia Stohl, an
expert on globalization and organizations, experienced the same phenomenon as
a young researcher. “The 1980s were a time of great upheaval in the world of
organization,” she recalled. “The world was changing—new communication
technologies such as fax machines and portable computers were easing the flow
and speed of communication across time and space.” [2] The same decade, she
noted, saw the rise of powerful multinational corporations, international
partnerships, and awareness that human rights, environmental pollution, and
epidemic diseases were global rather than national issues. “In short, economic
integration was just one form of global exchange that was increasing
exponentially; there were also escalations in political, cultural, and personal
global interconnections.” [3]
To describe this phenomenon, the word “globalization” was popularized in the
1990s and remains the term of choice. Many definitions of globalization have
been advanced but Stohl, in her review of the literature, found that scholarship
clusters around six broad themes: global economic integration; cultural, political,
and material exchange; worldwide diffusion of information; compression of time
and space; realignments of social interaction from local to networked contexts;
and global consciousness. [4] Given these trends—and the different ways that
organizations can respond to them—Stohl proposed that organizations can be
usefully categorized as domestic (one nationality and its dominant culture),
multicultural (one nationality, although cultural diversity in the workforce is
acknowledged), multinational (one nationality, although it maintains locally run
offices in multiple countries), international (two or more nationalities, although
regional centers maintain distinctive cultures), or global (the global system that
transcends national orientations and cultures). [5] Fully globalized organizations
such as McDonald’s and Coca-Cola are now “operating beyond national
borders [to] create a new work environment that generates its own rules of
conduct,” making these companies “not only the product of globalization; they
are also the carrier of globalization.” [6] By necessity, suggested Miriam Erez
and Efrat Shokef, they reflect values of global competitiveness, high dynamism
to cope with high uncertainty, geographic dispersion, and cultural diversity. [7]
Stohl discovered that the literature on globalization and organizations can also be
broadly divided into two approaches. Scholars who focus on divergence
advance theories of how variations in national and regional cultures are
manifested in organizations. Thus an organization in a society where punctuality
is rigorously expected may operate differently than an organization in a society
where people are more spontaneous. By the same token, relations between
management and labor may reflect the surrounding culture’s assumptions about
deference to authority. On the other hand, scholars who study convergence
attempt to theorize the sources of global integration and the blurring of national
boundaries. We have mentioned one of these sources already: the emergence of
communication and information technologies that compress time and space and
allow knowledge to be instantly disseminated on a global scale. These two
approaches—divergence and convergence—will supply the broad outline for this
chapter section.
Theories of Divergence
Before US involvement (1941–1945) in the Second World War, most Americans
were isolationists and leery of alliances with other nations. But by war’s end,
when the United States emerged as a global superpower, the State Department
realized its diplomats needed training about the countries and cultures to which
they were being assigned. [8] Thus began the scholarly study of cultural
variability and of what has become known as intercultural communication. By
the late 1970s and early 1980s, as we have already seen, the process of
globalization was under way, and soon it became apparent that business
executives also required such training. In the wake of the oil embargoes of the
1970s when Americans began to think about fuel-efficient cars, Japanese auto
manufacturers quickly filled this niche by exporting their products and, later, by
establishing plants in the United States. When Japanese firms also began to
dominate consumer electronics, executives from East and West realized they
needed to understand each other’s management strategies and organizational
processes.
In so doing, executives and scholars learned that (for example) an American and
a Japanese manager, given the same problem, might solve matters in very
different ways based on cultural assumptions through which they perceived the
situation. This notion runs counter to the frequent Western presumption that the
one, best solution to a problem will become self-evident through rational
deliberation. Thus, for example, the business communication of a Japanese
executive may reflect culturally learned preferences for silence over speaking
and writing, for minimalist communication when responses are required, for
indirect expression, and for avoiding self-defense and arguing. [9] A Japanese
meeting might involve a first session where people state their views without any
direct exchange of ideas. Then, through a series of additional sessions,
individuals adjust their views in light of the various monologues they hear.
Finally, consensus is reached—without any direct dialogue, much less arguing. [10]
In the remainder of this section we will briefly review some leading theories
about cultural variability that have been applied to organizations, followed by
theories about how you can achieve intercultural communication competence.
Yet we do this with a word of caution. “It is not an easy task to describe
communication behaviors across cultures without biases such as cultural
ethnocentrism,” noted Tsukasa Nishida. “Even the most careful cultural
comparisons or measuring scales can be culturally biased and thus give a
distorted, one-sided description of the communication behaviors being
observed.” [11] Nishida’s Japanese colleagues have suggested, for example, that
the SMCR (source, message, channel, receiver) model of communication—so
popular in North America (and that we encountered in Chapter 1 and Chapter 4)
—should be modified to correct its Western bias: A sender or receiver can be a
group, as well as an individual. [12] And the concept of feedback should include
self-feedback. [13] Even the basic cultural categories of individualistic and
collectivistic—which we will review later in section 7.2 and which for decades
have been the foundation of North American theorizing—reflect the Western
penchant for “either/or” classification. Further, because the individual is the
kernel unit, the categorization by its nature sets up individualism as the core
orientation and a group-centered perspective as the “other” orientation. “When
we examine Japanese culture using the concept of individualism, we will
characterize it as nonindividualistic and conclude that it is a collectivistic
culture,” adds Nishida. “Yet what we are actually seeing is the inevitable result
of the application of a framework that is valid only in the context of
individualistic cultures.” [14] From the Japanese perspective, group membership
and support increases rather than decreases individual autonomy.
Nevertheless, North American theorizing on cultural variability has been, and
remains, influential worldwide. Since you must be familiar with these theories in
order to intelligently discuss the divergence approach to globalization, we will
introduce you now to the basics.
Hall's High- and Low-Context Communication
One of the most influential and yet easy-to-grasp concepts in cultural variability
is Edward Hall’s distinction between high-context (HC) communication and
low-context (LC) communication. To illustrate the distinction, Hall used the
examples of a pair of twins and two lawyers. The twins have grown up side by
side, while the lawyers have come together at a trial for a short time and a
specific purpose. Communications between the twins is often highly intuitive,
while communications between the lawyers must be explicitly stated. When the
twins communicate, their meaning is couched within a high quantity of context
—namely, the fact of their similar background and long years in close proximity.
By contrast, the amount of context shared by the lawyers is low. Thus “A high
context (HC) communication or message is one in which most of the information
is already in the person, while very little is in the coded, explicit, transmitted part
of the message. A low context (LC) communication is just the opposite; i.e., the
mass of the information is vested in the explicit code.” [15]
An anthropologist, Hall extended his principle to entire cultures. In some parts of
the globe—among these Hall named Japan, the Arab world, and the
Mediterranean—the people are ethnically homogeneous and live together in
great density since land is scarce or natural resources are concentrated in certain
regions. [16] These are like the twins who grow up in the same family, live in the
same house, and communicate intuitively. In other parts of the world—here Hall
singled out North America, Germany and Switzerland, Northern Europe, and
Scandinavia—the people are more ethnically diverse and more geographically
spread out. [17] These are like the trial lawyers who come together for a short
time and specific purpose and, lacking a common background, must
communicate in explicit terms. In HC cultures, which value tradition and change
slowly, much meaning is conveyed nonverbally or by silence, by the physical
distance people maintain when speaking, and by status markers (age, sex, class,
education, family, friends, social networks, titles, organizations). “As a result,”
Hall maintained, “for most normal transactions in daily life they do not require,
nor do they expect, much in-depth, background information…because they keep
themselves informed about everything having to do with the people who are
important in their lives.” By contrast, people in LC cultures “compartmentalize
their personal relationships, their work, and many aspects of their day-to-day
lives,” so that “each time they interact with others they need detailed
background information.” [18]
The HC/LC distinction, however, is not an either/or classification but is best seen
as a continuum. Cultures tend toward one pole or the other to varying degrees.
Based on Hall’s descriptions, Larry Samovar and his colleagues grouped fifteen
cultures along an HC/LC axis. In the top third of the list, Japanese was the
highest-context culture, followed by Chinese, Korean, African American, and
Native American. The middle third was filled out by Arab, Greek, Latin, Italian,
and English cultures. And the bottom third listed German/Swiss culture as the
lowest-context, followed by German, Scandinavian, North American, and
French. [19] The list is shown in Figure 6.6.
Figure 6.6 High- and Low-Context Cultures
In today’s globalized economy, people from different organizations—or within
the same organization—often meet across cultural boundaries. Potential
differences in their communication styles must then be recognized. A colleague
from an HC culture might become impatient if provided laborious background
information, while one from an LC culture might expect such details. On the
other hand, someone from an LC culture might grow frustrated when purely
bottom-line arguments fail to quickly convince a client from an HC culture; the
client defers agreement on a deal and instead keeps engaging in small talk about
mutual acquaintances. Contextual differences, added Hall, likewise show up in
an organization’s internal relations. In Japanese organizations, “the day starts
with honorifics,” which are gradually dropped as the day goes along if things are
progressing well. The level of context functions as a form of feedback as
colleagues move from low contexts (i.e., using formal address) to high contexts
(i.e., using familiar address). By contrast, “first-naming in the United States is
an artificial attempt at high-contexting; [and] it tends to offend Europeans, who
view the use of first names as acceptable only between close friends and family.” [20]
Kluckhohn and Strodtbeck's Value Orientations
Hall’s declaration that “culture is communication” [21] has an obvious appeal to
communication scholars; it’s like looking down the barrel of a telescope until the
view funnels into the original point. By contrast—and to continue the analogy—
the cultural typology developed by Florence Kluckhohn and Fred Strodtbeck
turns the telescope back around. Looking through a small hole—which consists
of five simple questions—opens up the whole universe of cultures to view. Thus
we introduce here the idea of cultural typology—or classification systems for
identifying cultural types—with Kluckhohn and Strodtbeck’s elegant model of
cultural value orientations. [22] They proposed that people look to their cultures
for answers to five basic questions that explain how the world works. Those
questions and answers are shown in Table 6.9.
Table 6.9 Kluckhohn and Strodtbeck's Cultural Value Orientations
Every culture must answer five questions for its
members
Range Cultural Value Orientations
(Orientations of American Culture in Bold)
What is the orientation time? Past Present Future
What is the nature of humankind? Basically
evil
Mix of good and
evil Basically good
What is the value placed on activity? Being Being-in-
becoming Doing
What is the relation of humankind to nature? Subject to Cooperation with Control over
What is the relation of people to each other? Authoritarian Collectivistic Individualistic
A divergence approach to globalization, which asks how organizations are
shaped by their surrounding cultures, suggests that different answers to
Kluckhohn and Strodtbeck’s five questions will yield important differences in
organizational cultures. A culture’s orientation to time, argued Stohl, might show
up in an organization’s “attitudes toward change and innovation [and the] type
of planning.” Cultural views on human nature might be manifested in an
organization’s “degree of emphasis on control and surveillance.” The value a
culture places on activity—whether humans are seen as objects or subjects—
might be evident in how much an organization stresses “improvements and
accomplishments [and] job satisfaction.” How the surrounding culture sees
humanity’s relationship to nature might be reflected in an organization’s
“comfort and use of technology” (see Chapter 11). And cultural assumptions
about proper social relations might shape an organization’s attitudes about
“hierarchy; adherence to the chain of command; respect for titles and status;
[and the] degree of worker participation.” [23]
Hofstede's Value Dimensions
Perhaps the most widely cited cultural typology in organization studies is the
model of cultural value dimensions proposed by Dutch social psychologist Geert
Hofstede. Organizational scholars have been drawn to the typology because
Hofstede conducted his research in actual workplaces. Between 1967 and 1973,
he surveyed employees of IBM—then one of the world’s largest companies—
and analyzed data from IBM offices in fifty countries across three continents. [24] The most recent (2010) publication of his work spans research in seventy-six
countries. [25] In a sense, rather than observing national cultures and speculating
how their values are manifested in the workplace, Hofstede began by observing
workplace values and then extrapolating them to national cultures. The latest
iteration of Hofstede’s typology holds that a society’s cultural values may be
analyzed along six dimensions (summarized in Table 6.10). Yet while Hofstede
is best known for his typology of societal value dimensions, he and Dutch
economist Bob Waisfisz developed a typology—with six autonomous value
dimensions—for organizational cultures, which is shown in Table 6.11. [26]
Table 6.10 Hofstede's Cultural Value Dimensions
Low vs. High Can power be
Power
Distance
unequally
distributed? LOW: Unequal power must be
rectified or justified.
HIGH: Everyone has their place
in the hierarchy
Individualism
vs.
Collectivism
Is self-image
defined in
terms of “we”
or “I”?
IND: Individuals take care of
themselves and their immediate
families; social networks are
loosely knit.
COL: Groups take care of
members in exchange for
loyalty; social networks are
tightly knit.
Masculinity
vs.
Femininity
Is
assertiveness
or cooperation
valued?
MAS: Assertiveness, achievement,
heroism, and material reward are
valued.
FEM: Cooperation, caring,
consensus, and quality of life are
valued.
Low vs. High
Uncertainty
Avoidance
Is uncertainty
and ambiguity
feared?
LOW: Practice counts more than
principles, since the future is going
to happen and cannot be controlled.
HIGH: The future should be
controlled by rigid codes of
conduct and discouraging
unorthodoxy.
Short-Term
vs. Long-
Term
Orientation
Is virtue and
truth
situational or
absolute?
SHORT: Truth is absolute; quick
results are valued; traditions are
normative; few save for the future.
LONG: Virtue is a search; truth
depends on context; traditions
are adaptable; thrift is valued.
Indulgence
vs. Restraint
To what
degree are
human drives
regulated?
IND: People are relatively free to
gratify human drives and have fun.
RES: People’s drives are
suppressed and regulated by
social norms.
Table 6.11 Hofstede and Waisfisz's Organizational Value Dimensions
Means vs.
Goal
Orientation
What makes
the
organization
effective?
MEANS: People avoid risks and
focus on the “how” of daily work
routines.
GOAL: People take risks in order to
achieve specific and individual
results.
Internally
vs.
Externally
Driven
Who
determines
tasks?
INT: Tasks are givens since the
organization knows what is best for
customers.
EXT: To meet customer
requirements, pragmatism and
results count most.
Easygoing
vs. Strict
Work
Discipline
How is
control
achieved?
EASY: Internal structures and
controls are loose; improvisation
and unpredictability are normal.
STRICT: Internal structures and
controls are tight; predictability is
desired; people are punctual and
serious.
Local vs.
Professional
With whom
do people
identify?
LOCAL: People identify with the
supervisor or unit for which they
work, so that conformity is
emphasized.
PROF: People identify with the
content of their jobs or with their
professions.
Open vs.
Closed
System
How readily
are people
socialized?
OPEN: Newcomers and outsiders
are welcomed and made to feel like
insiders.
CLOSED: Newcomers and outsiders
must work their way to insider
status.
Employee What EMP: Personal concerns are taken WORK: Only task performance
vs. Work
Oriented
matters
most?
into account; the organization looks
to the welfare of employees.
matters; employees’ personal
problems are not relevant.
Like Hall’s distinction of high-context versus low-context communication,
Hofstede’s cultural value dimensions are not either/or choices. Instead, the
dimensions should be seen as scales. The United States, for example, is ranked
by the Hofstede Centre as individualistic (91st highest among 93 countries
surveyed) and masculine (62), with moderate ranks for uncertainty avoidance
(46) and power distance (40), and a low ranking for long-term orientation (29).
By contrast, China ranks low on individualism (20), is comparable to the United
States in masculinity (66) but has more tolerance for uncertainty (30), while
ranking high in long-term orientation (118) and acceptance of unequal power
distribution (80). Mexico, though it shares a border with the United States and a
masculine orientation (69), manifests very different cultural values—low in
individualism (30) and tolerance for uncertainty (82), and high in its acceptance
of unequal power distribution (80). [27] These comparisons are shown
graphically in Figure 6.7.
Figure 6.7 Comparisons of National CulturalValue Dimensions
(No data for long-term orientation in Mexico)
Cultural Communication Competence
Even before entering a profession (if you have not already), chances are you are
communicating across cultural differences on a regular, even a daily, basis. Your
college or university likely enrolls students from many backgrounds. And if you
thought about it and listed the cross-cultural encounters you experience, the
number would surprise you. So we wrap up our discussion on the divergence
approach to globalization by reviewing some basic concepts for boosting your
cultural communication competence.
William Gudykunst defined “effective communication” during intercultural
encounters as an exchange in which “the person interpreting the message
attaches a meaning to the message that is relatively similar to what was intended
by the person transmitting it.” [28] The key, he maintained, is “mindfulness.”
People naturally tend to talk in their accustomed (and comfortable) “cultural
scripts,” but these ways of talking are unfamiliar to persons who come from
different cultural backgrounds. When you communicate with someone who is
different from you, so that you are unsure how that person will respond, that
makes you nervous—or, as Gudykunst put it, anxious (an emotional state) and
uncertain (a mental state). In formulating his anxiety/uncertainty management
(AUM) theory of intercultural communication, he built on one of the
foundational theories in interpersonal communication.
That earlier theory was uncertainty reduction theory (URT), proposed by Charles
Berger and Richard Calabrese, which holds that “when strangers meet, their
primary concern is one of uncertainty reduction or increasing predictability
about the behavior of both themselves and others in the interaction.” [29] URT
suggests that interpersonal communication is goal directed: a stranger is
someone you may deal with again or who has something you want, but when
that person deviates from your expectations, you deploy talk to make sense of
the other. But where URT addresses interpersonal encounters, AUM goes further
to also incorporate intergroup dynamics, or encounters where “our predictions
[about strangers] are based mostly on cultural and sociological data” and “our
behavior is guided mainly by our social [versus personal] identities.” [30] While
anxiety and uncertainty are the two basic causes for effective or ineffective
communication in intercultural encounters, Gudykunst proposed seven factors
that contribute to how anxious and uncertain you may be:
1. How you see yourself socially and personally
2. How much you are motivated to interact with the stranger in question
3. The actual communication situation
4. How you react to the stranger
5. How you socially categorize the stranger
6. How you are connected to the stranger
7. How much dignity you accord to the stranger
Each of these seven factors impacts your “boundary conditions,” or the
thresholds beyond which you feel maximum and minimum anxiety and
uncertainty. The ideal place to be, the place where you can best maintain
mindfulness, is between your maximum and minimum boundaries. If the
encounter generates too much anxiety and uncertainty, then you lose mindfulness
and lapse into your own comfortable cultural scripts; if it generates too little
anxiety and uncertainty, then you forget to monitor your responses and, again,
become unmindful. Thus some tension over the unpredictability of a stranger, so
long as it remains manageable, is beneficial for maintaining mindfulness. “For
uncertainty, our optimal level is when we think that strangers’ behavior is
predictable, but we also recognize that we may not be able to explain their
behavior accurately,” claimed Gudykunst. “For anxiety, our optimal level is
when we feel comfortable with strangers, but we still have sufficient anxiety that
we are not complacent in our interactions with them.” [31] Strangers can manage
their anxiety and uncertainty, keep these within their boundary conditions, and
achieve the mindfulness to set aside their cultural scripts by controlling the
bodily symptoms of their anxiety and then managing the worrying thoughts that
cause the anxiety. Indeed, a hopeful feature of AUM theory is that effective
intercultural communication can be fostered even when only one party to the
encounter is practicing mindfulness.
Theories of Convergence
The divergence perspective on globalization, rooted in social psychology and
anthropology, “focuses primarily on issues of cultural difference,” noted Stohl,
and “highlights the communicative diversity found in organizations across the
globe.” By contrast, scholarship from a convergence perspective looks for “a set
of imperatives embedded in the global economy that results in similar
organizational structuring across nations” despite cultural differences. [32] Thus
research from a divergence perspective would study why, for example, a North
American manager and a Chinese manager communicate in different ways that
are shaped by their respective cultures. But a convergence perspective would
lead a scholar to study why American and Chinese managers are responding to
forces of global economic competition and exchange with similar organizational
strategies. A vast literature has been written on the causes of globalization. We
will focus on three leading theorists whose works respectively contend that
globalization is driven by networking technology, by risk distribution, and by
mass migration and mass media.
Castell's Network Society
In the three books that compose his Information Age trilogy, Spanish sociologist
Manuel Castells described what he called the “network society.” [33] The engine
of this society is the revolution in information technology that has spread
worldwide since the 1970s. However, the technology by its nature has given rise
to “informationalism,” which in turn has pushed economic, social, and cultural
arrangements into new alignments. The technology of industrialization was
historically additive—that is, technology advanced by adding more speed,
power, and efficiency. But information technology is adaptive—it advances
through self-adjustment, flexibility, and integration with other systems. Further,
this adaptive mode of technological development is self-reinforcing and,
therefore, constantly accelerating. As a result, capitalism is in crisis.
Capitalism arose as the mode of production for the Industrial Age, providing an
efficient system of relationships for creating and distributing profits. The tools
for making products, however, followed a mode of development governed by
scientific and technical rationales rather than economic considerations. Still,
because new technology only improved on the capacity of existing technology,
productivity gains fit into—rather than outpaced—the competitive drives of
private capital. But today, information is the basic building block for economic
and social organization. Further, advances in information technology do more
than merely add to existing capacity; advances in one process ripple across many
others. A new mode of production, or a new alignment of relationships, is
needed. The network enterprise has emerged as a form of organization in which
various players, often independent companies, are networked together on a per-
project basis. (For more on this, see Chapter 11.) As capitalism morphs into
informationalism, such enterprises can prosper within “a culture of the
ephemeral, a culture of each strategic decision, a patchwork of experiences and
interests, rather than a [corporate] charter of rights and obligations.” [34]
Nevertheless, global networking has not created the same conditions
everywhere. “The rise of informationalism in this end of millennium is
intertwined with rising inequality and social exclusion throughout the world,”
argued Castells. [35] Networking is governed by the technological infrastructure.
Managerial elites who control network hubs determine the linkages and are
thereby free themselves from the constraints of time and space. Large swaths of
the globe have become a “fourth world” excluded from the flows of information.
Workers must either train themselves to be “self-programmable labor,” able to
gather information and recombine it for the needs of each organizational project,
or fall to the level of “generic labor” that performs low-cost production tasks
until even those jobs are automated. Since network enterprises need labor that
can be reprogrammed, the old social contract of lifetime job security with the
same company—long vanished in the United States but still practiced in many
Asian countries—is increasingly untenable.
Beck's Risk Society
If you have taken Economics 101, then you have heard the term scarcity.
Because the number of goods is always finite, the market exists as a mechanism
for distributing scarce goods. In a free market, goods are distributed on ability to
pay the market price. For German sociologist Ulrich Beck, however, scarcity
was the chief problem of what he called the First Modernity. But in the Second
Modernity of today, the problem of scarcity and genuine material need has, at
least in the developed world, largely been solved. For example, obesity is now a
far greater problem than hunger in the United States. Yet the same techno-
scientific advances that created wealth also created new risks. Beck first put
forward his thesis of the Risk Society (Risikogesellschaft) in 1986, the year of
the Chernobyl nuclear accident in what is now Ukraine. [36] Not long before, in
1984, an accidental release of poison gas at a chemical factory in Bhopal, India,
resulted in as many as sixteen thousand related deaths among the local populace.
Beck has continued to write prodigiously about the Risk Society, and subsequent
events—from the ozone hole to mad cow disease—have given his thesis
increasing relevance.
In the second modernity, then, the challenge has shifted from wealth distribution
to risk distribution. What drives globalization, Beck held, is the fact that risks
reach beyond national borders so that the distribution of risk requires
organizations to act on a global scale. Before modernity, the chief problems were
natural risks such as floods and epidemics. Industrialization during the First
Modernity then brought a new category of manufactured risks, such as pollution
and economic inequality, created by human action. Yet most people believed that
humanly created problems could be solved by humanly created technologies.
Now, however, the contemporary risks of the Second Modernity have introduced
a category of risks that threaten the human species. The unsustainable
consumption of natural resources requires much more than a simple
technological fix, so current patterns of human activity cannot go on as before.
Contemporary risks are created not just by manufacturing activity but by
modernization itself. As such, Beck contended that contemporary risks are
distinguished by several characteristics. Because contemporary risks are global
in scale, their magnitude can make them difficult to measure precisely.
Meanwhile, their wide dispersion can make these risks difficult to see,
sometimes because years or decades must pass before the risks are evident.
Second, contemporary risks are distributed in inverse proportion to wealth.
Those who have enough wealth have the most resources and information access
to avoid risk. Third, certain segments of global society benefit from risk by
offering protection to individuals who can afford it. Finally, the emergence of
global risks has generated new social conflicts as various factions—from
technocrats to terrorists—fight over the differing views of how to deal with these
problems.
Beck recalled in a recent book that his original work, written some thirty years
ago, described a world that was comparatively “idyllic” because it was “still
‘terror free.’” Today, his updated concept of a world risk society
(Weltrisikogesellschaft) posits a “global community of threats.” Contemporary
risks now have “the destructive force of war” in their ability to collapse whole
segments of economic and social life. “Fear determines the attitude toward life.
Security is displacing freedom and equality from the highest position on the
scale of values,” observed Beck. As a result, the “citizen must be grateful when
he [sic] is scanned, photographed, searched, and interrogated ‘for his [sic] own
safety.’” In the world risk society, security has taken its place beside water and
electricity as a public good. [37]
Appadurai's Cultural Flows
Pakistani cab drivers may ply their trade on the streets of the United States but,
observed Indian-born anthropologist Arjun Appadurai, many pass the long hours
alone in their vehicles by listening to taped sermons from mosques in Pakistan.
As they listen, the drivers join a community of the imagination, which to them is
quite real. [38] Similarly, via the mass media of radio, television, and print,
Indians the world over follow cricket and mentally picture themselves a part of
the cultural spectacle that is their national sport. [39] In both cases, media
technologies permit people to form communities without traveling or even face-
to-face contact. In building his theory of globalization, Appadurai started with
Benedict Anderson’s concept of “imagined communities.” Anderson argued that
early print technology and the wide diffusion of books written in vernacular
languages sparked the emergence of European nation-states as people coalesced
around “national print-languages.” [40] For his part, Appadurai applied and
extended this thesis from a national context to a global context.
Thus migrant Pakistanis and Indians can possess vibrant cultural identities
derived from their imagined communities. This phenomenon led Appadurai to
two conclusions. First, globalization implies deterritorialization. The mass
migrations that are a feature of today’s world increasingly remove people and
their identities from physical territories. Not everyone migrates or travels, of
course, but most people know someone who has. Second, culture should be
regarded not as a fixed entity but as a process. Theories of cultural variability—
such as those advanced by Hall, Kluckhohn and Strodtbeck, and Hofstede—start
with the supposition that cultures are enduring and relatively static. For
Appadurai, however, the two great forces in globalization are mass migration
and mass media. The one removes people’s identities from physical territories,
and the other places those identities in territory-free imagined communities.
These two forces, proposed Appadurai, operate in today’s globalized world
through five cultural flows or “scapes.”
1. Ethnoscapes are the people—exiles, refugees, immigrants, guest workers,
business travelers, tourists, diplomats, international students—who move
between nations.
2. Technoscapes are the technologies that rapidly move information and
services across borders.
3. Financescapes are the systems, from currency markets to stock exchanges,
that move capital around the world.
4. Mediascapes are the digital, electronic, and print media that move ideas and
images across the globe.
5. Ideoscapes are official state ideologies (e.g., American democracy, political
Islam, the Chinese conception of the socialist market economy) and the
counterideologies they inspire.
Chances are you know—or may be—an international student who has built an
identity that combines elements of various cultural flows. Appadurai himself
recalled growing up in Mumbai, India, reading American magazines and college
catalogs at a local library, watching Hollywood films at a neighborhood theater,
viewing Humphrey Bogart movies on television, reading British adventure
books popular with Indian boys, being proud of his Anglophone diction,
fantasizing about college debates at Oxford, begging his older brother at
Stanford University to bring him home a pair of American blue jeans, “smelling
America” in his brother’s underarm deodorant, and finally getting bitten by “the
American bug” and heading off to the United States for college. [41] Even
decades ago, the forces of globalization—mass migration and mass media—
were at work. Inequalities remain in the world, he noted. Yet these may in time
be countered as people use their imaginations to generate new resources for
identity formation, establish new social networks—including organizations—
that cross traditional boundaries, and thus create new and better paths for
organizing society.
KEY TAKEAWAY
According to Cynthia Stohl’s review of the literature, major
elements of globalization cited by theorists and commentators
include global economic integration; cultural, political, and
material exchange; worldwide diffusion of information;
compression of time and space; realignments of social interaction
from local to networked contexts; and increased global
consciousness.
The divergence approach to globalization and organizations
investigates how variations in national and regional cultures are
manifested in organizations. Hall distinguished between high-
context communication, in which most of the information resides
implicitly in the person rather than in the message, and low-
context communication, in which most of the information is explicit
in the message. Kluckhohn and Strodtbeck theorized that a
culture’s values are oriented around its assumptions on five basic
questions: time, human nature, activity, the natural world, and
social relations. Hofstede theorized that a culture’s values may be
analyzed by its assumptions along six dimensions: the distribution
of power in society, the self, the highest societal values, tolerance
for uncertainty, long- versus short-term thinking, and self-
gratification.
The converge approach to globalization and organizations
theorizes sources of global integration and the blurring of national
boundaries. Castells theorized that globalization is driven by the
revolution in information technology and has produced the
network society. Beck theorized that globalization is driven by the
need to deal with global risks and this has produced the world risk
society. Appadurai theorized that culture is not static but is a
process; globalization is occurring through the worldwide
movements of people, technology, capital, media, and ideologies.
EXERCISES
1. Spend some time reading online articles from major news media,
both domestic and foreign. Then make a list of current news items
that illustrate each of globalization’s six elements: global
economic integration; cultural, political, and material exchange;
worldwide diffusion of information; compression of time and
space; realignments of social interaction from local to networked
contexts; and increased global consciousness.
2. Take stock of your own cultural background. To what extent do
you engage in high-context and/or low-context communication?
Now take a look at Kluckhohn and Strodtbeck’s typology in Table
6.9. What are your cultural value orientations on each of the five
basic questions? Also look at Hofstede’s typology in Table 6.10.
How would you rank your cultural values along each of the six
dimensions?
3. In what ways is your own global consciousness raised? Make a
list of global contacts in which you regularly engage via
information technology, from online video games to doing
research for your homework assignments. Make a list of global
risks—such as climate change or AIDS—that cause you to think
in global terms. Make a list of “cultural flows” (the ethnoscapes,
technoscapes, financescapes, mediascapes, and ideoscapes
described by Appadurai) with which you have contact on a regular
basis.
Collectivistic:
Convergence :
Cultural Typology:
Divergence:
Globalization :
Individualistic :
KEY TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
A culture in which the group is the basic social unit.
An approach to studying globalization and organizations that theorizes the sources of global integration and the blurring of national boundaries.
A classification system for analyzing cultures.
An approach to studying globalization and organizations that investigates how variations in national and regional cultures are manifested in organizations.
The process by which a world system is emerging through global economic integration; cultural, political, and material exchange; worldwide diffusion of information; compression of time and space; realignments of social interaction from local to networked contexts; and increased global consciousness.
A culture in which the individual is the basic social unit.
[1] Goreman, C. K. (2002, February–March). Cross-cultural business
practices. Communication World, 22–25.
[2] Stohl, C. (2005). Globalization theory. In S. May & D. K. Mumby
(Eds.), Engaging organizational communication theory and research:
Multiple perspectives (pp. 223–261). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage, p. 226.
[3] Stohl, C. (2005). Globalization theory. In S. May & D. K. Mumby
(Eds.), Engaging organizational communication theory and research:
Multiple perspectives (pp. 223–261). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage, p. 227.
[4] Stohl, C. (2005). Globalization theory. In S. May & D. K. Mumby
(Eds.), Engaging organizational communication theory and research:
Multiple perspectives (pp. 223–261). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
[5] Stohl, C. (2001). Globalizing organizational communication. In F. M.
Jablin & L. L. Putman (Eds.), The new handbook of organizational
communication: Advances in theory, research, and methods (pp. 323–
375). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
[6] Erez, M., & Shokef, E. (2008). The culture of global organizations. In
P. B. Smith, M. F. Peterson, & D. C. Thomas (Eds.), The handbook of
cross-cultural management research (pp. 285–300). Thousand Oaks,
CA: Sage, p. 286.
[7] Erez, M., & Shokef, E. (2008). The culture of global organizations. In
P. B. Smith, M. F. Peterson, & D. C. Thomas (Eds.), The handbook of
cross-cultural management research (pp. 285–300). Thousand Oaks,
CA: Sage.
[8] Leeds-Hurwitz, W. (1990). Notes in the history of intercultural
communication: The Foreign Service Institute and the mandate for
intercultural training. Quarterly Journal of Speech, 76, 262–281.
[9] Kindaichi, H. (1975). Nihonjin no gengo hyohgen (Japanese verbal
expressions). Tokyo, Japan: Kohdansha.
[10] Nakano, O. (1982). Nihongata sosiki niokeru komyunikehshon to
sikettei (Communication and decision making in Japanese
organizations). In E. Hamaguchi & S. Kumon (Eds.), Nihonteki
shuhdansshugi (Japanese “groupism” pp. 143–168). Tokyo, Japan:
Yuhhikaku Sensho.
[11] Nishida, T. (1996). Communication in personal relationships in
Japan. In W. B. Gudykunst, S. Ting-Toomey, & T. Nishida (Eds.),
Communication in personal relationships across cultures. Thousand
Oaks, CA: Sage, p. 102.
[12] Akutsu, Y. (1976). Komyunikehshon no gainen, moderu, ruikei
(Communication concepts, models, and types). In Y. Akutsu (Ed.),
Gendai no esupuri (Modern esprit 110). Tokyo, Japan: Shibundo.
[13] Takeuchi, I. (1973). Shakaiteki komyunikehshon (Social
communication). In Tokyo University (Eds.), Gendai no shakai to
komyunikehshon (Modern society and communication; pp. 3–39). Tokyo,
Japan: Tokyo University Press.
[14] Nishida, T. (1996). Communication in personal relationships in
Japan. In W. B. Gudykunst, S. Ting-Toomey, & T. Nishida (Eds.),
Communication in personal relationships across cultures. Thousand
Oaks, CA: Sage, p. 109.
[15] Hall, E. T. (1976). Beyond culture. New York, NY: Anchor, p. 79.
[16] Hall, E. T., & Hall, M. R. (1990). Understanding cultural differences:
Germans, French, and Americans. Yarmouth, ME: Intercultural Press, p.
6.
[17] Hall, E. T., & Hall, M. R. (1990). Understanding cultural differences:
Germans, French, and Americans. Yarmouth, ME: Intercultural Press, p.
7.
[18] Hall, E. T., & Hall, M. R. (1990). Understanding cultural differences:
Germans, French, and Americans. Yarmouth, ME: Intercultural Press, pp.
6–7.
[19] Samovar, L. A., Porter, R. E., McDaniel, E. R., & Roy, C. S. (2013).
Communication between cultures (8th ed.). Boston, MA: Wadsworth, p.
202.
[20] Hall, E. T., & Hall, M. R. (1990). Understanding cultural differences:
Germans, French, and Americans. Yarmouth, ME: Intercultural Press, p.
7.
[21] Hall, E. T., & Hall, M. R. (1990). Understanding cultural differences:
Germans, French, and Americans. Yarmouth, ME: Intercultural Press, p.
3.
[22] Kluckhohn, F. R., & Strodtbeck, F. L. (1961). Variations in value
orientations. Evanston, IL: Row, Peterson.
[23] Stohl, C. (2001). Globalizing organizational communication. In F. M.
Jablin & L. L. Putnam (Eds.), The new handbook of organizational
communication: Advances in theory, research, and method (pp. 323–
375). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage, p. 337.
[24] Hofstede, G. (1980). Culture’s consequences: International
differences in work-related values. Newbury Park, CA: Sage.
[25] Hofstede, G., Hoftstede, G. J., & Minkov, M. (2010). Cultures and
organizations: Software of the mind (3rd ed.). New York, NY: McGraw-
Hill.
[26] Hofstede Centre. (n.d.). Organizational culture dimensions.
Retrieved from http://geert-hofstede.com/organisational-culture-
dimensions.html
[27] Hofstede Centre. (n.d.). National culture: Countries. Retrieved from
http://geert-hofstede.com/countries.html
[28] Gudykunst, W. B. (2005). An anxiety/uncertainty management (AUM)
theory of effective communication: Making the mesh of the net finer. In W.
B. Gudykunst (Ed.), Theorizing about intercultural communication.
Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage, p. 289.
[29] Berger, C. R., & Calabrese, R. (1975). Some explorations in initial
interactions and beyond: Toward a developmental theory of interpersonal
communication. Human Communication Research, 1, 99–112, p. 100.
[30] Gudykunst, W. B. (2005). An anxiety/uncertainty management (AUM)
theory of effective communication: Making the mesh of the net finer. In W.
B. Gudykunst (Ed.), Theorizing about intercultural communication.
Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage, pp. 283–284.
[31] Gudykunst, W. B. (2005). An anxiety/uncertainty management (AUM)
theory of effective communication: Making the mesh of the net finer. In W.
B. Gudykunst (Ed.), Theorizing about intercultural communication.
Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage, p. 306.
[32] Stohl, C. (2001). Globalizing organizational communication. In F. M.
Jablin & L. L. Putnam (Eds.), The new handbook of organizational
communication: Advances in theory, research, and method (pp. 323–
375). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage, pp. 325–326.
[33] The three books of the “Information Age” trilogy are Castells, M.
(1996). The rise of the network society: The Information Age: Economy,
society and culture, Vol. 1. Oxford, UK: Blackwell; Castells, M. (1997).
The power of identity: The Information Age: Economy, society and
culture, Vol. 2. Oxford, UK: Blackwell; and Castells, M. (1998). End of the
millennium: The Information Age: Economy, society and culture, Vol. 3.
Oxford, UK: Blackwell.
[34] Castells, M. (1996). The rise of the network society: The Information
Age: Economy, society and culture, Vol. 1. Oxford, UK: Blackwell, p. 199.
[35] Castells, M. (1998). The end of the millennium: The Information Age:
Economy, society and culture, Vol. 3. Oxford, UK: Blackwell, p. 70.
[36] Beck, U. (1992). Risk society: Towards a new modernity. London,
UK: Sage. (Original work published 1986.)
[37] Beck, U. (2009). World at risk. Cambridge, UK: Polity Press, p. 9.
[38] Appadurai, A. (1996). Modernity at large: Cultural dimensions of
globalization. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press.
[39] Appadurai, A. (1995). Playing with modernity: The decolonization of
Indian cricket. In C. A. Breckenridge (Ed.), Consuming modernity: Public
culture in a South Asian world (pp. 23–48). Minneapolis: University of
Minnesota Press.
[40] Anderson, B. O. (1983). Imagined communities: Reflections on the
origin and spread of nationalism. London, UK: Verso.
[41] Appadurai, A. (1996). Modernity at large: Cultural dimensions of
globalization. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, pp. 1–2.
6.4 Chapter Exercises
REAL-WORLD CASE STUDY
Tokyo Disneyland (TDL) was opened in 1983 by Japanese owners
who secured a license from the Walt Disney Company in exchange
for a percentage of ticket and concession sales. Within a decade,
TDL was not only the most successful theme park in Japan but, in
terms of attendance, the most successful theme park in the world.
About that time, Israeli researcher Aviad Raz conducted an
organizational ethnography of TDL to learn about the mixing of
Japanese and American organizational cultures and what this
“hybridization” might reveal about globalization. [1] Raz decided to
combine participant observation, through multiple visits to the theme
park, and interviews with more than thirty park executives, regular
employees, and part-time employees.
Raz discovered two organizational cultures, one that centered on
regular TDL employees and another on part-timers. When it came to
regular employees, TDL readily integrated aspects of the “Disney
Way” that fit Japanese organizational culture (e.g., the metaphor of
a corporate family, the regulation of behavior, the low status of
unions) but tossed out others (e.g., the relentless use of Disney
icons and décor, even in strictly office settings, to promote an
emotional buy-in by employees). The organizational culture of part-
timers, however, was another matter. At the time Raz conducted his
ethnographic fieldwork, Japanese practices surrounding temporary
labor and the service sector were far different from those in the
United States. Part-timers were expected to know traditional “house
rules” (bowings, greetings, apologies, standard phrases) that
applied to customer relations generally in Japanese society; for any
company-specific rules they learned apprentice style by observing
their supervisors. TDL made waves in Japan by following the
American practice of issuing manuals with company-approved
behaviors to part-timers, rather than relying on traditional protocols
for part-time help. Though TDL borrowed from the “manual
(manyuaru) society” of the United States, the move was lauded by
many Japanese management experts who saw the innovation as
integral to TDL’s rapid success. Traditional Japanese service culture
is oriented toward one-on-one customer relationships and not the
mass-consumption culture of Disney.
Raz concluded that Tokyo Disneyland is less an example of
“Americanization,” “Westernization,” or cultural imperialism, and
more a case of the “hybridization” of cultures—both societal and
organizational—that accompanies globalization. He called the
phenomenon “glocalization” as TDL selectively incorporated some
aspects of the “Disney Way,” rejected others, and combined various
Japanese and American features while maintaining a boundary
between them. In particular, the socialization of part-time TDL
employees occurred through American methods, while the
socialization of regular employees followed more typical Japanese
norms.
1. How did the Tokyo Disneyland manual for part-time employees
function as a culture-embedding mechanism?
2. Referring to Table 6.5, how did Raz’s ethnographic fieldwork
reflect an emic view of cultural research?
3. Referring to Hoffman and Ford’s rhetorical sitduations,, to what
rhetorical situation did the TDL employee manual respond? What
rhetorical strategy was employed?
4. Referring to Table 6.7 in what kinds of organizational
performances did Japanese part-time and temporary workers
traditionally engage?
5. Referring to Table 6.11, what type of organization is TDL?
6. How are the traditional “house rules” of part-time Japanese
workers an example of high-context communication? How is the
TDL employee manual an example of low-context
communication?
7. Can Kluckhohn and Strodtbeck’s typology of cultural-value
orientations, and Hofstede’s typology of cultural-value
dimensions, help us better understand why TDL adopted some
American methods and not others?
8. How does the “hybridized” organizational culture of TDL help us
understand the process of globalization? Which of Appadurai’s
“cultural flows” (ethnoscapes, technoscapes, financescapes,
mediascapes, ideoscapes) do you see at work?
END-OF-CHAPTER ASSESSMENT
1. Which of the following is not a part of Gibb’s supportive climates?
a. description b. control c. spontaneity d. provisionalism e. empathy
2. Which view holds that culture is something an organization is and that culture tends toward order and stability?
a. functionalist b. interpretive c. critical d. postmodern e. integrative
3. According to Hofstede, which cultural-value dimension entails a society’s assumptions about the distribution of authority?
a. power distance b. individualism versus collectivism c. masculine versus feminine d. uncertainty avoidance e. long- versus short-term orientation
4. According to Stohl, which type of organization primarily identifies with one nationality but acknowledges the diversity of its workforce?
a. domestic b. multicultural c. multinational d. international e. global
5. According to Appadurai, which cultural flow is the worldwide movement of ideas and images?
a. ethnoscapes b. technoscapes c. financescapes d. mediascapes e. ideoscapes
Answer Key
1. b
2. b
3. a
4. b
5. d
[1] Raz, A. E. (1999). The hybridization of organizational culture in Tokyo
Disneyland. Studies in cultures, organizations, and societies, 5, 235–264.
Chapter 7
Leader and Follower Behaviors and Perspectives
© Thinkstock/iStock
What is Leadership?
Leadership is probably the single most discussed topic in business literature
today. An effective leader can inspire an organization to produce better-quality
products, ensure first-rate service to its customers, and make amazing profits for
its stockholders. An ineffective leader, on the other hand, can not only negatively
impact products, services, and profits but also bring down an organization to the
point of ruin. It should be no surprise that organizational leaders are very
important and leave a lasting legacy, not just on the companies they run, but also
on society as a whole. Table 7.1 contains a list of some important business
leaders (whom you may or may not have heard of) from the twentieth and
twenty-first centuries along with a brief description of what they accomplished.
This amazing list of business leaders runs the gamut from the small-town
entrepreneur to people taking the helm at large international organizations. All of
them are leaders, but their organizations vary greatly in what they deliver and
their general purpose (both for profit and nonprofits).
Table 7.1 Leadership Profiles
Name Company Accomplishment(s)
Jeff
Bezos Amazon
Revolutionized how people buy products using the Internet and then spurred a
secondary revolution in the use of electronic books with the Amazon Kindle.
Steve
Case
America
Online
Founded Quantum Computer Services (eventually America Online), which
became the largest online service in the world. His leadership and championing
of a flat-rate fee for Internet subscribers ultimately made the Internet accessible
for the masses.
Cynthia
Carroll
Anglo
American
After becoming CEO of Anglo American in 2007, a large international energy
company based out of London, Carroll became very concerned over the number
of fatalities in its South African mining facility. After another fatality, she shut
the mining operation down indefinitely and invited all relevant stakeholders to
the table to discuss mining safety. Her leadership ultimately led to a complete
retraining of mine workers and a revolution in mining safety in South Africa.
Her leadership on the matter led to a 62 percent reduction in fatalities within her
own company in just five years.
Joan
Founded the Children’s Television Workshop (now Sesame Workshop) and
invited the collaboration of Jim Henson. Today, 145 Sesame Workshop locations
Ganz
Cooney Sesame
Workshop
around the world create unique and culturally specific programs for young
children. Sesame Street has won 118 Emmys, more than any other show in
history, and eight Grammys over the years.
Ruth
Fertel
Ruth's
Hospitality
Group
After taking out a second mortgage on her home to purchase a New Orleans
steak house in 1965, which she named Ruth’s Chris Steak House, she grew the
chain to more than seventy-five locations around the world. Now the company
has multiple restaurant chains and is publicly traded on the stock market.
Ruth
Handler
Mattel &
Nearly Me
Cofounder of the giant children’s toy empire Mattel. Her most lasting legacy is
probably the creation of the Barbie and Ken dolls. After retiring from Mattel,
she founded the company that created Nearly Me, prosthetic devices for victims
of breast cancer.
Hu
Maoyuan
SAIC
Motor
Corporation
Maoyuan is the CEO of the SAIC Motor Corporation, the largest state-run
automotive manufacturer in China. Historically, the company has used
partnerships with other automotive giants (e.g., GM, Volkswagen, etc.) to fuel its
automotive needs. Maoyuan is leading the effort to export Chinese-engineered
and built cars around the world.
Howard
Schultz Starbucks
After buying out the founders of Starbucks Coffee, Tea, and Spice, he created
the niche industry of corner coffee shops. In an era when coffee consumption
and sales were in a decline, Schultz created the largest coffee company and
revolutionized how people socialized in society.
While the list of diverse leaders in Table 7.1 is interesting, examining what
others have done (and are doing) is not necessarily the best way to help us
understand what leadership actually is. However, before we can explain what
leadership is, we need to differentiate between two terms that are often confused:
management and leadership.
Management
When one hears the word management, there is an immediate corporatization of
the concept that tends to accompany the term. However, management (the noun)
and manage (the verb) are very important parts of any organization. With the rise
of the modern corporation during the Industrial Revolution, there was a decent
amount of research examining how one should manage. For our purposes, we
define the term manage as the communicative process in which an individual or
group of individuals helps those below them in an organizational, hierarchical
structure to accomplish the organization’s goals. Notice that the term is
communication focused and active, meaning that managing is something active
and ongoing. Therefore, management refers to those individuals who use
communication to help an organization achieve its goals through the proper
utilization of organizational resources (e.g., employees, facilities, and the like).
Theodore Levitt describes management thus: “Management consists of the
rational assessment of a situation and the systematic selection of goals and
purposes (what is to be done?); the systematic development of strategies to
achieve these goals; the marshaling of the required resources; the rational
design, organization, direction, and control of the activities required to attain the
selected purposes; and, finally, the motivating and rewarding of people to do the
work.” [1] Notice that management is focused on the day-to-day accomplishment
of an organization’s goals. Furthermore, management must rally their employees
to accomplish these goals through motivation, rewards, and/or punishments.
Lastly, management must ensure that they have the necessary resources to enable
their employees to accomplish the organization’s goals.
Leadership
Where management is focused on accomplishing the organization’s goals,
leadership is ultimately envisioning and articulating those goals to everyone.
Michael Hackman and Craig Johnson define leadership from a communication
perspective in this fashion: “Leadership is human (symbolic) communication,
which modifies the attitudes and behaviors of others in order to meet shared
group goals and needs.” [2] From this perspective, leadership is less about
simply getting goals accomplished and more about influencing the attitudes and
behaviors necessary to meet the organization’s goals and needs.
Management versus Leadership
How do we distinguish between management and leadership? One of the first
researchers to really distinguish between management and leadership was
Abraham Zaleznik, who wrote that organizations often are caught between two
conflicting needs: “one, for managers to maintain the balance of operations,
and one for leaders to create new approaches and imagine new areas to
explore.” [3] Notice Zaleznik argues that management is about maintaining the
path of the organization and about handling the day-to-day operations of the
organization. Leadership, on the other hand, is about creativity, innovation, and
vision for the organization. Look back at the list of leaders profiled in Table 7.1.
All these leaders had a clear vision for their organization that was articulated to
their followers. If these followers hadn’t been persuaded by their leaders, none
of these leaders’ accomplishments would be known today. While leaders often
get the bulk of notoriety, we would be remiss not to remind you that every
effective leader has a team of managers and employees who help the leader
accomplish the organization’s goals. As such, leadership and management are
symbiotic, and both are highly necessary for an organization to accomplish its
basic goals.
Researcher Shamus-Ur-Rehman Toor [4] set out to empirically investigate the
difference between leadership and management by asking forty-nine leaders and
senior executives in the construction industry in Singapore to differentiate
between the concepts of leadership and management. Overall, four clear
difference themes emerged in his research: definitional, conceptual, functional,
and behavioral.
Definitional Differences
The first differences noted in this research are what Toor called “definitional
differences.” In essence, while there is no clearly agreed-upon definition for the
term leadership, Toor noted that management was “described by fundamental
functions that include planning, organizing, leading, and controlling
organizational resources.” [5] Leadership is frequently defined in terms of
vision, inspiration, and motivation, while management is usually defined in
terms of operations. In essence, leadership is defined by the ability to create a
vision for the organization that managers can then carry out on a day-to-day
basis.
Conceptual Distinctions
Toor admits that often people have a hard time clearly distinguishing between
the terms leadership and management, because there is a thin line between the
two concepts. As one member of Toor’s study noted, “Leadership is something
that subordinates or followers look up to. A leader would be able to manage
well, too. But managers are not necessarily good leaders, and subordinates look
up to them for instructions, not guidance.” [6] In essence, leadership
encompasses management but is seen as “more than” just management. Many of
Toor’s research participants suggest that all good leaders would have to be good
managers, but not all good managers make good leaders.
Functional Divergences
When interviewing the various Singapore leaders, functional divergences also
emerged in Toor’s research. Leadership was characterized by two primary
functions: challenging and empowering. In essence, leaders should challenge
their followers to do more and then empower them to take chances, make
decisions, and innovate. Management was characterized by two different
functions: imposition and stability/order. From this perspective, management
should impose guidelines and ideas generated by organizational leadership on
their followers in an attempt to create some semblance of stability and order
within the organization. In essence, management is not making the “big”
decisions, but rather relaying those decisions to their subordinates and then
ensuring that those decisions get implemented within the organization itself.
When interviewing the various Singapore leaders, functional divergences also
emerged in Toor’s research. Leadership was characterized by two primary
functions: challenging and empowering. In essence, leaders should challenge
their followers to do more and then empower them to take chances, make
decisions, and innovate. Management was characterized by two different
functions: imposition and stability/order. From this perspective, management
should impose guidelines and ideas generated by organizational leadership on
their followers in an attempt to create some semblance of stability and order
within the organization. In essence, management is not making the “big”
decisions, but rather relaying those decisions to their subordinates and then
ensuring that those decisions get implemented within the organization itself.
Behavioral Differences
Lastly, Toor found what he termed behavioral differences: two clearly different
behavioral sets that govern management and leadership. Managers manage their
subordinates’ work, and leaders lead by example. While these explanations are
not overtly concrete, one of the participants in Toor’s study put it this way:
“Maybe the difference is basically that you just manage in management, and you
lead in leadership. In management, you enforce the regulations, whereas in
leadership, you lead by example. In management, people don’t follow you; they
obey you. In leadership, people follow you by their own choice.” [7]
Overall, there are clear distinctions (although admittedly convoluted) between
the two terms leadership and management. We hope this brief discussion of this
research has at least helped you grasp that there are fundamental differences
between the two concepts. The rest of this chapter is really devoted to
leadership.
[1] Levitt, T. (1976, Summer). Management and the post industrial
society. The Public Interest, 69–103, p. 72.
[2] Hackman, M. S., & Johnson, C. E. (2009). Leadership: A
communication perspective (5th ed.). Long Grove, IL: Waveland, p. 11.
[3] Zaleznik, A. (1977). Managers and leaders: Are they different?
Harvard Business Review, 55(3), 67–78, p. 67.
[4] Toor, S. U. R. (2011). Differentiating leadership from management: An
empirical investigation of leaders and managers. Leadership and
Management in Engineering, 11, 310–320.
[5] Toor, S. U. R. (2011). Differentiating leadership from management: An
empirical investigation of leaders and managers. Leadership and
Management in Engineering, 11, 310–320, p. 313.
[6] Toor, S. U. R. (2011). Differentiating leadership from management: An
empirical investigation of leaders and managers. Leadership and
Management in Engineering, 11, 310–320, p. 314.
[7] Toor, S. U. R. (2011). Differentiating leadership from management: An
empirical investigation of leaders and managers. Leadership and
Management in Engineering, 11, 310–320, p. 315.
7.1 Approaches to Leadership
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
1. Explain the trait approach to leadership.
2. Differentiate between Fred Fiedler’s contingency theory and Paul
Hersey and Kenneth Blanchard’s situational leadership theory as
situational approaches to leadership.
3. Understand the similarities and differences between Chester
Barnard’s functions of the executive and Kenneth Benne and Paul
Sheats’s classification of functional roles in groups as functional
approaches to leadership.
4. Compare and contrast Robert Blake and Jane Mouton’s
managerial grid and George Graen’s leader-member exchange
theory as relational approaches to leadership.
5. Explain James MacGregor Burns’s transformational approach to
leadership.
As with most major academic undertakings, there is little agreement in what
makes a leader. Since the earliest days of the study of business, there have been
discussions of leadership. However, leadership is hardly a discussion that
originated with the advent of the academic study of businesses. In fact, the
oldest-known text in the world, The Precepts of Ptah-hotep, was a treatise
written for the Pharaoh Isesi’s son (of the fifth dynasty in Egypt) about being an
effective pharaoh (or leader). [1] Although it’s relatively easy in hindsight to look
at how effective an organizational leader was based on her or his
accomplishments, determining whether or not someone will be an effective
leader prior to their ascension is a difficult task. To help organizations select the
“right” person for the leadership role, numerous scholars have come up with a
variety of ways to describe and explain leadership. According to Michael
Hackman and Craig Johnson, “Over the past 100 years, five primary approaches
for understanding and explaining leadership have evolved: the traits approach,
the situational approach, the functional approach, the relational approach, and
the transformational approach.” [2] The rest of this section explores these
different approaches to leadership.
Trait Approach
The first major approach to leadership is commonly referred to as the trait
approach to leadership, because the approach looks for a series of physical,
mental, or personality traits that effective leaders possess what neither
nonleaders nor ineffective leaders possess. We start with this approach to
leadership predominantly because it’s the oldest of the major approaches to
leadership and is an approach still very much in existence today. The first major
study to synthesize the trait literature was conducted by Ralph Stogdill in 1948. [3] In 1970, Stogdill reanalyzed the literature and found six basic categories of
characteristics associated with leadership: physical presence, social background,
intelligence/ ability, personality, task orientation, and social skills. [4] Table 7.2
contains a list of the personality traits from Stogdill’s 1970 study in addition to
work of other researchers who have discovered a variety of other traits
associated with leadership.
Table 7.2 Traits Associated with Leadership
Stogdill (1970)
• Adaptability
• Adjustment
• Assertiveness
• Alertness
• Creativity, originality
• Diplomacy
• Dominance
• Emotional balance
• Enthusiasm
• Extraversion
• Independence, nonconformity
• Objectivity, tough-mindedness
• Resourcefulness
• Self-confidence
• Sociability, interpersonal skills
• Strength of conviction
• Tolerance of stress
Mann (1959) [5]
• Adjustment
• Conservatism
• Dominance
• Extroversion
• Intelligence
• Masculinity
Kirkpatrick and Locke (1991) [6]
• Cognitive ability
• Confidence
• Drive
• Integrity
• Motivation
• Task knowledge
Lussier and Achua (2007) [7]
• Dominance
• Emotional intelligence
• Flexibility
• High energy
• Integrity
• Intelligence
• Internal locus of control
• Self-confidence
• Sensitivity to others
• Stability
From Table 7.2, you can start to see that research has found a variety of different
traits associated with leadership over the years. Notice that there is some
overlap, but each list is unique. In fact, one of the fundamental problems with
the trait approach to leadership is that research has provided a never-ending list
of personality traits associated with leadership, so no clear or replicable list of
traits exists.
Even communication researchers have examined the possible relationship
between leadership and various communication traits. In an experimental study
conducted by Sean Limon and Betty La France, [8] the researchers set out to see
if an individual’s level of three communication traits could predict leadership
emergence within a group. The three communication traits of interest within this
study were communication apprehension (“fear or anxiety associated with either
real or anticipated communication with another person or persons” [9]),
argumentativeness (“generally stable trait which predisposes the individual in
communication situations to advocate positions on controversial issues and to
attack verbally the positions which other people take on these issues” [10]), and
verbal aggressiveness (“attack one’s self-concept instead of, or in addition to,
one’s positions on a topic of communication” [11]). Ultimately, the researchers
found that an individual’s level of argumentativeness positively predicted an
individual’s likelihood of emerging as a leader, while an individual’s
communication apprehension negatively predicted an individual’s likelihood of
emerging as a leader. Verbal aggression, in this study, was found to have no
impact on an individual’s emergence as a leader. In other research, leader verbal
aggression was found to negatively impact employee level of satisfaction and
organizational commitment, while argumentativeness positively related to
employee level of satisfaction and organizational commitment. [12] These three
communication traits demonstrate that an individual leader’s communication
traits can have an impact on both an individual’s emergence as a leader and how
followers will perceive that leader.
The original notion that leaders were created through a magic checklist of
personality traits has fallen out of favor in the leadership community. [13]
However, more recent developments in leadership theory have been reintegrating
the importance of personality traits as important aspects of the process of
leadership. Scott Shane, in his book Born Entrepreneurs, Born Leaders: How
Genes Affect Your Work Life, [14] argues that while genetics may not cause
humans to become leaders or entrepreneurs, one’s genetic makeup probably
influences the likelihood that one would become a leader or entrepreneur in the
first place. In the same vein, Jessica Dinh and Robert Lord [15] have argued that
personality traits should be examined within specific leadership events instead of
as fundamental aspects of some concrete phenomenon called “leadership.” In
essence, Dinh and Lord argue that an individual’s personality traits may impact
how they behave within specific leadership situations, but that specific
personality traits may not be seen across all leaders in all leadership contexts.
Situational Approach
As trait approaches became more passé, new approaches to leadership began
emerging that theorized leadership was contingent on a variety of situational
factors (e.g., task to be completed, leader-follower relationships/interactions,
follower motivation/commitment). These new theories of leadership are
commonly referred to as the situational approaches. While numerous
leadership theorists embrace the situational approach, we’re going to briefly
examine the following: Fred Fiedler’s contingency theory and Paul Hersey and
Kenneth Blanchard’s situational-leadership theory.
Fiedler’s Contingency Theory of Leader Effectiveness
Fred Fiedler began developing his theory of leadership in the 1950s and 60s and
eventually called it the contingency theory of leader effectiveness. [16] In his
theory, Fiedler believed that leadership was a reflection of both the leader’s
personality and behavior, which were constant. Fiedler believed that leaders do
not change their leadership styles; rather, when situations change, leaders must
adapt their leadership strategies. Fiedler’s basic theory started with the notion
that leaders typically were either task oriented or relationship oriented. Task-
oriented leaders focused more on the task and accomplishing organizational
goals. Relationship-oriented leaders focused on creating positive interactions
with followers and establishing positive relationships based on mutual trust,
respect, and confidence.
To determine a leader’s preference for tasks or relationships, leaders are asked to
think about all the followers with whom they’ve worked and select the one
follower with whom they’ve had the most problems. By thinking about the
follower with whom the leader has had the most problems, it’s generally very
easy to determine if the leader is more task or relationship oriented because that
follower is generally the opposite. Fiedler termed this follower the leader’s least
preferred coworker (LPC).
Once a leader’s LPC is determined, Fiedler’s model asks leaders to examine
their situation favorableness, or the degree to which a leader can influence her or
his followers within a given situation. To determine situational favorableness,
leaders must examine three distinct aspects of their leadership style: leader-
follower relations, task structure, and position power.
Leader-Follower Relations
The first factor situation-favorableness leaders must attend to involves the nature
of their relationship with their followers. Leaders who have positive
relationships with their followers will have high levels of mutual trust, respect,
and confidence; whereas leaders with negative relationships with their followers
will have lower degrees of mutual trust, respect, and confidence. The more
positive a leader’s relationships with her or his followers, the more favorable the
situation will be for the leader.
Task Structure
Next, leaders must determine if the task at hand is one that is highly structured or
one that is unstructured. Highly structured tasks tend to be repetitive and
unambiguous, so they are more easily understood by followers, which leads to a
more favorable situation for the leader. If tasks are unstructured, then the leader
will have followers who are less likely to understand the task, making for a less
favorable leadership situation.
Position Power
Lastly, leaders need to know whether they are in a position of strong or weak
power. Leaders who have the ability to exert power over followers (reward and
punish followers) will have greater ability to exert the leader’s will on followers,
which is more favorable for the leader. Leaders who do not have the ability to
exert power over followers are in a much less favorable leadership situation.
Situational Favorableness
When one combines the three factors (leader-follower relations, task structure,
and position power), the basic contingency model proposed by Fiedler emerges.
Figure 7.1 illustrates the basic model proposed.
Figure 7.1 Fiedler’s Contingency Model
In this model, you can see that the combination of the three factors creates a
continuum of most favorable to least favorable for the leader. Notice that there
are eight basic levels ranging from the left side of the model, which is more
favorable, to the right side of the model, which is least favorable. One area of
concern that can impact the usability of this model is ultimately a leader’s LPC.
If the situation matches a leader’s LPC, the leader is lucky and he or she doesn’t
need to alter anything. However, often the situation leads to an imbalance
between the leader’s LPC and the appropriate leader behavior necessitated by a
situation. In this case, either the leader can attempt to alter her or his leadership
style, which is not likely to lead to a positive outcome, or the leader can attempt
to change the situation to match her or his LPC style, which will be more likely
to lead to a positive outcome.
Hersey and Blanchard’s Situational Leadership Theory
Like Fielder’s contingency model, the basic model proposed by Paul Hersey and
Kenneth Blanchard is also divided into task (leader directive behavior) and
relational (leader supportive behavior) dimensions. [17] However, Hersey and
Blanchard’s theory of leadership starts with the basic notion that not all
followers need the same task- or relationship-based leadership, so the type of
leadership a leader should utilize with a follower depends on the follower’s
readiness. Figure 7.2 shows the basic model.
Figure 7.2 Situational Leadership Model
In the basic model seen in Figure 7.2, you have both dimensions of leadership
behavior (supportive and directive). Based on these two dimensions, Hersey and
Blanchard propose four basic types of leadership that leaders can employ with
various followers depending on the situational needs of the followers: directing,
coaching, supporting, and delegating. [18]
Directing
The first type of leader discussed in Hersey and Blanchard’s situational
leadership theory is the directing leader (originally termed telling). A directing
leader is needed by followers who lack both the skill and the motivation to
perform a task. Hersey and Blanchard recommend against supportive behavior at
this point, because the supporting behavior may be perceived as a reward by the
follower. Instead, these followers need a lot of task-directed communication and
oversight.
Coaching
The second type of leader discussed in Hersey and Blanchard’s situational
leadership theory is the coaching leader (originally termed selling). The
coaching leader is necessary when followers have a high need for direction and a
high need of support. Followers who are unable to perform or lack the
confidence to perform the task but are committed to the task and/or organization
need a coaching leader. In this case, the leader needs to have more direct control
over the follower’s attempt to accomplish the task, but the leader should also
provide a lot of encouragement along the way.
Supporting
Next, you have followers who still require low levels of direction from leaders
but who need more support from their leaders. Hersey and Blanchard see these
followers as individuals who more often than not have requisite skills but still
need their leader for motivation. As such, supporting leaders should set about
creating organizational environments that foster these followers’ motivations.
Delegating
Lastly, when a follower is both motivated and skilled, he or she needs a
delegating leader. In this case, a leader can easily delegate tasks to this
individual with the expectation that the follower will accomplish the tasks.
However, leaders should not completely avoid supportive behavior because if a
follower feels that he or she is being completely ignored, the relationship
between the leader and follower could sour.
Functional Approach
In both the trait and situational approaches to leadership, the primary outcome
called “leadership” is a series of characteristics that help create the concept. The
functional approach, on the other hand, posits that it’s not a series of leadership
characteristics that make a leader, but rather a leader is someone who looks like,
acts like, and communicates like a leader. To help us understand the functional
approach to leadership, we’ll examine three different sets of researchers
commonly associated with this approach: Chester Barnard’s functions of the
executive and Kenneth Benne and Paul Sheats’s classification of functional roles
in groups.
Barnard’s Functions of the Executive
The first major functional theorist was an organizational researcher by the name
of Chester Barnard, who published a groundbreaking book in 1938 titled The
Functions of the Executive. [19] It is from this book’s title that the functional
approach to leadership gets its name. In this book, Barnard argues that
executives have three basic functions.
Formulating Organizational Purposes and Objectives
The first function a leader should have is the creation (or formulation) of the
organization’s basic purpose and its objectives. In essence, leaders should be
able to form a clear vision for the organization and then set about creating the
tasks necessary to help the organization accomplish that vision.
Securing Essential Services from Other Members
The second function of a leader according to Barnard’s framework was securing
essential services from other members. Barnard realized that one of the inherent
aspects of leadership was the leader’s ability to get the services he or she needs
from followers. For example, it’s not just about hiring people and setting them
about their tasks. Instead, it’s about hiring people and then inspiring them in an
effort to get the best out of them. In an organization where someone has a
position of leadership but is not at the top of the hierarchy, leadership also
becomes important in an individual’s ability to reach out to other teams or
divisions and secure resources and services to help the leader’s team accomplish
its goals. Basically, leaders must actively work to help others accomplish the
organization’s goals.
Establishing and Maintaining a System of Communication
According to Barnard, the first function of an executive should be to establish
and maintain a system of communication. As such, Barnard came up with seven
specific rules to help executives create a system of communication within their
organizations:
1. The channels of communication should be definite.
2. Everyone should know of the channels of communication.
3. Everyone should have access to the formal channels of communication.
4. Lines of communication should be as short and as direct as possible.
5. Competence of persons serving as communication centers should be
adequate.
6. The line of communication should not be interrupted when the organization
is functioning.
7. Every communication should be authenticated. [20]
From this perspective, leaders have a fundamental task in creating and
controlling both the formal and informal communication systems within the
organization. In fact, Chester Barnard was one of the first researchers to really
extol the importance of understanding both the formal and informal
communication within an organization.
Benne and Sheats’s Classification of Functional Roles in Groups
Kenneth Benne and Paul Sheats did not exactly set out to create a tool for
analyzing and understanding the functional aspects of leadership. Instead, their
1948 article titled “Functional Roles of Group Members” was designed to
analyze how people interact and behave within small-group or team settings. [21]
The basic premise of Benne and Sheats’s 1948 article was that different people
in different group situations will take on a variety of roles within a group. Some
of these roles will be prosocial and help the group accomplish its basic goals,
while other roles are clearly antisocial and can negatively impact a group’s
ability to accomplish its basic goals. Benne and Sheats categorized the more
prosocial roles as belonging to one of two groups: task and group building and
maintenance roles. Task roles are those taken on by various group members to
ensure that the group’s task is accomplished. Group-building and maintenance
roles are those roles people take on that are “designed to alter or maintain the
group way of working, to strengthen, regulate and perpetuate the group as a
group.” [22] The more antisocial (individual) roles are roles group members take
on that are not relevant to either the group or the task at hand. Individuals
embodying these roles will actually prevent the group from accomplishing its
task in a timely and efficient manner. We will go into more detail about the
specific nature of these various roles in Chapter 9. For now let’s just look at
Table 7.3.
Table 7.3 Prosocial and Antisocial Group Roles
Prosocial Group Roles Antisocial Group Roles
Task Roles
• Initiator-contributor
• Information seeker
• Opinion seeker
• Information giver
• Opinion giver
• Elaborator
• Coordinator
• Orienter
• Evaluator-critic
• Energizer
Individual Roles
• Aggressor
• Blocker
• Recognition seeker
• Self-confessor
• Procedural technician
• Recorder
• Playboy
• Dominator
• Help seeker
• Special-interest pleader
Group-Building and Maintenance Roles
• Encourager
• Harmonizer
• Compromiser
• Gatekeeper/expediter
• Standard setter/ego ideal
• Group observer/commentator
• Follower
You may be wondering how these actually relate to the notion of leadership. To
help us understand why these roles are functions of leadership, let’s turn to the
explanation provided by Michael Hackman and Craig Johnson:
“Roles associated with the successful completion of the task and the
development and maintenance of group interaction help facilitate goal
achievement and the satisfaction of group needs. These roles serve a
leadership function. Roles associated with the satisfaction of individual
needs do not contribute to the goals of the group as a whole and are usually
not associated with leadership. By engaging in task-related and group-
building/maintenance role behaviors (and avoiding individual role
behavior), a group member can perform leadership functions and increase
the likelihood that he or she will achieve leadership status with the group.” [23]
In essence, leaders are people who perform task and relational roles while people
who are nonleaders tend to focus on their own desires and needs and not the
needs of the group itself. As such, each of the task and building/maintenance
roles can be considered functions of effective leadership.
Relational Approach
The next approach to leadership is called the relational approach because it
focuses not on traits, characteristics, or functions of leaders and followers, but
instead the relational approach focuses on the types of relationships that develop
between leaders and followers. To help us understand the relational approach to
leadership, let’s examine two different perspectives on this approach: Robert
Blake and Jane Mouton’s managerial grid and George Graen’s leader-member
exchange theory.
Blake and Mouton’s Managerial Grid
The first major relational approach we are going to discuss is Blake and
Mouton’s managerial grid. [24] While the grid is called a “managerial” grid, the
subtitle clearly specifies that it is a tool for effective leadership. In the original
grid created in 1965, the two researchers were concerned with whether or not a
leader was concerned with her or his followers or with production. In the version
we’ve recreated for you in Figure 7.3, we’ve relabeled the two as “concern for
relationships” and “concern for tasks” to be consistent with other leadership
theories we’ve discussed in this chapter. The basic idea is that on each line of the
axis (x-axis refers to task-focused leadership; y-axis refers to relationship-
focused leadership), there are nine steps. Where an individual leader’s focus for
both relationships and tasks lies will dictate where he or she falls as a leader on
the managerial grid. As such, we end up with five basic management styles:
impoverished, authority compliance, country club, team, and middle of the road.
Let’s look at each of these in turn.
Figure 7.3 Blake and Mouton’s Managerial Grid
Impoverished Management
The basic approach a leader takes under the impoverished management style is
completely hands off. This leader places someone in a job or assigns that person
a task and then just expects it to be accomplished without any kind of oversight.
In Blake and Mouton’s words, “The person managing 1,1 has learned to ‘be out
of it,’ while remaining in the organization…[this manager’s] imprint is like a
shadow on the sand. It passes over the ground, but leaves no permanent mark.” [25]
Authority-Compliance Management
The second leader is at the 9,1 coordinates in the leadership grid. The authority-
compliance management style has a high concern for tasks but a low concern for
establishing or fostering relationships with her or his followers. Consider this
leader the closest to Frederick Taylor’s scientific-management style of
leadership. All the decision making is done by the leader and then dictated to her
or his followers. Furthermore, this type of leader is very likely to micromanage
or closely oversee and criticize followers as they set about accomplishing the
tasks given to them.
Country Club Management
The third style of manager is called the country club management style and is the
polar opposite of the authority-compliance manager. In this case, the manager is
almost completely concerned with establishing or fostering relationships with
her or his followers, and the task(s) needing to be accomplished disappears into
the background. When assigning tasks to be accomplished, this leader empowers
her or his followers and believes that the followers will accomplish the task and
do it well without any kind of oversight. This type of leader also adheres to the
advice of Thumper from the classic Disney movie Bambi: “If you can’t say
anything nice, don’t say anything at all.”
Team Management
The next leadership style is at the high ends of concern for both task and
relationships and is referred to as the team-management style. This type of
leader realizes that “effective integration of people with production is possible by
involving them and their ideas in determining the conditions and strategies of
work. Needs of people to think, to apply mental effort in productive work and to
establish sound and mature relationships with one another are utilized to
accomplish organizational requirements.” [26] Under this type of management,
leaders believe that it is their purpose as leaders to foster environments that will
encourage creativity, task accomplishment, and employee morale/motivation.
This form of management is probably most closely aligned with Douglas
McGregor’s Theory Y, which was discussed in Chapter 3.
Middle-of-the-Road Management
The final form of management discussed by Blake and Mouton was what has
been deemed the middle-of-the-road management style. The reasoning behind
this style of management is the assumption that “people are practical, they
realize some effort will have to be exerted on the job. Also, by yielding some
push for production and considering attitudes and feelings, people accept the
situation and are more or less 'satisfied.’” [27] In the day-to-day practicality of
this approach, these leaders believe that any kind of extreme is not realistic, so
finding some middle balance is ideal. If, and when, an imbalance occurs, these
leaders seek out ways to eliminate the imbalance and get back to some state of
moderation.
Graen’s Leader-Member Exchange Theory
Starting in the mid-1970s, George Graen proposed a different type of theory for
understanding leadership. Graen’s theory of leadership proposed that leadership
Figure 7.4 Domains
of Leadership
must be understood as existing in three distinct domains: follower, leader, and
relationship (Figure 7.4). [28] The basic idea is that leaders and followers exist
within a dyadic relationship, so understanding leadership must examine the
nature of that relationship.
When examining the leader-member exchange (LMX)
relationship, one must realize that leaders have only limited
amounts of social, personal, and organizational resources,
so leaders must be selective in how they distribute these
resources to their followers. Ideally, every follower would
have the same type of exchange relationship with his or her
leader, but for a variety of reasons some followers receive
more resources from a leader, while others receive fewer
resources from a leader. Ultimately, high-quality LMX relationships are those
“characterized by greater input in decisions, mutual support, informal influence,
trust, and greater negotiating latitude,” whereas low-quality LMX
relationships “are characterized by less support, more formal supervision, little
or no involvement in decisions, and less trust and attention from the leader.” [29]
Whether an individual follower is in a high-quality or low-quality LMX
relationship has a strong impact on their view of the organization itself.
Followers in high-quality LMX relationships (also referred to as in-groups) have
higher perceptions of leader credibility and a greater regard for their leaders
compared to those followers in low-quality LMX relationships (also referred to
as out-groups). Not only does the nature of the relationship impact a follower’s
perceptions of her or his leader, but research has shown that high-LMX
relationships lead to greater productivity, job satisfaction, and organizational
commitment. [30] Overall, research has shown many positive benefits for
followers who have high-LMX relationships, including the following:
More productive (produce higher quality and quantity of work)
Greater levels of job satisfaction
Higher levels of employee motivation
Greater satisfaction with immediate supervisor
Greater organizational commitment
Lower voluntary and involuntary turnover levels
Greater organizational participation
Greater satisfaction with the communication practices of the organization
Clearer understanding about her or his role within the organization
Greater exhibition of organizational citizenship behaviors
Greater long-term success in one’s career
Greater organizational commitment
More desirable work assignments
More attention and support from organizational leaders [31] [32] [33]
One of the big questions that has arisen in the leadership literature is “how do
leaders select followers to enter into a high-LMX relationship?” One possible
explanation for why leaders choose some followers and not other followers for
high-LMX relationships stems from the follower’s communication style. In a
2007 study, researchers examined the relationship between follower
communication and whether or not they perceived themselves to be in a high-
LMX relationship with their immediate supervisor. [34] Not surprisingly,
individuals who reported higher levels of assertiveness, responsiveness,
friendliness, cognitive flexibility, attentiveness, and a generally relaxed nature
were more likely to report having a high-LMX relationship. One variable that
was negatively related to the likelihood of having a high-LMX relationship was
a follower’s level of communication apprehension.
Transformational Approach
The final approach to leadership is one that clearly is popular among
organizational theorists. Although the term transformational leadership was
coined by James Downton in 1973, the term was truly popularized by political
sociologist James MacGregor Burns in 1978. [35] [36] In a 2001 study conducted
by Kevin Lowe and William Gardner, the researchers examined the types of
articles that had been published in the premier academic journal on the subject of
leadership, Leadership Quarterly. [37] The researchers examined the types of
research published in the journal over the previous ten years, which found that
one-third of the articles published within the journal examined transformational
leadership.
To help understand leadership from this approach, it’s important to understand
the two sides of leadership: transactional and transformational leadership. On the
one hand you have transactional leadership, which focuses on an array of
exchanges that can occur between a leader and her or his followers. The most
obvious way transactional leadership is seen in corporate America is the use of
promotions and pay raises. Transactional leaders offer promotions or pay raises
to those followers who meet or exceed the leader’s goals. Rewards are seen as a
tool that a leader utilizes to get the best performance out of her or his followers.
If the rewards no longer exist, followers will no longer have the external
motivation to meet or exceed goals.
Transformational leadership, on the other hand, can be defined as the “process
whereby a person engages with others and creates a connection that raises the
level of motivation and morality in both the leader and the follower.” [38] In
essence, transformational leadership is more than just getting followers to meet
or exceed goals because the leader provides the followers rewards. Bernie Bass
proposed a more complete understanding of transformational leadership and
noted three factors of transformational leadership: charismatic and inspirational
leadership, intellectual stimulation, and individualized consideration. [39] [40]
Charismatic and Inspirational Leadership
The first factor Bass described for transformational leaders was charismatic and
inspirational leadership. Charisma is a unique quality that, Bass argued, not
everyone possesses. Those who are charismatic have the ability to influence and
inspire large numbers of people to accomplish specific organizational goals or
tasks. Where the transactional leader rewards followers for accomplishing tasks,
transformational leaders inspire their followers to accomplish goals and tasks
with no promise of rewards. Instead, followers are inspired by a transformational
leader to accomplish goals and tasks because they share the leader’s vision for
the future. Bass later made inspirational motivation a unique factor unto itself to
clearly separate its impact from charismatic leadership. [41]
Related Research
Measuring Transformational and Charismatic Leadership: Why Isn’t
Charisma Measured?
By Kenneth J. Levine, Robert A. Muenchen, and Abby M. Brooks
Although a lot of organizational researchers talk about the notion of
transformational research, only a handful of research measures are commonly
utilized to examine the concept. One commonly used measure of charismatic
leadership was created by Jay Conger and Rabindra Kanungo and measures
six factors they believe contribute to charismatic leadership: vision and
articulation, environmental sensitivity, unconventional behavior, personal
risk, sensitivity to member needs, and not maintaining the status quo. [42]
Only two of the items on this measure have anything to do with how a leader
actually communicates. Unfortunately, this is a common problem with most
measures that allegedly examine transformational leadership.
The purpose of Levine, Muenchen, and Brooks’s study was to create a better
understanding of the communicative aspects of charisma. To do this, the
researchers asked participants two simple questions. The first question asked
participants was “How do you define leadership?” This method led to five
specific categories of charisma:
1. Outgoing personality (“This person is strong, charming, confident,
humorous, understanding, is a quality individual, shows good sense, is
influential, possesses a good attitude and is a good speaker.” [43])
2. Ability to listen, empathize, and understand people
3. Ability to speak well
4. Appropriate nonverbal behaviors
5. Personal presence (“someone who is powerful, loud, understanding,
enthusiastic, and has the ability to put others at ease.” [44])
The second research question was “What communicative behaviors does a
charismatic person demonstrate?” This method also yielded five
communicative behavioral patterns:
1. Having the ability to communicate with a wide range of different
stakeholders.
2. The ability to set goals and persuade others to follow them.
3. Demonstrate effective emotions through both verbal and nonverbal
behavior.
4. A charismatic leader can get everyone to see the task at hand and
motivate her or his followers to accomplish that task.
5. A charismatic leader is one who believes in participative decision
making.
Clearly these five factors of both leadership and charisma cannot be easily
summed up in two items on a single research measure as is seen in Conger
and Kanungo’s measure. Ultimately, the researchers determined that the
commonly utilized measures of transformational leadership are not adequate
measures of charisma, so the current research on the subject of
transformational leadership is lacking and needs further study.
Intellectual Stimulation
The second characteristic of transformational leaders is intellectual stimulation.
In essence, a transformational leader “stimulates followers to be creative and
innovative and to challenge their own beliefs and values as well as those of the
leader and the organization.” [45] While both transactional and transformational
leaders engage in intellectual stimulation themselves, the purpose of this
intellectual stimulation differs. Transactional leaders tend to focus on how best
to keep their organizations and the systems within their organizations
functioning. Very little thought to innovation or improving the organization
occurs because transactional leaders focus on maintaining everything as is.
Transformational leaders, on the other hand, are always looking for new and
innovative ways to manage problems. As such, they also encourage those
around them to “think outside the box” in an effort to make things better.
Individualized Consideration
The last factor of transformational leadership is individualized consideration, or
seeing followers as individuals in need of individual development.
Transformational leaders evaluate “followers’ potential both to perform their
present job and to hold future positions of greater responsibility. The leader sets
examples and assigns tasks on an individual basis to followers to help
significantly alter their abilities and motivations as well as to satisfy immediate
organizational needs.” [46] The goal of this individualized consideration is to
help individual followers maximize their potential, which maximizes the leader’s
use of her or his resources at the same time.
Greenleaf’s Servant Leadership
In 1970, Robert Greenleaf wrote a self-published book titled The Servant as
Leader. [47] In this book, Greenleaf proposed a new way of understanding and
talking about leadership. Greenleaf argued that effective and ethical leaders are
ones who start from a position of servitude toward both the organization and its
stakeholders. When someone approaches leadership from this perspective, how
she or he will view herself or himself is radically changed from someone who
sees the role of organizations fundamentally differently from those who do not.
Servant leaders approach the world from the basic idea that the role of
organizations is to produce a better tomorrow. As such, servant leaders
fundamentally see their role as a leader as one that has been bestowed upon and
entrusted to them. However, Greenleaf’s notion that someone approaches
leadership from this servanthood perspective is one that is more inherently a
personality trait than it is a management style.
Another contemporary drawn to Greenleaf’s ideas of servant leadership was
Larry Spears. Spears originally came to read Greenleaf’s writings about servant
leadership while working on the staff of Friends Journal, a Quaker publication.
He eventually left his position to become the CEO of the Greenleaf Center. In
2008, Spears left the Greenleaf Center to create the Spears Center for Servant
Leadership. One of Spears’s (1998, 2002) most notable contributions to the
literature on servant leadership has been the ten characteristics of a servant
leader: [48] [49] [50]
1. Listening. The extent to which a leader listens to both her or his followers’
wills and her or his own internal voice coupled with periods of reflection.
2. Empathy. The ability to accept people as individuals while also rejecting
their inappropriate behavior and subpar performance.
3. Healing. The extent to which a leader has the ability to help people who
have suffered from crushed spirits and emotional injuries to heal and
become whole again.
4. Awareness. The extent to which a leader is self-aware and has the ability to
see situations holistically.
5. Persuasion. The extent to which a leader relies on her or his ability to
convince others to a position instead of using her or his position of
authority to coerce others.
6. Conceptualization. The extent to which a leader can develop her or his
ability, along with her or his followers’ ability, to think big and “dream
great dreams.”
7. Foresight. The extent to which a leader has the ability to see the lessons of
the past, the realities of the present, and potential consequences of decisions
in the future.
8. Stewardship. The extent to which a leader sees every individual’s part in
the whole while making a commitment to, first and foremost, serve.
9. Commitment to the growth of people. The extent to which a leader sees
the potential of all organization members and helps them nurture their
personal, professional, and spiritual growth.
10. Building community. The extent to which a leader identifies the means of
building a community among members of the organization and its various
stakeholders.
Although there has been quite a bit of buy-in within corporate America, there
really is a lack of objective research examining the effectiveness of servant
leadership. [51] Denise Linda Parris and Jon Welty Peachey (2013) set out to
examine the degree to which scholarly research supported the theoretical
assumptions of servant leadership. The researchers analyzed eleven qualitative
studies, twenty-seven quantitative studies, and one mixed-methods study for a
total of thirty-nine studies that were published in academic, peer-reviewed
journals from 2004 to 2011. Without going into too much detail at this point,
here are some of the major conclusions the researchers came to after analyzing
the thirty-nine studies:
Servant-leadership (SL) is accepted and practiced in multiple cultures.
Spears’s notions of ten factors of servant leadership are a strong explanation
of the concept.
SL leads to increases in both leadership trust and organizational trust.
SL fosters organizational citizenship behaviors.
SL leads to increases in both collaboration and team effectiveness.
SL leads to an increase in job satisfaction and commitment.
SL creates a positive work climate that fosters employee creativity and
helping behaviors.
SL decreases employee turnover.
As you can see from these eight findings, servant leadership has a number of
different positive outcomes in the organizational environment.
KEY TAKEAWAY
The trait approach to leadership is the oldest approach to
leadership and theorizes that certain individuals are born with
specific personality or communication traits that enable
leadership. As such, scholars who take a trait approach have
examined thousands of possible traits that may have an impact
on successful or unsuccessful leadership practices.
The situational approach to leadership focuses on specific
organizational contexts or situations that enable leadership. Fred
Fiedler’s contingency theory examines an individual’s preference
for either tasks or relationships and then theorizes that leaders
who find themselves in situations that favor that type of leadership
will be fine, while leaders who are out of balance need to either
change the situation or adjust their leadership styles. Paul Hersey
and Kenneth Blanchard’s theory of situational leadership, on the
other hand, examines how leadership is dependent upon whether
a follower is someone being developed or someone who has
already been developed. New followers, Hersey and Blanchard
theorize, need more guidance, so leaders should focus on the
task at hand and not on relationships with these followers. Old
followers, on the other hand, need little guidance and little
relationship building.
The functional approach to leadership posits that a leader is
someone who looks like, acts like, and communicates like a
leader. Chester Barnard’s functions of the executive posits that
leaders should engage in three specific functions: (1) formulating
organizational purposes and objectives, (2) securing essential
services from other members, and (3) establishing and
maintaining a system of communication. A second functional
approach is Kenneth Benne and Paul Sheats’s classification of
functional roles in groups, which examines how different people
take on various group/team roles in an effort to keep the
group/team striving toward a specific goal. Each of the roles that
group/team members take on serves a specific function in the
group/team decision-making and implementing process.
The relational approach to leadership theorizes that leadership is
a matter of building and maintaining relationships with one’s
followers. Robert Blake and Jane Mouton’s managerial grid
examines the intersection of relationship-oriented and task-
oriented leader perspectives. Ultimately, Blake and Mouton
propose five distinct types of leadership: (1) impoverished (low
task, low relational), (2) authority-compliance (high task, low
relational), (3) country club (low task, high relational), (4) team
(high task, high relational), and (5) middle-of-the-road (moderate
task, moderate relational). A second relational approach is
George Graen’s leader-member exchange (LMX) theory, which
looks at the exchange relationship between a follower and a
leader. Under LMX theory, leaders take on protégés in an
interpersonal communicative relationship that enables a follower
to succeed within an organization.
The transformational approach to leadership espoused by James
MacGregor Burns looks at leadership as a comparison to the
traditional transactional model of leadership. In the transactional
model, leaders promise to punish or reward followers in order
gain support. Transformational leadership, on the other hand,
occurs when a leader utilizes communication in an effort to
increase follower morale, motivation, and performance to
accomplish organizational goals.
Charisma :
Transformational Leadership:
Functional Approach:
EXERCISES
1. Fill out the Least Preferred Coworker
Scale (http://tinyurl.com/myrcrlx). After completing the measure,
what did you learn about your own approach to leadership?
According to contingency theory, what leadership situations will
you succeed in, and in what leadership situations will you need to
alter either the situation or your own leadership behavior?
2. Looking at Blake and Mouton’s managerial grid, which type of
leadership style do you respond best to? Why do you think you
respond best to this leadership style? Do you think you lead
others in this fashion? Why or why not?
3. Create a list of at least five transactional leaders and five
transformational leaders. What differences do you see between
these two lists and the types of organizational accomplishments
they’ve had?
KEY TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
Unique leadership trait in which an individual has the ability to influence and inspire large numbers of people to accomplish specific organizational goals or tasks.
Leadership approach that utilizes communication in an effort to increase follower morale, motivation, and performance to accomplish organizational goals.
Approach to leadership that posits it’s not a series of leadership characteristics that make a leader, but rather a leader is
High-Quality LMX Relationships:
Leadership:
Low-Quality LMX Relationships:
Manage:
Management:
Relational Approach:
Situational Approaches:
Trait Approach:
Transactional Leadership:
someone who looks like, acts like, and communicates like a leader.
Leader-member-exchange relationship marked by follower access to decision making, support, influence, and occupational success.
The modification of attitudes, beliefs, and values of a group to further an organization’s goals, mission, and vision.
Leader-member-exchange relationships marked by follower supervision, lack of leadership support, and little to no access to decision making, which leads to lower levels of organizational success.
The communicative process where an individual or group of individuals helps those below them in an organizational hierarchical structure accomplish the organization’s goals.
Those individuals who use communication to help an organization achieve its goals through the proper utilization of the organization’s resources (e.g., employees, facilities).
Approach to leadership that emphasizes the types of relationships that develop between leaders and followers.
Approach to leadership that studies leadership as a phenomenon of differing organizational contexts and situations that lead or enable different types of leadership behavior.
Approach to leadership studies that searches for a series of physical, mental, or personality traits that effective leaders possess that neither nonleaders nor ineffective leaders possess.
Leadership that focuses on an array of exchanges that can occur between a leader and her or his followers in an effort to gain follower support.
[1] Wrench, J. S. (2013). How strategic workplace communication can
save your organization. In J. S. Wrench (Ed.), Workplace communication
for the 21st century: Tools and strategies that impact the bottom line: Vol.
2. External workplace communication (pp. 1–37). Santa Barbara, CA:
Praeger.
[2] Hackman, M. S., & Johnson, C. E. (2009). Leadership: A
communication perspective (5th ed.). Long Grove, IL: Waveland, p. 72.
Emphasis in original.
[3] Stogdill, R. M. (1948). Personal factors associated with leadership: A
survey of the literature. Journal of Psychology, 25, 35–71.
[4] Bass, B. M. (1990). Bass and Stogdill’s handbook of leadership:
Theory, research, and managerial applications (Rev. ed.). New York, NY:
Free Press.
[5] Mann, R. D. (1959). A review of the relationship between personality
and performance in small groups. Psychological Bulletin, 56, 241–270.
[6] Kirkpatrick, S. A., & Locke, E. A. (1991). Leadership: Do traits matter?
The Executive, 5, 48–60.
[7] Lussier, R. N., & Achua, C. F. (2007). Leadership: Theory, application,
skill development (3rd ed.). Mason, OH: Thomson/South-Western.
[8] Limon, M. S., & La France, B. H. (2005). Communication traits and
leadership emergence: Examining the impact of argumentativeness,
communication apprehension, and verbal aggressiveness in work
groups. Communication Quarterly, 70, 123–133.
[9] McCroskey, J. C. (1984). The communication apprehensive
perspective. In J. A. Daly & J. C. McCroskey (Eds.), Avoiding
communication: Shyness, reticence, and communication apprehension
(pp. 13–38). Beverly Hills, CA: Sage, p. 13.
[10] Infante, D. A., & Rancer, A. S. (1982). A conceptualization and
measure of argumentativeness. Journal of Personality Assessment, 46,
72–80, p. 72
[11] Infante, D. A., & Wigley, C. J. (1986). Verbal aggressiveness: An
interpersonal model and measure. Communication Monographs, 53, 61–
69.
[12] de Vries, R. E., Bakker-Pieper, A., & Oostenveld, W. (2010).
Leadership = communication? The relations of leaders’ communication
styles with leadership styles, knowledge sharing and leadership
outcomes. Journal of Business Psychology, 25, 367–380. doi:
10.1007/s10869-009-9140-2
[13] Dinh, J. E., & Lord, R. G. (2012). Implications of dispositional and
process views of traits for individual difference research in leadership.
Leadership Quarterly, 23(4), 651–669. doi:10.1016/j.leaqua.2012.03.003
[14] Shane, S. (2010). Born entrepreneurs, born leaders: How your
genes affect your work life. New York, NY: Oxford University Press.
[15] Zaccaro, S. J. (2007). Trait-based perspectives of leadership.
American Psychologist, 62(1), 6–16. doi:10.1037/0003-066X.62.1.6
[16] Fiedler, F. E. (1967). A theory of leadership effectiveness. New York,
NY: McGraw-Hill.
[17] Hersey, P., & Blanchard, K. H. (1969). Life cycle theory of leadership.
Training and Development Journal, 23(5), 26–34.
[18] Hersey, P., Blanchard, K. H., & Johnson, D. E. (2000). Management
of organizational behavior: Leading human resources (8th ed.). Upper
Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall.
[19] Barnard, C. I. (1938). The functions of the executive. Cambridge,
MA: Harvard University Press.
[20] Barnard, C. I. (1938). The functions of the executive. Cambridge,
MA: Harvard University Press, pp. 175–80.
[21] Benne, K. D., & Sheats, P. (2007). Functional roles of group
members. Group Facilitation: A Research and Applications Journal, 8,
30–35. (Reprinted from Journal of Social Issues, 4, 41–49)
[22] Benne, K. D., & Sheats, P. (2007). Functional roles of group
members. Group Facilitation: A Research and Applications Journal, 8,
30–35, p. 31. (Reprinted from Journal of Social Issues, 4, 41–49)
[23] Hackman, M. S., & Johnson, C. E. (2009). Leadership: A
communication perspective (5th ed.). Long Grove, IL: Waveland, p. 89.
[24] Blake, R., & Mouton, J. (1964). The managerial grid: The key to
leadership excellence. Houston, TX: Gulf.
[25] Blake, R., & Mouton, J. (2011). The managerial grid. In W. E.
Natemeyer & P. Hersey (Eds.), Classics of organizational behavior (4th
ed., pp. 308–322). (Reprinted from The managerial grid: The key to
leadership excellence. Houston, TX: Gulf), pp. 315–316.
[26] Blake, R., & Mouton, J. (2011). The managerial grid. In W. E.
Natemeyer & P. Hersey (Eds.), Classics of organizational behavior (4th
ed., pp. 308–322). (Reprinted from The managerial grid: The key to
leadership excellence. Houston, TX: Gulf), p. 317.
[27] Blake, R., & Mouton, J. (2011). The managerial grid. In W. E.
Natemeyer & P. Hersey (Eds.), Classics of organizational behavior (4th
ed., pp. 308–322). (Reprinted from The managerial grid: The key to
leadership excellence. Houston, TX: Gulf), p. 316. Emphasis in original.
[28] Graen, G. B., & Uhl-Bien, M. (1995). Relationship-based approach to
leadership: Development of leader-member exchange (LMX) theory of
leadership over 25 years: Applying a multi-level multi-domain
perspective. Leadership Quarterly, 6, 219–247.
[29] Lussier, R. N., & Achua, C. F. (2007). Leadership: Theory,
application, skill development (3rd ed.). Mason, OH: Thomson/South-
Western, p. 254.
[30] Gagnon, M. A., & Michael, J. H. (2004). Outcomes of perceived
supervisor support for wood production employees. Forest Products
Journal, 54, 172–178.
[31] Gagnon, M. A., & Michael, J. H. (2004). Outcomes of perceived
supervisor support for wood production employees. Forest Products
Journal, 54, 172–178.
[32] Lussier, R. N., & Achua, C. F. (2007). Leadership: Theory,
application, skill development (3rd ed.). Mason, OH: Thomson/South-
Western.
[33] Gagnon, M. A., & Michael, J. H. (2004). Outcomes of perceived
supervisor support for wood production employees. Forest Products
Journal, 54, 172–178.
[34] Madlock, P. E., Martin, M. M., Bogdan, L., & Ervin, M. (2007). The
impact of communication traits on leader-member exchange. Human
Communication, 10, 451–464.
[35] Downton, J. V. (1973). Rebel leadership: Commitment and charisma
in the revolutionary process. New York, NY: Free Press.
[36] Burns, J. M. (1978). Leadership. New York, NY: Harper Collins.
[37] Lowe, K. B., & Gardner, W. L. (2001). Ten years of the Leadership
Quarterly: Contributions and challenges for the future. Leadership
Quarterly, 11, 459–514.
[38] Northhouse, P. G. (2007). Leadership: Theory and practice (4th ed.).
Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage, p. 176.
[39] Bass, B. M. (1985). Leadership: Good, better, best. Organizational
Dynamics, 13(3), 26–40.
[40] Bass, B. M. (1985). Leadership and performance beyond
expectations. New York, NY: Free Press.
[41] Bass, B. M. (1998). Transformational leadership: Industrial, military,
and educational impact. Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum.
[42] Conger, J. A., & Kanungo, R. N. (1994). Charismatic leadership in
organization: Perceived behavioral attributes and their measurement.
Journal of Organizational Behavior, 15, 439–452.
[43] Levine, K. J., Muenchen, R. A., & Brooks, A. M. (2010). Measuring
transformational and charismatic leadership: Why isn’t charisma
measured? Communication Monographs, 77, 576–591, p. 584.
[44] Levine, K. J., Muenchen, R. A., & Brooks, A. M. (2010). Measuring
transformational and charismatic leadership: Why isn’t charisma
measured? Communication Monographs, 77, 576–591, p. 585.
[45] Northhouse, P. G. (2007). Leadership: Theory and practice (4th ed.).
Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage, p. 183.
[46] Bass, B. M. (1985). Leadership: Good, better, best. Organizational
Dynamics, 13(3), 26–40, p. 35.
[47] Greenleaf, R. K. (1970). The servant as leader. Indianapolis, IN:
Robert K. Greenleaf Center.
[48] Spears, L. C. (1998). Insights on leadership: Service, stewardship,
spirit, and servant leadership. New York, NY: Wiley. p. 584
[49] Spears, L. C. (2002). Tracing the past, present, and future of
servant-leadership. In L. C. Spears and M. Lawrence (Eds.), Focus on
leadership: Servant-leadership for the twenty-first century (pp. 1–16).
New York, NY: Wiley.
[50] Spears, L. C. (2010). Character and servant leadership: Ten
characteristics of effective, caring leaders. Journal of Virtues &
Leadership, 1(1), 25–30.
[51] Parris, D. L., & Peache, J. W. (2013). A systematic literature review
of servant leadership theory in organizational contexts. Journal of
Business Ethics, 113, 377–393. doi: 10.1007/s10551-012-1322-6
7.2 Followership
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
1. Define the term followership.
2. Explain Ira Chaleff’s styles of followership.
3. Describe Roger Adair’s 4-D followership model.
4. Differentiate among McCroskey and Richmond’s three
organizational orientations.
© Thinkstock/Hemera
In 1988, Robert Kelley wrote an article in the Harvard Business Review where
he explained that much of the research on what happens between organization
members is written from the perspective that leadership is king and everything
else is periphery. [1] Instead, Kelley believed that followership should be center
stage, right alongside research and writing on leadership. Surprisingly, this
article was met with a lot of controversy: “Some people just flat out didn’t like it,
comparing followers to sled dogs whose destiny is always to look at the rear end
of the dog in front of them, but never to see the wider horizon or make the
decisions of the lead dog. Other readers could not thank me enough for
articulating what they secretly held in their hearts.” [2] Since 1988, writings in
the popular press and in academic circles have routinely discussed the nature of
followership. While there is still some controversy over the nature of
followership, leadership researchers now uniformly examine and discuss the
importance of followership in the corporate environment.
So what then is followership? As a basic concept, followership is the act or
condition under which an individual helps or supports a leader in the
accomplishment of organizational goals. However, Jon Howell and Maria
Mendez defined followership less in terms of a straightforward definition and
more as different roles followership can take. First, followership can take an
interactive role, which means that a follower’s role is to complement and support
her or his leader in accomplishing organizational goals. Second, followership
can be an independent role, where followers act independently of their leaders
with little necessity for oversight or management. Lastly, followership can take
on a shifting role perspective, where followership is seen as less a concrete title
or position than a state one embodies depending on the tasks at hand. In some
situations, an individual may be a leader and in others a follower, depending on
the context of the organizational goals. The rest of this section examines a series
of different perspectives in the literature involving organizational followership:
Ira Chaleff’s styles of followership, Roger Adair’s 4-D followership model, and
McCroskey and Richmond’s organizational orientations.
Chaleff’s Styles of Followership
One of the first models for understanding the nature of leader-follower
interactions from the follower’s perspective is Ira Chaleff’s styles of
followership he discussed in his groundbreaking book, The Courageous
Follower. [3] Based on the title of the book, Chaleff’s perspective is that
followership is an act of courage that someone decides to do. As such, he sees
followership as having the courage to engage in two different behaviors: the
courage to support the leader and the courage to challenge the leader’s behavior
and/or policies. Figure 7.5 demonstrates what happens when you combine the
courage to challenge and support.
Figure 7.5 Styles of Followership
Resource
The first follower style discussed by Chaleff is the resource. The resource is
someone who will not challenge or support the leader. This follower basically
does the minimal amount to keep her or his job, but nothing more.
Individualist
The second followership style is the individualist. This individual will provide
little to no support for her or his leader but has no problem challenging the
leader’s behavior and policies. This individual is generally very argumentative
and/or aggressive in her or his behavior. While this individual will often speak
out when no one else will, people see this person as inherently contrarian, so her
or his ideas are generally marginalized.
Implementer
The third followership style is the implementer. The implementer is more than
happy to support her or his leader in any way possible, but the implementer will
not challenge the leader’s behavior and/or policies even when the leader is
making costly mistakes. The implementer simply sees it as her or his job to
follow orders, not to question those orders. While this kind of pure followership
may be great in the military, it can be very harmful in the corporate world.
Partner
The final type of followership is the partner. Partner followership occurs when
a follower is both supportive and challenging. This type of follower believes that
he or she has a stake in a leader’s decisions, so he or she will act accordingly. If
the partner thinks a leader’s decision is unwise, he or she will have no problem
clearly dissenting within the organizational environment. At the same time, these
followers will ultimately provide the most (and most informed) support possible
to their leader.
Adair’s 4-D Followership Model
In 2008, Roger Adair proposed the 4-D followership model to help explain the
types of people who exist within an organization. [4] The basic model Adair
proposed for understanding followers examines a follower’s level of job
satisfaction and her or his productivity. Based on the combination of job
satisfaction and productivity, Adair demonstrates the likelihood that someone
will decide to leave the organization. The basic model can be seen in Figure 7.6.
Figure 7.6 Followership Model
Disgruntled
The first type of follower is called the disgruntled follower. He or she has low
levels of job satisfaction and is not overly productive at work. These followers
have typically encountered some event within the organization that has left them
feeling detached, angry, or displeased. Maybe this person was passed up for a
job promotion, or he or she is being bullied in the workplace. Whatever the
initial trigger, these individuals are toxic to the work environment. If the
disgruntled follower is caught early on in her or his downward slip into this
state, there is a chance to pull her or him away from the disgruntled cliff.
Unfortunately, too many leaders do not notice the signs early on, and these
followers either end up reacting negatively in the workplace or jump ship as
soon as they get an offer.
Disengaged
The second type of follower is someone who is disengaged, or someone who
doesn’t see the value in her or his work, so she or he opts to do the minimum
necessary to ensure employment. Often, these individuals perceive their work as
meaningless or not really helping the organization achieve its basic goals, so
they basically tune out. People who are disengaged likely become so because the
original expectations they had for the job are simply not met, so they may feel
lied to by the organization, which can lead to low levels of organizational
commitment.
Doer
The third type of follower is called the doer. Doers “are motivated, excited to be
part of the team. They are enterprising people, and overall are considered high
producers. The only real issue with these employees is that no matter where they
go in an organization, the grass always looks greener elsewhere.” [5] A doer
often starts as someone who is upwardly mobile in the organization and becomes
a doer when one of two things occurs. First, doers want more out of life, and if
they don’t feel that there is a continued possibility for upward mobility within an
organization, they are very likely to jump ship. Second, if a doer does not feel he
or she is receiving adequate recognition for contributions to the organization,
then the doer will find someone to provide that affirmation.
Disciple
The last type of follower is the disciple, and this individual is highly satisfied
and highly productive. In an ideal world, only disciples would fall under leaders
because they have no problem sacrificing their personal lives for the betterment
of the organization. These workers are true believers, both in their work and in
the overarching goals of the organization. While some people may remain
disciples for a lifetime, many more workers start as disciples and quickly
become disengageds, disgruntleds, or doers. This generally happens because an
organization’s own employees, processes, or systems do not encourage disciple
behavior and eventually wear the disciple down to the point where his or her
sunny organizational outlook becomes one filled with clouds.
McCroskey and Richmond’s Organizational
Orientations
In 1962, Robert Presthus created a theory of organizational life that defined three
unique types of workers: upwardly mobiles, ambivalents, and indifferents. He
defined these three terms thus: “The upward-mobiles are those who react
positively to the bureaucratic situation and succeed in it. The indifferents are the
uncommitted majority who see their jobs as mere instruments to obtain off-work
satisfactions. The ambivalents are a small, perpetually disturbed minority who
can neither renounce their claims for status and power nor play the disciplined
role that would enable them to cash in such claims.” [6]
In 2004, James McCroskey and Virginia Richmond, along with their students
Aaron Johnson and Heather Smith, created a measure to examine and test
Presthus’s typology of workers to see whether the three organizational
orientations held up to empirical scrutiny. [7] The “Organizational Orientations:
Short Form” sidebar contains a short version of the organizational orientations
scale. Before continuing, please take a moment to complete the measure.
Organizational Orientations: Short Form
Read the following questions and select the answer that corresponds with
how you perceive your workplace. Do not be concerned if some of the items
appear similar. Please use the following scale to rate the degree to which each
statement applies to you:
Strongly Disagree Disagree Neutral Agree Strongly Agree
1 2 3 4 5
1. One of my goals in life is excelling at my job. _____
2. I would like to learn as much as possible in my job. _____
3. Most of all, I really want to be recognized for the excellent work I do in
the workplace. _____
4. Accomplishing my organization’s goals is worth all the work you have
to do. _____
5. I am willing to work hard to accomplish my organization’s goals. _____
6. Since I am a really good worker, I know I will succeed in my career.
_____
7. A job is a job, it doesn’t really matter where you work. _____
8. I am generally indifferent to where I work. _____
9. Generally, I just do as much as is required by my supervisor to get a
paycheck. _____
10. I don’t much care where I work, so long as I get a paycheck. _____
11. One job is pretty much like any other. _____
12. When it comes to choosing a workplace, I found the one that would let
me get by doing the least amount of work. _____
13. I really dislike the rules and regulations I am forced to live with at my
job. _____
14. Generally, I don’t like the rules that my workplace makes me follow.
_____
15. Most of the time, a halfhearted effort is all I feel I need to give at work.
_____
16. I really think my job should just give me a paycheck and leave me alone.
_____
17. One job is about like any other, a pain in the backside. _____
18. What I want most in my job is to be left alone. _____
Scoring
To compute your scores, follow these instructions:
1. Upwardly Mobile
Add scores for items 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6. For Upwardly Mobiles, scores should be between 6 and 30. If your score is above 15, you are considered an upwardly mobile worker. If your score is below 15, you’re not considered an upwardly mobile worker.
2. Indifferent
Add scores for items 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, and 18. For Indifferents, scores should be between 6 and 30. If your score is above 15, you are considered a highly indifferent worker. If your score is below 15, you’re not considered an indifferent worker.
3. Ambivalent
Add scores for items 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, and 12. For Ambivalents, scores should be between 6 and 30. If your score is above 15, you are considered an a highly ambivalent worker. If your score is below 15, you’re not considered an ambivalent worker.
Source: Wrench, J. S., Brogan, S. M., Fiore, A. M., & McKean, J. R. (2011,
November). Consumerist education in America: When ideology impacts the
basic purpose of higher education. Paper presented at the National
Communication Association 97th Annual Convention, New Orleans, LA.
The Three Orientations
According to Virginia Richmond and James McCroskey, organizational
orientations explain how followers orient themselves toward both their work and
their workplace. [8] To help us understand the organizational orientations and
their relationship to followership, let’s examine each one separately.
Upwardly Mobiles
The upwardly mobile organizational orientation is one associated with
individuals who are devoted to their work, their organization, and the
organization’s goals. To these individuals, working and their jobs are an inherent
part of their lives. In fact, these people often identify their jobs as being careers
and not just jobs. To upwardly mobiles, a job is a way to earn money, but a
career involves the pursuit of lifelong ambition and goals related to one’s chosen
occupation. Upwardly mobile individuals see themselves as having careers and
not just jobs. In fact, an inherent part of the identity of an upwardly mobile
relates to her or his career (e.g., I’m a lawyer, I’m a teacher, I’m an accountant).
These individuals generally are great followers because they really see their lives
and their careers as highly intertwined constructs. However, upwardly mobile
individuals want to continue up the hierarchy and will consider jumping ship if
they do not see a place for them within an organization in the future.
Indifferents
The second way people orient themselves at work is the indifferent
organizational orientation. Where upwardly mobiles see themselves as having
careers, indifferents clearly believe they have a job. In essence, the indifferent
follower is one who sees work as a means to an end. The indifferent goes to
work and does her or his job to get a paycheck, but the indifferent really sees life
as something that begins once he or she has left the workplace. Indifferent
followers need more guidance, because they will do the minimum amount of
work necessary to keep a job and earn a paycheck. Indifferents will look for a
new job if they believe their current job is starting to encroach on their life
outside of work. As for their communicative behavior at work, their
“communication on the job is about their family or personal life. When
encouraged to communicate about organizational matters with colleagues, they
generally say nothing, change the topic, or suggest that others should discuss
these matters.” [9]
Ambivalents
The last group of followers commonly seen in the workplace is the ambivalents.
Ambivalents are somewhat hard to describe because they can be unpredictable.
Where upwardly mobiles like to work within the hierarchy to accomplish goals,
and indifferents go along with the hierarchy and do what they are told to do,
ambivalents tend not to like the existing hierarchical structure, the tasks they are
assigned, or the organizational goals. These individuals are just generally
discontent. In fact, these individuals often think the grass would be greener in a
different pasture. However, when they move to a new organization, they tend to
find themselves making the same complaints about their new organization as
well. Furthermore, their moods and behaviors within the organization can
change daily. “These people can be supportive one day and destructive the next.
They are moody, which makes it difficult for people to work with or for them.” [10] Sadly, most organization members and leaders learn to keep their distance
with ambivalents and keep their interactions with ambivalents to “small talk” to
avoid setting them off. Most organizations (and their members) will be happier
and more productive when these individuals leave.
Outcomes of Organizational Orientations
In the original study by McCroskey, Richmond, Johnson, and Smith examining
organizational orientations, the researchers set out to examine how the three
orientations related to a series of different communication and organizational
variables. [11] First, they found that upwardly mobile individuals were more
motivated and had higher levels of job satisfaction, while indifferents and
ambivalents were neither motivated nor satisfied. As for their communication
with others, upwardly mobile individuals were shown to be considerably more
communicatively competent than either indifferents or ambivalents. The third
major finding from the first study examined how an individual’s organizational
orientation impacted her or his views of a supervisor’s credibility. Not
surprisingly, upwardly mobile followers saw their leaders as credible
(competent, caring, and trustworthy), while indifferent and ambivalent followers
did not. These results were later confirmed in a second study that compared both
nonprofit and for-profit organization members. [12]
A 2008 study conducted by Alan Goodboy and James McCroskey furthered our
understanding of organizational orientations by examining the relationship
between the three organizational orientations and nonverbal immediacy and
Machiavellianism. [13] Nonverbal immediacy is the perceived psychological or
physical closeness between two people. The nonverbal literature has consistently
shown that nonverbal immediacy (which can be influenced by effective eye
contact, appropriate use of gestures, smiling, etc.) is a positive communication
trait that improves a variety of different communicative interactions, including
both leader-follower relationships and coworker relationships. In this study,
upwardly mobile individuals were more likely to be nonverbally immediate in
the workplace when compared to either indifferents or ambivalents.
Machiavellianism, on the other hand, is a personality trait associated with an
individual’s tendency to manipulate those around them. Both indifferents and
ambivalents were more likely to be highly Machiavellian in the workplace when
compared to their upwardly mobile counterparts.
Overall, these three studies clearly show that understanding one’s followers’
organizational orientations can be very important for follower-leader interactions
in the workplace. While leaders should cultivate upwardly mobiles, they
shouldn’t ignore either indifferents or ambivalents to have a more productive and
harmonious working environment.
KEY TAKEAWAY
Followership is the act or condition under which an individual
helps or supports a leader in the accomplishment of
organizational goals. Followership is considered an act because
of the various behaviors associated with following someone.
Followership is considered a condition because of an individual’s
place within an organizational hierarchy.
Ira Chaleff’s styles of followership are based on the degree to
which an individual follower will support her or his leader and the
extent to which a follower will challenge her or his leader. Based
on these two characteristics, Chaleff proposes four distinct
follower types: (1) resource (low challenge, low support), (2)
individualist (high challenge, low support), (3) implementer (low
challenge, high support), and (4) partner (high challenge, high
support).
Roger Adair’s 4-D followership model looks at the combination of
a worker’s level of job satisfaction and her or his intentions to
leave the organization. Based on these two levels, Adair
proposed four distinct types of workers: (1) disengaged (low job
satisfaction, low turnover intention), (2) disgruntled (low job
satisfaction, high turnover intention), (3) doer (high job
satisfaction, high turnover intention), and (4) disciple (high job
satisfaction, low turnover intention). Ultimately, Adair also notes
that disengaged and disgruntled followers are not very productive,
while doers and disciples are very productive followers.
Based on Robert Presthus’s theory of organizational life,
McCroskey and Richmond have operationalized and studied three
unique organizational orientations: upwardly mobiles (individuals
who see their careers as a vibrant part of their daily lives, so they
strive to be their best at work), indifferents (followers who see
work as a means to an end and life as something that happens
outside the workplace), and ambivalents (individuals who are
disgruntled with existing hierarchical structures, the tasks they are
assigned, and/or the organizational goals). Upwardly mobile
followers are generally more motivated, productive, and satisfied
than their indifferent and ambivalent peers.
EXERCISES
1. Thinking back to your most recent job, what type of follower would
Ira Chaleff characterize you as? Why?
2. Thinking back to your most recent job, what type of follower would
Roger Adair characterize you as? Why?
3. After completing the Organizational Orientations: Short Form
scale in the sidebar, what organizational orientation is your most
prominent? How do you think your organizational orientation
Ambivalents:
Career :
Disciple:
Disengaged:
Disgruntled :
Doer:
Followership :
Implementer:
Indifferent :
affects your current job? Do you think your organizational
orientation would change if you were in a job versus a career?
KEY TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
Organizational orientation described by James C. McCroskey and Virginia Richmond, depicting a follower who is disgruntled by the existing hierarchical structure, the tasks assigned, and/or the organizational goals.
Post of employment for an individual who is pursuing lifelong ambitions and goals related to a chosen occupation.
Described by Roger Adair as a follower who believes both in her or his work and in the overarching goals of the organization, so this follower is highly satisfied and productive.
Described by Roger Adair as a follower who doesn’t see the value in her or his work, so he or she opts to do the minimum necessary to ensure her or his employment.
Described by Roger Adair as a follower who has encountered some event within the organization that has left them feeling detached, angry, or displeased, which leads to low levels of job satisfaction and productivity.
Described by Roger Adair as a follower who is highly motivated and constantly looking for bigger and better work opportunities either within the current organization or in a new one.
The act or condition under which an individual helps or supports a leader in the accomplishment of organizational goals.
Described by Ira Chaleff as a follower type who will be more than happy to support her or his leader in any way possible, but the implementer will not challenge the leader’s behavior or policies even when the leader is making costly mistakes.
Organizational orientation described by James C.
Individualist:
Job :
Partner:
Resource:
Upwardly Mobile:
McCroskey and Virginia Richmond, describing followers who go to work and do their jobs to get a paycheck. These followers sees life as something that begins once they leave the workplace.
Described by Ira Chaleff as a follower type who will provide little to no support for her or his leader but has no problem challenging the leader’s behavior and policies.
Post of employment for an individual who is just looking to earn money.
Described by Ira Chaleff as a follower type who will support and challenge a leader because this follower sees herself or himself as having a stake in the leader’s decisions.
Described by Ira Chaleff as a follower type who will not challenge or support the leader and does only the minimal amount of work to keep her or his job.
Organizational orientation described by James C. McCroskey and Virginia Richmond and associated with individuals who are devoted to their work, their organization, and the organization’s goals.
[1] Kelley, R. E. (1988). In praise of followers. Harvard Business Review,
66(6), 142–148.
[2] Kelley, R. E. (2008). Rethinking followership. In R. E. Riggio, I.
Chaleff, & J. Lipman-Blumen (Eds.), The art of followership: How great
followers create great leaders and organizations (pp. 5–15). San
Francisco, CA: Jossey-Bass, p. 6.
[3] Chaleff, I. (2003). The courageous follower (2nd ed.). San Francisco,
CA: Barrett-Koehler.
[4] Adair, R. (2008). Developing great leaders, one follower at a time. In
R. E. Riggio, I. Chaleff, & J. Lipman-Blumen (Eds.), The art of
followership: How great followers create great leaders and organizations
(pp. 137–153). San Francisco, CA: Jossey-Bass.
[5] Adair, R. (2008). Developing great leaders, one follower at a time. In
R. E. Riggio, I. Chaleff, & J. Lipman-Blumen (Eds.), The art of
followership: How great followers create great leaders and organizations
(pp. 137–153). San Francisco, CA: Jossey-Bass, p. 145.
[6] Presthus, R. (1962). The organizational society: An analysis and a
theory. New York, NY: Random House, p. 15. Emphasis in original.
[7] McCroskey, J. C., Richmond, V. P., Johnson, A. D., & Smith, H. T.
(2004). Organizational orientations theory and measurement:
Development of measures and preliminary investigations.
Communication Quarterly, 52, 1–14.
[8] Richmond, V. P., & McCroskey, J. C. (2009). Organizational
orientations. In Organizational communication for survival: Making work,
work (4th ed., pp. 82–93). Boston, MA: Allyn & Bacon.
[9] Richmond, V. P., & McCroskey, J. C. (2009). Organizational
orientations. In Organizational communication for survival: Making work,
work (4th ed., pp. 82–93). Boston, MA: Allyn & Bacon, p. 84.
[10] Richmond, V. P., & McCroskey, J. C. (2009). Organizational
orientations. In Organizational communication for survival: Making work,
work (4th ed., pp. 82–93). Boston, MA: Allyn & Bacon, p. 85.
[11] McCroskey, J. C., Richmond, V. P., Johnson, A. D., & Smith, H. T.
(2004). Organizational orientations theory and measurement:
Development of measures and preliminary investigations.
Communication Quarterly, 52, 1–14.
[12] McCroskey, L., McCroskey, J. C., & Richmond, V. P. (2005). Applying
organizational orientations theory to employees of profit and non-profit
organizations. Communication Quarterly, 53, 21–40.
[13] Goodboy, A. K., & McCroskey, J. C. (2008). Toward a theoretical
model of the role of organizational orientations and Machiavellianism on
nonverbal immediacy behavior and job satisfaction. Human
Communication, 3, 293–308.
7.3 Mentoring and Coaching
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
1. Differentiate between the terms mentoring and coaching.
2. Explain Gregory Dawson and Richard Watson’s three stages of
mentoring.
3. Describe Pamela Kalbfleisch’s mentoring enactment theory.
4. Differentiate between executive and supervisory coaching.
5. Describe and explain the three types of coaching.
© Thinkstock/iStock
This chapter has thus far focused on the nature of leadership and followership.
We will now turn our attention to two very specific types of leader-follower
behaviors: mentoring and coaching. Unfortunately, there tends to be some
confusion within the organizational world as to the nature of these two terms, so
let’s quickly define them here before exploring each one in more depth.
Mentoring is “the transfer of your [mentor’s] knowledge or professional
experience to another person [mentee or protégé] to advance their
understanding or achievement.” [1] Coaching, on the other hand, is the process
of providing advice, instruction, or support in an attempt to help an individual
increase efficiency or productivity in the workplace. The basic difference
between mentoring and coaching is the desired result. The goal of mentoring is
to help someone advance through the various hurdles associated with a career;
coaching is about helping an individual engage in self-improvement in an effort
to do her or his job better. Now that we’ve explored the basic differences
between mentoring and coaching, let’s explore each in turn.
Mentoring
Mentoring is a term used throughout business and a variety of other endeavors in
life, and the concept goes back thousands of years to Homer’s epic poem The
Odyssey. The Odyssey tells the story of an elderly and wise sea captain named
Mentor who gives Odysseus’s son, Telemachus, guidance while his father is off
fighting the Trojan War. From the gentle guidance of Mentor to the more
formalized and established mentoring programs commonly seen in corporate
America, the word mentoring commonly refers to a relationship where one
individual with more knowledge and experience (the mentor) aids another
individual who has less knowledge and experience (the mentee or protégé).
Why would any individual desire to belong to a mentoring relationship?
According to Kathy Kram in her groundbreaking book Mentoring at Work, [2]
mentoring provides two basic functions for mentees: career and psychosocial.
Career functions are the ones people most commonly think of when they think
about mentoring, because career functions are associated with helping the
mentee “learn the ropes” in the organization (or a field) in an effort to help that
person climb the corporate ladder. Mentors can engage in a number of different
behaviors to help a mentee do this. For example, a mentor can coach the mentee
(more on this later in this section); a mentor can sponsor the mentee’s
advancement by placing the mentee on interesting and challenging projects; a
mentor can help the mentee receive recognition and/or ensure the mentee is
widely visible; and a mentor can provide the mentee certain protections from
organizational or field-based politics. [3] The psychosocial functions, on the
other hand, include mentoring behaviors that “build on trust, intimacy, and
interpersonal bonds in the relationship and include behaviors that enhance the
protégé’s professional and personal growth, identity, self-worth, and self-
efficacy.” [4] The goal of psychosocial functions is to help foster a relationship
that is built on “acceptance and confirmation and providing counseling,
friendship, and role-modeling” for the mentee. [5] In the rest of this section, we
examine the basic stages that a mentoring relationship goes through, mentoring
enactment theory, and the outcomes mentoring has for mentees, mentors, and
organizations.
Stages of Mentoring
Mentors and mentoring is not a stagnant concept by any stretch of the
imagination. In fact, mentoring relationships evolve over time and change as the
mentee and mentor’s relationship changes. Gregory Dawson and Richard Watson
explain mentoring as a three-stage process: hierarchical years, junior/senior
colleague years, and trusted sage years. [6]
Hierarchical Years
After either acquiring a mentor on one’s own or having one formally assigned,
the first period in a mentoring relationship is one marked by formality. During
these years, the mentor’s job is to direct and guide a mentee through corporate
life. This period can last from three to five years and generally includes such
behaviors as assisting “that person in understanding the corporate culture,
getting appropriate work supplies, completing required forms, getting placed on
an initial project and guiding the new professional through recurring yearly
actions (e.g., performance appraisals)." [7] [8]
Junior/Senior Colleague Years
The junior/senior colleague years are marked by a period when the mentor and
mentee redefine their relationship based on the needs and goals of those involved
in the relationship. One of the marked differences during this time period is the
change from a directive approach to mentoring (where the mentor is advising
and supervising the mentee) to one that is marked by mutual respect and
collaboration. Instead of the mentor inviting the mentee to participate on
projects, the mentee is now dealing with her or his own projects and may or may
not invite the mentor to participate as an equal partner on projects. During this
period, the mentee should further expand her or his professional network and be
seen as someone who can launch out on her or his own. You’ll notice that this
period has the notion of both junior and senior colleague. This shift happens
naturally over time. As someone starts out as a junior colleague, there is the
expectation that the mentee will take on more and more projects of increasing
complexity. Eventually, these projects become more central to the organization’s
mission, and the individual takes on senior status as a colleague to her or his
mentor.
Trusted Sage Years
The final stage of the mentoring relationship occurs when the mentor and mentee
are no longer bound by notions of organizational hierarchy and truly develop a
working friendship. During this stage, it becomes even more important for an
individual to have her or his own mentees as a way to pass on the legacy
received from a mentor(s). Probably the hallmark of going from the colleague
years to the trusted sage years is the establishment of one’s own mentoring
relationships with mentees.
Kalbfleisch’s Mentoring Enactment Theory
Now that we’ve explored the basic stages of mentoring, we are going to switch
gears and try to gain a more general understanding of the initiating, maintaining,
and repairing of mentoring relationships. To help us understand how mentor-
mentee relationships function from a communication perspective, Pamela
Kalbfleisch developed the mentoring enactment theory. [9] From Kalbfleisch’s
theory on mentoring, we learn that the very center of the mentor-mentee
relationship is two people who are joined together either formally or informally
for the explicit purpose of achieving success. While mentees desire mentoring
relationships because of the known value of mentoring on one’s career trajectory,
mentors experience inherent costs.
For example, there are costs associated with “loss of time spent coaching a
protégé, vulnerability through sharing hard-earned techniques and secrets, and
potentially developing difficulties in one’s personal and professional life because
of a relationship with a protégé.” [10] Why, then, do mentors opt to enter into
mentoring relationships? There is no single answer to this question. Different
people have a variety of different answers, depending on their own
organizational and personal perceptions of mentoring itself. According to
Kalbfleisch, there are four common reasons people decide to mentor a protégé:
altruism, paying it forward, organizational expectations, or self-interest. First, a
mentor could enter a mentoring relationship out of pure altruism. The mentor
may feel some kind of deeply held obligation to help others, so he or she seeks
out and enters into mentoring relationships out of a simple desire to see others
grow. Second, a mentor could undertake a mentoring relationship because he or
she feels the need to pay it forward. The notion of paying it forward is based on
the idea that the second-generation mentor was at one point a protégé, so he or
she feels a sense of obligation to her or his mentor, and the second-generation
mentor pays the debt to her or his mentor by opting to take on protégés. In this
sense, you’re paying the mentoring forward to a new generation of protégés. The
third reason a mentor may opt to take on a protégé is a result of organizational
expectations. Many organizations have formal mentoring requirements for
individuals who reach a certain seniority stage. Often in these formal mentoring
situations, the mentor may not have a choice in the choosing of her or his
protégés, so these mentoring relationships may not be the most effective because
the mentor may feel strong armed into the relationship. The final reason some
mentors take on a protégé is out of pure self-interest. Some mentors want a
protégé for no other reason than to help “accomplish outcomes or for an
entourage to follow in one’s wake.” [11] When it’s all said and done, there is a
variety of reasons or even a combination of reasons a mentor ultimately decides
to enter into a mentoring relationship.
Kalbfleisch’s mentoring-enactment theory was developed by applying the
knowledge communication scholars have about a range of other interpersonal
relationships. For the purposes of this text, we’ve adapted Kalbfleish’s
mentoring-enactment theory into a series of eight hypotheses.
Table 7.4 Mentoring Enactment Hypothesis
Hypothesis
# Hypothesis
Hypothesis
1 Your first request to a potential mentor is likely to be rejected.
Hypothesis
2 Despite Hypothesis 1, potential mentors are likely to help you on specific projects.
Hypothesis
3 When an individual has agreed to mentor someone, he or she is more open to mentoring.
Hypothesis
4 You will generally accept offers of mentoring.
Hypothesis
5 You are likely to agree to help when a potential mentor offers the help.
Hypothesis
6
You are more likely than mentors to focus your communication on finding, maintaining, and
keeping a mentor.
Hypothesis
7
If you view mentoring as very important to your career success,you are more likely to
engage in communication that helps you find, maintain, and keep a mentor.
Hypothesis As mentors become more invested within a mentoring relationship, they also are likely to
engage in prosocial interpersonal behaviors like relational maintenance and reparative
8 communicative behaviors.
Adaptation of: Kalbfleisch, P. J. (2002). Communicating in mentoring
relationships: A theory for enactment. Communication Theory, 12, 63–69; pp.
66–68.
The first three propositions are all geared to examine the initiation of mentoring
relationships. In essence, mentors are not likely to take on a protégé when the
protégé approaches the mentor and asks for that mentoring relationship.
However, mentors are more likely to help a potential protégé with a specific
task. In essence, it’s better as someone looking for a mentor to ask for help on a
specific task and then let the relationship develop naturally. The one case when
this isn’t true occurs when a potential mentor has previously agreed to mentor
someone. In these cases, the mentor has already been primed to take on the role
of mentor, so he or she tends to be more open in these cases to mentoring.
The four and fifth propositions approach mentoring initiation from the mentor’s
perspective instead of the protégé’s. In proposition four, Kalbfleisch theorizes
that when a mentor asks a protégé to initiate a mentoring relationship, the
protégé is more likely than not to agree to the relationship. This is also true if a
mentor reaches out to a potential protégé, offering a helping hand (as seen in the
fifth proposition). In both cases, individuals who are less advanced in a
hierarchical structure are willing and will accept both offers of help and offers of
mentorship.
Propositions six, seven, and eight examine the role of communication within a
mentor-protégé relationship. Specifically, Kalbfleisch theorizes that protégés will
use conversations and strategic communication to initiate, maintain, and repair
their mentoring relationships. Kalbfleisch predicts that this is more likely if
someone is in a mentoring relationship that impacts the protégé’s success in the
workplace or if the protégé is a female. Obviously, if someone’s success is in the
hands of a mentor, making sure that relationship is effective is of paramount
importance to the protégé. As such, the protégé will use communication
strategically to ensure that the mentoring relationship is stable and healthy.
Kalbfleisch also predicts that women will engage in this behavior to a greater
degree than men, which has been supported by previous research on mentoring. [12]
The final proposition for the enactment of mentoring relationships theorizes that
as mentors become more involved in the mentoring relationship, the mentors
will become more likely to direct conversational goals and communication
strategies toward maintaining and repairing that relationship with their protégés.
In the initial stages of a mentoring relationship, the mentor really has nothing to
gain from the mentoring relationship but incurs a number of costs. As the
relationship progresses, the mentor invests a lot of time and resources into
developing her or his protégé, so it should be no surprise then that the mentor
will want to protect that relationship because of the investment.
Outcomes for Mentoring
By now you may be wondering why mentoring is so important. We’re here to
tell you that a wide range of positive outcomes happen as a result of mentoring.
To help us understand the importance of mentoring in the modern organization,
let’s examine outcomes related to mentees, mentors, and organizations.
Mentee Outcomes
In a 2007 analysis of twenty years of mentoring research, Thomas Dougherty
and George Dreher found a wide range of positive benefits for everyone
involved in the mentoring process. [13] Here is a partial list of the outcomes
mentoring can have on a mentee over the course of her or his career. All these
outcomes are positively related to mentoring unless otherwise stated in the
outcome:
Career commitment
Career mobility
Career opportunity
Career recognition
Employee motivation
Hierarchical level
Job satisfaction
Lower levels of work stress
Lower turnover intentions
Number of promotions
Organizational commitment
Organizational socialization
Performance
Productivity
Total annual compensation
Mentor Outcomes
While there has been a lot of research examining how mentoring is beneficial for
the protégé, there has not been as much research examining possible benefits to
the mentor-mentee relationship from the perspective of the mentor. As noted
earlier, there is a range of reasons an individual may opt to become a mentor, so
some of the outcomes are intrinsically tied to the original reason(s) someone opts
to engage in a mentoring relationship with a potential protégé. However, the
following tangible benefits have been seen for the mentor: [14]
Job satisfaction
Lower burnout rates
Lower turnover intentions
Number of promotions
Organizational commitment
Salary
Subjective career success
One theoretical reason mentors actually have positive outcomes (especially those
related to promotions and salaries) may have to do with the fact that “mentors
may be rewarded by organizations because they are recognized as good
organizational citizens.” [15]
Organizational Outcomes
Many of the outcomes seen for both the mentor and the mentee are also
outcomes for the organization itself. For example, organizations benefit from
employees who are motivated, satisfied and less likely to leave, and who show
higher performance and productivity levels. Based on these factors alone, you
would think organizations would spend more time formalizing the mentoring
process to ensure that all employees receive these kinds of opportunities and
advancements within the organization. Furthermore, numerous studies have
found a very strong return on investment for organizations that engage in formal
mentoring programs, so formalized mentoring programs really do make business
sense. [16]
Coaching
As discussed at the beginning of this section, coaching can be defined as the
process of providing advice, instruction, or support in an attempt to help an
individual be more efficient or productive in the workplace. From this
perspective, the goal of coaching is to help individuals succeed in the workplace.
Where the goal of mentoring is to help someone advance through a mentee’s
career, coaching focuses on helping an individual engage in self-improvement in
an effort to do her or his job better.
Now before we go into more detail about coaching, we should differentiate
between two basic types of coaching commonly discussed in the management
literature. First, we have executive coaching, or the “process of a one-on-one
relationship between a professional coach and an executive (the person
coached) for the purpose of enhancing behavioral change through self-
awareness and learning, and thus ultimately for the success of the individual and
the organization.” [17] In the world of executive coaching, a leader within an
organization hires an executive coach for the pure purpose of improving that
leader’s performance within the organization. An entire subfield of executive
coaches exists in today’s marketplace. Some executive coaches are very effective
and have helped the top CEOs in the country become better leaders and achieve
their organization’s goals. However, many charlatans exist within this market, so
we do not really recommend just hiring an executive coach on a whim.
Supervisory coaching, on the other hand, involves “an ongoing process for
improving problematic work performance; helping employees recognize
opportunities to improve their performance and capabilities; empowering
employees to exceed prior levels of performance; and giving guidance,
encouragement and support to the learner.” [18] This form of coaching involves
what most people in the workplace will encounter with regard to coaching. We
term this supervisory coaching because, in this instance, the coaching is actually
being conducted by one’s supervisor in the workplace.
Three Types of Coaching
In 1948, during the American Psychological Association Convention in Boston,
Massachusetts, Benjamin Bloom led a discussion about creating a common
language for test developers and educators. Through a series of conference
presentations from 1949 to 1953, groups met to discuss the idea of a common
language, which culminated in the publication of the groundbreaking book
Taxonomy of Educational Objectives: The Classification of Educational Goals;
Handbook I: Cognitive Domain in 1965. [19] In this book, Bloom and his
colleagues noted three primary dimensions of learning that teachers should be
concerned with in the classroom: cognitive (knowledge), psychomotor (skill),
and affective (attitude). Before we explain each of these three domains of
learning, please take a second and complete the Organizational Coaching Scale
found in the sidebar.
Organizational Coaching Scale
This survey includes a number of statements about how you may feel about
your current working condition. You will probably find that you agree with
some of the statements and disagree with others, to varying extents. Please
indicate your reaction to each of the statements by marking your opinion to
the left of each statement according to the following scale:
Strongly Disagree Disagree Neutral Agree Strongly Agree
1 2 3 4 5
1. My supervisor works with me to improve my on-the-job skills. _____
2. My job skills have gotten better as a result of my supervisor’s training.
_____
3. My supervisor has not helped me with any job skills necessary to
complete my work. _____
4. My supervisor has not attempted to correct any of my job-related
behaviors. _____
5. My supervisor trains new employees on any necessary skills to
completely function in our workplace. _____
6. My supervisor does not work with me to improve my on-the-job skills.
_____
7. My job skills are not improving because of a lack of training from my
supervisor. _____
8. My supervisor has helped me improve my job skills. _____
9. My supervisor corrects job-related behavior problems when he or she
sees them. _____
10. My supervisor makes sure all new hires are completely trained on skills
that are necessary to function in our workplace. _____
11. My supervisor makes sure I have all necessary information to complete
my job. _____
12. My supervisor withholds information that could help me function better
as an employee. _____
13. My supervisor makes sure my information needs are fulfilled. _____
14. My supervisor makes sure I understand what I’m doing at work. _____
15. My supervisor provides me with all the information I need to be a
competent worker. _____
16. My supervisor prevents me from getting necessary information to
complete my job. _____
17. My supervisor gives me all the information I need to help me function
better as an employee. _____
18. My supervisor does not make sure that I understand what’s going on at
work. _____
19. My supervisor does not make sure my information needs are fulfilled.
_____
20. My supervisor does not make any attempt to see if I understand what is
going on at work. _____
21. 21. My supervisor is concerned with whether or not I enjoy what I’m
doing while at work. _____
22. My supervisor does not care if I think my job is dull. _____
23. My supervisor clearly is involved with trying to motivate me to be a
better employee. _____
24. My supervisor wants to make sure that I’m not bored on the job. _____
25. My supervisor is only concerned with whether or not I get my work
done. _____
26. My supervisor does not try to motivate me on the job. _____
27. My supervisor does not care if I am interested in the work at all. _____
28. My supervisor tries to make sure I’m excited to be at work. _____
29. My supervisor doesn’t care about how I feel about my job. _____
30. My supervisor creates a positive working atmosphere. _____
Scoring
To compute your scores, follow these instructions:
1. Skills-Based Coaching
Step 1: Add scores for items 1, 2, 5, 8, 9, and 10. Step 2: Add scores for items 3, 4, 6, and 7. Step 3: Add 24 to Step 2. Step 4: Subtract the score for Step 2 from the score for Step 3. For Skills-Based Coaching, scores should be between 10 and 50. If your score is above 50, you perceive your supervisor to be teaching you the skills you need to perform your job. If your score is 29 or below, you do not perceive your supervisor as teaching you the skills you need to perform your job.
2. Cognitive-Based Coaching
Step 1: Add scores for items 11, 13, 14, 15, and 17. Step 2: Add scores for items 12, 16, 18, 19, and 20. Step 3: Add 30 to Step 2. Step 4: Subtract the score for Step 2 from the score for Step 3. For Cognitive-Based Coaching, scores should be between 10 and 50. If your score is above 50, you perceive your supervisor to be providing you the knowledge you need to perform your job. If your score is 29 or below, you do not perceive your supervisor as providing you the information you need to perform your job.
3. Affective-Based Coaching
Step 1: Add scores for items 21, 23, 24, 28, and 30. Step 2: Add scores for items 22, 25, 26, 27, and 29. Step 3: Add 30 to Step 2. Step 4: Subtract the score for Step 2 from the score for Step 3. For Affective-Based Coaching, scores should be between 10 and 50. If your score is above 50, you perceive your supervisor to be promoting in you a positive attitude about your job. If your score is 29 or below, you perceive your supervisor to be either unconcerned with your attitude about your job or actually creating a negative organizational environment.
Source: Wrench, J. S., McCroskey, J. C., Berletch, N., Powley, C., & Wehr,
A. (2008). Organizational coaching as instructional communication. Human
Communication, 11, 279–292.
You may be wondering what the three domains of learning have to do with
organizational coaching. Quite a lot actually. In a 2008 study conducted by
Wrench, McCroskey, Berletch, Powley, and Wehr, [20] the researchers argued
that organizational coaching is fundamentally related to learning, so examining
organizational coaching in light of the three domains of learning made
conceptual sense. We should also note that the three domains of learning have
been applied in other noneducational settings. For example, the three domains of
learning are commonly referred to as the KSAs (knowledge, skills, and attitudes)
in both training and development and human performance improvement. [21]
Cognitive/Knowledge
The first domain of coaching is cognitive-based coaching, which refers to the
recognition and recall of information and the development of intellectual
abilities and skills. Let’s look at both parts of this definition. First, individuals
undergoing cognitive coaching will be taught how to recognize and recall
information that will help them perform their jobs better. This could be anything
from learning how to recognize and troubleshoot problems as they arise in the
workplace to more simplistic tasks like knowing whom to call when you have a
question. The second part of coaching involves the development of intellectual
abilities and skills. Over time, a good coach will help subordinates develop
themselves intellectually.
When it comes to developing someone intellectually, you want to stretch the
subordinate and give them new cognitive tasks that will be a reach for the person
but without undue stress. For example, one of our colleagues had a secretary
who was not technically savvy. When he became the secretary’s immediate
supervisor, he decided he wanted to use an electronic calendar instead of the
more traditional paper calendar for keeping track of his meetings. While this
may not seem like a big deal, this secretary needed to be coached and taught how
to use the computer scheduling program. This new cognitive task was just
enough of a stretch for the secretary without causing her complete frustration
and a huge amount of stress.
Psychomotor/Behavior
The second type of coaching, skills-based coaching, is very important in the
workplace even though it’s a domain of learning often overlooked in the
educational system. Psychomotor learning emphasizes “some muscular or motor
skill, some manipulation of material objects, or some act which requires
neuromuscular co-ordination.” [22] The goal of psychomotor learning is the
acquisition of a specific skill that can help someone be more productive or
efficient. Think back across your own life. You’ve learned many skills that make
you more productive and efficient in life. Maybe you’ve learned to use a
computer keyboard and no longer need to look at your fingers while typing.
Maybe you’ve learned how to use the bells and whistles of a specific software
program like Microsoft Office or Adobe Creative Suite. When we learn these
skills, they clearly involve cognitive power, but we refer to them as psychomotor
because it’s the manipulation of your body to complete a task, which is a
fundamentally different type of learning. Think about when you learned to ride a
bicycle. You could have all the knowledge in the world about gravity and the
engineering of a bicycle, but just having the cognitive knowledge is not enough
to get you upright and moving down a road successfully.
A great deal of coaching in the workplace involves psychomotor coaching,
because the professional world is filled with skills that workers need to learn.
Everything from learning how to put together a burger at a fast-food restaurant to
computer programming involves learning specific skill sets in the workplace.
Affective/Attitude
The final type of coaching that happens in the workplace relates to the affective
nature of one’s work. The affective domain of coaching is one where “objectives
which emphasize a feeling tone, an emotion, or a degree of acceptance or
rejection. Affective objectives vary from simple acceptance to selected
phenomena to complex but inherently consistent qualities of character and
conscience [learning about] interests, attitudes, appreciations, values, emotional
sets or biases.” [23] In other words, affective coaching examines an individual’s
emotional reaction to her or his work and working environment.
First, affective coaching involves ensuring that one’s subordinate has a positive
attitude toward the work. When subordinates do not see the value of their work
or how their work fits into the larger picture of the organization, it’s very
common that they will become disillusioned and not be optimal workers. As
such, supervisors have a responsibility to ensure that their subordinates maintain
a positive attitude about the work. In fact, subordinates often take their cues
from supervisors with regard to how they emotionally approach a task. If a
supervisor assigns a task with a grimace on her or his face, then of course the
subordinate is going to approach that same task with some trepidation and
disappointment. Ultimately, supervisors, through their coaching capacity, need to
check in with subordinates and see how they are emotionally reacting to their
work.
Second, affective coaching involves ensuring that employees are working in, and
helping to create, a positive working environment. In some organizations where
supervisors are removed from their subordinates, they may have no idea when an
organizational climate is becoming toxic. For our purposes, we want supervisors
who are tied into the organization and actually go about fostering and
encouraging a positive working climate for their subordinates.
Outcomes of Coaching
Now that we’ve examined the basic types of coaching in the workplace, let’s talk
about some of the research that has been conducted examining organizational
coaching. In the original study that created the Organizational Coaching Scale,
the researchers found that individuals with supervisors who utilized all three
forms of coaching were more motivated, satisfied, and productive. [24]
Furthermore, subordinates who reported having coaching supervisors reported
fewer disengagement strategies. Disengagement strategies are strategies that an
individual uses to decrease closeness or termination relationships in the
workplace. [25] In essence, people who have a positive coaching relationship
with their supervisor feel more connected to their organizations, so they are less
likely to start to disengage from their workplace relationships. Furthermore, a
subsequent study examining cognitive, skill, and affective coaching in an
organization found that individuals who received all three types of coaching
were less likely to engage in latent dissent in the workplace (see Chapter 5 for a
refresher on organizational dissent). [26]
Overall, the research results clearly indicate that organizational coaching is an
important part of the success of an organization. For this reason, supervisors
should create clear strategies for how they go about cognitive, skill, and affective
coaching to ensure that it is happening in a systematic manner. Too often,
coaching is left to chance in the modern workplace—to the organization’s
detriment.
KEY TAKEAWAY
Differentiate between the terms mentoring and coaching.
Explain Gregory Dawson and Richard Watson’s three stages of
mentoring. The first stage, the hierarchical years, occurs after a
protégé has gotten a job and the mentor’s job is to direct and
guide a mentee through corporate life. The second stage, the
junior/senior colleague years, is marked by a period when the
mentor and mentee redefine their relationship based on the needs
and goals of those involved in the relationship. During this stage,
the mentor-mentee relationship changes from a directive
approach to mentoring (where the mentor is advising and
supervising the mentee) to one that is marked by mutual respect
and collaboration. The final stage of mentoring, the trusted sage
years, occurs when the mentor and mentee are no longer bound
by notions of organizational hierarchy and truly develop a working
friendship.
Pamela Kalbfleisch created mentoring enactment theory as a way
to explain the establishment and enactment of mentoring
relationships within organizational settings. The theory examines
a series of conversational goals and communication strategies
that both mentors and mentees utilize within a mentoring
relationship. The eight propositions in the theory can be seen in
Table 7.4.
Executive coaching occurs when an individual, the leader, hires
an external consultant who functions in the position as paid-for
mentor (usually a professional coach or therapist specializing in
leader development). The goal of executive coaching is to help
the leader become all he or she can be within her or his
leadership position. Supervisory coaching, on the other hand,
includes the day-to-day work that a person in a supervisory
position does with someone in a subordinate position. The goal of
supervisory coaching is to help the subordinate improve her or his
performance through direction, encouragement, and support.
Famed educational researcher Benjamin Bloom and a group of
colleagues first noted there were three domains of learning.
McCroskey, Berletch, Powley, and Wehr furthered these notions
of learning domains by attaching them to supervisory coaching.
The three forms of coaching are cognitive-based coaching
(recognition and recall of information and the development of
intellectual abilities and skills), skills-based coaching (acquisition
or enhancement of a specific skill that can help someone be more
productive or efficient), and affective coaching (acquisition or
enhancement of positive emotional reactions to an individual’s
work and working environment).
Coaching:
Mentoring :
Supervisory Coaching:
Affective Coaching:
EXERCISES
1. Think of a time when you’ve been mentored. What stages do you
think your mentoring relationship reached? Did you get all the way
to trusted sage? Why or why not?
2. Apply Pamela Kalbfleisch’s mentoring enactment theory to one of
your own mentoring relationships (as either mentor or mentee).
3. Complete the Organizational Coaching Scale in the sidebar.
Based on the results from your analysis of your supervisor’s
coaching behavior, what areas do you think your supervisor could
improve on? Why do you think your supervisor coaches you in the
way he or she does?
KEY TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
The process of providing advice, instruction, or support in an attempt to help an individual be more efficient or productive in the workplace.
The transfer of experience or knowledge from a senior individual (the mentor) to a junior individual (the mentee or protégé) in an effort to help the junior individual learn the ins and outs of organizational life.
The communicative process of helping a subordinate improve her or his performance through direction, encouragement, and support.
The coaching process associated with the acquisition or enhancement of positive emotional reactions to an individual’s work and working environment.
Cognitive-Based Coaching:
Executive Coaching:
Skills-Based Coaching:
The coaching process associated with the acquisition or enhancement of recognition and recall of information and the development of intellectual abilities and skills.
The establishment of a professional relationship between a hired individual (professional coach or therapist) whose job it is to help leaders become all that he or she can be within an organizational environment.
The coaching process associated with the acquisition or enhancement of a specific skill that can help someone be more productive or efficient.
[1] Hicks, R., & McCracken, J. (2009). Mentoring vs. caching: Do you
know the difference? Physician Executive, 35(4), 71–73, p. 71.
[2] Kram, K. E. (1985). Mentoring at work. Glenview, IL: Scott, Foresman.
[3] Ragins, B. R., & Kram, K. E. (2007). The roots and meaning of
mentoring. In B. R. Ragins & K. E. Kram (Eds.), The handbook of
mentoring at work: Theory, research, and practice (pp. 3–15). Los
Angeles, CA: Sage.
[4] Ragins, B. R., & Kram, K. E. (2007). The roots and meaning of
mentoring. In B. R. Ragins & K. E. Kram (Eds.), The handbook of
mentoring at work: Theory, research, and practice (pp. 3–15). Los
Angeles, CA: Sage, p. 5.
[5] Ragins, B. R., & Kram, K. E. (2007). The roots and meaning of
mentoring. In B. R. Ragins & K. E. Kram (Eds.), The handbook of
mentoring at work: Theory, research, and practice (pp. 3–15). Los
Angeles, CA: Sage, p. 5.
[6] Dawson, G. S., & Watson, R. T. (2007). Involved or committed?
Similarities and differences in advising and mentoring in the academic
and business world. Communications of the Association for Information
Systems, 2007(20), 3–10.
[7] Dawson, G. S., & Watson, R. T. (2007). Involved or committed?
Similarities and differences in advising and mentoring in the academic
and business world. Communications of the Association for Information
Systems, 2007(20), 3–10, p. 5.
[8] Dawson, G. S., & Watson, R. T. (2007). Involved or committed?
Similarities and differences in advising and mentoring in the academic
and business world. Communications of the Association for Information
Systems, 2007(20), 3–10, p. 5.
[9] Kalbfleisch, P. J. (2002). Communicating in mentoring relationships: A
theory for enactment. Communication Theory, 12, 63–69.
[10] Kalbfleisch, P. J. (2002). Communicating in mentoring relationships:
A theory for enactment. Communication Theory, 12, 63–69, p. 64.
[11] Kalbfleisch, P. J. (2002). Communicating in mentoring relationships:
A theory for enactment. Communication Theory, 12, 63–69, p. 64.
[12] Kalbfleisch, P. J. (1997). Appeasing the mentor. Aggressive
Behavior, 23, 389–403.
[13] Dougherty, T. W., & Dreher, G. F. (2007). Mentoring and career
outcomes. In B. R. Ragins & K. E. Kram (Eds.), The handbook of
mentoring at work: Theory, research, and practice (pp. 51–93). Los
Angeles, CA: Sage.
[14] Allen, T. D. (2007). Mentoring relationships: From the perspective of
the mentor. In B. R. Ragins & K. E. Kram (Eds.), The handbook of
mentoring at work: Theory, research, and practice (pp. 123–147). Los
Angeles, CA: Sage.
[15] Allen, T. D. (2007). Mentoring relationships: From the perspective of
the mentor. In B. R. Ragins & K. E. Kram (Eds.), The handbook of
mentoring at work: Theory, research, and practice (pp. 123–147). Los
Angeles, CA: Sage, p. 135.
[16] Kaye, B., & Scheef, D. (2000, April). Mentoring. In ASTD’s Info-line
Series. Alexandria, VA: American Society for Training and Development.
[17] Baek-Kyoo, B. J., Sushko, J. S., & McLean, G. N. (2012). Multiple
faces of coaching: Manager-as-coach, executive coaching, and formal
mentoring. Organization Development Journal, 30, 19–38, p. 26.
[18] Baek-Kyoo, B. J., Sushko, J. S., & McLean, G. N. (2012). Multiple
faces of coaching: Manager-as-coach, executive coaching, and formal
mentoring. Organization Development Journal, 30, 19–38.
[19] Bloom, B. S., Engelhart, M. D., Furst, E. J., Hill, W. H., & Krathwohl,
D. R. (1956). Taxonomy of educational objectives: The classification of
educational goals, Handbook I: Cognitive domain. New York, NY: David
McKay.
[20] Wrench, J. S., McCroskey, J. C., Berletch, N., Powley, C., & Wehr, A.
(2008). Organizational coaching as instructional communication. Human
Communication, 11, 279–292.
[21] Biech, E. (Ed.). (2008). ASTD handbook for workplace learning
professionals. Alexandria, VA: American Society for Training and
Development.
[22] Krathwohl, D. R., Bloom, B. S., & Masia, B. B. (1964). Taxonomy of
educational objectives: The classification of educational goals. Handbook
II: The affective domain. New York, NY: David McKay, p. 7.
[23] Krathwohl, D. R., Bloom, B. S., & Masia, B. B. (1964). Taxonomy of
educational objectives: The classification of educational goals. Handbook
II: The affective domain. New York, NY: David McKay, p. 7
[24] Wrench, J. S., McCroskey, J. C., Berletch, N., Powley, C., & Wehr, A.
(2008). Organizational coaching as instructional communication. Human
Communication, 11, 279–292.
[25] Sias, P. M., & Perry, T. (2004). Disengaging from workplace
relationships. Human Communication Research, 30, 589–602.
[26] Berletch, N., Powley, C., Wrench, J. S., & Wehr, A. (2007, April). The
interrelationships between positive feedback and coaching in the
workplace. Paper presented at the Eastern Communication Association’s
Convention, Providence, RI.
7.4 Chapter Exercises
REAL-WORLD CASE STUDY
The following case is based on a consulting experience of one of
our colleagues. Names and institutions have been altered for this
case.
Janet, an organizational consultant, was approached to serve as an
executive coach for Jerry, a financial wizard at an auditing firm. Jerry
had everything senior management was looking for in a star
employee. His projects came in on time and always under budget,
using fewer company resources than his counterparts did. However,
there was one problem the company had with Jerry—no one wanted
to work with him. Jerry was known for belittling and yelling at
subordinates, who did not turn in assignments on time and up to
Jerry’s high standards.
Janet was contacted to work one on one with Jerry and help him
develop various interaction skills. The company wanted to keep
Jerry, but it needed Jerry to start acting and playing like someone on
a team. Janet’s first contact with Jerry went about as badly as one
would expect. Jerry didn’t understand why Janet was there and
thought the whole coaching process was a waste of money.
Furthermore, Jerry really believed that there was nothing wrong with
how he communicated with others. In his own words, “I’m just
honest. I may be blunt, but that’s because I don’t have time to play
wet nurse to a bunch of junior colleagues who shouldn’t be in
corporate America.” Jerry became more and more aggressive as
their coaching sessions continued. In fact, Jerry showed a clear
resistance to coaching, and the reports of aggressive behavior from
his subordinates to human resources escalated.
1. Can all employees be coached?
2. If you were Janet, how would you handle this situation?
3. Is it ever appropriate for a consultant to fire a client who just has
no desire to change?
4. If you were Jerry’s boss, how would you handle his behavior and
his lack of desire to change his behavior?
END-OF-CHAPTER ASSESSMENT
1. Jonathan is a leadership researcher. He is currently trying to determine if an individual’s communication apprehension (a commonly studied communication trait) impacts the effectiveness of an individual’s leadership within a nonprofit. Which approach to leadership is Jonathan employing?
a. functional b. relational c. situational d. trait
e. transformational
2. Tika’s new boss is so much fun to work for. Basically, the job is almost like a party on most days. Her boss is more concerned with building morale and relationships than micromanaging people to ensure that the group gets their work done. According to Blake and Mouton’s leadership grid, what type of leader is Tika’s new boss?
1. authority-compliance 2. country club 3. impoverished 4. middle-of-the-road 5. team
3. Which of the following is not an outcome of a leader-member exchange relationship?
a. greater follower organizational commitment b. greater follower communication apprehension c. greater follower organizational participation d. lower voluntary turnover intentions of a follower e. lower follower exhibition of organizational citizenship
behaviors
4. Joaquin is a definite go-getter. While Joaquin is one of the most productive individuals at X-corp, he also realizes that X-corp may not necessarily be the best organization for him to travel up the corporate ladder. As such, he’s always checking want ads on Monster.com and LinkedIn. What type of follower would Roger Adair classify Joaquin as?
a. disciple
b. disengaged c. disgruntled d. doer e. dramatic
5. Bob has a phone call every Monday morning with a paid consultant. The consultant’s job is to help Bob, the CEO of a small tech firm in California, direct his company’s future and help Bob realize his own goals. What type of coaching is Bob involved in?
a. supervisory coaching b. skills-based coaching c. executive coaching d. affective coaching e. cognitive-based coaching
Answer Key
1. a
2. b
3. e
4. d
5. c
© Thinkstock/iStock
Chapter 8
Organizational Identity and Diversity
Who Are We?
It’s a weeknight, you’ve worked late, and you don’t feel
like making dinner when you get home. So you decide to
grab a bite on the way. Having opted for fast food, you
consider the choices. There’s the leading national burger
chain; if you go there, then you know exactly what you’ll
get no matter which location you visit. One rival burger
chain, however, works hard at promoting a reputation for
higher-quality meat, while another advertises a higher-
quality burger menu. Then there are the alternatives to hamburgers: a national
chain that proffers a home-style menu; another that promotes chicken as a kind
of antiburger; yet another that specializes in Mexican-themed foods. Among all
these different chains, their corporate identities have been respectively conveyed
through the symbols of a clown, a king, a redhead, a colonel, a cow, and a dog.
This scenario highlights some basic issues of organizational identity. Each of the
organizations referenced here is trying to foster a unique identity in a world
already saturated with competing messages. George Cheney and Lars
Christensen likened this challenge to that of a shipwrecked castaway who, after
putting a message in a bottle, goes to throw it in the ocean but “cannot see the
water [because] it is covered with messages in bottles.” [1] To convey its identity
to the world, however, the organization must first establish its own firm sense of
who “we” are. And because “we” means everyone, organizational identity is not
just a corporate matter to be decided by management. To carry off its corporate
image, individual organization members—from executives to employees—must
buy into and identify with the organization.
Then, too, if organizational identity starts with members and is then projected to
others, the traditional distinction between “external” and “internal”
communication becomes blurred. Communication activities—including
advertising, marketing, and public relations—that convey an organization’s
identity to external audiences are, in fact, the flip side of internal communication
activities by which members make sense of who “we” are. To return to our
opening scenario, the external activities by which each fast-food chain
communicates its identity to consumers cannot be divorced from the internal
communications by which that same identity is fostered among members of each
organization. Indeed, fostering and maintaining organizational identification is a
prime corporate objective, as management strives to cultivate employees who
feel strongly attached and loyal to the organization and its values. At the same
time, leaders engage in impression management to engender positive feelings
among the various publics—from customers, to shareholders, to the media—on
whose goodwill the organization depends.
Nevertheless, the managerial drive to maintain a stable corporate identity and
foster strong organizational identification among employees has certain risks.
Too much homogeneity can cause an organization to be set in its ways and
respond too slowly to changes in the marketplace. For example, IBM ruled the
computer world through the 1980s, but its organizational identity as a maker of
“business machines” may have caused it to miss the personal-computer
revolution. Moreover, too much homogeneity in a workforce can lead to
groupthink and deny organizations the diverse mix of employees and viewpoints
that boosts creativity and leads to better decisions. In this chapter, then, we have
paired identity and diversity as two aspects of organizational life existing in a
tension that must be successfully balanced. This is true for leaders who must
manage the public identity of the organization and, simultaneously, manage
employees so that they identify the organization’s public identity.
Yet the need to manage the tension between identity and diversity is also true for
individual organization members. Since the Industrial Revolution, and especially
over the past century, organizations have become major sources of personal
identity for many people. In traditional societies, the bonds of local community
and local authority supplied stable roles for people. In modern societies,
however, people derive a major part of their identities from the organizations
with which they affiliate. Perhaps you know people who identify so completely
with an organization that its values form their personal sense of moral duty.
Perhaps you have experienced this feeling yourself about a sports team on which
you played, a house of worship to which you belong, a club you joined, or even
the college you now attend. For individuals, the tension between organizational
identity and diversity is sometimes called the work-life conflict. At work, you
want to be a valued “team player” who helps to achieve organizational goals,
and yet you also want to retain your own identity and “get a life.”
Then, too, the social contract between employers and employees has changed
over the past two generations in response to globalization (see Chapter 6). Until
the 1970s, people generally believed that employees who strongly and loyally
identified with their organizations would be rewarded with job security and a
reasonable expectation of a lifelong career. Today, you have no such guarantees
and likely do not expect to spend your entire adult life working for a single
company. Under this new social contract, you must balance the level of
organizational identification needed to do your work effectively and gain
satisfaction from your employment with the knowledge that you must build a
personal “brand” that is separate from your current organization. Why? Chances
are that you will be working for another company someday.
[1] Cheney, G., & Christensen, L. T. (2001). Organizational identity:
Linkages between internal and external communication. In F. M. Jablin &
L. L. Putnam (Eds.), The new handbook of organizational communication
(pp. 231–269). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage, p. 240.
8.1 Identity and the Organization
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
1. See how different approaches to the nature of organizations lead
to different perspectives on organizational identity.
2. Understand the concept of organizational identity, both its roots in
theories of individual identity and how the literature on
organizational identity has developed to the present.
3. Differentiate between organizational identity, organizational
culture, and organizational image and grasp the dynamic
relationships between them.
4. See how organizational identity can be unstable and mutable,
changing and adapting in response to external feedback or events
that challenge an organization’s image and reputation.
5. Understand the danger of self-referential autocommunication and
the ethical challenges posed.
© Thinkstock/iStock
Because it raises questions of ontology (how things exist), epistemology (how
things are known), and axiology (what is worth knowing) that we encountered in
Chapter 4, the concept of identity evokes debate among organizational
communication scholars. One review noted that, while “interest in concepts of
organizational identity has grown” and “the literature is expanding rapidly,” the
notion “has been subjected to much scrutiny and debate, [and] definitions and
conceptualizations of the topic remain essentially contested.” [1] Table 8.1
suggests how the four approaches to organizations that we first discussed in
Chapter 4—postpositive, interpretive, critical, and postmodern—might view
organizational identity. [2]
Table 8.1 Approaches to Organizational Identity
Approach to
Organizations View of Organizational Identity
Postpositive Identity is one of the attributes that an organization “has” and that may be managed to
improve organizational performance.
Interpretive Identity arises from the social and communicative interactions between members and
thus helps constitute what an organization “is.”
Critical Identity is a tool that management can manipulate to universalize its interests (i.e.,
equate “company interests” with managerial interests).
Postmodern
Identity is a modern conceit; an organization does not have a unique “self,” for its
intentions are conditioned by larger historical discourses; if anything, organizations are
fragmented into multiple identities.
To get a grip on the concept, we begin with two basic metaphors: the
organization as a biological organism and the organization as a person. The first
metaphor will help us grasp the organizational aspect of identity and the second
to comprehend the communicative aspect.
Biological Metaphor
As we learned in Chapter 4, systems theory is based on the metaphor that an
organization can be likened to a biological organism. From that perspective, we
can understand how a living thing must somehow maintain a boundary between
itself and the environment. The boundary may be permeable as resources pass
between the organism and the environment. But if there is no boundary, then the
organism would cease to exist as an identifiable entity. Applying this metaphor
to organizations helps us to see that a basic function of any organization is to
continually organize a boundary between itself and its environment.
Establishing such a boundary is accomplished in two ways. First, an organization
sets up formal hierarchies. For example, a company adopts a form of ownership
and a corporate structure, sets hiring and firing procedures for determining who
can be an employee, and establishes locations where work takes place. But since
all organizations establish formal boundaries, something is still missing: what
makes “us” different from “them”? Thus, a second way that an organization
creates and maintains a boundary is by developing a sense of “who we are” that
distinguishes it from other organizations. This second type of boundary is one
way to define the concept of organizational identity. From this standpoint, then,
one basic organizing function of an organization is to continually organize an
identity that distinguishes it from the environment of other organizations.
Person Metaphor
Our second metaphor likens an organization to a person. More than a century
ago, Charles Horton Cooley asserted that identity is constructed through
language and has both an individual and a social aspect. Identity is partly shaped
as each of us mentally constructs what Cooley called a looking-glass self based
on how we believe others perceive us. [3] Writing at about the same time as
Cooley, George Herbert Mead also described how speech is the means by which
each person develops a unique sense of self. [4] He reasoned that if each human
lived alone, then there would be no need for a “self.” The need arises from the
fact that humans live in societies. Each of us, Mead observed, mentally
constructs an image of what he called the “generalized other,” or a composite
picture of the society in which we live. Mead held that each person acquires a
sense of self by imagining what others think of him or her and then—through
speech—negotiating a self that will be accepted by others. A later theorist,
Erving Goffman, built on Cooley’s and Mead’s theories by likening humans’
everyday relations to a drama. People are actors who each present a face to
society and stage a life story that will gain them social approval. Though the
events of your life happen randomly, you must impose a logical narrative on
those events and turn them into a coherent and satisfying story. [5]
If we extend these ideas to organizations, we can grasp how development of an
organizational identity is a process of negotiating an organizational “self” by
telling a coherent story that the organization’s members and publics will accept.
Interest in how individuals and groups form identities through communication
arose in the 1980s and has remained strong. Not surprisingly, this movement also
stimulated scholarly interest in theorizing the dynamics of organizational
identity.
The Concept of Organizational Identity
Through the biological metaphor, we grasped how an organization must
establish boundaries, even if permeable and blurred, in order for the notion of an
“organization” to have any meaning. And through likening the organization to a
person, we saw how these boundaries must be negotiated—through
communication—in ways that distinguish the organization’s story from those of
other organizations in a socially acceptable manner. We chose this way of
introducing our topic because, as Dennis Gioia observed, the “important
features of individual identity supply the basis for the extension of the notion to
organizations.” [6] Blake Ashforth and Fred Mael similarly noted that “identity
has been researched at the level of the individual, group and, more recently, the
organization because of the many parallels across the three levels.” [7]
So we turn now to the literature on organizational identity, a concept that
originated in 1985 with Stuart Albert and David Whetten, who built on the work
of Cooley, Mead, and Goffman. They defined organizational identity as a three-
part combination of “the central character of an organization” (e.g., its values,
practices, services, products, structure, ownership), the distinctive qualities that
it claims to possess, and the enduring manifestation of its identity over time. [8] According to this definition, then, the fast-food chains described in the
opening scenario of this chapter have formed identities that bring together their
central characters as retail restaurants operated through a franchise-business
model, their individual claims to distinction vis-à-vis the other chains, and their
consistency in sticking with their respective identities. Albert and Whetten did
not suggest leaders “decide” the identities of their organizations. Rather,
formation of an organizational identity is an interactive process. Outsiders voice
perceptions of an organization, and the organization adjusts its identity
accordingly. [9]
Writing a few years later, Ashforth and Mael further grounded organizational
identity in social identity theory (SIT). [10] This psychological theory, proposed
in the 1970s by Henri Tajfel and John Turner, holds that one’s self-concept
combines a “personal identity” based on individual traits with a “social identity”
based on group traits. [11] This social identity emerges when a person feels like
an insider of a particular group. Thus, noted David Seidl, SIT opens the door “to
apply psychological identity theories to organizations,” since the theory explains
how “the individual member uses descriptions of the organization as part of his
[sic] own self-descriptions.” [12]
Since the work of Albert and Whetten and Ashford and Mael in the 1980s, the
literature on organizational identity has continued to expand. Over three decades,
the concept has moved from Albert and Whetten’s original thesis—that
organizational identity is central, distinctive, and enduring—to a more nuanced
view. Now, scholars see organizational identity as adaptive, even unstable, since
identity must respond to the perceptions of the public and the organization’s own
members. Consider how fast-food chains have transformed over the years. In the
1960s and 1970s, when families seldom ate out, McDonald’s advertising
proclaimed, “You Deserve a Break Today.” Its main rival, Burger King,
trumpeted the slogan “Special Orders Don’t Upset Us” to reassure moms that
their finicky kids would not balk at eating out. Television commercials for
Kentucky Fried Chicken were aimed at mothers who could enjoy an occasional
respite from the stove by putting a ready-made, home-style meal on the family
dinner table. Today, of course, families eat out regularly, and fast fare, rather
than home cooking, sets consumer taste preferences. As their environment has
changed, the chains have adapted their identities—and today are adapting again.
With people spending more time in fast-food establishments, all the major chains
are cultivating identities akin to comfortable sit-down restaurants. And given
concerns about obesity as a public health issue, the fast-food chains are putting
more nutritious choices on their menus.
These transformations illustrate a question on the mind of scholars today: can
organizational identity be enduring in a world of accelerating change? Given the
universal availability of the Internet, many organizations are now set up as
loosely structured networks. Stuart Albert, who originated the concept of
organizational identity in the 1980s, recently noted that organizations of the
twenty-first century operate in a world of “flattening hierarchies, the growth in
teamwork and empowerment, the outsourcing of secondary competencies, and…
creating flexible pools of sophisticated capacities.” [13] In such a world, Albert
and his colleagues argued, the dismantling of bureaucratic structures increases
the need for cognitive structures—that is, identities—that give organizations a
rudder to steer by. This assertion is countered by Gioia, Schultz, and Corley, who
contended that organizational identity exhibits a quality of “adaptive instability.” [14] As an organization projects its identity, they noted, it receives constant
feedback via today’s 24/7 media. Then, as discrepancies are detected between
self-perception and other perception, the organization adapts its identity to foster
a desirable image. Since the process is ongoing, the cycle continually reboots
itself. Such debates show that organizational identity is a lively topic of
discussion and research among scholars. Recently, Mary Jo Hatch and Majken
Schultz [15] summarized major theoretical developments, which are presented in
Table 8.2.
Table 8.2 Theorizing Organizational Identity
Roots in Sociology and Social Psychology
Cooley [16] 1902
The self has both individual and social aspects. The social aspect is constructed
as a “looking-glass self” when a person considers how others may perceive him
or her.
Mead [17] 1934
The self is composed of an “I” (the spontaneous and creative aspects of self) and
a “me” (the looking-glass self that imagines how it is perceived by the
“generalized others”).
Goffman [18] 1959
The self is a “face” that each person “presents” to others. Negotiating and
maintaining the self is like a drama; a person strives to present a face that will be
accepted by an audience of others.
Tajfel and
Turner [19] 1979
One’s self-concept combines a personal identity based on individual traits with a
social identity based on group classifications. Group identities can emerge as
members feel like insiders.
Brewer and
Gardner [20] 1996
The self can be analyzed at three levels: personal self-concept, relational self-
concept, and collective self-concept.
Early Development of the Concept
Albert and
Whetten [21] 1985
Originated concept of organizational identity, theorized as a combination of an
organization’s central character, the distinctive qualities it claims to possess, and
the enduring manifestation of an identity over time.
Schwartz [22] 1987 Proposed that research on organizational identity can be pursued through a
psychoanalytic framework.
Ashforth and
Mael [23] 1989
Applied Tajfel and Turner’s social-identity theory to organization studies and
introduced the concept of “organizational identification” to describe how
individual members identify with an organization.
Alvesson [24] 1990 Introduced the concept of “organizational image” as an aspect of organizational
identity.
Dutton and
Dukerich [25] 1991
Investigated how organizational identities adapt in response to an organization’s
environment and concerns for how it is perceived.
Ginzel,
Kramer, and
Sutton [26] 1993
Adapted Goffman’s notion of impression management to organizations, thus
envisioning impression management not as merely a managerial function, but as
a negotiation between an organization and its audiences.
Recent Developments: Multiple Identities
Pratt and
Rafaeli [27] 1997
Organization members manage multiple identities; for example, their identities as
members of a specific organization and their identities as members of their
professional community.
Golden-Biddle
and Rao [28] 1997
Different segments of an organization may have different identities, which may
lead to “hybrid identities” as members combine different (and sometimes
conflicting) identities.
Recent Development: Stability and Change
Gioia, Schultz,
and Corley [29] 2000
Contrary to Albert and Whetten’s description of organizational identity as
enduring, identity is dynamically unstable and adaptive. The label given to an
organization may be stable, but the meaning of the label changes.
Hatch and
Schultz [30] 2002
Organizational identity is formed, maintained, and transformed through the
dynamic interaction of organizational identity, organizational image, and
organizational culture.
Recent Developments: Narrative and Discourse
Czarniawska-
Joerges [31] 1997
Organizational identity may be analyzed as a narrative production or a story that
an organization tells to gain acceptance.
Alvesson and
Willmott [32] 2002 Managerial interests attempt to regulate organizational identity to “produce” an
“appropriate” member and thus maintain control.
Recent
Developments:
Audiences
Elsbach and
Kramer [33] 1996
Threats to organizational identity (e.g., criticism in the media) prompt members
to respond with various strategies to affirm and repair the threatened identity and
thus restore their own social identities.
Cheney and
Christensen [34]
2001
An organization’s internal and external communication is linked through its
identity. How an organization sees itself and believes others see it will affect
corporate issue management.
Identity, Image, and Culture
A further challenge for research on organizational identity is simple semantics.
The terms organizational identity, corporate identity, organizational image,
corporate image, organizational culture, and corporate culture have different
meanings for scholars in different organization- and management-related fields.
Hatch and Schultz attempted to sort things out with a theory that distinguishes
organizational identity, and culture, image and shows how each dynamically
interacts with the other. [35] They defined organizational identity as the internal
perspective of members who identify with the organization and base their
interpretations of the organization on internal information rather than what
outsiders say. Organizational culture emerges as members express their
collective identity and, in so doing, collectively form unconscious assumptions
and meanings that shape everyday organizational life. Finally, organizational
image is the external perspective of outsiders who do not identify with the
organization and base their interpretations of the organization on multiple
sources.
Nevertheless, these phenomena do not operate in isolation. Organizational
identity and culture influence one another, as do organizational identity and
image. Hatch and Schultz’s dynamic model of organizational identity sets forth
these relationships. First, organizational identity and culture are interrelated
because, as members reflect on their organization’s identity, these reflections are
embedded in the organization’s culture. At the same time, organizational identity
expresses members’ shared culture. Second, organizational identity and image
are interrelated because, as members express their collective identity, they leave
impressions on outsiders who then form an image of the organization. Yet
members form a mental picture of how outsiders perceive the organization and
then adjust their expressions of identity to foster a positive image. We have
adapted Hatch and Schultz’s model in Figure 8.1 to show how members’
expressions of, and reflections on, organizational identity are the “transmission
belt” between an organization’s internal culture and its external image.
Figure 8.1 Integration of Culture and Image via Identity
The Risks of Organizational Identity
If you are majoring in communication, then you may be concentrating on
advertising, marketing, and public relations. You may aspire to do these as a
career. Traditionally, these activities are viewed through the SMCR (source,
message, channel, receiver) model that we encountered in Chapter 1. Thus,
organizational leaders think up a corporate message, strategically choose the
channels that most effectively reach the desired recipients, and measure results
to determine success and guide future campaigns. In other words, corporate
communications are formulated according to the rational intentions of corporate
communicators. But George Cheney and Lars Christensen challenged this
assumption: “Internal perceptions (identities, expectations, and strategies)
strongly affect what problems are ‘seen,’ what potential solutions are envisioned,
and how the problems are ultimately addressed.” [36] In other words, an
organization’s identity can precondition its leaders and members to see certain
problems and ignore others and to favor certain solutions and forgo other
options. Thus, the way an organization chooses to manage issues and
communicate its positions can become “self-referential,” or mainly about
affirming its own organizational identity. Though communications “seem to be
directed toward others, [they] may actually be auto-communicative, that is,
directed primarily toward the [organizational] self.” [37]
At worst, messages become so auto-communicative and thinking so closed that
the organization is only talking to itself. The antidote to self-referentiality, argue
Cheney and Christensen, is self-reflection. Only by bringing the taken-for-
granted meanings and assumptions of organizational identity to the surface and
by being “sensitive to…one’s own auto-communicative predispositions…can
organizations hope to counter the self-referential tendencies” that can lead to
unethical communication. [38]
KEY TAKEAWAY
Different ontologies about organizations (i.e., the nature of their
being) lead to different perspectives on organizational identity. A
functionalist (or postpositive) ontology regards identity as one of a
set of attributes that an organization “has” and that therefore can
be managed to optimize performance. An interpretive ontology
regards identity as part of what an organization “is,” since it
emerges from the communicative interactions that constitute an
organization. A critical ontology may see organizational identity as
a tool of management to make its interests seem normal and
natural. A postmodern ontology “decenters” the very notion of
identity by seeing organizations and individuals not as
autonomous units but as sites of contestation between multiple
discourses.
In originating the concept of organizational identity, Stuart Albert
and David Whetten built on theories of how individual identities
are formed. They looked to the theories of Charles Horton Cooley,
George Herbert Mead, and Erving Goffman, who held that the
“self” has both an individual and a social aspect. Extending these
ideas to organizations, Albert and Whetten argued that
organizational identity is the central character of an organization,
the distinctive qualities it claims to possess, and the enduring
manifestation of its identity over time. Formation of this identity,
however, is an interactive process in which outsiders voice
perceptions that influence the organization’s definition of itself.
Since Albert and Whetten introduced their thesis in 1985,
subsequent scholars have explored how organizations can have
multiple identities and how organizational identities can change.
To distinguish between organizational identity, organizational
culture, and organizational image, Mary Jo Hatch and Majken
Schultz advanced a single theory to delineate each concept and
explain how each phenomenon is interrelated with the others.
Identity is a conscious perspective shared by members; culture
emerges from members’ symbolic constructions to form tacit
assumptions and meanings; and image is a perspective held by
external stakeholders. Organizational identity and culture are
interrelated because members’ reflections on identity become
embedded in culture, even as identity comes to express cultural
understandings. Organizational identity and image are interrelated
because the expression of identity leaves impressions on
outsiders, even as the organization takes those impressions into
account in forming its identity.
Dennis Gioia, Majken Schultz, and Kevin Corley challenged Albert
and Whetten’s original assertion that organizational identity is
enduring. Instead, they argued that organizational identity exhibits
“adaptive instability.” As external feedback triggers challenges to
an organization’s image, the organization reflects on itself and
how it is perceived, and addresses any discrepancy by adjusting
its identity to generate the desired image.
An organization externally communicates its identity through
advertising, marketing, and public relations. By these
communications, organizations engage in corporate issue
management. George Cheney and Lars Christensen pointed out
that an organization’s identity—how it sees itself—shapes the
problems it perceives and the solutions it formulates. When issue
management becomes “self-referential,” corporate communication
can actually become “auto-communication.” Though advertising,
marketing, and public relations are purportedly directed to
external audiences, the organization is really talking to itself. To
avoid unethical communication, leaders and managers must be
aware of their potential for autocommunication.
EXERCISES
1. Think of an organization to which you have belonged. It might be
a sports team on which you played, a club you joined, a company
where you worked, a church or mosque or synagogue where you
have worshipped, or the college you now attend. What was (or is)
its organizational identity? As you think of that identity, think of
how it may have formed. How would you compare the formation
of its identity to the way a person forms his or her identity? Are
the theories of Cooley, Mead, and Goffman applicable to
organizations? If so, how?
2. Consider again the organization you named in Exercise 1.
Describe how (using Albert and Whetten’s definition) its identity
reflects its central character and the distinctive qualities it claims
to possess and how the identity has endured over time. Now,
referring to Hatch and Schultz’s theory, describe how its identity,
culture, and image are interrelated. Finally, referring to Gioia,
Schultz, and Corley’s theory of adaptive instability, describe how
the organization’s identity has changed in response to external
feedback and events that have challenged its image.
3. Finally, think again of the organization you analyzed in Exercises
Organizational Culture:
Face :
Looking-Glass Self:
Organizational Identity:
Organizational Image:
Social Identity Theory:
1 and 2. In what ways might its organizational identity—the way it
sees itself—have shaped the problems it perceives and the
solutions it formulates? Do you see, as Cheney and Christensen
cautioned, any autocommunication in its advertising, marketing,
and public relations? Explain your answer.
KEY TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
To distinguish organizational culture from organizational identity, Hatch and Schultz described culture as emerging from members’ use of symbols (including communication) to form unconsciously accepted assumptions and meanings that shape everyday organizational life.
According to Erving Goffman, constructing your self is like a drama; that is, you are like an actor who presents a face to an audience and, as in a play, stages a life story that you hope will gain social acceptance.
A term coined by Charles Horton Cooley, meaning a mental image of how you think others perceive you and that drives the social aspect of your self.
In Albert and Whetten’s original conception, organizational identity has three dimensions as its reflects the central character of an organization and its own claims of distinctiveness and as it endures over time.
To distinguish organizational image from organizational identity, Hatch and Schultz defined image as a perspective held by external stakeholders who view the organization as “other” to themselves and interpret the organization based not only on the organization itself but on multiple sources.
Proposed by Tajfel and Turner, social identity theory (SIT) holds that one’s self-concept combines a “personal identity”
based on individual traits with a “social identity” based on group classifications.
[1] Seidl, D. (2005). Organizational identity and self-transformation: An
autopoietic perspective. Burlington, VT: Ashgate, p. 67.
[2] See also Gioia, D. A. (1998). From individual to organizational identity.
In D. A. Whetten & P. C. Godfrey (Eds.), Identity in organizations:
Building theory through conversations (pp. 17–31). Thousand Oaks, CA:
Sage.
[3] Cooley, C. H. (1922). Human nature and the social order. New York,
NY: Scribner.
[4] Mead, G. H. (1934). Mind, self, and society. Chicago, IL: University of
Chicago Press.
[5] Goffman, E. (1959). The presentation of self in everyday life. New
York, NY: Doubleday.
[6] Gioia, D. A. (1998). From individual to organizational identity. In D. A.
Whetten & P. C. Godfrey (Eds.), Identity in organizations: Building theory
through conversations (pp. 17–31). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage, p. 20.
[7] Ashforth, B. E., & Mael, F. (1996). Organizational identity and strategy
as a context for the individual. Advances in Strategic Management, 13,
19–64.
[8] Albert, S. A., & Whetten, D. A. (1985). Organizational identity.
Research in Organizational Behavior, 7, 263–295, p. 292.
[9] Albert, S. A., & Whetten, D. A. (1985). Organizational identity.
Research in Organizational Behavior, 7, 263–295, p. 273.
[10] Ashforth, B. E., & Mael, F. (1989). Social identity theory and the
organization. Academy of Management Review, 14, 20–39, p. 21.
[11] Tajfel, H., & Turner, J. (1979). An integrative theory of intergroup
conflict. In W. G. Austin & S. Worchel (Eds.), The social psychology of
intergroup relations (pp. 38–43). Monterey, CA: Brooks/Cole.
[12] Seidl, D. (2005). Organizational identity and self-transformation: An
autopoietic perspective. Burlington, VT: Ashgate, p. 72.
[13] Albert, S., Ashforth, B. E., & Dutton, J. E. (2000). Organizational
identity and identification: Charting new waters and building new bridges.
Academy of Management Review, 25, 13–17, p. 13.
[14] Gioia, D. A., Schultze, M., & Corley, K. G. (2000). Organizational
identity, image, and adaptive instability. Academy of Management
Review, 25, 63–81.
[15] Hatch, M. J., & Schultze, M. (2004). Organizational identity: A reader.
Oxford, UK: Oxford University Press.
[16] Cooley, C. H. (1922). Human nature and the social order. New York,
NY: Scribner.
[17] Mead, G. H. (1934). Mind, self, and society. Chicago, IL: University
of Chicago Press. Mead, G. H. (1934). Mind, self, and society. Chicago,
IL: University of Chicago Press.
[18] Goffman, E. (1959). The presentation of self in everyday life. New
York, NY: Doubleday.
[19] Tajfel, H., & Turner, J. (1979). An integrative theory of intergroup
conflict. In W. G. Austin & S. Worchel (Eds.), The social psychology of
intergroup relations (pp. 38–43). Monterey, CA: Brooks/Cole.
[20] Brewer, M. B., & Gardner, W. (1996). Who is this “we”? Levels of
collective identity and self representations. Journal of Personality and
Social Psychology, 71, 83–93.
[21] Albert, S. A., & Whetten, D. A. (1985). Organizational identity.
Research in Organizational Behavior, 7, 263–295.
[22] Schwartz, H. S. (1987). Anti-social actions of committed
organizational participants: An existential psychoanalytic perspective.
Organization Studies, 8, 327–340.
[23] Ashforth, B. E., & Mael, F. (1989). Social identity theory and the
organization. Academy of Management Review, 14, 20–39.
[24] Alvesson, M. (1990). Organization: From substance to image?
Organization Studies, 11, 373–394.
[25] Dutton, J. E., & Dukerich, J. M. (1991). Keeping an eye on the mirror:
Image and identity in organizational adaptation. Academy of
Management Journal, 34, 517–554.
[26] Ginzel, L. E., Kramer, R. M., & Sutton, R. I. (1993). Organizational
impression management as a reciprocal influence process: The
neglected role of the organizational audience. Research in Organizational
Behavior, 15, 227–266.
[27] Pratt, M. G., & Rafaeli, A. (1997). Organizational dress as a symbol
of multilayered social identities. Academy of Management Journal, 40,
862–898.
[28] Golden-Biddle, K., & Rao, H. (1997). Breaches in the boardroom:
Organizational identity and conflicts of commitment in a nonprofit
organization. Organization Science, 8, 593–611.
[29] Gioia, D. A., Schultze, M., & Corley, K. G. (2000). Organizational
identity, image, and adaptive instability. Academy of Management
Review, 25, 63–81.
[30] Hatch, M. J., & Schultz, M. (2002). The dynamics of organizational
identity. Human Relations, 55, 989–1018.
[31] Czarniuawska-Joerges, B. (1997). Narratives of individual and
organizational identities. Communication yearbook 17, 193–221.
[32] Alvesson, M., & Willmott, H. (2002). Identity regulation as
organizational control: Producing the appropriate individual. Journal of
Management Studies, 39, 619–644.
[33] Elsbach, K. D., & Kramer, R. M. (1996). Members’ response to
organizational identity threats: Encountering and countering the
BusinessWeek rankings. Administrative Science Quarterly, 41, 442–476.
[34] Cheney, G., & Christensen, L. T. (2001). Organizational identity:
Linkages between internal and external communication. In F. M. Jablin &
L. L. Putnam (Eds.), The nmew handbook of organizational
communication (pp. 231–269). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
[35] Hatch, M. J., & Schultz, M. (2000). Scaling the tower of Babel:
Relational differences between identity, image, and culture in
organizations. In M. Schultz, M. J. Hatch, & M. H. Larsen (Eds.), The
expressive organization: Linking identity, reputation, and the corporate
brand (pp. 13–35). Oxford, UK: Oxford University Press.
[36] Cheney, G., & Christensen, L. T. (2001). Organizational identity:
Linkages between internal and external communication. In F. M. Jablin &
L. L. Putnam (Eds.), The new handbook of organizational communication
(pp. 231–269). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage, p. 249.
[37] Cheney, G., & Christensen, L. T. (2001). Organizational identity:
Linkages between internal and external communication. In F. M. Jablin &
L. L. Putnam (Eds.), The new handbook of organizational communication
(pp. 231–269). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage, p. 258.
[38] Cheney, G., & Christensen, L. T. (2001). Organizational identity:
Linkages between internal and external communication. In F. M. Jablin &
L. L. Putnam (Eds.), The new handbook of organizational communication
(pp. 231–269). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage, pp. 263–264.
8.2 Identity and the Organization Member
As noted, you may have felt such identification with a sports team, a club, a
house of worship, your alma mater, your place of work, or any number of
organizations to which you have belonged.
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
1. Distinguish between organizational identity and identification.
2. Recognize how management strives to guide employees’
socialization into the organization, so employees strongly identify
with the organization.
3. Understand the processes by which organization members come
to identify with the organization and incorporate that affinity into
their self-identities.
4. Grasp the postmodern and critical concern that managerial
interests can use organizational identity and identification to
sustain their control.
© Thinkstock/iStock
While organizational identity may be developed by an organization,
organizational identification may be developed by its members. In introducing
their concept of organizational identification, Ashforth and Mael defined it as
“a specific form of social identification,” where identification is “the perception
of oneness with or belongingness to a group, involving direct or vicarious
experience of its successes and failures.” [1] As noted, you may have felt such
identification with a sports team, a club, a house of worship, your alma mater,
your place of work, or any number of organizations to which you have belonged.
In a moment, we will look at the psychology of organizational identification. But
first, let us see the issue from the corporate side rather than the individual side.
Leaders expend much effort toward managing employees’ identification with the
organization in hopes of producing a workforce that is committed and loyal. So
they ensure new members “learn the ropes” and are socialized into the values
and practices of the organization. In Chapter 12, we will review at length the
process of organizational socialization. But the goal, from a management
perspective, is to produce employees who adopt (as we learned in Chapter 7) the
organization’s desired followership style. While numerous models of
followership have been proposed, they all assume followers should identify
strongly enough with an organization to perform their duties, to be motivated,
and to exercise their critical thinking and independent judgment for the benefit
of the group. Thus, fostering organizational identification is seen by leaders as
an essential management function. But for individuals, as we will now see, the
implications of organizational identification are more complex.
The Psychology of Identification
Imagine that you have worked your way through college as an employee of the
(hypothetical) Better Burgers chain. The company, as it name implies, has built
its identity on a claim of “gourmet” fast food. Over the years, you have come to
identify with the slogan “I’m Better!” and mentally see yourself as the kind of
person who belongs in a “Better” company. Likewise, you have internalized the
Better Burger values of creativity and quality captured in your job title of
burgerista. Your identification with Better Burgers and internalization of its
values is shown by your behavior (loyalty to the company through years of
service) and emotion (the satisfaction you feel in doing your job well). You
cannot imagine working for a different burger chain.
This scenario sets forth the basics of organizational identification. As we noted
at the outset of the chapter, while an organization has an identity, its members
may in turn identify with that organization. Much of the research on
identification follows the work of Ashforth and Mael, which is where we will
begin. [2] They applied, as we saw earlier, the social identity theory of Tajfel and
Turner, who had themselves built on the theories of Cooley and Mead. Guided
by (SIT), Ashforth and Mael defined identification as a “cognitive construct [in
which]…an individual need only perceive him- or herself as psychologically
intertwined with the fate of the group.” [3] In other words, your identification
with Better Burgers is a mental picture rather than a set of behaviors or
emotions. Further, identification can be distinguished from internalization.
“Whereas identification refers to self in terms of social categories (I am),”
observed Ashforth and Mael, “internalization refers to the incorporation of
values, attitudes, and so forth within the self as guiding principles (I believe).” [4] Thus, when you mentally picture yourself as a part of Better Burgers and
internalize its values, your behaviors (such as years of service) and emotions
(such as job satisfaction) follow. But what caused you to identify with Better
Burgers in the first place? Social identity theory suggests five factors:
1. The distinctiveness of the organization, so that membership confers a
unique self-identity
2. The prestige of the organization, so that membership boosts self-esteem
3. An awareness of out-groups (i.e., other organizations), so that awareness of
the in-group (i.e., one’s own organization) is reinforced
4. Competition with other organizations, so that distinctions are more clearly
delineated
5. Group formation factors that may include physical proximity,
interpersonal relations, attractiveness, similarity, shared background, and
common threats or aspirations [5]
So to continue our Better Burgers scenario, your identification with the chain
emerged as your own self-identity became intertwined with its distinctiveness
(“Our Burgers Are Best!”), prestige (“We’re the Gourmet Choice!”), and
contrasts to other chains (“The other chains want to be like us” and “They won’t
beat us because their burgers aren’t as good!”). In addition, your organizational
identification might be enhanced if your Better Burgers restaurant is in your own
neighborhood; if you get along well with your manager and coworkers; and if
your fellow employees are nice people who have similar personalities,
background, dreams, and challenges.
For your manager—and more broadly, for Better Burgers’s corporate leadership
—a prime goal is to “produce” employees with an organizational identification
like yours. Of course, if you like where you work and feel a sense of belonging
and purpose, then your organizational identification will tend to boost your job
satisfaction. But it also follows that an organization’s attempts to “manage” your
identity are tied to corporate leadership’s desire for control and predictability.
Phillip Tompkins and George Cheney have called this “concertive control.”
Drawing on structuration theory (see Chapter 4), they proposed that an identity-
identification duality operates within organizations. [6] The more you are linked
with other Better Burgers employees who share your identification, the more you
will all be strengthened in your identification and will enjoy relationships with
like-minded coworkers. Tompkins and Cheney theorized that organizations
deploy communication to control their members in five ways:
1. Simple control through direct and open use of power
2. Technical control that selects the communication tools employees must use
3. Bureaucratic control that determines formal policies and procedures that
employees must follow
4. Cultural control that inculcates common values and practices around
which employees form their interests and relationships
5. Concertive control through which management induces employees to
discipline themselves and approved corporate attitudes and behaviors come
to seem natural and normal until these values become the goals that
motivate members and form their sense of obligation
Tompkins and Cheney also drew on rhetorical theory (see Chapter 4), citing
Kenneth Burke’s concept that persuasion can occur when speakers can make
audiences identify with their arguments. [7] They also drew on Aristotle’s
concept of the enthymeme. [8] Aristotle observed that reasoning occurs
syllogistically from major premise, to minor premise, to conclusion. When a
premise is widely shared by an audience, the speaker can engage in enthymeme
by omitting that premise from the argument; this impels the audience to mentally
fill in the missing premise and so be drawn along to the speaker’s conclusion.
Thus, suppose that managers and workers share the premise that profits are good
for everyone. Managers need only urge employees to practice “customer service
excellence,” and employees will fill in the missing premise that “satisfied
customers are repeat customers.” In this way, employees are drawn along to
management’s conclusions that making a profit is an imperative for everyone in
the company. When such identification occurs, the organization has gained
concertive control over its members.
A Postmodern Perspective
In the premodern era of kings, wrote Michel Foucault, discipline was achieved
through direct and physical punishments such as public executions. In the
modern era of bureaucracies, however, employee discipline is achieved not
through direct and physical means but through indirect and intangible means
until people discipline themselves. [9] Foucault gave the example of a state
prison, which is an invention of modern society. Because inmates know they are
not watched every moment but could be at any moment, they discipline
themselves. In a modern bureaucratic organization, however, the methods of
surveillance are financial statements, sales reports, production figures, and other
accounting procedures that keep tabs on people. Foucault [10] concluded that four
“technologies” (or ways of getting things done) operate in the modern world:
1. Technologies of production permit us to manipulate the physical world.
2. Technologies of sign systems permit us to communicate.
3. Technologies of power permit hierarchies to be formed, since a completely
egalitarian society is impossible.
4. Technologies of the self permit individuals to modify their bodies,
thoughts, and conduct to attain desired ends, since the fact of living in a
society makes an unmodified self impossible.
Foucault then turned a postmodern eye toward these “technologies.” People are
preconditioned, he observed, by the dominant discourses in their history, culture,
and society to accept as normal and natural what each technology produces. He
then urged individuals, when under pressure from dominant discourses to modify
their selves, to respond ethnically by questioning the moral assumptions to
which they are being subjected. [11] Numerous scholars in organization studies
have applied Foucault’s ideas about the self to organizational settings. [12] For
example, Mike Savage demonstrated how railroad employees in the nineteenth
century readily disciplined themselves in return for pay increases and a career
ladder that offered upward mobility. [13] Pay scales and career ladders are, of
course, technologies of power. Railroad employees submitted themselves to this
power through technologies of the self, modifying their thoughts, conduct, even
their bodies (for instance, to work night shifts) to attain their desired rewards.
A Critical Perspective
While Foucault’s ideas provide a framework for many scholars to explore
questions of the self in organizational settings, Matts Alvesson and Hugh
Willmott took their own critical look at the literature on organizational identity
and identification. They argued that management engages in identity regulation
to “produce” the “appropriate” individuals that management desires. [14] Identity
regulation, believed Alvesson and Willmott, is accomplished as management
controls the discourses that define a good employee, how a good employee
should act, how a good employee should relate to others, and the overall context
that governs these determinations. Managerial control of these discourses shapes
the identity work that all employees must do to make sense of the organization
and figure out their parts in it. Alvesson and Willmott’s model for identity
regulation, with examples of managerial discourses and their influence on
employees’ identity work, is summarized in Figure 8.2.
Figure 8.2 Alvesson and Willmott’s Identity Regulation
In addition to identity regulation and identity work, Alvesson and Willmott
introduced a third concept, self-identity, to their model. Thus organization
members’ identity work spans six dimensions of self-identity:
1. One’s central life interest is felt as a need to answer the questions “Who
am I?” and “What are we?”
2. The desire for coherence is felt as a need to tell one’s life story as a
narrative with a discernible sequence rather than a jumble of random
events.
3. The desire for distinctiveness is felt as a need to set boundaries that
distinguish “me” from others.
4. The desire for direction is felt as a need for some basis (if often vague) for
deciding what is appropriate, desired, valued, and reasonable.
5. The desire for positive social values is felt as a need to enhance the self-
esteem of one’s identity.
6. The desire for a self-identity is satisfied only when a person has acquired a
self-awareness of that identity.
Alvesson and Willmott further proposed that their constructs—identity
regulation, identity work, and self-identity—are interrelated. Managerial identity
regulation prompts employees to do ongoing identity work, even as managers
adjust their discourses as the identity work is ongoing. Meanwhile, identity work
produces self-identity, even as the desire for self-identity induces identity work.
Finally, self-identity responds to (or resists) managerial attempts at identity
regulation, even as the success (or failure) of that regulation is manifested in
employee self-identities. These dynamics are graphically represented in Figure
8.3. Nevertheless, add Alvesson and Willmott, the process needs more study.
Identity regulation is “an important yet still insufficiently explored dimension of
organizational control” that, they conclude, will only increase in a
postbureaucratic world of loosely networked organizations where control must
be accomplished by managing the “insides” of employees. [15]
Figure 8.3 Alvesson and Willmott’s Dynamics of Identity
KEY TAKEAWAY
Organizational identity is the collective identity that an
organization may form; organizational identification is developed
by individual members as they identify with the organization. The
concept of organizational identification originated with Blake
Ashford and Fred Mael. In applying social identity theory—which
holds that one’s self-concept combines a “personal identity” based
on individual traits with a “social identity” based on group
classifications—they defined organizational identification as a
form of social identification as members perceive oneness or
belonging with the organization.
A key management objective is to foster strong organizational
identification among employees. This occurs through conscious
efforts to socialize employees into the values and practices of the
organization so that they “get on board” and feel an affinity with
the organization’s identity. Yet these efforts are not the whole
story of how employees come to identify with an organization.
Taking their cue from social identity theory, Ashforth and Mael
observed that feelings of oneness and belonging are fostered as
the organization is seen as distinctive and prestigious, and as
comparisons to and competitions with other organizations
delineate differences between “us” and “them.” However,
Tompkins and Cheney drew on structuration theory to posit an
identity-identification duality. The more employees who identify
with an organization act together with other such coworkers, the
more they identify with the organization. Over time, believed
Tompkins and Cheney, increasing identification leads to
concertive control, as members so identify with an organization
that they discipline themselves to conform to managerially
approved values.
French philosopher Michel Foucault described how premodern
societies enforced discipline through direct physical means,
whereas modern societies enforce discipline through the
possibility of indirect surveillance that compels people to discipline
themselves. Matts Alvesson and Hugh Willmott, working from the
literature on organizational identification, posited that identity
regulation affords management a means of control through
“producing” the “appropriate” employee. All organization members
must do identity work to form an organizational self-identity.
Identity regulation occurs as management engages in discourses
that attempt to shape employees’ identity work. These
management discourses may strive to define the appropriate
employee, appropriate actions, appropriate relations, and
appropriate rules and contexts for organizational life.
EXERCISES
1. In the exercises for Section 8.1, you were asked to think of an
organization to which you have belonged—perhaps a sports team
on which you played, a club you joined, a company where you
worked, a church or mosque or synagogue where you have
worshipped, or the college you now attend. In Section 8.1 we
asked you to explore that organization’s identity; now we ask you
to think about your own identification with that organization.
Describe how the organization guided your socialization, first
through the anticipatory socialization phase prior to your actual
joining, and then through the phase of your formal entry and
assimilation. What methods did the organization use in
encouraging you to strongly identify with that organization?
2. Thinking of the same organization you analyzed in Exercise 1,
switch your gaze from the ways it tried to socialize you and
instead consider your own responses. Following Ashforth and
Meal’s framework, Did the organization’s distinctiveness make
you, as a member, feel unique? Did its prestige boost your self-
esteem? As you became aware of other similar organizations, did
the comparisons highlight what was different about your
organization? Did that make you feel more a part of the “in”
group? Was this feeling heightened by any actual or perceived
competition with the other organizations? And as Tompkins and
Cheney suggested, did your organizational identification increase
as you spent more time with other members who also identified
with the organization? Did you ultimately conform to the
organization’s values and practices without being told, because
you felt they were your own?
3. Finally, consider again the organization you analyzed in Exercises
1 and 2. Now refer to Figure 8.2, which lists the targets and
discourses that organization leaders and managers can use to
engage in identity regulation. The first column lists discursive
targets, the second lists discursive modes, and the third lists
examples given by Alvesson and Willmott. Make a chart of your
Identification :
Identity-Identification Duality :
Identity Regulation:
Identity Work:
Internalization:
Organizational Identification:
own and, in the third column, list your own examples of how the
organization to which you belonged may have engaged in identity
regulation. After listing your examples, jot down some thoughts on
how these discourses may have shaped your identity work and
influenced your self-identity in the organization.
KEY TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
Ashforth and Mael defined identification as a cognitive construct (or mental picture of one’s self as intertwined with a group) as opposed to a set of behaviors or emotions; further, identification attaches the self to social categories (“I am”), while internalization attaches the self to guiding principles (“I believe”).
The more that members identify with an organization, the more they seek out like-minded members; the more they interact with like-minded members, the more they identify with an organization.
A means of organizational control in which managerial interests engage in discourses that shape how employees form their workplace identities and thus “produce” the “appropriate” employee.
All employees engage in identity work as they interpret organizational discourses in light of their own central life interest, desires for coherence and distinctiveness, need for direction and self-affirming social values, and emerging self-awareness.
Ashforth and Mael defined identification as a cognitive construct (or mental picture of one’s self as intertwined with a group) as opposed to a set of behaviors or emotions; further, identification attaches the self to social categories (“I am”), while internalization attaches the self to guiding principles (“I believe”).
A specific form of social identification or perception of oneness with a group.
Self-Identity: In Alvesson and Willmott’s theory, identity work produces self-identity; the managerial objective in identity regulation is to shape the processes of identity work and thus produce “appropriate” self-identities.
[1] Ashforth, B. E., & Mael, F. (1989). Social identity theory and the
organization. Academy of Management Review, 14, 20–39, pp. 22, 34.
[2] Ashforth, B. E., & Mael, F. (1989). Social identity theory and the
organization. Academy of Management Review, 14, 20–39.
[3] Ashforth, B. E., & Mael, F. (1989). Social identity theory and the
organization. Academy of Management Review, 14, 20–39, p. 21.
[4] Ashforth, B. E., & Mael, F. (1989). Social identity theory and the
organization. Academy of Management Review, 14, 20–39, pp. 21–22.
[5] Ashforth, B. E., & Mael, F. (1989). Social identity theory and the
organization. Academy of Management Review, 14, 20–39, pp. 24–25.
[6] Tompkins, P. K. & Cheney, G. (1985). Communication and unobtrusive
control in contemporary organizations. In R. D. McPhee & P. K. Tompkins
(Eds.), Organizational communication: Traditional themes and new
directions (pp. 179–210). Newbury Park, CA: Sage. See also Scott, C.
R., Corman, S. A., & Cheney, G. (1998). The development of a
structurational theory of identification in the organization. Communication
Theory, 8, 298–336.
[7] Burke, K. (1969). A rhetoric of motives. Berkeley: University of
California Press. Burke, K. (1969). A rhetoric of motives. Berkeley:
University of California Press.
[8] Aristotle. (2007). On rhetoric: A theory of civic discourse (2nd ed.). (G.
A. Kennedy, Trans.). New York, NY: Oxford University Press.
[9] Foucault, M. (1977). Discipline and punish: The birth of the prison (A.
Sheridan, Trans.). New York, NY: Vintage. (Original work published 1975)
[10] Foucault, M. (1988). Technologies of the self. In L. H. Martin, H.
Gutman, & P. H. Hutton (Eds.), Technologies of the self: A seminar with
Michel Foucault (pp. 16–49). Amherst: University of Massachusetts
Press, p. 18.
[11] Foucault, M. (1984). On the genealogy of ethics: An overview of work
in progress. In P. Rabinow (Ed.), The Foucault reader (pp. 352–355).
New York, NY: Pantheon. See also Moore, M. C. (1987). Ethical
discourse and Foucault’s conception of ethics. Human Studies, 10, 81–
95.
[12] For example, see Burrell, G. (1988). Modernism, post modernism,
and organizational analysis 2: The contribution of Michel Foucault.
Organization Studies, 9, 221–235; McKinlay, A., & Starkey, K. (1998).
Foucault, management, and organization theory. London, UK: Sage.
[13] Savage, M. (1998). Discipline, surveillance, and the “career”:
Employment on the Great Western Railway, 1833–1914. In A. McKinlay
& K. Starkey (Eds.), Foucault, management, and organization theory (pp.
65–92). London, UK: Sage.
[14] Alvesson, M., & Willmott, H. (2002). Identity regulation as
organizational control: Producing the appropriate individual. Journal of
Management Studies, 39, 619–644.
[15] Alvesson, M., & Willmott, H. (2002). Identity regulation as
organizational control: Producing the appropriate individual. Journal of
Management Studies, 39, 619–644, p. 620. a
8.3 Diversity and the Organization
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
1. Identify demographic changes that are producing an increasingly
diverse labor force and the opportunities (improved recruiting,
creativity, problem solving, flexibility, marketing) and challenges
(prejudice, discrimination, stereotypes, ethnocentrism) of this
trend for organizations.
2. Understand that balancing your organizational identification and
your personal identity—in other words, balancing work and life—
ultimately requires a change in organizational cultures so that
flexibility becomes the norm and expectation for employers and
employees alike.
3. Define and explain why cultural intelligence is a business
necessity in the twenty-first century.
© Thinkstock/iStock
In thinking about identity and identification, we can easily slip into the trap of
thinking the organization has an identity and that, likewise, the employee has an
identity. In other words, each has one unified and integrated identity. This mode
of thinking is, in fact, the default position in Western culture. We think of each
person as a single unit so that, metaphorically, we project this same quality onto
the “super person” that is the organization. Yet Albert and Whetten’s original
thesis about organizational identity readily allowed that organizations can have
multiple identities. [1] Communication scholars, as well as researchers in
psychology and other fields, have long recognized that the same is true of
individuals.
Each one of us constructs our sense of self from a multitude of identities—
perhaps our family, ethnicity, gender, age, country of origin, region or city,
religion, hobbies, clubs, alma maters, political affiliations, profession, employer,
and work department. Moreover, identity is an ongoing construction that must be
constantly negotiated, renegotiated, and adjusted in light of new experiences as
you encounter new people and situations. To illustrate how people with different
(and multiple) identities must mesh to accomplish work, consider this textbook.
Under the auspices of a publisher, the three authors joined to perform the work.
We share an interest in organizational communication and yet our identities—
and their components—are very different:
Jason Wrench is a white male, a member of Generation X who hails from
Texas, earned his doctorate in West Virginia, moved from Ohio to New
York, has a special interest in learning processes, and identifies with his
roles as department chair, teacher, scholar, author, speaker, and consultant.
Narissra Punyanunt-Carter is a woman of color and member of Generation
X who also attended universities in Texas and Ohio, and now teaches at her
Texas alma mater where she researches, among other interests, family
communication.
Mark Ward is a baby boomer who mirrors the average (documented by the
Bureau of Labor Statistics) of holding 11.3 jobs through the first three
decades of his career. [2] A white, middle-aged, male, American,
Southerner, proud of his alma maters in Virginia and South Carolina, he
self-identifies as an academic, teacher, faculty member of his Texas
institution, and specialist in organizational and religious communication.
Yet through a dozen job changes his identity has varied: writer/editor,
corporate communication director, broadcaster, freelance journalist, midlife
graduate student, and college professor.
Furthermore, two of the authors (Wrench and Punyanunt-Carter) favor social-
scientific research methods, while the third (Ward) holds to an interpretive
epistemology. To write this textbook, then, we found ways of making our
diversity an advantage rather than a liability.
Or consider your organizational communication class. Your class is analogous to
an organization with a governing board (the administration), CEO (your
instructor), and members (the students). Probably you have experienced how
different classes have different “personalities” or, if you will, organizational
identities. Somehow, the climate and culture of one class—even just the
atmosphere when you walk in the door—is completely different from another
class. That identity is driven by many factors: the university, the subject of the
class, the instructor, and the composition of the students. And college professors
know that different sections of the same course, even during the same semester,
have different identities. Thus, for every class in which you are enrolled—
including your organizational communication class—you must work through the
diverse identities of your teachers, your classmates, and yourself to pass the
course. You must find a way to work with your instructor and to cooperate with
other students for class discussions and group projects.
In a very real sense, your textbook and your organizational communication class
are microcosms of processes that occur every day in the workplace. Individuals
and organizations must balance the need for a shared identity with the need to
accommodate diverse identities and then collectively leverage the strengths each
member brings to the table. That is the tension we will explore in this section.
The Business Case for Diversity
The notion of boosting performance by encouraging a diverse workforce takes
us a long way from the classical theories of management that we encountered in
Chapter 3. The theories of Frederick Taylor envisioned the organization as a
homogeneous “machine” whose inputs and outputs could be scientifically
managed. Max Weber held that bureaucratic management according to
impersonal but fair rules was preferable to the personalized leadership that
characterized nineteenth-century capitalism. And Henri Fayol advocated a
military style of management based on unity of direction and command. With all
these classical theories, individual identities should be left at the factory gate and
a diversity of perspectives and opinions would detract from Taylor’s control,
Weber’s impartiality, and Fayol’s unity. Yet as we also saw in Chapter 3, the
human relations approach to organizations recognized that workers have felt
needs, while human resources theories encouraged management to tap worker
creativity by enlisting their participation in organizational decision making.
Likewise, systems theory, as we learned in Chapter 4, acknowledges that an
organization needs a diversity of resources that is sufficient to handle the
complexity of its environment. Interpretive approaches suggest that an
organization “is” its diversity, since the organization and its culture are
constituted by the communicative interactions of its various members.
Postmodern and critical approaches celebrate diversity by recovering voices that
have been historically marginalized in organizations.
Quite apart from theory, however, is the practical reality of an increasingly
diverse workforce in the United States and many other nations. The US Bureau
of Labor Statistics (BLS) tracks numerous demographic traits, including age,
gender, race and ethnicity, disability, family and marital status, educational
attainment, military veteran status, and more. Each trait can be an integral
component of a person’s self-identity both in private life and on the job—and in
the aggregate, the demographic mix is constantly changing. Organizations must
keep abreast of these changes to find and attract the best talent; managers must
stay on top of these changes to best help their employees succeed; employees
must be aware of these changes to work effectively with coworkers. In 2006, a
BLS report projected the composition of the US labor force by decade through
2050. [3] The projections, shown in Figure 8.4 through Figure 8.7, suggest steady
growth in the numbers of black, Asian, and Hispanic men and women as
percentages of the workforce. But despite the growing numbers of workers in
these categories, the agency estimates that overall growth in the US labor force
will slow significantly as compared to the previous half century. The baby boom
generation is aging, while the participation rate of women in the labor force is
leveling off after previous decades of rapid growth.
Figure 8.4 US Labor Force Racial Distribution to 2050
*“All other” includes those classified as of multiple racial origin and the race categories of American
Indian, Alaska Native, Native Hawaiian, and other Pacific Islanders.
Figure 8.5 US Labor Force Race and Gender Distribution to 2050
*“All other” includes those classified as of multiple racial origin and the race categories of American
Indian, Alaska Native, Native Hawaiian, and other Pacific Islanders.
Figure 8.6 US Labor Force Ethnic Distribution to 2050
Figure 8.7 US Labor Force Ethnic and Gender Distribution to 2050
Given the trend toward increasingly multicultural workplaces, organizations
have solid business reasons to keep pace. Taylor Cox and Stacy Blake
summarized these reasons in six arguments for embracing diversity: (1)
Organizations with a reputation for welcoming diverse employees will gain a
recruiting edge in a shrinking labor pool, while (2) those that struggle with
integrating women and minorities will face increased costs as the labor pool
steadily diversifies. Further, organizations with diverse workforces will benefit
from the improved (3) creativity, (4) problem solving, and (5) managerial
flexibility spurred by multiple viewpoints, even as they (6) gain greater insights
for marketing products and services to an increasingly diverse public. [4] Nevertheless, achieving these benefits is not easy, because accustomed modes
of thinking—whether in an organizational culture or in the surrounding society
—may be transmitted over generations, be deeply ingrained, and be slow to
change. In 2011 alone, more than a hundred thousand individual charge filings
were lodged with the federal Equal Employment Opportunity Commission
(EEOC). [5]
The Legal Case for Diversity
That people could charge a privately owned business with discrimination,
however, was not always possible. Until passage of the Civil Rights Act of 1964,
business owners might refuse to serve or hire persons of color, for example, by
claiming the right to do what they pleased with their own establishments. But the
act established the principle that public and private entities (with the exception
of private clubs and religious organizations) used by the public are “public
accommodations.” In other words, if an entity purports to do business with the
public, it cannot discriminate in whom it will serve or hire on the basis of race,
color, religion, or national origin. Yet merely requiring private entities to accord
all persons their civil rights is not enough to achieve equal opportunity. Federal
laws against employment discrimination—listed in Table 8.3—also define what
is discrimination and who are protected classes of persons that may seek legal
redress.
Table 8.3 US Laws Prohibiting Employment Discrimination
Statute Purpose
TItle VII of the Civil Rights Act of
1964
Prohibits employment discrimination based on race, color,
religion, sex, or national origin
Equal Pay Act of 1963 Protects men and women who perform substantially equal work
in the same establishment from sex-based wage discrimination
Age Discrimination in Employment
Act of 1967 Protects individuals forty years of age or older
Titles I and V of the Americans with
Disabilities Act of 1990 (as amended)
Prohibits employment discrimination against qualified
individuals with disabilities
Sections 501 and 595 of the
Rehabilitation Act of 1973
Prohibits discrimination against qualified individuals with
disabilities who work in the federal government
Title II of the Genetic Information
Nondiscrimination Act of 2008
Prohibits employment discrimination based on genetic
information about an applicant, employee, or former employee
Civil Rights Act of 1991 Provides monetary damages in cases of intentional employment
discrimination
These laws, enforced by the EEOC, prohibit an employer “or other covered
entity from using neutral employment policies and practices that have a
disproportionately negative effect on applicants or employees of a [protected
class]…if the polices or practices at issue are not job-related and necessary to
the operation of the business.” Under these laws, “it is illegal to discriminate
against someone (applicant or employee) because of that person’s race, color,
religion, sex (including pregnancy), national origin, age (40 or older), disability
or genetic information” or “to retaliate against a person because he or she
complained about discrimination, filed a charge of discrimination, or
participated in an employment discrimination investigation or lawsuit.” [6] Yet
even so, more specificity is needed. In implementing antidiscrimination laws, the
EEOC has ruled on specific practices that violate the rights of protected classes:
Hiring: Employers may not recruit, advertise jobs, evaluate job
applications, require application procedures such as tests, gather
preemployment information, give employment references or referrals, or
make hiring decisions in ways that unlawfully discriminate against
protected classes of persons.
On the job: Employers may not make decisions on job assignments and
promotions, require tests for such assignments and promotions, administer
training or apprenticeship programs, institute a dress code, determine pay
and benefits, or generally make any decision on employment terms and
conditions in ways that unlawfully discriminate against protected classes of
persons.
Work environment: Employers must reasonably accommodate job
applicants and employees with disabilities, and reasonably accommodate
the religious beliefs and practices of employees, unless doing so would
cause significant expense or difficulty. Employees have the right to be free
from harassment that, on the basis of their membership in a protected class,
is so frequent or severe that it creates a hostile work environment or results
in demotion, discharge, or other adverse employment decisions. Sexual
harassment can occur through verbal, written, or physical behavior of a
sexual nature, from crude teasing to demanding sex in return for favorable
job treatment.
Termination: Employers may not make decisions about employee
discipline or discharge, or about whom to lay off or to recall from layoffs,
in ways that unlawfully discriminate against protected classes of persons or
make the work environment so intolerable that such persons are forced to
resign or are reasonably unable to remain.
To help you understand how these laws actually work in practice, the following
are short scenarios [7] regarding discrimination against each of the federally
protected classes of persons.
Race: Ray is an African American and Sonia an Asian American. Both
work in sales and are frustrated with the territories they have been assigned.
But the employer explains that, to maximize sales, the company has
assigned them to areas with high percentages of black and Asian residents.
Color: Melanie works at a large department store and applied for
promotion from sales clerk to manager of the beauty products counter. But
she was turned down because Melanie is a brown-complexioned Latina
and, according to her boss, the store’s major vendor for beauty products
prefers a “light-skinned” representative.
Religion: Yusef, a new employee, arrived ten minutes late for work after
attending services at his local mosque. Though his supervisor knew the
reason, she still disciplined him. Yet Joanne, a longtime employee, has long
been allowed to arrive ten to fifteen minutes late on days that she attends
mass at her Catholic church.
Sex: Charlene and Herb are tennis instructors at the same health club and
make about the same pay. But while Charlene is paid by the lesson, Herb
receives a guaranteed weekly salary. Though their earnings are similar, they
are not being paid in the same form for substantially equal work.
National origin: Suhail is of Arab descent and employed by a software
development firm. He notices that coworkers who get the best projects and
fastest promotions have strong relationships with company supervisors
developed through off-hours socializing. But Suhail receives invitations to
these outings secondhand and at the last minute from coworkers, rather than
directly from supervisors. His relationships have suffered, and he has been
passed over for several projects. Suhail is concerned that his Arab descent
has excluded him from the company’s informal social network.
Age: Barbara is age fifty-one and dismayed when her new employer says
she cannot participate in the company’s pension plan. It excludes those who
are hired within five years of the plan’s normal retirement age, which is
fifty-five. Barbara files an age-discrimination complaint; because the
normal retirement is age based, so is the exclusion.
Disability: Carl has applied for a company transfer to a higher-paying job
in data entry. Because he is blind, however, the employer simply assumed
he cannot effectively use a computer and did not put him on the list of
candidates to be interviewed.
Genetic information: After Julie told her boss that her mother and father
both died of cancer, the boss transfers Julie from the research lab—though
she was an excellent researcher—to other nonresearch duties, which are
supposedly “safer” but also have less career potential.
Complainant: Bill formally complained to his company’s human-resources
office and to a city agency that his supervisor treats male employees less
favorably than female coworkers. Soon afterward, Bill is fired because he is
“not a team player.” When another employee gives testimony to a city
investigator, that employee’s hours are cut.
In addition to the laws in Table 8.3 that are enforced by the EEOC, other federal
statutes have been enacted for additional protected classes of persons. For
example, the National Labor Relations Act protects workers from discrimination
based on membership in a union, thus guaranteeing them the right to organize
and collectively bargain for better pay and working conditions. Military veterans
are accorded Protected Veteran Status under the Vietnam Era Veterans’
Readjustment Assistance Act, which states that veterans “cannot be denied
employment, harassed, demoted, terminated, paid less or treated less favorably
because of [their] veteran status,” and that employers must reasonably
accommodate their needs. Under the Uniformed Services Employment and
Reemployment Rights Act, military reservists are protected against job
discrimination based on their service and, when called to active duty, have a
right to their old jobs or a similar job when they return.
Though sexual orientation and gender identity/expression are not currently
federally protected classes of persons, many state and local governments and
agencies, and many private companies, prohibit employment discrimination on
this basis. Sexual orientation is the preferred term when referring to a person’s
physical or emotional attraction to the same gender or the opposite gender;
heterosexual, bisexual, and homosexual are all sexual orientations. However,
sexual orientation should be distinguished from the terms “gender identity” and
“gender expression.” Gender identity is a person’s deeply felt psychological
identification as either a male or a female, whether or not that identity
corresponds with the person’s body or was the person’s sex at birth. Gender
expression refers to a person’s expression of gender through external traits and
behaviors—appearance, mannerisms, speech, interactions—that are socially
defined as male or female. Many who are protected under state and local laws
against employment discrimination based on sexual orientation identify with the
LGBT community, an acronym for lesbian, gay, bisexual, and
transgender/transsexual.
Still, laws can only address discrimination and not prejudice. Prejudice is an
unseen attitude, whereas discrimination is the observable behavior driven by
prejudice. Prejudicial attitudes need not consist of active malice; a prejudicial
attitude can stem from ethnocentrism—the belief that one’s own culture is the
best or most natural—and from stereotypes that may portray older persons as
forgetful, women as emotional, the differently abled as helpless, religious
believers as judgmental, gay men as effeminate, or persons of a given racial or
ethnic heritage as lazy, or unscrupulous, or dirty, or timid. Though overt
discrimination is prosecuted under the law, there is the silent discrimination that
limits the access of women and minorities to informal communication networks
and professional mentors, or turns them into “tokens” so that employers feel no
obligation to recruit more. The real path to embracing diverse identities within
today’s organizations is in the everyday business of working out relationships of
mutual respect and dignity. Brenda J. Allen, in her study of social identities and
communication, concluded with three simple recommendations: be mindful of
your own biases, be proactive in setting aside those biases, and fill your
communication toolbox with a repertoire of skills for effective and empathetic
listening and dialogue. [8]
Balancing Organizational Identity and Diversity
We opened the chapter by pairing identity and diversity as aspects of
organizational life that exist in a tension that must be balanced. This is just as
true for you, as an organization member, as it is for the organization. In this
concluding section, we will cast the identity/diversity balance for individuals as
an identification/identity balance. In other words, how do you balance your
organizational identification with your personal identity—that is, your need to
identify with the organization sufficiently to be a team member and get
satisfaction from your job with the need to “be your own person” and “have a
life”? Concern about work-life balance is not new; much was said in the
postwar years as fathers went back to work and climbed the new corporate
ladders, and again a generation later when the rise of two-income households put
terms such as latchkey kid and supermom into the popular vocabulary. Today,
with the rise of the Internet and social media, many are concerned about the
subtle ways that work is “colonizing” personal life, as employees are
increasingly pressured to answer work-related e-mails at home and be available
24/7 to answer phone calls, texts, and tweets from supervisors, coworkers,
clients, and customers.
Since the 1990s, some organizations have experimented with alternative work
arrangements including flex time (flexible working hours), telecommuting or
flex place (working from home a certain number of days per week), and job
sharing (allowing a full-time job to be shared by two or more part-time
employees). Yet the Families and Work Institute (FWI), in its 2012 National
Study of Employers, found that the “culture of flexibility” had stagnated due to
the economic pressures of the 2008–9 recession. [9] After surveying more than a
thousand US organizations of all sizes and occupations, FWI discovered that, on
the one hand, since 2005 “employers have increased their provision of options
that allow employees to better manage the times and places in which they work”
through flex time, flex place, and other policies. On the other hand, “employers
have reduced their provision of options that involve employees spending
significant amounts of time away from full-time work” through opportunities to
move between full- and part-time status and with career breaks for personal or
family responsibilities. Employees thus have more options for managing their
daily time but fewer options for managing their lives and careers.
The availability of more flex time is a positive step. But why, then, did a 2008
FWI study find that between two-thirds and three-quarters of employees in
various occupations reported “not having enough time” to spend with their
spouses, partners, or children? [10] The same survey revealed that, even when
employees have access to schedule flexibility, 70 percent use it no more than
once a month, and 19 percent never use it. Even to care for a sick child,
employed parents took an average of only 3.6 days off per year. [11] “Having
access to flexibility options is one thing, but having a culture that supports their
use is another. Employees can have substantial access to flexibility, but when
they feel that its use is not condoned, they might as well not have access.…[A]
culture of flexibility is as, if not more, important than simply having access to
flexibility options.” [12] Since 89 percent or more of employees in all
occupations surveyed reported that their supervisors are responsive to requests
for time off, then “the obstacles to using flexibility likely reside with coworkers,
senior leaders, clients, and with employees’ perceptions of the organizational
norms.” [13]
This returns us, of course, to the issue of balancing identification and identity—
how much you identify with your organization versus how much you construct
your identity from other sources and maintain that identity. In modern societies
where many people spend the bulk of their waking hours at work—and where
many people accept job transfers that uproot them from traditional sources of
identity—striking a good balance between work and life is a challenge. In the
United States, the “culture of flexibility” that organizations need to
accommodate a diverse workforce has run up against the ingrained expectation
that employees should, heart and soul, be “company people.” The “right”
balance between work and life, between organizational identification and self-
identity, is different for each person. You will need to decide what is right for
you. But knowledge is power. In this chapter we have learned about the
processes by which an organization forms an identity, by which it attempts to
socialize employees into that identity, and by which employees acquire an
organizational identification. We have learned about identity regulation,
concertive control, and technologies of the body, through which modern
organizations “produce” employees who discipline themselves according to
desired norms. With this knowledge, you can look squarely at organizational
processes, question assumptions that may be taken for granted as normal and
natural, and make informed choices about your own participation.
Building Cultural Intelligence
In today’s global economy, being able to interact effectively with a wide range of
people is a very important part of doing business. With the advent of the Internet,
the world has truly become a very small place. In recent years, there has been a
discussion of a wide range of different types of intelligence: emotional
intelligence, sociopolitical intelligence, social intelligence, and so on. [14] In
2003, P. Christopher Earley and Soon Ang introduced the concept of cultural
intelligence (CQ) to the mix of intelligences. [15] CQ can be defined as “an
individual’s capability to function effectively in situations characterized by
cultural diversity.” [16] Before going forward, why not take a minute and
complete the Cultural Intelligence Questionnaire?
Cultural Intelligence Questionnaire
Instructions: Read the following questions and select the answer that
corresponds with your perception. Do not be concerned if some of the items
appear similar. Please use the following scale to rate the degree to which each
statement applies to you.
Strongly Disagree Disagree Neutral Agree Strongly Agree
1 2 3 4 5
1. When I’m interacting with someone from a differing culture, I recognize
when I use my familiarity of that person’s culture during my
interactions. _____
2. I believe effective intercultural interactions come from a place of
understanding of cultural similarities and differences. _____
3. During intercultural interactions, I am well aware of the cultural
knowledge I utilize. _____
4. I always check my information about someone’s culture to ensure that
my understanding is accurate. _____
5. During my intercultural interactions, I try to be mindful of how my
perceptions of someone’s culture are either consistent with or differ from
reality. _____
6. I pride myself on knowing a lot about other people’s cultures. _____
7. I understand the social, economic, and political systems of other
cultures. _____
8. I know about other cultures’ religious beliefs, values, and behaviors.
_____
9. I understand how daily life is enacted in other cultures. _____
10. I know the importance of paintings, literature, and other art forms to
various cultures. _____
11. I enjoy reaching out and engaging in an intercultural encounter. _____
12. I often feel driven to meet new people from different cultures. _____
13. When given the opportunity, I am always willing to interact with
someone from a new culture. _____
14. I would have no problems familiarizing myself to the routines of a
different culture. _____
15. I appreciate being with people from other cultures and getting to know
them. _____
16. I can change my eye behavior and facial expressions to match the
cultural needs of an intercultural interaction. _____
17. I know how to interact nonverbally with people from different cultures.
_____
18. I can see when both talking and remaining silent are important in
different intercultural encounters. _____
19. I am aware of the importance of both space and spatial distance can be
when engaging with someone from another culture. _____
20. I am sensitive to another person’s nonverbal behavior, and can adjust
mine to match her or his behavior. _____
Scoring
Add items 1–5 (Intercultural Understanding) = ___________________
Add items 6–10 (Intercultural Knowledge) = ___________________
Add items 7–15 (Intercultural Motivation) = ___________________
Add items 16–20 (Intercultural Behavior) = ___________________
Interpreting Your Scores
Scores for each of the four factors (intercultural understanding, intercultural
knowledge, intercultural motivation, and intercultural behavior) can be added
to get a composite score. Each of the four factors exists on a continuum from
5 (not culturally intelligent) to 25 (highly culturally intelligent). An average
person would score between 12 and 18.
Based on Van Dyne, L., Ang, S., & Koh, C. (2008). Development and
validation of the CQS: The Cultural Intelligence Scale. In S. Ang & L. Van
Dyne (Eds.), Handbook of cultural intelligence: Theory, measurement, and
application (pp. 16–38). Armonk, NY: M. E. Sharpe. This measure was based
on the Van Dyne, Ang, and Koh four-factor concept, but all the items on this
measure are original and created by Jason S. Wrench.
According to Linn Van Dyne, Soon Ang, and Christine Koh, [17] cultural
intelligence consists of four unique parts: cultural understanding (metacognitive
CQ), intercultural knowledge (cognitive CQ), intercultural motivation, and
intercultural behavior. First, we have an individual’s cultural understanding, or
metacognitive CQ, which is an individual’s cultural awareness and
conscientiousness during interactions with people from differing cultures. In
essence, it’s one thing just to notice cultural differences, but something
completely different to critically analyze these differences and how you view
these differences through your own cultural filter. One of the best statements that
reflects the idea of metacognitive CQ is the idea that when you point your finger
at someone else, there are always four pointing back at you. When we see
cultural differences, these differences generally are noticeable because they
differ from our personal cultural perspectives of “normal.”
Second, we have intercultural knowledge, or cognitive CQ. Cognitive CQ refers
to an individual’s knowledge of another culture’s beliefs, norms, practices, and
communicative behavior. This factor of CQ is the one in which courses like
intercultural communication, which examines how people in various cultures
interact, can be very beneficial. Terri Morrison and Wayne A. Conaway wrote
one of the best-selling books on intercultural knowledge: Kiss, Bow, or Shake
Hands. [18] The book is designed for business professionals needing to know
quickly how to interact with people from various cultures in a business
environment.
The third aspect of CQ involves an individual’s motivation for CQ. In essence, is
an individual internally motivated to learn how to competently interact with
individuals from other cultures? If someone has no desire to be culturally
intelligent, then that individual will not magically become culturally intelligent.
Lastly, CQ involves an individual’s actual cultural behavior. You can have all the
knowledge and desire in the world, but if you do not put what you know into
practice, you’ll never be culturally intelligent. Ultimately, behavioral CQ looks
at an individual’s verbal and nonverbal communicative behavior when
interacting with people from other cultures. Ultimately, behavioral CQ is
probably the most important part of CQ, because it is the one most notably
observed by other people.
You may be wondering why CQ is important in organizational communication.
Actually, CQ is very important for both organizational communication and
modern business. David Livermore conducted a study examining the impact that
an eighteen-month CQ training program had on various organizations. [19] Of the
companies that participated in the project, 92 percent saw an increase in profits
during the eighteen-month program. All the organizations accorded some of the
increase in profits to the CQ training program.
KEY TAKEAWAY
Black, Asian, and Hispanic men and women will compose steadily
increasing percentages of the US labor force through at least
2050. Yet the total labor force will grow slowly as baby boomers
retire and the participation rate of women levels off after rising
rapidly in previous decades. Organizations that embrace a
diverse labor force will, as Cox and Blake summarized, enjoy a
recruiting edge in a shrinking labor pool and benefit from the
creativity, problem-solving, flexibility, and marketing insights
generated by diverse perspectives.
Since passage of the 1964 Civil Rights Act, businesses used by
the public are defined as public accommodations and therefore
cannot discriminate in whom they serve or hire on the basis of
race, color, religion, or national origin. Employment discrimination
is defined as practices that have a disproportionately adverse
effect on protected classes of persons. Legislation since the Civil
Rights Act has further prohibited employment discrimination
based on sex (including pregnancy), age (forty or older), disability,
genetic information, and military veteran status, or in retaliation for
protesting discrimination, filing a charge, or participating in a
lawsuit. Though job discrimination based on sexual orientation is
not prohibited by federal law, many state and local governments
and agencies have extended this legal protection.
Although organizations are increasingly willing to provide some
measure of daily schedule flexibility for their employees, they
have been less willing in recent years to give significant time off
(beyond what the law requires) to employees who desire a career
break for parenting or other caregiving responsibilities. Even so,
large majorities of employees who do have access to scheduling
flexibility seldom or never use it. The reason is not that
supervisors are unresponsive. Rather, the cultures of most
workplaces assume that strong organizational identification and
dedication should be the norm. Awareness of how organizational
identity and identification are formed can help you assess the
processes occurring around you and help you make informed
choices for balancing work and life.
EXERCISES
1. Throughout the section exercises in this chapter, you have
thought about a specific organization to which you have belonged
—perhaps a sport teams, a club, a house of worship, a
workplace, or the college you attend. Think one more time about
this organization. Could it benefit from taking a more proactive
stance toward recruiting a diverse membership? If so, make a list
of how the organization would gain a recruiting edge over other
organizations, and how a greater diversity of perspectives within
its membership could improve creativity and problem solving and
Prejudice :
Discrimination:
Ethnocentrism:
Stereotypes :
help the organization do a better job of getting its message out to
a diverse public. Think of specific instances when the
organization’s actions could have been more effective if its
membership and leadership were more diverse.
2. Chances are that you have struggled with balancing your
personal life with your work—whether that work was a job, or
school, or your involvement in community organizations or clubs.
To what extent do you think that your decisions about the amount
of time you spend at work, at school, or in other involvements are
shaped by your identification with the organization in question? To
what extent is it shaped by the norms and expectations of that
organization’s culture? Has there ever been a time when you
overcommitted yourself? Why? Jot down your thoughts. How
could the information in this chapter have helped you make more
informed choices?
KEY TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
The unseen attitudes that lead to discrimination.
The observable actions that are prompted by prejudicial attitudes.
The belief that one’s own culture is the most natural and is superior to others.
Generalizations that ascribe certain traits to all members of a social classification; for example, older persons are forgetful, women are emotional, the differently abled are helpless, religious believers are
Work-Life Balance:
judgmental, gay men are effeminate, or persons of a given racial or ethnic heritage are lazy, or unscrupulous, or dirty, or timid.
Term often used to describe the issues that arise as individuals attempt to balance the sometimes conflicting demands of their work and their personal lives.
[1] Albert, S. A., & Whetten, D. A. (1985). Organizational identity.
Research in Organizational Behavior, 7, 263–295.
[2] Bureau of Labor Statistics. (2012, July 25). Number of jobs held, labor
market activity, and earnings growth among the youngest baby boomers:
Results from a longitudinal survey summary. Retrieved from
http://www.bls.gov/news.release/nlsoy.nr0.htm
[3] Toossi, M. (2006, November). A new look at long-term labor force
projections to 2050. Monthly Labor Review [electronic version]. Retrieved
from http://www.bls.gov/opub/mlr/2006/11/art3full.pdf
[4] Cox, T. H., & Blake, S. (1991). Managing cultural diversity:
Implications for organizational effectiveness. Academy of Management
Executive, 5(3), 45–56.
[5] US Equal Employment Opportunity Commission. (n.d.). EEOC charge
receipts by state (includes U.S. territories) and basis for 2011. Retrieved
from http://www1.eeoc.gov/eeoc/statistics/enforcement/state_11.cfm
[6] US Equal Employment Opportunity Commission. (n.d.). Prohibited
employment policies/practices. Retrieved
from http://www.eeoc.gov/laws/practices/index.cfm
[7] Most scenarios in this section are adapted from US Equal
Employment Opportunity Commission. (1998–2009). Compliance
manual. Retrieved from
http://www1.eeoc.gov/laws/guidance/compliance.cfm
[8] Allen, B. J. (2011). Difference matters: Communicating social identity.
Long Grove, IL: Waveland.
[9] Matos, K., & Galinsky, E. (2012). 2012 national study of employers.
New York, NY: Families and Work Institute, p. 6.
[10] Matos, K., & Galinsky, E. (2011). Workplace flexibility in the United
States: A status report. New York, NY: Families and Work Institute, pp.
12–13.
[11] Matos, K., & Galinsky, E. (2011). Workplace flexibility in the United
States: A status report. New York, NY: Families and Work Institute, p. 5.
[12] Matos, K., & Galinsky, E. (2011). Workplace flexibility in the United
States: A status report. New York, NY: Families and Work Institute; p. 14.
[13] Matos, K., & Galinsky, E. (2011). Workplace flexibility in the United
States: A status report. New York, NY: Families and Work Institute, p. 14.
[14] Riggio, R. E. (2010). Emotional and other intelligences. In R. A.
Couto (Ed.), Political and civic leadership (pp. 997–1005). Thousand
Oaks, CA: Sage.
[15] Earley, P. C., & Ang, S. (2003). Cultural intelligence: Individual
interactions across cultures. Palo Alto, CA: Stanford University Press.
[16] Ang, S., & Van Dyne, L. (2008). Preface and acknowledgments. In
Handbook of cultural intelligence: Theory, measurement, and applications
(pp. xv–xviii). Armonk, NY: M. E. Sharpe, p. xv.
[17] Van Dyne, L., Ang, S., & Koh, C. (2008). Development and validation
of the CQS: The Cultural Intelligence Scale. In S. Ang & L. Van Dyne
(Eds.), Handbook of cultural intelligence: Theory, measurement, and
application (pp. 16–38). Armonk, NY: M. E. Sharpe.
[18] Morrison, T., & Conaway, W. A. (2006). Kiss, bow, or shake hands:
The bestselling guide to doing business in more than 60 countries (2nd
ed.). Avon, MA: Adams Media.
[19] Livermore, D. (2009). The results of cultural intelligence [Technical
report]. Grand Rapids, MI: Global Learning Center.
8.4 Chapter Exercises
REAL-WORLD CASE STUDY
An important and frequently cited article in the literature on
organizational identity explored the case of the Port Authority of
New York and New Jersey. [1] Established in 1921, the Port
Authority develops and operates transportation facilities that serve a
two-state region. These include three airports (Kennedy, LaGuardia,
and Newark), a major downtown bus terminal, a train service,
various bridges, tunnels, and harbor facilities, and—at the time the
study was conducted in the 1980s—the World Trade Centers in
Manhattan. Researchers Jane Dutton and Janet Dukerich
interviewed managers and employees and found they most
frequently described the Port Authority’s identity as a technically
expert professional organization and not a social services agency,
as ethically high minded, as a superior provider of quality
transportation services, as committed to the betterment of the region
and indeed a symbol of the region, as a “fixer” with an “can-do”
ethos, and as a “family” that deserved employee loyalty.
This identity was externally challenged in 1982 when the numbers of
homeless persons frequenting the downtown Port Authority bus
terminal increased. Improvements in the Manhattan real estate
market prompted closure of many single-occupancy hotels, putting
hundreds of men on the street. Their increasing presence at the bus
terminal was all the more noticeable because the Port Authority had
just completed a major facelift and enlargement of the facility.
The Port Authority, which maintains a large police force, saw the
homeless as a police issue and invoked New York’s antiloitering law
to evict offenders from the terminal. By 1985, however, the
homeless could be found not only in the bus terminal but in the Port
Authority’s flagship facilities, including its three airports and the
World Trade Centers. Now the homeless were an issue not just for
the bus terminal but for the entire organization. Facility managers
were compelled to formally budget funds for dealing with the
problem. Their focus was still on removing the homeless, but now
the bus terminal managers sought out social services agencies to
take them.
Several events in 1987 marked a turning point. New York City
repealed its antiloitering law; the appearance of crack cocaine in the
city increased the number of homeless persons; and the police
union, to gain leverage in a contract dispute, circulated negative
stories about the Port Authority in the press. Public concerns were
voiced that the Port Authority was inhumanely evicting the
homeless. Recognizing that a coordinated response was needed,
the Port Authority formed a centralized Homeless Project Team and
funded a research project. For the organization, homelessness had
now become a business problem with a moral dimension. By 1988,
Port Authority leaders publicly argued that homelessness was a
regional problem and funded construction of two drop-in centers,
one near the bus terminal and the other near the World Trade
Centers. But when municipal authorities balked at running the
shelters, Port Authority personnel became increasingly resigned to
—and began to feel heroic about—dealing with the homeless
themselves. By the time Dutton and Dukerich ended their research
in 1989, the Port Authority had come to see itself as a “quiet
advocate” for the homeless and was even bolstering the economic
competitiveness of the region by providing model leadership on an
issue faced by transportation services in cities and regions
nationwide.
1. How did the Port Authority’s organizational identity change? At the
same time, how was the changed identity rooted in its original
identity as technically expert, professional, ethical, a service
provider, a “can-do” fixer, and a regional symbol?
2. Using Hatch and Schultz’s organizational identity dynamics model
(see Figure 8.2), explain how the Port Authority’s identity and
culture were interrelated, and how its identity and image were
interrelated.
3. Cheney and Christensen argued that organizational identity
strongly affects the problems that corporate leaders “see” and
their strategies for managing those issues. To what extent was
this dynamic at work in the Port Authority’s responses to the
homelessness issue? Did the Port Authority’s public
communication ever reach the point of being autocommunicative;
that is, the organizational mostly talking to itself?
4. Dutton and Dukerich found that many of the personnel they
interviewed exhibited a strong identification with the Port
Authority. Using Ashforth and Mael’s framework (in-group
distinctiveness and prestige, awareness of and competition with
other groups), how do you think these employees formed such a
strong organizational identification? Using Alvesson and
Willmott’s model, how do you think these employees’ identity work
was shaped by the discourses of Port Authority management?
5. Dutton and Dukerich did not document the diversity of the Port
Authority’s management and workforce. But as a general
proposition, how do you think a diverse and multicultural
organization might have approached the homelessness issue
described in the case study? Would the response be different
than the response of the Port Authority?
END-OF-CHAPTER ASSESSMENT
1. According to Albert and Whetten’s original definition, organizational identity refers to features of an organization
that are
a. internal, external, and environmental b. formal, informal, and cultural c. cognitive, affective, and behavioral d. central, distinctive, and enduring e. structural, cultural, and adaptive
2. According to Hatch and Shultz, organizational identity is distinguishable from organizational culture because it is
a. contextual, tacit, and emergent b. textual, explicit, and instrumental c. internal, self-referential, and singular d. external, other-focused, and multiple e. cognitive, affective, and behavioral
3. According to Ashforth and Mael, organizational identification is a
a. set of feelings b. set of behaviors c. set of guiding principles d. cognitive construct e. cultural assumption
4. According to Tompkins and Cheney, when organization members discipline themselves to conform to desired norms the organization has achieved
a. simple control b. technical control c. bureaucratic control
d. cultural control e. concertive control
5. According to Alvesson and Willmott, management engages in discursive strategies to shape the processes of employees’ identity formation; these discourses are called
a. identity construction b. identity work c. identity regulation d. identity control e. identity production
Answer Key
1. d
2. b
3. d
4. e
5. c
[1] Dutton, J. E., & Dukerich, J. M. (1991). Keeping an eye on the mirror:
Image and identity in organizational adaptation. Academy of
Management Journal, 34, 517–514.
Chapter 9
Teams in the Workplace
We = Power
In your college experience, one of your professors will most likely assign you to
work on a group project. Sometimes, your professor will allow you to choose the
other members of your group, and sometimes you are not allowed to pick your
group members. Unless you are very fortunate, you probably did not have a very
good experience working on the group project. This is because most people do
not know how to work in groups. To be more specific, most people do not know
how to interact or communicate in groups and teams. Oftentimes, there might be
what Andy Hargreaves and Ruth Dawe identify as “contrived collegiality,” in
which everyone works on similar jobs as quickly as possible, they don’t discuss
anything, they make poor judgment decisions, and they are more concerned with
completion than with quality. [1]
Many people work together in teams in organizations. Think about all the teams
and groups that you belong to, such as family, friends, work, or church. We are
involved with a variety of groups for different reasons. You are probably
involved with certain groups and teams based on your abilities, experiences,
and/or talents. Your participation and the degree to which you contribute will
often depend on the communication interactions in that group. In this chapter, we
will discuss the importance of teams. We will discuss the characteristics of
teams, types of teams, and the downside to teams.
Is this a group or a team?
© Thinkstock/iStock
[1] Hargreaves, A. & Dawe, R. (1990). Paths of professional
development: Contrived collegiality, collaborative culture, and the case of
peer coaching. Teaching and Teacher Education, 6(3), 227–241.
9.1 Group
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
1. Explain the definition of group.
2. Differentiate between group and team.
3. Understand the models of team development.
4. Understand the stages of the team performance model.
Looking at Figure 9.1, can you tell if it is a group or a team? How do you know
it is a group? Many organizations have several different kinds of groups. These
groups can be informal or formal. Formal groups are usually assigned by a
supervisor or higher administrator. Formal groups can include sales teams, work
teams, problem-solving groups, management teams, and unions. Informal groups
usually occur due to common interests and/or social compatibility. Informal
groups can include office parties, coffee breaks, poker night, carpooling, and
complaining sessions. Informal groups do not have specific rules about
membership or the types of communication in that group. Every group is
essential for people to accomplish their tasks and seek social support.
John Baird defined group as “a collection of more than two persons who
perceive themselves as a group, possess a common fate, have organizational
structire, and communicate over time to achieve personal and group goals.” [1]
In essence, a group is two or more individuals who communicate with each other
@ Thinkstock/iStock
to attain their goal. Because this is a book on organizational communication, a
group in this context will have specific goals, influence, and interactions. These
specific goals might be to have an advertising campaign completed, financial
portfolios on all the organization’s clients completed, or updating new
technology programs on all the computers in the organization. Influences that
groups might have include helping management understand the importance of
having a day-care facility on site or assisting managers in acquiring potential
resources for employees. Interactions might include coworkers being informed
about specific changes in the organization or warnings that employees should be
aware of. Notice that the key importance in these definitions is the word
communication. For instance, five people waiting for the bus is not a group.
They all have the same goal: to get on the bus. However, each person is not
influencing the others, and they do not have to communicate with each other.
Group members need to be able to communicate with each other. Organizations
will often use groups to accomplish organizational goals. Work groups are
created to perform tasks in an efficient and effective manner. Problem-solving
groups are used to discuss organizational dilemmas. These groups will convene
to examine, analyze, and disseminate information.
Group versus Team
You have probably heard the old saying that there is no “I”
in “TEAM.” And it’s true! However, do you know what the
differences are between a group and a team? Most people
might say that a team has a common goal or purpose. In
Which of these two
groups is a team? Why?
© Thinkstock/iStock
addition, they might say that each person on a team is
interdependent. In other words, each person on the team
recognizes that every person is valuable and knows what
needs to be done to accomplish the team goal. [2]
On the other hand, groups might include people who have
similar roles or tasks, such as all medical nurses. Groups
can eventually become teams. The main difference is that
teams need to support each team member. It takes a lot of
characteristics for a group to become a team. The main difference is that in a
team each individual is responsible not only for her or his own efforts and
contributions to the group but also for the collective outcome of the group.
Moreover, the emphasis is not on the individual but on the team. Hence, the
communication is different, because in teams, people want to discuss and come
to a conclusion about how to solve the problem. In groups, the main reason
people communicate is to share information without much discussion. These
differences are displayed in Table 9.1.
Table 9.1 Differences between Groups and Team
Groups Teams
Every person is accountable. Everyone is accountable for their work to the group and for others'
work.
The focus is to share
information and opinions. The focus is to discuss, make decisions, solve problems, and strategize.
Emphasis is on individual
goals. Emphases is on team goals.
Outcome is on each individual's
contribution. Outcome is on the entire group's contribution.
Every person's roles and tasks
are identified.
Every person's roles and tasks are identified with regard to helping the
collective effort. Each person can often switch and allocate parts of
their tasks to others.
The focus is each person's
outcome and struggles. The focus is the team's outcome and struggles.
The objectives and goals of the
group are placed by a manager
or leader
The objectives and goals of the group are placed by a team leader with
team members.
Tuckman's Model of Groups
Bruce Tuckman’s model of groups is well known for explaining how teams
develop. He noted that the stages of team development are forming, storming,
norming, and performing (Figure 9.1). [3] Tuckman realizes that groups will have
many differences in assumptions, values, and goals. This model addresses the
groups’ need to examine and resolve certain questions before the group can work
together effectively. In this model it is important for team members to recognize
that before the team can move forward from one stage to another, they need to
make sure that the core issues are being met. If the team does not move forward,
then it means that certain issues are not being satisfactorily met. This model also
helps team leaders identify signs that issues need to be addressed appropriately
before the team can actually perform their task effectively.
Step 1: Forming
The group is in its beginning or forming stage. Individuals are trying to figure
out the climate and the types of communication that would be appropriate.
Members heavily rely on the team leader for direction and information.
Members are still trying to develop their relationships and associations with
others. For instance, one of the authors of this book was involved on a job-search
committee. The organization picked the members and expected the group to pick
a leader. It was pretty chaotic, because everyone was still trying to figure out
everyone else. Hence, communication is very basic at this level. People are
trying to learn names and make connections with others.
Step 2: Storming
In this phase, conflict or storming is present. Members communicate to obtain
influence and acknowledgment. Members may become polarized or take stands
on certain issues. Conflict can arise out of personal or task-related issues. If the
group can confront and solve the problems, then they can move toward the next
stage. In the job-search committee example, after the group leader was selected,
conflict arose in whom we thought we should hire and why. Everyone had their
own opinion on the matter. Communication in this stage may be problematic. It
is important to understand the perceptions and perspectives of others. A person’s
culture or background may influence how others understand and process their
intent.
Stage 3: Norming
Unlike the previous stage where conflict was present, the group moves toward
more open and accepting styles of communication. The group wants to work in
an effective and harmonious manner. As group norming occurs and patterns of
group behavior emerge, more team members feel better due to the fact that the
communication has changed from a confrontational style to a nonconfrontational
style. Members have shared values and attitudes. There is a difference between
behaviors and feelings. In the previous example, after the members understood
their roles and their agendas, the group was more cohesive in terms of
determining what to do next.
Stage 4: Performing
In this stage, members can concentrate on performing the group’s task. Because
they have been able to solve the group’s problems, they can direct their energy
toward the completion of the task. Group members feel a better sense of shared
responsibility and a sense of personal accountability. With the job-search team,
after everyone was able to communicate and share their opinions, the group was
able to produce quality results for finding the right candidate for the job.
It is important to note that the stages can overlap and that a group can repeat the
stages. Some groups may go through the stages very quickly, while others may
be in one stage for a very long time. Communication can be used as a tool to
advance the work of teams and even be used to analyze and overcome problems.
By learning the different stages, we can make sure that our communication can
be effective. We are sure that you can think back on group projects you have
worked on and recognize the storming and forming phases are real. If you are
involved with groups where forming and storming are preventing you from
accomplishing the task at hand, you need to address your group and their
concerns before you can move forward.
Figure 9.1 Tuckman’s Model of Groups
Team Performance Model
Many times, team leaders will try to form groups using ice breakers, enforcing
the idea of professionalism, assuming that norms will counteract the group’s
differences, and relying solely on agendas and activities to compensate for the
group negativity or dissatisfaction. [4] One new model that illustrates a better
way of developing teams is the Team Performance Model developed by Allan
Drexler, David Sibbet, and Russ Forrester (2009). [5] The model consists of
seven stages that illustrate how a team can be formed and then complete a task:
orientation, trust building, goal clarification, commitment, implementation, high
performance, and renewal (Figure 9.2).
Stage 1: Orientation
In this beginning phase, group members come together and ascertain the task or
directive at hand. Most of the time, these individuals do not have a work history
with the other people on the team. Hence, group members may question their
purpose with the group. For that reason, team members must be informed about
how the group was formed and the reason why each person was selected for that
task. Drexler et al noted that if a certain individual feels unsatisfied for being on
this team, then they will experience puzzlement, indecision, and possibly fear.
Moreover, if certain members feel disconnected from the group, then they will
focus on this disconnection and possibly make the other group members feel
uncomfortable. The disconnected group member may become more reserved and
detached from the group. In some conditions, the disconnected group member
might make some uncalled-for comments and possibly never attain much value
in the team’s mission. For instance, one of the writers of this book was asked to
be on a group analyzing other graduate programs. It was very nerve-racking,
because none of the group members knew each other or why they were put
together. The team leader explained that we were selected based on our
experiences, and we could provide the best input.
Once the orientation stage is settled, group members are in the process of
becoming a team. Everyone in the group has a new perception of the group as a
team, and they use terms like “us,” feel a connection with the group’s purpose,
and think about the team’s possibilities for achievement.
Stage 2: Trust Building
Most everyone will agree that trust is an essential element for team performance.
A team is interdependent. Thus, group members have to be able to give up
control and reliance on others so that they can execute their task. Think about all
the people you trust and how over time this trust has allowed you to know those
people even better. In the previous example about the group analyzing graduate
programs, each person in the group had a specific task and a deadline. Each
member had to trust the other members to complete their tasks, otherwise the
group would fail and not be able to accomplish their goal. The same holds true in
teams. The development of trust allows teams to create more efficiency. If teams
lack trust, then they will be more guarded of others and not be willing to
communicate the truth. Teams that lack trust will also lack integrity because
group members are not expressing their true feelings and opinions. The result is
that these behaviors hinder the legitimacy and genuineness of the work. At the
same time, lack of trust will prevent cooperation and collaboration among the
group members.
Stage 3: Goal Clarification
In this stage, team members are trying to figure out the team’s ultimate goal(s)
and their agenda. Team members create a shared vision with clear and concise
goals. They have explicit assumptions with each other about the goal. In the
previous example, it was at this stage that certain group members were wary
about their comments and were worried their comments would not be taken
seriously. The team leader had to meet with the group again to reassure them that
their comments were valuable for the success of the organization. At this stage,
some members become apathetic or skeptical about the goal. In addition, there
may be some extraneous competition among group members. The key factor in
this stage is to make sure all group members know the goal or expected outcome
for the group.
Stage 4: Commitment
After the group is clear in their goal, there needs to be some communication
about certain roles. Group members need to collectively decide how resources
such as time and effort will be allocated and utilized for maximum efficiency.
Each member realizes that her or his comments are important, so they work
harder to accomplish the goal. There will be group members who become
dependent on others to complete their task, which will delay the outcome. There
will also be some resistance from group members who may have different
perceptions as to how their time and effort could be used best.
Stage 5: Implementation
Once the decision is made on how each person will contribute to the group’s
goal, there will be a better sense of the execution of that goal. Teams are
informed with all the basic information of who, what, when, where, and why.
Teams can move forward and implement the task. They can put all their
resources, comments, and input together and finalize their task. There may be
conflicts at this stage. Team members may miss deadlines and may feel nonallied
in the team’s main object. If group members can figure out what works best, then
work can be completed.
Stage 6: High Performance
When all group members know when and who is doing what toward their team’s
goals, a group reaches a state of high performance. They may realize that the
methods have been performed well, and then they can be more flexible. They are
more likely to marvel at their progress and possibly surpass expectations. In this
stage, there is more interaction and synergy. Disgruntled team members may feel
disharmony or overburdened, so it is important that the team be able to adapt and
accommodate all group members to be able to perform effectively. After the
group gets into a groove and is committed to finishing the task, they will be
amazed at the results.
Stage 7: Renewal
After the team has completed their task, they may ask whether it is worth it to
continue or add new members. The team needs time to reflect on whether they
should continue, stop, or form a new team. Often, team members will feel
burnout or boredom after the task has been completed. The team needs to take
time to celebrate the completion of their goals and recognize key team members.
In the previous example, the team leader took everyone out to dinner to celebrate
a job well done.
The benefit of this model is that it allows us to understand the communication
situations that can occur during each phase. The model illustrates the importance
of having such conversations at each stage.
Figure 9.2 Team Performance Model
KEY TAKEAWAY
Groups can be informal or formal.
There are many differences between groups and teams. Group
stresses individual outcomes, whereas team stresses individual
and collective outcomes. The individual is a key element in the
group. Teams share responsibility. Moreover, the communication
is very different.
Team development takes place in phases: forming, storming,
norming, and performing.
The team-developmental model showcases seven stages that
groups go through before they can work efficiently and effectively
as a team.
EXERCISES
Forming:
Group :
Norming :
Performing :
Storming :
Team:
1. Think about a group you are currently working in at work, home,
church, or elsewhere. Fill out the survey found here:
http://www.nwlink.com/~donclark/leader/teamsuv.html. After
completing the measure, what did you learn about your group?
What can you do to improve your group communication?
2. Looking at the team performance model, what do you think is the
hardest stage? Why? What do you think is the easiest stage? Do
you think this model is accurate? Why or why not?
3. Create a list of at least two groups and two teams that you belong
to. What differences do you see between these two lists and the
types of organizational accomplishments they’ve had?
KEY TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
The first stage in the formation of a group when members are making sense of their participation.
Two or more people who think they are a group and have a common goal(s), structure, and interactions to achieve their desired goals.
The third stage in the formation a group when norms for group interaction emerge.
The fourth stage in the formation of a group when members can concentrate on group tasks.
The second stage in the formation of a group when members are negotiating their participation.
A group in which members feel responsible both for their own efforts and for collective outcomes.
[1] Baird, J. E., Jr. (1977). The dynamics of organizational
communication. New York, NY: Harper & Row, p. 9.
[2] Lee, G. V. (2009). From group to team: Skilled facilitation moves a
group from a collection of individuals to an effective team. Journal of Staff
Development, 30(5), 48–49.
[3] Tuckman, B. W. (1965). Developmental sequences in small groups.
Psychological Bulletin, 63(6), 384–399.
[4] Lee, G. V. (2009). From group to team: Skilled facilitation moves a
group from a collection of individuals to an effective team. Journal of Staff
Development, 30(5), 48–49.
[5] Drexler, A., Sibbet, D., & Forrester, R. (2009). The team performance
model. San Francisco, CA: Grove Consultants.
9.2 Types of Teams
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
1. Define work team.
2. Explain parallel team.
3. Describe project team.
4. Explain management team.
5. Differentiate among the different types of teams and their
importance.
Work Team
When you think of work teams, you might think back to Chapter 3 when we
talked about workers who were shoveling coal or on assembly lines trying to
complete a task. A work team is a group of workers, usually appointed, who
strive to carry out a specific task or series of tasks. Richard Wellins, William
Byham, and Jeanne Wilson defined work teams as “an intact group of employees
who are responsible for a ‘whole work process or segment that delivers a
product or service to an internal or external customer." [1] When we work for an
organization, our supervisors and/or managers will usually assign work teams for
us. These teams can differ in type and size. These groups are vital to the
organization’s longevity and overall success. Wellins, Byham, and Wilson noted
that several major corporations, such as General Mills and AT&T, had significant
results in productivity with the use of work teams. To have effective work teams,
organizations must allow for empowerment. [2] As you can imagine, if a group
is given the task of solving an organizational dilemma but not allowed to execute
it, then it does nothing but frustrate the group. Wellins, Byham, and Wilson
explained that there is a relationship with the degree of group empowerment and
the group responsibility.
Susan Cohen and Diane Bailey analyzed work teams and discovered that there
are many elements to their organizational performance: [3]
Group composition. How does the size, diversity, and experience of the
group members influence the team?
Task design. How does the constitution and difficulty of the team’s task
impact their performance?
Organizational context includes reward/punishment procedures and the
type of supervision that the team experiences.
Internal processes are the amount of teamwork and/or conflicts that occur.
Group psychological traits include group norms that influence the team’s
performance. Is the group cohesive and cooperative?
Effectiveness refers to not just the outcome of the task but also the
perceptions of satisfaction, commitment, retention, and absenteeism.
Cohen and Bailey noted that work teams are viewed as the ideal way to make
decisions in organizations. This is because work teams have flexibility,
originality, and adaptability. There are many advantages to work teams,
including the following:
Empowerment of members to have a more straightforward part in the
decision-making process
The development of a more multiskilled workforce than a deskilled
workforce
The advancement of stronger team synergies that produce more creativity in
decision making
The subordination of the individual’s agenda to the task
Better decisions by grouping talented team members together.
Better autonomy due to direct supervision
More commitment to the organization and its goals
Overall higher productivity levels [4]
Parallel Team
Collateral organizations are also called parallel teams. [5] These are groups that
are usually created “outside regular authority and communication structures to
identify and work on problems that the formal organization is unwilling or
unable to deal with.” [6] For instance, an organization like a university can hire a
parallel team to create better advertising and marketing campaigns and let them
focus on educating students. Parallel teams can be very beneficial because they
usually happen outside the organization itself.
Project Team
Another type of team is called the project team. These are work groups created
for a particular task. [7] Project teams often use individuals with specialized skills
to achieve a goal in a predetermined amount of time. Some examples of project
teams might include creating a new model or determining the best application
for technology. Usually, project team members are selected for their experience
and/or expertise in a specific area. Robert Keller discovered that teams with
challenging tasks were more likely to process information more resourcefully, in
turn creating a better quality outcome. These teams are usually created very
quickly and with a detailed objective. Oftentimes, these group members do not
have time to spend on getting to know the other members.
Project teams have to work quickly to complete their task.
© Thinkstock/iStock
Management Team
Another type of team is called the management team. [8] These teams consist of
employees who have the highest organizational management levels and have the
duty of maintaining the organization. These members possess leadership and
authoritative powers that are given to them by shareholders and/or a board of
directors. You’ll notice that all the organizational positions in The C-Suite
sidebar start with the word chief. Because the word chief is listed in all these
positions, the group of executives who embody these different roles are often
referred to as the C-suite in organizational literature. Some of the positions that
are part of a management team can be seen in the sidebar.
The C-Suite
Chief executive officer (CEO). This person is usually responsible to the
entire organization and communicates with the board of directors and/or
chairman of the organization. The CEO has to execute the board of
directors’ decisions and preserve the organization’s functions and goals.
Sometimes the CEO is also president of the organization.
Chief operations officer (COO). This person primarily focuses on sales
and production. They typically are more involved than the CEO, yet
they are in constant communication with the CEO. The COO is
sometimes recognized as a vice president of the organization.
Chief financial officer (CFO). This person focuses on the financial
aspects of the organization. The CFO reviews and evaluates all financial
data, budgets, and costs associated with the organization. The CFO often
explores the financial stability and uprightness of the organization. The
CFO presents this information to the board of directors and
governmental regulatory affiliates such as the Securities and Exchange
Commission. The CFO is also known as a senior vice present.
Chief technology officer (CTO). This person reports to the CEO and is
mainly accountable for the technological advances and matters in the
organization. This can also include any scientific innovations or
discoveries.
Chief learning officer (CLO). This person reports to the CEO and is
accountable for all training and human performance-improvement
activities within the organization. This individual usually has a
background in education, instructional design, and adult learning.
Chief diversity officer (CDO). This person reports to the CEO, and her
or his duties include assessing, cultivating, defining, and nurturing
cultural diversity as an organizational resource. Other common duties
include affirmative action/equal employment opportunity and ensuring
the creation of an inclusive climate within the organization itself.
Overall, the organization management team has many key individuals who
maintain the organization’s mission and goals. These individuals must
communicate with each other so that the organization can run effectively and
efficiently. Moreover, they must be able to handle crises and resolve problems
successfully for the organization’s prosperity and future success.
KEY TAKEAWAY
Work teams are integral for an organization because they have
the objective of completing certain outcomes.
Parallel teams are formed externally. Parallel teams look at
specific items that the organization might overlook or not perceive
accurately.
Project teams are composed of specific/specialized members who
need to reach a goal in a set amount of time.
Management teams have the responsibility of running and
maintaining the organization. Many different people with specific
tasks keep the organization running in an efficient and effective
manner.
EXERCISES
1. Thinking back to your most recent job, what types of groups did
you have and what did you do?
2. Thinking back to your most recent job, what type of
communication happens in these groups?
3. What management team members did you see at the
organization that you worked for in the past? If no one, then what
management team position do you think is most important at your
Empowerment:
Management Team:
Parallel Teams:
Project Team:
Work Team:
current organization? Why?
KEY TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
The process of letting groups make choices and decisions that will lead to desired outcomes.
This group is in charge of the daily responsibility of directing the organization.
A team created externally from the main organization to work on specific objectives.
Specific and/or specialized individuals selected to accomplish a goal in a fixed amount of time.
A group of workers, usually appointed, who strive to carry out a specific task or series of tasks that have been defined by the organization.
[1] Wellins, R., Byham, W., & Wilson, J. (1991). Empowered teams. San
Francisco, CA: Jossey-Bass, p. 3.
[2] Eisenberg, E. M., & Goodall, H. L., Jr. (1993). Organizational
communication: Balancing creativity and constraint. New York, NY: St.
Martin’s Press.
[3] Cohen, S. G., & Bailey, D. E. (1997). What makes teams work: Group
effectiveness research from the shopfloor to the executive suite. Journal
of Management, 23, 239–290.
[4] Mumby, D. K. (2013). Organization communication: A critical
approach. Los Angeles, CA: Sage.
[5] Fisher, D. (2000). Communication in organizations (2nd ed.). New
York, NY: Jaico.
[6] Fisher, D. (2000). Communication in organizations (2nd ed.). New
York, NY: Jaico, p. 322.
[7] Keller, R. (1994). Technology-information processing fit of contingency
theory. Academy of Management, 37(1), 167–179.
[8] Menz, M. (2012). Functional top management team members: A
review, synthesis, and research agenda. Journal of Management, 38(1),
45–80.
9.3 The Downside to Teams
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
1. Explain the concept of groupthink.
2. Explain the concept of “risky shift.”
3. Describe team conflict.
4. Discuss social loafing.
5. Describe and explain the negative aspects of teams and how to
prevent them from happening.
© Thinkstock/iStock
Not only are there different types of groups and teams, but there are also
different types of outcomes and challenges that groups can encounter. In this
section, we will look at some of the negative challenges to teams. In this section,
you will learn about the downside to teams and ways to prevent them from
happening.
Groupthink
Irving Janis (1983) brought attention to the idea of “groupthink.” [1] Janis
described groupthink as a group’s inclination to defer critical thinking and
accept solutions without much consideration. Groups that encounter groupthink
misjudge their own resources, find supporting evidence, and evade analyzing
opposing ideas. Groupthink usually occurs when a crisis is discovered. Think
back to an organization that you were involved with and how the crisis was dealt
with. Was it handled in a responsible and ethical manner? Why or why not?
Why Groupthink Happens
Groupthink happens when members fail to consider alternatives or suggestions.
Hence, when one member offers input, the other members of the group do not
question or reflect on the advantages or disadvantages of the decision. Therefore,
it is good to have members who challenge an idea or provide other
considerations. It has been stated that the Bay of Pigs Invasion during the
Kennedy administration was a classic example of groupthink. [2] Another current
example of groupthink occurred in 2001, when the United States Congress
passed a controversial terrorism bill. [3] Many citizens felt that Congress passed
the bill too quickly based on the tragedy and aftermath of September 11. They
felt that Congress was so rushed in wanting to do something that they did not
consider how the bill would be perceived and the effects it would have on others.
Oftentimes, groupthink can occur when there is a crisis. How do you handle
crises? Think about a crisis that you have been involved in and use that
information when you answer the questions. Take a few minutes to complete the
crisis knowledge index. Compare your answers with those of others in your
class. How can identifying a crisis help you prevent groupthink? How can
identifying a crisis allow for groupthink to happen?
Janis noted that groupthink is “a mode of thinking that people engage in when
they are deeply involved in a cohesive in-group, when members’ striving for
unanimity overrides their motivation to realistically appraise alternative courses
of action.” [4] Groupthink happens quite often. Think about a group meeting that
you have been involved with. Perhaps one person in the group will offer a
suggestion and/or idea, then everyone in the group agrees with it without
thinking about the negative or positive consequences of the idea. People do this
all the time because the person who offered the idea might be a highly powerful
member, others don’t want to disagree, or there is not a huge stake in the
decision. At times, people will not offer resisting ideas or be a devil’s advocate
for an idea, because there may be consequences, or the person is fearful of what
others may think. Groupthink can cause frustration in individuals who feel that
their voices are not heard and their time is not valued. Hence, it is important to
provide opportunities for all group members to speak so that groupthink does not
occur.
Some examples of groupthink in noncrisis situations happen all the time. Think
of your family dinners, when one parent makes a suggestion for a meal and
everyone agrees without offering any other suggestions. This is a classic
example of groupthink. We might be so accustomed to one parent making the
decision that we don’t stop to question why we don’t have something else. For
instance, a child asked his mother if they could have something other than turkey
for Thanksgiving. The mother never thought about other options because the
family had always had turkey for Thanksgiving. After asking her son why, she
discovered that he didn’t want to have a turkey’s life sacrificed for their meal to
enjoy it together. So they decided to eat a vegetarian meal for Thanksgiving, and
it was wonderful.
Eight Symptoms of Groupthink
Now that we’ve discussed a little bit of the background of groupthink, let’s talk
about how to recognize groupthink and some of its indicators. Through his
research, Irving Janis came to notice eight consistent symptoms of groupthink:
1. Illusion of invulnerability
2. Collective rationalization
3. Belief in inherent group morality
4. Stereotypes of outsiders
5. Pressure on dissenters
6. Self-censorship
7. Unanimity
8. Self-appointed mindguards [5]
Groupthink Assessment Scale
Instructions: Read the following questions and select the answer that
corresponds with your perception about a group or team you currently belong
to. Do not be concerned if some of the items appear similar. Please use the
following scale to rate the degree to which each statement applies to you.
Strongly
Disagree Disagree Neutral Agree
Strongly
Agree
1. My group/team is overly
optimistic. 1 2 3 4 5
2.
My group/team leader will
always lead us to the correct
decision.
1 2 3 4 5
3.
Whatever my group/team
decides to do, I know it will be
the right decision.
1 2 3 4 5
4.
My group/team has no problem
taking big risks because we
know the risks will work out
for us in the end.
1 2 3 4 5
5. I often think to myself, no one
can stop my group/team. 1 2 3 4 5
6.
My group/team is always very
objective when attempting to
make decisions.
1 2 3 4 5
7.
When concerns are raised
about potential decisions, my
group/team quickly dismisses
them when they are deemed
out of sync with the majority
opinion.
1 2 3 4 5
8.
If a potential problem is raised
about a group/team decision,
my group/team tends to
discount these worries as
overly nitpicky.
1 2 3 4 5
When discussing a final
decision, my group/team
9. members are always able to
come up with a number of
reasons why our decision is the
right one and no reasons why
it’s not.
1 2 3 4 5
10.
If a group/team member raises
a possible criticism, my
group/team tends to discount
these warnings.
1 2 3 4 5
11.
I know the decisions my
group/team will come to will
be moral.
1 2 3 4 5
12. The decisions made by my
group are always ethical. 1 2 3 4 5
13.
My group can objectively
determine if a decision is moral
or ethical.
1 2 3 4 5
14.
My group/team’s cause is so
just and honorable, we don’t
need to consider moral or
ethical issues regarding the
decisions we make.
1 2 3 4 5
15.
My group/team is always
concerned about the ethical or
moral consequences of the
decisions we make.
1 2 3 4 5
16.
When it comes to the
competition, my group/team
knows there is nothing to
worry about at all.
1 2 3 4 5
17.
If outsiders question my
group/team, we just dismiss
them as being out of touch.
1 2 3 4 5
18.
If someone attempts to oppose
my group/team, we often see
evil intentions in their
opposition.
1 2 3 4 5
19.
When we compare ourselves to
our competitors, my
group/team knows that we are
clearly better than they are.
1 2 3 4 5
20. My group/team avoids
stereotyping outsiders as evil,
stupid, and/or weak.
1 2 3 4 5
21.
My group/team always
encourages people to share
different opinions.
1 2 3 4 5
22.
When someone expresses a
contrary opinion in my
group/team, they quickly
experience pressure to “get in
line” with everyone else.
1 2 3 4 5
23.
Loyal group/team members
would never express their
dissent with our decisions
openly.
1 2 3 4 5
24.
People who express dissent to
my group/team’s decisions are
just inhibiting the progress of
the group/team.
1 2 3 4 5
25.
My group/team always
encourages people to express
different points of view.
1 2 3 4 5
26. If I have any doubts about my
group/team’s decision, I just 1 2 3 4 5
keep them to myself.
27.
When the majority is already
on board, I don’t feel it’s
appropriate for me to express
any reservations about my
group/team’s decision.
1 2 3 4 5
28.
I feel perfectly comfortable
expressing any questions I have
about my group/team’s
decision.
1 2 3 4 5
29.
Even if the majority of my
group/team has supported a
specific decision, I feel
comfortable raising any
questions I may have about the
decision.
1 2 3 4 5
30.
If a group/team member has
doubts about a decision, they
generally keep them to
themselves.
1 2 3 4 5
31.
If someone isn’t actively
participating in the group/team
decision-making process, I just 1 2 3 4 5
assume he or she is on board
with the group/team’s decision.
32. My group/team always reaches
consensus very quickly. 1 2 3 4 5
33.
When my group/team members
comment on a specific
decision, it’s always to support
the decision.
1 2 3 4 5
34.
My group/team often engages
in heated arguments before
coming to a decision.
1 2 3 4 5
35. My group/team always reaches
a unanimous decision rapidly. 1 2 3 4 5
36.
If a group/team member is
getting out of line and
questioning a decision, there
are other group/team members
who get her or him back in
place.
1 2 3 4 5
If someone in my group/team
expresses dissent, another
37. group member will “whip her
or him into shape.” 1 2 3 4 5
38.
Everyone in my group/team is
allowed to freely express any
ideas without fear that someone
else will immediately shoot
them down.
1 2 3 4 5
39.
It’s very important for my
group to all be on the same
page, so anyone expressing
dissent is quickly told to “get
with the program.”
1 2 3 4 5
40.
My group/team members
readily apply pressure on each
other to prevent challenging or
questioning the opinion of the
majority.
1 2 3 4 5
Scoring
Items 1 to 5—Illusions of Invulnerability
Items 6 to 10—Collective Rationalization
Items 7 to 15—Belief in Group Morality
Items 16 to 20—Stereotyping
Items 21 to 25—Pressure on Dissenters
Items 26 to 30—Self-Censorship
Items 31 to 35—Unanimity
Items 36 to 40—Self-Appointed Mindguard
Interpretation
Scores for each of the eight symptoms of groupthink should range from 5 to
25. Scores between 5 and 14 are considered low, and scores from 15 to 25 are
considered high. Although this is not a clear-cut diagnosis of groupthink, if a
group scores consistently high across multiple symptoms, then the group may
be suffering from groupthink and should rethink its approach to decision
making.
This measure is based on Janis’ original ideas of Groupthink and was created
for this text.
Illusions of Invulnerability
The first symptom of groupthink is the illusion of invulnerability. This illusion
starts with the basis that the group simply cannot fail. When organizations take
on this illusion of invulnerability, they often take huge risks, thinking there is no
way that things could go wrong. In the economic downturn that started in 2008,
many banks had been taking huge gambles, thinking there was simply no way
that they could possibly fail. Unfortunately, those gambles did fail and wrecked
the US economy and the global economy in the process.
Collective Rationalization
The second symptom of groupthink is collective rationalization, or a group or
team’s tendency to discount warnings of decisions being made. For example,
when the US military entered Iraq in 2003, there was a strong belief that the
military would be seen as liberators and the Iraqi people would overwhelmingly
celebrate their presence. Even though there were voices in all the major
intelligence agencies that warned this simply would not be the case, the
administration and top military officials proceeded and rationalized away
dissenters.
Belief in Group Morality
The third major problem many groups face is the inherent belief that their
group/team and the decisions made are inherently moral and/or ethical. This
belief is grounded in the ideology that the group/team will always be able to
differentiate between right and wrong; therefore, any decision that is made is
inherently going to be right. In fact, some groups so strongly believe that their
decisions will be moral that they never take the time to consider the possible
moral or ethical consequences of the decisions that they are making. Using the
invasion of Iraq as our example again, If you initially take the terms freedom,
democracy, axis of evil, and the like, you see a very clear picture of a moral
versus immoral depiction being made. In fact, President Bush actually referred
to the Iraq invasion as a “great moral cause” on multiple occasions. [6] Research
has suggested that when groups are in a state of groupthink, their actions can
actually lead to immoral and unethical behavior. [7]
Stereotyping
The fourth symptom of groupthink is the stereotyping of one’s opponents as evil,
weak, or stupid. When a group starts with these basic notions of their opponents,
their ability to get a true perspective of what is occurring may be clouded. In
1999, a group of major-league umpires staged a mass-resignation campaign in an
attempt to get a better seat at the bargaining table during their contract
negotiations. The umpires assumed that the owners were too weak and would
cave in to their demands. Instead, Major League Baseball accepted their
resignations and twenty-two umpires were without jobs. In essence, never
underestimate your opponent.
Pressure on Dissenters
The fifth symptom of groupthink involves putting pressure on dissenters to
either go with the flow or be silent. In essence, if someone dares to express
dissent, he or she is quickly pressured to get in line with the rest of the group.
The more aggressive and extreme the pressure, the more likely other dissenters
will quickly learn to be quiet. In 2000, Netflix met with the executive team of
Blockbusters video-rental chain. The urban myth was that Netflix was laughed
out of the conference room for proposing a collaboration. What really happened
was the CEO of Blockbuster, John Antioco, saw the writing on the wall and
started to beef up Blockbuster’s online and video-rental services. Through what
was dubbed the Total Access Program, Blockbuster tried competing with Netflix
by stopping late fees, allowing customers who had mail-service DVDs to return
them to a store and get another one immediately, and other moves designed to
make Blockbuster competitive with Netflix. During this time, an activist investor
named Carl Icahn became a member of Blockbuster’s board of directors and
quickly gained two more seats on the board. Although Antioco and Icahn have
differing accounts of how events ultimately transpired, one thing became clear—
they had very different ideas on how to run the company. [8]
Eventually, enough pressure was placed on John Antioco to resign as CEO of
Blockbuster, and Jim Keyes was appointed the new CEO. Immediately, Keyes,
with the board’s blessing, rolled back the Total Access Program, which had
started the downward spiral that eventually killed Blockbuster. Antioco’s
perspective is that Icahn placed undue pressure on the board (especially after
gaining multiple seats on the board), which prevented open and active dissent of
other board members. Icahn admits that investing in Blockbuster was the worst
investment decision of his career. [9]
Self-Censorship
The sixth symptom of groupthink is self-censorship, which happens when
individuals decide not to express their own dissent within a group/team. The
notion of self-censorship is ultimately about the climate of the group/team. In
essence, a climate is created in which people who have dissenting opinions feel
that their dissenting opinions either will not be heard or will be perceived as
against the group, so group members keep their dissenting perspectives to
themselves. It’s not uncommon for a group/team member to voice after the fact,
“I thought that was a bad idea.”
Unanimity
The notion of unanimity is that there is a unanimous consensus among group
members about the decision being made. Anyone who hasn’t voiced an opinion
on the subject (or expressed dissent) is assumed to agree with the decision. In
cases of groupthink, this feeling of consensus is based on an illusion and not
actual consensus. You’ll notice how the notions of self-censorship can easily
lead to the illusion of unanimity.
Self-Appointed Mindguard
The final symptom of groupthink discussed by Irving Janis was the existence of
self-appointed mindguards. A self-appointed mindguard is an individual who has
taken it upon herself or himself to get everyone on board. If someone does
express dissent during a meeting, the self-appointed mindguard will approach
that person and make it very clear that he or she needs to get in line with the rest
of the group. Think of these individuals as the groupthink police. Self-appointed
mindguards ensure that other individuals within the group/team stay in line and
do not prevent the group from reaching and enacting a decision.
Combatting Groupthink
The ultimate question becomes, how does a group/team prevent groupthink from
occurring? Thankfully, Janis came up with a series of eight tools that will help a
group/team alleviate the possibility of groupthink:
1. Leaders should assign each member the role of “critical evaluator.” This
allows each member to freely air objections and doubts.
2. Leaders should not express an opinion when assigning a task to a group.
3. Leaders should absent themselves from many of the group meetings to
avoid excessively influencing the outcome.
4. The organization should set up several independent groups, working on the
same problem.
5. All effective alternatives should be examined.
6. Each member should discuss the group’s ideas with trusted people outside
the group.
7. The group should invite outside experts into meetings. Group members
should be allowed to discuss with and question the outside experts.
8. At least one group member should be assigned the role of devil’s advocate.
This should be a different person for each meeting. [10]
When you look at this list of ways to prevent groupthink, the whole point is to
create a series of checks and balances. Although there is no surefire way to
prevent groupthink, these strategies will definitely help alleviate many cases of
groupthink that otherwise would occur.
Risky Shift
Groupthink is not the only hazard for groups to avoid. Sometimes groups will
make “risky” or precarious decisions. [11] This results in what is known as risky
shift. Daniel Isenberg found that most people are more likely to make a riskier
group decision than an individual decision. In other words, in general, people
think it is fine for others to drink alcohol, but they might have a limit for their
alcoholic consumption. In a group discussion, there are members who may
advocate for an extreme position more than they would in other circumstances,
because they are part of a group. Isenberg illustrated that risky shift has occurred
in jury decision-making processes. [12] Mock juries were often voted for punitive
damages that varied significantly from awards chosen by individual jurors. The
findings revealed, foer example, that jurors who initially supported a low award
were swayed by group discussion to accept a higher award. . Isenberg
maintained that a group’s decision tends to be more risky than the individual
group member’s decision before the group convened. Risky shift is an important
concept that illustrates how group processes impact individuals decisions. Thus,
the importance of communication between and among group members cannot be
overstated.
Conflict
Conflict is inevitable and will most likely occur in groups and teams. Roy Berko,
Andrew Wolvin, and Darlyn Wolvin categorized two types of team conflict:
primary and secondary. [13] Primary tension happens initially when groups are
formed. Secondary tension happens after a group has been developed. In other
words, primary tensions are ones that often happen before the group meets, and
secondary tensions often happen after the group meets.
Primary Tension
Individuals might feel tension before a meeting begins due to the following: [14]
They fear that each member in the group will not have similar tasks and
responsibilities.
They are uncertain about the topic of the meeting and are wary of the
possibility for uncomfortable topics.
The topic is uneasy and/or distressing.
The task might involve written or speaking skills with which the member
does not feel competent.
They have communication apprehension, meaning they are nervous about
communicating in that context.
The meeting will cause more work or work that is beyond their capabilities.
They do not feel properly prepared.
They have previous negative group experiences.
They have a negative working relationship with the team leader.
They have time constraints.
They have other personal issues that might interfere with their involvement
with the group.
As you can see, each of these tensions can make work conditions rather
uncomfortable. Think about a group meeting that you had to prepare for. Did
you have any of these primary tensions? How did you react to them?
Secondary Tensions
As stated earlier, secondary tensions occur after the meeting begins. These
tensions can be classified into four types: procedural, equity, affective, and
substantive. [15]
1. Procedural tensions originate from group members’ perceptions that the
group is not productive. Group members believe that the agenda is
ineffective and/or that the team leader is not adhering to the agenda.
2. Equity tensions happen when group members do not feel equal. They may
feel that certain factors are not fair, such as workload or responsibility. On
the other hand, equity issues may stem from feelings that there are more
controlling members who dominate and their opinions are worth more than
others’.
3. Affective tensions happen when team members do not like each other.
Team members will find it more difficult to communicate. There may be
huge rivalry and competitiveness in the group.
4. Substantive tensions happen when there are legitimate concerns about the
task. Conflict here can turn into problem-solving moments, creativity, and
increased information sharing and can provide a better perspective of the
opposition. Substantive conflict is beneficial because everyone gets a
different perspective of the same topic. It can result in a better outcome
because all voices are heard.
Social Loafing
Another downside to teams is social loafing. [16] Social loafing happens when
certain group members do not put forth as much effort in the group as they do
when working independently. Sometimes groups are not productive because
group members do not fully contribute. Sometimes you will get the best work
when group members work by themselves because they don’t have to report to
or communicate with anyone else. Think about a group that you were involved
in. Did someone “ride your coattails” or become a “free rider”? Do you think
you engage in social loafing? Why or why not?
There is research that discusses how social loafing can be avoided. Dan
Rothwell argued that social loafing can be prevented by collaboration, content,
and choice. [17] He noted that competitive situations will not get group members
motivated, and motivation can impede social loafing. First, collaboration is the
key to getting everyone involved. If everyone feels as though they are special
and have been given meaningful tasks, then they are more likely to contribute.
Second, people are more likely to contribute if they are well informed about the
task and if other group members are informed about that group member’s
contribution. Third, choice is helpful for preventing social loafing because it
allows group members to pick the task that they are better apt or skilled to
complete.
Take a few minutes to complete the workplace input scale. This is a quick
measurement of how you feel that your input is received in the organization. A
higher score indicated validation and that you feel appreciated. A lower score
indicates that you do not feel validated and that the organization does not listen
to you.
Workplace Input Scale
Instructions: This survey includes a number of statements about how you
may feel about your current working condition. You will probably find that
you agree with some of the statements and disagree with others, to varying
extents. Please indicate your reaction to each of the statements by marking
your opinion to the right of each statement according to the following scale:
Strongly Disagree Disagree Neutral Agree Strongly Agree
1 2 3 4 5
1. I have no input at work at all. _____
2. Nobody cares about what I say at work. _____
3. People at work do not listen to my input at all. _____
4. When I have a good idea at work, it’s like I’m talking to a wall. _____
5. People always listen to my suggestions at work. _____
6. No one wants to hear my ideas at work. _____
7. My coworkers pay attention to my input. _____
8. People in my workplace always heed my suggestions. _____
9. People take my ideas seriously at work. _____
10. I have no problem having my ideas heard at work. _____
11. I have a lot of input on the job. _____
12. My input plays an important part on my job. _____
13. People listen to what I have to say at work. _____
14. No one pays attention to my ideas at work. _____
15. Nobody listens to my suggestions at work. _____
16. People care about my ideas at work. _____
17. When I have a good idea at work, people listen. _____
18. No one takes my ideas seriously at work. _____
19. No one in my workplace heeds my suggestions. _____
20. I have a problem getting my ideas heard at work. _____
Recode: 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 14, 15, 18, 19, and 20
How to Recode: Change the initial value you created to a new value using the
following formula:
1 = 5
2 = 4
3 = 3
4 = 2
5 = 1
Once you have recoded all of the appropriate numbers, you can add all 20
items together for a summed total. Scores should range between 20 and 100.
Scores 65 and higher are considered high and those 64 or below are
considered low.
Source: Wrench, J. S., McCroskey, J. C., Richmond, V. P., & Brogan, S. M.
The development, reliability, and validity testing of new measures in
organizational communication.
KEY TAKEAWAY
Groupthink occurs when there is a crisis and none of the group
Groupthink :
members stops to analyze the pros and cons of the situation.
Conflict occurs in teams. There are two types of tensions: primary
and secondary. Primary tensions occur before the meeting starts,
and secondary tensions occur after the meeting begins.
Risky shift occurs when group members are more likely to make a
riskier decision as a group than individually.
Social loafing happens when group members do not work as hard
in a group context compared to when they work by themselves.
EXERCISES
1. What kind of conflict did you experience in a group and how did
you deal with it? Could have it been dealt with in a different
manner?
2. Apply the different downsides to teamwork to one of your group
experiences. If you had the ability to change it, what could you
have done differently to prevent these downsides?
3. Complete the Workplace Input Scale. Based on the results of your
analysis of your group experience(s), what areas do you think you
could improve upon? Why do you think other group members
communicate to you in the way they do?
KEY TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
A group’s inclination to defer critical thinking and accept
Risky Shift:
Social Loafing:
Team Conflict:
solutions without much consideration.
The tendency of a group to make riskier decisions than its members would otherwise make on their own.
When certain group members do not put forth as much effort in the group as when they are working independently. `
Discord among group members. This can be primary or secondary
[1] Janis, I. (1983). Groupthink: Psychological studies of policy decisions
and fiascoes (2nd ed.). Boston, MA: Houghton Mifflin.
[2] Zaremba, A. J. (2010). Organizational communication (3rd ed.). New
York, NY: Oxford University Press.
[3] Zaremba, A. J. (2010). Organizational communication (3rd ed.). New
York, NY: Oxford University Press.
[4] Janis, I. (1983). Groupthink: Psychological studies of policy decisions
and fiascoes (2nd ed.). Boston, MA: Houghton Mifflin, p. 9.
[5] Janis, I. (1983). Groupthink: Psychological studies of policy decisions
and fiascoes (2nd ed.). Boston, MA: Houghton Mifflin, p. 9.
[6] McQueen, A. (2005). A groupthink perspective on the invasion of Iraq.
International Affairs Review, 14, 53–80.
[7] Sims, R. R. (1992). Linking groupthink to unethical behavior in
organizations. Journal of Business Ethics, 11, 651–662.
[8] Antioco, J. (2011). Blockbuster’s former CEO on sparring with an
activist shareholder. Harvard Business Review, 89(4), 39–44.
[9] Antioco, J. (2011). Blockbuster’s former CEO on sparring with an
activist shareholder. Harvard Business Review, 89(4), 39–44.
[10] Janis, I. L. (1972). Victims of groupthink: A psychological study of
foreign-policy decisions and fiascoes. Boston, MA: Houghton Mifflin, pp.
209–215.
[11] Isenberg, D. J. (1986). Group polarization: A critical review and meta-
analysis. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 50(6), 1141–
1151.
[12] Isenberg, D. J. (1986). Group polarization: A critical review and
meta-analysis. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 50(6),
1141–1151.
[13] Berko, R., Wolvin, A., & Wolvin, D. (2012). Communicating: A social
and career focus (12th ed.). Boston, MA: Pearson.
[14] Zaremba, A. J. (2010). Organizational communication (3rd ed.). New
York, NY: Oxford University Press.
[15] Zaremba, A. J. (2010). Organizational communication (3rd ed.). New
York, NY: Oxford University Press, p. 184.
[16] Karau, S. J., & Williams, K. D. (1993). Social loafing: A meta-analytic
review and theoretical integration. Journal of Personality and Social
Psychology, 65, 681–706.
[17] Rothwell, J. D. (2012). In the company of others: An introduction to
communication (4th ed.). New York, NY: Oxford University Press.
9.4 Group Communication Roles
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
1. Explain task roles.
2. Explain maintenance roles.
3. Describe self-centered roles.
Kenneth Benne and Paul Sheats of the First National Training Laboratory in
Group Development created a scheme for understanding the functional roles of
group members.They classified three types: group task, group building and
maintenance, and self-centered.
Group Task Roles
The first type of roles that individuals can take on within a group are all centered
on the tasks that the group needs to accomplish. These roles are all prosocial and
help the group strive toward achieving the group or team’s goal. Benne and
Sheats identified twelve different task roles that group members could take on.
Remember, in smaller groups or teams, individuals could take on multiple roles,
and it’s entirely possible that multiple group members take on the same roles as
well.
Initiator-Contributor
The initiator-contributor is all about providing new and keen insight and ideas to
the group. This person may help the group brainstorm new and novel ways to go
about understanding or looking at a particular problem.
Information Seeker
The information seeker focuses on ensuring that the group has accurate and
relevant information as it goes about problem solving. This person asks to see
relevant data to ensure the accuracy of the information the group uses while
attempting to problem solve.
Opinion Seeker
The opinion seeker is not concerned with the accuracy of information but is
more interested in understanding the group’s values. What are the group’s
values, and how are they used to solve problems? When a potential solution to a
problem is provided, the opinion seeker will ask for clarification of whether the
solution is in sync with the group’s purported values.
Information Giver
The information giver is someone within a group who has some kind of
authoritative understanding or specific expertise—often from personal
knowledge or experiences—that can help inform a group’s decision-making
process.
Opinion Giver
The opinion giver, like the opinion seeker, is concerned less with the facts
surrounding a specific problem than he or she is with ensuring the group sticks
to its values. This person will offer suggestions and insight on how the group can
employ its values while making specific decisions.
Elaborator
The elaborator takes the ideas that other people have had within a group and tries
to flesh out the ideas in a meaningful way. The evaluator can also help a group
understand specific rationales for the decisions it has made or think through how
the implementation of a specific decision would work practically.
Coordinator
The coordinator tries to find the common links between the various ideas of
group members and combine them in some kind of succinct package.
Furthermore, the coordinator tries to coordinate the various activities that the
group or team must accomplish along the way.
Orienter
The orienter is akin to a group or team’s mapmaker. This person’s role is to show
where the group has been in an effort to understand where the group is right
now. Furthermore, this person will point out when the group has gotten
completely off topic and try to refocus the group on the decision at hand.
Evaluator-Critic
The evaluator-critic’s job is to help assess the actual functionality of the group
and the decisions that it makes. This individual ensures that the group is meeting
predetermined standard levels and not just “getting by” with quick and easy
solutions to complex problems. This person seeks to hold the group to a clear
standard of excellence by evaluating or questioning “‘practicality,’ the ‘logic,’
the ‘facts’ or the ‘procedure’ of a suggestion or of some unit of group
discussion.” [1]
Energizer
Often, groups get worn down by the decision-making process because some
decisions may take months or years to come to fruition. The energizer’s primary
role is to help pull groups out of a rut and encourage them to make decisions or
take action. Like the evaluator-critic, the energizer also attempts to help groups
reach a higher quality of decision making.
Procedural Technician
All groups have simple tasks that someone needs to take care of. Whether it’s
rearranging a room into a circle or photocopying the agenda and minutes from
the previous meeting, the procedural technician ensures that the routine tasks of
the group get accomplished.
Recorder
The recorder, often called a group or team’s secretary, is the individual who
takes copious notes in an effort to help a group or team understand its own
decision-making process. These notes ultimately become the group’s memory of
where they have been and where they are going, so the recorder is a very
important role in any group or team. At the same time, you want to make sure
that the recorder is skilled in taking notes and can quickly transcribe those notes
into some kind of formalized minutes.
Group-Building and Maintenance Roles
The second type of roles discussed by Benne and Sheats are referred to as
group/team-building or maintenance roles. Group/team-building roles help build
a group-centered identity for the members, while maintenance roles help keep
that group-centered identity over the life cycle of the group or team. Benne and
Sheats identified seven specific group/team-building or maintenance roles.
Encourager
The encourager is functionally the group or team’s cheerleader. This person
encourages people to come up with new ideas and then praises group or team
members for the ideas they generate. This person also encourages the group to
seek out alternative ways of seeing a problem and fosters an environment where
alternative ideas and suggestions are welcomed.
Harmonizer
The harmonizer’s job is to ensure that the group handles conflict effectively. All
groups will eventually have conflict. In fact, conflict can actually be very
important for groups to survive and thrive. However, when conflict becomes
person focused instead of task focused, the harmonizer will help alleviate the
tension of the group and help conflicting parties solve their conflicts prosocially.
Compromiser
The compromiser is someone who realizes that her or his ideas are in conflict
with another person or faction of the group or team. Instead of holding her or his
ground and refusing to budge in her or his ideas, the compromiser tries to seek
out a compromise between herself or himself and the conflicting parties.
Compromising does not mean this individual is a doormat; rather, compromising
is a strategy to help groups build better, more informed decisions.
Gatekeeper
In a group or team setting, the gatekeeper’s job is to ensure that all participants
are freely and openly involved in the group’s decision making. The gatekeeper
will encourage people who are on tangents to bring it back to the decision at
hand while encouraging those who are more reticent in their communication to
participate actively in the decision making.
Standard Setter
The standard setter or ego sets out to ensure that the group or team’s decision-
making processes meet a certain quality level. This role is similar to the opinion
giver under the task roles, but this role is specifically focused on how the group
goes about making decisions and then holds the groups to those standards.
Group Observer and Commentator
The group observer and commentator watches how the group goes about
completing its purpose. This individual will take notes about the group’s
functioning and then periodically inform the group about how well it is working
as a group or team. This person focuses on ensuring the group or team’s
processes for decision making do not leave out minority voices, prevent poor
brainstorming, or jump to decisions too quickly.
Follower
The follower is an individual who attempts not to rock the boat for the group.
This person is often passive and just observes the group’s decision processes.
Instead of being an active participant in the group’s decision making, he or she
will serve as an audience for the decision-making process during group
discussions.
Self-Centered Roles
The final category of group roles identified by Benne and Sheats is generally
very destructive and can harm the group decision-making process. Benne and
Sheats called these roles self-centered because the roles focus on the individual
desires of group members and not necessarily on what is best for the group or its
decisions. According to Benne and Sheats, when self-centered roles are noticed
by group members, it’s very important to quickly diagnose why these roles are
appearing within the group. When groups face these self-centered roles, it
becomes very important to ascertain why they are occurring and to take steps to
prevent their recurrence. However, Benne and Sheats caution against the outright
suppression of self-centered roles because the suppression can prevent groups or
teams from going through the self-diagnosis necessary to fix the group or team.
Ultimately, the researchers identified eight types of self-centered roles.
Aggressor
The aggressor tends to be an individual who feels the need to improve her or his
own standing within the group by taking others down. Aggressors can enact a
number of behaviors that ultimately impact group morale and the basic
functioning of the group itself. Some of the behaviors identified by Benne and
Sheats are “deflating the status of others, expressing disapproval of the values,
acts or feelings of others, attacking the group or the problem it is working on,
joking aggressively, showing envy toward another’s contribution by trying to
take credit for it, etc.” [2]
Blocker
The blocker is someone who simply either hates everything the group is doing
and rejects everything the group recommends or keeps rehashing group or team
decisions that have been long since decided. This person may simply say no to
anything the group likes and is often a giant stumbling block for groups.
Recognition Seeker
The recognition seeker is all about showing how he or she is such a vital person
in the group by trumpeting her or his achievements (whether relevant or not).
Often, this person acts in this fashion for fear that the group or team will see her
or him as irrelevant. So instead of becoming a relic of the group, this person
feels it is necessary to show how vital she or he is to the group by seeking
recognition.
Self-Confessor
The self-confessor sees the group or team as the setting to air her or his own
feelings, ideology, insight, or values. This person sees the group or team as a
personal therapy session and has no problem self-disclosing inappropriate
information to group or team members during meetings.
Playboy/Playgirl
The playboy or playgirl clearly couldn’t care less about the group or team and its
goals. In fact, this person is generally quite vocal in his or her lack of caring. He
or she may simply become overly cynical of the group/team and its decision
making or actively disrupt the decision-making process through horseplay or
other nonchalant behavior.
Dominator
The dominator is someone who tries to control the group/team and dominate the
group’s discussion and decision-making processes. This individual is often
highly manipulative and will attempt to coerce those in subordinate status
positions. Often, these people will see their own position within the group or
team as superior to that of other group members and will make this very clear,
while asserting that her or his ideas are superior because of elevated position
within an organization’s hierarchy.
Help Seeker
The help seeker tries to get the group to be sympathetic by stressing that she or
he is insecure or confused. The goal of the help seeker is to downplay her or his
own ability to contribute to the group by making other group/team members care
for her or him.
Special-Interest Pleader
The special-interest pleader always has a secondary agenda within a group.
According to Benne and Sheats, a special-interest pleader pleads on behalf of a
specific group (e.g., small businesses, labor, gender, race) but is “usually
cloaking his own prejudices or biases in the stereotype which best fits his
individual need.” [3] By allegedly “speaking on behalf” of a special interest
group, the special-interest pleader serves to distract the group/team from its basic
decision-making processes.
KEY TAKEAWAY
The first form of group roles proposed by Benne and Sheats is
task roles or roles that individual group or team members embody
that help a group accomplish its basic task(s). Benne and Sheats
identified twelve different task roles: initiator-contributor,
information seeker, opinion seeker, information giver, opinion
giver, elaborator, coordinator, orienter, evaluator-critic, energizer,
procedural technician, and recorder.
The second form of group roles proposed by Benne and Sheats is
group-building and maintenance roles. Groupbuilding roles help
build a group-centered identity for the members; maintenance
roles help keep that group-centered identity over the life cycle of
the group or team. Benne and Sheats identified seven different
group-building/maintenance roles: encourager, harmonizer,
compromiser, gatekeeper, standard setter, group observer and
commentator, and follower.
The second form of group roles proposed by Benne and Sheats is
self-centered roles, or roles that individual group members
embody that focus on the individual desires of group members
and not necessarily on what is best for the group or its decisions.
Group Building:
Group Task:
Benne and Sheats identified eight different self-centered roles:
aggressor, blocker, recognition seeker, self-confessor,
playboy/playgirl, dominator, help seeker, and special-interest
pleader.
EXERCISES
1. Think about the groups that you have been involved with. What
roles are present, and how did you deal with each one? Were
there better ways of dealing with certain roles?
2. Write each group role on a card with the description on it. Then, at
your next meeting, ask every group member to take a card and
act that role in your meeting. What did you notice? Did people
enjoy their roles? What were some noticeable differences?
3. Pretend that you just learned your house or place of residence is
on fire and you and your family members only have time to grab
one thing each. Who will get what item and why? Why did you
designate the roles and items the way you did? How does this
relate to an organizational setting?
KEY TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
Role that individual group or team members embody that helps build a group-centered identity for the members.
Role that individual group or team members embody that
Maintenance:
Self-Centered Roles:
helps a group accomplish its basic task(s).
Role that individual group or team members embody that helps keep a group-centered identity over the life cycle of the group or team.
Role that individual group or team members embody that focuses on the individual desires of group members and not necessarily on what is best for the group or its decisions.
[1] Benne, K., & Sheats, P. (2007). Functional roles of group members.
Group Facilitation: A Research and Applications Journal, 8, 30–35.
(Reprinted from 1948 Journal of Social Issues, 4(2), 41–49), p. 32.
[2] Benne, K., & Sheats, P. (2007). Functional roles of group members.
Group Facilitation: A Research and Applications Journal, 8, 30–35.
(Reprinted from 1948 Journal of Social Issues, 4(2), 41–49), p. 32.
[3] Benne, K., & Sheats, P. (2007). Functional roles of group members.
Group Facilitation: A Research and Applications Journal, 8, 30–35.
(Reprinted from 1948 Journal of Social Issues, 4(2), 41–49), p. 32.
9.5 Chapter Exercises
REAL-WORLD CASE STUDY
The following case is based on a consulting experience of one of
our colleagues. Names and institutions have been altered for this
case.
Morgan, an organizational consultant, was approached to serve as
an executive coach for a work team in a new organization called
Sankaya. Sankaya is a retail organization geared toward fashion
merchandising and retailing. This work team was trying to figure out
ways to generate sales, maximize profits, and minimize resources.
Sankaya encouraged the work team to think outside the box and
figure out innovative ways to increase sales. The work team was
skeptical about Morgan’s involvement. They did not feel they
needed an outsider to coach them on their task. It became quite
apparent in the first meeting that group members were not cohesive.
Certain ideas were given more credit and time than others. Also,
some group members were even considering unethical means to
increase sales, such as not paying their workers for constructing
their garments and even giving themselves raises for working on the
team.
1. Can these employees be coached?
2. If you were Morgan, how would you handle this situation?
3. How can you change this group’s communication behaviors?
4. How would you handle the unethical ideas, especially if you do
not have the power to stop or prevent them from happening?
REAL-WORLD CASE STUDY
After forty years in the same building, Corporate Communications
built a new building to attract more customers. The new building has
more space and better lighting. However, in the old building
everyone knew each other because the space was so small. All the
employees were able to interact because there the building had only
one entrance and one exit. Moreover, many of the employees were
collaborating and interacting with other employees because they
were not separated by their jobs. In other words, technicians would
work right alongside people in human resources and advertising. In
the new building, each employee was placed in a distinct location,
so, for example, all human resources employees could be found in
the same office. This new building has caused more tension and
stress among the employees, who may be feeling professional
jealousy and competition. Many employees are unhappy.
1. If you were hired as a consultant, what would you do?
2. Based on the different stages that you learned, what do you think
will happen at each stage in this situation?
3. What recommendations would you provide?
4. How can you change this organization’s communication
behaviors?
5. What hindrances and limitations could you foresee in
implementing your ideas?
END-OF-CHAPTER ASSESSMENT
1. Jonas was assigned to a group. He is still learning his group members’ names and interests. According to the team development model, which stage is Jonas in?
a. forming b. norming c. storming d. transforming e. performing
2. Tessa has been working in a group for about two months. Her group members are still not sure about their ultimate goal. According to the team performance model, which stage is her group in?
a. trust building b. commitment c. goal clarification d. implementation e. renewal
3. Tessa has been working on a project team. They want her team to complete an advertising campaign by tomorrow. Based on what you know about project teams, which element can Tessa not spend much time on with her other group members?
a. trust building b. commitment c. goal clarification d. implementation e. building stronger relationships
4. Zavin is the only person in his organization in charge of the sales and marketing of the organization. What would his title most likely be?
a. chief executive officer b. chief operations officer c. chief technology officer d. chief financial officer e. all these
5. Brenna’s group members just found a new problem with a product that has already been sold in stores. Everyone in her group believes that they should just ignore the problem. No one questions the decision to ignore the problem. What downside of teams is most likely occurring in this situation?
a. groupthink b. risky-shift phenomenon c. executive decision making d. apathetic conflict e. social loafing
Answer Key
1. a
2. c
3. e
4. b
5. a
Chapter 10
Recruiting, Socializing, and Disengaging
© Thinkstock/iStock
Working Life
According to the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, an average person
(as of 2010) can expect to live until he or she is about 78.5 years of age. [1] Let’s
say you start working a forty-hour-a-week job right out of college at age twenty-
two and have the luxury of working until you’re sixty-five, then you will have
worked approximately forty-three years. There are fifty-two weeks in a year, so
let’s say you’re really lucky and only have to work forty-eight of them. If you
work only an eight-hour shift (with thirty minutes for lunch), you’ll work
approximately eighteen hundred hours per year or 77,400 hours over the course
of your working career. At this rate, your work career will account for 11.33
percent of your life. And trust us, if you look at the numbers we’ve provided
here, we are clearly low-balling our estimates. In reality, depending on the type
of career choice you make, you could easily end up spending 15 to 20 percent of
your life working.
Most individuals will not have only one job. In fact, according to the Bureau of
Labor Statistics, “The baby boom (1957–1964) held 11.3 jobs from age 18 to age
46.” [2] For this reason, we spend a good chunk of our time being recruited by
organizations, entering into new organizations, acclimating ourselves to new
organizations, and eventually leaving organizations. This chapter focuses on the
process of recruiting, socializing, and leaving organizations.
[1] Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. (2010). Life expectancy.
Retrieved from http://www.cdc.gov/nchs/fastats/lifexpec.htm
[2] Bureau of Labor Statistics. (2012, July 25). Number of jobs held, labor
market activity, and earnings growth among the youngest baby boomers:
Results from a longitudinal survey summary. Retrieved from
http://www.bls.gov/news.release/nlsoy.nr0.htm
© Thinkstock/iStock
10.1 Recruiting
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
1. Enumerate the cost of recruitment and why effective recruitment
affects an organization’s bottom line.
2. Explain Breaugh, Macan, and Grambow’s five-stage model of
employee recruitment.
3. Recognize the problems associated with traditional organizational
recruitment strategies.
4. Explain realistic job preview theory and its importance in the
recruitment process.
5. Differentiate among the different mediums for presenting realistic
job previews.
6. Examine the outcomes realistic job previews have for
organizations.
Organizations spend a good deal of time and money
recruiting people to work in them. This section examines
the process of recruiting new organization members.
Recruitment is very important for an organization because
poor recruitment can be a very costly mistake. Table 10.1
shows research from a handful of studies that examine the
cost of recruiting a new employee. Leigh Branham
estimates that the costs associated with recruiting someone
can be anything from 25 to 200 percent of the person’s annual salary. [1] Overall,
recruiting new employees is a time-consuming and expensive process. In this
section, we examine the recruitment process along with various issues related to
employee expectations and finding the best talent.
Table 10.1 The Cost of Recruitment
Study Description Findings
Examined the cost of recruiting both operations and
management in five-star hotels in Australia [2] $9,591 for an eight-hour employee, $109,909 for a
manager
Examined how much it costs to recruit a new front-
line desk clerk at hotels in New York City and
Miami [3] $5,827—Miami, $12,246—NYC
Examined the costs associated with recruiting a
number of different occupations [4]
$109,909 for a journeyman machinist, $133,000 for
an HR manager, $150,000 for an accounting
professional
Examined the cost of recruiting public school
teachers in Texas [5] $3,000 to $4,000 per teacher
Average of $25,000 for jobs that are high-stress
Examined the costs of various jobs in the state of
Louisiana [6]
protective services (e.g., police officers and
correction staff)
The Recruitment Process
Recruitment takes a lot of economic and human resources to do effectively.
Unfortunately, some organizations do not adequately think through the basic
strategies for recruiting to ensure the maximum benefits of the recruitment
process. Maybe an organization is more concerned with filling a position than
finding the best person for the job. Other organizations end up with people who
have exaggerated their qualifications to get the job. Some organizations try to
paint an unrealistically rosy picture of what it’s like to work there, only to end up
with new hires who become disgruntled once they are faced with the actual
reality of the job. Whatever the reasons that exist for poor recruitment,
problematic recruitment is a reality in many organizations. According James
Breaugh, employee recruitment encompasses four specific actions on the part of
an organization:
1. Bring a job opening to the attention of potential job candidates who do not
currently work for the organization.
2. Influence whether these individuals apply for the opening.
3. Affect whether they maintain interest in the position until a job offer is
extended.
4. Influence whether a job offer is accepted. [7]
To help organizations think through effective employee recruitment, James
Breaugh, Therese Macan, and Dana Grambow proposed a simple five-step
model for understanding recruitment in modern organizations, which can be seen
in Figure 10.1. [8]
Figure 10.1 Model of Employee Recruitment
Recruitment Objectives
The first stage of recruiting new employees consists of determining the basic
objectives for the new employee. Are you creating a brand-new position or
attempting to refill a position because of voluntary or involuntary turnover? At
this stage in the recruitment process, you need to truly brainstorm everything
from the type of applicant you’re looking for (e.g., educational background, job
experience, skill set) to the role this person will actually play within the
organization itself. The more specific you can be at this point in the recruitment
process, the easier it will be to weed out eventual applicants who simply do not
meet the basic objectives of the organization.
Recruitment Strategy
The next stage in recruitment involves thinking through the specific strategies
that the organization plans to employ to recruit potential applicants. If you look
at Figure 10.1, you’ll notice that the questions asked during this phase primarily
deal with determining how you will find your applicant pool and then how you
will craft specific messages targeted at potential applicants that will entice them
to apply. First, you need to know what type of applicant you need to target. For
example, are you looking for someone who has just a high-school education, or
are you looking for someone who has an MBA and twenty-plus years of
experience running nonprofit organizations? You’ll notice that this part of the
recruitment strategy stems directly out of recruitment objectives.
Second, you need to think about the organization’s messaging strategy. The
messaging strategy includes everything from crafting specific messages to
determining the best possible outlets for these messages. For entry-level,
minimum-wage applicants, you may create simple, straightforward descriptions
of the job and post them on local job websites or in the newspaper. When
attempting to hire a senior-level executive, you may work with a consultant
known as an external corporate recruiter during this process. An external
corporate recruiter is an individual (or group of individuals) with specific
expertise in searching for and recruiting potential job applicants. Because
corporate recruiters have specific expertise in the recruitment process, they can
help an organization in a number of specific ways. First, they can help an
organization decrease the amount of time that it takes to search for and
eventually hire a new employee (commonly referred to as the time to hire).
External corporate recruiters often specialize in specific industries or types of
positions, so they already have a network of potential applicants or know how to
target potential applicants. Second, they can increase the quality and quantity of
the candidate pool. Next, they can help an organization keep its recruiting costs
down because of the focused nature of the job search itself. Lastly, they can
ensure that all governmental regulations associated with recruitment and hiring
are met. Although most human resource personnel can also accomplish this
function, sometimes a second pair of eyes not related to the organization can be
important to ensure compliance with relevant laws and regulations.
Recruitment Activities
Once you’ve determined your objectives and your strategy, it’s time to actually
let the rubber hit the road and start recruiting potential applicants. At this point,
you’re basically involved in three specific activities. First, you’re engaged in the
day-to-day process of searching for and recruiting candidates. This stage can
involve everything from placing advertisements on a job website to attending
career fairs at a local college or university.
Next, you need to think through all the internal resources that will be involved in
the recruitment process. Who will create job ads? How much time do you have
devoted to recruitment? Who is going to oversee the entire recruitment project?
Recruitment should have a central project manager who oversees the entire
process. If you have too many different people attempting to run your
recruitment, you will run into serious problems. As such, it’s important to have a
specific individual who is ultimately in charge of the recruitment process to
ensure all the small steps are completed accurately and in a timely fashion.
Lastly, you’re crafting the specific messages you want potential applicants to see
and/or hear. Whether you’re creating a simple call for applicants in a local
newspaper or an online video to entice applicants, a lot of time is involved in the
crafting of effective messages targeted to applicants. These messages should be
both informative (explaining the job and the types of applicants sought) and
persuasive (enticing people to apply). In addition to creating the messages, you
need to determine where these messages will ultimately be seen or heard by the
types of applicants you desire. Although your strategy for this process was
determined in the previous step, at this phase of the process, you need to
implement and adjust your targeted message outlets as necessary.
Applicant Interview
Once you have started to receive applications for the position, it’s time to start
going through the stack of potential employees. Before you actually get to the
interview step, you need to systematically go through the applications and
determine which ones are viable candidates and which ones simply are not.
There are many people who apply to any and every job whether or not they have
the background or skills necessary to complete the job. The first step in
screening out individuals is to have a standard set of objectives for determining
the qualifications of the applicant. By employing this objective standard, you can
generally weed through a giant portion of the applicants and easily determine the
ones you may want to interview.
For low-level or entry-level positions, the recruitment process is generally
straightforward and involves less expense on the part of the organization. These
interviews may simply take place within the organization on the day someone
fills out an application if a manager is readily available.
On the other hand, when an organization is recruiting a professional position or
senior-level executive, there may be a whole interview process in place. An
organization can utilize a number of different types of interviews. Some
organizations employ telephone interviews first to determine which applicants
should be brought to the organization for a face-to-face interview. Today, it’s
also common to do this first round of interviews using videoconferencing
software such as Skype. The goal of this first set of interviews is to help the
recruiters focus their recruitment efforts on a handful of potential applicants they
may wish to interview on the organization’s campus. After the telephone
interviews, the recruitment team may finalize their list of applicants and either
bring them directly to the organization for an interview or employ an off-campus
face-to-face interview.
An off-campus face-to-face interview (sometimes called a flyover interview)
occurs when an organization arranges to use an off-site location (typically in or
near an airport) to conduct a round of interviews. In essence, interviewees are
flown to the airport and then taken to a conference room within the airport or
near the airport for a face-to-face interview with the recruitment team. Once the
interview is over, the applicant is put back on her or his plane and sent home.
Many organizations use this strategy when recruiting senior-level executives
because there is nothing quite like a face-to-face interview, and these can be
cheaper than an on-campus face-to-face interview.
An on-campus face-to-face interview occurs when an organization brings the
individual to the organization for an interview. On-campus face-to-face
interviews can last from a half-day interview to a multiday interview, depending
on the type of hire an organization is attempting. The more senior the position,
the more likely the organization will involve an extended interview process in an
attempt to gain a more thorough understanding of the possible fit of the
applicant. These interviews can be very expensive because they involve the costs
of transportation, housing, food, and entertainment during the interview.
These are not the only types of interviews that organizations can employ, but
they are different enough to demonstrate the array of possible choices an
organization has for conducting an interview. As you can see from the earlier
descriptions, the interview process can be as cheap as the time lost while a
manager conducts an on-the-spot interview to one that could cost more than
$100,000. For this reason, interviews should be conducted strategically, looking
for the various factors discussed in Figure 10.1.
Recruitment Results
The final stage of recruitment examines the results of the recruitment process
itself. Once an applicant has signed a contract and joined your organization, it’s
always a smart idea to objectively analyze how recruitment went in an effort to
improve the process for future hires. Ultimately, when evaluating the results of
your recruitment, you should look at both the short-term and long-term results.
The short-term results include determining if the first four stages of recruitment
were effective (objectives, strategy, activities, and interviews). The long-term
results focus on whether or not a new employee meets the organization’s
expectations, which could lead to either voluntary or involuntary turnover.
Realistic Job Previews
One of the major problems occurring posthiring involves the expectations of the
new employee. Social psychological research has demonstrated that when an
individual’s expectations are not met, the individual will experience dissonance,
leading to a disliking of the event itself. [9] Paula Popovich and John Wanous
explain that dissatisfaction is likely to occur when three conditions are present:
1. The expectation is strongly believed in.
2. The expectation concerns something of high personal value.
3. The individual feels personally responsible for the mistaken expectation
(i.e., “I should have known” versus “nobody’s perfect”). [10]
Whether one looks at hiring an individual from the organization’s perspective or
the new employee’s perspective, recruitment and hiring clearly meet all three of
these conditions. Figure 10.2 illustrates the problems associated with traditional
recruiting strategies and how they lead to problems with expectations. First,
organizations historically have done their best to make their organization look
very positive and downplay or simply avoid any of the downsides of a particular
job. Unfortunately, these traditional organizational recruitment strategies lead to
inflated expectations on the part of a new hire. When that new hire comes face to
face with the reality of working within an organization, he or she quickly
becomes disillusioned because initial expectations are not being met. With
unmet expectations, the new employee will eventually become dissatisfied with
her or his job. With employee dissatisfaction, two possible paths emerge, neither
of them beneficial for the organization. First, a dissatisfied employee may
decrease her or his commitment to the organization and simply start looking for
a new job (voluntary turnover). Second, a dissatisfied employee’s productivity
level may drop, causing the organization to become dissatisfied with the
employee, which will lead to the employee’s firing (involuntary turnover). Of
course, with either voluntary or involuntary turnover, the organization will be
faced with recruiting a new employee and the cycle starts again.
Figure 10.2 Problems with Traditional Organizational Recruitment
In addition to the organization misrepresenting who it is and how it functions,
individual applicants can also misrepresent themselves. In Figure 10.3, we see
what happens when an individual applicant misrepresents her or his
qualifications. In this case, the organization will be dissatisfied because the new
hire cannot perform in the fashion the applicant said he or she could. As the
organization’s expectations are unmet, the organization becomes dissatisfied,
which will eventually lead to the individual employee’s firing (involuntary
turnover).
Figure 10.3 Misrepresentation of Qualifications
A second type of misrepresentation that can occur during the application process
involves an individual employee’s cultural preferences. For example, maybe an
individual applicant says he or she is all about teamwork during the interview,
but in reality that applicant is a loner and prefers to work on projects alone. If
this applicant is hired with the expectation that he or she will work on a number
of teams, there will be unmet expectations on the part of the organization if the
new employee quickly shows no interest in teamwork. Furthermore, this new
employee will experience unmet needs and desires for autonomy if he or she is
constantly being forced to engage in teamwork. In the case of the organization’s
unmet experiences, the organization will become dissatisfied, which will
eventually lead to the organization firing the new employee. In the case of the
individual employee, he or she will become dissatisfied with all the pressure for
teamwork and eventually look for another job that more accurately suits her or
his cultural preferences.
Figure 10.4 Misrepresentation of Cultural Preferences
Although organizations can never completely prevent applicant
misrepresentations, they can build in processes to prevent the negative outcomes
associated with traditional recruitment processes. The basic premise of the
realistic job preview is that new employees often have inaccurate perceptions
about the positions for which they are applying. These expectations, as discussed
earlier, lead to dissatisfaction on either the employee’s part or the organization’s
part. To alleviate these inflated expectations, “it has been suggested that an
employer should provide recruits with candid information concerning a job
opening (i.e., information about both positive and negative job and
organizational attributes).” [11] Figure 10.5 illustrates why realistic job previews
are effective. First, when a realistic job preview is given to an applicant, the
applicant will have more realistic expectations when he or she decides to accept
a job offer. As that new employee enters the organization, he or she will have
more realistic expectations about the organizational culture and the day-to-day
work that is expected. When an individual has realistic expectations, it’s much
easier for these expectations to be met, which will lead to increased employee
satisfaction and motivation. With increased employee satisfaction and
motivation, your new employee will demonstrate greater organizational
commitment and overall productivity. Ultimately, the goal of this process is to
ensure that a new hire is less likely to be fired or quit.
To help us further understand the nature of realistic job previews, we are going
to focus on three important aspects of this process. First, we will examine the
theoretical basis for why realistic job previews work. Second, we’ll examine the
importance of communication in the process of realistic job previews. Lastly,
we’ll examine the research related to the outcomes of realistic job previews and
their overall effectiveness.
Figure 10.5 Realistic Job Preview Theory
Two Theories for Realistic Job Previews
By this point, you may be wondering why realistic job previews (RJPs) are an
effective tool when hiring new employees. Research has indicated two
theoretical possibilities for why RJPs work.
Self-Selection Theory
The first theory explaining the effectiveness of realistic job previews is called
the self-selection theory. In essence, self-selection theory argues that when
applicants are faced with a realistic portrayal of an organization and what it
would be like to work within an organization, the employee will have a more
accurate understanding and more realistic expectations. [12] As such, when an
applicant decides to accept a job offer, he or she is knowingly opting to work
within that organization (flaws included). In essence, people who feel that there
is a good person-organization fit will self-select into the organization.
Conversely, individuals who do not see the organization as a good person-
organization fit will knowingly self-select out of working within that
organization. Basically, self-selection theory posits that the more information
someone has, the more accurately he or she can decide if an individual
organization is somewhere he or she wants to work.
Inoculation Theory
The second major theoretical position researchers have posed for the
effectiveness of RJPs is called inoculation theory. William J. McGuire originally
created inoculation theory to explain how attitudes and beliefs are altered during
persuasion attempts. [13] In the world of medicine, we often inoculate people
using weakened strains of a virus and injecting them into an individual (called a
vaccine). The weakened virus ultimately helps a host build up immunity to the
virus itself. In the world of new employee hiring, the RJP functions as a vaccine,
which ultimately prepares a new hire for the realities of working within the
organization and her or his job duties. In essence, by presenting an RJP, an
employer can help prepare a new hire in incremental steps for the day-to-day life
the new hire will experience within the organization, so by the time the new hire
starts the job, he or she has already built up “immunity.”
Communication and Realistic Job Previews
The realistic job-preview process is inherently a communicative one. One of the
most important questions that should be asked is how the message will be
presented. This message strategizing includes when the message will be
presented, who will present the message, and the medium utilized. A number of
different options are available: brochures, audiovisual, human-resource
personnel, future coworkers, and virtual reality.
The first option involves using a brochure or new employee manual that
realistically describes what it is like to work for the organization. This
brochure/manual should include details in a balanced fashion to ensure that the
new employee is getting an accurate picture of what life would be like working
within the organization. Unfortunately, brochures tend to be detached and are
often either not read thoroughly or not read at all.
The second option that many organizations utilize for delivering an RJP is some
form of audiovisual RJP. The most common audiovisual RJP is the video. Table
10.2 contains a list of just a handful of video RJPs available on the Internet.
Table 10.2 Realistic Job Preview Videos
TeleTech https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_jh1goGjoRE
Federal Air Marshals http://www.realisticjobpreview.net/fams/
Transportation Security Administration (TSA) http://www.realisticjobpreview.net/tsa_final.htm
Boeing https://www.youtube.com/watch?
v=AoKbBx7DmZQ
Comcast Billing Office https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=t9oCkFH6blE
Sears Sales Consultant http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=NFUxEkX0hHE
Treatment Plant Equipment Operator, Austin,
Texas http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=hoPeWWmZoCA
Direct Support Agent http://rtc.umn.edu/rtcmedia/directsupport/
OwensCorning Homw Experts http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Lp4dZj0ZOF8
When you look at the various RJPs presented in Table 10.2, you’ll see a wide
range of different types of jobs and different ways to present the information.
Some videos have high production values (the TSA videos) and make the work
look exciting; others include simple interviews with an employee who works for
the organization in a specific position (Comcast Account Representative). Early
research examining brochures and videos really didn’t find any differences
between the two mediums and their actual effectiveness. Admittedly, most of the
research on audiovisual techniques and RJPs occurred in the late 1970s and early
1980s.
The third option involves using the hiring personnel to describe the organization
and the position. Although the hiring personnel may be great for describing the
organization, they may not have the most accurate or up-to-date knowledge of
what work life is like in every department. Research conducted by Alan Saks
and Steven Cronshaw found that an RJP presented orally by an interviewer was
better than a written RJP when predicting an individual’s attitude about the job
and accepting a job offer. Furthermore, individuals who received the oral RJP
found the organization to be more honest as a whole. [14]
Fourth, an organization could utilize an informal meeting with a current
employee who works within the division the new hire will work in. No one has a
clearer perception of work life than someone actually involved in the same type
of work the applicant will be required to do. Research conducted by Stephen
Colarelli investigated using an incumbent bank teller to deliver an RJP during
the hiring process as compared to a written RJP or no RJP at all. [15] The
research found that individuals who received the RJP from an incumbent bank
teller were less likely to have quit the job after two or three months. In fact,
Colarelli’s research found no difference in turnover rates between those who
received the brochure and those who didn’t receive an RJP at all.
Lastly, many organizations actually utilize some form of virtual-reality
simulation for delivering RJPs. In essence, the virtual-reality simulation is
designed to present job applicants with scenarios that would resemble the actual
working conditions faced in a day-to-day working environment. These types of
simulations may be great for jobs that are highly routinized (employees do the
same thing day in and day out) but not so great for jobs that are more chaotic.
Not only can these interactive simulations provide the applicant with an RJP, but
the simulations can be created in a fashion that demonstrates to the organization
whether or not the applicant would be a good fit as well. Although applicants
indicate that they appreciate the interactive quality of the simulations when
determining whether to work somewhere, [16] there really is no outcome data on
the actual effectiveness of this new method.
Outcomes of Realistic Job Previews
Ultimately, the big question for most organizations relates to the effectiveness of
realistic job previews in the prevention of voluntary and involuntary turnover. A
number of research studies have attempted to determine whether a realistic job
preview works in the manner discussed in Figure 10.5. Jean Phillips compiled
the research results from forty different studies examining realistic job previews
and found that RJPs did lead to lower initial expectations and lower levels of
both voluntary and involuntary turnover. [17] However, the statistical
relationships between RJPs and the outcome variables wasn’t overwhelmingly
strong. For this reason, David Earnest, David Allen, and Ronald Landis have
cautioned that while RJPs are definitely effective, the actual return on their
investment for an organization may not be high enough to warrant their
utilization within a modern organization. [18] In their study of fifty-two different
research studies examining realistic job previews, the researchers found that an
RJP increased new employee perceptions of organizational honesty, which in
turn actually impacted voluntary turnover. In essence, the researchers argued that
an “RJP signals something about unobservable organizational characteristics
such as organizational honesty, organizational support, and care for
employees.” [19] Although the overall outcomes for RJPs may not be the greatest
organizational investment, they do help to moderately decrease both voluntary
and involuntary turnover, so investing moderate amounts of organizational
resources may still be worth the investment.
KEY TAKEAWAY
The costs of recruiting can be quite extensive for organizations.
Depending on the complexity of the job, costs can range from a
few thousand dollars to hundreds of thousands of dollars to recruit
a new employee, so effective recruitment is fiscally important for
organizations.
Breaugh, Macan, and Grambow created a five-stage model for
explaining effective employee recruitment. Stage 1, recruitment
objectives, involves determining the basic objectives for a new
position. Stage 2, recruitment strategy, involves thinking through
the most effective practices for locating and recruiting potential
employees. Stage 3, recruitment activities, involves the day-to-
day process for recruiting potential applicants, allocating
resources for recruitment, and crafting recruitment messages.
Stage 4, applicant interview, involves interviewing potential
applicants in an effort to determine person-organization fit. Lastly,
stage 5, recruitment results, involves examining the effectiveness
of the organization’s overall recruitment strategy post hire.
Traditional recruitment practices have led to a combination of
unmet expectations on the part of both employees and
organizations. When employees have unmet expectations, their
productivity and commitment will diminish, which could lead to
either voluntary or involuntary turnover. When the organization’s
expectations are not met, the organization will be disgruntled with
the new employee, which will lead to involuntary turnover.
The goal of a realistic job preview is to provide potential
applicants a complete picture of both the day-to-day work the
applicant will be tasked with and an explanation of the
organization’s culture. The goal of a realistic job preview is to
ensure that applicants have a complete picture of the working
environment, which will lead to an increase in met expectations
for both the new employee and the organization.
Although there are a number of methods one can utilize to
present a realistic job preview (e.g., written documents, videos,
hiring personnel, virtual reality), research generally supports that
the most effective tool involves a conversation with a current
employee who occupies the same position.
Realistic job previews have been shown to have many beneficial
outcomes for organizations. First, realistic job previews lead to
more accurate new employee expectations. Second, realistic job
previews decrease both voluntary and involuntary turnover. Lastly,
realistic job previews increase new hires’ beliefs that an
External Corporate Recruiter:
organization is honest, which in turn leads to decreased levels of
voluntary and involuntary turnover.
EXERCISES
1. You are in the process of hiring a new employee. You believe that
a realistic job preview would be very important during the hiring
process, but your boss doesn’t understand its importance. How
would you go about framing your argument in terms of a realistic
job preview’s financial impact on your organization?
2. Table 10.2 provides a wide range of realistic job preview videos.
Select one of the videos and then answer the following questions.
Do you think the realistic job preview is effective? Why or why
not? How would you go about making this video more effective for
new employees?
3. You’ve been asked to sit down with a new employee who is taking
over your current job (or most recent job). What information do
you think would be most important to impart to this person in a
realistic job preview? Why do you think that information is the
most important? Do you think your supervisors would agree with
your assessment of the position? Why or why not?
KEY TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
An individual (or group of individuals)
Off-Campus Face-To-Face Interview:
On-Campus Face-To-Face Interview:
Time To Hire:
who have specific expertise in searching for and recruiting potential job applicants.
When an organization arranges to have an off-site location (typically in or near an airport) to conduct a round of interviews.
When an organization brings the individual to the organization for an interview.
The amount of time that it takes to search for and hire a new employee.
[1] Branham, L. (2000). Keeping the people who keep you in business:
24 ways to hang on to your most valuable talent. New York, NY:
AMACOM.
[2] Davidson, M. C. G., Timo, N., & Wang, Y. (2010). How much does
labour turnover cost? A case study of Australian four- and five-star hotels.
International Journal of Contemporary Hospitality Management, 22, 451–
466. doi: 10.1108/09596111011042686
[3] Hinkin, T. R., & Tracey, J. B. (2000). The cost of turnover: Putting a
price on the learning curve. Cornell Hotel & Restaurant Administration
Quarterly, 41, 14–21. doi: 10.1177/001088040004100313
[4] Sommer, R. D. (2000). Retaining intellectual capital in the 21st
century. Society of Human Resource Management [White paper].
Alexandria, VA: SHRM.
[5] Texas Center for Educational Research. (2000, October). The cost of
teacher turnover: Report prepared for the Texas State Board for Educator
Certification. Austin: Texas Center for Educational Research.
[6] Louisiana Department of State Civil Service. (2011, January 13).
Report on turnover rates for non-classified employees. Retrieved from
http://senate.legis.state.la.us/streamline/Topics/2011/Act 879 Turnover
Report AMENDED Jan 13 2011.pdf
[7] Breaugh, J. A. (2008). Employee recruitment, current knowledge and
important areas for future research. Human Resource Management
Review, 18, 103–118, pp. 103–104. doi: 10.1016/j.hrmr:2008.07.003\
[8] Breaugh, J. A., Macan, T. H., & Grambow, D. M. (2008). Employee
recruitment: Current knowledge and directions for future research. In G.
P. Hodgkinson & J. K. Ford (Eds.), International review of industrial and
organizational psychology (vol. 23, pp. 45−82). New York, NY: Wiley.
[9] Aronson, E., & Carlsmith, J. M. (1962). Performance expectancy as a
determinant of actual performance. Journal of Abnormal and Social
Psychology, 65, 178–182.
[10] Popovich, P., & Wanous, J. P. (1982). The realistic job preview as a
persuasive communication. Academy of Management Review, 7, 570–
578, p. 571.
[11] Breaugh, J. A. (2008). Employee recruitment, current knowledge and
important areas for future research. Human Resource Management
Review, 18, 103–118, p. 106. doi: 10.1016/j.hrmr:2008.07.003
[12] Wanous, J. P. (1980). Organizational entry: Recruitment, selection,
and socialization of newcomers. Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley.
[13] McGuire, W. J. (1961). The effectiveness of supportive and
refutational defenses in immunizing defenses. Sociometry, 24, 184–197.
[14] Saks, A. M., & Cronshaw, S. F. (1990). A process investigation of
realistic job previews: Mediating variables and channels of
communication. Journal of Organizational Behavior, 11, 221–236.
[15] Colarelli, S. M. (1984). Methods of communication and mediating
processes in realistic job previews. Journal of Applied Psychology, 69,
633-642.
[16] Murphy, J. P. (2012, April 13). Show, don’t tell—Job tryouts go virtual
[Weblog post]. Retrieved from http://www.shakercg.com/blog/tag/realistic-
job-preview.
[17] Phillips, J. M. (1998). Effects of realistic job previews on multiple
organizational outcomes: A meta-analysis. Academy of Management
Journal, 41, 673–690.
[18] Earnest, D. R., Allen, D. G., & Landis, R. S. (2011). Mechanisms
linking realistic job previews with turnover: A meta-analytic path analysis.
Personnel Psychology, 64, 865–896.
[19] Earnest, D. R., Allen, D. G., & Landis, R. S. (2011). Mechanisms
linking realistic job previews with turnover: A meta-analytic path analysis.
Personnel Psychology, 64, 865–896, p. 888.
10.2 Socializing
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
1. Differentiate among the three stages of socialization discussed by
Frederic Jablin.
2. Differentiate between vocational and organizational anticipatory
socialization.
3. Explain Frederic Jablin’s three-step process for organizational
entry and assimilation.
4. Explain Alan Saks and Jamie Gruman’s socialization resources
theory.
5. List and describe the various tools organizations have for
onboarding.
6. Explain the relationship between communication and
organizational socialization.
© Thinkstock/iStock
Organizational socialization can be defined as the process an organization
utilizes to ensure that new members acquire necessary attitudes, behaviors,
knowledge, and skills to become productive organization members. In essence,
organizational socialization is a lifelong process that individuals go through from
childhood to retirement. [1] In this section, we examine the stages of
organizational socialization, best practices for organizational socialization, and
the importance of communication during socialization.
Stages of Organizational Socialization
To help us understand organizational socialization, we’re going to look at the
basic stages of organizational socialization originally discussed by Frederic
Jablin. [2] [3] Jablin proposed that organizational socialization can be broken into
three distinct parts: anticipatory socialization, organizational entry and
assimilation, and organizational disengagement/exit (Figure 10.6). To help us
understand socialization, we will explore the first two forms of socialization
(anticipatory and organizational entry/assimilation) in this section and
organizational disengagement/exit in the next section.
Figure 10.6 Organizational Socialization
Anticipatory Socialization
The first part of socialization is referred to as anticipatory socialization, or the
period before an individual actually joins an organization. To help us understand
anticipatory socialization, let’s examine the two types of anticipatory
socialization discussed by Frederic Jablin: vocational and organizational
socialization. [4]
Vocational Anticipatory Socialization
Vocational anticipatory socialization refers to the process an individual
undertakes as he or she selects a specific job or career. Pretty much from the
moment you understand the world around you, you start being socialized into the
world of work. Jablin explained that five influential groups affect our role
anticipatory socialization: family, media, peers, education, and previous
organizational experience.
The first form of vocational anticipatory socialization comes from our families.
Think back to your early childhood. You may have memories of your parents
sitting around the dinner table sharing stories of their workdays. These stories
from our early childhood influence us largely later in life when it comes to how
we perceive work. The stories we hear from our parents actually influence how
we understand what it means to work and how we perceive work life.
Furthermore, our families actually instill in us attitudes, behaviors, beliefs, and
values about work. Even something as simple as the chores you were required to
complete growing up informed your understanding of what it meant to work.
Later in life, your family encourages you academically and even helps to direct
you toward specific occupations. Often, this direction is intentional (e.g., your
mother wants you to be a physician), but this direction can be unintentional as
well (e.g., parents disparage their own line of work or specific occupations).
Overall, our families have a great deal of influence on our perceptions of work
and different occupations.
The second-most pervasive socializer of work today is probably the media. From
the earliest moments most American children can sit up, they are consuming one
form of media or another. Even children’s television shows like Sesame Street,
Thomas and Friends, and Bill Nye the Science Guy illustrate various
occupations, which can have a profound effect on how children view the world
of work. Children’s books also can have a direct impact on how people come to
understand what work is. The reality is children are greatly influenced by the
media, so it should be no surprise that these early impressions of what it means
to work learned through the media impact our understanding of the work world.
Obviously, as we grow older, we come to realize that these portrayals are often
inaccurate, but this early learning still sticks with us and influences our decisions
about future jobs and careers. However, Susan Barber warns us that these
portrayals can also lead to unrealistic expectations of what the work world really
looks like. [5] Too often, television shows depict high-income jobs (e.g., lawyers,
doctors, business executives, pop stars), while more blue-collar jobs are left
completely out of the work landscape on television (e.g., carpenters, electricians,
plumbers). Furthermore, there is a general tendency in a lot of media portrayals
to depict occupations where the income earners are making considerably more
money than the average family in the United States. These inflated expectations
often persist into the college years.
The third form of vocational anticipatory socialization comes from our
immediate peer group. As we all know, peer influence is a very important part of
growing up and continues to be important into adulthood. In a fashion similar to
how we learn from our families, our peers influence our attitudes, behaviors,
beliefs, and values about work. Our peer groups growing up help reiterate what
types of occupations are deemed desirable and which ones should be avoided.
Furthermore, we also learn about the world of work by listening to our peers’
stories of their own work experience or the experiences of our peers’ families
and friends. These stories help to further solidify our perceptions about the world
of work beyond that of our immediate family members.
The fourth form of vocational anticipatory socialization comes from our
education. Not surprisingly, education is another very important factor to
consider when looking at the landscape of how people are socialized. In fact, our
educational system (just like the media) tends to overemphasize certain types of
occupations. In an interesting study, Frederic Jablin [6] found that classroom
activities, discussions, and textbooks tended to overemphasize specific
occupations while downplaying other occupations. In addition to this subversive
socialization, schools often expect students to write research reports or give oral
presentations about possible careers. Furthermore, in public education there does
tend to be an overemphasis on the importance of attaining a college degree. [7] If
you look at the United States Census data from 2010, a very interesting picture
emerges. [8] In the United States, 19.4 percent of the population has a bachelor’s
degree and an additional 10.5 percent has an advanced degree, so rough 30
percent of the population has some form of advanced education past an
associate’s degree. When one analyzes the data, people with just a bachelor’s
degree make an average of $17,000 per year more than those with an associate’s
degree (9.1 percent of the US population) and $36,464 more on average than
those who do not have a high school diploma (12.9 percent of the US
population). However, our educational system is clearly designed to streamline
students toward those occupations that involve advanced degrees that will not be
attained by 70 percent of the actual population.
The final form of vocational anticipatory socialization comes from previous
organizational experiences we’ve had personally. Whether you’ve worked as a
cashier at a local grocery store, helped run your parents’ farm, or were just an
active member of your local church growing up, we all have previous
organizational experience that influences how we view the nature of
organizations. Whether it was actual work experience or voluntary associations
within the context of an organization, these experiences form our perceptions of
how organizations function and what it means to work. Any organizational
experience helps you form attitudes, behaviors, beliefs, and values about work.
One of the reasons internships are often pushed in higher education today is to
ensure that students not only get a taste of an occupation that may interest them,
but the internship experience also helps students develop interpersonal skills in
the workplace while developing a work ethic that will become very important as
the student enters the job market.
Organizational Anticipatory Socialization
In addition to vocational socialization, there is a second form of anticipatory
socialization that needs to be addressed: organizational anticipatory
socialization. [9] Organizational anticipatory socialization is the process an
individual goes through as he or she attempts to find an organization to join.
According to Michael Kramer, we can break the organizational anticipatory
socialization into two basic processes: (1) recruiting and reconnaissance and (2)
selection. [10]
The recruiting and reconnaissance process and the selection process involve all
the steps discussed previously in Figure 10.1. When we look at this process from
the perspective of the applicant, we see that applicants have to find job
advertisements or be approached by corporate recruiters. The applicant needs to
ascertain whether the job description is a good fit for her or his educational
background, skill set, and cultural preferences. During the organizational
anticipatory socialization stage, both the applicant and the organization are
making determinations of person-organization fit.
Related Research
The Mud, the Blood, and the Beer Guys: Organizational Osmosis in Blue-
Collar Work Groups
By Melissa K. Gibson and Michael J. Papa (2000) [11]
The notion of a “blue-collar” job in the United States is one that generally
involves physical labor and is paid hourly. Gibson and Papa were interested
in the notion of the “blue-collar” worker. The researchers started by
explaining how the population of blue-collar workers in the United States is
lower today than it has been in the past. Ultimately, the researchers were
interested in answering two specific research questions:
RQ1: How does communication with referential others (individuals we look
to in an effort to see how one should behave and act in the workplace) during
the assimilation process influence an employee’s work experiences?
RQ2: To what degree do concertive control practices (organizational control,
usually from management, that influences and informs how workers should
act and interact at work) influence worker productivity and efficiency in blue-
collar work groups?
To answer these two research questions, the researchers interviewed
employees at a medium-sized manufacturing facility they dubbed Industry
International. The researchers interviewed fifty-one workers, and the average
worker had worked at the facility for eighteen years. From the beginning, the
researchers came to find out that forty-two of the participants identified one
of their parents as integral in instilling their current work ethic. In fact, two-
thirds of the participants in the study had other family members working for
the organization, and some had up to ten other family members working
there. Some workers felt that working for the manufacturing facility was an
expectation and not really a choice. Overall, the researchers found that the
majority of the workers came from families who had worked at the facility,
and all workers had come from blue-collar backgrounds. “Through
communication encounters with family, friends, and neighbors, these
individuals learned the rites, rituals, values, beliefs, and heroes that comprise
the culture of Industry International, even before entering the organization.” [12] The researchers termed this effortless indoctrination and socialization into
the organization’s culture and practices organizational osmosis.
As for concertive control, the researchers found that the organization
members were perfectly fine with engaging in behaviors that could be
detrimental to their health in an effort to make Industry International more
successful. To help new members (especially those with little previous
socialization), senior members of the organization take on mentoring roles
and often providing counseling in an effort to guide a new member toward
appropriate organizational beliefs, practices, and values. If these counseling
sessions prove ineffective, stronger communication (often in the form of a
veiled threat) would be used. In essence, these senior organization members
are assimilating new organization members in an effort to ensure new
members adhere to beliefs, practices, and values that are most beneficial to
the organization itself and not to its workers as individuals.
Organizational Entry and Assimilation
The second major step in organizational socialization involves the entry and
assimilation of new organization members. Frederic Jablin proposed a three-step
process when attempting to understand organizational entry and assimilation:
preentry, entry, and metamorphosis. [13]
Preentry
The first step in organizational entry is referred to as preentry, or the period of
time after someone has been asked to join an organization but before he or she is
actually working within the organization. Jablin pointed out three important
issues that arise during the preentry stage. First, one must consider the types of
messages a new employee receives from the organization prior to starting work.
These messages could include realistic job previews or “surprises.” In this
context, there could be either negative surprises (messages that are contradictory
to what was discussed in the hiring process: e.g., work schedule, benefits,
organizational expectations) or positive surprises (messages that are pleasant and
demonstrate positive aspects of working within the organization: e.g.,
expressions of caring, honesty, organizational justice).
Second, new employees should be aware of how current organization members
view the new employee. The communicative strategies involved during this
period generally involve impression management. Impression management is
the process (either conscious or unconscious) in which an individual deliberately
attempts to influence the perceptions and opinions of others. In this case, new
organization members attempt to form impressions about who they are as people
and workers in the minds of new coworkers and supervisors. This could involve
touting one’s previous work successes in an effort to bolster one’s credibility or
purposefully self-handicapping (e.g., “I’m a little weak when it comes to using a
spreadsheet”) in an effort to downplay organizational expectations.
Lastly, Jablin points out that the preentry period is also important to current
organization members who “converse about and make sense of new hires during
this period, and in particular how they socially construct or create a reputation
for newcomers in everyday conversations.” [14] In essence, once someone is
hired, there is a period of time when current organization members attempt to
create an image about the new hire. This image includes both how this new hire
will fit within the current structure of the organization and the new hire’s
reputation. The reality is that people in an organization will talk about new hires
in an effort to reduce some of the uncertainty that is bound to come with a new
organization member. Unfortunately, the reputations that are generated could
easily inflate the new hire’s skills, making it harder for the new hire to actually
meet the unrealistic expectations created. In other words, it’s always important to
attempt to get the pulse of how organization members view you when you first
start the job in an effort to correct any misconceptions.
Entry
The second stage of organizational entry and assimilation involves the actual
process of entering the organization as a new member. The goal during the entry
period is to help new members assimilate themselves within the organizational
culture. According to Jablin, organizational assimilation involves the process an
individual goes through as he or she is acclimating herself or himself within an
organization’s culture. [15] Ultimately, the entry period involves two interrelated
processes: intentional socialization efforts and individualization. [16]
First, during the entry period, organizations attempt to help new employees
understand the organization’s culture and the work expectations for the new
employee. Often, this process is formal and involves some kind of new
employee training or probationary period while the new employee “learns the
ropes.” The process includes helping employees understand both the rules and
norms of the organization. The rules of an organization are the explicit dictates
that govern employee behavior within the organization. For example, maybe
there is a formal dress policy. One of our coauthors worked for a hospital with
very strict dress policies. One of the policies dictated the necessity of closed-toe
shoes (no sandals or flip-flops). Another policy spelled out what happened when
paperwork was not submitted on time. Norms, on the other hand, involve the
informal expectations related to how new employees should behave. Norms are
not formal policies, but they dictate how people behave in much the same way.
For example, maybe Monday through Thursday everyone is expected to wear a
business suit, but there is a norm that people are allowed to dress in business
casual clothes on Friday. This allowance for casualness on Fridays may not be
expressly written anywhere in the formal employee manual (a.k.a., a rule), but it
may be very much the norm of how people behave within the organization.
In addition to becoming acclimated to the organization, new employees often
attempt to negotiate the new work environment to better fit their individual
attitudes, skills, and cultural values. One of our coauthors is very much not a
morning person. When he entered into his latest job, one of the things he
negotiated was not teaching classes before noon. Thankfully, his organization
was flexible and allowed for this individualization of the job to better meet his
preferences for a teaching schedule. However, individualization can become
very problematic if the new hire attempts to morph into something he or she was
not hired for. Imagine an organization hires a new public relations expert only to
discover that the person really is more interested in marketing than public
relations. Although these may be related industries within the organization,
having someone become something they were not hired to be will quickly lead
to organizational dissatisfaction.
One key interaction during this phase and the next phase of assimilation can be a
close mentoring relationship or a leader-member exchange relationship. When a
new organization member has the opportunity to work closely with an individual
in a senior leadership position, he or she can learn more about the ins and outs of
organizational life much faster than those who are forced to do it on their own.
Before we can progress further, we must also make it perfectly clear that
organizational assimilation is not the same as creating identical robots within the
organization. In fact, allowing organization members to find their own
productive and creative paths through an organization can often be very
beneficial to the employee and the organization. [17] One area that can be
especially important to recognize in the assimilation process involves the
diversity of new organization members. Historically, there has been precedent in
corporate America that new members assimilate to a white, heterosexist,
puritanical, male-centric entity. As more and more organization members are not
falling into those categories, organizations need to rethink what it means to be an
organization member and allow for this new diversity of perspective. We deal
more with the issues of diversity and why having a diverse workforce is very
important in Chapter 8 and Chapter 13.
Metamorphosis
The final stage of organizational entry and assimilation involves the
metamorphosis stage. The concept of metamorphosis refers to the profound
change that occurs when someone goes from one stage to the next in life. In the
organizational world, metamorphosis occurs when an individual transforms
from the “new kid on the block” to an established member of the organization.
Obviously, metamorphosis does not happen quickly. Often, these transitions
happen rapidly (e.g., success of one’s first big project), but more often these
transitions happen over a long period. People wake up one day only to realize
that they truly are part of an organization and its culture. Furthermore, this
process is not a stagnant one. As people move in and out of new positions within
an organization, they may experience the process of entry and assimilation all
over again. For example, when someone goes from being a low-level employee
to midlevel management, the individual may still work within the same
organization, but her or his perception of the organization and its functions may
drastically alter with the new position.
Overall, entering into an organization and assimilating is not something that
happens overnight. Entering and assimilating is a process that takes time both for
new members and for those members who already exist within the organization.
So, you may be wondering, how can you make your socialization process
smoother when you enter into a new organization? Virginia Peck Richmond and
James McCroskey proposed ten communicative behaviors to avoid during
organizational entry (“Dead on Arrivals” sidebar). [18] Richmond and
McCroskey termed these behaviors DOA, or “dead on arrival,” to indicate that
those who engage in the behaviors generally will not have a very long life in an
organization if they communicate in this manner. We’ve updated their list for the
twenty-first century office place.
Dead on Arrivals
1. DOAs have an external work locus of control. You need to take
responsibility for your own growth, motivation, and performance
improvement.
2. DOAs think they know it all and have seen it all, so they refuse help
from others.
3. DOAs constantly talk about how things were better in their last job, or
how their old workplace did things differently (and better).
4. DOAs don’t want to spend much time in the PITs (Putting in Time), so
they think they deserve all the privileges and rewards long-term
members receive.
5. DOAs think organizational norms and rules are for other workers, not
themselves.
6. DOAs act like peacocks and just want to strut their stuff trying to get
attention.
7. DOAs love to ingratiate themselves into the rumor mill and quickly get
known for sticking their noses where they don’t belong.
8. DOAs tend to forget that there are people who have been around much
longer than have (e.g., good old boys/girls) and often get in their way,
step on their toes, or don’t approach them relationally.
9. DOAs tend to talk trash about their bosses and workplaces to their
coworkers, friends and family, or via social networking sites.
10. DOAs try to go outside the normal channels of communication.
11. DOAs stab their coworkers in the back or tack credit for someone else’s
work.
12. DOAs converse in a verbally or physically aggressive manner with their
coworkers.
13. DOAs make commitments they can’t keep or oversell their skills that
they don’t have.
14. DOAs over-share about their personal lives. Remember, work is work,
not your personal therapy session.
15. DOAs steal time from their workplaces by doing personal work,
making/taking personal phone calls, texting, and posting to social
networking sites while they should be working.
Methods of Socialization
Now that we’ve explored the basic steps involved in the organizational entry and
assimilation process, let’s explore a number of issues related to socialization in
the workplace. To help us explore methods of socialization, we’re first going to
explore socialization resources theory (SRT), then we’ll examine the toolbox that
most organizations use for assimilating new members, and lastly, we’ll discuss
the communication strategies that new employees and organizations use during
the assimilation process.
Socialization Resources Theory
Alan Saks and Jamie Gruman recently created an integrated approach for
understanding effective organizational socialization, which they deemed
socialization resources theory. [19] The basic premise of socialization resources
theory is that during a period of stress (e.g., entering a new organization), the
availability of resources to that individual will determine her or his ability to
cope with the stressful situation, which will in turn help the individual adjust and
successfully socialize within the organization. To help explain how effective
socialization works, Saks and Gruman developed a list of seventeen resource
dimensions that have been shown in both the academic and practitioner
literatures on organizational socialization to facilitate effective organizational
socialization. Table 10.3 provides an overview of the seventeen dimensions.
Table 10.3 Dimensions of Socialization Resources Theory
SRT
Dimensions Explanation
Prior to Entry
1. Anticipatory
Socialization
To what extent does an organization reach out to new members prior to organizational
entry in an effort to make them feel welcome?
Immediately after Entry
2. Formal
Orientation
What is the nature of a new employee’s orientation (e.g., length, delivery method
[face-to-face, online], what types of activities, and who is involved)?
3. Proactive
Encouragement
To what extent are new employees encouraged to actively meet new people, ask
questions, and develop organizational relationships?
4. Formal
Assistance Are new hires assigned formal mentors to help with organizational socialization?
Social-Capital Resources
5. Social Events To what extent does an organization hold formal social events (e.g., happy hours,
lunches, parties, etc.)?
6. Socialization
Agents To what extent do organizational insiders reach out to new hires informally?
7. Supervisor
Support Do supervisors reach out to new employees, demonstrating caring and support?
8. Relationship
Development
Does the organization provide the time and space for new hires to meet and develop
relationships with other organization members?
Work-Related Resources
9. Job Resources Do new hires have the necessary resources (equipment and space) to perform their
jobs?
10. Personal
Planning
To what extent does an organization clearly communicate work expectations to the
new hire?
11. Training Does the organization provide relevant programs to provide a new employee necessary
knowledge, skills, and attitudes to effectively perform her or his job?
12. Assignments Are initial assigned tasks relevant to why the person was hired, and do they provide
some level of challenge and reflect the expectations of future task assignments?
13. Information To what extent does an organization clearly communicate information about the
organization and its expectations?
14. Feedback Do supervisors provide timely and accurate feedback related to organizational values
and task performance?
15. Recognition
and Appreciation Are new employees praised for their effort and performance?
Follow-Up Period
16. Follow-Up Does the organization have processes in place to follow an employee’s progression
after a formal orientation period has ended?
17. Program
Evaluation
To what extent and how often does an organization track the effectiveness of its
organizational socialization programs?
The resources discussed in Table 10.3 are considered the best practices in
organizational socialization. As such, this list can be very effective when
diagnosing an organization’s current socialization practices. In essence, an
organizational consultant could utilize this list of resource dimensions in an
effort to determine where an organization succeeds and needs improvement in
the organization’s socialization efforts.
Tools for Assimilating New Members
As we’ve discussed, assimilating new organization members into the culture of
the organization is very important. Organizational scholars commonly refer to
the practice of assimilating new members as onboarding. Onboarding refers to
the process of welcoming and orienting new organization members to facilitate
their adjustment to the organization, its culture, and its practices. Klein and Polin
argue that socialization is what happens within a new employee, whereas
onboarding processes are put in place by management and human resource
departments to help facilitate socialization. [20] As such, over the years, a number
of different types of onboarding programs have been established. To help us
understand the possible tools that organizations can utilize to facilitate
onboarding, we are going to examine briefly orientation programs, training
programs, and formal mentoring programs.
Orientation Programs
The first common tool used by organizations during an onboarding program
involves some kind of formal orientation program. The general goal of an
orientation program is to facilitate the general understanding of the organization
and one’s expected duties within the organization. New employee orientation
programs generally last from three hours to multiple days depending on the
complexity of the organization and the duties expected of the new hire. Common
topics during orientation programs include the history of the organization, the
mission/vision of the organization, organizational rules, benefits of working for
the organization, and other topics deemed necessary by either the organization or
local, state, and federal government agencies.
Training Programs
The second way organizations go about onboarding new members is through
training programs. The goal of formal training programs during the onboarding
process is to facilitate the acquisition of the necessary skills and knowledge
needed complete one’s job. Although some training programs have broad
organizational appeal (sexual harassment training, workplace bullying training,
crisis management training, etc.), most of the training targeted toward
newcomers is position specific. For example, maybe your position requires you
to utilize Microsoft’s Project Management software. To help you prepare to
complete your training, your organization may send you to a workshop or
possibly get you a subscription to an online training program like Lynda.com or
TotalTraining.com. The goal of training programs is to help get new members up
to speed as fast as humanly possible.
Formal Mentoring
As discussed in Chapter 7, mentoring is the transfer of experience or knowledge
from a senior individual (the mentor) to a junior individual (the mentee or
protégé) in an effort to help the junior individual learn the ins and outs of
organizational life. To help with onboarding, many organizations establish
formal mentoring programs where new members are assigned a mentor upon
hiring who is supposed to help acclimate the new member to the organization.
Formal mentoring is only as successful as the mentors who participate in the
mentoring programs. If the mentors are too busy or unconcerned with the new
hires, then the formal mentoring program will not be overly effective. On the
other hand, if organizations take mentoring seriously and provide support and
training for potential mentors, formal mentoring programs can be very
successful. Notice this is not the same as the informal mentoring discussed in
Chapter 7.
Communication and Socialization
One of the most important parts of socialization (and onboarding) involves the
type, quantity, and quality of the communication sent and received by new
employees during the socialization process. Frederic Jablin explained that there
are four primary functions for communication during the socialization process:
information giving, information seeking, relationship development, and role
negotiation. [21]
Information Giving
The first function of communication during socialization involves information
giving. Information giving refers to the types of information a new employee
provides to coworkers and superiors during organizational entry. How much and
what one shares with others is extremely important during the initial period of a
new job. Some employees are hesitant to provide any personal information to
coworkers and supervisors until after they get to know them, but information
giving is one of the easiest ways to help alleviate any fear coworkers or
supervisors may have about a new hire. A study conducted by Jablin found that
25.6 percent of a newcomer’s communication was information giving. [22] Jablin
further describes four basic types of information given by new employees:
evaluative work, evaluative nonwork, descriptive work, and descriptive
nonwork. [23]
The first form of information giving is labeled evaluative work and consists of
information shared regarding one’s like or dislike of the job itself. This could
include discussions of unmet expectations or needs, the amount of stress one
feels on the new job, or one’s overall level of motivation or job satisfaction with
the new job. All these forms of information giving are evaluative in nature and
centered around the job itself.
Evaluative nonwork, on the other hand, examines the types of judgmental
information given by a new hire about issues outside the confines of the
organization itself. These could include evaluative statements related to other
organizations an individual belongs to (e.g., social clubs or churches). These
statements could also examine how the job affects one’s participation in
nonwork activities. Again, all these types of information giving focus on
judgments of nonwork activities.
Descriptive work information giving focuses on information provided by a new
employee related to her or his understanding of a specific organizational or job
task (e.g., task performance, task goals, and task instructions). Again, the
purpose of this information is not to judge what is occurring within the
organization but to provide information to others about the specific tasks.
Lastly, individuals can provide information that describes nonwork activities.
Generally, these forms of information relate to an individual’s hobbies, family
life, and personal goals. For example, maybe a new coworker went to the movies
last night and tells you about the plot. Maybe another new coworker was
recently married and shows you pictures of her or his wedding. Both examples
involve new employees simply providing organization members more
information about the new employee in an effort to help longer-term
organization members learn about the new employee.
Information Seeking
The second type of communicative behavior that occurs during organizational
socialization is information seeking. Information seeking involves a new
employee’s proactive search for information. In a study conducted by Vernon
Miller and Frederic Jablin, the researchers observed seven basic tactics that new
employees utilize when attempting to seek information. [24] The seven tactics
can be found in the “Information-Seeking Tactics” sidebar.
Information-Seeking Tactics
1. Overt. Asking for information in a direct manner.
2. Indirect. Getting others to give information by hinting and use of
noninterrogative questions.
3. Third party. Asking someone other than the primary information target.
4. Testing. Breaking a rule, annoying the target, and so on, and then
observing the target’s reaction.
5. Disguising conversations. Use of jokes, verbal prompts, self-disclosure,
and so on to ease information from the target without the person’s
awareness.
6. Observing. Watching another’s actions to model behavior or discern
meanings associated with events.
7. Surveillance. Indiscriminately monitoring conversations and activities
to which meaning can be retrospectively attributed. [25]
Relationship Development
The next purpose of communication during organizational assimilation involves
the development of relationships with coworkers and supervisors. As discussed
earlier in this chapter, we spend a considerable amount of time in our lives at
work. Of that time we spend at work, a great deal of it involves interacting with
our coworkers and supervisors. As such, one of the primary reasons we
communicate with people when we first enter into an organization is to develop
relationships (both formal and friendly) with the people in our workplace.
Although we may not become “best” friends with our coworkers and
supervisors, most of us will make friends at work. In fact, research examining
friendship in the workplace has demonstrated that organizations that encourage
the development of workplace friendships will have employees who are more
satisfied, motivated, and productive. [26]
Role Negotiation
The final reason for communication during the entry stage of organizational
socialization involves role negotiation. Earlier in this chapter we discussed how
new employees attempt to individualize their work experience. Role negotiation
is a part of this individualization. Although employees often wait an appropriate
amount of time before starting the individualization of their workplace,
eventually a new employee will have built up enough credibility to start
conversations with coworkers and supervisors to individualize their workplace.
Role negotiations occur when an employee attempts to negotiate with her or his
supervisor about communicated expectations. When people are hired, there are
clearly established expectations related to the job in question (sometimes called
a job description). These expectations can involve everything from the tasks one
completes to one’s place in the organizational hierarchy. When attempting to
engage in role negotiation, the new employee is seeking to alter her or his
supervisor’s expectations in an effort to alter or individualize the new
employee’s work life.
KEY TAKEAWAY
Frederic Jablin articulated three basic stages of organizational
socialization: anticipatory socialization, organizational
entry/assimilation, and organization disengagement/exit.
Anticipatory socialization is the period of time before an individual
enters an organization. Organizational entry/assimilation is the
period of time that occurs from the moment an individual enters
an organization to the moment he or she becomes an established
member of the organization. Organizational disengagement/exit is
the period of time when an individual has decided to leave an
organization to the moment he or she actually exits.
Vocational anticipatory socialization is the process an individual
undertakes as he or she selects a specific job or career. From our
earliest moments in life, our families, peers, teachers, and
organizational experiences socialize us and teach us about the
world of work. Organizational anticipatory socialization, on the
other hand, is the process an individual goes through as he or she
attempts to find an organization to join.
Frederic Jablin proposed a three-step process for organizational
entry and assimilation: preentry, entry, and metamorphosis.
Preentry is the period of time after someone has been asked to
join an organization but before he or she is actually working within
the organization. Entry refers to the period of time when an
individual first enters into the organization and goes through
traditional orientation and socialization processes. Lastly,
metamorphosis occurs when an individual transforms herself or
himself from a new organization member to an established
member of the organization.
Alan Saks and Jamie Gruman’s socialization-resources theory
examines the types of resources new employees need to
socialize effectively within an organization. The theory starts with
the notion that people undergoing periods of stress (like entering
into a new organization) need to be provided with necessary
resources to help manage and alleviate the stress. Based on
research in scholarly journals and the popular press, Saks and
Gruman developed a typology of seventeen different “best
practices” for the types of resources necessary for effective
organizational socialization.
Onboarding is the process of welcoming and orienting new
organization members to facilitate their adjustment to the
organization, its culture, and its practices. Organizations
historically have utilized three different techniques for successful
onboarding: orientation programs (formalized programs that
facilitate the general understanding of the organization and
expected duties within the organization), training programs
(programs designed to facilitate the acquisition of necessary skills
and knowledge needed complete the job), and formal mentoring
(programs designed to help facilitate the transfer of experience or
knowledge from a senior individual to a junior individual in an
effort to help the junior individual learn the ins and outs of
organizational life).
Communication is a very important part of new employee
socialization. Frederic Jablin explained that there are four primary
functions for communication during the socialization process:
information giving, information seeking, relationship development,
and role negotiation. First, organizations engage in information
giving, or the types of information a new employee provides to
coworkers and superiors during organizational entry. Second, new
employees engage in information seeking, which involves new
employees proactively seeking out information necessary to
accomplish their jobs. Third, new employees use communication
to develop relationships with their supervisors and coworkers.
Lastly, new employees use communication to engage in role
negotiations, which occur when an employee attempts to
negotiate with her or his supervisor about communicated
Impression Management:
Information Giving:
Information Seeking:
Norms:
expectations.
EXERCISES
1. Think about your most recent job. What types of socialization
activities did your employer engage in? Do you think these
activities were effective in your socialization? Why or why not?
2. Using a previous organizational experience, describe your own
experience with organizational socialization using Frederic
Jablin’s three-step process for organizational entry and
assimilation: preentry, entry, and metamorphosis.
3. Using a previous organizational experience, provide examples of
Jablin’s four primary functions for communication during the
socialization process: information giving, information seeking,
relationship development, and role negotiation.
KEY TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
The process (either conscious or unconscious) in which an individual deliberately attempts to influence the perceptions and opinions of others.
The types of information a new employee provides to coworkers and superiors during organizational entry.
A new employee’s proactive search for information.
The informal expectations about how new employees should
Onboarding :
Organizational Anticipatory Socialization:
Organizational Socialization:
Role Negotiations:
Vocational Anticipatory Socialization:
Anticipatory Socialization:
Metamorphosis :
Preentry:
Rules :
behave within an organization.
The process of welcoming and orienting new organization members to facilitate their adjustment to the organization, its culture, and its practices.
The process an individual goes through as he or she attempts to find an organization to join.
The process an organization utilizes to ensure that new members acquire necessary attitudes, behaviors, knowledge, and skills to become productive organization members.
The process that occurs when an employee attempts to negotiate with her or his supervisor about communicated expectations.
The process an individual undertakes as he or she selects a specific job or career.
The period of time before an individual actually joins an organization.
When an individual transforms herself or himself from a new organization member to an established member of the organization.
The period of time after someone has been asked to join an organization but before he or she is actually working within the organization.
The explicit dictates that govern employee behavior within an organization.
[1] Wanberg, C. R. (2012). Facilitating organizational socialization: An
introduction. In C. R. Wanberg (Ed.), The Oxford handbook of
organizational socialization (pp. 17–21). New York, NY: Oxford University
Press.
[2] Jablin, F. M. (1987). Organizational entry, assimilation, and exit. In F.
M. Jablin, L. L. Putnam, K. H. Roberts, & L. W. Porter (Eds.), Handbook
of organizational communication: An interdisciplinary perspective (pp.
679–740). Newbury Park, CA: Sage.
[3] Jablin, F. M. (2001). Organizational entry, assimilation, and
disengagement/exit. In F. M. Jablin & L. L. Putnam (Eds.), The new
handbook of organizational communication: Advances in theory,
research, and methods (pp. 732–818). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
[4] Jablin, F. M. (2001). Organizational entry, assimilation, and
disengagement/exit. In F. M. Jablin & L. L. Putnam (Eds.), The new
handbook of organizational communication: Advances in theory,
research, and methods (pp. 732–818). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
[5] Barber, S. (1989). When I grow up: Children and the work-world of
television. Media and Values, 47 [Online reprint]. Retrieved from
http://www.medialit.org/reading-room/when-i-grow-children-and-work-
world-television
[6] Jablin, F. M. (1985). An exploratory study of vocational organizational
communication socialization. Southern Speech Communication Journal,
50, 261–282.
[7] Kramer, M. W. (2010). Organizational socialization: Joining and
leaving organizations. Malden, MA: Polity.
[8] United States Census (2010). Educational attainment by selected
characteristics: 2010. Retrieved from
http://www.census.gov/compendia/statab/2012/tables/12s0232.pdf
[9] Kramer, M. W. (2010). Organizational socialization: Joining and
leaving organizations. Malden, MA: Polity.
[10] Kramer, M. W. (2010). Organizational socialization: Joining and
leaving organizations. Malden, MA: Polity.
[11] Gibson, M. K., & Papa, M. J. (2000). The mud, the blood, and the
beer guys: Organizational osmosis in blue-collar work groups. Journal of
Applied Communication Research, 28, 68–88.
[12] Gibson, M. K., & Papa, M. J. (2000). The mud, the blood, and the
beer guys: Organizational osmosis in blue-collar work groups. Journal of
Applied Communication Research, 28, 68–88, p. 79.
[13] Jablin, F. M. (2001). Organizational entry, assimilation, and
disengagement/exit. In F. M. Jablin & L. L. Putnam (Eds.), The new
handbook of organizational communication: Advances in theory,
research, and methods (pp. 732–818). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
[14] Jablin, F. M. (2001). Organizational entry, assimilation, and
disengagement/exit. In F. M. Jablin & L. L. Putnam (Eds.), The new
handbook of organizational communication: Advances in theory,
research, and methods (pp. 732–818). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage, p.
753.
[15] Jablin, F. M. (2001). Organizational entry, assimilation, and
disengagement/exit. In F. M. Jablin & L. L. Putnam (Eds.), The new
handbook of organizational communication: Advances in theory,
research, and methods (pp. 732–818). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
[16] Jablin, F. M. (1987). Organizational entry, assimilation, and exit. In F.
M. Jablin, L. L. Putnam, K. H. Roberts, & L. W. Porter (Eds.), Handbook
of organizational communication: An interdisciplinary perspective (pp.
679–740). Newbury Park, CA: Sage.
[17] Bohannon, A. (2009, January 18). What is diversity of thought?
Diversity Executive [online]. Retrieved from http://diversity-executive.com
[18] Richmond, V. P., & McCroskey, J. C. (2009). Organizational
communication for survival: Making work, work (4th ed.). Boston, MA:
Allyn & Bacon, pp. 192–193.
[19] Saks, A. M., & Gruman, J. A. (2012). Getting newcomers on board: A
review of socialization practices and introduction to socialization
resources theory. In C. R. Wanberg (Ed.), The Oxford handbook of
organizational socialization (pp. 27–55). New York, NY: Oxford University
Press.
[20] Klein, H. J., & Polin, B. (2012). In C. R. Wanberg (Ed.), The Oxford
handbook of organizational socialization (pp. 267–287). New York, NY:
Oxford University Press, p. 268. 5).
[21] Jablin, F. M. (2001). Organizational entry, assimilation, and
disengagement/exit. In F. M. Jablin & L. L. Putnam (Eds.), The new
handbook of organizational communication: Advances in theory,
research, and methods (pp. 732–818). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
[22] Jablin, F. M. (1984). Assimilating new members into organizations. In
R. N. Bostrom (Ed.), Communication yearbook 8 (pp. 594–626). Beverly
Hills, CA: Sage.
[23] Jablin, F. M. (2001). Organizational entry, assimilation, and
disengagement/exit. In F. M. Jablin & L. L. Putnam (Eds.), The new
handbook of organizational communication: Advances in theory,
research, and methods (pp. 732–818). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
[24] Miller, V. D., & Jablin, F. M. (1991). Information seeking during
organizational entry: Influences, tactics, and a model of the process.
Academy of Management Review, 16, 92–120.
[25] Jablin, F. M. (2001). Organizational entry, assimilation, and
disengagement/exit. In F. M. Jablin & L. L. Putnam (Eds.), The new
handbook of organizational communication: Advances in theory,
research, and methods (pp. 732–818). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage, p.
770.
[26] Nielsen, I. K., Jex, S. M., & Adams, G. A. (2000). Development and
validation of scores on a two-dimensional workplace friendship scale.
Educational and Psychological Measurement, 60, 628–643.
© Thinkstock/iStock
10.3 Disengaging
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
1. Differentiate between voluntary and involuntary disengagement.
2. Explain Frederic Jablin’s four-step model of organizational
disengagement.
As discussed in Figure 10.6, there are three primary phases
of organizational socialization. The first two were
discussed in the previous section. In this section, we
examine the final part of organizational socialization—how
individuals go about disengaging from an organization. To
help us understand disengagement, we will examine two
types of organizational disengagement and the steps of
disengagement.
Types of Organizational Disengagement
Disengagement is the process an individual goes through when considering a
separation and then separating herself or himself from an organization. [1] For
our purposes, we will examine disengagement in terms of either a voluntary
process or an involuntary process.
Voluntary Disengagement
Voluntary disengagement occurs when an individual decides that he or she
needs to look for alternatives elsewhere. There are countless reasons an
individual may decide that it’s time to move on. Whether someone sees greener
pastures elsewhere or just needs a change of scenery, people regularly change
their jobs. People also voluntary disengage from a job when they transfer to
another department or division or retire. As noted earlier in this chapter,
according to the Bureau of Labor Statistics, “The average person born in the
latter years of the baby boom (1957–1964) held 11.3 jobs from age 18 to age 46,
according to the US Bureau of Labor Statistics. Nearly half of these jobs were
held from ages 18 to 24.” [2] There is no reason to suspect that this trend is going
to change anytime soon.
Involuntary Disengagement
Involuntary disengagement occurs when an individual is forced to leave an
organization. The most common forms of involuntary disengagement are getting
fired or getting downsized (involuntary turnover), but getting fired or downsized
are only two forms of disengagement that are involuntary. Other forms of
involuntary disengagement include changes that happen as a result of mergers or
acquisitions or nonvoluntary transfers. In each of these last two cases,
individuals are moved to a new position or transferred to a new location with the
threat that noncompliance will result in losing one’s job.
Steps of Disengagement
Whether someone is going through voluntary or involuntary disengagement,
Frederic Jablin proposed the general steps that he or she will take are generally
fourfold: preannouncement, announcement of exit, actual exit, and postexit. [3]
Let’s look at each of these steps.
Preannouncement Step
Communication during the preannouncement step of disengagement involves
any cues or signals one consciously or unconsciously sends when dissatisfied
with particular people, work, or the organization. Consciously sent cues and
signals may include decreased productivity or increased incidences of
absenteeism or lateness. These cues send the message that you are officially
starting to “check out.” Dissatisfied coworkers may also start to have
conversations with their families and friends about the possibility of finding a
new job long before they have started to disengage in the workplace itself.
Other cues may be subconsciously sent but are observable by others. For
example, an employee may increase her or his voicing of dissatisfaction with
coworkers, supervisors, work, or the organization as a whole. Although the
person may realize that he or she is voicing dissatisfaction, he or she may not
realize that others are seeing the increased dissatisfaction as an indication that
the person is starting to disengage. Even if the employee is not voluntarily
disengaging, coworkers and supervisors may view a change in attitude at work,
decrease in organizational citizenship, or decrease in organizational commitment
as indicators that he or she needs to be corrected or forced out of the
organization.
Announcement of Exit Step
Eventually, the dissatisfied organization member will officially make it known
that he or she is leaving (voluntary disengagement), or the organization will
make it known that the organization member will be leaving (involuntary
disengagement), which occurs in the announcement of exit step. It is not
uncommon for people to roll out an announcement of exit over a period of weeks
or even months, depending on the nature of the job. One of our coauthors once
had a letter of resignation sitting in his desk waiting to be sent to his immediate
superior thirty days prior to his intended last day of work. His secretary knew
that he had accepted another position two months prior, but she had been the
only organization member to know that he was leaving. Unfortunately, he let it
slip a week early to his most vocal coworker that he wouldn’t be around long
enough to work on a project and that she should probably assign someone else
the task. Within ten minutes, he started receiving phone calls from coworkers,
and within twenty-four hours, the organization was already having phone
conferences determining what would happen to his position post voluntary
turnover. Obviously, this announcement did not go as originally planned.
The purpose of communication during the exit step is to help reduce uncertainty
on the parts of those leaving and those staying within the organization. On the
part of the individual, the announcement of exit step helps to solidify that
leaving is going to be a “good thing.” On the part of coworkers, communication
helps to create accounts and justifications for why the individual is voluntarily or
involuntarily leaving the organization. According to Jablin, exit accounts
provided by those leaving an organization typically fall into one of four
categories:
1. Exit will facilitate the person’s achieving long-term goals (future
orientation).
2. Exit allows one to avoid a bad situation/problems at work.
3. Exit is due to unique circumstances (e.g., organizational restructuring,
spouses’ job, unique opportunity).
4. Some mixture of the above kinds of accounts. [4]
Of course, Jablin also recognized that organization members sticking around
have options for how they respond to these accounts as well: [5]
Simply accept the leave taker’s account.
Blend the leave taker’s account with the one circulating around the office.
Reject the account provided by the leave taker.
Construct a new account based on some of the information provided by the
leave taker.
Create a brand-new account for why the person is actually leaving.
Actual Exit Step
Finally, the individual leaves the organization, which is referred to as the actual
exit step. The period from which an individual announces exit to when he or she
exits the organization can happen in a matter of minutes to months, depending
on whether the exit is voluntary or involuntary and the postexit plans of the
person taking leave. If the parting is amicable, it’s possible there will be
celebrations to honor the person as he or she leaves (retirement or going-away
parties). If the parting is not amicable, the person may simply not be there one
day, and coworkers will speak in hushed tones about the person’s exit.
Communication during the actual exit step is generally focused on how the leave
taker behaves and how her or his coworkers respond to the actual
disengagement. We always recommend not burning any bridges when taking
leave of an organization—it’s just not worth it in the long run. Instead, even if
you’re in a situation where you are being involuntarily turned over, it’s in your
best interest to keep your communication professional. Coworkers should also
keep things professional during the actual process of exiting. Even if you didn’t
like a specific colleague, it just isn’t professional to come off looking catty,
vindictive, or happy that you’ve pushed someone out of the organization.
Postexit Step
The final step in organizational disengagement is the postexit step. When
someone finally leaves an organization (whether voluntarily or involuntarily),
those who are left behind need to deal with her or his absence. For example, who
has to take on the person’s workload? Will the organization rehire for that
position or let the position go unfilled for a period? These are basic questions
that organization members ask as they attempt to understand how the work
environment has altered because the person has left the organization.
At the same time, the person who has left the organization also has to renegotiate
who he or she is as a person now that the association with the organization is no
more. People always associate their lives to some extent with their jobs or
careers. When someone leaves an organization (whether voluntarily or
involuntarily), he or she is forced to create a new version of who he or she is as a
person. Obviously, if you left of your own free will and both you and the
organization consider your leaving amicable, you may have a quicker adjustment
period postexit. Conversely, if you’ve spent the greater part of your life working
for an organization only to be downsized a couple of years before retirement,
your adjustment and view of your former organization is going to be much more
complicated. Furthermore, you may find yourself having to explain for many
years to come why you left the organization, so the postexit communication
process may be one that takes years to complete effectively.
KEY TAKEAWAY
When people disengage from an organization, there are two basic
types of disengagement: voluntary and involuntary. Voluntary
disengagement occurs when an individual decides that he or she
needs to look for alternatives elsewhere. Involuntary
disengagement, on the other hand, occurs when an individual is
forced to leave an organization.
Explain Frederic Jablin’s four-step model of organizational
disengagement: preannouncement, announcement of exit, actual
exit, and postexit. The preannouncement step occurs when an
individual transmits cues or signals, either consciously or
unconsciously, because he or she is dissatisfied with particular
people, work, or the organization. Next is the announcement of
exit step, which occurs when either the individual (when
voluntary) or the organization (when involuntary) announces that
the employee will be exiting. Third is the actual exiting of the
individual, which occurs when the employee makes her or his
departure. Lastly, the individual who has left the organization
makes sense of her or his experiences within the organization,
while organization members make sense of their former
colleague’s departure.
EXERCISES
1. Describe a time when you were a part of either involuntary or
voluntary disengagement. Explain how communication occurred
during the period of disengagement.
2. Take a time when you’ve left an organization. Using Jablin’s four-
step model of organizational disengagement, describe your
experience leaving the organization.
Disengagement :
Involuntary Disengagement:
Voluntary Disengagement:
Actual Exit Step:
Announcement Of Exit Step:
Postexit Step:
Preannouncement Step:
KEY TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
The process an individual goes through when considering a separation and then separating him- or herself from an organization.
Form of disengagement that occurs when an individual is forced to leave an organization.
Form of disengagement that occurs when an individual decides that he or she needs to look for alternatives elsewhere.
Step in the disengagement process when an organization member actually leaves the organization.
Step in the disengagement process when either a dissatisfied organization member officially makes it known that he or she is leaving (voluntary disengagement) or the organization makes it known that the organization member will be leaving (involuntary disengagement).
Step in the disengagement process when an individual who has left an organization makes sense of her or his experiences within the organization and when organization members make sense of the former colleague’s departure
Step in the disengagement process involving any cues or signals either consciously or unconsciously sent by someone dissatisfied with particular people, work, or the organization.
[1] Jablin, F. M. (2001). Organizational entry, assimilation, and
disengagement/exit. In F. M. Jablin & L. L. Putnam (Eds.), The new
handbook of organizational communication: Advances in theory,
research, and methods (pp. 732–818). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
[2] Bureau of Labor Statistics. (2012, July 25). Number of jobs held, labor
market activity, and earnings growth among the youngest baby boomers:
Results from a longitudinal survey. (USDL-12-1489) [News release].
Retrieved from http://www.bls.gov/news.release/pdf/nlsoy.pdf
[3] Jablin, F. M. (2001). Organizational entry, assimilation, and
disengagement/exit. In F. M. Jablin & L. L. Putnam (Eds.), The new
handbook of organizational communication: Advances in theory,
research, and methods (pp. 732–818). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
[4] Jablin, F. M. (2001). Organizational entry, assimilation, and
disengagement/exit. In F. M. Jablin & L. L. Putnam (Eds.), The new
handbook of organizational communication: Advances in theory,
research, and methods (pp. 732–818). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage, p.
790.
[5] Jablin, F. M. (2001). Organizational entry, assimilation, and
disengagement/exit. In F. M. Jablin & L. L. Putnam (Eds.), The new
handbook of organizational communication: Advances in theory,
research, and methods (pp. 732–818). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage, p.
790.
10.4 Chapter Exercises
REAL-WORLD CASE STUDY
The following case study is based on a first-person narrative article
published in the Harvard Business Review. [1]
Mindy Grossman had worked for Nike for six years when she was
passed up for a promotion. Although she realized that the men who
got the job were deserving, she knew that her only possibility for
ensuring progress in her career was to look for CEO jobs outside of
Nike. Eventually, a corporate recruiter asked if she would be
interested in applying for the CEO position at IAC Retailing. Her first
question, “What’s IAC Retailing?”
IAC Retailing’s flagship was the Home Shopping Network (HSN),
along with a number of minor companies abroad. In the previous ten
years, HSN had seven different CEOs, so Grossman quickly
realized that something was wrong with how things were run at IAC
Retailing. On her first trip to HSN’s headquarters in Florida, she was
surprised to find a dirty office, apathetic employees, and an
organization at a loss for innovation.
Shortly before starting her job, she received a call from the head of
human resources (HR), who asked what she would like to do on the
first day of her job. She responded by asking, “What do other
employees do on the first day?” “They go to new employee
orientation,” the head of HR responded. Much to the surprise of the
head of HR, Grossman responded that she would also go through
new employee orientation. During the orientation she saw the basic
product line, took a tour of the set, and even listened to individuals
in the call center. Going through the orientation process provided
Grossman with a quick and comprehensive snapshot of the
organization and how it functioned and those places where the
organization currently was not functioning.
Since taking over the reins at IAC Retailing, she’s turned HSN from
a second-tier shopping channel into a direct-to-viewer shopping
powerhouse. In August of 2008, she took the company public and
despite a downtrodden economy, by 2011 HSN was valued at over
$2 billion.
1. Do you think new CEOs should go through new employee
orientation? Why?
2. How do you think going through the orientation process at HSN
impacted Grossman’s credibility among her new subordinates?
3. Do you think Grossman’s success at HSN is directly related to the
understanding of the organization she received during her new
employee orientation? Why?
END-OF-CHAPTER ASSESSMENT
1. Darlene is in the process of putting together her organization’s plan for hiring a new chief financial officer. One of the parts of her plan involves thinking through the communicative messages she wants potential CFOs to receive. According to Breaugh, Macan, and Grambow, in which step of the model of employee recruitment is Darlene engaging?
a. recruitment objectives b. recruitment strategy c. recruitment activities d. applicant interview e. recruitment results
2. Which theory of realistic job previews explains that realistic job previews work because the RJP prepares a new hire in incremental steps for the day-to-day life the new hire is going to experience within the organization?
a. inoculation theory b. self-selection theory c. organizational-socialization theory d. socialization-resources theory e. disengagement theory
3. One of the ways employees are socialized into the world of work is through families, friends, and educational experiences. What type of socialization do these represent?
a. preventive socialization
b. organizational-anticipatory socialization c. precautionary socialization d. vocational-anticipatory socialization e. business-related anticipatory socialization
4. Bobby has only recently started working at Universal Corp. During a lunchroom conversation, he mentions to a new coworker that he is an avid snowboarder. According to Frederic Jablin, what type of information giving is Bobby engaging in?
a. evaluative work b. evaluative nonwork c. descriptive work d. descriptive nonwork e. information acquisition
5. Peter is feeling more and more disgruntled at work. His productivity is slipping, and he just doesn’t seem to care much about his job anymore. Although Peter hasn’t said anything to anyone, most people in his office assume he’s on the job market. According to Jablin, which step in disengagement is Peter exemplifying?
a. preannouncement b. announcement c. preexit d. actual exit e. postexit
Answer Key
1. b
2. a
3. d
4. d
5. a
[1] Grossman, M. (2011). HSN’s CEO on fixing the shopping network’s
culture. Harvard Business Review, 89(12), 43–46.
Chapter 11
Technology in Organizations
Big Questions
How could a cultured and modern society carry out the genocide of six million
people? Scholars from historians to theologians have wrestled with this question.
One startling thesis about the Holocaust was advanced by the sociologist
Zygmunt Bauman who argued that the Holocaust occurred because the creation
of modern beuraucratic structures (e.g., division of labor, clear channels of
communication, detachment of humanity from work, and business designed as
well-oiled, systematic machines). Bauman concluded, “The light shed by the
Holocaust on our knowledge of bureaucratic rationality is at its most dazzling
when we realize the extent to which the very idea of the Endlösung [Final
Solution] was an outcome of the bureaucratic culture.” [1]
Scattered pogroms and massacres had been committed against the Jewish people
for centuries. But the Final Solution could not, Bauman observed, “have been
perpetrated without modern bureaucracy, the skills and technologies it
commands, the scientific principles of its internal management” and its
“rational pursuit of efficient, optimal goal-implementation.” [2] Tragically, the
gas chambers of Auschwitz were a technology implemented by a modern
bureaucracy as a “rational” means of optimizing efficiency and “production.”
Yet the failing of Nazi bureaucrats was not an absence of ethics. Rather,
contended Steven Katz, they followed an “ethic of expediency” in which
rationality, efficiency, speed, productivity, and power were regarded as moral
goods. [3] Katz held that this ethic of technological expediency, taken to horrific
extreme in the Holocaust, is predominant in Western culture.
In starting out this chapter on technology in organizations with a cautionary
example from modern history, we wish make a key point. In earlier times, a tool
was a thing to pick up, use, and put away. Today, however, we regard technology
as part of our world. The everyday tools around us seem “natural.” Yet the
shapes of our tools are not inevitable. Technology is designed around the needs
of its users and those needs are, in turn, socially constructed. A smartphone, for
example, is designed around the need that people in our society feel for
individual empowerment, instant connection, and constant mobility. (Would a
society that prized solitude and rootedness produce a different technology?) By
the same token, a photocopier or network server is designed around need that
people in modern organizations feel for rational and efficient optimization of
results. But once we shape our technologies, they in turn shape us. So we mold
our personal lives around mobile communication technologies—and, in the same
way, we mold our organizational lives around technologies that demand
rationality and efficiency to work as designed.
One day you will be—perhaps already are—employed by an organization. For
now, though, you are a student of organizations and their communication. This
gives you an opportunity to step back and study organizational phenomena that
others take for granted in their everyday activities. Technology is one of these
phenomena—so easy to take for granted yet with such a powerful influence on
what we do and think within organizations. Our aims in this chapter are as
follows: to help you appreciate the broader impacts of technology on society and
organizations and to explore the impacts of technology on organizational
structure and on organizational communication. This knowledge can equip you
to be an organization member who thinks critically about things that others do
not question. Clearly, organizations are using technology to accomplish great
good in the world, from raising living standards to prolonging life. But as our
machines grow in power and scope, as they act more independently and at
greater distance from those who control them, the need for organizations and
individuals to make informed choices also increases.
[1] Bauman, Z. (1989). Modernity and the Holocaust. Ithaca, NY: Cornell
University Press, p. 15. Emphasis in original.
[2] Bauman, Z. (1989). Modernity and the Holocaust. Ithaca, NY: Cornell
University Press, p. 17.
[3] Katz, S. B. (1992). The ethic of expediency: Classical rhetoric,
technology, and the Holocaust. College English, 54, 255–275.
11.1 Technology, Society, and the Organization
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
1. Understand the interplay between technology and society.
2. Identify major thinkers on modern technological society and
describe their basic ideas.
3. Relate these ideas to the organization and use them to think
critically about your role in organizations and the balance between
work and life.
Technology is, in the words of Carolyn Miller, a “form of consciousness” that
pervades contemporary society. This consciousness is molded around the twin
impulses of efficiency and the pooling of people and resources needed to make
complex systems work. Thus, “The character of modern technological thought is
closely bound up with its nurturance in the corporation and the bureaucracy.” [1]
In this section, we will trace how the characteristics of technological society
filter down into the organization. As Matts Alvesson observed, “Organizations
can be understood as shaping local versions of broader societal and locally
developed cultural manifestations in a multitude of ways.” [2] Before getting to
organizations, however, we will review how a technological “consciousness”
develops within society in the first place.
Technology and Civilization
That technological progress brought great benefits was an article of faith in the
nineteenth century. Among the first to question this assumption was Karl Marx
who, in the 1860s, described how the Industrial Revolution impacted laborers. [3]
Artisans had owned their simple tools and worked for themselves. By contrast,
industrial machines were complex technologies; only people with capital could
own the machinery, which meant laborers now worked for someone other than
themselves. Nevertheless, faith in science and technology remained unabated.
We have already seen in Chapter 3, for example, how Frederick Taylor in 1913
published his Principles of Scientific Management in the belief that “the best
management is true science.” What became known as Taylorism, noted Edward
Layton, was nothing less than a movement “to assimilate management within
the engineering profession” and thereby “discover the underlying scientific laws
assumed to govern” organization and work. [4]
Questions about “progress” were raised, however, in the aftermath of World War
I (1914–1918) with its mechanized slaughter on an unprecedented scale.
Machine guns, tanks, submarines, aerial bombing, and poison gas were brought
to bear in the conflict for the first time in history. Italian philosopher Antonio
Gramsci coined the term Fordism to describe the mass-production techniques
made famous by Henry Ford and, even more, to describe the assembly-line
concept of work and organization. [5] In Frankfurt, Germany, during the 1920s
and 1930s, scholars at the Institute for Social Research extended Karl Marx’s
critique of capital and labor to modern technological society. They held that,
because the Fordist approach required massive upfront investments in
organization and technology, success at mass production also required artificial
stimulation of demand to induce mass consumption. Two Institute for Social
Research scholars, Max Horkheimer and Theodore Adorno, extended this idea in
their 1944 book, The Dialectic of Enlightenment. [6] Mass consumption in a
capitalist society is stimulated, they argued, by mass culture. The culture
industry, a term they coined, churns out homogenized cultural goods to produce
the desired consumers.
In the United States, Lewis Mumford, in his 1934 book Technics and
Civilization, argued that the meaning of technology goes beyond mere machines.
He coined the term technics (from the Greek word techne) to capture the
relationship between society and technology. “Behind all the great material
inventions of the last century and a half…there was a change of mind,”
Mumford wrote. “Before the new industrial processes could take hold on a great
scale, a reorientation of wishes, habits, ideals, goals was necessary.” [7]
Mumford was hopeful that, as industries of the 1930s converted from steam to
electric power, enterprises could be conducted on a more human scale since
small electric motors could do the same work as vast coal-fired, steam-powered
factories. But after civilization was plunged into the Second World War (1939–
1945) and then a Cold War nuclear arms race, Mumford grew pessimistic and
proclaimed The Myth of the Machine. [8] By the 1960s, he lamented that a new
age of megatechnics had dawned in which ongoing industrial expansion was
achieved by producing goods designed not to last but to be continually updated
and replaced.
Technology and Mind
After World War II, many scholars took up, as German philosopher Martin
Heidegger put it in a series of lectures delivered between 1949 and 1953, The
Question Concerning Technology. [9] Heidegger described modern technology as
an “enframing” (Gestell) of nature. To illustrate, he compared a windmill and a
hydroelectric dam. The windmill generates power by taking the wind as it
naturally comes. By contrast, “The hydroelectric plant is set into the current of
the Rhine [River]. It sets the Rhine to supplying its hydraulic pressure, which
then sets the turbines turning.” [10] Thus, the river is reordered to supply the
needs of—or as Heidegger put it, become a “standing-reserve” (Bestand) for—
modern technology. And if human consciousness itself is reordered so that we
are “challenged, ordered, to do this, then does not man himself belong even more
originally than nature within the standing-reserve?” [11] Thus, in creating
modern technology, we have reordered our own being.
Discussions about technology and society accelerated in the postwar decades.
Philosophers Jacques Ellul and William Barrett each put “technique” at the root
of modern technology and society. Ellul’s The Technological Society [12] and
Barrett’s The Illusion of Technique [13] went beyond technology to describe an
underlying societal mind-set that seeks out some technique as the answer to any
problem. This theme was echoed by Jurgen Habermas and his notion of
technical reasoning, which we encountered in Chapter 4. The modern age, he
argued, has increasingly supplanted practical reasoning based on mutual
consensus with technical reasoning based on a calculus of “what works” to attain
a given end. [14] Habermas also described, as shown in Table 11.1, how
precapitalist “traditional society” had been transformed into our modern
“rational society.” [15] Though traditional society may have had rational elements
—for example, when the king retained clerks to manage the treasury—
traditional norms still governed. In the wake of the Enlightenment and the
emergence of capitalism, however, a reversal took place. As Myra Moses and
Steven Katz succinctly put it, “With the rise of the bourgeoisie, the king is
beheaded, religion is boxed in a cultural corner, and the economic values of the
treasury are now the dominant framework of the society.” [16]
Table 11.1 Habermas's Traditional and Rational Societies
Traditional Society Rational Society
Action is governed
by... Societal norms Technical rules
Language used is... Idiomatic Context-free
Behavioral
expectations are... Reciprocal Conditional
Behaviors are Internalization Skill acquisition
learned by...
The purpose of
action is... Validating tradition Solving problems
Rule violations
are...
Transgressions against authority that
result in social sanction
Transgressions against reality that
result in ineffectiveness
The reason for
working is... Self-actualization Production
The work of Habermas involves ideology critique, which, as we learned in
Chapter 4, is a method employed by critical scholars to expose the dominant
(and often taken for granted) ideologies that underlie societal structures. Here he
demonstrated how the capitalist ideology of production is a driving force behind
modern society’s adoption of “what works” technical reasoning. However, as we
will see next, other scholars have taken different approaches in explaining the
modern impulse behind technical reasoning.
Technology and Culture (Part 1)
Anthropologist Edward Hall began with the fundamental concept that
technology is, at root, a means for humans to solve problems without having to
biologically evolve. [17] But while a stone ax was itself an immediate extension
of the human arm, its invention necessitated development of more tools to
manipulate the original tool—including tools to make an ax handle, to attach
handle and stone, and to sharpen the stone. Thus does extension transference
occur, creating distance between a technology and the human capacity that the
technology was first meant to extend. As the transference process expands in
ever-widening circles, the technology becomes less a personal object and more a
part of the surrounding culture. And as the technology is absorbed into the
culture, habits of thought and speech and action build up around the technology.
This dynamic is represented in Figure 11.1.
Figure 11.1 Hall’s Extension Transference of Technology
Hall distinguished low-context technology, which remains close to its original
use as a direct extension of human capacity, from high-context technology,
which is distant from the user’s intentions and can be absorbed into the culture.
Thus, the hammer and nail are low-context technologies. But the technologies to
extract the raw materials, manufacture and assemble the components, and
distribute the finished products are high context.
What cultural habits of mind and behavior—what form of consciousness—does
technology tend to produce? Carolyn Miller suggested that Homo faber (“skilled
man”) exhibits four basic traits: “the acceptance of means as ends…; the
relinquishment of purpose to the external world; a self-justifying objectivity; and
linear, cause-and-effect reasoning.” [18] Technology becomes an end, rather than
a means, as it is absorbed into the cultural landscape and becomes a key element
in how people explain the world.
Extension transference (to use Hall’s term) distances and ultimately alienates
people from tools and work. (Few people today know how to repair their
gadgets, much less the principles behind how the gadgets work.) Yet as our
technologies extend outward and become our environment, we perceive our
environment not as an open system (which can be random and capricious) but as
a closed system (which is objectively knowable and controllable). And this
leads, finally, to understanding and manipulating the world through cause-and-
effect reasoning. Such trends prompted Neil Postman more than twenty years
ago to dub the United States the world’s first technopoly, a society holding that
“the primary, if not the only, goal of human labor and thought is efficiency, that
technical calculation is in all respects superior to human judgment…and that the
affairs of citizens are best guided and conducted by experts.” [19]
Organizations enter the picture because in modern society they are the principal
means for nurturing and enacting technical reasoning. “The desire for efficiency
makes the integrating qualities of large organizations seem useful; [conversely]
the requirements of large organizations make efficiency seem essential.…High
technology requires these large organizations,” observed Miller. [20] Indeed,
John Kenneth Galbraith believed the organization itself is a technology, a tool for
bringing human and capital resources to bear on problems. The modern
organization, being dependent on technological systems, is a “technostructure”
that marshals together “all who bring specialized knowledge, talent, or
experience to group decision making.” [21] Lewis Mumford described this
phenomenon in more colorful terms; machines in which humans are the
components, he proclaimed, are rightly called megamachines. [22]
Technology and Culture (Part 2)
Until now, our discussion of technology, society, and the organization has been
fairly theoretical. Now we turn to a discussion of technology and culture that
will “hit home” with your personal life and your work life. Let’s begin with a
familiar scenario. You just bought some technology that you’ve been thinking
about for months—perhaps a smartphone or a tablet computer—and that has all
the latest, greatest features your friends have been raving about. To top it all off,
you got a good deal, too.
This scenario, played out by thousands of consumers every day, seems perfectly
natural to us. Yet the task of researchers (and students) is to examine the
assumptions that others take for granted. As it happens, our scenario offers
assumptions aplenty—about progress, about technology, and about
communication. All three profoundly impact not only your personal life but also
your organizational life. So let us briefly examine each assumption in turn. By
taking a critical look at a scenario you have likely experienced in your personal
life, you can more easily grasp how assumptions about technology might play
out in the organizations to which you belong.
Assumptions about Progress
Not long ago Apple advertised its latest smartphone by proclaiming, “The Next
Big Thing Is Here.” The slogan tapped into the widespread assumption that
progress is good. Hence, the “next” big thing is better than the “last” big thing.
Yet the assumption that progress is good may be seen in other, less obvious
examples. The term 4G, used to describe a fourth-generation smartphone
network, encodes the assumption that the next generation of technology is better
than the last generation. Similarly, version 2.0 of the latest tablet computer is, by
implication, preferable to version 1.0. Nevertheless, the assumption that the
future will be better than the present (or the past) is not shared by all societies.
An emphasis on future time is a cultural trait “held by most Americans, who are
constantly thinking about what is ahead” and who take for granted that “what is
yet to come is most valued and the future is expected to be grander than the
present or the past.” [23]
Since the end of the Second World War, scholars have studied the differences
between cultures. [24] Florence Kluckhohn and Fred Strodtbeck—whom we
encountered in Chapter 6—proposed that people look to their cultures for
answers to five questions that explain how the world works. [25] The answers to
those questions determine the cultural value orientations of a society. One of
those value orientations is a society’s sense of time: which is more important—
the past, present, or future? The fixation in US culture on “the next big thing”
may seem strange to people whose cultures emphasize enjoyment of the present
moment or look to the past as a rich source of everyday guidance. Why, they
may ask, do Americans stress out so much about the future?
In buying the latest, greatest technology, your enthusiasm reflects another
cultural assumption about progress. Not only is the future more important than
the present, but you also assume the future will be good. Kluckhohn and
Strodtbeck held that people look to their cultures for guidance on whether
humanity is intrinsically good, evil, or a mix of both. Larry Samovar and his
colleagues argued that in the United States, the early Puritan view of sinful
humanity was modified by the American Dream of betterment through
individual effort. Thus, “Americans have come to consider themselves a mix of
good and evil.” [26] Therefore, while you are aware that technology can be
misused, you take for granted that your new purchase was designed for good
ends by well-meaning people and that you yourself will use the technology for
good.
Assumptions about Technology
Kluckhohn and Strodtbeck observed that cultures provide answers to two more
questions that govern our assumptions about technology. The first question is,
what value is placed on activity? The culture of the United States values doing,
an orientation expressed in the poem “Invictus,” which famously declares, “I am
the master of my fate: I am the captain of my soul.” [27] According to this
cultural assumption, human beings act upon the world. Other cultures, however,
view humans not in terms of doing but of being; people are seen not as subjects,
but as objects that the world acts upon. Still other cultures see in human beings
an emergent quality of being in becoming.
The second question is, what is the relation between humankind and nature?
Many Western societies, steeped in a Christian tradition that mandates human
dominion over the earth, value human control over nature. On the other hand,
many non-Western cultures value harmony with nature, and still others see
humans as subject to natural forces beyond human control.
So when you bought that new gadget, you acted on two cultural assumptions.
You acquired technology to (1) act upon your world and (2) take control over it.
How so? Your new smartphone or tablet computer provides a technological
means to communicate wherever and whenever you want, without being limited
by any natural barriers.
Assumptions about Communication
Why communicate whenever and wherever you want? This brings us to the fifth
question that, according to Kluckhohn and Strodtbeck, every culture must
answer: What is the relationship of people to each other? Chances are you
bought that new smartphone or tablet as a tool for personal empowerment—the
ability to access family, friends, work, and sources of information and
entertainment at will. Such personal empowerment is valued in individualistic
cultures, which view the individual as the most important social unit. So the
smartphone and the tablet are technologies for doing what you want.
In collectivistic cultures, however, the group is the most important social unit.
One reason that mobile phones are popular in these societies is the ability
afforded by the technology to stay in touch and strengthen group bonds. Yet in
authoritarian cultures where leaders are the most important social units, mobile
phones that promote unfettered lateral communication between peers may be
regarded as less important than controlled communication from the top down.
Indeed, scholars are paying increased attention to the role of cell phones in
circumventing state control of communication to organize “flash”
demonstrations and spark revolutions.
Nevertheless, cultures are not static; they are fluid and ever changing. For
example, consider the reluctance of your parents or grandparents about going on
Facebook or why they don’t rush out to buy the latest smartphone. Their
reticence is more than technophobia. You believe that individual empowerment
and control is tied to the ability to always be in communication; for baby
boomers, however, empowerment and control is about maintaining privacy and
personal space. This tension between the need for connection and the need for
separation is important to consider. In Chapter 8, we learned about work-life
conflict. Today, a major aspect of that conflict is the constant pull of work-
related calls, texts, tweets, and e-mails. Grant Fenner and Robert Renn called
this process “technologically assisted supplemental work” (TASW) [28] or a
“form of distributed work where full-time employees perform role-prescribed
tasks at home after regular working hours using advanced information and
communication technologies.” [29] In the good old days, people had to call your
office. If there was no one there, maybe an office had an answering service, but
most of the time the call went unanswered. Then we got answering machines,
and people could leave a message on the machine until Monday morning, and
then the office would deal with the message. Now, when you see a Friday night
e-mail from an important client, can you afford to put it off until Monday? In
fact, people who are not constantly plugged into the office may be seen as lazy
or lacking a good work ethic. Myra Moses and Steven Katz evocatively
described e-mail (not to mention cell phones, texting, tweeting, and
Facebooking) as a “phantom machine” whose “invisible ideology” pushes the
demands of work into the private realm of leisure. [30]
In summary, then, smartphones and tablet computers—and any technology—are
not “natural” developments; technology can take many possible paths. The path
that is taken will stem not just from purely technical choices; those decisions are
also rooted in assumptions about time, humanity, activity, nature, and society. In
the United States and much of the Western world, people assume that progress is
good, humans are good and their actions matter, and natural limitations to human
actions should be overcome so that individuals are maximally empowered. Our
technologies are designed to accomplish these ends. At the same time, as we
learned earlier in the chapter, the very nature of technology—especially as it
becomes absorbed into the culture—fosters habits of mind that privilege
technical reasoning. Our technologies are not mere tools; they both reflect and
shape, indeed they embody, our cultural values and ideologies. This principle
was vividly described by Langdon Winner [31] through several examples from
history:
Freeway overpasses in suburban Long Island, New York, were designed in
the 1940s with low clearances to prevent buses from accessing the island—
at a time when public transportation was the only way that ethnic minorities
from the inner city could get around.
Louis Napoleon had the boulevards of Paris widened in the 1860s to
prevent revolutionary street fighting.
US campuses in the 1960s and 1970s installed huge concrete plazas that
minimized student antiwar demonstrations.
In the 1880s, industrial magnate Cyrus McCormick spent vast sums to
automate his plants and thereby reduce the power of labor unions.
California tomatoes have been specially bred since the 1940s to withstand
the intense shaking of mass harvesting machines, thereby favoring
corporate farming.
Solar energy works best when solar panels are widely distributed and their
management decentralized. By contrast, nuclear power requires tight
centralization and control.
“In our accustomed way of thinking technologies are seen as neutral tools that
can be used well or poorly, for good, evil, or something in between,” noted
Winner. “But we usually do not stop to inquire whether a given device might
have been designed and built in such a way that it produces a set of
consequences” that reinforce dominant cultural values and arrangements. [32]
The same is true of the organization, especially when we realize that the
organization is itself a technology.
One More Word
Since the 1960s, scholars have written about technological determinism and the
technological imperative. The determinism theory was expressed by Ellul who
believed that “technique pursues its own course more and more independently of
man.” [33] Technology is autonomous, a self-propelled force almost like the
weather, impacting society. The year (1964) that Ellul published The
Technological Society, two now-classic movies were released that captured the
same fear. In Dr. Strangelove, the world is blown up by an atomic Doomsday
Machine whose effectiveness as a nuclear deterrent depends on the inability of
humans to control it. And in Fail Safe, the cities of Moscow and New York are
obliterated after a new Soviet jamming technology has the unpredicted effect of
causing American radar to mistakenly register a Soviet first strike. Machines had
become, according to the moral of these stories, too complex for their creators to
fully understand. More recent commentators have warned that technology
advances faster than society can adapt. Postman warned against “the surrender
of culture to technology.” [34] And French philosopher Bernhard Stiegler
observed, “Technics evolve more quickly than culture,” resulting in “a divorce…
between the rhythms of cultural evolution and the rhythms of technical
evolution.” Thus, when technology breaks the cultural “time barrier,” the effect
can be likened to the sonic boom produced by a device that travels faster than its
own sound and breaks the sound barrier. [35]
Though discussion of technological determinism has muted somewhat in recent
years, concerns about the technological imperative are as current as today’s
headlines. Should genetically reengineered crops and livestock be raised for
human consumption? Should human embryos be created and then harvested for
lifesaving stem cells? Should humans be cloned? The shorthand version of the
technological imperative is “what can be done should be done.” Arnold Pacey
put it nearly as succinctly, defining the technological imperative as “the lure of
always pushing toward the greatest feat of technical performance or complexity
which is currently available.” [36]
In organizations, the technological imperative may show up in many ways: the
determination of the marketing department to perfect a new advertising
technique or the efforts of company accountants to find every available loophole
for getting liabilities off the books (an imperative taken to its extreme in the
infamous Enron scandal). And as we noted at the outset of this chapter, an
imperative to optimize efficiency drove Nazi bureaucrats to perfect the
technology of genocide. As Paul Dombrowski noted, “In Nazi Germany, the
distinction between means and ends became so blurred that what was technically
possible came to be sought almost for its own sake. The result [was] a circular
sort of justification: What we can do, we should do, largely because we can do
it.” [37]
KEY TAKEAWAY
Karl Marx noted in the 1860s that the complexity of industrial
machines meant only people with capital could own the means of
production. Yet faith in technological progress was widespread in
the nineteenth century. By the early twentieth century, the
scientific management advocated by Frederick Taylor and the
assembly-line division of labor espoused by Henry Ford were the
dominant approaches to organization. But the mechanized
slaughter of World Wars I (1914–1918) and II (1939–1945) shook
faith in technology. From the mid-twentieth century onward,
scholars began to realize that our tools are not merely “neutral”
instruments whose designs are “natural” outcomes of the tasks
they are intended to perform. Technology shapes society, and
society shapes technology. Technology expands until it becomes
part of the world as we understand it, fostering a society that
favors cause-effect reasoning and means-end calculation. In turn,
the values of the society—its cultural norms, dominant interests,
power relations—are reflected in the designs of its technologies.
Since the mid-twentieth century, numerous thinkers have shaped
the discussion of technology and society. Lewis Mumford held that
new technologies are preceded by changing societal desires.
Martin Heidegger argued that modern technology requires nature
to be “enframed” so that it becomes a “standing reserve” that
supplies the needs of technology; humans have thereby altered
their own being to themselves become a standing reserve for
technology. Jacques Ellul and William Barrett wrote that the root
of modern technological society is a mind-set that always looks
for some “technique” to address every problem. Jurgen Habermas
called this technical reasoning, which favors a “what works”
calculation; our modern-day rational society has thus supplanted
the practical reasoning based on consensus that prevailed in
precapitalist traditional society. Edward Hall posited the
phenomenon of extension transference as the invention of one
tool necessitates the invention of more tools to make and
maintain the original tool; thus technology becomes more and
more distanced from human capacity until it is absorbed into a
society’s culture.
Scholars and philosophers of technology have long voiced
concerns about technological determinism and the technological
imperative. Technological determinism is the idea that technology
has become an autonomous force in our society, like the weather,
and can impact society in unpredictable ways. This idea
encompasses the concern that modern technology has become
too complex for even its creators to fully understand its operations
and effects. The technological imperative is the impulse that says,
“If it can be done, then it should be done,” so the perfection of a
technology becomes its own justification. The issue of human
cloning is an example of this concern. Technological determinism
and the technological imperative are everyday concerns in
organizations. For example, the marketing department might be
driven to perfect a new advertising technique without fully
understanding its impact on consumer psychology or asking if the
technique is ethical.
EXERCISES
1. Think of communication and information technologies introduced
in your lifetime. A partial list might include personal computers,
laptop computers, notepad computers, e-book readers, e-mail,
instant messaging, web chat rooms, streaming audio and video,
dial-up Internet access, high-speed Internet access, Windows 95,
Windows 98, Windows Vista, MySpace, Facebook, YouTube, cell
phones, smartphones, Palm Pilots, Blackberrys, blogging, texting,
tweeting, satellite radio, satellite TV, high-definition TV, flat-screen
TV, TiVo, CDs, CD-ROMs, DVDs, Blu-ray, Netflix, Redbox, Xbox,
PlayStation. Perhaps you can remember the first time you used
some of these technologies. Think about some that have
impacted your life and ask yourself, How does each technology
reflect the values of our society? How has each shaped the way
that our society thinks about the world?
2. Think once again about the technologies you considered in
Exercise 1. Now try to explain those technological developments
according to the theories of Lewis Mumford, Martin Heidegger,
Jacques Ellul and William Barrett, Jurgen Habermas, and Edward
Hall.
3. One more time, reflect on the technologies you considered in
Exercises 1 and 2. Do any of them demonstrate the effects of
technological determinism—that is, have any of the technologies
impacted society in unpredicted ways that seem to be
independent of human control? Also, do any on your list of
technologies reflect the triumph of the technological imperative?
(One example might be the perfection of a social networking site
that gathers all possible data about users despite concerns for
Fordism :
Taylorism:
Culture Industry:
Extension Transference :
High-Context Technology:
Low-Context Technology:
Megamachines:
Megatechnics :
Technical Reasoning:
their privacy.)
KEY TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
A philosophy of industrial organization and division of labor based on the assembly-line mass-production techniques made famous by Henry Ford.
A philosophy of management based on the principles of Frederick Taylor and that regards management as a science capable of discovering universal laws.
Term coined by Max Horkheimer and Theodore Adorno to describe the organs of popular mass culture that stimulate mass consumption of mass-produced goods.
The process, described by Edward Hall, whereby technology is distanced from individual humans as invention of an original tool—which directly extends a human capacity—also requires more tools to manipulate the original tool, and so on.
Technology that, according to Edward Hall, has become distanced from individual humans so that, rather than being used by personal intention to manipulate the world, it has been absorbed into the culture and become part of the world.
Technology that, according to Edward Hall, remains relatively close to the human capacity that the technology extends.
Term coined by Lewis Mumford to describe “machines” in which human beings are the components
Term coined by Lewis Mumford to describe the process of industrial expansion fueled by production of goods designed not to last but to be replaced.
According to Jurgen Habermas, the modern age has supplanted “practical reasoning” based on consensus with “technical
Technics :
Technique :
Technological Determinism:
Technological Imperative:
Technopoly:
reasoning” that seeks solutions based on rational calculation of means and ends.
Term coined by Lewis Mumford to describe the interplay between technology and society; he held that widespread adoption of new technologies is preceded by a reorientation of societal values.
A societal mind-set, described by Jacques Ellul and William Barrett, that seeks out some “technique” as the answer to any problem.
The idea that technology has become an autonomous force, like weather, that can impact society in unpredictable ways.
The idea that “if it can be done, then it should be done,” so perfection of a technology becomes the primary rationale and overrides other ethical considerations.
A society in which, argued Neil Postman, the primary goal of work and thought is efficiency, technical calculation supersedes human judgment, and human affairs are guided by experts.
[1] Miller, C. R. (1978). Technology as a form of consciousness: A study
of contemporary ethos. Central States Speech Journal, 29, 228–236, p.
232.
[2] Alvesson, M. (2002). Understanding organizational culture. Thousand
Oaks, CA: Sage, p. 190.
[3] Marx, K. (1992). Capital: A critique of political economy (S. Moore & E.
B. Aveling, Trans.). London, UK: Penguin. (Original work published 1867)
[4] Layton, E. (1986). The revolt of the engineers: Social responsibility
and the American engineering profession. Baltimore, MD: Johns Hopkins
University Press, p. 136.
[5] Gramsci, A. (1971). Selections from the prison notebooks (Q. Hoare &
G. N. Smith, Trans.). New York, NY: International.
[6] Horkheimer, M., & Adorno, T. (2002). The dialectic of enlightenment
(E. Jephcott, Trans.). Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press. (Original
work published 1944)
[7] Mumford, L. (1934). Technics and civilization. New York, NY: Harcourt,
Brace, Jovanovich, p. 3.
[8] Mumford, L. (1967). The myth of the machine, Vol. 1: Technics and
human development. New York, NY: Harcourt, Brace, Jovanovich; and
Mumford, L. (1970). The myth of the machine, Vol. 2: The pentagon of
power. New York, NY: Harcourt, Brace, Jovanovich.
[9] Heidegger, M. (1977). The question concerning technology and other
essays (W. Lovitt, Trans.). New York, NY: Harper & Row. (Original work
published 1953)
[10] Heidegger, M. (1977). The question concerning technology and other
essays (W. Lovitt, Trans.). New York, NY: Harper & Row, p. 16. (Original
work published 1953)
[11] Heidegger, M. (1977). The question concerning technology and other
essays (W. Lovitt, Trans.). New York, NY: Harper & Row, p. 18. (Original
work published 1953)
[12] Ellul, J. (1964). The technological society (J. Wilkinson, Trans.). New
York, NY: Vintage.
[13] Barret, W. C. (1978). The illusion of technique: A search for meaning
in technological civilization. Garden City, NY: Doubleday Anchor.
[14] Habermas, J. (1971). Knowledge and human interests (J. Shapiro,
Trans.). Boston, MA: Beacon.
[15] Habermas, J. (1970). Toward a rational society (J. S. Shapiro,
Trans.). Boston, MA: Beacon.
[16] Moses, M., & Katz, S. B. (2006). The phantom machine: The
invisible ideology of email (A cultural critique). In Scott, J. B., Longo, B., &
Wills, K. V. (Eds.), Critical power tools: Technical communication and
cultural studies (pp. 71–102). Albany: State University of New York
Press, p. 79.
[17] Hall, E. T. (1977). Beyond culture. Garden City, NY: Doubleday
Anchor.
[18] Miller, C. R. (1978). Technology as a form of consciousness: A study
of contemporary ethos. Central States Speech Journal, 29, 228–236, p.
231.
[19] Postman, N. (1992). Technopoly: The surrender of culture to
technology. New York, NY: Vintage, p. 51.
[20] Miller, C. R. (1978). Technology as a form of consciousness: A study
of contemporary ethos. Central States Speech Journal, 29, 228–236, p.
232.
[21] Galbraith, J. K. (1971). The new industrial state (2nd ed.). Boston,
MA: Houghton Mifflin, p. 84.
[22] Mumford, L. (1970). The myth of the machine, Vol. 2: The pentagon
of power. New York, NY: Harcourt, Brace, Jovanovich.
[23] Samovar, L. A., Porter, R. E., McDaniel, E. R., & Roy, C. S. (2013).
Communication between cultures (8th ed.). Boston, MA: Wadsworth, p.
199.
[24] Leeds-Hurwitz, W. (1990). Notes in the history of intercultural
communication: The Foreign Service Institute and the mandate for
intercultural training. Quarterly Journal of Speech, 76, 262–281.
[25] Kluckhohn, F. R., & Strodtbeck, F. L. (1961). Variations in value
orientations. Evanston, IL: Row, Peterson.
[26] Samovar, L. A., Porter, R. E., McDaniel, E. R., & Roy, C. S. (2013).
Communication between cultures (8th ed.). Boston, MA: Wadsworth, pp.
195–196.
[27] Henley, W. E. (1888). A book of verses. London, UK: Nutt.
[28] Fenner, G. H., & Renn, R. W. (2004). Technology-assisted
supplemental work: Construct definition and a research framework.
Human Resource Management, 43, 179–200.
[29] Fenner, G. H., & Renn, R. W. (2010). Technology-assisted
supplemental work and work-to-family conflict: Management role of
instrumentality beliefs, organizational expectations and time. Human
Relations, 63, 63–82, p. 65.
[30] Moses, M., & Katz, S. B. (2006). The phantom machine: The
invisible ideology of email (A cultural critique). In J. B. Scott, B. Longo, &
K. V. Wills (Eds.), Critical power tools: Technical communication and
cultural studies (pp. 71–102). Albany: State University of New York
Press.
[31] Winner, L. (1980). Do artifacts have politics? Daedalus, 109(1), 121–
136.
[32] Winner, L. (1980). Do artifacts have politics? Daedalus, 109(1), 121–
136.
[33] Ellul, J. (1964). The technological society (J. Wilkinson, Trans.). New
York, NY: Vintage, p. 135.
[34] Postman, N. (1992). Technopoly: The surrender of culture to
technology. New York, NY: Vintage.
[35] Stiegler, B. (1998). Technics and time, 1: The fault of Epimetheus (R.
Beardsworth & G. Collins, Trans.). Stanford, CA: Stanford University
Press, p. 15. (Original work published 1994)
[36] Pacey, A. (1983). The culture of technology. Oxford, UK: Basil
Blackwell, p. 79.
[37] Dombrowski, P. (2000). Ethics in technical communication. Boston,
MA: Allyn & Bacon, p. 103.
11.2 Technology and Organizational Structure
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
1. Identify and describe the three major views of organizational
structure: dimensional, configurational, and communicative.
2. Understand the impacts of new communication and information
technologies on organizational dimensions, configurations, and
structuration.
3. Describe new organizational forms that are emerging due to the
impacts of new communication and information technologies.
Many who are reading this textbook have lived their entire lives with computers
and cell phones. Yet you can remember the time when everybody started
networking on MySpace and Facebook, when everybody started posting pictures
and videos, and when everybody started texting and tweeting. You can
remember what life was like before those methods of communication: when your
computer sat on a desk, when you spent hours e-mailing to connect with friends,
and when your cell phone handled nothing but voice calls. How has your life
changed through today’s new methods of communication?
Whether or not you have started your career or have been a permanent full-time
employee, you can probably imagine how the lives of organizations have also
changed due to new methods of communication. Just as you now structure your
activities differently to achieve your personal goals, organizations structure their
activities differently to achieve corporate goals. The difference is that, while you
communicate for socializing and leisure, organizations communicate to
accomplish work.
To appreciate the difference, think about a group project you may have done for
a class—perhaps even your organizational communication class. The members
of your group may have joked around and chatted about sports or the weather,
but you communicated primarily to work on your project. Just imagine trying to
do your group project without texting each other, without e-mail, or even without
cell phones. You would rely more on face-to-face meetings. And you would
structure your group work differently. Without the ability to share files, you
would assign each part of the project to an individual member who would do his
or her part alone, rather than splitting up into partners or small teams. In turn,
that would force you to allow more time when it came to assembling everyone’s
contributions into a group product.
The link between technology and work has in many ways driven the career of
our coauthor, Mark Ward. As a novice newspaper writer in the 1970s, he
composed articles on a typewriter and sent them downstairs to be typeset.
Writing and production were then organized into separate functions. In the
1980s, as US companies downsized in response to globalization, outsourcing
became common. Mark began freelancing for magazines to supplement his
income—first typing and mailing his articles, then faxing them, then sending
floppy disks, then e-mailing his stories. By the 1990s, desktop publishing
became the norm. Computerization allowed publishers to outsource writing,
editing, and production, saving the overhead cost of an in-house staff. Mark lost
his day job but prospered as a freelancer. And the old divide between writing and
production had blurred, so that Mark now wrote stories, located photographs,
and created packages for both print and online publication. After the new
century dawned, he had enough clients to freelance full time and earn more than
his old staff job ever paid. Yet he missed the sense of belonging that came with a
permanent job for a single organization. So Mark socked away some of the
money he was making, put himself through graduate school, became a professor,
now teaches both traditional and online classes—and coauthored a textbook on
organizational communication that is available in printed and electronic
versions!
The range of communication technologies Mark experienced is vast: typewriters,
typesetting, newspapers, magazines, postal mail, fax machines, personal
computers, desktop publishing, e-mail, the Internet, face-to-face learning, online
learning, printed books, electronic books. As you reflect on the story, consider
these questions:
How did each technology change communication within organizations?
How did each technology change the ways that organizations structured
themselves to accomplish work?
How did organizations adapt to survive?
How did individuals adapt?
Whose interests were served?
The ensuing discussion focuses on two technologies that have special impact on
organizational structure: communication technologies and information
technologies. These have been the object of much research because, as Janet
Fulk and Gerardine Desanctis noted, “Organizational forms have traditionally
been designed to achieve coordination and control in the presence of significant
time and distance barriers.” [1] In other words, organizations have control
structures because coordination—which is achieved through communication of
information—is required to overcome gaps in time and distance. For example, in
the late nineteenth century as US companies grew from owner-operated shops to
multisite corporations, the business memo evolved to handle internal
communications. Then, after typewriters were introduced, headings were added
and the vertical filing system was invented to facilitate document retrieval. [2]
But what is the effect on organizational structures if the barriers of time and
distance are obliterated? Predictions of a coming Computer Revolution began in
the 1960s. [3] However, by the 1970s and 1980s, experts realized that more was
happening than simply an increase in computing power. A 1986 survey by James
Beniger [4] found the “Age of Information” [5] was first proclaimed in 1971, the
“Information Revolution” [6] in 1974, the “Information Economy” [7] in 1977,
the “Information Society” [8] in 1981. At the time, the only computers were
room-sized mainframes, while the small ARPANET (Advanced Research
Projects Agency Network) was used only by a handful of government-funded
researchers. Yet even before personal computing and the Internet, it was clear
that increased computing power was impacting organizations in three vital areas:
productivity, through the ability to automate routine operations; knowledge
management, through the ability to process and generate information; and
control, through the ability to set norms and identify deviations.
The revolution was not instantaneous. A 1986 cover story in Fortune magazine
lamented “The Puny Payoff in Office Computers.” [9] Though computing power
in the United States had tripled between 1970 and 1990, real gains in
productivity seemed illusory. [10] However, Erik Byrnjolfsson [11] and Paul
Strassman [12] found in separate studies that organizations were asking the wrong
question. There was no straight-line correlation between what a company spent
on information technology (IT) and the company’s productivity. As Strassman
explained, the same machines that boost productivity in one organization can
lower it in another. Computers, he pointed out, “enhance sound business
practices. They also aggravate inefficiencies…The problem seems to rest not
with the inherent capabilities of the technologies, which are awesome, but with
the managerial inability to use them effectively.” [13] The key, then, was not to
acquire IT systems and use them to enhance existing organizational processes.
Instead (as Mark discovered when his job was outsourced and he became a
freelancer) to restructure those work processes in ways that optimized the
technology. That is the phenomenon we will explore next.
Understanding Organizational Structure
As communication technologies overcome time and space, researchers are
studying the emergence of new organizational forms such as the virtual
organization and the networked organization. At the same time, studies of new
information technologies have turned up mixed results. In some organizations,
these systems have led to greater centralization by eliminating middle
management and giving leaders direct control, but other organizations have
become more decentralized as leaders depend on a new breed of “knowledge
workers” to manipulate and interpret ever-increasing streams of data.
Nevertheless, understanding the impacts of communication and information
technologies must begin with some basics about organizational structure. We
must grasp the fundamental nature of these structures before we can speculate
how new technologies have impacted them. In their survey of the literature on
organizational structure, Robert McPhee and Marshall Scott Poole identified
three views that dominate research: dimensional, configurational, and
communicative. [14]
Dimensional View of Structure
In the traditional dimensional view, structures are adopted by organizations to
address three basic issues: pattern, formalization, and centralization. First, the
pattern of an organization addresses three problems: vertical hierarchy, or the
chain of command; horizontal differentiation, or the division of labor; and
organizational size, whether large or small or in between. Organizational
structure likewise reflects the degree to which an organization formalizes its
policies and procedures, whether formally through written documents or
informally through verbal or tacit agreement. Finally, organizational structures
reflect the degree to which authority tends to be centralized at the top or
decentralized across the hierarchy. Studies affirm, report McPhee and Poole, that
each variable influences the amounts, types, effects, and perceptions of
communication between organization members in important ways.
Configurational View of Structure
The configurational view looks to identify and name organizational types.
Some scholars study organizations in the field and infer from their observations
the existence of various types [15]; others start from theory, work out different
types, and then identify organizations that fit the hypothesized configurations.
Henry Mintzberg employed the latter approach to develop an influential
typology of organizational configurations. [16] He began by asking five
questions:
1. What are the component parts of organizations?
2. How are the components linked?
3. How do organizations coordinate work?
4. What drives decisions about structure?
5. What must be decided about structure?
Mintzberg theorized that different combinations of variables yield seven valid
organizational configurations:
1. The entrepreneurial organization
2. The machine organization
3. The professional organization
4. The diversified organization
5. The innovative organization
6. The missionary organization
7. The political organization
His theory is summarized in Figure 11.2.
Figure 11.2 Mintzberg’s Organizational Configurations
While Mintzberg theoretically worked out a list of idealized organizational
types, researchers working through field observations of actual organizations
have come to general agreement on the existence of several basic organizational
types. [17] These are summarized in Table 11.2: functional structure, divisional
structure, geographic structure, matrix structure, horizontal structure, and
network structure.
Table 11.2 Taxonomy of Organizational Configurations
Configuration Characteristics
Functional
Activities with common functions clustered together and arranged from bottom to top
Example: The company CEO oversees a VP of operations who manages the operations
staff, a VP of marketing who manages the marketing staff, and a VP of finance who
manages the accounting staff.
Divisional
Separate units are created according to their products or outputs
Example: A public-relations agency maintains a corporate-accounts division, a nonprofit-
accounts division, and a government-accounts division.
Geographic
Separate units are created according to their geographic locations
Example: A nationwide US company maintains a Northeastern Division, a Mid-Atlantic
Division, a Southeastern Division, a North Central Division, a South Central Division, a
Southwestern Division, a West Coast Division, and a Pacific Northwest Division.
Matrix
Each stage of product line is separately coordinated
Example: At an aerospace company, each stage of its commercial aircraft product line is
separately managed by its research, procurement, manufacturing, marketing, and finance
divisions. The military aircraft and the light aircraft product lines are similarly managed.
Horizontal
Cross-functional teams manage products across entire process
Example: A videogame company assigns development for each of its games to separate
teams. Each team is composed of members who represent each step of the process, from
storyboarding and level design to distribution and marketing.
Network
Central unit/organization is coordinating hub for units/organizations with specialized
roles
Example: A computer manufacturer pulls together a network of independent companies
that each play a role in the process—parts, assembly, shipping, and distribution.
Communicative View of Structure
The communicative view of organizational structure is a supplement to the
configurational and dimensional views. As McPhee and Poole explain,
“Communication is part and parcel of many configuration concepts and
permeates the organization when it is considered as a whole,” whereas the
dimensional approach to structure reduces “the organization into a number of
dimensions, most of which have limited relevance to communication per se.” [18]
The traditional dimensional perspective often takes organizational pattern,
formalization, and centralization at face value. But researchers with a
communicative view might ask the following:
How is the ostensibly hierarchical relationship between superior and
subordinate influenced by the overall organizational and communicative
context? [19]
Does formalization always act as a mechanism for rationalization and
control, or does it cut both ways and give subordinates a basis for
interpreting rules to their advantage? [20]
Can centralization always be equated with control when management in
fact strives to “produce” project teams and individual employees who
strongly identify with the company and voluntarily carry out its objectives? [21]
Other scholars who hold a communicative view start with the premise that
structure is produced by communication. We encountered this approach in
Chapter 4 and the discussion of structuration theory. There we saw how the
social actions of human practices creates structure—and how those same actions
simultaneously reproduce and perpetuate the structure by acting within what it
enables and constrains. In a body of work developed over thirty years, Poole and
McPhee have demonstrated the relevance of structuration theory to
communication studies generally [22] and applied it to the problems of
organizational climate, [23] formal structure, [24] sites of structuration, [25] and
organizational identity and identification. [26]
To summarize the discussion so far, we asked you to imagine how a group
project for one of your classes might be organized differently if you lacked
today’s technology for gathering information and communicating with the group.
And we related how one of our coauthors experienced over the decades of his
career numerous changes in organizational structures brought on by new
technologies. But to get a better idea of how technology impacts organizational
structure, we then reviewed the current literature on the basic elements of
structure. Our review has provided a framework for asking questions about the
impacts of new communication and information technologies:
How do these technologies affect—according to the dimensional view—the
patterns, formalization, and centralization of organizations?
Are these technologies driving new organizational configurations and, if so,
what are these new forms?
Are the capabilities for communicative action afforded by these
technologies producing new organizational forms and structures?
Organizational Impacts of Technology
As we saw earlier, the impact of new technology is not a simple matter of voila!
—one day a technology comes into existence and organizations merely start
using it. Organizations must simultaneously adapt to the new capabilities that the
technology affords, while gauging how the technology can be adapted to
leverage the strengths of the organization. With regard to communication
technologies, William Dutton described this dynamic as a threefold process. [27]
The technological aspect is seen in the ways that a technology enables new
forms of organizational coordination and control by reducing gaps in time and
distance—as when, in the earlier example, invention of the typewriter allowed
documents to be prepared with standard headings that made them easy to file
and retrieve. The organizational aspect is seen in the ways that organizations
design or customize a technology to their needs—for example, when a company
configures a new phone system or server network, or writes customized
software, which tailors the technology to its specific needs. The emergent aspect
is seen in the ways that technologies and organizations dynamically interact; a
new technology provides an occasion for an organization to create new forms
while, conversely, the new form calls forth new uses or capabilities out of the
technology. For example, after organizations adapted to the convenience of
interoffice e-mail, in time they realized that “broadcast e-mails” to potential
customers could be an effective marketing tool. This threefold dynamic is
represented in Figure 11.3.
Figure 11.3 Dutton’s Technology/Organization Dynamic
With this in mind, let us look, in turn, at how new communication and
information technologies may be impacting organizational dimensions (i.e.,
patterns, formalization, and centralization), configurations, and structuration.
Impacts on Organizational Dimensions
Recall that the traditional dimensional view of organizational structure focuses
on three issues: pattern, formalization, and centralization. An organization’s
pattern is, first of all, determined by its size, vertical hierarchy (chain of
command), and horizontal differentiation (division of labor). A second
component of organizational structure is formalization of its rules and
procedures: some organizations emphasize formal written documents, and others
work more informally through verbal agreement or unwritten rules that are taken
for granted. The third component of structure is the degree to which authority is
centralized; that is, whether coordination and control functions are concentrated
at the top or dispersed throughout the organization. Janet Fulk and Gerardine
Desanctis reviewed the literature on communication technology and its impacts
on organizational forms, and their analysis can be broken down according to the
three dimensions of organizational structure. [28]
Technology and Organizational Pattern
Studies suggest that advances in communication and information technologies
have prompted organizations to “reengineer” themselves. Their goals are to
reduce overhead, divest underperforming divisions and units, focus on their core
activities, and coordinate those activities through a single cross-functional unit
rather than monitoring each activity through a separate office. The net result,
reported Fulk and Desanctis, is an overall reduction in the size of these
organizations and their staffs.
During the hundred years between the late nineteenth century and late twentieth
century, vertical integration was a favored model for organizational structure.
Thus, for example, major oil companies sought to own every phase of their
business—from oil exploration and production (the upstream), to supply and
distribution (the midstream), to the familiar corner gas station (the downstream).
But since the late twentieth century, widespread adoption of new communication
and information technologies has spurred market-based alliances rather than
vertical hierarchies. Thus ExxonMobil, BP, Shell, and Chevron continue to own
and operate refineries (the upstream) but now deliver gasoline to wholesalers
(the midstream), who in turn supply fuel to independently owned chains of gas
stations (the downstream). [29] This illustrates a trend described by Fulk and
Desanctis: each segment can focus on what it does best—production (upstream),
distribution (midstream), retailing (downstream)—and then use today’s
communication and information technologies to ensure each party optimally
holds up its part of the alliance. The independent gas-station chain goes online to
track fuel shipments and ensure the wholesaler delivers at the right time, place,
quantity, and price; the wholesaler goes online to check daily oil prices and uses
that information to negotiate advantageous fuel supply contracts with the oil
company and so on. Instant communication and information also permits
organizations to shift their alliances, or engage in multiple alliances, as the
market dictates.
Finally, new technologies are impacting horizontal differentiation—the division
of labor—within organizations. To describe how new communication and
information systems are shaping organizational forms, Fulk and Desanctis prefer
the term horizontal coordination to horizontal differentiation. We have already
seen how organizations today outsource activities, often through horizontal
market-based alliances, that they once performed themselves. Also,
organizations that once had separate offices to monitor each of their activities
now use technology to monitor multiple functions through a single office.
Because of computers and digital connectivity, the vice president of that
independent gas-station chain can sit at a desktop computer screen and—like
looking at the dashboard of a car—see at a glance how the chain’s one hundred
locations that day are performing: at fuel sales, at snack and drink sales, at car
wash sales—as well as how much fuel remains in each station’s underground
storage tanks and when, based on average sales, the wholesaler must deliver
more fuel to fill the tanks. If any of these variables deviate from normal
parameters, the vice president can set the system to flag the deviation and send
instant e-mail and text alerts to all personnel concerned. This is an example of
what Fulk and Desanctis called stockless production, since the computer system
can be set to automatically place an order with the wholesaler when more fuel is
needed. Thus, the gas station owner orders only what is needed, when it is
needed, and (at current gasoline prices) avoids spending thousands of dollars on
product only to have it sit useless in the underground storage tank for weeks.
Not only can the monitoring of activities be integrated, but so can the activities
themselves. Workflows in organizations have historically been sequential: when
one phase of design and production was finished, it was passed along to the
office responsible for the next phase. Today, technology makes it possible for
units to share work and information; products can be designed and manufactured
with different offices working concurrently and in parallel with each other. Many
organizations are moving to self-directed work teams (SDWTs), or teams whose
members work cross-functionally and take responsibility for determining their
own procedures for fulfilling corporate goals. (SDWTs can even be formed on a
per-project or ad hoc basis.) Since team members may work in different
locations, “group support technologies” have been developed.
Technology and Organizational Formalization
Consider another reason today’s technologies promote horizontal coordination
rather than differentiation. The effectiveness of communication and information-
sharing technologies depends on everyone in a network being connected, pulling
from the same database, and using the same protocols for encoding and
transmitting data. In turn, this suggests that protocols for communicating and
sharing information are a significant focus of formalization—the codification of
rules and procedures—in modern organizations. Fulk and Desanctis highlight the
importance of communication with a simple illustration: “With the well-
documented shift from manufacturing to services in most developed economies
has come a focus on manipulating information and symbols rather than physical
products.… Communication rather than transportation systems become the
fundamental constraints for organization design.” [30]
The shift from physical production to information production raises new
challenges for the formalization and codification of rules and procedures. For
example, in manufacturing a physical product, a company can easily distinguish
the finished product from the process that created it. Product and process can be
evaluated by separate protocols: Does the finished product meet its design
specifications? Does the manufacturing process attain the desired productivity?
But when organizations are producing information, whether internally or as a
service to clients, the process and the product are indistinguishable—indeed, the
process is the product. This simple yet far-reaching fact has enormous
consequences for an organization’s rules and procedures. A physical product can
be evaluated by specifications formulated internally by the organization. An
intangible product such as information requires other measures—perhaps
comparing the process to “best practices” within the industry or embedding a
customer-satisfaction measure in the process.
Finally, as new technologies enable formerly separate functions to be integrated
at a single cross-functional location, the streams of information at that location
multiply. The specter of information overloads rears its head. To deal with all
this information, organizations must “manage by exception” and employ
computer-aided tools to help them do so. For this reason, a key aspect for
modern organizations in writing formalized rules is the codification of statistical
norms and what constitutes deviations. With that, organizations can set their
computer systems to automatically monitor norms and instantly flag deviations
and resolve them by predetermined rules. In this way—to continue with our
example of the corner gas station—the vice president at chain headquarters is
swiftly alerted when a fuel storage tank is low, a gas pump is out of paper to
print receipts, the car wash is jammed, and sales of coffee for the past week are
down. The computer can even respond automatically: e-mailing an order to the
wholesaler for another fuel delivery, texting the station manager to replace the
receipt paper, faxing an emergency request to the car wash repair company, and
lowering the price for a cup of coffee.
Technology and Organizational Centralization
The example just described also illustrates another trend reported by Fulk and
Desanctis: “Perhaps the most common observation in discussions of new
organizational forms is the dwindling ranks of the middle manager and the
associated flattening of hierarchies. This change is often attributed to
communication and related information technology subsuming the coordination
and control roles of managers and staff.” [31] Yet despite this point of general
agreement, Fulk and Desanctis describe a “centralization-decentralization
debate” in which they discern five different views among organizational
communication researchers:
1. Some researchers argue that new technologies are fostering more
centralization as middle managers are eliminated and organizational leaders
deploy technology to set norms and monitor progress.
2. On the other hand, some researchers contend that new technologies lessen
centralization; as communication and information are dispersed more
widely, local offices have access to company-wide data and are equipped to
make local and on-the-spot decisions.
3. Still other scholars have discerned simultaneous centralization and
decentralization as local offices gain the information resources to make
local decisions, but central offices likewise gain the means to monitor local
performance.
4. Some studies, however, have reported cases where organization members
manipulate the adoption and implementation of new technology to reinforce
existing power structures—for example, when companies equip employees
with e-mail accounts but then monitor their communications.
5. A fifth view argues that technology is neutral: its effects on organizational
structure are driven by context and thus depend on the complex interactions
among people, technology, and organizational processes.
Impacts on Organizational Configurations
As we saw earlier, Mintzberg deduced the existence of seven organizational
configurations by theorizing how the elements that make up an organization
might be differently combined. Organizations have six components, he
theorized, plus seven possible choices for how to coordinate work. Thus, an
organization whose leadership coordinates work by direct supervision is
“entrepreneurial,” an organization whose technical experts coordinate work by
standardizing outputs is a “machine,” an organization whose operations
personnel coordinate work by standardizing skills is “professional,” and so on.
But extending Mintzberg’s model—which he developed in the 1970s and refined
in the 1980s—to today’s technologized workplace raises two questions. . The
first question is, does the widespread adoption of new communication and
information technologies alter Mintzberg’s six organizational components and
seven coordination mechanisms? Figure 11.4 suggests how his model might be
revised in light of technological developments since the 1980s.
Figure 11.4 Mintzberg’s Model Reconsidered
A generation ago, middle managers comprised a significant portion of the
organizational structure. Further, to oversee operations these managers were
aided by technical experts and other support staff. Today, the operations of many
companies are their technological outputs of information and communication,
while a smaller cadre of middle managers supports the technostructure—for
example, by facilitating integration of various processes into a single cross-
functional location. Then, too, additions to Mintzberg’s seven coordination
mechanisms may be needed. Along with standardization of work, skills, outputs,
and norms, organizations now strive—as we have seen—to coordinate activity
through standardization of information (via shared protocols and databases) and
communication (via shared connectivity). In addition to Mintzberg’s list of
organizational configurations (entrepreneurial, machine, professional,
diversified, innovative, missionary, political), can you think of names for
organizations that coordinate activity by relying on their technostructure to
standardize information and communication?
The second question raised by Mintzberg’s model is a fundamental issue that
organizational scholars today are wrestling with. He envisioned each
organization as a self-contained entity; his theory proposed that the configuration
of any organization can be determined by examining its internal logics. How
organizations coordinate their own activities, rather than how they interact with
their environments, is the key to his typology. However, today’s communication
and information technologies obliterate time and distance not only between an
organization’s various components but also between an organization and other
organizations. As we saw earlier, vertically integrated companies are
increasingly giving way to companies that focus on a core activity they do best
and then forming strategic alliances with other companies. Today, an
organization can actually be an “organization of organizations.” Further, such an
organization of organizations need not be permanent but can shift or change or
dissolve as needed.
This configuration has come to be known as the network organization. Yet
such an “organization of organizations” can take multiple forms:
A large company may create a satellite network of independent suppliers
—a model typified by Dell Computers, which takes consumer orders and
then draws from a network of component suppliers to create and ship a
made-to-order machine.
A consortium of equal partners may network to form a joint venture—for
example, when Japanese consumer-electronics giant Sony wanted to enter
the mobile phone market in 2001 and partnered 50/50 with the Swedish
telecom firm Ericsson.
To perform a specific project, a “broker” organization may pull together a
dynamic network of several other organizations, each of which plays a
different role—as when a real estate developer enlists an architect and
general contractor to formulate a “design/build” proposal. Rather than do
the project sequentially—first the design, then the construction—the
functions are performed in parallel as the architect drafts a design, the
builder estimates feasibility and cost, and the architect accordingly modifies
the design.
Finally, much attention has been drawn to the virtual organization whose
participants are linked solely by technology—as seen in Mark Ward’s story
of magazines published through the work of freelance writers, freelance
editors, freelance designers, and freelance webmasters who electronically
gather and develop content and then electronically transmit it for printed
and online publication.
Each of these organizational configurations deploys, in various combinations, six
strategies described by Marshall Scott Poole—and listed in Table 11.3—for
forming networks. [32]
Table 11.3 Poole's Strategies of Network Organizations
Strategy Communication and information systems are used to...
Integration Reengineer processes, achieve cross-functionality, and thus respond more quickly and
effectively to customer demands and market conditions
Modularity Flexibly reconfigure structures as needed; modules may be units within a larger
organization or independent organizations working in alliance
Geographic
Coordination
Coordinate dispersed work units and individuals; in a virtual organization, participants
are linked only by technology
Horizontal
Coordination
Coordinate horizontally related work units and individuals, thus flattening vertical
hierarchy and distributing power laterally
Team-Based Facilitate work by autonomous and self-managing teams in order to optimize quality
and achieve continuous improvement
Market-Based Substitute market mechanisms for vertical hierarchy as a means for mediating
transactions within and between organizations
Impacts on Organizational Structuration
Recall that a communicative view of organizational structure starts with the
premise that structure is a product of communication. This assumption leads us
back to structuration theory, which we encountered in Chapter 4. To resolve the
dilemma of structure—does human agency create structure, or does structure
determine human actions?—the theory posits a duality of structure. This
concept holds that human actions create structures through repeated social
practices, while that same agency validates and reproduces structures by acting
within what the structures enable and constrain. Thus, structures are
simultaneously an outcome of, and a medium for, social action. Following this
logic, Wanda Orlikowski proposed that a duality of technology operates within
organizations. [33] Her theory advances four propositions: technology is (1) an
outcome of and (2) a medium for human action, even as the organization (3) is a
context for human interactions with technology and (4) is impacted by those
interactions.
This dynamic was elaborated by Ronald Rice and Urs Gattiker in their review of
the literature on new media and organizational structure. [34] First, new
communication and information technologies do not enter organizations with a
clean slate; people do not simply take a machine out of the box, read the user
manual, and start communicating or processing information as the product
designers envisioned. “Many assumptions [are] built into our notions and
experiences of organizational communication and structure that are based on
how people interact and communicate within and across organizations,” Rice
and Gattiker noted. Thus, “our understandings of organizational
communication, structure, and media are all influenced by preexisting media and
structures, and in turn influence the development of new structures and media.” [35]
Organizational structures comprise dimensions but also meanings and
relationships, which in turn can both enable and constrain certain uses of new
technologies. By the same token, new technologies can impact organizational
structures by enabling and constraining certain meanings and relationships. In
this way, users of a company’s new e-mail system might initially follow the
conventions of business memos. But later, as the technology impacts how office
relationships are structured, e-mails become more conversational in tone. Or
voice mail might at first be perceived as a “fancy” answering machine for
requesting a conversation. But then, as its message storing and forwarding
capabilities alter client relationships, voice mail becomes a way to extend
conversations beyond real-time constraints.
Though most research on new media and organizational structure has not been
informed by structuration theory, Rice and Gattiker surveyed the research
findings and interpreted them within a structurational framework. [36] They
found that the research clustered around three problems: (1) How are new
communication and information technologies adopted and implemented by
organizations? (2) How do these technologies transform organizational structures
—and conversely, how do these structures transform the technologies? (3) How
do the transformations become institutionalized? Thus, as shown in Table 11.4,
organizations that implement new communication technologies initially interpret
their use according to existing media and communication patterns.
Table 11.4 Organizational Implementation of New Media
New media are initially used... Example
according to norms for existing
media
e-mails are likened to memos
according to norms of
organizational culture employees don't send e-mails to the boss
according to existing
communication networks employees e-mail people in their own offices most often
after others have adopted a given
function a project team member uses a wiki because others now do so
as enabled or constrained by the
environment
office traffic patterns, ease of access, ambient distractions, and
privacy influence media use
Next, as illustrated in Table 11.5, members of the organization gradually become
accustomed to using the capabilities afforded by new media so that processes of
communication and work itself are transformed.
Table 11.5 Organizational Transformation through New Media
Members gradually learn... Example
message content lends itself to new e-mails are initially formal in tone but over time
communication patterns become more informal
message forms require new communication
patterns
an employee who receives a group e-mail learns to
follow multiple response threads
to deal with instantaneous and asynchronous
aspects of new media body
brief e-mails are more likely to be read in a
conversation thread with multiple users
group activities fit procedures facilitated by
group software
members e-mail each other less when group
announcements are posted online
work evolves as new media enable new
communication patterns
projects are increasingly managed by cross-functional
teams
Finally, the transformation of communication and work processes enabled by
new media is institutionalized until, as shown in Table 11.6, these changes
become the new norms for the organization and its members.
Table 11.6 Organizational Institutionalization of New Media
Use of new media... Example
alters power relations
at one organization, increased horizontal communication
flattens hierarchy; at another, leaders use monitoring to extend
control
realigns and often expands
communication networks use
increased access and horizontal flow can broaden and
democratize participation in communication situations such as
meetings
has led to emergence of new
organizational forms
the “network organization” is an alliance of independent
organizations that collaborate via the Internet
flattens vertical hierarchies and reduces
emphasis on clear organizational
boundaries
new communication technologies encourage leaner
organizations and new possibilities for alliances between
organizations
Why It Matters to You
In this chapter section, we first reviewed the basic elements of organizational
structure and then explored how new communication and information
technologies are impacting the ways that organizations are structured and
coordinate work. If not already, someday you will be pursuing your career within
the context of today’s organizations and their structures. Your effectiveness will
be enhanced if you understand how communication—your own and your
coworkers’—is related to how the organization structures itself to accomplish its
goals. To emphasize this point, we return to an illustration used earlier—namely,
that group project you did for one of your classes.
The authors of this textbook have taught long enough to know that college
students are (at least initially) wary of group projects. You worry about
depending on others to get a good grade. You fret over meshing your approach to
the project with other members who have a different style of working. In fact,
you know that a few members are bound to slack (which—unfairly!—means
extra work for you). Then, too, you must set aside time to communicate with
everyone (whether by texting or e-mail or phone or meeting face to face).
Finally, chances are good that you may not “click” with at least one group
member and will need to spend extra time to work on your relationship for the
good of the team. How much easier and faster it would be, you tell yourself, if
you could only work alone and (of course!) produce a great project that perfectly
meets your personal standards.
But if this chapter section on technology and organizational structure has shown
you anything, the moral of the story is that today’s organizations are reducing
vertical hierarchy and leveraging technology to foster horizontal collaboration.
In other words, when you graduate and find that great job, you will be doing
group projects! And the ability to communicate effectively with your project
team—whether in meetings or by e-mail, voice mail, videoconference, online
chat, text, phone, fax, or wiki—will be essential. Perhaps you have used these
technologies only on a personal basis for social networking and leisure. Now
think of using them on a professional basis for building a project team that can
accomplish work. Then you will have no options: differences in working styles
must be resolved, slackers must be covered for and then dealt with, time must be
found in your hectic work schedule to keep in regular touch with the team and to
attend meetings (either face to face or virtually), and personality differences
must be worked out. Nor can you produce the “perfect” project by working
alone; for one thing, your boss expects a team effort and, for another, project
specifications are too complex.
Back in your college classroom, it is likely that when your group encountered a
problem over slackers or personalities, you went to the instructor for a resolution
of the situation. That was so much easier than confronting a group member and
then doing the messy job of working out broken relationships. But imagine if
you pulled the same stunt on your first job—that is, your project team bypassed
an offending member and went straight to the boss. What would the boss think?
To your face, she might say, “Your team was assigned this project and now I see
you can’t handle it.” Behind your back she might think, “Oh, no. If there are bad
vibes on that team—and they interact with other parts of the organization—their
negativity may be spreading.” Caught by surprise and worried about the overall
impact on her organization, the boss may impose a “solution” to your problem
that is less desirable (from your perspective) than the solution your team could
have worked out on its own. Meanwhile, the group member you bypassed is
furious that you went straight to the boss—before even talking to him—and is
feeling disrespected, betrayed, and distrustful of the team.
Before the Internet and digital technology, when communication and information
could not be so easily and widely shared, employees often worked alone and
then sent their individual part of the project up the chain—where the next level
of the hierarchy would do its part. Remember Mark Ward’s story? In the 1970s
and 1980s, he typed his newspaper and magazine stories on sheets of paper, sent
them to the typesetter, who sent them to the proofreader, who sent them to the
editor, who sent them to the layout staff. By the 1990s and 2000s, however,
Mark was working—entirely by e-mail and the Internet—across the various
functions: writing articles, proofing and editing his own work on a computer
screen, obtaining photographs and permissions from his sources, crafting
“advertorials” to boost ad sales, providing content for both the printed magazine
and its associated websites and blogs. And so were the magazine’s other writers
and its editorial, production, advertising, and circulation specialists.
Perhaps you may not like that group project for your next class. But it provides a
good glimpse into your professional future.
KEY TAKEAWAY
The dimensional view looks at the dimensions of organizational
structure. These dimensions are pattern (organizational size;
vertical hierarchy, i.e., chain of command; and horizontal
differentiation, i.e., division of labor), formalization (the degree to
which rules and procedures are either formally stated or,
alternatively, informally agreed), and centralization (the degree to
which authority is concentrated at the top or, alternatively,
decentralized and dispersed downward). The configurational view
identifies and names types of organizational structures. Common
structural types are functional, divisional, geographic, matrix,
horizontal, and network. The communicative view either adds a
communication perspective to the other two views or analyzes
structure as a product of communication. The latter perspective
often looks to structuration theory (see Chapter 4) as a framework
for understanding communicative production of organizational
structures.
Studies suggest that new communication and information
technologies are impacting the dimensions of organizational
structure by reducing size, reducing vertical hierarchy, reducing
horizontal differentiation (and increasing horizontal coordination),
increasing formalization of rules and procedures for sharing and
retrieving communication and information and for defining
operational norms and deviations, and reducing the number of
middle managers. New technologies are also enabling new
organizational configurations via networking. A communicative
view of organizational structuration points to the “duality of
technology” by which technology is an (1) outcome of and (2)
medium for human action, even as the organization (3) is a
context for human interactions with technology and (4) is
impacted by those interactions.
New technologies have given rise to the network organization,
which may be seen as an “organization of organizations.” The
network organization can take multiple forms. In a satellite
network, a larger company pulls together a group of independent
suppliers. In a joint venture, a group of equal partners may
network for a common purpose. A dynamic network is assembled
by a “broker” organization that recruits a team of independent
specialist organizations to handle different facets of a specific
project. Participants in a virtual organization are networked solely
through technology
EXERCISES
1. Consider the college or university you now attend. Chances are
you can go online and download its organizational chart (or, if you
must, you can request a copy in person or via e-mail). What are
the dimensions of your institution (size, vertical hierarchy,
horizontal differentiation, formalization, and centralization)? What
is its configuration (functional, divisional, geographic, matrix,
horizontal, or network)?
2. Your college or university has been impacted in numerous ways
by new communication and information technologies. First, make
a list of these technologies—from e-mail and online classes to
online course registration and digitization of student records.
Next, answer these questions: How have the technologies on
your list impacted your institution’s organizational dimensions
(e.g., by prompting formalized procedures for protecting the
privacy of student records)? How have the technologies impacted
your institution’s configuration (e.g., by creating a geographic
structure through the opening of satellite campuses and teaching
Communicative View:
Configurational View:
Dimensional View:
centers)? How do the distinctive qualities of your institution impact
its use of the technologies on your list (e.g., through a culture that
promotes innovative teaching)?
3. Finally, check your college or university’s website—if you dig
deeply, you may be surprised by the large number of networks in
which it participates. These might include research consortia,
alliances with community agencies to promote regional
development, public-private partnerships with industry to boost
job retraining, compacts with local community colleges, coalitions
with other institutions to lobby the legislature for state funding.
Make a list of these networks and then try to find examples of a
satellite network, a joint-venture network, and a dynamic network.
Next, dig even deeper in your institution’s website and see if you
can discover the technologies these networks use to
communicate and share information.
KEY TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
A view that takes communicative contexts into account when studying organizational structures, or that regards structure itself as a product of communication.
A view that identifies organizational structure according to types or configurations; some scholars study organizations in the field to discern their various configurations, while others theorize possible configurations and see how organizations fit.
A view that reduces organization structure to a matter of dimensions: size, chain of command, division of labor, formalization of
Duality Of Structure:
Duality Of Technology:
Dynamic Network:
Joint Venture:
Network Organization:
Satellite Network:
Virtual Organization:
rules and procedures, centralization or decentralization of authority.
According to structuration theory, structure is both an outcome of and a medium for social action. People create a structure through their actions but also reproduce the structure by acting within it.
Following structuration theory, technology is both an outcome of and a medium for social action. People create a technology through their actions but also reproduce its effects by acting within what the technology enables and constrains.
A form of the network organization in which a “broker” organization pulls together several other organizations that each plays a different role.
A form of the network organization that brings together two or more equal partners.
An “organization of organizations” that is integrated across formal organizational boundaries through shared communication.
A form of the network organization in which a larger company may create a network of independent suppliers.
A form of the network organization in which participants are linked solely by technology.
[1] Fulk, J., & Desanctis, G. (1999). Articulation of communication
technology and organizational form. In G. Desanctis & J. Fulk (Eds.),
Shaping organizational form: Communication, connection, and
community. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage, p. 6. L
[2] Yates, J., & Orlikowski, W. J. (1992). Genres of organizational
communication: A structurational approach to studying communication
and media. Academy of Management Review, 17, 299–326.
[3] For example, see Berkeley, E. C. (1962). The computer revolution.
New York, NY: Doubleday.
[4] Beniger, J. R. (1986). The control revolution: Technological and
economic origins of the Information Society. Cambridge, MA: Harvard
University Press.
[5] Helvey, T. C. (1971). The age of information: An interdisciplinary
survey of cybernetics. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology.
[6] Lamberton, D. M. (Ed.). (1974). The information revolution: Annals of
the American Academy of Political and Social Science. Philadelphia, PA:
American Academy of Political and Social Science.
[7] Porat, M. U. (1977). The information economy: Definition and
measurement. Washington, DC: Department of Commerce.
[8] Martin, J., & Butler, D. (1981). Viewdata and the information society.
Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall.
[9] Bowen, W. (1986, May 26). The puny payoff in office computers.
Fortune, pp. 20–24.
[10] Byrnjolfsson, E. (1993). The productivity paradox of information
technology. Communications of the ACM, 36(12), 67–77.
[11] Byrnjolfsson, E. (1993). The productivity paradox of information
technology. Communications of the ACM, 36(12), 67–77.
[12] Strassman, P. A. (1990). The business value of computers: An
executive’s guide. New Canaan, CT: Information Economics Press.
[13] Strassman, P. A. (1997, February). Will big spending on computers
guarantee profitability? Datamation, pp. 75–85.
[14] McPhee, R. D., & Poole, M. S. (2001). Organizational structures and
configurations. In F. M. Jablin & L. L. Putnam (Eds.), The new handbook
of organizational communication: Advances in theory, research, and
methods (pp. 503–543). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
[15] For example, see McKelvey, B. (1982). Organizational systematic:
Taxonomy, evolution, and classification. Berkeley: University of California
Press.
[16] Mintzberg, H. (1983). Structure in fives: Designing effective
organizations. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, p. 4.
[17] For example, see Sims, R. R. (2002). Managing organizational
behavior. Westport, CT: Quorum, chap. 11.
[18] McPhee, R. D., & Poole, M. S. (2001). Organizational structures and
configurations. In F. M. Jablin & L. L. Putnam (Eds.), The new handbook
of organizational communication: Advances in theory, research, and
methods (pp. 503–543). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage, p. 510.
[19] For example, see Yammarino, F. J., & Dubinsky, A. J. (1992).
Superior-subordinate relationships: A multiple levels of analysis
approach. Human Relations, 45, 575–600.
[20] For example, see Fairhurst, E. (1983). Organizational rules and the
accomplishment of nursing work on geriatric wards. Journal of
Management Studies, 20, 315–332.
[21] For example, see Barker, J. (1993). Tightening the iron cage:
Concertive control in self-managing teams. Administrative Science
Quarterly, 38, 408–437.
[22] McPhee, R. D., & Poole, M. S. (1980). A theory of structuration: The
perspective of Anthony Giddens and its relevance for contemporary
communication research. Paper presented at the Speech Communication
Association annual convention, New York, NY.
[23] Poole, R. D., & McPhee, M. S. (1983). A structurational analysis of
organizational climate. In L. L. Putnam & M. Pacanowski (Eds.),
Communication and organizations: An interpretive approach (pp. 195–
220). Beverly Hills, CA: Sage, p. 213.
[24] McPhee, R. D. (1985). Formal structure and organizational
communication. In R. D. McPhee & P. Tompkins (Eds.), Organizational
communication: Traditional themes and new directions (pp. 149–177).
Beverly Hills, CA: Sage.
[25] McPhee, R. D. (1989). Organizational communication: A
structurational exemplar. In B. Dervin, L. Grossberg, B. J. O’Keefe, & E.
Wartella (Eds.), Rethinking communication: Paradigm exemplars, Vol. 2
(pp. 199–212). Beverly Hills, CA: Sage; McPhee, R. D., & Zaug, P.
(2000). The communicative constitution of organizations: A framework for
explanation. Electronic Journal of Communication, 10, 1–16.
[26] Cheney, G., & Tompkins, P. K. (1987). Coming to terms with
organizational identification and commitment. Central States Speech
Journal, 38, 1–15; Scott, C. R., Corman, S. R., & Cheney, G. (1998).
Development of a structurational model of identification in the
organization. Communication Theory, 8, 298–335.
[27] Dutton, W. H. (1999). The virtual organization: Tele-access in
business and industry. In G. Desanctis & J. Fulk (Eds.), Shaping
organizational form: Communication, connection, and community (pp.
473–496). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
[28] Fulk, J., & Desanctis, G. (1999). Articulation of communication
technology and organizational form. In G. Desanctis & J. Fulk (Eds.),
Shaping organizational form: Communication, connection, and
community. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
[29] Ward, M., Sr. (2008). Independents’ day: Rhetoric, culture, and the
history of gasoline marketing in the United States, 1958–2008. Oil-
Industry History, 9, 121–142.
[30] Fulk, J., & Desanctis, G. (1999). Articulation of communication
technology and organizational form. In G. Desanctis & J. Fulk (Eds.),
Shaping organizational form: Communication, connection, and
community. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage, p. 12.
[31] Fulk, J., & Desanctis, G. (1999). Articulation of communication
technology and organizational form. In G. Desanctis & J. Fulk (Eds.),
Shaping organizational form: Communication, connection, and
community. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage, p. 14.
[32] Poole, M. S. (1999). Organizational challenges for the new forms. In
G. Desanctis & J. Fulk (Eds.), Shaping organizational form:
Communication, connection, and community (pp. 453–472). Thousand
Oaks, CA: Sage.
[33] Orlikowski, W. (1992). The duality of technology: Rethinking the
concept of technology in organizations. Organization Science, 3, 398–
427.
[34] Rice, R., & Gattiker, U. (2001). New media and organizational
structuring. In F. M. Jablin & L. L. Putnam (Eds.), The new handbook of
organizational communication: Advances in theory, research, and
methods (pp. 544–581). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
[35] Rice, R., & Gattiker, U. (2001). New media and organizational
structuring. In F. M. Jablin & L. L. Putnam (Eds.), The new handbook of
organizational communication: Advances in theory, research, and
methods (pp. 544–581). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage, p. 545.
[36] Rice, R., & Gattiker, U. (2001). New media and organizational
structuring. In F. M. Jablin & L. L. Putnam (Eds.), The new handbook of
organizational communication: Advances in theory, research, and
methods (pp. 544–581). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage, p. 545.
11.3 Technology and Organizational Communication
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
1. Delineate the social interaction approach to mediated
communication and understand the basics of the media-richness
model, social-presence theory, and social information-processing
theory.
2. Delineate the social integration approach to mediated
communication and understand how various media influence the
way we think and the ways we form communities.
3. Relate the effects of computer-mediated communication (CMC) to
everyday communication within organizations.
So far in this chapter, we have explored the impact of technology on society (the
environment in which organizations operate and which in many ways they
reflect) and on organizational structure (the framework that organizations adopt
to coordinate work). Now to conclude, we move to the impact of technology on
how people in organizations communicate. Since this is not a textbook on media
theory, we will provide only some basic theoretical concepts to get started. And
since this chapter is not about interpersonal communication in general, but about
technology in organizations, we will focus on mediated communication—in
particular, computer-mediated communication (CMC). This includes
technologies now widely used in organizations: e-mail, voice mail, audio- and
videoconferencing, computer conferencing and chat, and of course the Internet.
So let’s get started.
As we learned in Chapter 4, theorists begin with assumptions about ontology
(how things exist), epistemology (how things are known), and axiology (what is
worth knowing). This is no less true of media theorists and, not surprisingly, has
led to different ways of theorizing CMC. Two basic—and fundamentally
different—frameworks for understanding such communication are afforded by
the social interaction approach to media and the social integration approach.
Social Interaction Approach
Stephen Littlejohn and Karen Foss have succinctly described the respective
orientations to media theory: “The social interaction approach distinguishes
media in terms of how close they come to the model of face-to-face interaction,”
while the “social integration…approach characterizes media not in terms of
information, interaction, or dissemination, but in terms of ritual, or how people
use media as a way of creating community.” [1] Thus the former approach, social
interaction, looks at the properties of mediated communication—how its
transmission of messages shapes the ways that people interact—and compares it
to face-to-face communication.
The social interaction approach has a long history in media studies. Writing in
the early 1950s as television first spread into American homes, Harold Innis
divided communication into time-binding media and space-binding media. [2]
Time-binding media (such as stories, songs, myths, clay, stone tablets,
parchment, and vellum) create enduring records and therefore encourage
stability, community, tradition, religion, practical wisdom, consensus,
hierarchical institutions, and local decision making. Space-binding media (such
as papyrus, paper, newspapers, magazines, radio, and television) convey
information over long distances but are seen only for a brief time. Thus, these
media foster change, expansion, secularism, materialism, rational and linear
thought, imperialism, and centralized decision making.
Some forty years after Innis, when digital communication technologies first
began to make an impact, Mark Poster proclaimed a second media age. [3]
Writing in 1995, Poster held that the first media age was dominated by mass
media—newspapers, magazines, radio, television—which communicated only
one way, were centrally produced and governmentally regulated, and shaped
mass consciousness in ways that promoted the interests of the powerful. By
contrast to these old media, the new media of the Internet and digital
communication offered decentralized conduits for unregulated two-way
interaction that could foster democratization and individual consciousness.
In the social interaction view of media, then, face-to-face communication is the
ideal medium, and CMC is judged by its capacity (or failure) to replicate
features of face-to-face interaction. For example, John Thompson proposed an
interpretive framework with three categories: mutually embodied local exchange
(face-to-face communication), technically mediated nonlocal exchange (writing,
telephone, e-mail, online chat, videoconferencing), and mediated quasi-exchange
(radio, television, books, newspapers, magazines) in which a media agent
(usually an economic or cultural entity) is interposed between sender and
receiver. [4]
Media Richness Model
A frequently cited theory for comparing the interactive properties of various
communication technologies is the media richness model proposed by Richard
Daft and Robert Lengel. [5] Their model evaluates communication media by the
degrees to which each tends to be a rich medium or a lean medium. In turn,
richness or leanness is evaluated to according to a medium’s potential capacity
for carrying information. That capacity is defined by four questions: (1) How
quickly can the medium provide feedback? (2) How many communication cues
can the medium convey? (3) Can the medium convey nonverbal
communication? (4) Can the medium customize messages for the recipient or
situation? Media richness and leanness are not an “either/or” proposition;
richness and leanness may be seen as a continuum from very or somewhat rich
to somewhat or very lean. Using Daft and Lengel’s media richness model, Figure
11.5 compares some communication technologies commonly used in
organizations.
Figure 11.5 Richness Comparison of Organizational Media
Daft and Lengel’s theory is also cited because their media richness model
includes a framework for managers to choose the appropriate medium in a given
situation. [6] If a task is direct, straightforward, and unambiguous, then leaner
media are a better choice to communicate instructions. For example, suppose a
company put new recycling bins next to existing trash cans and expected
everyone to separate bottles and cans from other trash. A brief, standardized
memo or e-mail to all employees would be sufficient to implement the new
routine. If staff members were sent a detailed position paper on the economics of
recycling, and managers sat down with employees individually to discuss their
feelings about environmental responsibility, the communication would fail.
But if the task is ambiguous and requires reflection, then richer media are the
better communication choices. If that same company decided to make
environmental responsibility part of its mission statement and mandate that
every employee action should reflect this new corporate value, then a brief
memo or e-mail would fail. The organization might schedule face-to-face
meetings, videoconferences, and training seminars; form an advisory committee
of managers and employees; set up a suggestion-box program; print brochures;
and issue a manual to all staff that justifies the new environmentally friendly
policies and describes procedures that staff members should follow in various
scenarios and situations.
Social Presence Theory
Media richness theory is often grouped with other theories that take a cues
filtered out (CFO) perspective on mediated communication. The basic idea is
that, compared to face-to-face interaction, mediated communication may filter
out nonverbal cues (eye contact, gesture, bodily movement), paralingual cues
(tone of voice, volume, pitch, inflection), and social cues (name, title, status,
power, social context). The social presence theory of Short, Williams, and
Christie holds that participants in electronically mediated meetings—even
teleconferences and videoconferences—feel a lessened sense of social contact
and presence with other attendees. [7]
Subsequent studies on social presence, as well as media richness, tend to confirm
this hypothesis. Yet even if attendees are generally less satisfied with
teleconferences as compared to face-to-face meetings, neither has research
shown that teleconferences are demonstrably less efficient. For one thing,
participants in teleconferences dampen their emotional displays and are more
polite and considerate with turn taking; for another, diminishment of visible
social cues can reduce deference to authority and produce broader participation. [8] Similarly, Lee Sproull and Sara Kiesling in their study of e-mail found that
“decreasing social context cues has substantial deregulating effects on
communication” and generated “information that would not have been conveyed
through another medium.” [9] Rather than see mediated communication as
impoverished because cues are filtered out, they urged managers to embrace the
leveling and democratizing effects of these media by designing new ways to
organize, communicate, and work. [10]
Social Information Processing Theory
An alternative to the cues filtered out perspective is what Joseph Walther called
“cues filtered in.” [11] In the late 1980s and early 1990s, as e-mail usage first
spread beyond a limited number of scientists and computer nerds, the prevailing
view held that e-mail was an impoverished medium compared to face-to-face
communication. All the usual cues—vocalics (voice), kinesics (gestures),
promexics (interpersonal distance)—were filtered out by e-mail. Today, of
course, we know that relationships can flourish online. The Pew Internet &
American Life Project reported in 2006 that 37 percent of Internet users who are
single had used a dating website, most had a positive experience, and 17 percent
entered a long-term relationship or marriage with someone they met online. [12]
But more than twenty years ago when Walther began researching computer-
mediated communication, conventional wisdom held that CMC was impersonal
and only for doing tasks.
First published in 1992, Walther’s social information processing theory made
the then-startling claim that relationship building through CMC was not
inherently inferior to face-to-face relations. [13] Rather than view CMC as a
medium in which cues were filtered out, he argued, CMC could be regarded as a
medium that operated with a different set of cues. At the time Walther did his
research, CMC was completely text based; there was insufficient bandwidth and
connection speed available to send images, video, or audio over a computer
network. Nevertheless, he found that when e-mail users were motivated to
develop a relationship, they would compensate for the absence of nonverbal cues
by ramping up their use of the verbal (i.e., textual) cues available to them.
To form impressions of each other and develop a relationship, e-mail users
exchanged the same interpersonal information as they otherwise would face to
face but did so verbally (via text) rather than nonverbally. The difference was
that the exchange of interpersonal information through CMC took longer—about
four times longer, Walther found. But given enough time, computer-mediated
relationships could be as strong and close as face-to-face relationships. In fact, e-
mail users took advantage of the one nonverbal cue that CMC does not filter out
—chronemics, or the use of time to convey meaning. [14] As you have likely
experienced in responding to an e-mail, text, or Facebook message, you may
decide to reply right away (perhaps to convey “liking” or to emphasize
agreement) or wait awhile (perhaps to convey reluctance or emphasize that you
took the matter seriously and gave it thought).
Walther also theorized an aspect of CMC that seemed counterintuitive a
generation ago but which we now take for granted. You have perhaps
experienced a CMC relationship that has a higher quality than some of your
face-to-face relationships. Walther coined the term hyperpersonal to describe
such CMC relationships and theorized four dynamics that could account for this
effect: selective self-presentation, attribution, asynchronous communication, and
feedback. [15]
Selective Self-Presentation
Senders of computer-mediated messages can engage in selective self-
presentation by sharing only their most favorable attributes and generally
putting a positive spin on themselves. Even photos can be withheld so as not to
dispel the image being created. [16] Since relationship building starts by forming
impressions, this positive spin gets the online relationship off to a good start.
Attribution
Receivers of CMC messages often engage in attribution, or the basic human
tendency to assume that what we observe in others must reflect their true
personalities. The rub is that e-mail, texting, or online chat gives you very little
to observe. Given this scanty information, you may overattribute positive (or
negative) qualities to the sender. If you and the other person have come together
online due to some affinity—you play World of Warcraft, you belong to the
Sierra Club, you are Republicans, you went to the same college, you work in
regional offices of the same corporation—then you may already be positively
biased toward each other and assume the best.
Asynchronous Communication
As a channel, CMC affords a capacity for what Walther called asynchronous
communication. Face-to-face communication is synchronous; participants talk
in sync with each other. You must respond in real time and, inevitably, will
succumb on occasion to “foot-in-mouth” disease. But with an e-mail, text,
Facebook message, chat post, or other online message, you can take time to
think through your responses and craft your words for the most positive effect.
Feedback
The final component of the standard interactional communication model (which
we introduced in Chapter 1 and elaborated in Chapter 4) is feedback. Thus, the
final element in forming a hypersonal relationship is when the entire cycle of
selective self-presentation, positive attribution, and asynchronous messaging
continually feeds back on itself. You and the other person have selectively
created your best impressions, attributed the best qualities to each other, and
taken time to ensure your communications are worded for the best effect.
Naturally, your feedback to one another reflects these dynamics. Your CMC
relationship has gone hypersonal!
If you have ever taken an online course, you can readily apply Walther’s social
information processing theory. Students selectively present themselves to form
good impressions as smart and responsible (so the instructor will think well of
them) and as warm and caring (so fellow students will respond to their online
discussion posts). Because everyone in the class goes to the same college and is
studying the same subject (and may be in the same major), students
automatically attribute to their classmates a positive commonality of interests.
When students must reply to classmates in online discussions, care is taken to
reaffirm the other person’s thoughts and, when needed, respectfully suggest an
alternative view. After an entire semester of this, students who have never met in
person very often feel they really know each other and that the quality of their
relationship within the online classroom was high.
Now transplant this scenario to an organization, perhaps to your first job after
graduation. As you exchange e-mails with your boss and coworkers, what
textual cues and selective self-disclosures will you employ to create a positive
impression? What cues will they use on you? When will you decide to fire off an
immediate reply to an e-mail, and when will you take extra time to carefully
think of just the right words? Having grown up with computer-mediated
communication, you practice these skills intuitively in your personal
relationships. But practicing them on the job introduces a host of new situations
and variables—and a whole new level of importance.
Social Integration Approach
To understand the social integration perspective on media, recall the discussion
in Chapter 4 about the postpositive and the interpretive approaches to theory and
research. Postpositive researchers investigate what can be observed and
measured; interpretive researchers explore what cannot be observed but must be
interpreted—in other words, what goes on in people’s heads. An early exemplar
of this latter view was the Canadian media theorist Marshall McLuhan whose
dictum, “the medium is the message,” is world famous. McLuhan’s work
focused on how the social environments fostered by different media (a concept
that came to be known as media ecology [17]) change the way people think. We
shape our media, he observed, and they in turn shape us.
Media and Cognition
New technologies produce new cognitions. For example, movable type and
printed books changed people’s habits of perception from oral to visual, which
then altered cognition as people favored a “segmentation of actions and
functions and [the] principle of visual quantification.” [18] This way of thinking,
McLuhan believed, made possible the Western developments of individualism,
capitalism, the Industrial Revolution, democracy, nationalism, and Protestantism.
McLuhan held that three media technologies—the phonetic alphabet, the
printing press, and the electric telegraph—were the key agents in transforming
the world. These inventions are the milestones in McLuhan’s [19] four media
epochs of world history, which are summarized in Figure 11.6.
Figure 11.6 McLuhan’s Four Media Ages
The electronic age in which we now live, McLuhan believed, brought back a
media environment in which hearing and sight—or orality and literacy—are
important sense organs for perceiving the world. Meanwhile, instant
communication that keeps everyone in touch gave rise to what McLuhan called
the “global village.” [20] McLuhan died in 1980 before the spread of interactive
digital media—and before linguists and cognitive scientists gained new
understandings about the world that existed before the development of speech.
Based on these insights, Robert Logan [21] recently proposed an update, shown
in Figure 11.7, of McLuhan’s media ages.
Figure 11.7 Extending McLuhan’s Media Ages
Media and Community
McLuhan explored how media furnish environments that shape the formation of
communities on the grand scale of whole societies and historical epochs. The
concepts we review next are on a smaller scale, but the underlying principle is
the same. Where the social interaction approach looks at how various media
compare with face-to-face interaction, the social integration approach holds that
each medium must be taken on its own terms as an ecology for forming of
communities. Face-to-face communication is not the ideal; it is merely one
medium with a set of properties that foster a certain environment for certain
rituals that create a certain form of community. But other media, each in its own
way, are “able to facilitate a sense of belonging, security and community, even if
individuals are not actually directly interacting in them.” [22] Radio audiences
engage in rituals and create a community that is in solidarity with talk-show host
Rush Limbaugh; television audiences do the same around the beloved characters
of Lost or Seinfeld. Visitors to favorite websites form communities, as do players
of online games such as World of Warcraft and Second Life. By the same token,
members of organizations may engage in rituals and form communities via e-
mail, a listserv, an online chat room, an electronic bulletin board, a wiki, or other
media by which these members interact and socially integrate.
The two approaches, social interaction and social integration, come down to
more than a difference in research methodology. David Holmes critiqued the
social interaction perspective as a “transport” view of communication grounded
in Western cultural assumptions. [23] His critique goes to the foundational issues
—introduced in Chapter 4—of ontology, epistemology, and axiology. The social
interaction, or transport, approach regards media as conduits to be “used” for
transmitting content and mediating social interaction. This view, argued Holmes,
is founded on a “logocentric” (language-centered) Western worldview by which
a medium is a vessel to be used
individuals are users of the vessel
meanings transmitted as messages via the medium are products of
individual intentionality
language is the conduit for these meanings
the medium affords a technical means for conveying language
the medium merely amplifies the sender/receiver dyad, so it should be
judged against (and metaphorically experienced as) face-to-face
communication
By contrast, observed Holmes, a social integration approach to communication
sees mediums as sites for shared ritual experiences that construct social worlds.
Technological media are not simply vessels to be “used” in mediating sender-
receiver interaction; rather, they supply new contexts for new forms of social
integration. The individual is no longer conceived as a language user whose
intentions are conveyed via the tool of a medium; instead, individual perception
is an effect of the media ecology. This assertion reflects the postmodern view
that people’s intentions are not solely governed by their own wills, but are
preconditioned by the many (and conflicting) historical and cultural discourses
that go on around them in the larger society.
The emergence of the Internet has generated increasing interest in the social
integration approach since the dynamic is easily observable in cyberspace.
Holmes contended the environment of a networked medium (i.e., the Internet)
offers “interaction without reciprocity” as users interact via computer-simulated
presences. This is obvious in World of Warcraft and Second Life where you join
a community of fellow gamers through your computer-generated avatar. But the
phenomenon also operates at work—for example, through the username that the
company assigns for your e-mail account and, ultimately, by the way you
(selectively) present yourself to others in your e-mails.
Communities of Interpretation
Thomas Lindlof argued that communities formed via mediated communication
differ from those formed face to face in one key respect: “communities of media
usage operate” not through traditional prime referents such as class, position, or
kinship, but “come into being with the typically ritualistic or rule-governed
enactment of communicative events whose sense for interlocutors in the sharing
of media technologies, content…and occasions.” [24] In other words, you
socially integrate with other fans of the television show Lost not because of age
or educational level or socioeconomic status, but because you have all shared in
the ritual of watching (technology) a show (content) in its weekly time slot
(occasion). Further, you share an interpretation of the show as an absorbing,
well-produced drama that elicits deeper truths about people’s responses to
alienation, truths that resonate in our contemporary society where so many
individuals feel “lost.” Thus, Lindlof’s theory would hold, Lost fans are an
interpretive community “comprised of sets of discursive strategies (not people as
such) that find their expression in tactical ‘readings’ (or rewritings of text) by
socially situated individuals or groups” and “are most easily identified as an
audience for a [media] genre.” [25]
The underlying principle is that the meaning of talk or of a text is not a purely
individual matter. People are situated in communities that share rules of
interpretation; meanings arise not just from personal perception, but from being
validated by the community. Interpretive communities that are socially
integrated through media usage, Lindlof argued, emerge through a threefold
process:
1. A community arises through members’ shared interpretation of the same
media content.
2. Communal interpretations create a “text” that, due to the fact that it is
widely shared, gives the reading validity and imparts a stabilizing and
directing influence.
3. The validated reading becomes a reference point for members’ social
actions within the interpretive community. Such a community exhibits four
traits: unity of interests and purposes; shared moral obligations manifested
in rules and codes; stability through icons, texts, rituals, and myths that
direct core values over time; and communicative occasions and codes that
govern membership and coordinate social action. [26]
But what does Lost have to do with organizational communication? The same
processes of social integration that bind Lost fans into an interpretive community
—ritual, media usage, shared media content, shared media occasions, shared
media interpretations—also operate in organizations. One study of American
journalists—people who share the same profession and keep up with each
other’s work through print and broadcast media—discovered an interpretive
community that was socially integrated through a shared interpretation about the
meaning of their work. [27] Another study found that people who start businesses
are knitted into a community of entrepreneurs who share a common
interpretation of the popular literature on “being your own boss.” [28] And
organizations are learning they can foster communities of customers through
marketing communication that creates shared interpretations of their products
and brands. [29]
Suppose, then, you are a district manager for a national company. As you attend
the weekly videoconference with all the district managers—people you seldom
see in person—you engage in numerous rituals: cracking jokes before the
meeting is called to order, following the agenda e-mailed by the vice president,
hearing the VP read “the same old” pep-talk memos from the CEO, planning on
the videoconference always lasting longer than scheduled, joining the other
district managers in interpreting these weekly meetings as generally a waste of
time. You have formed a community that is socially integrated through mediated
communication.
A Final Thought
The concept of the information society has driven scholarly discussion and
research for a generation. More and more, though, scholars are focusing not just
on the ability to generate information, but also on the capacity to communicate
that information across networks. Computers have been able to generate usable
information since the 1960s when mainframes spread beyond laboratories into
everyday corporations and government agencies. The Internet is revolutionary
not because it is computerized, but because it links computers with other
computers.
This development has given birth to what Manuel Castells called (as we learned
in Chapter 6) the network society, [30] a society that has left behind the
Gutenberg galaxy and now lives in the Internet galaxy. [31] In the Gutenberg
galaxy, as McLuhan first noted, people thought (and most still do think) in terms
of linear segmentation—like lines of type on a page. But in the Internet galaxy,
people must think holistically, like the hypertext on a web page that lets you
click a word or phrase and instantly jump to more information. Given the fact of
this networked environment, organizations that do business in the network
society will need two types of workers: self-programmable labor and generic
labor. The latter, generic labor, performs production tasks of lesser value until
even those jobs can be taken over by and done more cheaply with machines. By
contrast, self-programmable labor has the ability to search for dispearate pieces
of information and combine them into meaningful chunks of information.
Ultimately, the goal of this newly created knowledge is to see how it can be
applied within an organization to help improve various goals and processes. As
we move towards increasingly vast databases of information, workers who have
the ability to search for relevant information and form applicable knowledge for
an organization become a necessity. As such, Manuel Castells warns us, “This
demands appropriate education and training, not in terms of skills, but in terms
of creative capacity . . . [and] the ability to co-evolve with changes in
organization, in technology, and in knowledge.” [32]
In closing this chapter, we return to Mark Ward’s story. As a young man in the
1970s, he began as a newspaper writer and layout artist. His labor was generic:
get the assignment, write the story, turn it in on deadline. By the 1990s, however,
those routine jobs were eliminated by new technology. Perhaps the saddest
aspect of the “new economy” is the millions of men and women who have
become what Louis Uchitelle called “The Disposable Americans.” [33] They
faced (and millions now face) a choice: either become self-programmable, able
to “co-evolve with changes in organization, in technology, and in knowledge,”
or remain generic labor consigned to low-wage jobs until even those routines are
automated. For Mark, that meant going from beat reporter to independent writer
with (as Castell’s put it in the quotation reproduced in the preceding paragraph) a
“capacity to search and recombine information” in ways that solved problems
for his clients. [34] That transformation later gave Mark the power to make his
own choices—to get a degree, to be paid for teaching and writing on subjects he
is passionate about, to make a contribution by (of course!) coauthoring a
textbook on organizational communication.
You too will encounter the organizational challenges of the network society—
except that technological and social changes are accelerating faster now than in
Mark’s generation. College students are encouraged to declare their majors early
and focus on acquiring skills needed for high-paying careers. Those skills may
give you a start. But if you never grow beyond them, in time you will become
generic labor. Students in organizational communication courses may wince at
theory and wish, “Just tell me what I have to do to communicate on the job!” Yet
by grappling with the why of organizational processes, you can develop critical-
thinking skills that will equip you to become the “self-programmable” employee
(and manager) organizations seek.
KEY TAKEAWAY
The social interaction approach to mediated communication
compares each medium to face-to-face interaction. In Daft and
Lengel’s media richness model, face to face is the most “rich”
medium because it affords instant feedback, conveys multiples
cues, conveys nonverbal communication, and allows messages to
be completely customized. Other media are “rich” or “lean” in
comparison to this standard. The social presence theory
proposed by Short, Williams, and Christie holds that participants
in electronically mediated meetings feel a lessened sense of
social contact and presence with other attendees. Walther’s social
information processing theory argues that relationships developed
through computer-mediated communication (CMC) can have the
same high quality as face-to-face relationships. To compensate
for a lack of nonverbal cues, CMC users increase their use of the
available verbal (including textual) cues—it just takes them longer
to build a strong relationship that way, as compared to face to
face.
The social integration approach to mediated communication does
not analyze each medium in comparison to face-to-face
interaction or even in terms of information and dissemination.
Instead, the approach looks at how each medium provides a
context for people to share rituals and thus become socially
integrated into a community. On a societal scale, McLuhan noted
that the “media ecology” of each historical age shapes how we
think. The print age, for example, fostered linear thinking—like
lines of type on a page. Social integration theorists do not regard
face-to-face communication as the ideal; each medium affords its
own environment that facilitates certain rituals and formation of
certain types of communities. Lindlof argued that, while face-to-
face communities traditionally form on the basis of social
categories (e.g., class, status, or kinship), “interpretive
communities” form through ritualized occasions of shared media
usage and interpretation of media content.
Theories about mediated communication have practical
applications for people in organizations. The media richness
model suggests that lean media are appropriate for
communicating routine tasks and rich media for complex ones.
Research on social presence has found that, because attendees
at electronically mediated conferences feel a reduced sense of
personal contact, they tend to have fewer emotional displays, are
politer about taking turns, and participate more fully because they
feel less inhibited by status differences. Social information
processing theory explains the effects on office relationships
produced as CMC users are selective in what they disclose about
themselves. The social integration approach suggests how people
in organizations, organizations and their customers, and people in
the same profession can form communities through media usage,
even without direct interaction.
EXERCISES
1. Think about your organizational communication class. Name
some simple announcements your instructor has made about
routine procedures in your class. What media did the instructor
use to communicate this information? Were the media lean or
rich? Were the media an appropriate choice for the routine
information communicated? Now name some complex
information that your instructor has communicated. What media
were used? Were they rich or lean? Were they appropriate to the
complexity of the information?
2. Think about an online class you have taken. Or if you have not
taken a class online, talk with someone who has and ask them to
discuss the experience. Did you (or your friend) feel a reduced
sense of personal presence and contact with the instructor and
other students? Did this also reduce any differences in status
(e.g., authority, physical appearance, likability), so that students
felt freer to participate in online discussions?
3. In that online class, did you (or your friend) observe that students
tried to manage others’ impressions about them, selectively
presenting themselves online? With little information to go on, did
you (or your friend) attribute positive qualities to classmates (at
least initially) since everyone was in the same class (or major or
college)? Why did you (or your friend) respond immediately to
some online discussion posts and e-mails, but then take extra
Asynchronous Communication:
Attribution:
Computer-Mediated Communication:
Cues Filtered Out:
Hyperpersonal :
time to think about your responses to others? At the end of the
semester did you (or your friend) feel that quality relationships
had been developed with your instructor and at least some of your
classmates? Why or why not?
4. Thinking again about that online class, did you (or your friend) feel
a sense of community developed over time within the class? What
rituals and occasions did everyone share (e.g., rituals connected
with required readings, with weekly online discussions, with unit
quizzes)? Did students eventually share a common interpretation
of the online course content (e.g., it was relevant, it was a waste
of time, it was an “easy A,” it was a grind)? Did this interpretation
guide students’ communication with each other?
KEY TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
The quality of computer-mediated communication that allows users to respond when they choose; by contrast, face-to-face interaction requires synchronous communication.
Having little information about senders, recipients of computer-mediated communication tend to project positive (or negative) qualities on the senders.
Communication channeled via computer; known as “CMC,” examples of computer-mediated communication range from e-mail and web chat to podcasts and webcasts.
Known as CFO, an approach that analyzes mediated communication based on its lack of verbal and nonverbal cues that are otherwise present in face-to-face interactions.
Term coined by Joseph Walther to describe
Media Ecology:
Media Richness Model:
New Media:
Old Media:
Selective Self-Presentation:
Social Information Processing Theory:
Social Integration:
Social Interaction:
Social Presence Theory:
relationships developed through computer-mediated communication that have become even stronger than face-to-face relationships.
A society’s media environment; media ecologists look at how communication media affect human perception and thought.
A model that categorizes each medium as “rich” or “lean” to the degree it compares with the qualities (instant feedback, multiple cues, nonverbals, customization) of face-to-face communication.
A general term that refers collectively to the Internet, World Wide Web, and today’s vast array of digital communication media.
A general term that refers collectively to newspapers, magazines, books, radio, television, and other mediums that predate digital communication.
Senders of computer-mediated communications may attempt to foster positive impressions by selectively disclosing information about themselves.
A theory proposed by Joseph Walther, which holds that relationships developed through computer- mediated communication can have the same high quality as face-to-face relationships; given enough time, CMC users can compensate for a lack of nonverbal cues by increasing their use of the available verbal/textual cues.
An approach to mediated communication that regards each medium as a context for people to share rituals and thus form a community.
An approach to mediated communication that compares each medium to face-to-face interaction.
A theory holding that participants in electronically mediated meetings feel a lessened sense of social contact and presence with other attendees.
[1] Littlejohn, S. W., & Foss, K. A. (2011). Theories of human
communication (10th ed.). Long Grove, IL: Waveland, p. 340. Emphasis
in original.
[2] Innis, H. (1951). Empire and communications. Oxford, UK: Oxford
University Press.
[3] Poster, M. (1995). The second media age. Cambridge, UK: Polity.
[4] Thompson, J. B. (1995). The media and modernity: A social theory of
the media. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press.
[5] Daft, R. L., & Lengel, R. H. (1984). Information richness: A new
approach to managerial information processing and organizational
design. In B. Staw & L. L. Cummings (Eds.), Research in organizational
behavior, Vol. 6 (pp. 191–233). Greenwich, CT: JAI Press; Daft, R. L., &
Lengel, R. H. (1986). Organizational information requirements, media
richness, and structural design. Management Science, 32, 554–571.
[6] Lengel, R. H., & Daft, R. L. (1988). The selection of communication
media as an executive skill. Academy of Management Executive, 2, 225–
232.
[7] Short, J., Williams, E., & Christie, B. (1976). The social psychology of
telecommunications. New York, NY: Wiley.
[8] Fulk, J., & Collins-Jarvis, L. (2001). Wired meetings: Technological
mediation of organizational gatherings. In F. M. Jablin & L. L. Putnam
(Eds.), The new handbook of organizational communication: Advances in
theory, research, and methods (pp. 624–663). Thousand Oaks, CA:
Sage.
[9] Sproull, L., & Kiesler, S. (1986). Reducing social context cues:
Electronic mail in organizational communication. Management Science,
32, 1492–1512, p. 1492.
[10] Sproull, L., & Kiesler, S. (1991). Connections: New ways of working
in the networked organization. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
[11] Walther, J. B., & Parks, M. R. (2002). Cues filtered out, cues filtered
in: Computer-mediated communication and relationships. In M. Knapp &
J. A. Daly (Eds.), Handbook of interpersonal communication (3rd ed.; pp.
529–561). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
[12] Madden, M., & Lenhart, A. (2006). Online dating. Washington, DC:
Pew Internet & American Life Project.
[13] Walther, J. B. (1992). Interpersonal effects in computer-mediated
interaction: A relational perspective. Communication Research, 19, 52–
90.
[14] Walther, J. B. (2002). Time effects in computer-mediated groups:
Past, present, and future. In P. Hinds & S. Kiesler (Eds.), Distributed work
(pp. 235–257). Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
[15] Walther, J. B., & Tidwell, L. C. (1996). Computer-mediated
communication: Interpersonal interaction on-line. In K. M. Galvin & P. J.
Cooper (Eds.), Making connections: Readings in relational
communication (2nd ed.; pp. 322–329). Los Angeles, CA: Roxbury.
[16] Walther, J. B., Slovacek, C. L., & Tidwell, L. C. (2001). Is a picture
worth a thousand words? Photographic images in long-term and short-
term computer-mediated communication. Communication Research, 28,
105–134.
[17] For example, see Strate, L. (2006). Echoes and reflections: On
media ecology as a field of study. Cresskill, NY: Hampton.
[18] McLuhan, M. (1962). The Gutenberg galaxy: The making of
typographic man. Toronto, Canada: University of Toronto Press, p. 154.
[19] McLuhan, M., & Fiore, Q. (1967). The medium is the massage: An
inventory of effects. New York, NY: Bantam.
[20] McLuhan, M., & Fiore, Q. (1968). War and peace in the global
village. New York, NY: Bantam.
[21] Logan, R. K. (2010). Understanding new media: Extending Marshall
McLuhan. New York, NY: Peter Lang.
[22] Holmes, D. (2005). Communication theory: Media, technology,
society. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage, p. 123.
[23] Holmes, D. (2005). Communication theory: Media, technology,
society. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
[24] Lindlof, T. R. (1988). Media audiences as interpretive communities.
In J. A. Anderson (Ed.), Communication yearbook 11 (pp. 81–107). New
York, NY: Routledge, p. 92.
[25] Lindlof, T. (2002). Interpretive community: An approach to media and
religion. Journal of Media and Religion, 1, 61–74, pp. 64–65.
[26] Lindlof, T. (2002). Interpretive community: An approach to media and
religion. Journal of Media and Religion, 1, 61–74.
[27] Zelizer, B. (1993). Journalists as interpretive communities. Critical
Studies in Mass Communication, 10, 219–237. See also Robinson. S., &
DeShano, C. (2011). “Anyone can know”: Citizen journalism and the
interpretive community of the mainstream press. Journalism, 12, 963–
982; Berkowitz, D., & TerKeurst, J. V. (1999). Community as interpretive
communication: Rethinking the journalist-source relationship. Journal of
Communication, 49, 125–136; Brewin, M. (1999). The interpretive
community and reform: Public journalism plays out in North Carolina.
Journal of Communication Inquiry, 23, 222–238.
[28] Fletcher, D. (2007). “Toy story”: The narrative world of
entrepreneurship and the creation of interpretive communities. Journal of
Business Venturing, 22, 649–672.
[29] Kates, S. M. (2002). Doing brand and subcultural ethnographies:
Developing the interpretive community concept in consumer research.
Advances in Consumer Research, 29, 43.
[30] Castells, M. (1996). The rise of the network society. Malden, MA:
Blackwell.
[31] Castells, M. (2003). The Internet galaxy: Reflections on the Internet,
business, and society. New York, NY: Oxford University Press.
[32] Castells, M. (2009). Communication power. New York, NY: Oxford
University Press, p. 30.
[33] Uchitelle, L. (2006). The disposable American: Layoffs and their
consequences. New York, NY: Vintage.
[34] Castells, M. (2009). Communication power. New York, NY: Oxford
University Press, p. 30.
11.4 Chapter Exercises
REAL-WORLD CASE STUDY
Willi Just served his country honorably in the First World War. When
the conflict ended in 1918, he went home to Germany and entered
civil service as an auto welder for the municipal police, a job that
provided him steady employment throughout the worldwide Great
Depression of the 1920s and 1930s. Harry Wentritt, only fifteen
when the war ended, served an apprenticeship but faced an
uncertain employment situation. He joined a Nazi motorcycle club
and, after the Nazi Party came to power, was rewarded with a
steady job as an auto welder for the state police. Friedrich Pradel,
also too young to serve in the war, briefly attended university,
dropped out to train for a career in sales, then took the civil service
exam and became an automotive specialist for the municipal police.
In 1936, when the administration of all German police forces was
put under the control of the Nazi Party, all three men were expected
to become members. By 1941, all three had been transferred to the
Security Police headquarters in Berlin. Pradel was put in charge of
its transportation services; Wentritt managed a motor pool with more
than four thousand police vehicles; Just was hired as a senior
welder and dispatcher. [1]
After Germany invaded the Soviet Union in June 1941, police
battalions were sent to occupied territories and ordered to round up
and massacre Jews in mass shootings. But face-to-face murder at
that scale traumatized the killers. A technological solution was
sought. Since Pradel’s department provided the vehicles for the
police death squads, he was ordered to convert twenty box trucks
into mobile gas chambers and supply these to the battalions. To test
how quickly the “special trucks” could kill, the chief chemist of the
national police lab was sent over. Albert Widmann had risen from a
humble family to earn a doctorate in chemistry from a leading
university and joined the Nazi Party to improve his career prospects.
Between 1939 and 1941, he helped conduct a Party program,
justified as “racial science,” to improve the German gene pool by
“euthanizing” handicapped, mentally impaired, and “asocial” (misfit)
people. When the fleet of “special trucks” was built and dispatched
to the killing fields, another specialist in chemistry was hired as field
inspector for the mobile gassing program. August Becker had
earned a doctorate but spurned an academic career to enter politics
as a Nazi Party functionary. He used his expert knowledge of
chemistry for the state espionage bureau and then in the euthanasia
program.
Technical problems with the “special trucks” soon surfaced in the
field. Driving over the unpaved roads of the Soviet Union caused the
poison gas hoses to leak and break. The panic of Jewish victims
trapped inside the trucks caused sudden load shifts. Once all the
victims had been gassed, police who unloaded the trucks were
regularly exposed to highly toxic fumes. Drivers of the trucks floored
the gas pedal, thinking this would speed up the killing but caused
the opposite effect. After Becker reported these difficulties, Pradel
went to Wentritt and Just. The three men developed a proposal,
dated June 5, 1942, entitled “Technical adjustments to special vans
at present in service and those that are in production.” Without using
the words “people,” “humans,” or “Jews,” their five-page proposal
offered solutions to the problem of “weight displacement” by the
“cargo” so that the “operation” could “process” and “treat” the “load”
more quickly.
Though the mobile gassing trucks killed some three hundred
thousand victims over a two-year period, the technical problems
were deemed insurmountable and the program abandoned. While
the “special trucks” were being developed and deployed, another
police bureau was working on a different technological solution—
camps situated beside railroad lines and equipped with stationary
gas chambers. Nazi police authorities decided it was more efficient
to bring the victims to the gas, rather than bring the gas to the
victims. By 1944, they had murdered some four million Jews using
this technology.
1. Do you believe this case is, as Zygmunt Bauman would argue,
“an outcome of the bureaucratic culture”?
2. Do you believe this case is not due to a lack of ethics, but to what
Steven Katz called an ethic of expediency in which rationality,
efficiency, speed, productivity, and power are seen as morally
good?
3. Do you see in this case what Jacques Ellul and William Barrett
called technique, or a mind-set that always looks for some
technique to solve any problem?
4. Do you see in this case what Jurgen Habermas called technical
reasoning, which only values “what works”? Was the Holocaust
the product of a rational society in Habermas’s meaning of the
term?
5. Do you see in this case the effects of technological determinism?
That is, did technology become an autonomous force that exerted
unpredicted effects and may have pushed Nazi bureaucrats over
the edge into genocide?
6. Do you see in this case the effects of the technological
imperative? That is, did the technicians create the killing
technology because they could do it? Did the technological
perfection of the gassing trucks become its own justification?
7. Is the ethic of expediency evident in our society today? Is the lure
of technique? Is technical reasoning? Can you identify ways that
technology is a force in our society that is exerting unpredicted
effects? Are there technologies our society could pursue but
should not?
END-OF-CHAPTER ASSESSMENT
1. According to Edward Hall, high-context technology results from
a. context expansion b. context extension c. extension transference d. technical transference e. technical transience
2. According to the dimensional view, the three dimensions of organizational structure are
a. input, throughput, output b. culture, identity, image c. function, division, location d. size, vertical hierarchy, horizontal differentiation e. pattern, formalization, centralization
3. According to the configurational view, common organizational structures include
a. functional and divisional b. geographic and matrix c. horizontal and network d. answers a and b e. all of the above
4. The media richness model compares a medium to the four qualities of face-to-face communication. Which of the following answers is not one of those qualities?
a. provides instant feedback b. conveys multiple cues c. conveys nonverbal communication d. provides a sense of social presence and personal contact e. can be customized for recipients and situation
5. According to Joseph Walther’s social information processing theory, four factors can contribute to developing a hyperpersonal relationship through computer-mediated communication. Which of the following answers is not one of those factors?
a. selective self-presentation b. interpretation c. attribution d. asynchronous communication e. feedback
Answer Key
1. c
2. e
3. e
4. d
5. b
[1] Ward, M., Sr. (2014). Deadly documents: Technical communication,
organizational discourse, and the Holocaust—Lessons from the rhetorical
work of everyday texts. Amityville, NY: Baywood.
Chapter 12
Stress, Conflict, and Negotiation
Thriving Under Pressure
In this chapter, we explore the aspects of stress, conflict, and negotiation. We
will learn how each of these components in the organizational setting has an
impact on communication behaviors. We will discuss how these concepts
operate, begin, and apply to the effectiveness of organizational communication.
As a college student, we are sure you are aware of the word stress. You might
have encountered stress when dealing with demanding professors, arduous
assignments, and/or difficult classmates. We are also sure that you have probably
dealt with conflict in your life. Perhaps you and someone else did not see eye to
eye on a particular issue. It may have caused strife, but it might have ended in a
peaceful negotiation. Not everyone is aware of the appropriate way to deal with
and handle stress, conflict, and negotiation. In this chapter, we will examine how
stress, conflict, and negotiation are present in the organizational context and how
these aspects are communicated.
12.1 Stress
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
1. Define the term stress.
2. Explain the different types of stressors in organizations.
3. Understand what happens when stress is not appropriately
managed in the workplace.
4. Differentiate among different types of organizational responses to
stress.
We know most employees feel stress from their jobs. We know that a large
amount of stress can result in negative emotional and physical outcomes. Life is
full of events that cause stress. In a 2001 article by Spurgeon, Jackson, and
Beach, the authors compared what stresses people in the twenty-first century
compared with the 1970s. [1] The authors found the following as the top ten
stressors:
1. Death of spouse
2. Jail sentence
3. Death of immediate family member
4. Immediate family member attempts suicide
5. Getting into debt beyond means of repayment
6. Period of homelessness (hostel or sleeping rough)
7. Immediate family member seriously ill
8. Unemployment (of head of household)
9. Divorce
10. Breakup of family
Although none of the top-ten stress-inducing events is specifically job related
(though unemployment is clearly an offshoot of one’s job), there were a number
in the top fifty that were job related: substantially decreased income (29), trouble
with superiors at work (36), new job in new line of work (37), promotion or
change of responsibilities at work (40), and new job in same line of work (50).
In this section, we talk about the causes of stress and then discuss different types.
In addition, we will look at the outcomes of stress for employees and the overall
organization.
What is Stress?
Stress is a cognitive, affective, or physical strain or tension that produces mental
tension or physiological reactions that disturb the body’s normal state of
functioning. Stressors are specific activities, events, experiences, or people that
induce stress. As you can imagine, the workplace can be filled with stressors.
However, stressors are ultimately interpreted by the individuals experiencing
them. Some people will respond one way to a stressor, and others will respond
differently. For example, one person may feel that missing a deadline is no big
deal, so the stress of the missed deadline will have little or no impact on the
individual. However, if you are driven by deadlines and meeting those deadlines,
then missing a deadline can be a huge stressor that will lead to job strain. Job
strain is “defined by a series of reactions that occur when workers are faced with
a disparity between demands at work and their knowledge, skills, and aptitudes.” [2] From this perspective, first come the individual stressors, which then lead to
an individual’s reaction to those stressors in the form of job strain. [3] As such,
stress isn’t an inherently bad thing. In fact, stress can actually be a very good
thing for individuals within their daily lives and within an organization.
According to Hans Selye, people can experience two lines of stress: (1)
distress/eustress and (2) hyperstress/hypostress. [4] The first continuum of
distress measures whether the stress is problematic (distress) or pleasant
(eustress). For example, getting fired from one’s job could lead to distress;
however, getting a promotion you want could lead to eustress. The
hyper/hypostress continuum examines whether or not the person is experiencing
greater than average amounts of stress (hyperstress) or less than average
amounts of stress (hypostress). If you’re only a fourth of the way through a
project that’s due tomorrow, you may experience greater than normal levels of
stress (hyperstress). Conversely, if you’re in a job that provides you with no
challenge and each day is painfully simple, you may experience lower-than-
average levels of stress (hypostress). When we place these in a two-by-two
matrix, we can quickly see that hyperdistress is the most problematic form of
distress (and most closely aligned with workplace bullying and violence),
whereas hypo-eustress is the least likely to cause problems in the workplace.
Everything from the nature of work to the screaming organizational leader can
cause stress. Within the organizational environment, there are five basic types of
stressors: (1) stressors outside of work (e.g., work-family conflict, friends, your
car breaking down), (2) stressors from the organization (e.g., worrying about
employment, organizational stability), (3) stressors from job duties and
responsibilities (e.g., deadlines, job travel, technology), (4) stressors from
various work roles (e.g., coworker, follower, leader), and (5) stressors that result
from organizational interactions (e.g., coworker, follower, leader). All four of
these stressors can range from the simple level of mild discomfort to full-blown
distress. Previous research has linked all the topics discussed in this chapter to
increases in stress. [5]
According to Aaron Schat and Kevin Kelloway, stress in the workplace can
ultimately lead to three different basic outcome categories: physiological,
psychological, and behavioral. [6] Physiological outcomes of stress can lead to
either bodily injury (e.g., you lift something too heavy and stress your body) or
somatic symptoms (e.g., ulcers, heart disease, lowered immune system).
Psychological outcomes of stress can include both personal outcomes (anxiety,
depression) and organization-related outcomes (job dissatisfaction, lower
organizational commitment).
In the rest of this section, we explore the types of stressors commonly faced
within an organization (both individual and organizational) and the outcomes
that organizational stress can produce if not handled effectively.
Types of Stressors in Organizations
When we mention the word stress, people will often conjure up negative
impressions. However, stress can be beneficial to work outcomes because it
makes employees work harder. Stress becomes a problem when it exceeds an
optimal level, because it then causes poor work performance and often results in
burnout. However, if stress falls below an optimal level, it also often results in
poor performance and a “rust-out” or burn-out effect. [7] Different people in an
organization will respond to stress in a variety of ways. Furthermore, what
stresses out one employee may energize another employee, so understanding
stress and how it impacts a wide range of employees is important for anyone
working in a management position. In the rest of this section, we examine some
individual stressors and some organizational stressors that can affect employees
in the workplace.
Individual Stressors
Research has determined that stress can be caused internally or externally.
Internal stress usually stems from the person’s own perception of his or her fears
or feelings that are not dependent on the environment. [8] Types of internal stress
might include performance anxiety, guilty feelings, and phobias. Internal stress
stems from the perception of the individual, and a danger might not even exist.
External stress is often caused by circumstances that are beyond the person’s
control. Work performance can be impacted by external stressors, such as
workload, job monotony, and ambiguous requirements. Overall, there are many
causes of stress in the organization. For our purposes, we will examine
psychological, physical, behavioral, and communicative stressors.
Psychological
Stress is often psychological, or in the mind of the individual who is expressing
this event. These psychological factors might be based on locus of control,
personality type, or negative affectivity. Locus of control is the belief that an
individual’s behavior is determined by internal or external factors. Research has
demonstrated that individuals with an internal locus of control are better able to
deal with stress and feel more in control of their outcomes than do individuals
with an external locus of control. [9] Externals are prone to more stress, because
they don’t think they have control over the situation.
Type A personalities are more likely to be competitive, assertive, and aggressive
than their opposite, Type B personalities. [10] Type B personalities do not
experience the same type of stress levels as Type A, because they are not
competitive or aggressive and tend to take a nonchalant approach to work. In
addition, negative affectivity is the Type B individual’s viewpoint of the world
and himself or herself in a negative fashion. In other words, such individuals
tend to be pessimistic and judgmental. Type B personalities tend to feel stressed
because they view life in general in a downbeat way. Psychological stress can
result in job dissatisfaction, anger, hostility, and work apathy.
Physical
Job-related stress could be due to physical factors of the organization. These
physical factors might include loud noise, extreme temperatures, safety hazards,
and overcrowded work conditions. [11] The physical causes of stress not only
affect work outcomes but also can result in higher employee turnover and lower
levels of retention. Employees who experience high levels of physical stress in
the organization are also more likely to report higher levels of depression and
illness. Hence stress can have physical symptoms as well. These symptoms may
include elevated heart rate, unusual metabolic rates, higher blood pressure, and
headaches.
Behavioral
Sometimes stress can be based on the individual’s behavior. For instance, work
overload occurs when an employee has to execute a number of tasks in a limited
amount of time. Another behavioral stress might be the worker’s responsibility.
Employees sometimes have to make major decisions that have potentially
harmful consequences. For instance, a manager might have to fire an employee,
make a big financial decision, or cause employees to strike against the
corporation. These behaviors may all result in high levels of stress. Employees
who have high levels of stress may have lower levels of productivity and even
higher levels of absences or tardiness. Employees might display stress-related
behaviors such as different speech rates, drug or alcohol abuse, and changes in
eating behaviors.
Communicative
Research has shown that communicative stress factors sometimes occur, for
instance, when an employee has an extended or prolonged interaction with
another person with whom he or she might not want to interact. Think about a
customer-service representative who might be tired of talking with a certain
client over and over about the same problems or issues. Another example might
be too much communication with individuals from other departments. Perhaps a
work team is trying to complete a project, and managers constantly
micromanage every little step. These interactions might become stressful.
Another example might be the overall communicative climate of the
organization. Certain organizations limit the type of communication that
employees can engage in, and this in turns affects the work climate. Employees
who feel this type of stress will typically have different communication
behaviors. They might limit or restrict their interactions with others to deal with
workplace stress.
Organizational Stressors
In addition to personal characteristics that can lead to an increase in stress in the
workplace, different occupational characteristics can also have an influence on
workplace stress. The Global Business and Economic Roundtable on Addiction
and Mental Health [12] has identified ten common workplace stressors:
Too much work all at once
Random interruptions
Uncertainty about the future
Mistrust of coworkers
Unclear company policies
Career and job ambiguity
Inconsistent feedback on job performance
Lack of appreciation
Lack of upward and downward communication
Too little or too much to do
In addition to this general list of workplace stressors, researchers have found that
the type of organization can determine what stresses people. Table 12.1 provides
the results from four different studies looking at various occupations and the
types of stress individuals within those fields have reported as the top ten
stressors.
Table 12.1 Stressors across Occupations
Insurance
Agents [13] Nurses [14] Police Officers [15] Medical Interns [16]
Major Causes
1. Heavy sales
target
2. Time
management
3. Job
insecurity
4. Lack of
training
5. Work
overload
6. Excess of
competition
7. Lack of
support
Secondary
Causes
1.
Communication
gap
2. Lack of
acceptability
3. Limited
future prospects
4. Resource
constraints
5. Work-life
imbalance
1. Patient
suffering
2. Inadequate
support
3. Attitude and
ability of staff
4. Feelings of
powerlessness
5. Staffing
levels
6. Multiple roles
7. Behavior of
managers
1. Seeing criminals go free
2. Having to deal with the media
3. Insufficient personal time
(e.g., coffee breaks, lunch)
4. Dealing with crisis situations
5. Lack of recognition for good
work
6. Experiencing negative
attitudes toward the organization
7. Assignment of increased
responsibility
8. Personal insult from
customer/consumer/colleague
9. Frequent interruptions
10. Covering work for another
employee
1. Frequent call during night shift
2. Long working hours
3. Heavy workload
4. Keen competition for job
5. Uncertainty in securing a
satisfactory job
6. Making clinical errors
7. Lack of openness and
transparency in recruitment
system
8. Heavy responsibility
9. Performance assessment by
supervisor/mentor
10. Incompetence in managing
clinical problem
6. Lack of skills
7. Lack of
awareness
8. Work
environment
9. Unmatched
expectations
10. Economic
status
Although there are definitely common themes you can see across all the
occupations shown in Table 12.1, you can also see that each occupation has
unique stressors that clearly differentiate it from other occupations.
Stress can be overwhelming.
© Thinkstock/iStock
Outcomes of Stress
Lastly, stress can lead to a number of behavioral outcomes, including increased
aggression, counterproductive workplace behaviors, and substance abuse.
As employees of an organization, we have to realize that stress can be both
positive and negative. All members of the organization should be aware of their
own level of stress as well as that of other individuals. Wendell French, Fremont
Kast, and James Rosenzweig argued that organizations should strive to maintain
a balance of eustress (pleasant) and distress (problematic). [17] Managers can
foster a balanced work environment, they believed, through effective
performance planning, role analysis, and interpersonal skills training. Care must
be taken, observed French, Kast, and Rosenzweig, since managers must strike a
delicate balance in each of five areas:
1. Uncertainty can lead to distress, but so can certainty or overcontrol.
2. Pressure can lead to distress, but so can limbo or lack of contact.
3. Responsibility can lead to distress, but so can lack of responsibility or
insignificance.
4. Performance evaluation can lead to distress, but so can lack of feedback
concerning performance.
5. Role ambiguity can lead to distress, but so can job descriptions that
constrain individuality. [18]
Table 12.2 reviews outcomes related to negative stress in the workplace. The
second column lists outcomes associated with the individual; the second column
lists outcomes are reflected in the workplace itself. This view of stressors and
outcomes was originally put forward by Steve Jex and Craig Crossley, and
subsequent research has expanded their findings. [19] As you can see, when
negative stress festers in an organization, a wide range of negative consequences
can result.
Table 12.2 Negative Stressors and Outcomes
Outcome Individual Organization
Psychological
• Increased anxiety
• Increased depression
• Decrease in self-efficacy
• Increased burnout
• Decreased quality of life
• Increased job dissatisfaction
• Decreased organizational commitment
• Decreased employee motivation
• Decreased organizational acculturation
• Increased job strain
• Increased depression
Physical
• Increased hypertension
• Increased stomach ulcers
• Increased asthma
• Increased sexually transmitted
infections
• Increased heart disease
• Increased dyslipidemia
• Increased rheumatoid
arthritis
• Increased fatigue/insomnia
• Increased use of sick days
• Increased money spent on health care
• Increased number of worker’s
compensation claims
Behavioral
• Decreased positive health behaviors
• Decreased physical activity Increased
risk taking
• Increased drug/alcohol use
• Increased voluntary turnover
• Decreased productivity
• Decreased performance
• Increased counterproductive workplace
behaviors
• Increased accidents
• Increased violence
• Increased involuntary turnover
Communicative
• Increased aggression
• Decreased cooperative behaviors
• Decreased immediacy
• Negative emotional displays
• Decreased communication competence
• Increased workplace bullying
• Increased workplace incivility
• Increased negative conflict
• Decreased emotional labor
• Increased interpersonal conflicts
Burnout
When stress is not controlled after it goes from being a stressor (or series of
stressors) to prolonged job strain, an individual can find herself or himself in a
state of burnout. Herbert Freudenberger introduced the concept of burnout in
1974, when he discussed a state of mental and physical exhaustion that results
from one’s workplace. [20] In its original conceptualization, burnout was a
concept that primarily applied to individuals who worked in jobs where strong
demands for nurturing and caring for others occurred (e.g., health aides, nurses,
nursing home workers). Over time, our understanding of burnout and the
problems associated with it has become deeper. Freudenberger actually coopted
the term from the illicit drug users, who had been using the term burnout to refer
to the devastating effects of chronic drug abuse. To help us understand burnout
to a greater degree, we will examine the three primary characteristics of burnout
seen and discussed in modern research, as well as the burnout cycle.
Characteristics of Burnout
Wilmar Schaufeli, Michael Leiter, and Christina Maslach recently surveyed the
literature on burnout over the last thirty-five years and found that the research
describes three general characteristics common in burnout sufferers: high levels
of exhaustion, cynicism, and reduced professional efficacy: [21]
“Exhaustion refers to a state of energy draining that takes the form of
mental, emotional and physical tiredness. Cynicism concerns the
development of negative attitudes toward the nature and the recipients of
one’s work that may be best described as dysfunctional disengagement and
a gradual loss of concern. Lack of professional efficacy has to do with the
tendency to feel incompetent at work and goes hand-in-hand with poor
self-esteem and insufficiency.” [22]
Exhaustion, cynicism, and lack of self-efficacy don’t happen overnight. People
develop these three characteristics over time. Furthermore, just because someone
is exhausted doesn’t necessarily mean that he or she will be cynical and feel a
loss in self-efficacy. Ask any of your professors toward the end of the semester,
and most will respond that they are exhausted—just as most of you are. It’s the
combination of these three characteristics that tends to represent the modern
state of burnout.
Stages of Burnout
Herbert Freudenberger and Gail North originally conceived of burnout as a
process, rather than a single event, and described a burnout cycle composed of
twelve stages (Figure 12.1). [23]
Figure 12.1 Freudenberger and North’s Burnout Cycle
Stage 1: Compulsion to Prove Oneself
Burnout typically starts when an individual has ambitions for upward mobility.
There is nothing wrong, of course, with a desire to excel and succeed. However,
for some people, this desire to prove oneself becomes an unhealthy
determination that borders on obsession.
Stage 2: Working Harder
The ambitious individual works hard, gets noticed by others in an organization,
and may rise in the corporate hierarchy. For this reason, the individual is
generally viewed positively by coworkers and superiors. As a result, the
individual may start believing that he or she is irreplaceable and refuse to let
others help with tasks.
Stage 3: Neglecting One’s Own Needs
The first two stages often characterize most ambitious individuals. However, the
potential for burnout becomes clearer in the third stage. At this point, the
individual starts neglecting his or her own needs (e.g., eating, family, friends,
sleeping) in favor of working harder and longer hours. The individual often
rationalizes that these sacrifices are necessary to the organization or for career
advancement.
Stage 4: Displacement of Conflicts
At this stage, the individual headed toward burnout starts to realize something is
seriously wrong. However, because actually addressing the problem is an affront
to the person’s view of the world and life, the individual attributes the problem
to other causes. Symptoms of physiological stress (see Table 12.2) often emerge
at this stage.
Stage 5: Revision of Values
For the individual in this stage of the burnout cycle, once-important factors (e.g.,
friends, loved ones, vacations, hobbies) become nuisances. Instead, the
individual’s values and self-worth are wrapped up in his or her job performance.
With this radical change in values, the individual may shut down emotionally
because emotions are “too human” and get in the way of work.
Stage 6: Denial of Emerging Problems
Instead of confronting the problem head on, the individual at this stage in the
burnout cycle denies the problem in favor of other explanations. Colleagues are
seen as lazy and stupid, which is why work often doesn’t get done in the right
way or on time. Other factors, such as time and resource constraints, are also
blamed. Every problem that emerges is something thrust upon the individual and
not caused by her or his own thinking or behavior. Psychologists would say the
person has an “external locus of control.”
Stage 7: Withdrawal
When the individual starts withdrawing and becomes increasingly isolated, this
change in behavior becomes clear to others. Family, friends, and coworkers
become concerned for the individual’s well-being. Again, the individual at this
point is aware that something is wrong. He or she may try alcohol or drugs to
dull the pain. The three characteristics of burnout—exhaustion, cynicism, and
reduced professional efficacy—have truly taken root.
Stage 8: Obvious Behavioral Changes
The ambitious individual who was excited about work becomes someone seen as
reclusive, shy, and apathetic. Where the individual once lived for work, now he
or she feels at the mercy of work. As behavioral changes become increasingly
obvious, others can no longer excuse the changes they see. For that reason, the
individual’s self-worth gets progressively lower.
Stage 9: Depersonalization
At this stage, depersonalization, an individual starts to lose contact with her or
his true self. Instead of seeing herself or himself as a unique individual with
specific knowledge and talents, the person sees neither herself or himself nor
others as valuable or useful. In fact, both personal life (if there still is one) and
work life become a series of steps to perform, almost robotic.
Stage 10: Inner Emptiness
The individuals in the tenth stage becomes more and more trapped in inner
monologues of self-hate. To fill the “down time,” he or she may engage in
destructive behaviors such as risky sexual practices, drug or alcohol abuse, or
other addictive behaviors. In essence, the person does not want to be alone with
his or her thoughts and seeks out distractions. By this point, however, the
individual has few positive outlets and thus opts for negative ones instead.
Stage 11: Depression
Clinical depression is often the next stage in the burnout cycle, as the individual
sees little hope in the future. Often driven by volatile mood swings, the person’s
behaviors can run the gamut from agitation to full-on verbal and physical
aggression.
Stage 12: Burnout Syndrome
Freudenberger and North’s final stage in the burnout cycle is what they dubbed
the “burnout syndrome.” At this point, the individual starts to see death as a
viable option for escape. As suicidal ideations become more pronounced, the
person may even act on these thoughts. The individual is in a complete clinical
meltdown, is a danger to self and others, and needs inpatient psychiatric care.
The Influence of Communication on Burnout
As you can see from our discussion of Freudenberger and North’s burnout cycle,
burnout is not something to be taken lightly. Over the years, a number of
different studies have examined the influence of communication within the
workplace and its influence on burnout. In Chapter 5, we introduced you to the
concept of an individual’s communication network within the workplace. A
study conducted by Eileen Ray and Katherine Miller set out to see how an
individual’s communication network within the organization impacted her or his
levels of burnout. [24] They found that an individual’s communication network
did relate to her or his likelihood of burning out. Specifically, the researchers
found that the quality of the relationships we have with those individuals within
our communication networks at work is more important to preventing burnout
than having a large number of individuals within our communication network.
Furthermore, the types of interactions we have and the types of talk we engage
in also matter. If we have individuals with whom we converse only about the
task at hand, these communication networks will not be as beneficial at reducing
burnout as individuals within our network from whom we receive social support.
When it comes to preventing burnout, having people within the workplace who
can provide social support is extremely important.
Another study, Michael Leiter also examined the impact that an individual’s
formal and informal communication networks (a subject covered in Chapter 5)
had on emotional exhaustion, depersonalization, and burnout in the workplace. [25] Figure 12.2 shows the results of Leiter’s study.
Figure 12.2 Communication and Burnout
In Figure 12.2, the solid gray lines show positive relationships between variables
within Leiter’s study. So both the number of work contacts and the number of
informal contacts positively related to an individual’s feelings of personal
accomplishment in the workplace. However, only an individual’s informal
contacts made her or him feel satisfied with work. Second, as the number of
workplace contacts escalates, an individual’s level of emotional exhaustion in
the workplace rises. Next, there was a positive relationship between an
individual’s emotional exhaustion and depersonalization. However, job
satisfaction only negatively related (red dashed line) to emotional exhaustion.
Lastly, an individual’s job satisfaction positively related to feelings of personal
accomplishment. What can we learn from this study’s findings? Overall, the type
of networked relationships you develop at work does impact your job
satisfaction, feelings of accomplishment, and likelihood of burnout. On the
whole, you can’t avoid having work contacts in the workplace. However,
developing informal contacts in the workplace can boost your job satisfaction. In
another study examining the relationship between emotional exhaustion,
depersonalization, and feelings of accomplishment, there was a negative
relationship between depersonalization and feelings of accomplishment. [26]
These findings further corroborate the basic notions of burnout
Organizational Responses to Stress
One of the hardest questions many organizations face is what to do about worker
stress. Is it even the organization’s job to worry about stress? For our purposes,
we will review three strategies that organizations often employ to help workers
handle day-to-day stress: stress management training, employee assistance
programs, and sociotechnical interventions.
Stress Management Training
One of the first tools that organizations can employ involves their training and
development department. We discuss training and development in more detail in
Chapter 15 as a general concept, but for now let’s just say that training and
development is a huge business in the United States. According to 2012 State of
the Industry, published by the American Society for Training and Development,
US organizations spent more than $156 billion on training and development. [27]
Although not one of the most common topics for training, stress is a training
topic that is necessary in most organizations. According to Susan Cartwright and
Lynne Whatmore, the typical stress management training program will include
the following:
Stress awareness and education
Relaxation techniques
Cognitive coping strategies, such as rational emotive behavioral therapy
(REBT)
Biofeedback
Meditation
Exercise
Lifestyle advice and health-promotion activities
Interpersonal-skills training such as time management and assertiveness
training [28]
As you can see from this list of topics, most of these you would expect to see
discussed. However, let’s talk about two topics that are lesser known. First, we
have REBT. This is a form of cognitive-behavioral therapy that specifically
strives to help people resolve emotional and behavioral problems, so they can
live happier and more productive lives. Through this process, a trained therapist
guides an individual to help her or him see how often her or his own emotions
and thoughts drive behavior. In fact, often our own emotions and thoughts drive
us to the point of being stressed out. Have you ever sat around and thought about
every possible case scenario? For example, maybe you’re waiting for a friend to
show up for dinner and she is running late. You may sit at the restaurant with a
wide range of negative thoughts running through your head: she’s standing me
up because she hates me, maybe she was in an accident, maybe I have the wrong
date and time, and so on. When your friend finally shows up, you’ve already
stressed yourself out and she was just running late. The goal of REBT is to help
people own their thoughts and emotions and start to see when and how they
contribute to stress. When people can learn to identify these irrational thoughts,
it’s much easier to help them learn how to manage their stress.
Another tool that is often used is biofeedback, “a technique usually involving the
measurement of muscle and skin activity whereby individuals can monitor
physiological changes in their bodies. It is used in conjunction with other
methods of stress reduction (e.g., relaxation) to inform individuals of the
effectiveness of their efforts to reduce stress.” [29] When we get stressed, there
are often biological effects like rapid breathing, increased heart rate, and
elevated hand temperature. Devices exist that can measure these effects to help
train an individual to recognize when stress is affecting her or him and then offer
strategies to reduce that stress. Just google biofeedback and stress, and you’ll
find a wide range of products being sold online designed to help people manage
their stress. However, not all these devices actually do anything other than beep
and provide nonsensical readouts, so it’s always best to consult with a trained
professional.
Employee Assistance Programs
A second option that many organizations have for their members is employee
assistance programs (EAPs). The first EAPs were established in 1917 by R. M.
Macy and Co. and the Northern States Power Company when it was realized that
employee productivity and performance problems were often related to personal
issues outside of work. [30] However, EAPs really didn’t take off until the 1940s
and 1950s after the repeal of Prohibition in the United States. In fact, in the early
years, EAPs were predominantly concerned with alcoholism. The Yale Center of
Alcohol Studies and the National Committee on Education on Alcoholism were
highly focused on helping organizations create in-house treatment programs for
alcoholics during this time period. [31]
Over the years, EAPs have evolved and now help individuals in a variety of
stressful situations that can hurt performance and productivity in the workplace.
In fact, more than 96 percent of Fortune 500 companies have EAPs. [32] Today,
these programs are designed to help people with a range of emotional, financial,
mental, and substance-abuse problems. Because of this broader expansion in the
area of both emotional and mental health, EAPs often have services available for
individuals needing help managing their stress.
Of course, organizations want to evidence that EAPs are effective. A 2013 study
by Bensinger, DuPont, and Associates (BDA) found that stress has a negative
impact on organizations. Common problems caused by stress included difficulty
concentrating at work (44.3 percent of men and 49.2 percent of women),
absenteeism (15.8 percent and 17.1 percent), poor work quality (14.4 percent
and 12.8 percent), and incomplete tasks (4.5 percent and 4.7 percent). However,
94 percent of employees who went through an EAP program designed by BDA
reported an increase in overall work performance. About two-thirds of men and
women boosted their productivity. Recommendations made for future EAP
interventions included specific communication tools: text messaging, Skype, and
face-to-face counseling sessions. Overall, BDA found that EAP interventions to
combat stress must fit into an employee’s schedule so as not to become an
additional stressor. BDA also recommended that managers receive more training
in how to spot subordinates who may benefit from EAP help. Too often,
individuals in management positions watch an employee deteriorate without
thinking about EAP interventions that may be available for the employee.
Sociotechnical Interventions
The final type of stress-reduction intervention looks holistically at the job and
the workplace to see if parts of the system are causing stress. Specifically,
sociotechnical interventions “refer to primary prevention interventions aimed at
eliminating job stressors by making changes to objective working conditions or
to the objective work environment.” [33] The three most common changes that
organizations can make to reduce stress are adjustments in workloads, work
schedules, and work processes.
An individual’s workload is related to a wide range of behavioral, physical,
psychological, and communication problems. Ample evidence confirms that
workloads in the United States have been steadily increasing over many years.
As such, many individuals feel that they are drowning under the weight of work.
There is also a tendency in many organizations to pile more work on those who
are better workers and less on those who are not.
Second, organizations can help individuals destress by allowing them more
flexibility with their work schedules. Research has demonstrated that having
control over one’s work schedule can be very important in terms of an
employee’s psychological, behavioral, social, and physical health. [34] For
example, many employers offer flextime, which allows employees to schedule
their workday around events outside the organization. In many organizations that
allow flextime, there is a general understanding that workers are at work during
the core business hours between 9 a.m. and 3 p.m. However, there is a twelve-
hour period in which they could work (7 a.m. to 7 p.m.). If an individual comes
in at 7 a.m. and works a standard eight-hour day, he or she could be out of the
office by 3 p.m. In essence, work is still getting accomplished, but people have
more flexibility in their schedules. For example, if you’re a working father and
you need to drop your kids off at school at 8:30 a.m., and your office generally
opens at 8 a.m., trying to figure out how your kids get to school when you’re
supposed to be working can be quite stressful. As such, allowing this individual
to come in at 9 a.m., and then work until 5 p.m., can relieve his stress.
Lastly, organizations can adjust work processes and procedures. One of the
biggest stressors can be the way in which we conduct business. Every
organization has specific processes for how work is conducted and procedures
employees should follow. However, often these are so cumbersome that they
actually cause unneeded stress. Let’s look at each of these separately.
Organizational processes include a range of situations that help inform what
needs to be done and which roles are involved. [35] For example, maybe your
organization has a process for handling sexual harassment complaints (Figure
12.3). As you can see from this process map, there is a series of steps that sexual
harassment allegations go through before final decisions are made. If someone
feels that this process is too complex or burdensome, he or she may avoid the
process and continue to be routinely victimized, causing serious amounts of
stress. In fact, some victims of harassment have actually argued that the process
of reporting harassment can make them feel like a victim all over again.
Procedures, on the other hand, involve a description of how to complete a
specific task and generally describe only one individual’s role. For example,
there may be an explicit procedure in place for how a manager responds when he
or she receives the written complaint of sexual harassment. In the first case, we
have a process that outlines the steps. In the second case, we have specific
procedures that relate to an individual’s role within the process itself.
Organizations can help alleviate stress with processes and procedures designed
so they do not become so burdensome that they add to an individual’s overall
stress load. People who conduct these types of analyses are generally human
performance improvement professionals. They examine a wide range of
processes, procedures, and individual factors within an organization in an effort
to make the organization and its members more effective and efficient. In
Chapter 15, we explore the world of human performance improvement in more
detail.
Figure 12.3 Sexual Harassment Investigation Process
KEY TAKEAWAY
Stress is an individual’s reaction to factors in the organization.
This is the cognitive, affective, or physical strain or tension
producing mental tension or physiological reactions that disturb
the body’s normal state of functioning.
Stress can result in psychological, physical, behavioral, and
communicative outcomes. Psychological outcomes might be
expressed as job dissatisfaction, anger, and hostility. Physical
outcomes might be high blood pressure and headaches.
Behavioral outcomes can include changes in eating and sleeping
behaviors.
Workplace stress can have a wide range of negative outcomes for
people who are exposed to high levels of stress that lead to work
strain. Work strain that is not managed over time will eventually
lead to a breakdown in an individual’s ability to function in the
workplace and could lead to burnout.
Organizations have a responsibility to help organization members
manage stress. To do so, organizations have a number of tools at
their disposal, including stress management training, employee
assistance programs, and sociotechnical interventions.
EXERCISES
1. In groups, discuss the three I’s in conflict: incompatible goals,
interdependence, and interaction. Can you think of specific
examples for each one?
2. In groups, discuss the pros and cons of each type of stress and
discuss how to deal with each type.
3. Contact someone who is currently part of or has been a part of a
high-stress job. Ask him or her specific questions regarding stress
and the job. Do you see relationships between the person you
contacted and what was presented in this chapter?
4. Divide the class into small groups. Each group must select a
different type of stress. Group members will act out their type in
Stress :
Distress :
Eustress :
Stressors :
front of the class, and the class must guess which type is being
acted.
KEY TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
A cognitive, affective, or physical strain or tension that produces mental tension or physiological reactions that disturb the body’s normal state of functioning.
A problematic type of stress because it creates a substandard working environment.
Stress that is pleasant and creates an optimal working condition.
Specific activities, events, experiences, or people that induce stress.
[1] Spurgeon, A., Jackson, C. A., & Beach, J. R. (2001). The life events
inventory: Re-scaling based on an occupational sample. Occupational
Medicine, 51, 287–293.
[2] Thi Giang, H., Corbière, M., Neg, A., Minh Khuê, P., & Reinharz, D.
(2013). Validation of the Karasek—Job content questionnaire to measure
job strain in Vietnam. Psychological Reports, 113, 363–379, p. 363.
doi:10.2466/01.03.PR0.113x20z3
[3] Cropanzano, R., Goldman, B. M., & Benson, L., III. (2005).
Organizational justice. In J. Barling, E. K. Kelloway, & M. R. Frone (Eds.),
Handbook of work stress (pp. 63–87). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
[4] Selye, H. (1983). The stress concept: Past, present and future. In D.
L. Cooper (Ed.), Stress research: Issues for the eighties (pp. 1–20). New
York, NY: Wiley.
[5] Barling, J., Kelloway, E. K., & Frone, M. R. (2005). Handbook of work
stress. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
[6] Schat, A. C. H., & Kelloway, E. K. (2005). Workplace aggression. In J.
Barling, E. K. Kelloway, & M. R. Frone (Eds.), Handbook of work stress
(pp. 189–218). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
[7] French, W. L., Kast, F. E., & Rosenzweig, J. E. (1985). Understanding
human behavior in organizations. New York, NY: Harper & Row, p. 708.
[8] Bhagat, R. S. (1983). Effects of stressful life events on individual
performance effectiveness and work adjustment processes within
organizational settings: A research model. Academy of Management
Review, 8, 660–671.
[9] Yi-Hua, H., & Mei-Ling, W. (2012). The moderating role of personality
in HRM: From the influence of job stress on job burnout perspective.
International Management Review, 8(2), 5–18.
[10] Billing, T. K., & Steverson, P. (2013). Moderating role of type-A
personality on stress-outcome relationships. Management Decision, 51,
1893–1904. doi:10.1108/MD-01-2013-0018
[11] McGrath, J. E. (1976). Stress and behavior in organizations. In M. D.
Dunnett (Ed.), Handbook of industrial and organizational psychology.
Chicago, IL: Rand McNally College.
[12] Global Business and Economic Roundtable on Addiction and Mental
Health (n.d.). Top 10 sources of workplace stress. Accessed August 20,
2014, from http://www.mentalhealthroundtable.ca/aug_round_pdfs/Top
Ten Sources of Stress.pdf
[13] Budhraja, J. (2008). Causes of stress among insurance employees:
An empirical study. ICFAI Journal of Management Research, 7(10), 7–17.
[14] Muncer, S., Taylor, S., Green, D. W., & McManus, I. C. (2001).
Nurses’ representations of the perceived causes of work-related stress: A
network drawing approach. Work & Stress, 15(1), 40–52.
doi:10.1080/02678370110063402
[15] Sundaram, M., & Kumaran, M. (2012). A study on frequency of
occupational stress among grade I police constables. International
Journal of Business Management & Economic Research, 3(4), 590–597.
[16] Lam, T. P., Wong, J. S., Ip, M. M., Lam, K. F., & Pang, S. L. (2010).
Psychological well-being of interns in Hong Kong: What causes them
stress and what helps them. Medical Teacher, 32(3), e120–e126.
doi:10.3109/01421590903449894
[17] French, W. L., Kast, F. E., & Rosenzweig, J. E. (1985).
Understanding human behavior in organizations. New York, NY: Harper &
Row.
[18] French, W. L., Kast, F. E., & Rosenzweig, J. E. (1985).
Understanding human behavior in organizations. New York, NY: Harper &
Row.
[19] Jex, S. M., & Crossley, C. D. (2005). Organizational consequences.
In. J. Barling, E. K. Kelloway, & M. R. Frone (Eds.), Handbook of work
stress (pp. 575–599). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
[20] Freudenberger, H. J. (1974). Staff burn-out. Journal of Social Issues,
30, 159–165. doi:10.1111/j.1540-4560.1974.tb00706.x.
[21] Schaufeli, W. B., Leiter, M. P., & Maslach, C. (2009). Burnout: 35
years of research and practice. Career Development International, 14,
204–220.
[22] Xanthopoulou, D., & Meier, L. L. (2014). Daily burnout experiences:
Critical events and measurement challenges. In M. P. Leiter, A. B.
Bakker, & C. Maslach (Eds.), Burnout at work: A psychological
perspective (pp. 80–101). New York, NY: Psychology Press. [Kindle
version]. Retrieved from http://www.amazon.com, Kindle locations 2208–
2211.
[23] Freudenberger, H. J., & North, G. (2006). The burnout cycle.
Scientific American Mind, 17(3), 31.
[24] Ray, E., & Miller, K. I. (1991). The influence of communication
structure and social support on job stress and burnout. Management
Communication Quarterly, 4, 506–527.
[25] Leiter, M. P. (1988). Burnout as a function of communication
patterns. Group & Organization Studies, 13, 111–128.
[26] Snyder, J. L. (2012). Extending the empathic communication model
of burnout: Incorporating individual differences to learn more about
workplace emotion, communicative responsiveness, and burnout.
Communication Quarterly, 60, 122–142.
doi:10.1080/01463373.2012.641837
[27] Miller, L. (2012). State of the industry, 2012. Alexandria, VA: ASTD
Press.
[28] Cartwright, S., & Whatmore, L. (2005). Stress and individual
differences: Implications for stress management. In A. S. Antoniou & C.
L. Cooper (Eds.), A research companion to organizational health
psychology (pp. 163–173). Northampton, MA: Edward Elgar, p. 169.
[29] Cartright, S., & Cooper, C. (2005). Individually targeted interventions.
In J. Barling, E. K. Kelloway, & M. R. Frone (Eds.), Handbook of work
stress (pp. 607–622). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
[30] Rutter, M. (2012). How employee assistance programs (EAPs)
respond to trauma support and critical incident management: An
international focus. In R. Hughes, A. Kinder, & C. L. Cooper (Eds.),
International handbook of workplace trauma support (pp. 295–321).
Malden, MA: Wiley-Blackwell.
[31] Henderson, R., & Bacon, S. (1953). Problem drinking: The Yale plan
for business and industry. Quarterly Journal of Studies on Alcohol, 14,
247–262.
[32] Rutter, M. (2012). How employee assistance programs (EAPs)
respond to trauma support and critical incident management: An
international focus. In R. Hughes, A. Kinder, & C. L. Cooper (Eds.),
International handbook of workplace trauma support (pp. 295–321).
Malden, MA: Wiley-Blackwell.
[33] Hurrell, J. J., Jr. (2005). Organizational stress intervention. In J.
Barling, E. K. Kelloway, & M. R. Frone (Eds.), Handbook of work stress
(pp. 623–645). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage, p. 631.
[34] Sauter, S. L., Murphy, L. R., & Hurrell, J. J., Jr. (1990). Prevention of
work-related psychological disorders: A national strategy proposed by the
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH). American
Psychologist, 45, 1146–1158.
[35] Kulpa, M., & Johnson, K. (2003). Interpreting the CMMI(R): A
process improvement approach. Boca Raton, FL: CRC Press. OSH).
12.2 Conflict
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
1. Describe the term conflict.
2. Define the conflict-management strategies.
3. Discuss the impact of conflict on organizations.
© Thinkstock/Photodisc
Do you know what conflict is? How would you define conflict? There are
several definitions of conflict and organizational conflict. Linda Putnam and
Marshall Scott Poole defined conflict as “the interaction of interdependent
people who perceive opposition of goals, aims, and values, and who see the
other party as potentially interfering with the realization of these goals.” [1]
There is a difference between a conflict and a disagreement. A disagreement is a
difference of opinion without an association of any kind of negative effect.
According to Dudley Cahn and Ruth Anna Abigail, [2] interpersonal conflict
consists of four basic parts:
1. The conflict parties are interdependent.
2. The parties perceive that they seek incompatible goals or outcomes, or they
favor incompatible means to the same ends.
3. The perceived incompatibility has the potential to adversely affect the
relationship, leaving emotional residues if not addressed.
4. There is a sense of urgency about the need to resolve the difference.
First, interdependence is important in the organizational environment because it
might cause conflict. For instance, if you ask two workers who have completely
different work ethics to collaborate on a project, conflict might arise, especially
if one worker is Type A and likes to get projects completed in a timely, efficient
manner, and the other worker is a procrastinator and believes that the best ideas
are the ones done at the last minute. These two workers might be great
employees on solo projects because they know how to do their jobs effectively.
However, once these two workers become interdependent, they must determine
the best way to work with each other to complete the project. This
interdependence might be very difficult to deal with. Another example might be
two trains with separate tracks. The trains run fine on their distinct tracks.
However, once the trains have to share the same track, some interdependence
occurs and in turn causes conflict about which train should use the track first and
how long. In both these examples, the incompatibility is not the main issue.
Rather, what becomes prominent in both examples is the idea of
interdependence, in which one depends on the other.
Second, incompatible goals are often the main reason for conflict and might
include several problems in the organization. For instance, two workers might
want two completely different things, and they cannot agree on a solution. One
worker might want to have an on-site fitness facility, while another worker
would like an on-site child day care. A child-care facility would only benefit
workers with children, and those workers who do not have children might not
understand the importance of an on-site day care. While both workers may have
valid reasons for their ideas, there might be enough financial support for only
one facility. Another example might be where two workers have completely
different values. One worker might feel it necessary to work on certain holidays
to increase sales, while the other worker would rather not work holidays to spend
time with family and friends. Overall, incompatible goals usually stem from
different perspectives and perceptions.
Third, there exists the possibility that the relationship will be negatively affected
if the conflict is not managed in a prosocial manner. When conflict is not
managed effectively and efficiently, it can slowly deteriorate relationships
among those individuals involved. For this reason, Cahn and Abigail argue that
for it truly to be conflict (and not just a disagreement), there must be the
possibility of negative ramifications on relationships.
Lastly, there exists a sense of urgency to resolve the conflict. If people could put
off having the conflict till next week, next month, or next year, then there really
isn’t a serious conflict. As such, there is an emphasis on the need to resolve the
conflict quickly. In a situation where there is a disagreement and not a conflict,
people may not need to resolve the disagreement. Two people may prefer
different types of legal pads in the office (one likes yellow and one likes white).
Is this a conflict? Most assuredly not. In fact, if people let a little disagreement
blow up into a full-on conflict, there generally exist much larger conflictual
problems than legal pads, which must be dealt with first.
Although we most often think of conflicts as occurring between two people,
there are larger, organizational conflicts as well. Ana Akemi Ikeda, Tania
Modesto Veludo-de-Oliveira, and Marcos Cortez Campomar identified two types
of organizational conflict: vertical and horizontal. [3] Vertical conflicts happen
between two different groups of people in the organization who have different
hierarchical levels, such as managers and employees. Vertical conflicts happen
due to differences in power and status. The stress that these employees might
experience stems from a variety of sources: psychological distance (where there
are differences in employee perception about their importance in the
organization and/or needs are not being met), power (employees might have
different perceptions of organizational power), value differences (employees
might differ in their organizational goals), and scarce resources. Horizontal
conflicts, on the other hand, happen between employees who have the same
level, such as all the employees in the same department. As we will see, stress
can definitely cause conflict, but it is also true that conflicts can cause stress.
Intergroup and Interorganizational Conflict
Now that we understand conflict, we need to look specifically at organizational
conflict. Many researchers typically examine conflict at the interpersonal level—
that is, specific individuals who may have different perspectives from other
individuals. However, in an organization, conflict may be intergroup or
interorganizational.
Intergroup conflict occurs when groups of individuals in the organization
encounter conflict. These groups might include certain departments, divisions, or
work teams. For instance, the human resources department might be in conflict
with the financial services department because of differing opinions about how
certain expenses should be allocated. Perhaps the human resources department
thinks that it is important to take potential employees out for a lunch or dinner
interview, and the financial services department believes that it is a waste of
money because some of these interviewees might not be hired. This discrepancy
between departments might cause conflict. Another example might be an
organization with multiple locations around the world, which is launching a new
advertising campaign. In one country, the advertisement might be seen as
raunchy and disturbing, while the other country might find the ad very
humorous.
Interorganizational conflict includes disagreements between two or more
organizations. For instance, an oil company might want land to drill for
resources, but environmental conservationists might be worried about the
wildlife in that area. Both need to find ways to achieve their main objectives.
Another example might include two organizations that are competing for
customers. Both organizations are selling the same product for the same price
but need to find ways to get customers to purchase the item from them and not
from their competitor. Or consider how a government agency and a profit-
making corporation engaged in a public-private partnership might clash over the
goals of their joint project. Interorganizational conflict can be stressful when the
two organizations have different ideals and perspectives.
Functional and Dysfunctional Conflict
Conflict can be classified as functional or dysfunctional. Functional conflict
includes interactions that strengthen the relationship. It helps individuals realize
what is important and what needs to be addressed in the interaction.
Dysfunctional conflict includes interactions that hinder or destroy relationships.
In this type of conflict, preconceptions are out of control. Individuals engaged in
dysfunctional conflict might view their actions as protective and see behaviors of
others as devious and doubting.
Figure 12.4 Dysfunctional and Functional Types of Conflict
If you work in an organization where there is a lot of dysfunctional conflict,
there are ways to change it to functional types of conflict. We will now discuss
the different types of dysfunctional conflict and how to make it functional.
First, polarization is where two people are completely opposite from each other.
Each views himself or herself as good and the other person as bad. You might
have two employees, one of whom wants to save money for the organization,
while the other employee wants to spend money to increase sales. To make this a
functional conflict, you need to have an integrative approach. Integration takes
into account that the employees are in the same situation. Hence they try to work
collectively on an ideal solution. They don’t view things as good or bad. In the
previous example, the employees could view the situation from the perspective
of trying to increase sales rather than as a spender and a saver.
Second, opposition occurs when people disagree, each viewing it as a loss if he
or she does not win. Most issues are critical for people in disagreement. They
tend not to find resolution in a constructive fashion. They play devil’s advocate.
On the other hand, cooperation is a solution that everyone can agree on.
Disconfirmation occurs when one person attacks or insults another person but is
not addressing the real problem. You might see coworkers who attack ideas and
issues, but there is no solution or resolution to the conflict. Confirmation is
where the person acknowledges and addresses the other person’s concerns and
seeks a solution that is person centered. If you approach conflict this way, then
people feel as though their concerns have been heard.
Coercion is using intimidation and/or bullying to get what you want. Sometimes
employees may force their thoughts or opinions onto others to achieve their
goals. They might stoop to low levels to get to the top. A better option to this
type of conflict is agreement. Agreement is where both parties unreservedly
accept the solution. Agreement is best because people see eye to eye about the
conflict, and there are no perceptions of distrust or bitterness.
In escalating types of conflict, the problems get worse and worse. The person
who is attacked or criticized is usually more inclined to be vengeful. You have
probably witnessed this type of conflict when the problem starts out as minor
and then becomes something major. The opposite of escalating is de-escalating,
where the two individuals in conflict solve problems together rather than making
it worse. People in organizational conflict should try their best to de-escalate the
conflict.
Drifting conflict is where an individual will not focus on the conflict at hand;
rather, he or she will bring up past events or trivial issues. For instance, when
arguing with a supervisor about a specific task, the employee comments on
something done on a task a long time ago. Focusing is concentrating on the
current issues or problems. This is the best way to deal with conflict, because
you are not able to change the past or predict the future.
Shortsightedness is another type of dysfunctional conflict, where you don’t
realize the potential long-term outcomes. For instance, you argue with a
coworker to win a debate, but you also lose a friendship. In addition, being short
sighted refers to being blind to a solution that would be ideal for all individuals
involved. Foresight means that you argue about the important issues and ignore
less important ones.
Negative results occur when issues are not resolved and the future relationship is
threatened. If conflict is handled in a functional way, it can be meaningful for
your relationship, and it can make your relationships with others more cohesive
and beneficial.
Phases of Conflict
Employees in an organization do not shift from being harmonious to being
argumentative and divergent. Louis Pondy noted that people in organizations
will move into five distinct phases (Figure 12.5). [4] The first phase is called
latent conflict. In this phase, the situation is ripe for conflict to occur because of
some incompatibility or interdependence. The second phase is perceived conflict.
This happens when one or more parties acknowledge that there are
incompatibility issues present. The third phase is called felt conflict and occurs
when the parties figure out how to handle conflict and some possible different
outcomes. The fourth phase is manifest conflict in which goals are executed. The
last phase is the conflict aftermath. In this last phase, conflict has been resolved
in some manner, and there may be consequences involved for the parties. After
this stage, the individuals might perceive each other, their relationship, and/or
the organization differently.
Figure 12.5 Phases of Organizational Conflict
Conflict Management Measures
Over the years, a wide array of measures has been created to help researchers
analyze conflict. In this section, we examine two measures: the Kilmann-
Thomas Conflict MODE instrument and the ABCs Conflict Management
Strategies Scale.
Kilmann-Thomas Conflict MODE Instrument
The first real groundbreaking measure in the field of conflict management was
created in the 1970s by Ralph Kilmann and Kenneth Thomas. The origin of the
Kilmann-Thomas Management-of-Differences Exercise (MODE) instrument
stems from the previous research on management styles by Blake and Mouton. [5] (For more on Blake and Mouton’s work, see Chapter 7.) Blake and Mouton’s
managerial grid inspired Thomas in 1976 to theorize that the grid could also help
explain how individuals manage differences and conflicts. [6] Kilmann and
Thomas started with the basic notion that individuals engaged in managing
differences exist on two basic continuums: assertiveness and cooperation. In this
perspective, assertiveness refers to the degree to which an individual is
concerned with and attempts to satisfy her or his own concerns. In contrast,
cooperation is the degree to which an individual is concerned with and attempts
to satisfy others’ concerns. Based on these two dimensions, Thomas predicted
that there would be five distinct conflict-management strategies (Figure 12.6):
(1) avoidance, (2) compromise, (3) accommodation, (4) competition, and (5)
collaboration.
Figure 12.6 Conflict MODE
Avoidance
Avoidance is a style for individuals who do not care about their own goals or
about the needs of the relationship. As the name implies, avoidance is for
individuals who do not like to engage in conflict. They will try to avoid it if at all
possible. In an organizational context, avoidance is seen as a negative thing,
because valuable comments and input might not be shared.
Competition
Another conflict-management style is competition. The competitive person
seeks to resolve conflict for personal gain and does not care about others.
Competitive persons are more likely to perceive conflict as a game that they
need to win. This style is often harmful in an organizational context, because
everyone might not be able to communicate or share information, especially if a
competitive person dominates the decision-making process. However, if a
competitive person is willing to take on the responsibility of the decision and
help make the decision when the organization is at a standstill, then this can be
beneficial for the organization.
Compromise
Perhaps a better way to approach conflict is compromise. In compromise, both
parties get some of what they want and some of what they do not want. A
compromise can be beneficial when everyone achieves a balance of what he or
she wants with minimal losses. Some organizations prefer compromise as a way
to resolve conflict because most of the time all viewpoints are addressed.
Accommodation
Accommodation is best for people who have a high desire to please others
rather than satisfying their personal agendas. From time to time, accommodation
is best to maintain the relationship, preserve peace, and circumvent conflict. If
the conflict situation is difficult, accommodation allows for a quick resolution,
but this may be flawed because disagreements are more likely to be overlooked.
For instance, if the boss has a great idea, but you think it is horrible, you might
withhold your opinion on the matter because you value your relationship with
your boss.
Collaboration
The ideal conflict-management style is collaboration because it takes into
account the need to satisfy both others and oneself. It is also the most difficult to
accomplish because it is basically a win-win situation. All parties are getting
what they want from the conflict. At the same time, collaboration requires
strategic and effective communication because all parties need to be able to
express specifically what they want and how they will be able to achieve their
needs and goals. If communication is successful, then collaboration can be very
advantageous and favorable for all members involved.
Steps for Effective Collaboration
1. Define your needs:
Decide on what you want or need. In some cases, the answer is obvious; in others, it is less obvious. Determine your needs before you address the other person. Talking to a third party may be helpful.
2. Share your needs with the other person:
Once needs are determined, it is time to share them with the other person. Be sure to choose an ideal time and place for the situation.
3. Listen to the other person’s needs:
Listen to what the other person wants and needs.
Try to come up with a shared understanding of the problem in a supportive manner. Try to be as nonjudgmental, descriptive, and empathetic as possible.
4. Generate possible solutions:
Think of as many ways to come to compromise as can satisfy the needs of each person.
5. Evaluate the possible solutions and choose the best one:
Once all the solutions have been created, it is time to pick the best solution. It is important to work cooperatively when examining each solution and choosing the best one. Try to communicate how you feel about each of the solutions.
6. Implement the solution:
After a decision has been made, put your solution into action. The key questions to answer are who does what, to whom, and when?
7. Follow up on the solution:
Because people tend to be habitual creatures, it is important to reevaluate the solution. Sometimes the situation changes and it needs to be reassessed. After implementing the solution, it is a good idea to evaluate any thoughts on the solution. [7]
ABC Conflict Management Scale
Linda Putnam and Charmaine Wilson created the Organizational
Figure 12.7 ABC
Conflict
Management Styles
Communication Climate Instrument (OCCI) to measure three specific factors of
conflict: nonconfrontational strategies (avoidance), solution-oriented
strategies (cooperation/collaboration), and control strategies (competition). [8] A
similar measure is the ABC Conflict Management Styles Scale (Figure 12.7).
Take a minute to complete the ABC Conflict Management Styles Scale in the
sidebar.
ABC Conflict Management Styles Scale
Read the following questions and select the answer that corresponds with
how you typically behave when engaged in conflict with another person. Do
not be concerned if some of the items appear similar. Please use the following
scale to rate the degree to which each statement applies to you.
Strongly Disagree Disagree Neutral Agree Strongly Agree
1 2 3 4 5
When I start to engage in a conflict, I _______________.
1. Try to find a solution that works for everyone. _____
2. Keep the conflict to myself to avoid rocking the boat. _____
3. Do my best to win. _____
4. Try to find a solution that is beneficial for those involved. _____
5. Do my best to stay away from disagreements that arise. _____
6. Create a strategy to ensure my successful outcome. _____
7. Collaborate with others to find an outcome OK for everyone. _____
8. Avoid the individual with whom I’m having the conflict. _____
9. Won’t back down unless I get what I want. _____
10. Find solutions that satisfy everyone’s expectations. _____
11. Leave the room to avoid dealing with the issue. _____
12. Take no prisoners. _____
13. Try to integrate everyone’s ideas to come up with the best solution for
everyone. _____
14. Shut down and shut up to get it over with as quickly as possible. _____
15. See it as an opportunity to get what I want. _____
16. Openly raise everyone’s concerns to ensure the best outcome possible.
_____
17. Keep my disagreements to myself. _____
18. Don’t let up until I win. _____
To determine your score, add up the items for each of the 3 types of conflict
using the following scheme:
Items 1, 4, 7, 10, 13, 16—Avoiders
Items 2, 5, 8, 11, 14, 17—Collaborators
Items 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18—Battlers
Scores for each form of conflict should range between 6 and 30. Scores 19
and higher are considered high levels of the conflict management technique
and those 18 and lower are considered low levels of the conflict management
technique.
This measure was created for this text.
The ABC conflict management styles scale examines avoiding behavior, battling
behavior, and collaborating behavior. Avoiding behavior is designed to help an
individual step away from or avoid a conflict. Battling behavior is described as
conflict-management behavior in which an individual sees the conflict as a
competition or battle and therefore must win the battle at all costs.Collaborating
behavior strives to find a desirable solution for all individuals involved in the
conflict.
It is possible to exhibit a mixture of conflict management strategies when
engaging in conflict. However, most people tend to favor one method over the
other. In research looking at these three forms of conflict management, both
avoiders and battlers tend to have more problems with conflict. Avoidance and
battling are generally viewed as negative methods of conflict management.
Collaborators, on the other hand, tend to have the most favorable outcomes for
both themselves and others in the long run.
KEY TAKEAWAY
Conflict consists of incompatible goals, interdependence, and
interaction. The parties might have differences in perspectives or
perceptions.
Conflict can be dysfunctional, which means it hinders
relationships, or it can be functional, which means it helps
relationships. One can change dysfunctional conflict into
functional conflict.
Conflict-management styles include avoidance, compromise,
accommodation, competition, and collaboration. Avoidance
involves behaviors that evade conflict. Competition involves
interactions to solve the conflict for personal gain and with a lack
of regard for others. Compromise involves interactions in which
both parties get some of what they want and some of what they
Accommodation :
Avoidance :
Dysfunctional Conflict:
do not want. Accommodation involves interactions during conflict
to please others rather than satisfying personal goals.
Collaboration involves working together to satisfy both people’s
needs.
EXERCISES
1. Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of conflict in the
organizational setting.
2. Discuss the different conflict-management strategies. Based on
your experience, can you describe a situation where each
strategy occurred?
3. Do you believe that conflicts happen in phases in an
organization? Why or why not? Can you provide some specific
examples?
4. Can you think of some examples of dysfunctional conflict and how
you might be able to change them to functional conflict?
KEY TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
Involves interactions during conflict to please others rather than satisfying personal goals.
Involves behaviors that evade conflict.
Involves interactions that hinder the relationship.
Functional Conflict:
Argumentative :
Collaboration :
Competition:
Compromise:
Conflict :
Control :
Nonconfrontational :
Solution-Oriented:
Involves interactions that strengthen the relationship.
A trait where people attack only the topic and not the self-concept of the person.
Involves interactions during conflict to work together to satisfy both one’s own needs and the needs of others.
Involves interactions to solve the conflict for personal gain and with lack of regard for others.
Involves interactions where both parties get some of what they want and some of what they do not want.
Parties have different perspectives and perceptions.
Includes verbal and nonverbal communication behaviors to stress demands and distress the opposition.
Encompasses disagreement avoidance and/or shunning the opposition.
Includes direct strategies for handing conflict, such as compromise and innovative ways to work with the opposition.
[1] Putnam, L. L., & Poole, M. S. (1987). Conflict and negotiation. In F. M.
Jablin, L. L. Putnam, K. H. Roberts, & W. L. Porter (Eds.), Handbook of
organizational communication: An interdisciplinary perspective (pp. 549–
599). Newbury Park, CA: Sage, p. 552.
[2] Cahn, D. D., & Abigail, R. A. (2011). Managing conflict through
communication (4th ed.). Boston, MA: Allyn & Bacon, p. 4. p. 552.
[3] Ikeda, A. A., Veludo-de-Oliveira, T. M., & Campomar, M. C. (2005).
Organizational conflicts perceived by marketing executives. Electronic
Journal of Business Ethics, 10(1) 22–28.
[4] Pondy, L. R. (1967). Organizational conflict: Concepts and models.
Administrative Science Quarterly, 12, 296–320.
[5] Blake, R. R., & Mouton, J. S. (1964). The managerial grid. Houston,
TX: Gulf.
[6] Thomas, K. W. (1976). Conflict and conflict management. In M.
Dunnette (Ed.), Handbook of industrial and organizational psychology
(pp. 889–935). Chicago, IL: Rand McNally.
[7] Adler, R. B., Rosenfeld, L. B., & Proctor, R. F., II. (2012). Interplay:
The process of interpersonal communication. New York, NY: Oxford
University Press.
[8] Putnam, L. L., & Wilson, C. E. (1982). Communication strategies in
organizational conflicts: Reliability and validity of measurement scale.
Communication Yearbook, 6, 629–652.
12.3 Negotiation
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
1. Define and understand the characteristics of the negotiation
situation.
2. Identify distributive and integrative negotiation strategies.
3. Analyze the four types of players in negotiation.
4. Identify the three types of third-party negotiation.
The word “negotiation” is actually taken from the Latin word negotiare, which
means “to do business.” Although the word negotiation has been broadened
since its origin, negotiations are still a very important part of organizational
communication. You can almost argue that negotiations are a special kind of
conflict. [1] A negotiation is a bargaining process between two or more
conflicting parties who must find common ground in an effort to reconcile or
compromise on an agreed-upon resolution to the conflict. Let’s start by breaking
this definition down. First, we see negotiation as a bargaining process. Linda
Putman and Marshall Scott Poole posited that
“Bargaining constitutes a unique form of conflict management in that
participants negotiate mutually shared rules and then cooperate within
these rules to gain a competitive advantage over their opponent…
Bargaining, then differs from other forms of conflict in its emphasis on
proposal exchanges as a basis for reaching joint settlement in cooperative-
competitive situations.” [2]
In other words, negotiation requires everyone in a conflict situation to
communicate and come to a resolution. Negotiation or bargaining is a means to
an end to conflict. It has been noted that organizations spend a lot of time and
money to negotiate intergroup and interorganizational conflicts.
Second, a negotiation involves two or more conflicting parties. Notice that a
negotiation process can involve two parties or even ten parties all seated at the
table attempting to come to a resolution to the conflict at hand. Specifically,
these different parties come to the negotiating table with their own aims,
interests, needs, values, and viewpoints. These differences represented at a
negotiating table can make the negotiating process highly complex. For example,
one of our coauthors is on the board of directors for a medium-sized nonprofit.
As a large organization, there are many different groups of individuals governed
by various unions. One of the unions was always attempting to get special items
for their union that the other unions didn’t have. For obvious reasons, not
allowing all the stakeholders the same allowances becomes an issue of equity in
an organization. As such, management’s stance (the side our coauthor was on)
was that if they could not offer specific perks to all their workers, then it was
simply not fair to offer it to some. One of the biggest sticking points was a raise.
Financially, the organization could not provide an organization-wide raise and
still maintain its financial viability. On one hand, you have a group of workers
who see the benefit of more money in their pockets. On the other, you have
management looking at issues of equity and financial solvency.
The last part of the definition of negotiation we’ve provided is the necessity of
finding common ground. Going back to our example, most people who work for
nonprofit agencies do so because they believe in the mission of the agency. As
part of the negotiation process, the group ultimately had to focus on what was in
the best interests of the organization’s mission, in this case helping children who
had been removed from their homes for a variety of different reasons. The
management team’s goal in the negotiation process was to focus on the needs of
the clients first. From this perspective, the management team demonstrated what
would happen to various services if an across-the-board raise were implemented.
As you can imagine, many corners would be cut, and a number of activities that
directly benefited the clients would get cut as a result.
The final part of the negotiation process is reaching the point of reconciliation
and compromise in an effort to come to a desired resolution of the conflict.
Going back to our example, although the management team stood firm against
the raise, they made other concessions to the union (and ultimately the whole
organization). Although neither side was 100 percent satisfied with the
resolution, they were in agreement about the compromise that was made. One of
the biggest mistakes that many novice negotiators make is an all-or-nothing
strategy. In most instances, this negotiating strategy can seriously backfire on the
negotiators. To help us further understand why these strategies are problematic,
let’s examine two different negotiation strategies: distributive and integrative.
© Thinkstock/Goodshot
Distributive and Integrative Negotiation Strategies
There are differences in negation strategies. [3] The most important are
distributive and integrative strategies. These two differences vary in goals,
communication processes, issues, and outcomes. Characteristics of these
strategies are shown in Figure 12.8.
Distributive negotiation occurs when two parties are trying to increase their
gains and decrease their losses. There might be fixed resources that need to be
split or shared among the two parties. Because the negotiators have a limited
supply of resources, the only way to deal with the conflict is to compromise or
have a win-lose solution, in which one party gets a desired outcome and the
other one does not. In distributive negotiation, the communication is about
information seeking, because each side must learn more about the other party’s
true intentions and goals. It is said that this type of negotiation also has some
deception involved, because parties do not want to reveal too much so as to save
face and maximize their outcome. In this type of negotiation, there might be
limited finances, and two parties have completely different desires for the
money. One party might want to use the money for office equipment, while the
other party might want the money to be used for travel expenses. The key is to
discuss and determine which is more important and why. In addition, each party
must be able to have a give-and-take attitude.
Integrative negotiation is where two parties are trying to maximize their gains.
The focus is on information sharing, because both parties are working together
to find the ideal solution to the problem. However, there is the possibility that
one party is actually participating in an integrative negotiation and the other is
not. However, the benefits of this type of negotiation often outweigh the possible
costs. Luecke argues that integrative negotiations can be extremely beneficial
because they allow organizations to do the following:
Provide significant information about their circumstances.
Explain why they want to make a deal.
Talk about their real interests or business constraints.
Reveal and explain in general terms their preferences among issues or
options.
Consider and reveal any additional capabilities or resources they have that
might meet the other side’s interests and could be added to the deal.
Use what they learn to find creative options that will meet the interests of
both parties to the greatest extent possible. [4]
In this conflict scenario, there might be collaboration and win-win resolution,
because both parties are discovering the best ways to achieve an optimal and
beneficial solution. For instance, two restaurants next door to each other would
like to maximize profits, but they sell similar types of food. At first, the
restaurant managers might be skeptical of each other, but through effective
communication, they might discover that their food is different and that it should
be marketed that way. In turn, the managers might decide to let customers pick
which type they would like to eat. Perhaps one restaurant could emphasize fresh
ingredients, and the other could advertise the quality in food preparation.
To summarize, there are real reasons for both distributive and integrative
negotiation strategies. Figure 12.8 wraps up this discussion of distributive and
integrative communication. Now that we’ve examined both types of
negotiations, let’s talk about the different negotiator styles.
Figure 12.8 Distributive and Integrative Negotiation Strategies
Four Types of Players in a Negotiation
When you negotiate with others in a conflict, you need to be able to influence
the other parties on two dimensions: trust and agreement. People will either
agree or disagree at the same time that they will either trust or distrust the
conflict resolution. Agreement is the idea that we can concur in and consent to
the goal or objective of our conflict. Trust is the idea of fairness and impartiality
in the decision-making process. Determining if parties are high or low in terms
of agreement and trust will impact the type of player in negotiation, which is
displayed on Figure 12.9. These players include bedfellows, allies, adversaries,
and opponents. [5]
Figure 12.9 Four Types of Players in Negotiation
Bedfellows
People who highly agree with us but with whom we have a low level of trust are
termed bedfellows. These individuals like our objectives and purpose but may
not be willing to fully commit to our decision. With bedfellows, it is important to
be genuine and authentic with your purpose to gain their trust. It is also crucial to
provide evidence that they should trust us, because it will help resolve the
conflict faster and better. It is best to be direct and clear with bedfellows. In
return, you must state that you expect bedfellows to follow suit. Just as in an
interpersonal relationship, with bedfellows, you must find different ways to get
them to trust you. Once the trust is there, the conflict resolution can be
negotiated in an advantageous and favorable manner.
Allies
When there is high trust and high agreement in our goal, other parties become
our allies. In this situation, allies are like our friends. We need to keep them
informed about the decision. They become integral players in the effective
functioning of the organization. It is important to provide allies with all sorts of
information, especially the negative or unfavorable news. Allies support our
decisions, and we need to maintain the same level of trust with them. It is also
important to allow our allies to provide comments regarding their concerns or
hesitations about our decision.
Adversaries
When there is a low level of trust and agreement, we are dealing with
adversaries. These are the most challenging types of individuals to deal with in
terms of conflict resolution. We will have to spend the most energy and time
trying to convince these individuals about our intentions and purpose. People
tend to become adversaries when we have failed at negotiating trust or
agreement. Thus the very first thing we need to do is figure out if there is truly a
lack of trust and/or agreement. We need to communicate with these individuals
and try to build up both trust and agreement. The way to deal with adversaries is
to communicate your intentions, understand your adversaries’ concerns, address
any problems, and devise a plan to work together. Sometimes our adversary is
our boss and no matter what brilliant idea you come up with, it is always shot
down, because the boss might feel that you are too young, inexperienced, or
unqualified to accomplish it. It is important to find ways to build trust and help
your boss perceive that you assent to his or her opinions.
Opponents
When there are high levels of trust but very low agreement, the parties are
known as opponents. Opponents may not fully agree with our objectives,
decisions, or intentions. However, opponents want a high-trust relationship.
They trust us as individuals but might be very skeptical about the outcome of the
conflict decision. In this case, opponents will help the organization become
stronger and more effective by finding better ways to reach the resolution. The
main element when dealing with opponents is communication. We need to be
able to understand why they feel the way they do and how to fix the problem.
The best example of this type is the customer-corporation scenario, where a very
reputable corporation, such as a bank, might propose new ways for customers to
deposit their money electronically. The loyal customer might believe in this bank
because it has been around for years, and the customer has a strong history with
it. But the customer may be wary of scams from electronic mediums or ways for
hackers to get their financial records.
Third-Party Interventions
Even though all parties involved in the negotiation may want to come to a
resolution, sometimes the groups just reach an impasse and need to bring in
someone to help. Sometimes organizations do not know how to deal with
conflict. Hence organizations might look to third parties to intervene. There are
many different types of interventions. In this section, we review three prominent
kinds of third-party interventions: arbitration, mediation, and group process
consultation. These interventions are also illustrated in Figure 12.10.
Figure 12.10 Third-Party Interventions
Arbitration
Arbitration is a way to resolve conflict without using the legal system. [6]
Arbitration uses a third party to review the arguments made by all parties
involved and then implements a legally binding and enforceable decision.
Arbitration is typically used for commercial disputes, especially in matters
dealing with international business transactions. For instance, arbitration might
be used to settle a dispute between a manufacturer and a customer about a
product failure. If the two parties canot agree why the product failed, an
arbitrator might decide on the evidence presented that the failure was caused by
the user’s lack of regular preventive maintenance rather than by a manufacturer’s
defect.
Mediation
You might have heard of mediation in terms of legal matters. [7] It is a way to
resolve conflict among parties to have a definite outcome. In mediation, you
will have a mediator(s)—usually a third, external party—to figure out a
resolution. Mediation is typically more structured than other types of
interventions. Mediators truly behave as a third party without taking sides. They
try to facilitate the conversation rather than trying to dominate. Mediators try to
help both parties come to an amicable agreement. Mediation is beneficial for a
variety of reasons. First, the cost of a mediator is usually less than that of an
attorney because it does not take as much time. When dealing with an attorney
or court case, the procedure becomes quite costly. Second, confidentiality is a
key factor in mediation. In a court hearing, the discussions are often public
domain, but mediation allows for confidentiality. Third, compliance is a benefit
to mediation because everyone is truly working together to get an agreement.
Fourth, mediation allows for control over the resolution. In a court situation, a
judge or jury may make the final decision, but in mediation, the parties come to
an agreement. Fifth, mediators provide support, because they are usually well
trained to deal with such circumstances. They are usually very helpful and can
assist both parties in recognizing their differences and their similarities.
Group Process Consultation
The last type of third-party mediation is group process consultation. This helps
the organization become aware of the conflict and provides a deeper
understanding of the problem. In this process, the organization finds more
productive and efficient ways that the employees can work together. An outside
trainer or consultant will observe the communication behaviors among the
employees in their current state. Afterward, the trainer will provide insights or
advice to the organization to help identify the behaviors that are hindering their
success. The trainer or consultant will provide suggestions for improving how
the organization functions and communicates. This type of mediation does not
require a third party to make a decision or help the group come to a decision.
Rather, group process consultations give recommendations and guidance to help
the organization prevent conflicts.
KEY TAKEAWAY
Negotiation and bargaining are similar. Both require everyone in
the conflict situation to communicate and come to a resolution.
Negotiation can be integrative or distributive. There are
differences in communication, issues, outcomes, and goals.
Distributive negotiation occurs when two parties increase their
gains and cut their losses. In integrative negotiation, two parties
maximize gains.
There are four players in negotiation: bedfellows, allies,
adversaries, and opponents. Bedfellows are individuals with low
trust in their opponents’ goals and trustworthiness. Allies have
high trust and high faith in their opponents’ goals. Adversaries
have low levels of trust and agreement in conflict resolution.
Arbitration :
Opponents have high levels of trust but low levels of agreement.
Third-party interventions include arbitration, mediation, and group-
process consultation. In arbitration, a third party reviews the
arguments made by all parties involved and then implements a
decision that is legally binding and enforceable. In mediation, a
mediator, usually a third, external party, figures out a resolution. In
group-process consultation, observer(s) monitor the
organizational interactions and make recommendations to prevent
conflict.
EXERCISES
1. What do you think are the most important differences in
distributive and integrative negotiation strategies? Which do you
personally prefer? Why?
2. Which negotiation strategy, distributive or integrative, is most
applicable in the workplace? Why?
3. Create your own hypothetical negotiation strategy. What would
motivate you to resolve the conflict? What factors would you
consider? Why?
KEY TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
A third party reviews the arguments made by all parties involved and then implements a decision that is legally binding and
Distributive Negotiation:
Integrative Negotiation:
Adversaries:
Allies:
Bedfellows:
Group Process Consultation:
Mediation:
Negotiation :
Opponents:
enforceable.
Occurs when two parties are trying to increase their gains and decrease their losses.
Occurs when two parties are trying to maximize their gains.
Individuals with low levels of trust and agreement in their opponent’s conflict resolution.
Individuals with high trust in their opponent’s goals and trustworthiness.
Individuals with low trust but high faith in their opponent’s goals.
An observer(s) monitors organizational interactions and makes recommendations to prevent conflict.
A third, external party is used to figure out a resolution.
Bargaining process between two or more conflicting parties (each with his or her own aims, interests, needs, values, and viewpoints) who must find common ground in an effort to reconcile or compromise on an agreed-upon resolution to the conflict.
Individuals with high levels of trust but low levels of agreement.
[1] Cahn, D. D., & Abigail, R. A. (2011). Managing conflict through
communication (4th ed.). Boston, MA: Allyn & Bacon, p. 4.
[2] Putnam, L. L., & Poole, M. S. (1987). Conflict and negotiation. In F. M.
Jablin, L. L. Putnam, K. H. Roberts, & W. L. Porter (Eds.), Handbook of
organizational communication: An interdisciplinary perspective (pp. 549–
599). Newbury Park, CA: Sage, p. 563.
[3] Luecke, R. (2003). Harvard business essentials: Guide to negotiation.
Boston, MA: Harvard Business Review Press.
[4] Luecke, R. (2003). Harvard business essentials: Guide to negotiation.
Boston, MA: Harvard Business Review Press, Kindle locations 223–226.
[5] Block, P. (1991). The empowered manager: Positive political skills at
work. San Francisco, CA: Jossey-Bass.
[6] Buhring-Uhle, C., Kirchhoff, L., & Scherer, G. (2006). Arbitration and
mediation in international business (2nd ed.). Alphen aan den Rijn,
Netherlands: Kluwer Law Press.
[7] Boulle, L. (1996). Mediation: Principles, process, practice. Sydney,
Australia: Butterworth.
12.4 Chapter Exercises
REAL-WORLD CASE STUDY
Maverick Electronics was a very successful corporation in the
United States. However, after a few years, Maverick was having a
hard time competing with Japanese organizations, which were
making better products at a faster rate. In addition, they were able to
sell their products for significantly less than Maverick Electronics
could. Not being able to profit in their sale, the executives at
Maverick Electronics decided to sell their corporation to the
Japanese. The workers at Maverick were very upset and protested
to the new Japanese owners. The workers were part of a union and
felt that the Japanese expected too much from them. The workers
did not like the new style of management and the new operations
that the Japanese were trying to enforce. They were used to the old
way of doing things and did not want change. On the other hand,
the new Japanese investors thought that these union workers
hindered them from producing better work conditions and products.
The Japanese managers thought American workers did not take
pride in their work, were only interested in a paycheck, and didn’t
care about the organization or their overall work. It is apparent that
there are two very distinct viewpoints here, and there needs to be a
solution.
1. If you were asked to be a negotiator in this situation, how would
you resolve the conflict? What do you think the outcome will be?
2. Can you identify advantages and disadvantages of each side in
this case study?
3. Let’s pretend Maverick Electronics hired you as a communication
consultant. What information would you collect? How will this
information help you predict the future outcome of this business?
What would you expect the findings to be? How would you use
this information to make suggestions to the executives?
4. Pretend that you are an employee of Maverick Electronics. How
do you feel that communication can be improved? Why is a union
important? How can the new Japanese executives help the
union?
END-OF-CHAPTER ASSESSMENT
1. Conflict involves these three I’s except:
a. incompatible goals b. interdependence c. interaction d. independence e. none of these
2. In conflict, Sari tries to consider the relationship and her goals. She tries to make sure that her goals come first.
Which type of conflict-management style is she most likely using?
a. avoidance b. accommodation c. collaboration d. compromise e. competition
3. Integrative and distributive negotiation tactics vary on all of the following except:
a. goals b. issues c. communication d. outcomes e. stereotypes
4. If your boss is engaging in polarizing dysfunctional conflict, then which strategy would be the most effective functional conflict strategy?
a. integration b. cooperation c. confirmation d. agreement e. focusing
5. All of the following are types of dysfunctional conflict except:
a. polarization b. escalation c. coercion
d. de-escalation e. drifting
Answer Key
1. d
2. e
3. e
4. a
5. d
Chapter 13
The Dark Side of Organizational Communication
Welcome to the Dark Side
One of our coauthors was recently driving through town and noticed a bumper
sticker on the back of a car that read, “Come to the Dark Side, We Have
Cookies!” Although the bumper sticker made our coauthor laugh, it actually
represents a phenomenon commonly discussed in organization communication:
counterproductive workplace behaviors. [1] Type the words “Dark Side” into
your favorite bookstore’s online search engine, and you’ll find many academic
books with that short phrase in the title. Obviously, “the Dark Side” is a
reference to the Star Wars film franchise and represents the evil of that world
epitomized by Darth Vader and the Emperor.
Why does the “dark side” matter? Most of the topics discussed in this book focus
on the more prosocial communicative behaviors at work (e.g., leadership,
followership, socialization). But let’s face it: organizations can be pretty dirty
and ugly places at times. In an ideal world, everyone in an organization would
strive for a common goal, but more often than not, this simply isn’t the case.
From employees undercutting each other in an effort to make themselves look
better to yelling, screaming, and even punching, organizations are microcosms of
our larger society. This chapter looks at what happens when problematic
behaviors arise in the workplace.
We should mention that, although this chapter is focused on the micro side of
problematic workplace behaviors and communication, there are also larger,
macroside issues that could be addressed when examining the dark side of
organizational communication. For example, many of the larger ethical issues in
organizational communication that were discussed in Chapter 2 are examples of
those larger problems that can occur. In Table 2.1, we provided a long list of
organizations caught in serious ethical dilemmas that represent the worst of the
modern corporation. More recently, the CEO of General Motors (GM) was
called before the US Congress for two days in February 2014 after it was
revealed that GM failed to recall cars with faulty ignition switches. We should
note that GM’s newly installed CEO, Mary Barra, did initiate the recall of 1.3
million cars shortly after learning about the problem when she took the helm in
January 2014. Why is this a problem, you might ask? Well, GM knew about the
problem as early as 2001. [2] According to Dominic Rushe, GM received a
number of complaints related to the ignition switch but concluded the problem
was minimal, and “in March 2005 a GM project engineering manager closed an
investigation into the issue, saying the ‘lead time for all solutions is too long’,
‘the tooling cost and piece price are too high’ and none of the proposed fixes
‘represents an acceptable business case.’” [3] This “acceptable business case”
ultimately led to the deaths of at least thirteen people. When Mary Barra was
brought before Congress, Senator Claire McCaskill referred to GM’s “culture of
cover-up.” [4] In essence, GM is accused of creating an environment where
covering up problems “represents an acceptable business case.”
These macrolevel problems represent a clear issue that many organizations face
in the modern world. In fact, perhaps you’ve picked up the thread of “dark”
issues that, as shown in Table 13.1, have run throughout this book.
Table 13.1 Macro Issues in "Dark" Organizational Communication
Chapter
2 lapses in organizational ethics are disturbingly common
3 classical conceptions of the organization as machine can be dehumanizing
4 organizational leaders and managers can use communication to, as critical theory explains,
ensure their interests are dominant and those of others are marginalized
5 workplace communication processes and networks can silence dissent
6
negative communication can produce a defensive organizational climate; leaders can influence
organizational culture to further their own ends; processes of globalization can widen
inequalities between management and labor
7 leadership can either empower or disempower organizational followers
8 employees can experience work-life conflict when, perhaps due to manipulation or pressure,
their self-identities become inseparable from the organization
9 the dynamics of workplace group and teams can sometimes produce negative results such as
groupthink and peer pressure
10 organizational socialization can leave some employees dissatisfied and disengaged
11 organizations can practice “technical reasoning,” care only about “what works,” and pursue
speed, power, efficiency, and productivity as moral values in themselves
12 workplace stress and conflict can lead to emotional exhaustion and burnout
A large body of research has emerged in recent years, however, on microside
factors that contribute to the dark side of organizational life. In the workplace,
these factors can lead to verbal and physical aggression, bullying, violence,
incivility, prejudice, abuse, injustice, ostracism—in short, all the dark behaviors
that happen in real life. Since you will soon experience, or are already
experiencing, everyday life in an organization, we want to familiarize you in this
chapter with recent research. If you are alert to the underlying issues, you can be
part of the solution.
[1] Neuman, J. H., & Baron, R. A. (2005). Aggression in the workplace: A
social-psychological perspective. In S. Fox & P. E. Spector (Eds.),
Counterproductive work behavior: Investigations of actors and targets
(pp. 13–40). Washington, DC: American Psychological Association.
[2] Goldstein, M., & Meier, B. (2014, March 15). As scandal unfolds, G.M.
calls in the lawyers. New York Times. Retrieved from
http://www.nytimes.com/2014/03/16/business/general-motors-calls-the-
lawyers.html?_r=0
[3] Rushe, D. (2014, March 31). General Motors executives to face
Congress over car recall scandal: House to push for answers on why GM
failed to recall cars despite knowledge of flaws ultimately linked to 13
deaths. The Guardian. Retrieved from
http://www.theguardian.com/business/2014/mar/31/general-motors-
executives-congress-recall-scandal
[4] Klayman, B., & Beech, E. (2014, April 2). U.S. senator accuses GM of
“culture of cover-up” in recalls. Reuters. Retrieved from
http://www.reuters.com/article/2014/04/02/us-gm-recall-congress-senate-
idUSBREA3118S20140402
13.1 Aggression in the Workplace
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
1. Define the term aggression.
2. Explain the three dimensions of Arnold Buss’s typology of
aggressive acts.
3. Differentiate between verbal aggression and argumentativeness.
4. Describe Charlotte Rayner and Loraleigh Keashly’s five common
characteristics of workplace bullying definitions.
5. Differentiate among the four types of violence proposed by Mary
Bruce and William Nolan.
6. Understand the recommendations from the Occupational Safety
and Health Administration (OSHA) for alleviating workplace
violence.
Aggression can be defined as an offensive act, practice, or attack targeted at
another person(s) with the intention of harming or injuring that person, who is
motivated to avoid such treatment. [1] First, aggression can come in the form of
offensive acts, or acts that are designed to demean or belittle another person
(e.g., racist, sexist, or ageist language; display or transmission of inappropriate
workplace material). Practices are habitual performances designed to demean,
belittle, or subjugate others (e.g., workplace discrimination, sexual harassment,
organizational shunning). Attacks are overt or covert actions taken toward
another person(s) with hostile or violent intent. Some attacks are overt, meaning
it’s clear that one individual is actively attacking another person (e.g., yelling at
someone in the workplace, workplace violence). Other attacks are covert, done
behind the scenes away from the person who is being attacked, and are generally
designed to attack one’s reputation (e.g., rumors, gossip, slander, workplace
sabotage).
Joel Neuman and Robert Baron [2] proposed utilizing Arnold Buss’s [3]
framework for understanding workplace aggression. According to Buss,
aggression can be captured by examining three dichotomies: (1) physical verbal,
(2) active passive, and (3) direct indirect. Physical-verbal aggression examines
the extent to which a person’s aggression comes out in physical forms (e.g.,
assault, defacing property, pushing, slapping) or in verbal forms (e.g., gossip,
yelling, racist or sexist remarks). Active-passive aggression denotes whether or
not an individual specifically engages in aggressive behavior (active) or
withholds something the victim needs or values (passive). Direct-indirect
aggression examines whether or not the aggressor harms the target himself or
herself (direct), or the aggressor targets someone or something peripheral to the
victim in a way to inflict pain (passive). Ultimately, when you combine the three
categories, the result is eight different possible types of aggressive workplace
behavior (Table 13.2).
Table 13.2 Buss's Typology Applied in the Workplace
Physical/Verbal Active/Passive Direct Indirect
Verbal
Active
Yelling
Unfair criticism
Racist/sexist/ageist
comments
Spreading rumors
Taking credit for target’s work
Recruiting others against target
Passive
Not returning phone calls
Showing little/no
sympathy
Refusing to speak to
target
Denying target information
Not providing target feedback
Organizational shunning
Physical
Active
Violence
Hostile gestures/posturing
Sabotaging target’s work
Stealing target’s property
Defacing target’s property
Hiding needed resources
Passive
Leaving when target
enters
Refusing target resources
Social ostracism from
group
Not protecting target’s welfare
Delaying action on important issues
Denying a raise/promotion without valid
reasons
To help us further understand the different types of aggression commonly seen in
the modern workplace, we will examine separately verbal aggression, workplace
bullying, organizational shunning, and physical aggression/violence.
Verbal Aggression
Starting in the mid-1980s, Dominic Infante and Charles Wigley defined verbal
aggression as “the tendency to attack the self-concept of individuals instead of,
or in addition to, their positions on topics of communication.” [4] Notice that this
definition specifically focuses on attacking someone’s self-concept, or an
individual’s attitudes, opinions, and cognitions about his or her competence,
character, strengths, and weaknesses. For example, if someone perceives herself
or himself as a good worker, then a verbally aggressive attack would undermine
that person’s quality of work or ability to do future quality work. Terry Kinney
found that self-concept attacks happen on three basic fronts: group membership
(e.g., “Your whole division is a bunch of idiots!”), personal failings (e.g., “No
wonder you keep getting passed up for a promotion”), and relational failings
(e.g., “No wonder your spouse left you”). [5]
Now that we’ve discussed what verbal aggression is, we should clearly delineate
verbal aggression from another closely related term—argumentativeness.
According to Dominic Infante and Andrew Rancer, argumentativeness is a
communication trait that “predisposes the individual in communication
situations to advocate positions on controversial issues, and to attack verbally
the positions which other people take on these issues.” [6] You’ll notice that
argumentativeness occurs when an individual attacks another person’s positions
on various issues; by contrast, verbal aggression occurs when an individual
attacks another person’s self-concept. Argumentativeness is seen as a
constructive communication trait, while verbal aggression is destructive.
Although both verbal aggression and argumentativeness were originally
discussed as communication traits affecting interpersonal relationships, a wealth
of research has been conducted on how both traits impact communication in the
workplace. The bulk of the research examining how verbal aggression and
argumentativeness affect leader-follower relationships has been conducted by
William Gorden and Dominic Infante. To examine leader-follower relationships,
we’ll first examine the impact of leader verbal aggressiveness and
argumentativeness, and then we’ll examine follower aggressiveness and
argumentativeness.
Leader Verbal Aggressiveness and Argumentativeness
Infante and Gorden’s first study was conducted in 1985. [7] Their goal was to see
whether a leader’s use of verbal aggression and argumentativeness impacted four
important variables: perceptions of employee rights, satisfaction with the leader,
career satisfaction, and satisfaction with upward communication. They surveyed
individuals from a variety of organizations and asked them to rate their leaders
on both verbal aggression and argumentativeness, along with the four variables
listed. The results were not too surprising. Gorden and Infante found that
individuals who perceived their superiors as high in verbal aggression and low in
argumentativeness believed that the organization did not protect employee
rights; further, these followers were not satisfied with their leader, their careers,
or their upward communication within the organization. The basic results from
this study have been replicated a number of times over the years. [8]
In a later study, John Cole and James McCroskey examined how follower
perceptions of leader verbal aggression impacted the follower’s perception of the
leader’s credibility. [9] To examine the concept of credibility, Cole and
McCroskey examined the three dimensions of credibility previously defined:
competence, caring/goodwill, and trustworthiness. [10] This model of source
credibility suggests that a leader’s credibility depends on follower perceptions of
the leader’s competence (is the leader knowledgeable or perceived as an expert),
caring/goodwill (does a leader care about the employee and the organization’s
best interests), and trustworthiness (is the leader perceived as honest).
Overall, verbal aggression by a leader negatively affects followers, while
argumentativeness can be a positive boost to followers and the overall
organizational environment.
Follower Verbal Aggressiveness and Argumentativeness
Some of the early research also looked at verbal aggression from the perspective
of leaders. William Gorden, Dominic Infante, and John Izzo examined how
follower verbal aggression and argumentativeness impacted leader perceptions
of followers’ quality of work, dependability, and interpersonal skills. [11]
Individuals who were highly argumentative were seen as producing better work,
being more dependable, and having better interpersonal skills. Followers who
were verbally aggressive, on the other hand, were perceived by their leaders as
producing lower quality work, being less dependable, and possessing fewer
interpersonal skills. Furthermore, individuals who were highly argumentative
were also shown to use more prosocial forms of dissent when communicating
with their leaders than those who were highly verbally aggressive.
A later study by Jeffrey Kassing and Ted Avtgis examined the relationship
between employees’ perceived levels of their own aggressive communication
(i.e., verbal aggression and argumentativeness) and organizational dissent (latent,
articulated, and displaced; for more on this subject, see Chapter 5). Although this
study specifically looked at employees’ aggressive communication, the impact
that the aggression had on dissent was quite interesting. Highly argumentative
individuals were more likely to articulate their dissent to their leaders.
Conversely, highly verbally aggressive individuals were more likely to use latent
dissent. However, neither a subordinate’s verbal aggressiveness nor
argumentativeness related to displaced dissent. The study clearly showed that
subordinates’ communication traits (specifically, verbal aggression and
argumentativeness) impact how they engage in dissent with their leaders.
In the last study we discuss in this section, Timothy Coombs and Sherry
Holladay examined the relationship between verbal aggression and tolerance for
workplace aggression. [12] The researchers examined undergraduate students
who had jobs, their levels of verbal aggression, and whether or not they had
higher tolerances for a range of aggressive activities in the workplace (e.g.,
failing to return phone calls, using obscene gestures, stealing from work,
threatening a coworker verbally). Not surprisingly, those who themselves were
more verbally aggressive had greater tolerance for others’ aggressive workplace
acts.
Ultimately, one of the most important questions is this: how does verbal
aggression in the workplace affect the organization itself? Theresa Glomb found
that individuals who had been the victim of specific aggressive incidents tended
to have lower perceptions of both their supervisors and their coworkers.
Furthermore, victims reported feeling increased stress at work accompanied by
decreases in their overall productivity. [13] Similarly, Christine Pearson, Lynne
Anderson, and Christine Porath also demonstrated how workplace incivility can
decrease one’s work efforts. [14]
Workplace Bullying
The thought of bullying generally brings to mind the schoolyard bully who uses
physical aggression and intimidation to steal a smaller kid’s milk money. What
English speakers call bullying is often called “mobbing” in many European
countries. [15] In Sweden, for example, the word mob describes animal
aggression and herd behavior that is commonly likened to schoolyard bullying.
In the 1980s, Swedish researcher Heinz Leymann began a series of studies that
applied the concept of mobbing to the workplace. [16] In the paragraphs that
follow, we examine what bullying is and some of the research on workplace
bullying from around the globe.
Defining Workplace Bullying
As with most of the terms we’ve discussed in this book, there is hardly a
universal definition for the term workplace bullying. In 2005, Charlotte Rayner
and Loraleigh Keashly examined the available definitions for “workplace
bullying” and derived five specific characteristics:
1. The experience of negative behavior
2. Behaviors experienced persistently
3. Targets experiencing damage
4. Targets labeling themselves as bullied
5. Targets with less power and difficulty defending themselves [17]
Let’s look at each five of these characteristics separately.
The Experience of Negative Behavior
As we discussed earlier in this section, there are quite a few different ways that
negative behavior can be expressed in the workplace. Ultimately, bullying is
about experiencing counterproductive workplace behaviors. Loraleigh Keashly
and Karen Jagatic [18] examined the commonality of the various types of
aggression described by Arnold Buss. [19] They found that workplace bullying
tends to come in the form of nonphysical, passive, and indirect forms of
aggression (e.g., failing to give someone information they need to complete a
task, failing to deny false rumors in the workplace, failing to warn a target of a
possible problem, not providing the target with necessary feedback). As Keashly
and Jagatic noted, “In bullying at work, it is that which is not done that can be
undermining, which can take away trust or create humiliation.” [20]
Behaviors Experienced Persistently
Although most people will eventually experience some kind of
counterproductive workplace behavior, there is a difference between
experiencing it once or twice and experiencing it persistently. By persistently, we
mean that an individual or group of individuals targets a victim over a period of
time. Instead of considering this as a single hostile event, Keashly and Jagatic
recommended a switch in focus from negative acts to negative relationships that
exist within the workplace. It’s this accumulated aggression over a period of
time that makes workplace bullying distinct from issues like workplace violence,
because workplace violence tends to occur in isolated events rather than
persistent ones.
Targets Experiencing Damage
In the legal system, when you say that someone has been the victim of bullying,
you must be able to demonstrate that there was some type of damage imposed on
the victim. Although the research links workplace bullying to a variety of
negative health outcomes (e.g., stress, heightened anxiety, sleeplessness,
hypertension, autoimmune disorder, posttraumatic stress disorder, prolonged-
duress stress disorder), protection for victims is often a problem because of the
lack of current laws covering workplace bullying. The Workplace Bullying
Institute [21] has been working tirelessly since the mid-2000s to promote the
adoption of the Healthy Workplace Bill, [22] which would provide legal
protection for victims of workplace bullying. According to Gary Namie and
Ruth Namie, founders of the Workplace Bullying Institute, 80 percent of what
victims of workplace bullying face is perfectly legal in the United States. [23] As
of August 2014, bills had been put forward in twenty-six states and two US
territories, but not one has been passed. In July 2014, a bill passed by lawmakers
in New Hampshire was vetoed by the governor. Thus far, New York has
proposed more versions of the Healthy Workplace Bill than any other state
(http://www.nyhwa.org/), but the debate still rages on in New York and across
the United States.
Targets Labeling Themselves as Bullied
One of the more interesting and communicative acts associated with bullying is
the act of labeling oneself as a victim. Most people don’t want to admit that
they’ve been victimized. So coming to terms with what is happening in the
workplace and then admitting to being a victim is a powerful communicative act.
One problem with some definitions of bullying is that they don’t cover those
who are clearly victims of bullying but either refuse to acknowledge victim
status or—because bullying has become so “normal” at their work—simply
don’t know they are actually being victimized.
Targets with Less Power and Difficulty Defending Themselves
The last common characteristic found in definitions of workplace bullying
involves victims who are in positions of less power and have little recourse to
defend themselves against a bully. Research has tried to separate conflicts
between people with equal power from workplace bullying. Yet as Rainer and
Keashly point out, this perspective seems inconsistent with findings on
workplace bullying, at least in the United States. A 2007 study by the Waitt
Institute for Violence Prevention, sponsored by the Workplace Bullying Institute
and Zogby International, found that while 72 percent of bullying victims were
bullied by individuals higher in the organization, 18 percent were bullied by
coworkers and 9 percent by someone lower in the hierarchy. [24] These results
indicate that, while most victims are in a power-imbalance relationship, a large
number are being bullied by coworkers and subordinates.
Research on Workplace Bullying
As discussed earlier, workplace-bullying research has been conducted around the
globe since the mid-1980s. During this time, there has been a preponderance of
research attempting to understand the prevalence of workplace bullying, what
types of bullying occur, who are typical targets, and who are perpetrators. We
will end this discussion with a brief overview of some of the new research on
cyberbullying.
Prevalence Research
In a large study examining 148 international corporations through both
qualitative and quantitative methods, Randy Hodson, Vincent Roscigno, and
Steven Lopez reported that 49 percent of the organizations they investigated had
routine patterns of workplace bullying. [25] The 2007 Workplace Bullying Survey
found that almost 37 percent of US workers—an estimated fifty-four million
people—had been victims of workplace bullying at some point in their work
careers (13 percent current victim, 24 percent previous victim). An additional 12
percent may not have been targeted victims but witnessed workplace bullying
happening to others. [26]
Types of Bullying
As we’ve discussed earlier, bullies can use a range of tactics. The 2007
Workplace Bullying Survey found the two most common tactics, each reported
by 53 percent of targets, were verbal aggression and behaving toward the target
in a hostile, threatening, intimidating, or offensive manner, whether in public or
private. [27] Close behind, and reported by 47 percent of targets, were abuses of
authority such as “underserved evaluations, denial of advancement, stealing
credit, tarnished reputation, arbitrary instructions, unsafe assignments, etc.” [28]
Forty-five percent of victims reported a bully had interfered with their work,
perhaps by withholding information, sabotage, or undermining a project. Thirty
percent reported that bullies sought to destroy workplace relationships with their
peers, coworkers, and leaders. Physically aggressive bullying occurred in 12
percent of cases and property damage in 2 percent. Although bullying tactics
vary widely, most are clearly communicative, either verbally or nonverbally.
Target Research
Unfortunately, the research on who is most likely to become a target is anything
but consistent. Pamela Lutgen-Sandvik, Gary Namie, and Ruth Namie examined
the literature on the subject of targets and did not find a consistent pattern. [29]
Research has found no differences between female and male employees and their
likelihood of being bullied. One characteristic, however, that appears linked to
the likelihood of victimization is hierarchical status. The higher one’s position
within an organization’s hierarchy, the less likely he or she will be the victim of
bullying. However, we noted earlier that 7 percent of victims reported being
bullied by their subordinates. So being a boss or manager isn’t a guarantee
against bullying. Some research has suggested that targets are more likely to be
anxious, weak, and nonassertive. But other research shows that targets may be
highly skilled, well-liked hard workers. In reality, there isn’t a single profile
when it comes to workplace bully victimization.
Bully Research
Since research on the targets of workplace bullying is a little convoluted, what
about the research on who the bullies are? Once again, there is not a single bully
profile. Even the cast of the television show Criminal Minds (a show about
criminal profiling) would have a problem creating an accurate profile for who
could potentially become a bully. In fact, research has shown a number of
different personality traits and other variables related to the likelihood of
someone becoming a workplace bully.
However, these are just correlations and not really causes of workplace bullying.
For example, the 2007 Workplace Bullying Survey reported that 70 percent of
victims were bullied by people in a position located higher in the organizational
hierarchy. [30] Does this mean 70 percent of people in senior positions are
bullies? Obviously not. Instead, the research suggests that everything from lack
of self-control and narcissism, to alcohol or drug abuse and Theory X beliefs
(see Chapter 3), to being a victim of childhood abuse are possible causes of
workplace bullying. Unfortunately, we can’t take a pinch of narcissism, a dollop
of Theory X, add in some drug abuse, and blend them together to create a profile
of the workplace bully.
Cyberbullying Research
The Internet, e-mail, and social networking have become more and more part of
everyday organizational life. Thus—as in society at large—the incidence of
harassment and bullying through the Internet has become an issue that many
organization members face. Cyberharassment generally refers to harassment
based on age, race, religion or sex; yet workplace cyberbullying is also
becoming widespread. [31] According to Carmel Privitera and Marilyn Campbell,
cyberbullying is a set of “techniques [that] use modern communication
technology to send derogatory or threatening messages directly to the victim or
indirectly to others, to forward personal and confidential communication or
images of the victim for others to see, and to publicly post denigrating
messages.” [32] Their research found that withholding information, spreading
gossip, subjecting a target to allegations made by e-mail, and exposing a target to
an unmanageable workload by e-mail are the most common forms of
cyberbullying at work.
One recent study from the United Kingdom examined the impact of
cyberbullying on targets. [33] Researchers found that targets felt unfairly treated
by their peers and, in general, felt more negative emotions at work. All three
factors—exposure to cyberbullying, perceptions of unfairness, negative
emotions—negatively impacted targets’ job satisfaction and even their general
well-being outside of work. Furthermore, 80 percent of the 320 people
participating in the research had experienced cyberbullying at least once in the
previous six months. The results further indicated 14 to 20 percent experienced
cyberbullying on a weekly basis, which is a rate similar to face-to-face
workplace bullying.
Although cyberbullying is a relatively recent phenomenon, the effects of
cyberbullying are clearly in line with other research on face-to-face workplace
bullying. There is, however, still relatively little research on workplace
cyberbullying. As cyberbullying becomes an increasingly recognized problem in
the workplace, research on the subject will likely increase.
Workplace Violence
Unfortunately, aggression can sometimes turn from verbal tactics or bullying to
physical aggression. According to the Occupational Safety and Health
Administration, each year more than two million employees in the United States
are victims of workplace violence. [34] Even homicides, though not common,
occur each year. To help us understand physical aggression at work, we will
explore types of workplace violence, current data on homicides, and strategies
for preventing violence.
Types of Workplace Violence
Mary Bruce and William Nolan categorized four basic types of workplace
violence: (1) criminal intent, (2) customer/client, (3) worker on worker, and (4)
personal relationship. [35]
The first type of workplace violence, criminal intent, occurs when an individual
or group of individuals not related to an organization decides to perpetrate a
crime, and an employee is victimized during the crime. For example, if someone
is beaten during a robbery, this would fall into the category of criminal intent.
The second type of violence in the workplace is a result of a customer or client.
In this case, you have an individual with a legitimate connection to an
organization who perpetrates violence while receiving services. For example, if a
customer gets upset at the complaint desk and strikes the employee on duty, this
form of violence would fall into this category. Some occupations are clearly
more susceptible to this form of violence than others.
The third form of violence is worker-on-worker violence, which occurs when
one coworker physically assaults another. In some literature, this form of
violence has been called “desk rage” or “going postal.”
The last form of violence commonly seen in the workplace occurs when
someone with whom an employee has a personal relationship (e.g., spouse,
domestic partner, family member) enters the workplace and harms that
employee.
Homicides in the Workplace
Roughly 10 percent of workplace deaths reported in 2011 to the US Department
of Labor, or 458 out of 4,609 fatalities, were homicides. [36] Males committed 83
percent, or 381, of these crimes. Among males who died at work, 9 percent were
homicide victims. Among females who died, fully 21 percent were homicide
victims. In fact, homicide is the number-one cause of female deaths in the
workplace. Figure 13.1 provides a percentile breakdown of the type of assailant
for both females and males in the workplace. Males were most likely to die at
the hand of a robber (36 percent), while females were more likely to die at the
hands of a relative or domestic partner (39 percent).
Figure 13.1 Work-Related Homicides, 2011
Preventing Violence in the Workplace
Now that we’ve explored the types of violent acts committed in the workplace
and the actual number of homicides at work in the United States, you’re
probably wondering how violence might be prevented. According to the
Occupational Safety and Health Administration, there are seven steps
organizations can take to alleviate some concerns about workplace violence. [37]
Establish Organizational Policies
OSHA recommends establishing a zero-tolerance policy for workplace violence
that covers all organizational stakeholders (clients/customers, employees,
visitors). Although violence can strike anytime and anywhere, having a zero-
tolerance policy establishes that the organization takes workplace violence
seriously and can help with firing individuals who initiate low-level forms of
aggression before they get out of control.
Establish Employee Reporting Mechanisms
An organization needs to establish a reporting mechanism for all employees who
think someone may perpetrate an act of violence. Employees need to have the
ability to anonymously report coworker behavior that may be problematic before
it turns violent.
Prevent Blowback on Whistleblowers
Although establishing reporting mechanisms is important, organizations also
need to ensure that those who report possible violence are not harmed for doing
so. We often refer to reporting organizational problems (such as violence) as
whistle-blowing. So organizations need to protect whistle-blowers from possible
reprisals. Nothing will prevent future whistle-blowing faster than if coworkers
see a whistle-blower harmed for reporting something within an organization.
Create a Security Plan for the Workplace
Organizations need to have a clearly spelled-out security plan and make all
employees aware of it. Organizations need to think through possible worst-case
scenarios and how the organization would respond. Not only is this good
practice for quickly dealing with violence that occurs, but it also is one of the
most important parts of both crisis management and crisis communication. An
organization that doesn’t have a clear plan in place likely will make mistakes if
an actual crisis occurs.
Establish a Violence Prevention Program
In addition to creating a security plan, an organization should establish a
violence prevention program run by a group of employees with authority to
make changes. If a group is tasked with evaluating potential flaws in the security
plan, they need the authority to fix these flaws. If not, then the violence
prevention program becomes all talk without any ability to take action.
Affirm Management’s Support
All levels of management should clearly express their support for the violence
prevention efforts of the organization. If senior management is viewed as not
really caring about the plan, then this lack of support will trickle down to lower
levels within the organization. Again, it’s one thing to say that violence
prevention is important and a completely different thing to actually attempt to
alleviate violence within the workplace.
Training
Organizations should ensure that all members of the organization are not only
aware of but trained in the violence prevention program. The obvious way to do
this is through training activities. But the training activities shouldn’t stop at
simple information. Training should also prepare individuals to react in case of
an actual incident of violence. For example, the City of Houston Office of Public
Safety and Homeland Security created a very informative video on what should
happen in the case of a shooter on the premises of an organization. [38] This
video helps employees understand what to do and how to respond in case
someone starts shooting in the workplace. In fact, this video is played in training
sessions all over the country because of its effectiveness in calling attention to
how people should respond in this specific violence scenario.
KEY TAKEAWAY
The term aggression refers to an offensive act, practice, or attack
targeted at another person(s) with the intention of harming or
injuring that person, who is motivated to avoid such treatment.
Aggression manifests itself in one of three ways: offensive acts
(acts that are designed to demean or belittle another person),
practices (habitual performances designed to demean, belittle, or
subjugate others), and attacks (overt or covert actions taken
toward another person with hostile or violent intent).
Arnold Buss’s typology of aggression consists of three
dichotomies: (1) physical verbal, (2) active passive, and (3) direct
indirect. Physical-verbal aggression examines the extent to which
a person’s aggression comes out in physical-verbal forms. Active-
passive aggression denotes whether or not an individual
specifically engages in aggressive behavior (active) or withholds
something the victim needs or values (passive). Lastly, direct-
indirect aggression examines whether or not the aggressor harms
the target directly (direct aggression), or the aggressor targets
someone or something peripheral to the victim in a way to inflict
pain (passive).
Verbal aggression is the attacking of an individual’s self-concept
instead of her or his ideas. Argumentativeness, on the other hand,
is a communication trait in which an individual actively defends
her or his ideas while clearly proposing counterarguments toward
another. In the workplace, verbal aggression is generally
perceived as a negative trait; argumentativeness is generally
seen as a positive trait.
Although there is not a common definition for the term workplace
bullying, Charlotte Rayner and Loraleigh Keashly noticed that
most definitions generally include five common themes: (1) the
experience of a negative behavior, (2) the negative behaviors are
persistent, (3) the targets of the behavior experience damage, (4)
targets label themselves as bullied, and (5) targets are not in a
position to defend themselves against their bullies.
Mary Bruce and William Nolan proposed that violence in the
workplace generally happens in four ways: criminal intent
(individual or group of individuals not related to an organization
decide to perpetrate a crime, and an employee is victimized
during the crime), customer/client (an individual who has a
legitimate connection to an organization [as a customer or client]
perpetrates violence while receiving services from the
organization), worker on worker (when one coworker physically
assaults another coworker), and personal relationship (when
violence is perpetrated on a target by someone with whom the
target has a personal relationship outside the workplace).
The Occupational Safety and Health Administration has
recommended seven common ways to help alleviate workplace
violence: (1) zero-tolerance policies for workplace violence that
cover all organizational stakeholders (clients/customers,
employees, visitors, etc.), (2) establishing a reporting mechanism
for all employees who think someone may perpetrate an act of
violence,(3) ensuring that employees who report possible violence
are not harmed for doing so, (4) having a clearly spelled-out
security plan and ensuring all employees are aware of the plan,
(5) establishing a violence-prevention program run by a group of
employees with authority to make changes, (6) ensuring that all
levels of management clearly express their support for the
violence-prevention efforts of the organization, and (7) training all
members of the organization in the security plan and making all
members aware of the violence-prevention program.
EXERCISES
1. Go to the Workplace Bullying Institute’s
website (http://www.workplacebullying.org/wbiresearch/wbistudies)
and check out some of their research. What findings did you
discover that were not discussed in this chapter? What facts
Active-Passive Aggression:
Aggression :
Attacks :
Direct-Indirect Aggression:
about workplace bullying surprise you the most?
2. Listen to Jason Wrench’s
interview (http://www.communicast.info/wpbully.mp3) with Pamela
Lutgen-Sandvick about bullying in the workplace. What strikes
you the most from this interview? How do you think organizations
should use this information to improve the workplace?
3. Listen to Jason Wrench’s
interview (http://www.communicast.info/rancer.mp3) with Andrew
Rancer about verbal aggression. How can you apply Dr. Rancer’s
ideas to aggression in the workplace? Should workplace policies
have clearly articulated sections on verbal aggression in the
workplace? Why or why not?
KEY TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
Aspect of Buss’s typology of aggressive types focused on whether or not an individual specifically engages in aggressive behavior (active) or withholds something the victim needs or values (passive).
An offensive act, practice, or attack targeted at another person(s) with the intention of harming or injuring that person, who is motivated to avoid such treatment.
Forms of aggression consisting of overt and/or covert actions taken toward another person(s) with hostile or violent intent.
Aspect of Buss’s typology of aggressive types focused on whether or not the aggressor harms the target directly (direct aggression), or the aggressor targets someone or something peripheral to the victim in a way to inflict pain (passive).
Physical-Verbal Aggression:
Practices :
Argumentativeness:
Criminal Intent:
Customer Or Client:
Cyberbullying :
Offensive Acts:
Personal Relationship:
Self-Concept:
Worker-On-Worker Violence:
Aspect of Buss’s typology of aggressive types focused on the extent to which a person’s inapropriate behavior comes out in physical forms (e.g., assault, defacing property, pushing, slapping) or in verbal forms (e.g., gossip, yelling, racist/sexist remarks).
Forms of aggression consisting of habitual performances designed to demean, belittle, or subjugate others.
Communication trait where an individual actively defends her or his ideas while clearly proposing counterarguments toward another.
Form of workplace violence described by Mary Bruce and William Nolan in which an individual or group of individuals not related to an organization decides to perpetrate a crime, and an employee is victimized during the crime.
Form of workplace violence described by Mary Bruce and William Nolan in which an individual who has a legitimate connection to an organization (as a customer or client) perpetrates violence while receiving services from the organization.
The use of computer-mediated communication designed to harass a victim with the intent of causing harm.
Forms of aggression designed to demean or belittle another person.
Form of workplace violence described by Mary Bruce and William Nolan in which violence is perpetrated on a target by someone with whom the target has a personal relationship outside of the workplace (e.g., spouse, family member, friend).
An individual’s attitudes, opinions, and cognitions about his or her competence, character, strengths, and weaknesses.
Form of workplace violence described by Mary Bruce and William Nolan in which one coworker physically assaults another coworker.
[1] Baron, R. A. (1977). Human aggression. New York, NY: Plenum
Press.
[2] Neuman, J. H., & Baron, R. A. (1997). Aggression in the workplace. In
R. A. Giacalone & J. Greenberg (Eds.), Antisocial behavior in
organizations (pp. 37–67). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
[3] Buss, A. H. (1961). The psychology of aggression. New York, NY:
Wiley.
[4] Infante, D. A., & Wigley, C. J. (1986). Verbal aggressiveness: An
interpersonal model and measure. Communication Monographs, 53, 61–
69, p. 61.
[5] Kinney, T. A. (1994). An inductively derived typology of verbal
aggression and its relationship to distress. Human Communication
Research, 21, 183–222. doi:10.1111/j.1468-2958.1994.tb00345.x
[6] Infante, D. A., & Rancer, A. S. (1982). A conceptualization and
measure of argumentativeness. Journal of Personality Assessment, 46,
72–80, p. 72.
[7] Infante, D. A., & Gorden, W. I. (1985). Superiors’ argumentativeness
and verbal aggressiveness as predictors of subordinates’ satisfaction.
Human Communication Research, 12, 117–125. doi:10.1111/j.1468-
2958.1985.tb00069.x
[8] Gorden, W. I., & Infante, D. A. (1987). Employee rights: Context
argumentativeness, verbal aggressiveness, and career satisfaction. In C.
A. B. Osigweh (Ed.), Communicating employee responsibilities and rights
(pp. 149–163). Westport, CT: Quorum; Infante, D. A., Anderson, C. M.,
Martin, M. M., Herrington, A. D., & Kim, J. (1993). Subordinates’
satisfaction and perceptions of superiors’ compliance gaining tactics,
argumentativeness, and verbal aggression. Management Communication
Quarterly, 6, 307–326.
[9] Cole, J. G., & McCroskey, J. C. (2003). The association of perceived
communication apprehension, shyness, and verbal aggression with
perceptions of source credibility and affect in organizational and
interpersonal contexts. Communication Quarterly, 51, 101–110.
[10] McCroskey, J. C., & Teven, J. J. (1999). Goodwill: A reexamination of
the construct and its measurement. Communication Monographs, 66,
90–103.
[11] Gorden, W. I., Infante, D. A., & Izzo, J. (1988). Variations in voice
pertaining to dissatisfaction/satisfaction with subordinates. Management
Communication Quarterly, 2, 6–22.
[12] Coombs, W. T., & Holladay, S. J. (2004). Understanding the
aggressive workplace: Development of the workplace aggression
tolerance questionnaire. Communication Studies, 55, 481–497.
[13] Glomb, T. (2002). Workplace anger and aggression: Informing
conceptual models with data from specific encounters. Journal of
Occupational Health Psychology, 7, 20–36. doi:10.1037//1076-
8998.7.1.20
[14] Pearson, C. M., Anderson, L. M., & Porath, C. L. (2000). Assessing
and attacking workplace incivility. Organizational Dynamics, 29, 123–137.
doi:10.1016/S0090-2616(00)00019-X
[15] Roland, E., & Munthe, E. (Eds.). (1989). Bullying: An international
perspective. London, UK: D. Fulton.
[16] Leymann, H., & Gustavsson, B. (1984). Psykiskt vald I arbeitslivet.
Tva explorativa undersokningar (Psychological violence at workplace:
Two explorative studies). Undersokningsrapport 42, Stockholm, Sweden:
Arbetarskyddsstyrelsen (National Board of Occupational Safety and
Health); Leymann, H. (1986). Vuxenmobbning: Om psykiskt våld i
arbetslivet [Mobbing: Psychological violence in working life]. Lund,
Sweden: Studentlitteratur; Leymann, H. (2000). The mobbing
encyclopedia. Retrieved from http://www.leymann.se/English/frame.html
[17] Rayner, C., & Keashly, L. (2005). In S. Fox & P. E. Spector (Eds.),
Counterproductive work behavior: Investigations of actors and targets
(pp. 271–296). Washington, DC: American Psychological Association.
[18] Kashly, L., & Jagatic, K. (2003). By any other name: American
perspectives on workplace bullying. In S. Einarsen, H. Howel, D. Zapf, &
C. Cooper (Eds.), Bullying and emotional abuse in the workplace:
International research and practice perspectives (pp. 31–61). London,
UK: Taylor & Francis.
[19] Buss, A. H. (1961). The psychology of aggression. New York, NY:
Wiley.
[20] Kashly, L., & Jagatic, K. (2003). By any other name: American
perspectives on workplace bullying. In S. Einarsen, H. Howel, D. Zapf, &
C. Cooper (Eds.), Bullying and emotional abuse in the workplace:
International research and practice perspectives (pp. 31–61). London,
UK: Taylor & Francis, p. 273.
[21] See Workplace Bullying Institute, http://www.workplacebullying.org
[22] See Healthy Workplace Bill, http://www.healthyworkplacebill.org
[23] Namie, G., & Namie, R. (2009). The bully at work: What you can do
to stop the hurt and reclaim your dignity on the job (2nd ed.). Naperville,
IL: Sourcebooks.
[24] Namie, G. (2007). U.S. workplace bullying survey September, 2007
[Research report]. Workplace Bullying Institute & Zogby International.
Retrieved from http://workplacebullying.org/multi/pdf/WBIsurvey2007.pdf
[25] Hodson, R., Roscigno, V. J., & Lopez, S. H. (2006). Chaos and the
abuse of power: Workplace bullying in organizational and interactional
context. Work and Occupations, 33, 382–416.
[26] Namie, G. (2007). U.S. workplace bullying survey September, 2007
[Research report]. Workplace Bullying Institute & Zogby International.
Retrieved from http://workplacebullying.org/multi/pdf/WBIsurvey2007.pdf
[27] Namie, G. (2007). U.S. workplace bullying survey September, 2007
[Research report]. Workplace Bullying Institute & Zogby International.
Retrieved from http://workplacebullying.org/multi/pdf/WBIsurvey2007.pdf
[28] Namie, G., & Namie, R. (2009). The bully at work: What you can do
to stop the hurt and reclaim your dignity on the job (2nd ed.). Naperville,
IL: Sourcebooks.
[29] Lutgen-Sandvik, P., Namie, G., & Namie, R. (2009). Workplace
bullying: Causes, consequences, and corrections. In P. Lutgen-Sandvik &
B. D. Sypher (Eds.), Destructive organizational communication:
Processes, consequences, & constructive ways of organizing (pp. 27–
52). New York, NY: Routledge.
[30] Namie, G. (2007). U.S. workplace bullying survey September, 2007
[Research report]. Workplace Bullying Institute & Zogby International.
Retrieved from http://workplacebullying.org/multi/pdf/WBIsurvey2007.pdf
[31] Lipton, J. D. (2011). Combating cyber-victimization. Berkeley
Technology Law Journal, 26, 1103–1155.
[32] Privitera, C., & Campbell, M. (2009). Cyberbullying: The new face of
workplace bullying? Cyberpsychology & Behavior, 12, 395–400, p. 396.
doi:10.1089/cpb.2009.0025
[33] Sprigg, C., Axtell, C., Coyne, I., & Farley, S. (2012, November 7).
Punched from the screen: Cyberbullying in the workplace. Presented as
part of the ESRC Festival of Social Science. Sheffield, UK.
[34] Occupational Safety & Health Administration. (2012). Workplace
violence. Retrieved from http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/workplaceviolence/
[35] Bruce, M. D., & Nowlin, W. A. (2011). Workplace violence:
Awareness, prevention, and response. Public Personnel Management,
40, 293–308.
[36] United States Department of Labor. (2012). Census of fatal
occupational injuries (CFOI)—current and revised data. [Government
report]. Retrieved from http://www.bls.gov/iif/oshwc/cfoi/cfch0010.pdf
[37] Ocupational Safety & Health Administration. (2004). Guidelines for
preventing workplace violence for health care & social service workers.
Retrieved from http://www.osha.gov/Publications/osha3148.pdf
[38] See City of Houston. (2012). RUN. HIDE. FIGHT.® Surviving an
active shooter event—English. YouTube video, 5:55, posted July 23,
2012 by “Ready Houston,” https://www.youtube.com/watch?
v=5VcSwejU2D0
13.2 Dysfunctional Organizational Behaviors
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
1. Understand what leads to a McDermott employee-abusive
organization.
2. Reproduce and evaluate Michell Gelfand, Jana Raver, Lisa Nishii,
and Benjamin Schneider’s model of organizational discrimination.
3. Explain Alice Eagly and Linda Carly’s concept of the labyrinth in
comparison to the more common notions of the “glass ceiling.”
4. Summarize heterosexism and how it impacts modern
organizational practices of discrimination.
5. Identify multiple forms of physical-appearance discrimination and
how such discrimination impacts the workplace.
Although many think of counterproductive workplace behaviors as a few bad
employees targeting other employees, research shows that organizations
themselves can actually be perpetrators of counterproductive workplace
behavior. Organizations can create communication patterns and processes that
actually encourage counterproductive workplace behavior. For example, imagine
you’re a target of workplace bullying and report the behavior to your supervisor.
If your supervisor looks at you and says, “Ah, what’s wrong with a little hazing
in the workplace?” then your supervisor has consented to the bully’s behavior.
When these patterns are perpetuated over time, the organization develops a
number of problematic patterns. To help us understand dysfunctional
organizational behaviors, we are first going to look at the employee-abusive
organization theory, which will be followed by a discussion of discrimination in
the workplace.
Employee Abusive Organizations
In the previous sections of this chapter, we looked at the various ways aggression
manifests itself in the modern workplace. Pamela Lutgen-Sandvik and Virginia
McDermott have proposed a theory that helps explain why some of this
aggression manifests itself in the workplace and ultimately becomes normalized
behavior. [1] The theory starts with the basic notion that communication is a
process that creates and reproduces shared meaning among those involved in the
process. When you think about the inherent nature of organizations as systems of
relationships, you can quickly see that organizations are constantly in a process
of creating and reproducing meaning among their various stakeholders. As such,
Lutgen-Sandvik and McDermott argue that much of the aggression that takes
place in an organization is not just individualistic behavior; rather, aggression is
often a systematic process created and perpetuated by various organizational
systems. From this perspective, Lutgen-Sandvik and McDermott then argue that
specific communication processes perpetuate employee abusive organizations
(EAOs): “EAOs are hostile work environments in which employees experience
persistent harassment and fear at work because of the offensive, intimidating, or
oppressive atmosphere. In EAOs, workers are the object of persistent targeting
for abuse, which can include work obstruction, verbal abuse, social ostracism,
personal criticism, and, at times, physical aggression. This abuse can occur in a
variety of situations and communicative events and target multiple employees.
Aggressive and highly escalated conflict between two organizational members,
absent mistreatment of others, would not constitute an abusive organization.” [2]
From this definition, we can see that EAOs perpetuate a wide range of different
types of counterproductive workplace behaviors. To help explain why EAOs
help foster counterproductive workplace behavior, Lutgen-Sandvik and
McDermott made seven theoretical propositions (Table 13.3). A theory is a
logical set of propositions that offer researchers an explanation for some
phenomenon or set of phenomena. In this context, a “proposition” is a
relationship that is proposed to exist among concepts, such that the proposition
explains the link between the concepts. Thus EAO theory is a set of propositions
that link the relationship between how communication functions within an
organization and the likelihood that the organization affirms and reinforces
structures that create employee abusive organizations. In time, researchers can
take these propositions and turn them into testable hypotheses, which are formal
statements of an unproven theoretical proposition. Let’s examine each EAO
proposition in turn.
Table 13.3 Employee Abusive Organization (EAO) Propositions
Propositions Proposition Description
1 EAOs are likely to develop when abusive, employee-antagonistic discourse is evident in
two or more message flows.
2 EAOs are likely to develop when organization leadership enacts or condones abusive
and/or hostile discourse.
3 EAOs are more likely to develop when numerous organizational members breach the norm
of civil discourse.
4 EAOs are likely to develop when the syncretic superstructure is marked by cultural norms
of competition, individualism, and aggression.
5 EAOs are likely to worsen when abusive, hostile interactions persist over time.
6 EAOs always result in harm and negative outcomes for a variety of stakeholder groups.
7 EAOs can be altered but generally require concerted, collective efforts and the
commitment of upper management.
Proposition 1
The first proposition offered by Lutgen-Sandvik and McDermott states, “EAOs
are likely to develop when abusive, employee-antagonistic discourse is evident in
two or more message flows.” [3] From this perspective, individual negative
interactions in the workplace would not constitute an EAO. However, when
multiple lines of communication (e.g., coworker, leader-follower, employee rules
and policies) all reaffirm the negative behavior, the organization is helping to
perpetuate the negative behavior. Imagine that you are the victim of workplace
bullying from a coworker (one message flow). If you report the behavior to your
boss, who basically tells you to “buck up” and get back to work, the negative
behavior is being reaffirmed (second message flow). If, over time, other
coworkers watch you getting bullied and talk about the bullying but do nothing
to intervene, then you have yet another set of messages that are perpetuating the
problem (third message flow). When you have multiple message flows all
allowing for or giving credence to the counterproductive workplace behavior,
then you have a larger, more systematic problem occurring within the
organization.
Proposition 2
The second proposition from Lutgen-Sandvik and McDermott states, “EAOs are
likely to develop when organization leadership enacts or condones abusive
and/or hostile discourse.” [4] This proposition is pretty straightforward. As we
saw in an earlier example, many individuals in leadership positions simply don’t
understand the negative consequences of counterproductive workplace
behaviors, so they ultimately condone the behavior (if they’re not perpetrators
themselves). When the leadership clearly communicates that this kind of
behavior is appropriate, it should be no surprise when various organizational
members feel as though they’ve been given the green light to abuse others in the
workplace.
Proposition 3
The third proposition from Lutgen-Sandvik and McDermott states, “EAOs are
more likely to develop when numerous organizational members breach the norm
of civil discourse.” [5] Most organizations do not start out as EAOs, but they
develop over time. During this period, when an EAO is developing, civil
discourse generally is first breached by one person. If that person is not chastised
or even rewarded for her or his behavior, others see that it is perfectly OK (if not
beneficial) to behave likewise. Counterproductive workplace behaviors are a
disease that quickly spreads throughout the entire system. When civil discourse
is breached and not corrected, employees will continue the behaviors, which
creates a larger, systemic organizational problem.
Proposition 4
The fourth proposition from Lutgen-Sandvik and McDermott states, “EAOs are
likely to develop when the syncretic superstructure is marked by cultural norms
of competition, individualism, and aggression.” [6] Basically, the authors are
arguing that the larger organizational culture can create and perpetuate specific
organizational norms of competition, individualism, and aggression.
Competition occurs when individual employees are pitted against one another
for scarce resources. Many organizational leaders think this competition is
actually good for the organization, though research generally suggests this form
of hypercompetitiveness actually destroys employee morale, motivation, and job
satisfaction.
Second, organizational cultures can promote a sense of individualism: that it’s
every man or woman for himself or herself. When individuals are encouraged to
individually compete and win, it’s no surprise that one common strategy is to
tear others down in the process. Some organizations even terminate the bottom
10 to 15 percent of performers each year. In those environments, individualism
trumps any desire to cooperate with coworkers. The same dynamic can occur as
well when work teams are forced to compete against other teams.
Lastly, some organizations flatly support aggressive behavior. Earlier in this
chapter, we examined a range of types of aggressive behavior that are common
in organizations. It should be no surprise that hypercompetitive or individualistic
organizational cultures also foster more aggression as a whole.
We should also mention that the syncretic superstructure that creates and
recreates meaning for an organization can be located outside the organization.
Lutgen-Sandvik and McDermott mention that many nationalistic cultures tend to
promote competitiveness, individualism, and aggression (United States, United
Kingdom), while other cultures tend to promote more egalitarianism
(Scandinavia). Also, some countries even pass specific legislation that helps
decrease the likelihood of counterproductive workplace behaviors (like
bullying), which is a larger cultural indicator of what is acceptable behavior
within those societies.
Proposition 5
The fifth proposition from Lutgen-Sandvik and McDermott states, “EAOs are
likely to worsen when abusive, hostile interactions persist over time.” [7]
Basically, if an organization does not actively attempt to correct
counterproductive workplace behavior when it starts occurring, the behavior will
typically escalate and become more abusive and hostile. EAOs may start out
with just a couple of rotten eggs in the employee mix. But over time, as these
behaviors are reaffirmed by the organization, the negative behaviors escalate as
the boundaries of appropriate workplace behaviors are tested.
Proposition 6
The sixth proposition from Lutgen-Sandvik and McDermott states, “EAOs
always result in harm and negative outcomes for a variety of stakeholder
groups.” [8] The authors argue (supported by a wealth of research) that EAOs are
simply detrimental to the organization’s wider community of stakeholders—
from investors to customers. Abusing employees—whether destroying their self-
esteem and ability to work or causing them actual physiological and
psychological health problems—goes beyond such individual impacts. Witnesses
to employee abuse are themselves victimized, fearing they could be next.
Another study by Lutgen-Sandvik found that witnesses of workplace bullying
experienced feelings of emotional exhaustion, fear, and guilt, so that they were
more likely to leave their organizations. [9] EAOs simply are not productive.
Proposition 7
The last proposition from Lutgen-Sandvik and McDermott states, “EAOs can be
altered but generally require concerted, collective efforts and the commitment of
upper management.” [10] This last proposition offers some hope. EAOs can start
fixing their problems if upper management commits itself to the effort, rather
than giving lip service and not following through. Sadly, many organizations will
outwardly condemn abusive behaviors but don’t take real steps to correct the
underlying problems—such as terminating employees who cannot or will not
correct their behavior.
Discrimination in the Workplace
As discussed in Chapter 8, the modern workplace is a very diverse environment,
but organizations still face many challenges with regard to handling workplace
diversity. Discrimination refers to any behavior that treats groups differently
within the workplace. Within the United States, the Equal Employment
Opportunity Commission (EEOC) is charged with investigating and litigating
charges of discrimination within the workplace. Current US law covers a wide
range of possible categories that are commonly discriminated against: age,
disability, genetic information, national origin, pregnancy, race/color, religion,
and sex (including cases involving sexual harassment). Based on 2011 statistics
from the EEOC, Figure 13.2 shows types of discrimination cases that were filed. [11] Most people are familiar, to some extent, with the types of discrimination
discussed in Figure 13.2. However, discrimination can have many different faces
within the workplace. To help us understand how discrimination functions, we’ll
first examine a model of organizational discrimination and then a number of
different discriminatory patterns common in organizations today.
Figure 13.2 Discrimination Cases with the EEOC
The Systemic Nature of Discrimination
As discussed in employee abusive organization theory, organizations can often
create patterns of employee abuse over a period of time. [12] One specific type of
abuse common in organizations is discriminatory behavior. Michell Gelfand,
Jana Raver, Lisa Nishii, and Benjamin Schneider argue that organizations often
contribute to or lessen discrimination through a number of practices. [13] Figure
13.3 provides a revised version of the model that Gelfand, Raver, Nishii, and
Schneider proposed but with specific attention given to organizational
communication processes.
When examining the basic model proposed here, notice that we break
organizational practices that lead to discriminatory behavior into five general
phases—(1) inputs, (2) individuals and groups, (3) the organizational level, (4)
communication, and (5) outputs—that reflect a systems approach to
understanding discrimination in the workplace. (For more on the systems
approach, see Chapter 4.) Phase 1 represents the inputs from the external
environment into the organization; phases 2, 3, and 4 represent throughputs
within the organization; and phase 5 represents the outputs (or ramifications) of
workplace discrimination. Let’s briefly examine each of these phases.
Figure 13.3 Model of Organizational Discrimination
Phase 1: Inputs
As discussed in the basic notion of systems theory, no organization exists on its
own. All organizations are dependent on a variety of inputs. Some of the inputs
are listed in Figure 13.3. All these inputs can have an impact on how people
enact discriminatory behaviors within an organization. For example, if a culture
does not expressly prohibit discriminatory practices within its legal system (or
actually enables discriminatory practices), those organizations that exist within
those cultures are more likely to engage in discriminatory practices. Another
important factor includes the nature of the labor market. If a specific culture has
clear in-groups and out-groups, those divisions are more likely to influence the
organization. Imagine you exist in a culture where you have both purple people
and green people. If that society says it’s perfectly OK to discriminate against
green people in the workplace, the likelihood of discriminatory hiring practices
will escalate. Furthermore, within that same culture, purple people with the
ability to hire are less likely to hire green people, because the discriminatory
practices are enabled. Overall, one cannot dismiss the effects that an
organization’s external environment will have on discriminatory workplace
practices.
Phase 2: Individuals and Groups
A range of both individual-level and group-level processes and behaviors can
add to a discriminatory environment in an organization. Sheryl Lindsley noted
that when individuals enter an organization they bring both intrapersonal
processes (e.g., perceptions, evaluations, attributions) and individual
characteristics (e.g., stereotypes, prejudices, previous contact). [14] Both
intrapersonal processes and individual characteristics will cloud an employee’s
perceptions of those he or she deems as “other” within the organization.
Although many organizations attempt to moderate some of the negative
perceptions of “other” through diversity training or diversity programs, research
has shown mixed results on the effectiveness of alleviating either intrapersonal
processes or individual characteristics. [15]
In addition to individuals within an organization, work groups and teams can
also be a cause of discrimination within the workplace. Kecia Thomas and
Donna Chrobot-Mason argue that groups can often be a reason for workplace
discrimination. [16] According to social-identity theory—which we encountered
in Chapter 8—individuals are inherently driven to feel positive about
themselves. One way people acquire a positive sense of self is by valuing their
group membership (in-group) while disparaging individuals who belong to other
groups (out-groups). [17] Thomas and Chrobot-Mason argue that as individuals
who belong to a majority group within an organization see their majority
slipping and their status quo threatened, they are more likely to become
dissatisfied and to protect their own groups. Conversely, as minority members
within an organization see their numbers escalate, they actually become more
satisfied and productive.
One of our coauthors worked in an organization where there were two very clear
groups within the same division. When our coauthor started working for this
organization, both groups were roughly the same size and were responsible for
the same amount of work. Over time, due to voluntary and involuntary turnover,
one of the groups kept getting more resources and personnel. The other group
felt slighted and threatened as their numbers and power seemed to dwindle.
Decision making tended to always side with the majority, which caused the
minority group to feel anxiety and anger. As you can imagine, this led to
conflict. To rectify this disparity and relieve the tensions, senior management
appointed a member from the minority group to run the whole division and a
member from the majority to be second-in-command.
Phase 3: Organizational Level
The second part of the throughput process within an organization involves what
is deemed as organizational-level discriminatory processes. These processes tend
to be beyond individuals or groups and affect the larger organization. The first
major organizational-level factor is leadership. If an organization’s leadership
allows discrimination to occur, it will be no surprise when discriminatory
behavior is seen at all levels of the organization. For this reason, leaders and
human resources professionals in the organization must clearly tell everyone that
discriminatory behavior is simply not tolerated. If leadership on this issue starts
at the top, it will trickle down to the organization as a whole.
The next factor is organizational culture and climate and whether these support
or diminish discriminatory behavior within the organization. If an organization’s
culture and climate perpetuate discriminatory behavior, that behavior will be
seen across all levels. (See Chapter 6 for a review of organizational culture and
climate.) Organizations can promote diversity initiatives to alleviate
discriminatory behavior. But these larger cultural shifts will take time, energy,
and buy-in throughout the organization. Some organizations try to promote
diversity and eliminate discriminatory practices through annual training sessions.
Although these can be beneficial, they are not a magic Band-Aid that heals an
organization’s larger culture of discriminatory practices.
Lastly, organizations must look at their own corporate structures—starting with
the makeup of their boards, through senior management, and down to the bottom
of the hierarchy. If an organization purports to be inclusive and
nondiscriminatory, but all senior executives and board members are middle-aged
white men, this lack of diversity sends a clear message about how the
organization actually sees diversity. Furthermore, some organizations have
unwittingly or purposely put stumbling blocks to promotion in the paths of
minority employees. The most common metaphor, generally discussed in sexual
discrimination, is the glass ceiling. The glass ceiling refers to an unbreachable
barrier that prevents members of various out-groups (e.g., women, members of
different races) from rising to upper levels of organizational leadership. Alice
Eagly and Linda Carly argue that this glass ceiling is more like a labyrinth. [18]
The labyrinth metaphor “captures the varied challenges confronting women as
they travel, often on indirect paths, sometimes through alien territory, on their
way to leadership.” [19] Although Eagly and Carly use the labyrinth metaphor
specifically to refer to women in the workplace, we believe this metaphor can be
equally applied to all organizational members who belong to a clear out-group.
Phase 4: Communication
The third part of the throughput process in the discrimination model involves
communication. Sheryl Lindsley explains that organization members often
communicate discrimination in three basic ways: social isolation, intolerance for
group norms, and negating individual identity. [20] First, out-group members in
organizations are often left out of important social interactions within the
workplace. These informal gatherings will often include discussions of job-
related topics to which these out-group members simply are not privy. Although
in-group members may not think that hashing out an important decision over
lunch is a problem, out-group members who are not invited to these lunches are
often left out of the decision-making process.
Second, in-group members may communicate in very clear patterns that out-
group members do not understand. Ultimately, in-group members expect that
out-group members will just conform to the communication patterns of the in-
group. Imagine that you’ve been hired to work in a Middle Eastern culture.
Unless you are from this culture, you would experience a number of
communicative differences that will impact how you interpret communicative
behaviors. To prevent this type of misunderstanding, Lindsley recommends that
recognizing diverse communication styles is important for eliminating these
misunderstandings and decreasing discriminatory behavior.
Lastly, in-group members may stereotype out-group members and their
behaviors based solely on group membership. Yet there is more difference
generally within groups than there is between groups. These misunderstandings
can go both ways. Many out-group members will assume that in-group members
have special access, relationships, and power as a result of being a member of
the in-group. However, many people who may technically fall into an in-group
can feel just as powerless as those in an out-group.
In addition to the basic forms of discrimination that are communicated within an
organization, organizations can also promote employee voice or silence. (See
Chapter 5 for discussion of employee voice and silence.) In organizations that
actively promote inclusivity, out-group members are more likely to communicate
openly with both coworkers and leaders. However, if out-group members are
constantly told to shut up and conform, eventually out-group members will stop
expressing ideas altogether, even when clear problems are on the horizon.
Organizations need to foster organizational environments that promote employee
voice for all members.
Phase 5: Outputs
The last phase in our model of organizational discrimination involves the outputs
that occur if an organization actively discriminates against people. One output is
the possibility that individuals in legally protected classes will file a lawsuit.
Look again at Figure 13.2. Every year, thousands of claims of discrimination are
filed with the EEOC. Answering allegations of discrimination can cost an
organization a great deal of time and money.
Although lawsuits are clear outcomes of discrimination, there are other subtle
ways that various stakeholders may react to cases of organizational
discrimination. Individuals in the external environment—consumers, clients,
investors, government officials, the public at large—may adopt negative views
of organizations. Internally, discriminated employees often experience a loss of
job satisfaction, morale, and motivation—which can have a direct impact on the
quality of the goods and services an organization is able to produce through
these workers. Furthermore, these workers often get fed up with the
organization’s discriminatory practices and start looking for jobs elsewhere. As
we discussed in Chapter 10, organizational turnover can be very costly.
Non-EEOC Protected Discrimination
Most people in the United States are pretty familiar with the hiring and firing
practices related to discrimination in employment law. However, there are
classes of people within the United States that are not protected under current
laws. To help us further understand discrimination today, let’s look at two forms
of discrimination that are still largely legal within the United States.
Heterosexism
The first category of discrimination still largely legal within the United States is
called heterosexism. Patricia Jung and Ralph Smith provided one of the most
commonly cited definitions of heterosexism: “Heterosexism is a reasoned
system of bias regarding sexual orientation. It denotes prejudice in favor of
heterosexual people and connotes prejudice against bisexual, and especially,
homosexual people…Heterosexism is not grounded primarily in emotional fears,
hatreds, or other visceral response to homosexuality. Instead it is rooted in a
largely cognitive constellation of beliefs about human sexuality.” [21]
You may have noticed that the list of categories currently covered under federal
law does not cover lesbian, gay, bisexual, and transgendered/transsexual
individuals (LGBT). Many states have passed laws that do cover LGBT
workplace discrimination, but as of this writing, no federal legislation has been
approved by the US Congress. Figure 13.4 is a list from the Human Rights
Commission of states that currently have laws on the books to prevent
discrimination against LGBT individuals. [22]
Figure 13.4 State Protection Laws for LGBT Persons
Liz Winfeld estimates that an inequitable workplace can lead to approximately
10 percent loss in productivity. [23] Using the commonly ascribed notion that 10
percent [24] of the population is LGBT, she estimates that an organization with
five thousand people could suffer an annual loss of $2 million because of
discriminatory practices. Ultimately, equality in the workplace is a bottom-line
issue for businesses. Peng Wang and Joshua Schwarz found that, even using
conservative estimates, organizations that implemented a LGBT
nondiscrimination policy saw an almost immediate increase in their stock values. [25]
Although nondiscrimination is good for an organization’s bottom line, subtle
discrimination remains. In one study, András Tilcsik sent résumés to 1,769 job
postings in seven states; three states had LGBT protection laws and four did not.
In one résumé, Tilcsik clearly identified the applicant as someone who had
participated in a LGBT group as an undergraduate, while a second version listed
only a generic student group. Altogether, the résumés garnered 331 interview
invitations. Tilcsik discovered that employers in states with LGBT protections
were statistically more likely to invite the applicant with the LGBT group listed
on the résumé, as compared to employers in states without legal protections.
Although not a perfect study, it does demonstrate the importance that legal
protections can have for preventing workplace discrimination. [26]
Physical Appearance Discrimination
People often say that everyone has something beautiful about them. But the
harsh reality is that physical appearance discrimination is pervasive in the
modern work world. Let’s take a case study to start this discussion.
In a series of studies, Allan Mazur and various associates sought to determine if
an individual’s facial traits (e.g., symmetry, attractiveness, youthfulness) could
predict rise through military ranks. [27] The findings were striking. Faces
perceived as more physically attractive and dominant were strong predictors of
the rank that a military cadet would achieve even forty years later. Simply put,
attractive cadets were statistically more likely to make the rank of general than
their less attractive counterparts.
Catherine Hakim calls this phenomenon one’s “erotic capital.” [28] Whether we
like to admit it or not, people who are attractive really do have an easier life in
many ways. In one study, Thomas Cash, Barry Gillen, and Steven Burns
submitted fake résumés with an attached image of either an attractive applicant
or an unattractive applicant. [29] All things being equal, hiring managers
consistently recommended the attractive applicant. When asked why, hiring
managers found the attractive applicant was more likely to succeed on the job. In
another study, Cynthia Marlowe, Sandra Schneider, and Carnot Nelson wanted
to determine if less experienced managers were more likely—and more
experienced managers less likely—to go by looks. [30] Yet not even experience
mitigated the impact of attractiveness on hiring recommendations. Women
perceived as “below average” in attractiveness fared the worst. Like it or not,
from hiring to promotions, physical attraction matters in the workplace.
Another group of individuals who face discrimination in the workplace not
covered by the EEOC involves weight-based discrimination. Natasha Randle,
Christopher Mathis, and Dewaynna Cates recently sought to examine the impact
that perceived weight-based discrimination had on one’s career. [31] The study
marginally supported the basic idea that individuals who perceive weight-based
discrimination believed that the discrimination impacted their career success.
Research has shown that obese people on average earn less than their average-
weight counterparts. [32] According to research by Susan Averett, these findings
are hardly unique to the United States. In all countries where wage gaps between
obese and average counterparts have been studied, discriminatory practices in
earnings were found. Dan-Olof Rooth sent 1,970 applications to 985 employers
via e-mail in Stockholm and Gothenburg, Sweden. The applications were the
same, but the image that was attached to the application varied from average
weight to overweight. [33] Not surprisingly, obese applicants were less likely to
receive callbacks for interviews than their average counterparts. Although all the
applications indicated a job candidate who was clearly qualified, employers were
more likely to interview thin or average applicants.
Kayla Von Braunsberg and Daniel Olsen set out to examine how antifat attitudes
and dislike of fat people affect beliefs of the appropriateness of discrimination
against overweight people. [34] Using a revised version of the Antifat Attitudes
Scale, [35] their study revealed that individuals who had high antifat attitudes and
high dislike of fat people were more likely to believe it is appropriate to
discriminate in the workplace on the basis of weight. We should mention that
some research indicates that using the word “fat” versus the word “overweight”
predisposes individuals to more prejudicial outlooks. [36]
In summary, what does discrimination have to do with organizational
communication? First, discrimination is fundamentally unethical based on the
National Communication Association’s Credo for Ethical Communication. (See
Chapter 2 for more information.) As communicators, we should treat all people
with respect and without prejudice. Second, discrimination is a communicative
process. As suggested by employee-abusive organization theory, when
discrimination is communicated either actively or passively within an
organization it becomes normalized behavior.
Lastly, discrimination simply isn’t in an organization’s best interest. Barbara
Martin, Amin Rajah, and Jenny Latham set out to determine the impact that
prodiversity policies and practices have on the modern organization. [37] The
study found organizations that actively promote diversity policies and practices
can reduce recruitment costs, increase employee motivation, increase employee
retention, increase innovative ideas, and improve the organization’s image.
These are just a handful of benefits that come when organizations actively
prevent discrimination and promote diversity in the workplace.
KEY TAKEAWAY
Employee-abusive organization theory posits that organizations
can help facilitate working environments where counterproductive
workplace behaviors are part of the ingrained fabric of the
organization. As organizations either perpetrate or do not
discourage counterproductive workplace behaviors, these
behaviors become normalized, leading to an increase in the
behaviors themselves.
Michell Gelfand, Jana Raver, Lisa Nishii, and Benjamin
Schneider’s basic model of organizational discrimination takes a
systems approach for understanding how discrimination works in
the workplace. First, various organizational inputs (stakeholder
interests, culture, industry, etc.) can impact whether discrimination
is normalized behavior. Second, when individuals enter an
organization, they bring both intrapersonal processes (e.g.,
perceptions, evaluations, attributions) and individual
characteristics (e.g., stereotypes, prejudices, previous contact),
both of which can impact perceptions of appropriateness of
discrimination. Third, organizations themselves can encourage or
discourage discriminatory practices through leadership,
culture/climate, and structure of senior management/board of
directors. Fourth, Sheryl Lindsley explains that organization
members often communicate discrimination in three basic ways:
social isolation, intolerance for group norms, and negating
individual identity. Lastly, organizations then have a number of
outputs that can occur: EEOC complaints; negative organizational
reputation; decreased job satisfaction, employee morale,
employee motivation, and employee productivity; and increased
employee-turnover intentions.
Alice Eagly and Linda Carly argue that the glass ceiling metaphor
for discriminatory practices in the workplace makes it sound as if
it’s impossible to break through. Instead, they proposed that it is
more of a labyrinth, because women and other minorities do
make it to the upper echelons of corporate America, but they
often take nontraditional paths to get there.
Heterosexism is a system of attitudes, beliefs, and biases against
bisexual, gay, lesbian, transgender, transsexual, and queer-
identifying individuals in favor of opposite-sex relationships and
sexuality. In the modern corporate environment, it is still legal to
discriminate against BGLTQ individuals in the workplace because
there are no federal protections. Research has shown that while
being nondiscriminatory is good for an organization’s bottom line,
many organizations either overtly or covertly discriminate against
BGLTQ employees.
Physical appearance discrimination is based on some physical
quality of the person (attractiveness, weight, etc.). Research
clearly shows that one’s physical appearance is a good predictor
of being hired and promoted within an organization. One form of
discriminatory practice that is rarely discussed involves
discrimination against overweight individuals. Research has
demonstrated that discrimination against such individuals is
common and leads to economic disparities.
EXERCISES
Discrimination :
Employee Abusive Organizations :
Glass Ceiling:
1. Looking at the seven propositions proposed in employee abusive
organization theory, do you agree with the basic theory? Why or
why not? Do you think the theory is missing a critical element? If
so, what? If not, why?
2. Check out this infographic
(http://infographiccommons.com/view/equal_education_unequal_pay.html
wage disparity between females and males. Why do you think
wage disparities still exist in the twenty-first century? Do you think
the wage disparity will ever shrink between females and males in
the United States?
3. Listen to the podcast with Dr. Gordon Patzer (author of the book
Looks) from the American Management Association
(http://www.amanet.org/training/podcasts/Gordon-Patzer-on-Why-
Looks-Matter-More-than-You-Think-08-03.aspx). After listening to
the podcast, what do you think of the general findings from Dr.
Patzer? Should there be better protection against lookism in the
workplace?
KEY TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
Any behavior that treats groups differently within the workplace.
Where counterproductive workplace behaviors are systematically a part of the normal communicative practices that result from the structures within the organization itself.
An unbreachable barrier that prevents members of various
Heterosexism:
out-groups (e.g., women, members of different races) from rising to upper levels of organizational leadership.
A system of attitudes, beliefs, and biases against bisexual, gay, lesbian, transgender, transsexual, and queer-identifying individuals in favor of opposite-sex relationships and sexuality.
[1] Lutgen-Sandvik, P., & McDermott, V. (2008). The constitution of
employee-abusive organizations: A communication flows theory.
Communication Theory, 18, 304–333. doi:10.1111/j.1468-
2885.2008.00324.x
[2] Lutgen-Sandvik, P., & McDermott, V. (2008). The constitution of
employee-abusive organizations: A communication flows theory.
Communication Theory, 18, 304–333, pp. 305–306. doi:10.1111/j.1468–
2885.2008.00324.x
[3] Lutgen-Sandvik, P., & McDermott, V. (2008). The constitution of
employee-abusive organizations: A communication flows theory.
Communication Theory, 18, 304–333, p. 323. doi:10.1111/j.1468-
2885.2008.00324.x
[4] Lutgen-Sandvik, P., & McDermott, V. (2008). The constitution of
employee-abusive organizations: A communication flows theory.
Communication Theory, 18, 304–333, p. 323. doi:10.1111/j.1468-
2885.2008.00324.x
[5] Lutgen-Sandvik, P., & McDermott, V. (2008). The constitution of
employee-abusive organizations: A communication flows theory.
Communication Theory, 18, 304–333, p. 323. doi:10.1111/j.1468-
2885.2008.00324.x
[6] Lutgen-Sandvik, P., & McDermott, V. (2008). The constitution of
employee-abusive organizations: A communication flows theory.
Communication Theory, 18, 304–333, p. 324. doi:10.1111/j.1468-
2885.2008.00324.x
[7] Lutgen-Sandvik, P., & McDermott, V. (2008). The constitution of
employee-abusive organizations: A communication flows theory.
Communication Theory, 18, 304–333, p. 324. doi:10.1111/j.1468-
2885.2008.00324.x
[8] Lutgen-Sandvik, P., & McDermott, V. (2008). The constitution of
employee-abusive organizations: A communication flows theory.
Communication Theory, 18, 304–333, p. 324. doi:10.1111/j.1468-
2885.2008.00324.x
[9] Lutgen-Sandvik, P. (2006). Take this job and. Quitting and other forms
of resistance to workplace bullying. Communication Monographs, 73,
406–433.
[10] Lutgen-Sandvik, P., & McDermott, V. (2008). The constitution of
employee-abusive organizations: A communication flows theory.
Communication Theory, 18, 304–333, p. 325. doi:10.1111/j.1468-
2885.2008.00324.x
[11] Equal Employment Opportunity Commission. (2012). Charge
statistics: FY 1997 through FY 2011. Retrieved from
http://www.eeoc.gov/eeoc/statistics/enforcement/charges.cfm
[12] Lutgen-Sandvik, P., & McDermott, V. (2008). The constitution of
employee-abusive organizations: A communication flows theory.
Communication Theory, 18, 304–333. doi:10.1111/j.1468-
2885.2008.00324.x
[13] Gelfand, M. J., Raver, J. L., Nishii, L. H., & Schneider, B. (2005).
Discrimination in organizations: An organizational-level systems
perspective. In R. L. Dipboye & A. Colella (Eds.), Discrimination at work:
The psychological and organizational bases (pp. 89–113). Mahwah, NJ:
Lawrence Erlbaum.
[14] Lindsley, S. L. (1998). Communicating prejudice in organizations. In
M. L. Hecht (Ed.), Communicating prejudice (pp. 187–205). Thousand
Oaks, CA: Sage.
[15] Arthur, W., Jr., & Doverspike, D. (2005). Achieving diversity and
reducing discrimination in the workplace through human resource
management practices: Implications of research and theory for staffing,
training, and rewarding performance. In R. L. Dipboye & A. Colella (Eds.),
Discrimination at work: The psychological and organizational bases (pp.
305–327). Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum.
[16] Thomas, K. M., & Chrobot-Mason, D. (2005). Group-level
explanations of workplace discrimination. In R. L. Dipboye & A. Colella
(Eds.), Discrimination at work: The psychological and organizational
bases (pp. 63–88). Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum.
[17] Tajfel, H., & Turner, J. C. (1986). The social identity theory of
intergroup behavior. In S. Worchel & W. G. Austin (Eds.), Psychology of
intergroup relations (pp. 7–24). Chicago, IL: Nelson.
[18] Eagly, A. H., & Carly, L. L. (2007). Through the labyrinth: The truth
about how women become leaders. Cambridge, MA: Harvard Business
Review Press.
[19] Eagly, A. H., & Carly, L. L. (2007). Through the labyrinth: The truth
about how women become leaders. Cambridge, MA: Harvard Business
Review Press, p. 1.
[20] Lindsley, S. L. (1998). Communicating prejudice in organizations. In
M. L. Hecht (Ed.), Communicating prejudice (pp. 187–205). Thousand
Oaks, CA: Sage.
[21] Jung, P. B., & Smith, R. F. (1993). Heterosexism: An ethical
challenge. Albany: State University of New York Press, p. 13.
[22] Human Rights Commission. (2012, June 12). State wide
employment laws and policies. Retrieved from
http://www.hrc.org/files/assets/resources/Employment_Laws_and_Policies.pdf
{~?~AU: URL not working.}
[23] Winfeld, L. (2005). Straight talk about gays in the workplace:
Creating an inclusive, productive environment for everyone in your
organization (2nd ed.). New York, NY: Harrington Park Press.
[24] In a survey of 35,000 US adults conducted by the Centers for
Disease Control and Prevention, 1.6 percent of respondents identified
themselves as gay or lesbian, 0.7 percent as bisexual, and 1.1 percent
as ‘‘something else.’’ Ward, B. W., Dahlhamer, J. M., Galinsky, A. M., &
Joestl, S. S. (2014). Sexual orientation and health among US adults:
National Health Interview Survey, 2013. National Health Statistics Report,
77, July 2014. Accessed August 20, 2014, from
http://www.cdc.gov/nchs/data/nhsr/nhsr077.pdf
[25] Wang, P., & Schwarz, J. L. (2010). Stock price reactions to GLBT
nondiscrimination policies. Human Resource Management, 49, 195–216.
[26] Tilcsik, A. (2011). Pride and prejudice: Employment discrimination
against openly gay men in the United States. American Journal of
Sociology, 117(2), 586–686.
[27] Mazur, A., & Mueller, U. (1996). Facial dominance. In A. Somit & S.
Peterson (Eds.), Research in biopolitics, 4th ed. (pp. 99–111). London,
UK: JAI Press; Mueller, U., & Mazur, A. (1996). Facial dominance of West
Point cadets as a predictor of later military rank. Social Forces, 74, 823–
850.
[28] Hakim, C. (2011). Erotic capital: The power of attraction in the
boardroom and the bedroom. New York, NY: Basic Books.
[29] Cash, T. F., Gillen, B., & Burns, S. D. (1977). Sexism and beautyism
in personnel consultant decision making. Journal of Applied Psychology,
62, 301–310.
[30] Marlowe, C. M., Schneider, S. L., & Nelson, C. E. (1986). Gender
and attractiveness biases in hiring decisions: Are more experienced
managers less biased? Journal of Applied Psychology, 81, 11–21.
[31] Randle, N., Mathis, C., & Cates, D. (2012). Coping to repair the
career damage of workplace weight discrimination. Journal of
Organizational Culture, Communications & Conflict, 16(1), 89–106.
[32] Averett, S. L. (2011). Labor market consequences: Employment,
wages, disability, and absenteeism. In J. Cawley (Ed.), The Oxford
handbook of the social science of obesity (pp. 531–552). New York, NY:
Oxford University Press.
[33] Rooth, D. O. (2009). Obesity, attractiveness, and differential
treatment in hiring: A field experiment. Journal of Human Resources, 44,
710–735.
[34] Von Braunsberg, K., & Olsen, D. (2012). Weight and perceptions in
the workplace. Unpublished manuscript.
[35] Morrison, T. G., & O’Connor, W. E. (1999). Psychometric properties
of a scale measuring negative attitudes toward overweight individuals.
Journal of Social Psychology, 139, 436–445. [Original measure]; Wrench,
J. S., & Knapp, J. L. (2008). The effects of body image perceptions and
sociocommunicative orientations on self-esteem, depression, and
identification and involvement in the gay community. Journal of
Homosexuality, 55, 471–503. [Revised measure]
[36] Brochu, P. M., & Esses, V. M. (2011). What’s in a name? The effects
of the labels “fat” versus “overweight” on weight bias. Journal of Applied
Social Psychology, 41(8), 1981–2008. doi:10.1111/j.1559-
1816.2011.00786.x
[37] Martin, B., Rajah, A., & Latham, J. (2003). Harnessing workforce
diversity to raise the bottom line. Tunbridge Wells, UK: Centre for
Research in Employment & Technology in Europe.
13.3 Employee Deviance
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
1. Define the term employee deviance.
2. Understand how belief, affect, and behaviors lead to
organizational cynicism.
3. Explain the term Machiavellianism and its relationship to
organizational communication.
4. Describe Virginia Bratton and Michele Kacmar’s model of extreme
careerism.
Although organizations may create environments where counterproductive
workplace behavior is the norm, we cannot discount the fact that people may
come into an organization with problematic attitudes, values, and beliefs.
Rebecca Bennett and Sandra Robinson defined employee deviance as
“voluntary behavior of organizational members that violates significant
organizational norms and, in doing so threatens the well-being of the
organization and its members.” [1] The counterproductive workplace behavior
already discussed in this chapter can clearly constitute employee deviance. But
employees can manifest organizationally deviant behaviors that, in essence, they
bring with them into the office. In this section, we examine three specific types
of employee deviance: organizational cynicism, Machiavellianism, and extreme
careerism.
Figure 13.5
Organizational
Cynicism
Organizational Cynicism
Although previous researchers had examined employee cynicism toward
organizational change, James Dean, Pamela Brandes, and Ravi Dharwadkar
retooled the concept for a broader understanding of organizational cynicism. [2]
They defined organizational cynicism as “a negative attitude toward one’s
employing organization, comprising three dimensions: (1) a belief that the
organization lacks integrity; (2) negative affect toward the organization; and (3)
tendencies to disparaging and critical behaviors toward the organization that
are consistent with these beliefs and affect.” [3] Under this definition,
organizational cynicism lies at the intersection of three different phenomena:
belief, affect, and behaviors (Figure 13.5).
Belief
The first dimension of organizational cynicism, belief,
arises when an employee concludes the organization is
lacking in truth, fairness, honesty, or sincerity. Maybe the
company is an employee-abusive organization. Perhaps it
engages in unethical business or communication practices.
(See Chapter 2 for more on business ethics.) Or perhaps it
regularly cuts corners to get products or services to market
faster. Employees who witness this behavior for a period of
time will begin to see this organizational behavior as the norm, and many
employees may come to believe the organization lacks integrity.
Affect
The word affect means “emotion.” Carroll Izard identified nine basic emotions
that people can experience: (1) interest-excitement, (2) enjoyment-joy, (3)
surprise-startle, (4) distress-anguish, (5) anger-rage, (6) disgust-revulsion, (7)
contempt-scorn, (8) fear-terror, and (9) shame-humiliation. [4] Any of these
emotions can be at play in organizational settings. For example, individuals who
are targets of workplace bullying could experience fear-terror or shame-
humiliation. Someone who just got an unexpected promotion could experience
enjoyment-joy or surprise-startle emotions. Organizational cynics tend to view
their organizations through more negative emotional responses. (Dean, Brandes,
and Dharwadkar note, however, that individuals who perceive their
organizations as immoral or unscrupulous can also derive enjoyment from
feeling they are superior. [5])
Behaviors
Negative beliefs about and affect toward an organization can engender certain
behaviors often manifested by organizational cynics. Dean, Brandes, and
Dharwadkar argue that as organization members become more cynical, they
become increasingly vocal in their criticisms. [6] Cynical verbal behaviors may
include expressing discontent (“I really hate this place!”), using sarcastic humor
to devalue the organization (“The only difference between this place and a prison
is that eventually prisoners get paroled.”), adding cynical interpretations to
organizational behaviors (“That sexual harassment training was purely to avoid a
lawsuit.”), and pessimistic predictions of the future (“I’ll be surprised if this
place even exists in five years.”). Cynical behaviors can also take the form of
nonverbal communication: rolling one’s eyes, smirking, sneering, exaggerated
sighing, laughing, and so on. In fact, all the cynical behaviors postulated by
Dean, Brandes, and Dharwadkar are communicative behaviors. Thus
organizational cynicism becomes an important communicative outcome of
counterproductive workplace behaviors. Each of the communicative behaviors
described can exist on its own. But when all three categories—belief, affect,
behavior—are combined, the result is a person who is clearly cynical about the
organization.
Machiavellianism
In 1513, Niccolò Machiavelli (Figure 13.6) wrote a text called The Prince. [7]
Although the book was dedicated to Lorenzo di Piero de’ Medici, who was a
member of the Medici family that ruled the Italian city-state of Florence, the
book was originally scribed for Lorenzo’s uncle. In The Prince, Machiavelli
unabashedly describes how he believes leaders should keep power. First, he
notes that traditional leadership virtues like decency, honor, and trust should be
discarded for a more calculating approach to leadership. Machiavelli believed
that, since humans are easily manipulated, princes can either take charge of their
people or expect that someone else will fill the leadership void.
Figure 13.6 Niccolò
Machiavelli
Source:
http://upload.wikimedia.org/wikipedia/commons/1/1e/Santi_di_Tito_-
_Niccolo_Machiavelli's_portrait.jpg
In 1970, social psychologists Richard Christie and Florence
Geis decided to see if Machiavelli’s ideas were still
practiced in the twentieth century. [8] The model that
Christie and Geis proposed consisted of four basic
Machiavellian characteristics: (1) lack of emotion in
interpersonal relationships, since relationships are a means
to an end; (2) lack of concern with conventional morality,
since people are tools to be used in the best way possible;
(3) a rational view of others, not based on psychopathology,
since leaders who manipulate others must themselves be
logical and rational; and (4) a focus on short-term tasks
rather than long-range ramifications of behavior, since
Machiavellian leaders have little ideological or organizational commitment.
(Imagine working with, or being led by, such a person!) For their research,
Christie and Geis created a questionnaire to measure one’s tendency toward
Machiavellianism. The questionnaire has undergone a number of revisions, but
the most common one is called the Mach IV. [9]
In the field of communication, a number of researchers have examined how
Machiavellianism relates to various communication behaviors and traits in the
workplace. Jason Teven, James McCroskey, and Virginia Richmond first
examined perceived managerial Machiavellianism and its relationship to various
organizational outcomes. [10] They observed that when subordinates perceived
their supervisors as Machiavellian, these subordinates held more negative views
about the supervisors’ assertiveness, responsiveness, trustworthiness,
caring/goodwill, and competence. At the same time, subordinates’ job
satisfaction and motivation declined. From this study, we can see that when
subordinates view a supervisor as highly manipulative, negative consequences
ensue for the organization.
Another study by Jason Teven, this time with Julie Winters, examined the
Machiavellianism of pharmaceutical sales representatives. [11] The
pharmaceutical industry relies heavily on sales reps to interact with prescribing
physicians. One of our coauthors worked for a medical school to oversee
medical education in a hospital. Part of his job was being the gatekeeper between
pharmaceutical sales representatives and the medical residents and students. He
interacted every day with at least two or three representatives, who often brought
drinks, snacks, and other tokens of appreciation. Indeed, though pharmaceutical
sales representatives cannot technically do anything that is not “educational,”
elaborate parties or retreats can be justified if, say, a one-hour mandatory lecture
is thrown in. Ordinarily though, pharmaceutical sales representatives often have
only a few minutes to make an impression, educate a physician, and convince
the physician to prescribe the company’s product. And since pharmaceutical
sales is a highly competitive business that depends on face-to-face selling,
Machiavellian sales reps tend to be quite successful. In the Teven and Winters
study, highly Machiavellian pharmaceutical representatives tended to be
physically attractive and use humor in their sales interactions but also saw
themselves as less caring and less responsive in their interactions with
physicians. Overall, Machiavellians reported higher sales numbers than people
with low Machiavellian scores.
Jennifer Becker and Dan O’Hair examined how Machiavellianism related to
organizational citizenship behaviors and impression management. [12]
Organizational citizenship behavior (OCB) can be defined as “acts of
cooperation, helpfulness, suggestions, gestures of goodwill, altruism, and other
instances” of prosocial behavior in the workplace. [13] OCBs can be divided into
two basic types: individual and organization. OCB-Individual refers to behaviors
that facilitate harmonious relationships with organizational stakeholders. OCB-
Organizational comprises behaviors that benefit the organization. [14] As
discussed in Chapter 10, impression management is the process (either conscious
or unconscious) in which an individual deliberately attempts to influence the
perceptions and opinions of others. In the Becker and O’Hair study, high
Machiavellians engaged in fewer OCBs and were more likely to use impression
management with coworkers, followers, and leaders. In essence, although high
Machiavellians may pretend to care about the organization when necessary
(through impression management), they are really more self-focused and do not
demonstrate specific organizational-involvement behaviors unless there is a clear
direct benefit.
Extreme Careerism
Daniel Feldman [15] introduced the term new careerism to explain the
“propensity to pursue career advancement through nonperformance-based
means.” [16]
Feldman and Weitz ultimately argued that promotions and advancement within
an organization have less to do with competence and integrity than with an
individual’s careerist orientation and ability to “manage” the system.
Virginia Bratton and Michele Kacmar took the notion of a careerist orientation
one step further when they called for research on “extreme careerism.” [17] Both
“new careerism” and “extreme careerism” are strongly built on the foundation of
impression management. (For more on impression management, see Chapter
10.) Extreme careerism tends to promote use of negative impression-
management tactics to help one get ahead in the workplace. Figure 13.7
illustrates the basic model proposed by Bratton and Kacmar.
Figure 13.7 Extreme Careerism
The top row of this model reflects the basic ideas of extreme careerism, and the
bottom box represents the various outcomes, positive or negative, that could
occur as a result of extreme careerism. Let’s look at each of these boxes
separately.
Negative Impression Management Tactics
Bratton and Kacmar discuss five specific communicative behaviors involved in
negative impression management: (1) blaming, (2) taking credit for someone
else’s work, (3) discrediting, (4) intimidation, and (5) negative projection. [18]
Blaming
The first negative impression management tactic that extreme careerists employ
is blaming. Blaming is generally the result of a negative predicament, or “event
that causes others to doubt the background, personality, behavior, ability, or
intentions of the actor.” [19] So if a project goes off the rails in an organization,
the first tactic an extreme careerist will use is to admit the project has gone off
the rails and point the finger at someone else as the cause. Blaming others not
only helps protect the extreme careerist’s reputation but also harms the
reputation of a coworker.
Taking Credit for Someone Else’s Work
The second negative impression management tactic an extreme careerist can
employ is taking credit for someone else’s work. Generally speaking, this form
of negative impression management comes after a project is a success. The
extreme careerist will exaggerate her or his involvement in the project’s success
to bolster her or his reputation in the eyes of upper management. When an
extreme careerist puts her or his name on a project early, it can prevent others
from taking credit for their own work.
Discrediting
Discrediting someone is not an act in and of itself; rather, it is the effect that
happens after a specific communication act. According to Francesca D’Errico,
Isabella Poggi, and Laura Vincze, discrediting can be defined as “the spoiling of
a person B’s image before other people C, caused, either deliberately or not, by
another person A through performing communicative acts that mention or point
at actions or qualities of B that are considered negative by the third party C.” [20] Thus discrediting occurs when an extreme careerist goes out of the way to
injure a coworker’s reputation by downplaying the latter’s positive qualities.
Although an extreme careerist may discredit a coworker, a leader can discredit a
follower if he or she feels that the follower is a potential rival.
D’Errico, Poggi, and Vinzce posited three common communication tactics used
to discredit: (1) criticism, (2) accusation, and (3) insult. First, criticism is
defined as a communicative act whereby an extreme careerist purposely casts
another as having done something wrong or bad. When a misspelling occurs in a
PowerPoint presentation, an extreme careerist will make sure to point it out to
everyone. Second, an accusation is defined as a communicative act whereby an
extreme careerist claims that someone has acted wrongly or badly. Notice that
accusations are not corrections but are statements of wrongdoing. A supervisor
sees someone take supplies from the supply cabinet and publicly confronts the
person, saying that he or she is taking the supplies for their personal or home use
(with or without any evidence of the intent of the action). Lastly, an insult is a
communicative act whereby an extreme careerist claims that someone belongs to
a group of people who are subject to negative evaluations. The insult may not
actually say that the target belongs to the group; rather, the insult may suggest
the target possesses characteristics of people who belong to the disfavored
group. During a meeting, an extreme careerist points out that a coworker grew
up in foster care, and “you know how challenged those people are as adults.” Or
maybe the extreme careerist would state it more indirectly, “With the way he
acts, you would think he was raised by a cult.” In both cases, the extreme
careerist is attempting to deride the coworker. “Moreover, the insulter has the
goal not only to communicate to others how bad or dangerous the other person
is, but also to communicate his intention of offending him, that is, to publicly
spoil his image, and even, to spoil his self-image: to let him feel disgusted of
himself.” [21]
Intimidation
Bratton and Kacmar discuss two different roles that people can adopt to get what
they want. Ingratiators seek to gain influence by using rewards, expertise, or
others’ desire to be like them. Intimidators, on the other hand, are more likely to
use punishment, fear, threats, and the authority of their hierarchical positions to
get what they want. More often than not, intimidators focus their pressure
downward within the hierarchy. Of course, some intimidators may be
subordinates who, for example, threaten to quit or file a lawsuit—though such
tactics can be risky, result in negative consequences, and not achieve the original
desire. According to Bratton and Kacmar, intimidation impression-management
tactics are used for four reasons: to (1) obtain agreement from others, (2) protect
or defend one’s reputation, (3) get social rewards, and (4) fulfill interpersonal
objectives (when a positive image won’t work).
Negative Projection
The final form of negative impression management, negative projection, occurs
when the extreme careerist exaggerates obstacles he or she has overcome to
complete a project or otherwise seeks to avoid negative consequences. An
extreme careerist would talk about all the personal and organizational problems
that interfered with completion of a task, so that getting it completed (even if it’s
late) is a great accomplishment and a testament to the careerist. If an extreme
careerist has to deliver a sales pitch and falls flat on her face, the careerist will
try to explain it away because she was sick, didn’t get the right materials in time,
or was too tired because her flight came in late. Other extreme careerists will
even sabotage themselves to get out of doing an unwanted assignment—for
example, by claiming a horrible cold to avoid having to recruit new clients. This
self-handicapping helps extreme careerists avoid tasks for which their skills are
weak and thus helps maintain their golden image within an organization.
Contextual Variables
Individuals find themselves in a variety of organizational contexts that can
influence behavior. Bratton and Kacmar proposed three basic contextual
variables: (1) ambiguity/uncertainty, (2) accountability, and (3) nature of
previous outcomes.
Ambiguity/Uncertainty
Ambiguity and uncertainty stem from a lack of clarity in an organization. When
an organization has vague policies that seem to change depending on who is
interpreting them, employees experience ambiguity. Employees in a chaotic
organization experience uncertainty when they cannot predict from day to day
how leaders, coworkers, and followers will behave. The more ambiguity and
uncertainty that exist in an organization—especially with performance appraisals
or promotions—the more likely people will look for alternative methods of
getting ahead. Bratton and Kacmar believe the most likely outcome is that
individuals in these organizations will turn to negative impression management
behaviors, such as discrediting coworkers to make themselves seem more
competent and productive by comparison.
Accountability
Being held accountable for one’s actions at work can be a powerful motivator.
But there could be a downside as well. If workers feel threatened by
accountability, they could engage in impression management tactics that are
defensive or protective because they want to ensure that their superiors see them
in a positive light. Thus an extremely careerist office manager might intimidate
those under him to work faster and better—or else. Of course, if you’re the
person working under this extreme careerist, your life at work could be full of
counterproductive work behaviors designed to make you and others fear for your
jobs.
Nature of Outcomes
When a project seems likely to turn out badly, the extreme careerist will
probably employ negative impression management tactics to avoid being tainted
by the outcome. Thus if an extreme careerist sees a project heading over a cliff,
he or she will distance herself or himself as far from the project as humanly
possible. In essence, the extreme careerist will use negative impression
management to ensure that everyone who can listen knows that he or she is not
responsible for the negative result. On the other hand, if the result of a work
project is positive, the extreme careerist is right there to tell everyone who will
listen how vital he or she was to the project’s success.
Individual Variables
The final set of variables is labeled individual variables, or the reasons people
use negative impression management. Bratton and Kacmar proposed three
common variables: (1) propensity for political behavior, (2) career ambition, and
(3) job attitudes.
Propensity for Political Behavior
The first individual variable discussed by Bratton and Kacmar involves what
they label “propensity for political behavior.” Some people in an organization
are always driven to engage in political behavior. Gerald Ferris and Darren
Treadway argue that politics is inherently about creating, maintaining, or
changing shared meanings in an effort to produce a desired outcome that is self-
serving. [22] A number of personality traits have been shown to impact an
individual’s propensity for political behavior, including trait cynicism, [23]
Machiavellianism, [24] self-monitoring, [25] and external locus of control. [26] Not
surprisingly, all these traits are also associated with the use of negative
impression management tactics.
Career Ambition
Bratton and Kacmar argue that career ambition is ultimately the result of three
factors: (1) the desire to get ahead, (2) the proclivity to change jobs, and (3)
short-term orientations in job behaviors. First, extreme careerists have an
inherent desire to get ahead in the workplace. This drive to further one’s career is
inherent within the framework of an extreme careerist. However, the second
factor of career ambition is the proclivity to change jobs. Extreme careerists are
often looking for the next, best job they can land. As such, they tend to change
jobs frequently. Of course, this proclivity for changing jobs also establishes the
third factor: short-term orientations in job behaviors. If an extreme careerist will
be in a specific job for a limited amount of time, it should be no wonder that he
or she doesn’t settle in and create roots. Along with this career ambition is the
use of negative impression management behaviors, because the person doesn’t
expect to be in a specific job for very long.
Job Attitudes
The last individualistic factor involves a range of job attitudes. Bratton and
Kacmar predicted that individuals who are dissatisfied, unmotivated, show little
job involvement, and have low levels of organizational commitment are more
likely to use negative image-management techniques in the workplace. If
someone is not happy with the working environment and yet still has a desire to
climb the corporate ladder, he or she will turn to negative impression
management in an effort to paint a more promotable picture of herself or
himself.
Outcomes of Extreme Careerism
Now that we’ve examined the core of Bratton and Kacmar’s conceptualization of
extreme careerism, let’s briefly discuss some of the outcomes of these negative
impression management behaviors. Ultimately, the use of impression
management will affect all individuals within an organization. Even if the person
who uses negative impression management tactics actually gets ahead, others
will resent the extreme careerist. If this resentment festers too long, upper
management may soon become aware of what is actually happening, and the
negative impression management tactics may start to be less effective. Of course,
it’s quite possible that the extreme careerist will simply find a new
organizational home before this happens.
Negative impression management can also hurt work groups and teams in an
organization. If an extreme careerist is always taking credit for others’ work, the
latter may become less satisfied and motivated and show less organizational
commitment and productivity over time. Similarly, if an extreme careerist is
always blaming others for problems on projects, those targeted for criticism,
accusations, and insults will suffer psychologically from such bullying and,
again, become less satisfied, motivated, and committed to the organization.
Lastly, there are detrimental effects for the organization as well. If someone who
doesn’t have the skills or qualifications gets promoted over those who do, an
organization could be in for a disaster. When an extreme careerist ends up in a
leadership position, he or she may use a range of negative impression
management tactics on subordinates to create an employee abusive organization.
KEY TAKEAWAY
Employee deviance refers to behavior that violates organizational
norms and rules in a way that threatens the organization and its
members.
Organizational cynicism is the belief that an organization lacks
integrity, coupled with negative affect toward the organization,
which leads to critical and disparaging behavior. There are three
characteristics that commonly make up organizational cynicism:
belief, affect, and behaviors. Although individuals may possess
one or two of these characteristics, it’s the combination of the
three that ultimately comprises organizational cynicism.
Machiavellianism is a personality trait posed by Richard Christie
and Florence Geis based on Niccolò Machiavelli’s The Prince, in
which cunning and deceit are exalted as a means of attaining
and/or maintaining power to accomplish specific self-centered
goals. Research in organizational communication has found that
subordinate perceptions of supervisor Machiavellianism lead to a
number of negative outcomes (e.g., decreased perceptions of
supervisor credibility, decreased affect toward supervisor, and
decreased job satisfaction/employee motivation). Employee levels
of Machiavellianism have been shown to increase sales in the
pharmaceutical industry but are negatively linked to organizational
citizenship behavior.
Extreme careerism is the promotion of negative impression
management tactics to help one get ahead in the workplace.
Virginia Bratton and Michele Kacmar believe that extreme
careerism occurs as a result of both contextual
(ambiguity/uncertainty, accountability, and nature of previous
outcomes) and individual (propensity for political behavior, career
ambition, and job attitudes) variables. These two factors ultimately
determine if an individual will utilize negative impression
management tactics (blaming, taking credit for someone else’s
Extreme Careerism:
Ingratiators :
work, discrediting, intimidation, and negative projection) in an
attempt to get ahead within the organization. Ultimately, extreme
careerism has negative effects on all levels of an organization.
EXERCISES
1. Describe a time when you’ve witnessed employee deviance in
your workplace. How did you respond? How did others respond?
2. Complete Christie and Geis’s Mach IV (http://personality-
testing.info/tests/MACH-IV.php). Why did you respond the way
you did to the various items on the measure? What does your
score on the Mach IV say about your propensity toward employee
deviance in the workplace?
3. Think of a time you’ve witnessed someone being discredited in
the workplace. What communicative tactics (criticism, accusation,
and/or insult) were used? Why did you think the person doing the
discrediting used those specific communicative strategies? Were
they effective? Why or why not?
KEY TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
The promotion of negative impression-management tactics to help one get ahead in the workplace.
Individuals who seek to gain influence by using rewards, expertise, or others’ desire to be like them.
Intimidators:
Machiavellianism:
Accusation :
Criticism :
Employee Deviance:
Insult :
Negative Projection:
Organizational Cynicism:
Individuals who seek to gain influence through the use of punishment and the authority of one’s hierarchical position.
Personality trait posed by Richard Christie and Florence Geis based on the work of Niccolò Machiavelli’s The Prince, in which cunning and deceit are exalted as means of attaining and/or maintaining power to accomplish specific self-centered goals.
A communicative act used to discredit another in which an extreme careerist claims that someone has done something (an action) that is wrong or bad.
A communicative act used to discredit another in which an extreme careerist purposely casts another as having done something wrong or bad.
Employee behavior that violates organizational norms and rules in a way that threatens the organization and its members.
A communicative act used to discredit another in which an extreme careerist claims that someone belongs to a group of people who are subject to negative evaluations.
When someone exaggerates the obstacles he or she had to overcome to complete a specific project or employs a specific behavior in an effort to avoid negative consequences.
The belief that an organization lacks integrity coupled with negative affect toward the organization, which leads to critical and disparaging behavior.
[1] Robinson, S. L., & Bennett, R. J. (1997). Workplace deviance: Its
definition, its manifestations, and its causes. In R. J. Lewicki, B. H.
Sheppard, & R. Bies (Eds.), Research on negotiation in organizations
(Vol. 6, pp. 3–27). Greenwich, CT: JAI Press, p. 7.
[2] Dean, J. W., Jr., Brandes, P., & Dharwadkar, R. (1998). Organizational
cynicism. Academy of Management Review, 23, 341–352.
doi:10.5465/AMR.1998.533230
[3] Dean, J. W., Jr., Brandes, P., & Dharwadkar, R. (1998). Organizational
cynicism. Academy of Management Review, 23, 341–352, p. 345.
doi:10.5465/AMR.1998.533230
[4] Izard, C. E. (1977). Human emotions. New York, NY: Plenum Press.
[5] Dean, J. W., Jr., Brandes, P., & Dharwadkar, R. (1998). Organizational
cynicism. Academy of Management Review, 23, 341–352.
doi:10.5465/AMR.1998.533230
[6] Dean, J. W., Jr., Brandes, P., & Dharwadkar, R. (1998). Organizational
cynicism. The Academy of Management Review, 23, 341-352.
[7] A free download of The Prince may be accessed from Project
Gutenberg at http://www.gutenberg.org/files/1232/1232-h/1232-h.htm
[8] Christie, R., & Geis, F. L. (1970). Studies in Machiavellianism. New
York, NY: Academic Press.
[9] See Personality Tests, MACH-IV test of Machiavellianism,
http://personality-testing.info/tests/MACH-IV.php
[10] Teven, J. J., McCroskey, J. C., & Richmond, V. P. (2006).
Communication correlates of perceived Machiavellianism of supervisors:
Communication orientations and outcomes. Communication Quarterly,
54, 127–142.
[11] Teven, J. J., & Winters, J. L. (2007). Pharmaceutical representatives’
social influence behaviors and communication orientations: Relationships
with adaptive selling and sales performance. Human Communication, 10,
465–486.
[12] Becker, J. H., & O’Hair, H. (2007). Machiavellians’ motives in
organizational citizenship behavior. Journal of Applied Communication
Research, 35, 246–267. doi:10.1080/00909880701434232
[13] Smith, C. A., Organ, D. W., & Near, J. P. (1983). Organizational
citizenship behavior: Its nature and antecedents. Journal of Applied
Psychology, 68, 653–663.
[14] Van Dyne, L., Graham, J. W., & Dienesch, R. M. (1994).
Organizational citizenship behavior: Construct redefinition, measurement,
and validation. Academy of Management Journal, 37, 765–802.
[15] Feldman, D. (1985). The new careerism: Origins, tenets, and
consequences. The Industrial Psychologist, 22, 39–44.
[16] Feldman, D. C., & Weitz, B. A. (1991). From the invisible hand to the
gladhand: Understanding a careerist orientation to work. Human
Resource Management, 30, 237–257.
[17] Bratton, V. K., & Kacmar, K. M. (2004). Extreme careerism: The dark
side of impression management. In R. W. Griffin & A. M. O’Leary-Kelly
(Eds.), The dark side of organizational behavior (pp. 291–308). San
Francisco, CA: Jossey-Bass, p. 296.
[18] Bratton, V. K., & Kacmar, K. M. (2004). Extreme careerism: The dark
side of impression management. In R. W. Griffin & A. M. O’Leary-Kelly
(Eds.), The dark side of organizational behavior (pp. 291–308). San
Francisco, CA: Jossey-Bass, p. 296.
[19] Bratton, V. K., & Kacmar, K. M. (2004). Extreme careerism: The dark
side of impression management. In R. W. Griffin & A. M. O’Leary-Kelly
(Eds.), The dark side of organizational behavior (pp. 291–308). San
Francisco, CA: Jossey-Bass, p. 296.
[20] D’Errico, F., Poggi, I., & Vincze, L. (2012). Discrediting signals: A
model of social evaluation to study discrediting moves in political
debates. Journal of Multimodal User Interfaces, 6, 163–178, p. 166.
doi:10.1007/s12193-012-0098-4
[21] D’Errico, F., Poggi, I., & Vincze, L. (2012). Discrediting signals: A
model of social evaluation to study discrediting moves in political
debates. Journal of Multimodal User Interfaces, 6, 163–178, p. 166.
doi:10.1007/s12193-012-0098-4
[22] Ferris, G. R., & Treadway, D. C. (Eds.). (2012). Politics in
organizations: History, construct specification, and research dimensions.
In Politics in organizations: Theory and research considerations (pp. 3–
26). New York, NY: Routledge.
[23] Hochwater, W. A., James, M., Johnson, D., & Ferris, G. R. (2004).
The interactive effects of politics perceptions and trait cynicism on work
outcomes. Journal of Leadership and Organizational Studies, 10, 44–57.
[24] Adams, G. L., Treadway, D. C., & Stepina, L. P. (2008). The role of
dispositions in politics perception formation: The predictive capacity of
negative and positive affectivity, equity sensitivity, and self-efficacy.
Journal of Managerial Issues, 20, 545–563.
[25] Ferris, G. R., Russ, G. S., & Fandt, P. M. (1990). Politics in
organizations. In R. A. Giacalone, & P. L. E. Rosendfeld (Eds.),
Impression management in the organization (pp. 143–170). Hillsdale, NJ:
Lawrence Erlbaum.
[26] Ferris, G. R., Brand, J. F., Brand, S., Rowland, K. M., Gilmore, D. C.,
King, T. R.,…& Burton, C. A. (1993). Politics and control in organizations.
Advances in Group Processes, 10, 83–111.
13.4 Outcomes of the Dark Side
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
1. Explain the relationship between social exchange theory and
organizational justice.
2. Differentiate among the three types of organizational justice and
their relationships to counterproductive workplace behavior.
3. Define workplace retaliatory behavior
4. Describe workplace alienation and its importance in retaliation.
5. Differentiate between workplace alienation and organizational
shunning.
Thus far, this chapter has discussed an array of counterproductive workplace
behaviors. This final section examines two major outcomes of these behaviors.
Specifically, we will examine issues of organizational injustice and retaliation.
Organizational Injustice
The notion of justice in the workplace was introduced in a 1949 article in the
military publication The American Soldier. [1] In this monograph, researchers
asked soldiers returning home from World War II, “In general, have you gotten a
square deal from the Army?” [2] The results indicated that the rate in which
soldiers were promoted through the army impacted how they perceived the army
itself. Those who had been more slowly promoted through the ranks (compared
to others of equal tenure within the army) were the most critical of their
experience. To help us further explore the concept, we’ll examine the three types
of organizational justice, the relationship between organizational communication
and justice, and the basic outcomes when employees perceive their organizations
as either just or unjust.
Three Types of Organizational Justice
Although the 1949 article in The American Soldier was important in starting the
discussion, the first real theorist in the area of organizational justice was George
Homans. In 1958, he suggested a new way of understanding why people behave
the way they do. His theory is now commonly referred to as social exchange
theory. [3] The premise of social exchange theory consists of four basic parts:
1. In any given situation, individuals have multiple actions they could choose.
2. Each action inherently comes with a set of costs and rewards.
3. Homans argued that humans are inherently hedonistic or selfish and will
attempt to maximize rewards while minimizing costs.
4. People will do their best to maximize profits through the behaviors they
choose (profits = rewards – costs).
Let’s look at a brief example. Imagine you’re in a job where you are getting
bullied. You have basically two options: leave or stay. If you leave, you could
get rewards (e.g., no more bullying), but there are inherent costs (e.g.,
unemployment, fear of the unknown). If you stay, there are rewards (e.g., job
stability, income) but also costs (e.g., keep getting bullied, stress, physiological
effects of bullying). Social exchange theory holds that you will look at the
potential rewards for staying in your job and subtract the costs. If you believe
that the rewards of staying are greater, then you’ll suck it up and keep your job.
Based on social exchange theory, Homans believed that justice in the workplace
was ultimately about this exchange relationship. Now that we’ve examined the
theoretical basis of organizational justice in its original conceptualization, let’s
examine the three types of organizational justice: distributive, procedural, and
interactional.
Distributive Justice
Homans was the first to truly articulate the notion of distributive justice. [4] He
applied social exchange theory to the workplace and noted that individuals are in
an exchange relationship with their employers. Within the workplace, individual
members look at one another: Is one group of people getting more from the
exchange relationship than others? Are organization leaders clearly favoring one
group? Are these favors outside established organizational norms? Imagine that
you’re working for an airline as ground crew. You’re constantly working around
heavy machinery (planes), and you feel a real sense of danger by being on the
tarmac all day (a cost). If you find out that the ticket agents inside the nice air-
conditioned terminal are making more money than you do (reward), then you
may perceive this as unjust, because as a member of the ground crew, you
clearly have the greater potential of costs than someone working in an air-
conditioned environment devoid of serious risk. If you feel you are taking on
more risk (cost) and yet receiving less pay (reward), you may start to see the
airline as unjust in its salary procedures.
Injustice occurs when individuals perceive they are putting more into their jobs
than they are getting back. Imagine now that you work for a customer service
call center. If your quota is twenty calls per hour and the person next to you is
taking only five, you would expect to make more than that other person. If you
two are receiving the same salary, even though you’re doing considerably more
work, you’ll start to see the organization as unjust. Homans argued that people
who perceive an organization as unjust will either forgo the exchange
relationship (voluntarily quit) or attempt to negotiate a more profitable bargain. [5]
Procedural Justice
John Thibaut and Laurens Walker expanded the notion of justice in the
workplace by introducing the concept of procedural justice. [6] The original
monograph published by Thibaut and Walker reported five years of research on
the fairness of legal-dispute resolutions. Comparing different types of legal
proceedings, they concluded that the supposed “fairness” of the system is
governed by what people perceive to be fair. Gerald Leventhal took Thibaut and
Walker’s research one step further and argued that procedural justice is a second
category in the justice world. [7] He defined procedural justice as “an individual’s
belief that allocative procedures which satisfy certain criteria are fair and
appropriate.” [8] Leventhal’s greatest contribution is probably his six rules of fair
procedures:
1. Consistency. Procedures should not vary across time and across persons.
2. Bias suppression. Procedures should be followed without thoughts of self-
interest or preexisting perceptions.
3. Accuracy. Procedures should be based on timely and current information to
form an accurate opinion with little chance for error.
4. Correctability. Procedures should have an appeal process when grievances
arise to modify and change decisions when appropriate.
5. Representativeness. Procedures should include a range of stakeholder input,
especially when allocation procedures involve specific individuals and
groups.
6. Ethicality. Procedures should be created in a manner that is consistent with
business ethics (e.g., truthfulness, clarity, transparency). [9]
Procedural justice is applied to organizational settings because of the notion of
allocation. In any organization, there are processes for allocating resources and
reviewing those allocations. One area of research in procedural justice is
performance appraisals, which occur when a senior organization member
provides feedback to a follower about job performance. In many organizations,
leaders may have followers they always favor with glowing performance
appraisals that lack any kind of critique. On the other hand, other followers may
be constantly criticized for every little thing they do. This lack of consistency
and clear favoritism is an example of a procedure (performance appraisal) not
being handled in a fair manner. Clearly, Leventhal’s notions of both consistency
and bias suppression would have been violated in this case.
Interactional Justice
The third form of justice identified by researchers is interactional justice. This
is the form of justice most interesting to communication scholars because of its
inherently communicative nature. Robert Bies and Joseph Moag first introduced
the notion of interactional justice because of conversations Bies was hearing
among students while working on his PhD. [10] As the story goes, Bies kept
hearing students complain that faculty were rude or misleading when discussing
course expectations. Although these statements sounded procedural in
orientation, most were clearly coupled with perceptions of interpersonal
interactions in the classroom. In their first piece on the subject of interactional
justice, Bies and Moag introduced the concept thus: “Concerns about the fairness
of interpersonal communication are representative of a set of issues dealing with
what we refer to as interactional justice. By interactional justice we mean that
people are sensitive to the quality of interpersonal treatment they receive during
the enactment of organizational procedures.” [11] Drawing on an unpublished
study by Bies, [12] Bies and Moag identified four rules for interactional justice:
1. Truthfulness. Leaders should be candid, honest, and open about the
decision-making process and procedures to avoid any perception of
deception.
2. Justification. Leaders should clearly explain how decision making is done
and how the process led to specific outcomes.
3. Respect. Leaders should treat all followers with dignity and genuineness
while avoiding any hostile communicative choices (e.g., verbal aggression,
rudeness).
4. Propriety. Leaders should avoid any forms of prejudicial or discriminatory
comments or asking questions that are inappropriate in the workplace. [13]
In subsequent research, Bies added timely feedback and consideration of
employee views to his list of behaviors that constitute interactional justice. [14]
Communication and Justice
A number of studies have explored how organizational communication variables
relate to perceptions of organizational justice. Rebecca Chory and Anne Hubbell,
for example, looked at the relationship between organizational justice and
employee trust of management. Their study examined whether or not employees
felt their most recent performance appraisals were just and how this perception
of justice impacted employee perceptions of managerial and organizational trust.
The results indicated that, yes, all three forms of justice—distributive,
procedural, and interactional—were related to both managerial and
organizational trust. Thus if you believe that performance appraisals and
resulting raises are biased, the process of your appraisal was unfair, and your
supervisor communicated with you in an unfair manner, then you aren’t going to
feel that your organization or manager is trustworthy. As discussed in multiple
places in this book, trustworthiness of a manager and organization is important
to employee morale, job satisfaction, and productivity.
In a second study, Rebecca Chory and Katherine Kingsley-Westerman wanted to
further clarify the impact of performance appraisals on perceptions of justice. [15]
To aid in this deeper analysis, they used the four dimensions of employer
feedback proposed by Deanna Geddes and Frank Linnehan—namely, clarity
(explicit versus ambiguous), constructiveness (constructive versus destructive
criticism), cognizance (informed versus uninformed feedback), and consistency
(clear versus inconsistent standards). [16] Chory and Kingsley-Westerman’s study
indicated that individuals who were provided with clear, constructive, informed,
consistent feedback (even when negative) perceived higher levels of
organizational justice. By contrast, individuals who received ambiguous,
destructive criticism that was clearly uninformed and inconsistently evaluated
perceived that the feedback provider was unjust.
Jeffrey Kassing and Zachary McDowell examined the relationship between
organizational justice and organizational dissent. [17] (For more on organizational
justice, see Chapter 4.) Their study compared managers with nonmanagers and
looked at how each group expressed dissent. Individuals in management
positions who perceived the organization as procedurally and interactionally just
were more likely to use upward dissent and less likely to use displaced dissent.
On the other hand, individuals in nonmanagerial positions who perceived their
organizations as just were not more likely to express upward dissent, but they
were less likely to express both latent and displaced dissent. In essence, this
study shows that perceptions of organizational justice have differing results
depending on whether an individual is in a management or nonmanagement
position.
Outcomes of Injustice
Much research has been conducted on the importance of organizational justice in
an organization. Table 13.4 lists just some of the major findings.
Table 13.4 Organizational Justice Outcomes
Organizational Justice Organizational Injustice
Job performance
Major counterproductive work behaviors:
• theft
• white-collar crimes
• tardiness
• sexual harassment
• verbal and physical abuse
Minor counterproductive work behaviors:
Trust in one's supervisor • taking office supplies for personal use
• using sick leave when healthy
Trust in one's organization Occupational stress
Subordinate decision acceptance Posttermination (firing or laid off) claim filing
Organizational commitment Turnover intentions
Productivity Employee absenteeism
Organizational citizenship behaviors Negative emotional displays at work
Perceptions of ethical leadership Consumer complaint behavior
Employee ethical behavior
Physiological problems
• depression
• emotional exhaustion
• negative perceptions of one’s own health
• minor psychiatric disorders
Pay-level satisfaction Workplace deviance
Social capital
Workplace bullyingEmployee empowerment
Organizational identification
When analyzing these two lists, remember that most of these results come from
studies based on questionnaires. The results are generally correlative and not
causal in nature—in other words, perceptions that an organization is just or
unjust are related to, but not necessarily the cause of, certain organizational
outcomes. Thus although we can say that there is a relationship between
perceptions of organizational injustice and workplace bullying, we cannot
conclude that the injustice causes the bullying or vice versa. Hopefully, by this
point, you can recognize that most counterproductive workplace behaviors
described earlier in this chapter will negatively impact people’s perceptions of
justice in the organization.
Retaliatory Behavior
When an individual in an organization violates rules or norms, it’s not
uncommon for others to feel that person should be punished. If someone
knowingly or unknowingly violates expectations for how organization members
should behave and communicate, that person may be subjected to what is called
retaliatory behavior. According to Daniel Skarlicki and Robert Folger,
“Retaliation refers to a person’s orientation and motivation to ‘make the
wrongdoer pay’ that is targeted toward a social actor called a transgressor. A
transgressor is someone who is accountably associated with a transgression—an
event that harms or jeopardizes a victim in some sense meaningful to the
perceiver.” [18]
In the organizational world, transgressors can resemble any of the basic
stakeholders in an organization: coworkers, leaders, boards, even entire
industries. Now, not all retaliatory behavior is negative. For example, when the
public learns an organization is knowingly polluting local water supplies, you
can be sure there will be retaliation in the form of lawsuits and protests.
Skarlicki and Folger defined organizational retaliatory behavior as “adverse
reactions to perceived unfairness by disgruntled employees toward their
employer.” [19] Their research suggests that many forms of organizational
retaliatory behavior commonly occur in the workplace:
Purposefully damaging equipment or work processes
Taking supplies home without permission
Wasting company materials
Calling in sick when not ill
Speaking poorly about the company to others
Refusing to work weekends or overtime when asked
Failing to clean up and leaving an unnecessary mess
Disobeying supervisory instructions
Talking back to a boss
Gossiping about the boss
Spreading rumors about coworkers
Giving a coworker the “silent treatment”
Withholding required information from coworkers
Trying to look busy while wasting time
Taking an extended coffee or lunch break
Intentionally working slower
Spending time on personal matters while at work [20]
According to Sharlicki and Folger, such retaliatory actions serve five functions: [21] (1) Retaliatory behavior can help restore a material balance between
individuals; if a coworker feels wronged, retaliation balances out the scorecard.
(2) Retaliation can help educate offenders who have been caught breaking
organizational norms or rules. (3) Retaliation can help restore perceived justice;
if an employee is yelled at unjustly by a manager, he or she may engage in
retaliatory behavior as a way to make up for the perceived injustice. (4) If
someone’s counterproductive workplace behavior threatens organizational
resources (e.g., embezzling, stealing, inappropriate time management),
coworkers may be outraged and feel a need to retaliate against that individual.
(5) If a coworker threatens the larger organizational culture or social values of an
organization or the larger society, individuals may feel it necessary to retaliate in
an effort to ensure that the rules and norms are not further violated.
When workplace retaliation gets too problematic, however, it can lead to a range
of other behaviors designed to isolate and ostracize the individual from the larger
collective. Let’s examine two types of ostracizing behaviors commonly found in
organizations: workplace alienation and organizational shunning.
Workplace Alienation
Robert Blauner was the first scholar to really take up the notion of workplace
alienation. [22] Jeffrey Leiter expanded on Blauner’s research by noting four
ways that alienation can happen in the workplace: powerlessness,
meaninglessness, social isolation, and self-estrangement. [23]
First, Blauner noticed that some employees experience a sense of powerlessness
as a result of workplace alienation. Powerlessness generally manifests in two
forms: rhythm of work and quality/technique of work. Rhythm of work refers
to the speed at which one is expected to work and one’s physical movements
while at work. Quality/technique of work generally refers to someone being
ordered to perform work a certain way and to a certain level of quality (you can
think of this as micromanagement).
Second, Blauner demonstrated that workers can become alienated as they
perceive the work to be meaningless. By meaningless, Blauner referred to the
extent an individual feels connected to an organization, its processes, and its
products or services. Workers who feel they aren’t being given new and
challenging tasks may perceive the working environment as taxing and mind
numbing. One of our coauthors had a student who was hired to work for a
company that made the plastic lids that go on the top of soda products. Her job
was to look for defects as the lids came off the line and then stack them in a box.
Can you imagine stacking plastic lids in a box for eight hours with only two
twenty-minute breaks? The student lasted a week.
Third, individuals can feel alienated from an organization when they feel
socially ostracized from other organization members. Such ostracism, Blauner
posited, can happen on two fronts. Bureaucratic structures may prevent social
interaction or punish individuals who interact “too much” with coworkers. One
of our coauthors was working in a hospital setting when the CEO informed the
staff that he didn’t like them gathering in the morning around the coffeepot. It
looked to him as though they didn’t have enough work to do. From that moment
on, the workers became increasingly hostile toward the CEO. In addition,
however, workers themselves can socially ostracize those with whom they have
a problem.
Ostracism is the exclusion of someone from a group. In the case of
organizations, social ostracism can be passive or active. Passive ostracism occurs
when individuals are simply left out of group social interactions with no
malicious intent; active ostracism occurs when coworkers purposely isolate
someone from social interactions. Thus, for example, all the employees decide to
go out together for lunch but neglect to invite a new employee (passive
ostracism) and pointedly snub the extreme careerist in their midst (active
ostracism).
Patricia Sias and Tara Perry [24] proposed three categories for active ostracism:
depersonalization, state-of-the-relationship talk, and cost escalation.
Depersonalization is the “tactics an individual uses to avoid interaction regarding
personal issues with a coworker and socializing with a coworker outside of
work.” [25] Examples might include decreasing the amount of casual
communication with a coworker, increasing distance at work, and not “hanging
out” with the coworker after work. State-of-the-relationship talk is the “tactics an
individual uses to directly discuss the nature of the relationship and its
impending transformation to something else.” [26] Examples might include
telling the coworker the relationship is over, explaining the changing nature of
the relationship to the coworker, and discussing the relationship directly with the
coworker. Lastly, cost escalation is the “tactics an individual uses when behaving
in an intentionally negative way toward a relationship partner.” [27] Examples
might include talking to the coworker in a condescending tone, criticizing the
coworker, and talking about the coworker behind her or his back.
The final form of workplace alienation is self-estrangement, which occurs when
individuals mentally alienate themselves from their work and their coworkers.
Blauner explained that when a job doesn’t allow someone to express her or his
“unique abilities, potentialities, or personality of the coworker,” she or he won’t
be satisfied. [28] Ultimately, these workers see work as a means of making a
living (similar to the organizational orientation of indifference discussed in
Chapter 10).
Organizational Shunning
More recently, “organizational shunning” has been identified as an outcome of
counterproductive workplace behaviors. Howard Zimmerle coined the term to
describe what occurs when an employee or group of employees purposely cuts
off a coworker from all forms of communication. [29] Quite often, the shunning
starts with one individual who then encourages others to join the shunning
bandwagon. Obviously, a shunned coworker is cut off from both social
interactions and the information that is necessary to do her or his job. Zimmerle
argued that shunning should fall under Title VII of the Civil Rights Act of 1964,
which prohibits employment discrimination based on race, color, religion, sex,
and national origin. However, case law on this subject has been mixed.
Janice Anderson, on the other hand, sees organizational shunning as something
more inherently problematic and the outcome of employee abusive
organizations. [30] According to Anderson, “Organizational shunning, this
analysis indicates, is not a passive process marked only by the absence of
tangible rewards, recognition, or interaction. Instead, shunning is marked by the
presence of specific symbolic constructions which systematically distort
communication, creating ‘morality tales’ that vividly illustrate the consequences
of questioning the deep structure of power relationships within a discourse
community.” [31]
From this perspective, organizational shunning occurs slowly over time. In fact,
from the interviews that Anderson conducted, most shunned coworkers could
not point to a single defining moment that initiated the shunning process.
Instead, the shunning happened over a period of time until, suddenly, the
individual clearly realized that he or she was an outsider looking in. The basic
process of shunning is an interesting one and highly tied to critical perspectives
on organizational communication. In essence, an organization member violates
rules or norms, typically in the form of questioning the deep structures that exist
within the organization (see the discussion of critical theory in Chapter 4).
Obviously, organizations and their members like equilibrium. When someone
dares to question the prevailing, dominant views of the structures in the
organization, that individual is seen as a threat to the organization itself.
Consider an example we used in Chapter 4. If someone complains that the
annual employee awards luncheon is really a sham that only celebrates values
that perpetuate management interests, coworkers who look forward to the event
may ask why the “malcontent” can’t just relax and join in the fun (plus the free
food and time off from work). Over time, the “outliers” who question the
organization’s basic assumptions become ostracized and eventually shunned.
The shunning part is less about the person being shunned and more about acting
out a morality tale for others. Think of the example in The Scarlet Letter by
Nathaniel Hawthorne. In the novel, Hester Prynne has a child out of wedlock.
Because Hester was not married, she was forced to wear a scarlet letter “A” on
her chest indicating that she was an adulteress. The scarlet letter is less a
reminder for Hester Prynne than it is a reminder for all those around Hester
about the ramifications of adultery within Puritan society. In the same way,
shunned members in an organization become highly symbolic tales of what
happens to someone who dares violate the sanctity of deep organizational
structures. In this way, older organization members can socialize new and
younger members by pointing to the shunned member as a case study of what
happens if they “get out of line.”
KEY TAKEAWAY
George Homans proposed social exchange theory as a way to
understand why people make specific choices. The theory
consists of four basic tenets: (1) in any given situation, individuals
have multiple actions they could choose, (2) action inherently
comes with a set of costs and rewards, (3) humans are inherently
selfish and want to maximize rewards while minimizing costs, and
(4) humans try to maximize profits (profits = rewards – costs).
From this notion, Homans argued that when individuals work, they
expect the rewards from their work to be greater than the
perceived costs. Furthermore, people expected to receive greater
rewards for harder (or more dangerous) work.
There are three basic forms of organizational justice: (1)
distributive, (2) procedural, and (3) interactional. Distributive
justice refers to Homans’s original idea that individuals in a work
environment expect their rewards to be greater than their costs.
Procedural justice refers to worker perceptions of whether or not
organizational policies and procedures are applied in consistent,
unbiased ways. Interactional justice refers to the degree to which
someone is treated with dignity, sensitivity, and respect during the
decision-making process. Organizations perceived as unjust lead
to a number of negative outcomes for the organization (e.g.,
counterproductive workplace behavior, absenteeism, turnover,
workplace bullying). Organizations perceived as just lead to a
number of positive outcomes for the organization (e.g., ethical
behavior, productivity, organizational citizenship behaviors, trust).
Organizational retaliatory behavior refers to adverse reactions
taken by disgruntled employees in response to a perceived injury
or wrongdoing to an organization and/or its members by another
organization member.
Workplace alienation refers to an individual’s perception of
powerlessness or separation from the organization and its
members. There are four common forms of workplace alienation:
powerlessness (rhythm of work and quality of work),
meaninglessness (connection to work and products/services),
social isolation (ostracism), and self-estrangement (personal
decision to isolate oneself).
Organizational shunning occurs when an organization member
violates rules or norms, typically in the form of questioning the
deep structures that exist within the organization. Shunned
members within an organization become highly symbolic morality
tales of what happens to someone who dares violate the sanctity
of organizational deep structures. Shunning differs from
workplace alienation because of the morality-tale function of the
shunning.
Quality/Technique Of Work:
Rhythm Of Work:
Distributive Justice:
Interactional Justice:
Meaningless:
Organizational Retaliatory Behavior:
EXERCISES
1. Listen to the podcast interview with Joel
Brockner (http://tinyurl.com/mqxdvoq) as he discusses his
research on procedural fairness (justice). After listening to the
podcast, how can you apply Dr. Brockner’s research to your
organization? Why do you think some organizations have a
problem understanding the importance of procedural justice?
2. Do you agree with the differentiation between the concepts of
workplace alienation and shunning? Why or why not? How would
you reframe this difference?
KEY TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
The degree to which someone is clearly dictated how work should be completed and to what level of quality.
The speed at which one is expected to work and one’s physical movements while at work.
The apportionment of rewards is maximized in comparison to the perceived costs.
The degree to which someone is treated with dignity, sensitivity, and respect during the decision-making process.
Factor leading to workplace alienation based on the extent to which an individual feels connected with organizational products/services and processes along with general identification with the organization.
Adverse reactions of disgruntled employees in response to a perceived injury or wrongdoing to an
Ostracism:
Procedural Justice:
Self-Estrangement:
Social Isolation:
Stress:
Workplace Alienation:
organization and/or its members by another organization member.
Exclusion of an organization member by other members from social acceptance, which occurs as a result of organizational structures or perceived wrongdoing of the organization member.
The idea that the processes and decision making involved in resolving disputes and allocating resources is fair.
Factor leading to workplace alienation in which someone mentally alienates herself or himself from the work at hand and from coworkers.
Factor leading to workplace alienation in which an individual is separated from the rest of the organization members.
The cognitive, affective, or physical strain or tension producing mental tension or physiological reactions that disturb the body’s normal state of functioning.
Perception of powerlessness or separation from one’s organization and its members.
[1] Stouffer, S. A., Suchman, E. A., DeVinney, L. C., Star, S. A., &
Williams, R. M., Jr. (1949). The American soldier: Adjustment during
army life, Volume 1. Clinton, MA: Colonial Press.
[2] Stouffer, S. A., Suchman, E. A., DeVinney, L. C., Star, S. A., &
Williams, R. M., Jr. (1949). The American soldier: Adjustment during
army life, Volume 1. Clinton, MA: Colonial Press, p. 230.
[3] Homans, G. C. (1958). Social behavior as exchange. American
Journal of Sociology, 63, 597–606.
[4] Homans, G. C. (1958). Social behavior as exchange. American
Journal of Sociology, 63, 597–606.
[5] Homans, G. C. (1961). Social behavior: Its elementary forms. London,
UK: Routledge & Kegan Paul.
[6] Thibaut, J., & Walker, L. (1975). Procedural justice: A psychological
analysis. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum.
[7] Leventhall, G. S. (1976). Fairness in social relationships. In J. W.
Thibaut, J. T. Spence, and R. C. Carson (Eds.), Contemporary topics in
social psychology (pp. 211–239). Morristown, NJ: General Learning
Press.
[8] Leventhal, G. S. (1980). What should be done with equity theory?
New approaches to the study of fairness in social relationships. In K.
Gergen, M. Greenberg, & R. Willis (Eds.), Social exchange: Advances in
theory and research (pp. 27–55). New York, NY: Plenum Press, p. 30.
[9] Leventhal, G. S. (1980). What should be done with equity theory?
New approaches to the study of fairness in social relationships. In K.
Gergen, M. Greenberg, & R. Willis (Eds.), Social exchange: Advances in
theory and research (pp. 27–55). New York, NY: Plenum Press, p. 30.
[10] Colquitt, J. A., Greenberg, J., & Zapata-Phelan, C. P. (2005). What is
organizational justice? A historical overview. In J. Greenberg & J. A.
Colquitt (Eds.), Handbook of organizational justice (pp. 3–56). Mahwah,
NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum.
[11] Bies, R. J., & Moag, J. S. (1986). Interactional justice:
Communication criteria of fairness. In R. J. Lewicki, B. H. Sheppard, & M.
G. Bazerman (Eds.), Research on negotiations in organizations (Vol. 1,
pp. 43–55). Greenwich, CT: JAI Press, p. 44. Emphasis in original.
[12] Bies, R. J. (1986). Individual reactions to corporate recruiting
encounters: The importance of fairness. Unpublished manuscript cited in
Bies, R. J., & Moag, J. S. (1986). Interactional justice: Communication
criteria of fairness. In R. J. Lewicki, B. H. Sheppard, & M. G. Bazerman
(Eds.), Research on negotiations in organizations (Vol. 1, pp. 43–55).
Greenwich, CT: JAI Press.
[13] Bies, R. J., & Moag, J. S. (1986). Interactional justice:
Communication criteria of fairness. In R. J. Lewicki, B. H. Sheppard, & M.
G. Bazerman (Eds.), Research on negotiations in organizations (Vol. 1,
pp. 43–55). Greenwich, CT: JAI Press.
[14] Folger, R., & Bies, R. J. (1989). Managerial responsibilities and
procedural justice. Responsibilities and Rights Journal, 2, 79–89.
[15] Chory, R. M., & Kingsley-Westerman, C. Y. (2009). Feedback and
fairness: The relationship between negative performance feedback and
organizational justice. Western Journal of Communication, 73, 157–181.
doi:10.1080/10570310902856055
[16] Geddes, D., & Linnehan, F. (1996). Exploring the dimensionality of
positive and negative performance feedback. Communication Quarterly,
44, 326–344.
[17] Kassing, J. W., & McDowell, Z. J. (2008). Disagreeing about what’s
fair: Exploring the relationship between perceptions of justice and
employee dissent. Communication Research Reports, 25, 34–43.
doi:10.1080/08824090701831784
[18] Skarlicki, D. P., & Folger, R. (2004). Broadening or understanding of
organizational retaliatory behavior. In R. W. Griffin & A. M. O’Leary-Kelly
(Eds.), The dark side of organizational behavior (pp. 373–402). San
Francisco, CA: Jossey-Bass.
[19] Skarlicki, D. P., & Folger, R. (1997). Retaliation in the workplace: The
roles of distributive, procedural, and interactional justice. Journal of
Applied Psychology, 82, 434–443, p. 376. doi:10.1037/0021-
9010.82.3.434
[20] Skarlicki, D. P., & Folger, R. (1997). Retaliation in the workplace: The
roles of distributive, procedural, and interactional justice. Journal of
Applied Psychology, 82, 434–443, p. 438. doi:10.1037/0021-
9010.82.3.434
[21] Skarlicki, D. P., & Folger, R. (2004). Broadening or understanding of
organizational retaliatory behavior. In R. W. Griffin & A. M. O’Leary-Kelly
(Eds.), The dark side of organizational behavior (pp. 373–402). San
Francisco, CA: Jossey-Bass.
[22] Blauner, R. (1964). Alienation and freedom: The factory worker and
his industry. Chicago, IL: University of Chicago Press.
[23] Leiter, J. (1985). Work alienation in the textile industry: Reassessing
Blauner. Work and Occupations, 12, 479–498.
[24] Sias, P. M., & Perry, T. (2004). Disengaging from workplace
relationships: A research note. Human Communication Research, 30,
589–602.
[25] Sias, P. M., & Perry, T. (2004). Disengaging from workplace
relationships: A research note. Human Communication Research, 30,
589–602, p. 596.
[26] Sias, P. M., & Perry, T. (2004). Disengaging from workplace
relationships: A research note. Human Communication Research, 30,
589–602, p. 596.
[27] Sias, P. M., & Perry, T. (2004). Disengaging from workplace
relationships: A research note. Human Communication Research, 30,
589–602, p. 596.
[28] Blauner, R. (1964). Alienation and freedom: The factory worker and
his industry. Chicago, IL: University of Chicago Press, p. 26.
[29] Zimmerle, H. (2005). Common sense v. the EEOC: Co-worker
ostracism and shunning as retaliation under Title VII. Journal of
Corporation Law, 30, 627–645.
[30] Anderson, J. W. (2009). Organizational shunning: The disciplinary
functions of “non-sense.” Atlantic Journal of Communication, 17, 36–50.
doi:10.1080/15456870802506140
[31] Anderson, J. W. (2009). Organizational shunning: The disciplinary
functions of “non-sense.” Atlantic Journal of Communication, 17, 36–50,
p. 37. doi:10.1080/15456870802506140
13.5 Chapter Exercises
REAL-WORLD CASE STUDY
The following case of bullying in the workplace is based on a series
of real incidents. A few of the details have been altered to protect
the identity of the individual involved.
Candice was a top lawyer at a prestigious law firm. Although her
husband was considered the top litigator in their area of
specialization, Candice was consistently ranked in the top five and
was definitely the top female litigator. In the mid-1990s, she went to
another law firm for a brief period to try to right that ship, but the
environment was so toxic she came back to her previous firm. Even
while she had left the state to work at the other law firm, she
remained a full partner with voting rights at the previous firm.
Dan was a junior lawyer who started work at the law firm in 1999
and quickly became fast friends with Candice and her husband,
Paul. Although Dan was only a junior associate, he was quickly
asked to take on more and more cases and started working very
closely with both Candice and Paul.
The other partners in the firm were a bunch of highly driven,
testosterone-riddled men, who were second-tier litigators slowly but
surely making a name for themselves in the legal community. The
bullying started simply. When the senior leadership within the firm
underwent a change, Harold (a long-standing partner) took over the
enterprise and started assigning duties and cases. First, Harold took
Candice off cases and gave them to lawyers who weren’t even
named partners. Unfortunately, Candice had no recourse because
her and Paul’s votes in the partner meetings were outnumbered by
the younger partners. Harold even took away the day-to-day
operations of the firm’s pro bono legal office, which had been
Candice’s idea and “baby” for more than twenty years. Harold gave
the pro bono legal work to one of his underlings who had only been
with the firm for about two years, telling Candice, “We just need a
change.”
Shortly thereafter, Dan was sitting in the conference room with a
variety of male partners and nonpartners and the subject of Candice
arose. Harold was the most vicious of the group, at one point
commenting that he kept waiting to see when Candice would have a
nervous breakdown. Another lawyer proposed that the group start
placing bets and recommend they create a “crack pot” with bets
predicting when Candice would finally “crack up.”
Dan found himself later that afternoon in a meeting with Candice
and had to tell her what he’d overheard. Obviously, she was mad,
but her reaction surprised Dan. “Dan, that behavior has been going
on for years. I’m just glad they’re targeting me and not my husband.
He still thinks those jerks are his friends.”
1. Would you consider this case workplace bullying? Why or why
not?
2. What type of counterproductive work behaviors can you identify in
this case?
3. Are you surprised that this type of behavior happens in a
professional environment?
REAL-WORLD CASE STUDY
The following case of bullying in the workplace is based on a series
of real incidents. A few of the details have been altered to protect
the identity of the individual involved.
Paula was a first-year emergency medical resident working at Mercy
Hospital. She’d dreamed of becoming a physician and had gone
through medical school with an A average in addition to being
married and having two children.
On the start of her first surgical rotation, she was in for a rude
awakening. Dr. Phillys Mae was known to be cutthroat and didn’t
have much of a personality. She had no problem belittling medical
students, residents, other physicians, nurses, or her patients.
Although Dr. Mae’s personality and temperament were notoriously
problematic, she was an amazing surgeon, so pretty much everyone
just looked the other way when her people skills were called into
question.
On the first day Paula worked with Dr. Mae, Dr. Mae asked her to
present the case. Paula took the medical chart from the bed and
quickly started summarizing the case, “Donna Biech…presented
with…”
Dr. Mae cut her off, saying, “I really don’t need her name, just the
case.”
Paula continued, “The patient presented with pain behind her belly
button last night around 4:30 in the morning. She was brought into
the emergency room and was quickly diagnosed with appendicitis,
which was when they called you and the OR team to prep for
surgery.”
Paula was about to continue when Dr. Mae cut her off. “Dear God,
woman, your voice is utterly annoying. Just stop talking.” Dr. Mae
grabbed the chart and gave it to the other medical resident on duty
and told him to pick up where Paula had left off.
Paula was humiliated, but she’d been warned about Dr. Mae’s
temper, so it really didn’t surprise her that she was getting a little
hazing from the woman on her first day. She kept it together and
followed Dr. Mae out of the room when she abruptly left, refusing to
answer the patient’s questions.
After scrubbing for surgery, Dr. Mae seemed in better spirits. All of
the rumors about Dr. Mae were right…she was a brilliant surgeon.
She turned a simple appendectomy into a masterpiece. At one point
during the surgery, Paula noticed Dr. Mae doing a technique she’d
never seen in medical school. Without thinking she spoke, “Dr. Mae,
what are you doing exactly? I’ve never seen that technique before.”
Dr. Mae peered at Paula from behind her glasses. In one quick
movement, she picked up a scalpel from a nearby tray and threw it
over Paula’s head. “I said no talking! Out of my OR. I don’t ever
want to hear or see you again on my service.”
Paula just stood frozen, but the other resident gave her a quick look
that said “Run!” and the surgical team averted their gazes, though
the anesthesiologist gave her a shrug. “I said OUT!” Paula didn’t
even look at Dr. Mae, she just turned and ran.
1. Do you think it’s appropriate for an organization to turn a blind eye
to workplace bullying when it’s a top performer who perpetrates
the bullying?
2. Are there are ever times when workplace bullying should be
allowed?
3. If you were Paula, what would you do?
4. If you were the head of human resources and this story was
communicated to you, how would you proceed?
END-OF-CHAPTER ASSESSMENT
1. During the middle of a heated discussion at work, Darlene finally looks at Joe and says, “I can’t believe you’re such an idiot on this topic! Anyone with half a brain could easily see that my way of finishing the project would get us done in half the time!” What form of counterproductive workplace behavior is Darlene exhibiting?
a. bullying b. verbal aggression c. argumentativeness d. harassment e. retaliation
2. According to Michell Gelfand, Jana Raver, Lisa Nishii, and Benjamin Schneider’s basic model of organizational discrimination, at what point does leadership impact discriminatory practices in the workplace?
a. inputs b. individuals and groups c. organization level d. communication e. outputs
3. Which of the following categories is not protected under
current federal discrimination law in the United States?
a. genetic information b. age c. disability d. sexual orientation e. pregnancy
4. In a meeting about taking on a potential new client, Tommy leans over to Darla and says, “I wouldn’t pay attention to anything Lindsay has to say on this topic. That woman’s completely certifiable. I mean, come on, she’s been locked up in a mental institution before.” What form of discrediting is Tommy using?
a. accusation b. criticism c. insult d. verbal aggression e. intimidation
5. During a performance appraisal, Robert felt his supervisor was belittling and not sympathetic at all. What type of injustice is Robert experiencing?
a. distributive b. affect c. process oriented d. procedural e. interactional
Answer Key
1. b
2. c
3. d
4. c
5. e
Chapter 14
Corporate Communications: Communicating with External Stakeholders
A Systems Perspective
Theories of organization have, as we saw in Chapter 3 and Chapter 4, moved
from classical conceptions of the organization as a closed system to modern
conceptions of the organization as situated in—and dynamically interacting with
—the larger environment. A century ago, theorists likened the organization to a
machine: by controlling inputs, you can control the outputs. Then half a century
ago, as systems theory was first applied to organizations, a new metaphor was
proposed: an organization is like a biological organism with permeable
boundaries that permit resources and information to be exchanged with the
environment.
But when an organization is boosting its public image, advocating public
policies, dealing with crises, or launching new products, managers and staff are
not thinking about theory. They are thinking about public relations, marketing,
and advertising—terms that we will define in a moment. Today, with the rise of
social media and the 24/7 news cycle, organizations are communicating with—
or as systems theory would have it, exchanging information with—their
environments as never before. Mary Hoffman and Debra Ford broke down
organizational rhetoric aimed at external audiences into four categories: (1)
identity rhetoric to create and sustain the organization’s public image, (2) issues
rhetoric to manage opinion on issues that affect the organization, (3) risk
rhetoric to persuade the public that risks posed by organization actions or
decisions are acceptable or promise greater benefits, and (4) crisis rhetoric to
deal with unexpected events that threaten the organization. [1]
When you think of an organization as an open system that exchanges resources
with its environment to survive, resource dependency theory provides a good
framework for understanding why organizations engage in public relations,
marketing, and advertising. [2] In applying the theory to public relations, Grunig,
Grunig, and Ehling contended that an organization engages in external
communication because (1) it needs various resources, but (2) some are not
under its control, so that (3) the organization must cultivate beneficial relations
with those who control the resources. [3] These resources may range from raw
materials and industrial technologies to expansion capital (controlled by
investors), business-friendly regulations (controlled by government agencies),
parts and supplies (controlled by vendors and distributors), retail spending
(controlled by consumers), and goodwill (controlled by the public at large).
Think of the college or university you attend. What resources does it need?
Which resources are not under its control? Who, then, controls the resources?
External communications designed to secure those resources take numerous
forms: student recruitment (to secure tuition dollars), faculty recruitment (to
secure knowledge and expertise), grant applications (to secure research funding),
lobbying (to secure state budget allocations), advocacy (to secure public support
for higher education spending), community engagement (to secure goodwill
from local officials and residents), and much more.
These external outreaches are often lumped under names such as “corporate
communications” and “strategic communication.” An approach that has gained
ground since the 1990s is called integrated marketing communication (IMC) and
has “become standard for marketing organizations, agencies, and the academic
community.” [4] The idea behind IMC is simple. All external organizational
communications can draw on the same databases to target specific consumer
categories, to craft focused messages, to identify appropriate channels, and to
send the messages through various approaches—that is, a combination of public
relations, marketing, and advertising. Nevertheless, practitioners and scholars
increasingly realize that each type of outreach is its own discipline, with its own
challenges and own set of skills needed to succeed. This chapter will be guided
by the shorthand definitions shown in Table 14.1.
Table 14.1 Public Relations, Marketing, and Advertising
Activity Purpose Target Channel
Public
Relations
Manage relationships with the publics
of the organization
Potentially all publics and not
just consumers
Primarily
uncontrolled
media*
Marketing Promote a product or service to
targeted consumers Primarily consumers
Primarily
controlled media†
Advertising Influence the behavior of targeted
consumers Primarily consumers
Primarily
controlled media†
*Media in which the organization does not control the content, placement, and
frequency of the message
†Media in which the organization pays to control the content, placement, and
frequency of the message
In the remainder of this chapter, we explore public relations in Section 1, and
then marketing and advertising—since both primarily target consumers and both
use controlled media—in Section 2. Because this is a textbook on organizational
communication and not on IMC, we will skip much of the theory (e.g., consumer
psychology) and the nitty-gritty (e.g., statistical modeling). Instead, the chapter
will focus on certain basics about public relations, marketing, and advertising
that you should know to grasp at least the outlines of external organizational
communications. And though we have defined public relations, marketing, and
advertising as different disciplines, they do have something important in
common. Each is practiced through a four-step process of research, planning,
communication, and evaluation. Thus these four steps provide a productive way
to organize each of the following sections.
KEY TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
Advertising:
Marketing:
Public Relations:
Communications, primarily through controlled media, aimed at influencing the behavior of targeted consumers.
Communications, primarily through controlled media, that promote a product or service to targeted consumers.
Communications, primarily through uncontrolled media, aimed at managing relationships with an organization’s publics.
[1] Hoffman, M. F., & Ford, D. J. (2010). Organizational rhetoric:
Situations and strategies. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
[2] Pfeffer, J., & Salancik, G. (1978). The external control of
organizations: A resource dependence perspective. New York, NY:
Harper & Row.
[3] Grunig, L. A., Grunig, J. E., & Ehling, W. P. (1992). What is an
effective organization? In J. E. Grunig (Ed.), Excellence in public relations
and communication management (pp. 65–90). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.
[4] Kitchen, P. J., Kim, I., & Schultz, D. E. (2008). Integration marketing
communications: Practice leads theory. Journal of Advertising Research,
48, 531–546, p. 531.
Public Relations
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
Understand how public relations begins with research to ascertain
who are the organization’s stakeholders, what is currently being
done to manage relations with them, what needs to be done, and
how they can be reached.
Delineate the steps of writing a public relations plan, from
situation analysis to formulating goals, objectives, strategies, and
Identify major theories of mass communication, persuasion, and
public opinion formation and change.
Understand how evaluation of public relations not only occurs at
the end of a campaign but is ongoing through every phase.
What is public relations? Even forty years ago, one scholar surveyed the
literature and catalogued nearly five hundred definitions. [1] Scott Cutlip has
traced the antecedents of modern public relations as far back as the colonial era.
Yet as Cutlip chronicled, modern milestones include the founding in 1900 of
the first public relations agency, the federal government’s formation of a
committee to coordinate US propaganda during World War I (1914–18), and the
Crystallizing Public Opinion in which author Edward Bernays for the
first time used the term public relations to describe the profession in its modern
By the postwar years of the 1950s, public relations was not only a
recognized career field but also firmly entrenched in popular culture. Even then,
major motion pictures such as The Man in the Gray Flannel Suit and Sweet
explored the practice of public relations and the ethics of using
the media to make or break the image of a company or public figure. More than
fifty years later, public relations continues to be a hot topic at the movies with
Thank You for Smoking and Hancock.
The Public Relations Society of America (PRSA) puts the start of the profession
in the pre-1900 era and charts it through successive eras: the Progressive Era
(1900–1916) and then the First World War (1917–18), the boom times of the
1920s, the Roosevelt era (1930–45) of the Depression and Second World War
when mass media became a force, the postwar years (1946–64) when public
relations practice became professionalized, the era of social protest and power to
the people (1965–85), and the present era of globalization and digitization. [4] As
public relations grew to become a fact of modern life, so have scholars sought to
understand it. One long-standing paradigm looks at public relations as “strategic
communication,” an approach that emphasizes the goal-oriented nature of the
discipline and thus facilitates research and planning. The leading paradigm
today, however, is the relationship management approach. [5] This perspective
emphasizes the aspect that public relations is a two-way conversation among
equals, a means for organizations to dialogue with their publics and together
resolve issues in ways that address the interests of all. PRSA usefully combines
the two concepts in its widely accepted definition: “Public relations is a strategic
communication process that builds mutually beneficial relationships between
organizations and their publics.” [6] One influential model of public relations,
summarized in Table 14.2, draws on systems theory and distinguishes
“symmetrical” communications between an organization and its public from
“asymmetrical” communications. [7]
Grunig and Grunig's Four Models of Public Relations
Focus Historical
Era(s) Developments
Gain publicity and
media coverage for
the organization
Pre-1900
Heroes (Andrew Jackson, Daniel Boone) and
showmen (P. T. Barnum, Buffalo Bill) hired
agents to get them press coverage.
Disseminate
information about
the organization
Progressive
Era (1900-
1916)
To answer charges from muckraking
journalists, leaders hired their own
journalists-in-residence.
Persuade publics to
accept the
organization’s view
From World
War (1917-
18)
Booming
Twenties
(1919-29)
Roosevelt Era
Some practitioners began basing public
relations on behavioral science, seeking
information from the public to better persuade
them.
(1930-45)
Resolve conflicts
between the
organization and its
publics
Postwar Era
(1946-64)
Social Protest
Era (1965-85)
Global/Digital
Era (1986-
present)
Some academics began to question the
asymmetry inherent in prevailing public
relations practice and argued for more
balance.
Note: All four models continue to be practiced, but, Grunig and Grunig argue,
two-way symmetry should be normative.
Step 1: Research
Recall that public relations communication is a four-step process: research
planning, communication, evaluation. Thus the public relations practitioner
begins by researching needs, planning how they may be addressed, executing the
communication tactics chosen, and evaluating results. Research must take up
these questions: What are the publics of the organization? What is the
organization currently doing to manage relations with those publics? What
messages can foster productive relations with those publics? What channels are
available to convey those messages? Let us explore each of these questions in
Who Are Our Publics?
Earlier we encountered resource dependency theory, or the idea that
organizations need resources, some of these resources are not controlled by the
organization, hence the organization must productively manage its relations with
those who control the resources it needs. So one way to determine the publics
that an organization should reach is to ask the following: Who controls resources
—from materials and technologies, to capital and labor, to tax policies and
general goodwill—that the organization needs? Another common approach—
found in the title of this chapter—is to cast an organization’s publics as its
, or those who have a stake in the organization. And as we have
done in this textbook, stakeholders can be broadly divided into internal
external stakeholders. (There is more information on
stakeholders in Chapter 5.) Figure 14.1 depicts how an organization might take
stock of resources it needs and lists key publics with whom it must productively
The Publics of an Organization
Of course, crafting an effective public relations campaign requires more than
simply identifying the target publics. The organization must do research to learn
each stakeholder group. David Guth and Charles Marsh [8] suggest this
research boils down to seven questions:
organization’s dependence on a given public?
What is that public’s stake in the organization?
Who shapes opinions and makes decisions for that public?
demographics (age, gender, income, education, family status,
ethnic background, education level, etc.) of that public?
psychographics (lifestyle, political preferences, religious
preferences, etc.) of that public?
What is that public’s opinion of the organization?
What is that public’s opinion of the issue under discussion?
Answers to these questions provide a baseline for evaluating the results of a
public relations campaign and gauging how stakeholders’ views have changed.
Finding the answers can be pursued through numerous research strategies. You
are likely familiar with secondary research, or consulting secondhand sources
such as books, articles and studies, or government census reports and labor
statistics, which furnish data about the stakeholder group in question. Much of
an organization’s work, however, will require primary research from original
sources. This may include reviewing feedback from stakeholders—letters and e-
mails the organization has received, comments on its Facebook page and in other
social media, visits to its websites, customer satisfaction surveys, and more. New
data about the stakeholder group can be generated through scientific surveys
(whether in person, online, or by phone, mail, or e-mail), one-on-one interviews,
and focus groups. In the latter method, the organization brings together a small
group of eight to twelve people with a moderator, who asks general questions
and allows participants to respond freely. Survey research, then, generates
quantitative data about stakeholders’ behaviors and attitudes, while focus groups
generate qualitative data that can delve more deeply into stakeholders’
underlying beliefs and values. While scientifically conducted surveys can poll a
large number of respondents and yield data that can be statistically confirmed,
focus groups offer the opportunity to ask follow-up questions and to allow
participants to expand upon their responses.
What Are We Already Doing?
Just as the organization can survey members of its various publics, the
organization can survey itself through a communication audit that takes stock of
current public relations efforts. Such an audit can begin with a simple
spreadsheet that lists each public and the media currently being used to manage
relations with them. For example, a nonprofit organization concerned about
donations might make a spreadsheet like this:
General website
Monthly e-mails
Monthly magazine
Quarterly newsletter
Insider newsletter
Feacebook messages
Appeal Letters
Gift offers
X X X
X X X X X X
X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X
X X X
Another self-diagnostic tool, around since the 1960s, is the SWOT analysis of an
organization’s strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats. [9] The same
nonprofit that generated the preceding spreadsheet could also have constructed
the following SWOT analysis of its donor communications:
The organization has a well-defined,
multilevel approach to donor
Donors are segmented by level; some
donor communications are specifically
targeted to each level.
A scheduled rotation (monthly,
communications is well
Weaknesses
Communications (website, magazine, newsletter)
that go to all donor segments do not contain
messages customized to each.
The organization engages in no personalized or
face-to-face donor communication (e.g., phone
calls, personal e-mails, local events).
Use of social media is limited.
The website, magazine, and newsletter
can incorporate some content targeted to
the various donor segments.
Personalized and face-to-face
communications with donors can be
Threats
New donor communication strategies must be
paid for from anticipated increases in giving.
Other nonprofit groups’ increased use of social
media puts pressure on our organization to keep
up or else appear outdated.
The organization can become a leader
among similar nonprofits by using more
Social media is increasing the “clutter” of
messages that donors receive.
What Messages Are Needed?
William James, the American pragmatist philosopher (whose contemporaries,
Charles Horton Cooley and George Herbert Mead, we met in Chapter 4), is
reputed to have said: “Whenever two people meet, there are really six people
present. There is each man [sic] as he sees himself, each man as the other person
sees him, and each man as he really is.” [10] Various scholars have updated this
aphorism for public relations practitioners by describing coorientation as a
productive framework for aligning an organization’s messages with its
stakeholders’ concerns. [11] The coorientation process starts by addressing four
questions for a given issue:
What is the view of the organization?
What is the view of the stakeholder group?
What does the organization think that the stakeholders think?
What do stakeholders think that the organization thinks?
The coorientation theory of public relations posits four variables:
If the organization and stakeholder group share similar evaluations of an
issue, they have attained agreement.
If they share similar conceptualizations of the issue, they have attained
understanding.
If each believes it has interests similar to the other, they have attained
If their perceptions of each other are correct, they have attained accuracy.
These four variables can aid an organization in gauging how close, or how far
apart, its perceptions are from a given public. The coorientation model is
represented in Figure 14.2.
The Coorientation Model
As we saw in Chapter 6, when reviewing organizational rhetoric, organizations
rhetorical situations—four external and one internal—or situations that
call for a rhetorical response. According to the typology of Mary Hoffman and
Debra Ford, these situations are the organization’s needs to create and maintain
its identity, manage issues, manage risks, manage crises, and (internally) manage
its members, which was originally discussed in Chapter 6. [12] In the research
phase of a public relations campaign, an organization that applied the
coorientation model to each of these five rhetorical situations might be guided by
a series of coorientating questions in crafting its messages. Examples of these
questions are suggested in Table 14.3, where Hoffman and Ford’s typology of
organizational rhetoric is blended with the coorientation model long familiar to
public relations practitioners and scholars.
Rhetorical Situations and Coorientation
Organizational Goal Coorientation
Create a strong and positive identity distinct from
other organizations
• How does a given stakeholder group
evaluate our organizational identity? Is
their evaluation similar to ours?
• How do the stakeholders conceive of
our identity? Is their conception
similar to ours?
• Are our interests similar to those of
stakeholders? Are we correct in this
assessment?
• Are stakeholder interests similar to
ours? If so, do they see this correctly?
Define issues (e.g., proposed legislation or
regulation) in ways that are favorable to the
organization
• How does a given stakeholder group
evaluate the issue in question? Is their
evaluation similar to ours?
• How do the stakeholders conceive of
the issue? Is their conception similar to
ours?
• Are our interests in this issue similar
to those of stakeholders? Are we
correct in this assessment?
• Are stakeholder interests in this issue
similar to ours? If so, do they see this
correctly?
Persuade audiences that a given risk is acceptably
low or that the benefits of action outweigh the costs
• How does a given stakeholder group
evaluate the risk in question? Is their
evaluation similar to ours?
• How do the stakeholders conceive of
the risk? Is their conception similar to
ours?
• Are our interests in managing this
risk similar to those of stakeholders?
Are we correct in this assessment?
• Are stakeholders’ interests regarding
the risk similar to ours? If so, do they
see this correctly?
Deal favorably with unexpected events that create
uncertainty and threaten organizational goals
• How does a given stakeholder group
evaluate the crisis? Is their evaluation
similar to ours?
• How do the stakeholders conceive of
the crisis? Is their conception similar
to ours?
• Are our interests in the outcome of
this crisis similar to those of
stakeholders? Are we correct in this
assessment?
• Are stakeholders’ interests in the
outcome of this crisis similar to ours?
If so, do they see this correctly?
Recruit and socialize members so that they uphold
the values of the organization, are motivated to work
and represent the organization, and are willing to
deal with change
• How do members evaluate the
organizational identity that
management wishes to project? Is their
evaluation similar to ours?
• How do members conceive of the
organization’s identity? Is their
conception similar to that of
management?
• Are management interests similar to
those of members? Are we correct in
this assessment?
• Are members’ interests similar to
those of management? If so, do they
see this correctly?
What Channels Are Available?
Earlier we noted that public relations communication is primarily carried by
uncontrolled media. Sometimes called free media, these are channels for which
the organization does not pay. But neither does the organization control the
content, placement, or frequency of its message. When a company buys an
advertisement in the local newspaper, it determines the text and design of the ad,
its size and in what section of the paper it appears, and how often it runs. But
when the same company sends out a press release, it has no idea if the local
paper will pick it up and—if the paper does run it—whether or not the content
will be edited, the accompanying photo printed, and the story placed on the front
page or buried in the business section. Of course, public relations (as the IMC
perspective suggests) will overlap with an organization’s advertising and
marketing efforts. So public relations messages will inevitably be carried by
media the organization does control—its website and Facebook page, for
example, or a series of paid advertisements to get across a certain message. After
Deepwater Horizon oil rig exploded in 2010 and spewed oil into the Gulf of
Mexico for three months from a drill site owned by BP, the company bought—
and continues to buy—time on national television for public relations messages
to repair its image.
But for the most part, the job of public relations practitioners involves media
relations. As the term implies, practitioners must cultivate productive relations
with the gatekeepers—the reporters, journalists, writers, editors, producers, and
directors—who provide access to media coverage. As you might guess, media
relations begin with identifying potential outlets for an organization’s public
relations messages. This process is called a media audit. It is a “survey of
reporters, editors, and other media professionals that asks about their preferences
for stories and how they perceive the [organization].” [13] As such, the media
audit is a natural complement to a communication audit. In a communication
audit, the organization surveys what it is currently doing on its own to get its
messages out; in a media audit, the organization surveys what channels are
offered by others to get out those messages. When you start to make a list of
potential media outlets, as in Figure 14.3, the size of the list may surprise you.
Print, Broadcast, Interactive
Naturally, the gatekeepers at each outlet have their own preferences about the
formats in which they receive possible stories. The article-length news release
that suits the editor of a national trade publication must likely be rewritten as
straight news for a national paper, as a feature story for the local paper, and as a
human interest story to pique the interest of a television or radio talk-show
producer. Even in the same media category, one gatekeeper’s preference will be
different from another’s. On top of that, gatekeepers constantly change—as do
the outlets themselves. Keeping abreast of it all is the essence of media relations.
And if it seems overwhelming, that is why many organizations hire full-time
public relations managers and staffs (which may include a full-time media
relations specialist) or simply hire a public relations agency.
Step 2: Planning
Through its public relations research, an organization identifies its publics and
its own current efforts at managing relations with those publics, takes stock of its
own views of those of its publics on the questions at hand (i.e., managing
identity, issues, risk, or crises), and considers what channels are available for
messages that might coorient the organization and its publics. Translating these
abstract considerations into a concrete plan with specific actions and timetables
is no easy matter. The Public Relations Society of America recommends [14] that
an organization (such as the hypothetical example shown here) start with a
situation analysis that might be written into a simple grid:
Alpha Beta Chi Sorority
Not enough members are volunteering for sorority committees, so committees
work slowly and the quality of activities they plan is diminished.
Analysis: Members are busy college students, and most see committee service as
a detrimental drag on their time.
More members need to become actively involved in serving on committees.
Next, PRSA advises organizations and practitioners to distinguish between
strategies, and tactics for reaching a given audience. The
process works like this:
Begin by stating in broad terms the long-term goal or outcome to be
in the organization’s relations with a given public. Example: More
sorority members will become actively involved.
Move from the general goal to a specific, shorter-term objective whose
attainment can be measured by quantity and time. Example: Twenty percent
of members will volunteer to serve on a committee over the next school
Further refine the plan by describing strategies that will attain the
Example: Show members how active involvement provides
personal benefits through increased networking and leadership skills.
Finally, list specific tactics for implementing the strategy. Examples: Hold a
special meeting on opportunities for involvement, revise the orientation
program for new pledges, spotlight involvement opportunities at all general
meetings by giving recognition to volunteers and asking some to speak
about the benefits, print feature articles on volunteers in the newsletter,
provide an in-service training program for volunteers, institute an annual
awards program for volunteers.
In today’s media universe, possible tactics for conveying public relations
messages are nearly endless. A partial list could include the following:
News Media
media kits
Online
websites
videoconferences
brochures/handbills
direct-mail letters
fact sheets
backgrounders
news releases
video news releases
press conferences
media advisories
media tours
conference calls
interviews
sound bites
photo opportunities
pitching stories
writing stories
guest editorials
guest columns
letters to the editor
blogs/vlogs
wikis
texts
e-mails
YouTube
news feeds
mobile apps
webcasts
podcasts
webinars
chat forum
listserv
instant messaging
Second Life
To facilitate public relations planning, the five elements—audience, goal,
objective, strategies, tactics—can be rendered as a simple grid:
Alpha Beta Chi Sorority
Objective Strategies Tactics
members
become
actively
involved.
Twenty percent
of members will
actively serve on
a sorority
committee
during this
school year.
Show members how
active involvement
provides personal
benefits through
increased networking
and leadership skills.
1. Hold a special meeting
on opportunities for
involvement.
2. Revise the orientation
program for new pledges.
3. Have committee chairs,
personally and face to
face, ask members to serve
who have not been
involved before.
4. Spotlight involvement
opportunities at all general
meetings by recognizing
individual volunteers and
asking some to speak
about the benefits.
5. Print feature articles on
volunteers in the
newsletter.
6. Provide in-service
training for committee
volunteers.
7. Institute an annual
awards program for
volunteers.
Putting an actual public relations plan into action, however, will be easier and
more effective if some columns are added to the grid: what is budgeted, who is
responsible, what is the timeline for implementation, and how it will be
Alpha Beta Chi Sorority
Tactics Budget Responsibility Timeline Evaluation
Members
Goal: More members
will become actively
involved
Objective: Twenty percent
of members will actively
serve on a sorority
committee this school year
1. Special meeting
on involvement
opportunities.
2. Revise
orientation for
new pledges.
3. Have chairs
personally ask
members to serve
who have not
been involved
before.
4. Spotlight
involvement at all
general meetings
by recognizing
volunteers and
asking some to
talk about the
benefits.
5. Print articles on
volunteers in
newsletter.
6. Provide in-
service training
for volunteers.
7. Institute annual
award program
for volunteers.
$500
for
annual
award
banquet
and
plaques
Membership
director
All tactics
implemented
no later than
September,
with
objective
attained by
May
Compare
list of
actively
serving
committee
members as
a
percentage
of total
sorority
membership
Repeat the grid for each of the organization’s audiences—and for each goal with
each audience—and you have the gist of a public relations plan, whether you
retain the grid format or render the information in paragraph form.
Step 3: Communication
We touched on messages—and the channels to communicate them—in the
research phase of public relations. Then we reviewed the planning phase for
identifying tactics to convey the messages and thus achieve the organization’s
goals. But before discussing specific tactical forms—which in today’s media
environment span the traditional press release to the latest social networking
sites—we need to see the forest before the trees. That is, we must appreciate how
the media impacts public opinion; otherwise, an organization can simply keep
churning out press releases and pitching stories with little notion of their ultimate
In Chapter 4, we reviewed the evolution of linear, interactional, and transactional
models for communication. The well-known source-message-channel-receiver
(SMCR) model is one way to conceive of how an organization’s public relations
messages impact its public. The organization transmits a message through a
channel to its publics; the publics offer feedback on the message; the
organization adjusts the message until the organization and its publics are
(see Figure 14.2). But while helpful, this model is too simple. As we
saw in Chapter 11, when reviewing the interplay between organizations and
media technologies, some theorists take a social interaction approach to the
media—that is, they evaluate each medium by how close it comes to the ideal
medium of face-to-face communication. In essence, each medium is seen as a
projection, writ large, of the original sender/receiver dyad. Again, this approach
has its uses and has inspired much productive theorizing and research. But for
our purposes here, in understanding the dynamic between public relations and
public opinion, the SMCR model is too limited. Why? Because an organization’s
various publics are not analogous to a single individual. Each public has its
opinion leaders and decision makers, while the individuals within each public
are differently engaged with the issues and with the various channels through
which public relations messages are transmitted.
Theories of Mass Communication
Mass communication theory has evolved over the past century. With the advent
of radio in the 1920s and 1930s, many public relations practitioners—and many
world leaders, from Winston Churchill to Adolf Hitler—saw a direct connection
between mass media and the public. Messages need only be broadly
communicated to weak-willed masses to have their desired effects. This theory,
often called the hypodermic needle theory or the magic bullet theory, has long
been abandoned by scholars. Then, in the years after the Second World War,
mass communication theorists recognized the role of opinion leaders. The fascist
dictators of that generation had come to power by first bringing the elites and
experts to their sides. This suggested the idea that swaying the public begins
with swaying those who run the institutions of society, from government and
industry to education and religion. But when the rise of television in the 1950s
and 1960s put information directly into the hands of the public, theorists made a
new proposal: the public does not have the same opinion leaders on all matters
opinion leaders on different issues. Finally, we come to two
mass communication theories that, says the Public Relations Society of America,
guide practitioners today.
Where the hypodermic needle theory held that mass communicators influence
the public—and where later theories held that opinion leaders influence the
diffusion theory holds that the public influences the public. In other
words, as messages are diffused throughout a public, people are swayed by their
peers through what is commonly called word of mouth. Everett Rogers
developed the theory after noticing, as a graduate student in Iowa during the
1950s, how farmers who learned an effective new agriculture technique would
pass it along to other farmers. Rogers, who spent decades refining his theory,
posits five stages of diffusion: awareness, interest, evaluation, trial, and
adoption. Moreover, people who are not themselves the innovators will respond
to new information by adopting it first, adopting it when a new majority forms,
adopting it when the majority is established, or not adopting it at all. [15]
The task of the public relations professional is to “design campaigns to target the
five categories of people and motivate them at each stage of the diffusion
process using channels appropriate to that stage.” [16] In turn, success at this task
can be informed by a second theory—namely, agenda-setting theory. In the late
1960s, when people read newspapers and (before cable television) watched only
the three major television networks, media researchers Maxwell McCombs and
Donald Shaw conducted a study of voters in their North Carolina city. They
discovered that the issues these voters prioritized tracked closely with issues that
received the most coverage in the daily papers, national news magazines, and
nightly network news. This finding led McCombs and Shaw to conclude that
mass media do not tell people so much what to think but what to think about. [17]
In simpler terms, where diffusion theory describes the dynamics of word of
mouth, agenda-setting theory explores what is commonly called “top of mind.”
The organization whose tactics secure positive and frequent coverage can shape
the media agenda, put its public relations message at the top of the public mind,
and thus foster favorable word of mouth.
Nevertheless, the media universe is quite different than it was when Everett
studied Iowa farmers and when McCombs and Shaw surveyed North Carolina
voters. Most people no longer depend on papers for their daily news; they can
choose from hundreds of TV channels, not just three; and the digital revolution
has brought everything from the personal computer, to the Internet, to the
smartphone. The same media content can now be watched on television,
streamed over the Internet, and downloaded to a handheld device. For this
reason, another mass communication theory around since the 1970s—and whose
antecedents date to studies conducted during the 1940s—is getting attention
from public relations practitioners. [18] Uses and gratifications theory holds that
media consumers are not passive receptors but are actively engaged in choosing
the communication channels that gratify their wants and needs. At your college
or university, for example, administration and faculty face a conundrum:
working in offices, they favor e-mail, but students are mobile all day and
increasingly prefer texting. How best, then, to disseminate messages to the
student body? In the same way, public relations practitioners must strive not only
to secure positive coverage by “the media” but also to take into account the
communication channels most likely to reach a given public.
Theories of Persuasion
While diffusion theory offers a useful framework for understanding how new
information spreads and individuals respond, researchers for decades have
collective sentiment—that is, public opinion—is formed. One
thing is for sure: gauging public opinions is not as simple as counting votes and
declaring who has a majority. Public opinion is best conceived not as points on a
line but as a series of bands that may range from strong or moderate agreement
to strong or moderate disagreement. Then, too, public mood is a different sort of
phenomenon, a vague feeling rather than an articulated proposition—whether
consumers are confident in the economy, for example, or citizens believe a war
is going well for their country. To construct theories of public opinion formation,
scholars begin with inexact concepts such as belief, attitude, value, and
. Traditional conceptions [19] of the terms often include these elements:
Definition Psychology
confidence that a given thing exists or is true cognition: what you know
predisposition to respond a given way toward a thing affective: what you feel
conviction that a given mode of doing or being is best
behavioral: how you act
behavioral inclination that is expressed to others
These phenomena, many suggest, work in progression: (1) firsthand experience
or credible testimony produces belief, which can (2) strengthen into an attitude
that drives a person’s responses to the thing in question, and (3) prompts
formation of associated values that provide a basis for deeds and opinions that
furnish a basis for words. (Some scholars, however, challenge the traditional
of attitudes as stable mental structures that guide perceptions and
evaluations of objects. Against this “file drawer” approach, which views
attitudes as things people pull out when asked, Timothy Wilson and Sara Hodges
argued that attitudes are temporary and often constructed ad hoc according to the
context of a situation or how an issue is presented. [21])
Because theories of public opinion formation and change are often extensions of
models for interpersonal persuasion, we begin with three established approaches
to the latter. Leon Festinger’s cognitive issonance theory [22] contends that
people are “aversively driven” to reconcile contradictory attitudes they may hold
—for example, a person who enjoys smoking but knows the habit causes ill
health. Muzafer Sherif’s social judgment theory [23] holds that people’s attitudes
are best seen as broad zones of what they can accept or reject—for example, a
person who is against abortion but may accept it in cases of rape or incest. And
Richard Petty and John Cacioppo’s elaboration likelihood model [24] suggests
that people who hear a persuasive message will actually think about the
argument if able and motivated to do so, but will “jump to conclusions” if their
attention is drawn to peripherals—for example, a person who can afford a
product buys it based on need rather than the sales representative’s smile or the
promise of a prize drawing.
What these three theories have in common is a focus on attitude and how
persuasion is a function of attitude change. Thus cognitive dissonance theory
predicts that a speaker can persuade a listener either by arousing a dissonance
that forces the latter to make a choice or by lessening the dissonance so that one
attitude no longer fully contradicts or counterbalances another. On the other
hand, social judgment theory predicts that persuasion can occur when a speaker
pitches an argument at the edge of what the listener will accept, thus prompting a
change of attitude by expanding the listener’s “latitude of acceptance.” Finally,
the elaboration likelihood model predicts that a strong and lasting attitude
change is only possible when able and motivated listeners really think about (or
“centrally process”) a message; by contrast, listeners who jump to conclusions
(or “peripherally process”) based on externals will have at best only a weak and
temporary attitude change.
For public relations professionals, this means crafting messages that achieve
persuasion by changing stakeholder attitudes. Consider a company that may be
forced to close its local plant if denied a zoning variance to acquire adjacent land
and upgrade its production facilities. The land, however, abuts a city park and a
historic neighborhood, so citizens are reluctant to go along with the rezoning.
How might our three theories of attitude change and persuasion—cognitive
dissonance, social judgment, and elaboration likelihood—guide the company’s
public relations strategies?
Cognitive dissonance theory might suggest that the company can change citizen
attitudes by pointing out that scores of local residents may lose their jobs, and
everyone will be hurt by the economic loss to the city. This message arouses a
dissonance—between economics and land use—that forces citizens to rethink
the issue. On the other hand, the company could announce steps to mitigate the
visual and traffic impact of the plant expansion, thus lessening the dissonance
and allowing citizens to more easily resolve the dilemma.
Social judgment theory might prompt the company to craft messages that
describe how the expansion will be planned with citizen input and designed to
minimize any impacts on the surrounding area. By positioning its argument
toward the edge of what most residents might be willing to at least consider, the
company may be able to enlarge people’s latitudes of acceptance when it adds
that reasonable compromise will yield economic benefits for the city.
The elaboration likelihood model suggests that, because citizens are already
motivated and able to hear what the company has to say, people will closely
scrutinize—that is, they will elaborate—the arguments put forth in favor of the
proposed rezoning and plant expansion. Thus the strength of those arguments
will determine whether or not the company succeeds in persuading residents.
Everything from statistics about economic benefits, to pledges of cooperation
with citizen groups and city officials, to an artist’s mockup of the proposed
design will be needed to produce positive and lasting attitude change.
Yet public relations professionals must throw in one more variable: how is
persuasion affected when an organization’s messages are filtered through the
media? At the center of this question is “human information processing and the
triggering of these processes by media coverage.” [25] To explore these
processes, public-opinion researchers often begin with the attribution theory of
Fritz Heider, who held that “the linking with its underlying conditions involves a
kind of [mental] unit formation.” [26] For example, if everyone succeeds at a
certain task, then people attribute success to the easiness of the task; but if few
succeed, then success is attributed to the abilities of the person. As Mark
Martinko summarized, “Heider’s basic premise was that people have an innate
need to understand and control their environments,” and thus “individuals
function as ‘naïve psychologists,’ developing causal explanations for significant
Further, because people structure their cause-and-effect connections into mental
units, they judge reality holistically rather than considering each element in
isolation. One early scholar of public opinion, Walter Lippman, observed that we
have “pictures in our heads.” [28] Scholars today refer to these mental units or
schema or frames. “Schema theory and closely-related framing
theory are based on the assumption,” explained Hans Kepplinger, “that recipients
of media coverage do not take up individual pieces of information in the news
independent of one another, but interpret them according to a predetermined
[29] In turn, the mental frame by which audiences interpret the
news may itself have been influenced, as we saw earlier in the chapter, by the
media’s agenda-setting function.
priming theory holds that mental schemas or frames operate in chains.
Have you ever played a word-association game? Someone says a word and you
respond with the first word that pops into your mind; so your friend says “dog”
and you say “pet” (or maybe you say “bite”). In the same way, priming theory
predicts that when you encounter information in the media, which you then fit
into a given mental frame, that information will chain out as it activates a whole
network of related mental frames. Further, once this network of mental
associations is activated, you will become “primed,” or more sensitized, to
media coverage of the issue, more likely to seek out such coverage, and more
likely to give it careful consideration.
Agenda setting, framing, and priming can be seen in progression. Media
coverage emphasizes a certain issue so that audiences develop cause-effect
mental frames about it and are primed for further coverage. Dietram Scheufele’s
process model of framing posits three interrelated processes at work: frame
building as media professionals choose how to present an issue, frame setting as
audiences attribute causes and effects to the issue, and frame effects as
individuals act on their interpretations. [30]
Theories of Public Opinion
Moving from individual-level opinion formation to that of the public at large
introduces what Kurt Lang and Gertrude Lang called “collective dynamics” in
their important book of the same name. [31] Their model for public opinion
formation and change, shown in Figure 14.4, remains a standard in the field.
Lang and Lang envisioned the public opinion process as a cycle that constantly
reboots. The cycle begins when a new issue is injected into an already present
mass sentiment. People coalesce into “publics” around the various sides of the
issue; public and private debate ensues; and over time, a consensus called
“public opinion” forms. This consensus prompts social action—perhaps a new
law, policy, or legislative majority. As the consensus becomes institutionalized,
the new social values are incorporated into mass sentiment, and the cycle starts
over again. Think of the environmental movement that emerged in the 1960s
after researchers discovered that a widely used agricultural pesticide was killing
off the American bald eagle. Publics emerged on both sides of the pesticide
issue, debate ensued, public opinion swung in favor of banning the toxin, the
door was opened to a host of environmental legislation enacted in the 1970s,
environmentalism became an institutionalized social value, and mass sentiment
became more “green.”
Lang and Lang’s Public Opinion Formation Model
While Lang and Lang’s model depicts public opinion formation as an open
process of debate and consensus, another established model takes a different
approach. Elisabeth Noelle-Neumann, a German scholar who earned her
doctorate in the United States and lived in Berlin and Frankfurt during the Nazi
regime, argued that public opinion is sustained as more and more people keep
silent for fear of being isolated. Her spiral of silence [32] model begins with the
premise that human beings have an innate ability—what she called, only half-
jokingly, a “quasi-statistical organ”—to gauge which way the winds of public
opinion are blowing. Just as innately, people’s dislike of being ostracized makes
them hesitate to seem “different” from the majority. Thus people in the minority
hold back their opinions and publicly appear the weaker side, while the majority
confidently express themselves and appear the stronger. Nor did Noelle-
Neumann in her research ever find “a spiral of silence that goes against the tenor
of the media, for the willingness to speak out depends in part upon sensing that
there is support and legitimation from the media.” [33] So the spiral cycles
downward until at last the minority is largely silent. How, then, does public
opinion change at all? Every society has its hard-core idealists who are willing to
endure derision and its avant-garde nonconformists who believe time is on their
side. Only they, who are willing to speak against prevailing sentiment, can
change public opinion.
As with any theory, Noelle-Neumann’s spiral of silence model has been
subjected to critique and proposed refinement. [34] In particular, scholars have
questioned whether fear of isolation is the only determinant of an individual’s
willingness to speak out, whether this fear can stand up as a measurable
construct, and whether group norms exert more pressure on individuals than
opinion climate. Yet the theory remains a standard reference
point for public opinion scholarship. And for organizations and public relations
professionals, models of public opinion formation—whether Lang and Lang’s
collective dynamics or Noelle-Neumann’s spiral of silence—have practical
importance. According to Lang and Lang’s model, persuading a stakeholder
group means injecting a new perspective into that public’s existing sentiment,
participating in the debate that ultimately produces a consensus, and influencing
social actions (e.g., new laws and regulations) that institutionalize the new social
values around which stakeholders’ new sentiment forms. By the same token,
Noelle-Neumann’s model suggests that persuading stakeholders is a process of
either aligning with prevailing opinion or being willing to risk isolation and
Step 4: Evaluation
The evaluation phase of a public relations campaign should already seem
familiar to you since, as the Public Relations Society of America points out, this
step “can serve as research for the next…program.” [35] As such, the evaluation
can include surveys, focus groups, and interviews to learn how—compared to
the baseline research conducted before the campaign—an organization’s publics
interpreted the communications and, as a result, how their perceptions may have
changed about the organization’s identity or the issue, risk, or crisis that the
organization was attempting to manage.
Evaluation of public relations harks back to the prelaunch phases of a campaign
in other ways. First, the public relations plan should have included objectives
that are measurable (e.g., “X will increase by Y within Z months”). Second, the
plan should have listed the criteria and method for evaluating the outcome and
included a budget for doing so. In fact, evaluation should not only be conducted
at the end of a campaign but be ongoing through every phase—checking whether
the message is reaching the intended audience, gauging the effects of
communications while the campaign is under way, and assessing the results
when the campaign is done.
The Institute for Public Relations [36] suggests that evaluation can be built on the
“BASIC” model for communication objectives:
awareness
knowledge
relevance
action
advocacy
These five elements compose a cycle, shown in Figure 14.5, that begins by
making stakeholders aware of the organization’s desired identity or of its
position on an issue, risk, or crisis. The target public should then become more
knowledgeable, grasp why the organization’s arguments matter, take action, and
persuade others. In turn, as shown in Figure 14.6, this cycle forms a basis for
follow-up and evaluation after the campaign. Awareness is measured by finding
out through interviews, focus groups, and surveys what stakeholders remember
from the campaign. Knowledge is gauged by asking stakeholders their levels of
agreement or disagreement with a series of statements about the issue at hand.
Whether or not stakeholders find the information relevant is ascertained by
asking their levels of interest or disinterest. In turn, how stakeholders intend to
act on their beliefs is measured by their levels of agreement or disagreement
with statements such as “I will…” or “I plan to…” Finally, whether stakeholders
have been won over to the organization’s position can be gauged by asking if
they intend to tell family and friends or recommend the organization’s viewpoint
to others as a preference.
BASIC Cycle of Public Relations
Measuring the BASIC Cycle
One other type of evaluation is associated with public relations. As noted earlier,
advertising and marketing campaigns are primarily conducted through controlled
in which the organization determines the content, placement, and
frequency of the message. But public relations is often conducted via
uncontrolled media, as the organization attempts to get out its message through
editors, producers, directors, and others who determine content, placement, and
frequency. Thus organizations attempt—often by hiring research firms—to track
down all the mentions of their message that appear in the media. For example,
consider what might be gleaned about the effectiveness of a press release sent to
What publications, broadcasts, or websites picked up the release?
What types of stories appeared (straight news, editorial, feature article)?
How much exposure was given (column inches, airtime minutes)?
How much exposure was given to competing viewpoints?
Who was quoted? How extensively?
What prominence was given (front page, top news, brief item, etc.)?
Was the tone favorable or not? Was it balanced or not?
The evaluation can be taken a step further by assessing how many impressions
the news release generated; that is, how many readers, viewers, or online users
potentially saw the organization’s message. Three stories in a magazine with
fifty thousand readers, for instance, would potentially generate 150,000
impressions. Measuring impressions is also a key component of advertising and
marketing, and thus a logical segue to Section 2 on external communication
through controlled media.
KEY TAKEAWAY
The research phase of a public relations campaign starts by
determining the organization’s stakeholders. One way to ascertain
its various publics is based on resource dependence theory: an
organization does not control all the resources it needs (e.g.,
labor, capital, material, revenue, public policy, goodwill) and must
productively manage relations with those who do (e.g.,
employees, investors, suppliers, consumers, policy makers,
community groups). Once publics are identified, further research
—surveys, focus groups, interviews—should ascertain their
stakes in the organization, who shapes their opinions, what are
characteristics, and what are their opinions of the
organization and the issue at hand. To chart what public relations
efforts are currently being done, the organization can conduct a
communication audit and SWOT analysis (strengths,
weaknesses, opportunities, threats). To determine what needs to
coorientation analysis can identify what
misperceptions—on both sides—exist. Public relations messages
can be broken down by those intended to manage an issue, to
manage a risk, to manage a crisis, to manage the organization’s
identity, and to manage its members. Finally, research should
ascertain available channels to convey the desired messages.
Writing a public relations plan begins with identifying problems,
analyzing the situations, and formulating goals. However, goals
are longer-term ends stated in general terms and should be
distinguished from objectives. The latter are shorter-term ends
whose attainment can be measured and should occur in a
specified time frame—thus X will increase by Y within Z months.
So begin with goals for managing relations with each stakeholder
group and formulating their associated objectives. Then for each
objective devise strategies to achieve the objective and specific
to carry out the strategies. These elements—audience,
goals, objectives, strategies, tactics—can be rendered in a grid
form that becomes the basis for writing the public relations plan.
When other elements are added—who is responsible, what is the
timeline, what is the budget, how will attainment be evaluated—
public relations plan is ready for implementation.
Early theories of mass communication held that a communicator
could directly sway the masses, or that they were influenced by
winning over their opinion leaders. Diffusion theory, however,
holds that people are influenced by their peers through word of
mouth. Though the media do not tell people what to think,
agenda-setting theory asserts that the media shapes what people
think about. Even so, uses and gratifications theory depicts
people not as passive recipients but as active consumers who
make media choices based on their individual wants and needs.
Theories of persuasion begin by distinguishing between beliefs,
attitudes, values, and opinions. Many major theories assert that
change is the key to persuasion. Cognitive dissonance
holds that people are innately driven to reconcile conflicting
social judgment theory holds that attitudes are bands or
of what people accept or reject; and the elaboration
model claims that only motivated and able listeners can
have strong and lasting attitude changes. Finally, two major
theories of public opinion take different approaches. Lang and
Lang’s collective dynamics model sees public opinion forming
through debate and consensus, while Noelle-Neumann’s spiral of
model sees public opinion emerging as dissenters
increasingly keep silent for fear of being isolated.
The four-step model of the public relations process describes
research, planning, communication, and evaluation. Yet
evaluation not only occurs at the end but is ongoing throughout a
campaign—and is, in fact, the start of the research phase for the
next campaign. Moreover, evaluative criteria and procedures
should be part of the written public relations plan. The BASIC
cycle of public relations (build awareness, advance knowledge,
sustain relevance, initiate action, create advocacy) provides a
basis for evaluating a campaign. Stakeholders can be asked—
through interviews, focus groups, and surveys—what they recall,
what they know, how much it matters to them, what they intend to
do about it, and whether they will tell others.
EXERCISES
Think of a campus or community group to which you belong.
Chances are it would benefit from recruiting more members. Ask
yourself: What stake do potential members have in the
organization? Who influences their decisions? What are their
demographics (e.g., age, education, income) and psychographics
(e.g., lifestyle, politics, religion)? What do they think of your
group? Why don’t they join? Make a grid and list all the ways your
group currently tries to reach potential members. Then make a
SWOT grid to analyze these efforts. Use the coorientation model
identify how potential members may misperceive your group—
and how you misperceive them. What messages are needed to
align potential members’ perceptions with the identity of your
organization? Make a list of media channels that are available to
disseminate those messages.
As you continue to think about your campus or community group,
start with the long-term goal of recruiting more members. Now
formulate a realistic short-term objective of recruiting “X”
members within “Y” amount of time. Next, put these into a grid,
add columns for strategies and tactics, and fill in the grid.
How can you bring about an attitude change toward your campus
or community group among potential members? Write copy for
three different fliers. In the first, write a message that might
reduce cognitive dissonance that people feel between joining a
Demographics :
and thinking they don’t have the time. In the second, write a
message aimed at people who might consider joining your group,
but only if you can show them the time commitment is
manageable. In the third, write your very strongest argument for
joining to people who are most likely to be motivated and able to
the time.
Apply the BASIC cycle to the membership recruitment efforts of
your campus or community group. What has your group done to
build awareness and advance knowledge of your group, to make
it seem relevant, and then to get people to act on that relevance
joining) and to tell others? Gather information on these
questions by interviewing current members and asking how they
became aware of your group, learned more about it, found it
relevant, and acted by joining. Then interview potential members
and ask what they recall about any communications your group
has sent out, what they know about your group, whether or not
they think it has relevance to them, and why they have not joined.
KEY TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
Predisposition to respond a given way toward a thing.
Confidence that a given thing exists or is true.
The nonattitudinal characteristics of a population group, such as age, gender, education level, income, ethnicity, and family status.
longer-term end stated in general terms.
Psychographics :
A shorter-term end that can be measured and attained within a specified time (e.g., “X will increase by Y within Z months”).
Behavioral inclination that is expressed to others.
The attitudinal characteristics of a population group, such as political beliefs, religious beliefs, and lifestyle preferences.
A program for attaining an objective.
A means for carrying out a strategy.
Conviction that a given mode of doing or being is best.
R. E. (1976). Building a public relations definition. Public
Relations Review, 2, 34–42.
S. M. (1995). Public relations history: From the 17th to the 20th
century. Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.
S. M. (1994). The unseen power: Public relations: A history.
Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.
Accreditation Board. (2010). Study guide for the
accreditation in public relations (2nd ed.). New York, NY:
Relations Society of America.
G. M., Casey, S., & Ritchey, J. (2000). Toward a concept and
organization-public relationships: An update. In J. A. Ledingham
Bruning (Eds.), Public relations as relationship management: A
relational approach to public relations (pp. 3–22). Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum;
Ledingham, J. A. (2006). Relationship management: A general theory of
relations. In C. Botan & V. Hazleton (Eds.), Public relations theory
II (pp. 412–428). Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.
Relations Society of America. (2013). What is public relations?
Retrieved from http://www.prsa.org/AboutPRSA/PublicRelationsDefined
T., & Grunig, J. E. (1984). Managing public relations. New York,
NY: Holt, Rinehart & Winston; Grunig, J. E., & Grunig, L. A. (1992).
Models of public relations and communication. In J. E. Grunig (Ed.),
Excellence in public relations and communication management (pp. 285–
326). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.
D. W., & Marsh, C. (2012). Public relations: A values-driven
approach (5th ed.). Boston, MA: Allyn & Bacon.
K. R. (1971). The concept of corporate strategy.
IL: Irwin.
quotation is reproduced in hundreds of books but, unfortunately,
never provided. Still, the idea fits well with Mead’s notion of
interactionism.
G. M. (1977). Coorientational measurement of public
Relations Review, 3, 110–119; Broom, G. M., & Dozier,
D. M. (1990). Using research in public relations: Applications to program
Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall; Grunig, J. E., & Hunt,
T. (1984). Managing public relations. New York, NY: Holt, Rinehart &
M. F., & Ford, D. J. (2010). Organizational rhetoric:
Situations and strategies. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
R. D., & Dominick, J. R. (2003). Mass media research: An
introduction (7th ed.). Boston, MA: Wadsworth, p. 386.
Accreditation Board. (2010). Study guide for the
accreditation in public relations (2nd ed.). New York, NY:
Relations Society of America.
E. M. (2003). Diffusion of innovations (5th ed.). New York,
Accreditation Board. (2010). Study guide for the
accreditation in public relations (2nd ed.). New York, NY:
Relations Society of America, p. 29.
M., & Shaw, D. (1972). The agenda-setting function of
mass media. Public Opinion Quarterly, 36, 176–187; McCombs, M.
(2004). Setting the agenda: The mass media and public opinion.
UK: Polity Press.
Katz, E., Blumler, J. G., and Gurevitch, M. (1973/74). Uses and
gratifications research. Public Opinion Quarterly, 37, 509–523.
example, see Rokeach, M. (1968). Beliefs, attitudes, and values:
A theory of organization and change. San Francisco, CA: Jossey-Bass.
the classic definition in Allport, G. (1935). Attitudes. In C.
Murchison (Ed.), A handbook of social psychology (pp. 789–844).
MA: Clark University Press.
T. D., and Hodges, S. D. (1992). Attitudes as temporary
constructions. In L. L. Martin & A. Tesser (Eds.), The construction of
judgments (pp. 37–65). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.
L. (1957). A theory of cognitive dissonance. Evanston, IL:
Sherif, C. W., Sherif, M., & Nebergall, R. E. (1965). Attitude and
attitude change: The social judgment–involvement approach.
PA: Saunders.
Petty, R. E., & Cacioppo, J. T. (1996). Attitudes and persuasion:
Classic and contemporary approaches. Boulder, CO: Westview.
H. M. (2008). Effects of the news media on public
opinion. In W. Donsbach & M. W. Traugott (Eds.), The SAGE handbook
of public opinion research (pp. 192–204). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage, p.
F. (1958). The psychology of interpersonal relations.
Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum, p. 89.
M. J. (1995). The nature and function of attribution theory
organizational sciences. In M. J. Martinko (Ed.), Attribution
theory: An organizational perspective (pp. 8–16). Delray Beach, FL: St.
W. (1922). Public opinion. New York, NY: Harcourt, Brace.
H. M. (2008). Effects of the news media on public
opinion. In W. Donsbach & M. W. Traugott (Eds.), The SAGE handbook
of public opinion research (pp. 192–204). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage, p.
V., & Tewksbury, D. (1997). News values and public opinion: A
account of media priming and framing. In G. A. Barnett & F. J.
(Eds.), Progress in communication sciences: Advances in
persuasion, Vol. 13 (pp. 173–212). Westport, CT: Ablex.
K., & Lang, G. E. (1961). Collective dynamics. New York, NY:
Noelle-Neumann, E. (1974). The spiral of silence: A theory of public
of Communication, 24, 43–51; Noelle-Neumann, E.
spiral of silence: Public opinion—our social skin. Chicago, IL:
Chicago Press.
Noelle-Neumann, E. (1991). The theory of public opinion: The
concept of the spiral of silence. In J. A. Anderson (Ed.), Communication
yearbook 14 (pp. 256–287). Newbury Park, CA: Sage, p. 276.
an overview, see Scheufele, D. A., & Moy, P. (2000). Twenty-five
the spiral of silence: A conceptual review and empirical outlook.
International Journal of Public Opinion Research, 12, 3–28; Scheufele, D.
A. (2008). Spiral of silence theory. In W. Donsbach & M. W. Traugott
(Eds.), The SAGE handbook of public opinion research (pp. 175–183).
Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
Accreditation Board. (2010). Study guide for the
accreditation in public relations (2nd ed.). New York, NY:
Relations Society of America, p. 40.
Michaelson, D., & Stacks, D. W. (2011). Standardization in public
relations measurement and evaluation. Gainesville, FL: Institute for
Public Relations. Retrieved from http://www.instituteforpr.org/iprwp/wp-
content/uploads/Standardization-in-Public-Relations-Measurement-and-
Evaluation-FINAL-8-17.pdf
14.2 Advertising and Marketing
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
1. Understand basic considerations in media research, copy testing,
market research, and product usage research.
2. Delineate the basic components of a media plan and a marketing
communications plan.
3. Delineate the basic considerations of a creative strategy.
4. Understand the similarities and differences between evaluating
the results of advertising and marketing and evaluating the results
of public relations.
When the Super Bowl is television’s most-watched event, and when millions
tune in just to see the commercials, it is safe to say that advertising has a firm
place in American popular culture. No matter your age, remembering a
commercial you heard as a kid instantly transports you back to childhood.
Advertising can also be controversial—from ads for sugary kids’ breakfast
cereals to representations of idealized body image that many link to eating
disorders. [1] But whether nostalgic or controversial, advertising is a pervasive
feature of modern life. So it may be difficult to imagine a world, really not so
long ago, without advertising as we know it.
Think about it. Before capitalism and liberal democracy, the economic resources
of kingdoms and estates were the province of nobility. Before the Industrial
Revolution, there were no mass-produced goods that required mass
consumption. Just as important, before the nineteenth century, there were no
technologies for mass communication. Such technology did not emerge until the
mid-nineteenth-century “revolution of cheap print” and rise of mass-circulation
“penny press” newspapers. [2] The first radio advertisement was aired in 1922,
though some years transpired before advertising became the economic mainstay
of the new medium. [3] Through radio’s golden age of the 1930s and 1940s, and
on to the first decade of television in the 1950s, advertisers sponsored programs
(“soap operas” were so named because broadcasts were sponsored by soap
makers) rather than buying sixty- or thirty-second spots. Not until the early
1960s, when single sponsors could no longer afford rising ad rates for whole
programs, did “spot advertising” become the norm. [4] And that brings us to the
point of this chapter section.
As we saw earlier, the concept of integrated marketing communications (IMC)
holds that all an organization’s external communications—advertising,
marketing, and public relations—can draw from the same data about target
audiences to craft focused messages and choose appropriate channels. Indeed,
though each function is its own discipline, each one also overlaps with the other
two to a significant degree. Those charged with advertising and marketing ask,
just as public relations professionals do, questions about the demographics and
psychographics of target audiences. And they ask the organization’s publics the
same questions about recall, knowledge, interest, intent, and preference—except
the questions are about consumer attitudes about brands and products, rather
than issues, risks, and crises. So we will not repeat our previous discussion of
these research and planning tasks. But where advertising and marketing differ
most from public relations is their use of controlled media—that is, media the
organization pays to control the content, placement, and frequency of its
messages. In fact, this very “spot advertising” has been a feature of print media
for more than a century, broadcast media for half a century, and online media for
a generation. And this brings us to the subject of media research.
Step 1: Research
The essence of media planning is to find the right media mix that provides the
biggest bang for the organization’s advertising and marketing buck. Finding that
mix involves an array of acronyms and industry terms—HUT, PUT, PUR, TRP,
CPM, CPP, RPC, MSA, DMA, ADI, TSA, share, rating, impressions, reach,
and frequency. On the one hand, the public relations professional researches
publics and stakeholders; thinks about coorientation and public opinion; and,
hoping to secure positive media coverage, practices effective media relations. By
contrast, the advertising and marketing professional researches consumers;
compares media buys to sales generated; and, knowing that the organization’s
message will run, determines the best media mix to ensure the purchased
coverage gets maximum results. This type of media research, comparing cost to
coverage of paid media, is the special province of advertising and marketing.
Media Research
Media planners generally consider seven criteria when researching their media
options: [5]
1. Can a given medium deliver the targeted consumers without money wasted
on nontargeted audiences?
2. Can the medium accumulate a large actual audience within its total
potential audience?
3. How fast does the medium’s actual audience accumulate?
4. Can the medium deliver selected geographic areas?
5. How far in advance must ad spots be purchased?
6. Does the medium control when consumers are exposed to the spots?
7. Where are consumers physically located when they are exposed to the
spots?
To illustrate, consider these examples:
Thirty-second TV spots aired during National Football League playoff
games would deliver controlled exposures to a large and quickly
accumulating at-home audience of (predominantly) adult males. But the
medium offers poor geographic flexibility, and ads must be purchased long
in advance.
By contrast, a thirty-second spot on a local religious radio station also
delivers controlled exposures to a defined demographic (mostly female) and
psychographic (evangelical religious) audience, and that audience will
quickly max out its potential reach. Yet local radio, whose listeners are
mostly in the car and not at home, offers the advantages of short lead times
to purchase spots and considerable geographic flexibility.
A full-page ad in Seventeen or Boy’s Life also delivers a highly targeted
national audience. But the audience accumulates slowly over time, ads must
be bought months in advance, advertisers do not know at what time of the
month readers will see their ads, and the total reach is hard to quantify since
it includes an uncertain pass-along readership.
Ads in local newspapers may have limited reach and little control over
exposure times, but they allow great flexibility through targeted
geographies and short lead times for ad purchases.
Banner ads on the Drudge Report website may deliver a well-defined target
audience of primarily at-home users and the flexibility to buy the ads on
short notice. But the site’s audience accumulates slowly, and there is little
control over when users see the ads.
The concept of media mix comes into play when advertisers, as they typically
do, spread their ad dollars around rather than place them all in a single medium.
Putting multiple media into a media plan allows an organization to reach more
consumers, reach them in a (less expensive) secondary medium when the
potential audience of the primary (and more costly) medium is maxed out,
leverage the properties (visual, aural, textual) of different media to create a
synergism, and disseminate print coupons to reinforce broadcast ads. [6]
Nevertheless, no organization has an unlimited budget for advertising and
marketing. Most companies set their annual budgets at a percentage of annual
sales, ranging—according to one survey of two hundred US industries—from
0.1 percent (aircraft manufacturing) to 17 percent (transportation services). [7] So
deciding how to spread a limited budget across a growing array of media choices
demands considerable research—which brings us to the world of media research
acronyms and formulae. These are summarized in Table 14.4.
Table 14.4 Media Buying Terms and Formulae
Term Definition Formula [8]
HUT Homes Using Television: percentage of homes using TV Rating ÷ Share =
HUT
PUT People Using Television: percentage of people using TV Rating ÷ Share =
PUT
PUR People Using Radio: percentage of people using radio Rating ÷ Share =
PUR
Share percentage of HUT, PUT, or PUR tuned to a given program
Rating ÷ HUT =
Share
Rating ÷ PUT =
Share
Rating ÷ PUR =
Share
Rating percentage of people or homes exposed to a medium
HUT × Share =
Rating
PUT × Share =
Rating
PUR × Share =
Rating
TRPs
Target Rating Points: sum of rating points (i.e., combined
percentages of people or homes exposed to a given medium)
delivered by the list of mediums within a media plan
Reach × Frequency
= TRPs
Impressions combined numbers of people or homes delivered by the list of
mediums within a media plan
TRPs × Number of
people or homes =
Impressions
Reach percentage of different people or homes exposed to ad campaign
within a designated time period
TRPs ÷ Frequency
= Reach
Frequency average number of times that people or homes are exposed to ads TRPs ÷ Reach =
Frequency
CPM Cost per Thousand: cost to reach 1,000 people or homes delivered
by a given medium
(Cost ÷ Audience)
× 1,000 = CPM
CPP Cost per Point: cost to purchase one TV or radio rating point Cost ÷ TRPs =
CPP
RPC Readers per Copy: sum of primary publication readers plus pass-
along readers (e.g., waiting rooms)
Total readers ÷
Circulation = RPC
MSA Metropolitan Statistical Area: federal government designation for
an urbanized area and the counties in which it is located
DMA Designated Market Area: term used by Nielsen ratings service to
designate a metropolitan television market
ADI Area of Dominant Influence: term used by Arbitron ratings service
to designate a metropolitan television market
TSA Total Survey Area: term used by Arbitron to designate a
metropolitan radio market
Since the Internet emerged as a consumer medium in the 1990s, the media
industry has grappled with various means for content providers (e.g., websites,
electronic publications, social media, mobile apps) to verify the number of users
they can deliver to advertisers. Nielsen Media Research, known for its television
ratings service, also measures audiences for online and mobile media by
selecting a scientific sample of consumers and asking them to keep diaries.
Arbitron, the leading radio ratings service, likewise surveys online and mobile
media usage by attaching a meter to the devices of consumers who agree to
participate. And the Alliance for Audited Media, which has verified magazine
and newspaper circulation since 1914, works with digital media companies to
audit their usage statistics. Meanwhile, the Interactive Advertising Bureau
(IAB), founded in 1996, sets industry standards and guidelines for verification of
online advertising claims—as do the Radio Advertising Bureau (RAB) and
Television Advertising Bureau (TAB) for their respective industries.
As if the array of acronyms and industry terms for print and broadcast media
were not enough, online media have their own industry terms that advertising
and marketing professionals must know. A hit occurs each time a web server
sends a file to a browser. A page view occurs each time a visitor views a web
page. A visit happens when a human or robot user accesses a site. A single visit
can generate multiple page views (since websites have multiple pages) and
dozens of hits (since each page is loaded with accessible files). For that reason,
hits and page views are generally of less interest to advertisers than visitors. And
since a user can visit a site multiple times, advertisers want to know how many
unique visitors a site can claim. Among the hundreds or thousands of visits to a
website, what will be the actual number of different people who may see an ad?
Copy Testing
One way advertising and marketing differs from public relations is its use of
controlled (paid) media. Thus advertising and marketing professionals carefully
research media options before they make any media buys. Another difference is
that, unlike public relations messages that are filtered by media gatekeepers, the
content of advertising and marketing messages is determined by the
organization. For that reason, professionals research not only the coverage and
costs of media outlets but also the potential effectiveness of their creative
strategy—that is, the messages the organization is going to pay for. Such
research is typically called copy testing, although the research tests visual and
aural elements, as well as the text of an ad. Roger Wimmer and Joseph Dominick
surveyed the literature on copy testing and suggested, as shown in Table 14.5,
that research should address a series of questions that can be usefully broken
down into three broad dimensions. [9]
Table 14.5 Wimmer and Dominick's Dimensions of Copy Testing
Dimensions Research Questions
How effectively did test ad gain consumer’s attention?
What elements of ad did consumer notice most?
In what sequence did consumer notice elements of ad?
Cognitive
How long did it take consumer to recognize headline/product/brand?
How long did it take consumer to comprehend theme?
How much did consumer recall after exposure?
Affective
Did ad change attitude of consumer toward product?
To what degree did consumer like or dislike ad?
Did ad emotionally involve consumer?
Behavioral
What was consumer’s purchasing behavior before exposure?
Did consumer’s purchasing intent change after exposure?
Copy testing research can be quite sophisticated. Among technologies developed
for the purpose are eye-tracking cameras, tachistoscopes, electronic response
indicators, pupilometers, galvanic skin response tests, brain-wave analysis, facial
electromyography, and whole batteries of psychological tests and scientific
surveys. Clearly, advertisers who may spend millions on media buys, and who
anticipate more millions in subsequent sales, want to get it right. Scores of
consumer research firms are in business to help them find the answers they seek.
Although most companies do not go to these lengths, copy testing the creative
strategy—even just showing test ads to focus groups—is an essential component
of media planning.
Market and Product Research
Just as advertisers can hire firms to do sophisticated copy testing, so are there
firms that conduct market research and product research—and then sell it to
organizations. Demographic and psychographic data about consumers can be
obtained from such leading firms as Experian Marketing Services, GfK
Mediamark Research & Intelligence, Strategic Business Insights, and Nielsen.
These and other agencies address an array of questions about the market:
What demographic and psychographic groups are using what products?
What groups are using what brands? How loyal are they?
When and how often do various consumer groups buy?
What motivates various consumer groups to buy?
How much are various consumer groups spending?
What do various consumer groups look for in a product?
What are the needs, wants, and problems of various consumer groups?
How do various consumer groups look at life?
What demographics and psychographics prevail in what locations (from
cities and counties even to zip codes and city blocks)?
Based on these data, customized research can investigate the current attitudes of
various consumer categories about an organization’s particular product or brand,
and whether, as presented in an advertising and marketing campaign, that
product or brand can potentially deliver what consumers want or need and meet
or exceed their expectations. By the same token, research firms can analyze an
organization’s competitors and look for untapped openings in the market. Thus
armed with research about media and message options, about the target market,
and about the challenges and opportunities facing its product or brand, the
organization can move forward to the planning phase of its advertising and
marketing campaign.
Step 2: Planning
Writing a media plan is, in many ways, similar to writing a public relations plan.
As we learned earlier about any public relations campaign, an advertising and
marketing campaign should also start with goals (longer-term ends stated in
general terms) and move to objectives (shorter-term specific ends that can be
measured and accomplished within a stated time period), strategies (how to
attain each objective), and tactics (how to carry out each strategy). Also like a
public relations plan, a media plan should list who is responsible, budgeted
amounts, timeline for execution and completion, and how results will be
evaluated. Nevertheless, more details are needed. One summary [10] of what to
include in a media plan lists the following components:
Marketing
objectives
…with which advertising must be integrated
Market research ...that defines target markets and consumers
Creative strategy ...that describes the message and its design
Promotion strategy ...with which advertisements must be coordinated
Sales data ...to provide a baseline to determine ad scheduling
Competitive activity ...to reveal opportunities competitors may have missed
Audience ...to specify whom the advertising should reach
Geography ...to specify where advertising should be concentrated
Scheduling ...to specify when and in what media the advertising should run
Copy ...to specify the content of the advertising
Coupons ...to specify how adveretising may be supported b promotion
Reach and
frequency
...to specify how many people, how often, the advertising must
reach
Testing ...to specify how progress will be assessed and adjustments made
Note how advertising that influences the behavior of targeted consumers must
work in tandem with marketing that promotes a product or brand. Thus media
planners must be aware of a larger picture. Donald Parente has described how
the concept of marketing evolved after World War II. [11] During the 1950s,
organizations adopted a consumer orientation in which marketing sought to meet
pent-up demand for goods that consumers had to forgo during the Great
Depression of the 1930s and then the war years of the 1940s. By the 1960s and
1970s, increasingly sophisticated consumers demanded more diverse product
offerings, prompting organizations to promote their wares through market
segmentation, or pitching products to narrower segments of the public. This
development intensified in the 1980s and 1990s until niche marketing, or
creating whole product lines for specific consumer segments, became the norm.
In the new century, mass customization and personalization are the emphases for
marketing as companies modify existing products for specific segments, create
products customized to those segments, or make personalized marketing pitches.
Thus, for example, cell phone makers offer modifications that allow users to
personalize standard phones (from color choices to customizable apps), services
pitched to different consumer segments (such as phones with contracts, phones
with no contracts, and stripped-down phones for seniors), and personalized
marketing messages (often sent to consumers via their own phones).
Because advertising occurs within this larger universe of how products and
brands are marketed, the integrated marketing communications approach
described earlier kicks in. A comprehensive marketing communications plan
would include the following: (1) research on the organizations and its
consumers, markets, products, and competitors; (2) overall goals and objectives
for marketing, advertising, and public relations; and (3) specific objectives,
strategies, and tactics for advertising and media, marketing and promotion, and
public relations.
Step 3: Communication
Scheduling when and where an organization’s advertisements and marketing will
appear is the how of a campaign. Creative strategy is the what of the campaign.
Given the vast array of print, broadcast, and digital media today, a discussion of
how to write and design copy is far beyond the scope of a textbook on
organizational communication. An extensive literature already exists on the
subject. But just as we focused on some underlying principles such as
coorientation to lay the groundwork for developing public relations messages, so
we can focus on some basic considerations in developing advertising and
marketing messages.
Before creating any advertisement or marketing piece, of course, the
organization must determine the target audience and then decide its creative
goals and objectives. If its brand or product is new or little known, the goal
might be to create awareness that puts the offering on the map. Or if the offering
is well established, the goal might be to create “top-of-mind” awareness so that
targeted consumers think of the brand or product first, before that of competitors.
From there, as we learned earlier, goal-setting must move to formulating
objectives—that X will increase by Y within Z months.
Next, strategies must be fleshed out to achieve the objectives. Thus a creative
objective is achieved by devising a creative strategy. Since advertising and
marketing efforts may span various forms of print, broadcast, and digital media,
and since spots will run at various times rather than all at once, the creative
strategy unifies the campaign. In broad terms, Parente has summarized—as
shown in Table 14.6—seven general strategies that a creative team might
employ. [12]
Table 14.6 Parente's General Creative Strategies
Strategy Description May be used when...
Generic Describe benefits without comparisons to
competition brand/product dominates market
Preemptive Be first to claim key benefit competing products provide similar benefits
Unique Emphasize distinguishing benefit brand/product has differentiating factor
Brand
Image
Change or reinforce consumer attitudes
toward the brand
differences between products are difficult to
distinguish or maintain
Positioning Place brand/product in unfilled niche taking market share from market leaders
Resonance Associate brand/product with positive
feelings
product category (e.g., automotive) is
widespread and highly visible
Affective Create emotional bond between target
consumers and brand/product brands/products are hard to differentiate
Once a general strategic approach is determined, specific creative strategies may
be addressed. Overall, the creative strategy should incorporate four elements:
1. The strategic focus of creative work must be the goal that the campaign is
to achieve. Thus, for example, the goal of a regional public university might
be to increase enrollment, with an objective of 3 percent annual growth
over three years.
2. The positioning of the creative strategy supplies the context for the
campaign. So the university in our example ascertains it must recruit in a
market where potential students are worried about tuition costs and where
nearby institutions are aggressively pushing financial-aid packages.
3. The big idea of the creative strategy is the theme that gets the attention of
the target audience and unifies the advertising and marketing messages.
Therefore, the university decides its spots will feature testimonials from
recent graduates, of various majors and ages, who stress the affordability of
their degrees and how the investment paid off in a satisfying new career.
4. The continuity of the creative strategy ensures—typically through a
unifying slogan, character, and/or stylistic elements—that the campaign
leaves a common impression on the target audience. So the university
creates print, broadcast, and digital media advertisements, each with a
testimonial from a recent graduate, but all featuring the slogan “An
Investment You Can Afford,” along with the university mascot and the
same color scheme and (for broadcast and digital) theme music.
Goals and objectives are translated into strategies and then into tactics that
execute the strategies. That principle applies as well to creative strategies that
must be turned into creative tactics. This occurs as organization leaders, after
reviewing the research and determining the strategies, write a creative brief, or a
document that guides the staff who creates the advertisements and marketing
pieces. Finally, the campaign is ready to launch when the creative work is
approved and then run according to the schedule specified in the media plan.
Step 4: Evaluation
As we saw earlier with public relations, so the evaluation phase of an advertising
and marketing campaign is really the launch for the research phase of the next
campaign. And that means many of the precampaign research activities
described earlier will be repeated in the postcampaign evaluation. The former
provides a baseline for assessing the results of the latter. In other words, as
compared to how targeted consumers felt about an organization’s product or
brand before the campaign, repeating the same research will reveal how they feel
after the campaign. Consumer surveys, focus groups, and interviews can
demonstrate whether and how attitudes have changed. Market research can
indicate whether product buying and usage patterns have risen in the
organization’s favor.
To give you an idea of how such postcampaign research might work, recall the
BASIC cycle of communication objectives introduced in the previous section on
evaluating public relations campaigns. As you can see in Figure 14.5, BASIC is
an acronym for a five-step cycle of building awareness, advancing knowledge,
sustaining relevance, initiating action, and creating advocacy. Then, as illustrated
in Figure 14.6, these five steps can guide postcampaign evaluations as the
organization surveys the target audiences on what they recall, what they know,
whether they think it matters, what they intend to do about it, and whether they
prefer the organization’s message and would recommend it to others. David
Michaelson and Don Stacks [13] have suggested how interview and survey
questions might be modified—as shown in Table 14.7—depending on whether a
public relations campaign or an advertising and marketing campaign is being
evaluated.
Table 14.7 Postcampaign Evaluation: Michaelson and Stacks
Public Relations Evaluation Advertising and Marketing Evaluation
Awareness "Do you recall any of the following
(issues/topics)?"
"Do you recall any of the following
(brands/products/services)?"
Knowledge "Indicate your level of agreement with
each statement about an (issue/topic)."
"Indicate your level of agreement with each
statement about a (brand/product/service)."
Interest "Indicate your level of interest in this
(issue/topic)."
"Indicate your level of interest in this
(brand/product/service)."
Intention "How likely are you to support this
(issue/topic)?"
"How likely are you to (try/purchase) this
(brand/product/service)?"
Preference "Which (issue/topic) one do you support
the most?"
"Which (brand/products/services) do you
prefer?"
A Word of Warning
One coauthor of this book (Mark Ward) asks his public relations students to
choose a film in which the discipline is a major focus of the storyline. A classic
film buff, he has reviewed depictions of public relations, advertising, and
marketing in films produced from decades past to the present day. These
depictions, stretching back more than eighty years, are almost uniformly
negative. Public relations, advertising, and marketing are nearly always
portrayed as manipulative and their practitioners as cynical or unscrupulous.
While real-life professionals wince, the sheer universality of the Hollywood
version in our popular culture suggests a conflict at the heart of modern society
and the human condition. The power to persuade, multiplied by mass media,
carries with it the power to deceive.
Anthony Pratkanis and Elliot Aronson have called this generation the Age of
Propaganda. Writing at the turn of the millennium—the numbers have surely
increased since then—they noted that Americans each day are exposed to nearly
twenty billion print ads, forty million pieces of direct mail, more than eleven
million websites, almost three million radio commercials, half a million
billboards, and more than a quarter of a million television commercials. [14] Not
all this content, of course, is propaganda. Public relations, properly conducted as
a two-way dialogue, can resolve conflicts. Advertising and marketing can make
people aware of solutions they need, as well as promote comparison and
competition that keep prices down. The distinction between persuasion and
propaganda, say Pratkanis and Aronson, is simple. Persuasion is thoughtful;
propaganda is mindless. In other words, persuasion encourages deliberation
before choosing; propaganda encourages choosing without deliberation. They
have catalogued more than two dozen propaganda techniques—from the
granfalloon (making up a meaningless organization and telling people they
belong) to the norm of reciprocity (giving people something so they feel
compelled to give something in return). Appeals to fear or guilt, use of slippery
or colorful words, citation of doctored statistics or selective facts, the
manufacture of credibility through emotional confessions or celebrity
endorsements—all these and more make the list.
Earlier in this book—in fact, right after the introduction—we devoted a whole
chapter to organizational communication ethics. Perhaps you may want to go
back and reread Chapter 2, for you will need a steady ethical compass to resist
the temptations that come with the power to persuade. Yet as the Public
Relations Society of America states, in the first Core Principle of its Member
Code of Ethics: “Protecting and advancing the free flow of accurate and truthful
information is essential to serving the public interest and contributing to
informed decision making in a democratic society.” [15]
Similarly, the Standards of Practice for the American Association of Advertising
Agencies and the American Marketing Association Statement of Ethics also
expand on the importance of ethics. You can access the Standards of Practice and
Statement of Ethics here.
Public relations, advertising, marketing—each discipline demands, as the highest
ethical values of professional practice, a commitment to thoughtful persuasion
rather than mindless propaganda.
KEY TAKEAWAY
At least four types of research go into an advertising and marketing campaign:
1. Media research investigates the available media options along with their coverages and costs. The goal of a media plan is to determine the best media mix, or scheduling of various mediums, for the plan budget.
2. Copy testing ascertains the effectiveness of the advertising itself by finding out how various designs were perceived by test subjects and if attitudes and intentions were changed.
3. Market research, which can be purchased from firms that specialize in such research, reveals the demographics and psychographics of a target audience, or their nonattitudinal (e.g., age, gender, income, education level, ethnicity, family status) and attitudinal (e.g., political, religious, and lifestyle preferences) characteristics.
4. Product research, also available for purchase, investigates the product usage patterns of targeted consumers.
A media plan specifies the audience and geographic areas that
advertising is designed to reach, when and in what media the
advertising is scheduled to run, the content of the advertising,
how many targeted consumers the advertising should reach and
how often, and how results will be evaluated. This data can be
folded into an overall marketing communications plan that sets
forth the research; delineates broad goals and objectives for
marketing, advertising, and public relations; and lists specific
objectives, strategies, and tactics for advertising and media,
marketing and promotion, and public relations.
An advertising and marketing campaign needs a creative strategy
to guide the content and design of its messages. In broad terms,
general creative strategies include generic (describe a benefit
without making comparisons), preemptive (claim a benefit before
competitors do), unique (emphasize a distinguishing benefit),
brand image (boost the brand rather than a benefit), positioning
(put the brand/product in a niche not addressed by competitors),
resonance (associate the brand/product with positive feelings), or
affective (create a bond between the brand/product and
consumers). After deciding the broad strategic outline, the
creative strategy must focus on the goal that the campaign is
intended to achieve, position the strategy within the context of the
market and the competition, specify the theme that gains
consumer attention and unifies the campaign, and provide
continuity—often with a slogan and common design elements—
that ensures consumers come away with a common impression.
Once all these are determined, a creative brief is written to guide
the design efforts of the creative staff.
As with public relations, an advertising and marketing campaign is
a four-step process of research, planning, communication, and
evaluation. Yet once again, evaluation not ONLY occurs at the
end but is ongoing throughout a campaign and is, in fact, the start
of the research phase for the next campaign. Here, too, the
BASIC cycle of communications (build awareness, advance
knowledge, sustain relevance, initiate action, create advocacy)
provides a basis for evaluating a campaign. Targeted consumers
can be asked what they recall, what they know, how much it
matters to them, what they intend to do about it, and whether they
will tell others. However, evaluation of an advertising and
marketing campaign will ascertain what consumers think about
the organization’s brand or product, rather than its position on an
issue, risk, or crisis.
EXERCISES
1. Think of a product you enjoy and the brand you favor. Make a list
of all the media in which advertising and marketing messages
about the brand have reached you. Why did the company that
owns the brand choose those media? To answer that question, do
some “market research” on yourself. List the demographic traits
(e.g., age, gender, education, income) and psychographic traits
(e.g., lifestyle preferences, hobbies and interests) that best define
you. How do those traits relate to the advertising and marketing
mediums that the brand owner chose—perhaps by advertising on
a TV show that appeals to your age group or sponsoring a special
event that appeals to people who share your interests?
2. Now find some samples of advertisements or promotions run by
that brand and do your own “copy test.” Looking at a particular ad
or promo, what gets your attention? What do you notice the most?
How long did it take you to recognize the brand and to get the
ad’s main idea? Do you like the ad? Does it involve you
emotionally? Do you think the ads and promos that you’ve seen
for the brand are a reason why you prefer it? Now go back to the
list you made of your most defining demographic and
psychographic traits. Again, how do these relate to design of the
ads and why the brand owner went with those designs?
3. As you continue to think about the product you enjoy and the
brand you prefer, look again at the samples of advertisements
and promotions you have collected. What was the brand owner’s
general creative strategy—generic, preemptive, unique, brand
image, positioning, resonance, or affective? Why do you think the
brand owner chose this strategy? And why did the strategy work
with you? Also, what are common elements of the ads and
promos—such as slogan, color scheme, theme music—that unify
these messages and give them continuity? If you prefer this
brand, then the messages must have had a cumulative effect on
you and left a common impression. Describe that impression.
4. Describe in your own words the difference between persuasion
and propaganda. Then think about the advertising, marketing, and
public-relations messages to which you are exposed each day.
Perhaps write down a list of ads and promos that pop into your
head; do some surfing on the TV, radio, and Internet; or keep a
diary for one day of all the messages you see, hear, or read.
Consider each one and ask yourself: Did the message encourage
me to think and then choose, or to choose without thinking?
Would you characterize it as thoughtful persuasion or mindless
propaganda? Why?
Frequency:
Hit :
Impressions:
Media Buys:
Media Mix:
Media Plan:
Media Planning:
Page View:
Propaganda :
Rating:
Reach:
Share:
Unique Visitors:
Visit :
KEY TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
The average number of times that people (or homes) are exposed to an advertisement.
When a web server sends a file to a browser.
The combined numbers of people (or homes) delivered by the list of media within a media plan.
The purchase of space in a publication or airtime on a broadcast.
The combination of different media that, ideally, yields the most cost-effective reach and frequency with the target audience.
The plan that specifies the target audience for an advertising campaign, when and in what media the ads will run, the content of the ads, how many consumers the ads should reach and how often, and how results will be evaluated.
As a professional discipline, the work of researching and scheduling media placements.
When a visitor accesses a web page.
Messages that encourage choosing without mindful deliberation.
The percentage of people (or homes) exposed to a medium.
The percentage of different people (or homes) exposed to an advertising campaign within a designated time period.
Percentage of people (or homes) using television (or radio) who are tuned to a given program.
The number of different users who visit a website.
When a human or robot user accesses a website.
[1] For example, see Darvell, M. (2000). Eating disorders, body, and the
media. London, UK: British Medical Association.
[2] Starr, P. (2004). The creation of the media: Political origins of modern
communications. New York, NY: Basic Books.
[3] Lewis, T. (1991). Empire of the air: The men who made radio. New
York, NY: HarperCollins.
[4] Sterling, C. H., & Kitross, J. M. (2002). Stay tuned: A history of
American broadcasting (3rd ed.). Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.
[5] Surmanek, J. (1996). Media planning: A practical guide (3rd ed.).
Chicago, IL: NTC Business Books.
[6] Surmanek, J. (1996). Media planning: A practical guide (3rd ed.).
Chicago, IL: NTC Business Books.
[7] Ad Age. (2007, August 15). Advertising as percent of sales in 2007.
Retrieved from http://adage.com/article/datacenter-advertising-
spending/advertising-percent-sales-2007/119881/
[8] Surmanek, J. (2004). Advertising media A to Z. New York, NY:
McGraw-Hill.
[9] Wimmer, R. D., & Dominick, J. R. (2003). Mass media research: An
introduction (7th ed.). Boston, MA: Wadsworth.
[10] Surmanek, J. (1996). Media planning: A practical guide (3rd ed.).
Chicago, IL: NTC Business Books.
[11] Parente, D. E. (2006). Advertising campaign strategy: A guide to
marketing communication plans (4th ed.). Mason, OH: Thomson South-
Western.
[12] Parente, D. E. (2006). Advertising campaign strategy: A guide to
marketing communication plans (4th ed.). Mason, OH: Thomson South-
Western.
[13] Michaelson, D., & Stacks, D. W. (2011). Standardization in public
relations measurement and evaluation. Gainesville, FL: Institute for
Public Relations. Retrieved from http://www.instituteforpr.org/iprwp/wp-
content/uploads/Standardization-in-Public-Relations-Measurement-and-
Evaluation-FINAL-8-17.pdf Michaelson, D., & Stacks, D. W. (2011).
Standardization in public relations measurement and evaluation. Public
Relations Journal, 5 (2), 1-22.
[14] Pratkanis, A., & Aronson, E. (2001). Age of propaganda: The
everyday use and abuse of persuasion (Rev. ed). New York, NY: Owl
Books, p. 5.
[15] Public Relations Society of America. (2013). Public Relations Society
of America (PRSA) member code of ethics. Retrieved from
http://www.prsa.org/aboutprsa/ethics/codeenglish/
14.3 Chapter Exercises
REAL-WORLD CASE STUDY
Until 1980, the federal government took responsibility for nuclear
waste disposal. That year, Congress passed a law giving
responsibility for low-level, non-defense-related waste to the states.
A 1985 amendment allowed states to form regional compacts and
share responsibility. The eight states of the Southeastern region
decided to take twenty-year turns hosting low-level nuclear waste
sites. Since South Carolina had already hosted such a site for many
years, regional officials agreed in 1987 that North Carolina would
take its turn starting in 1993. The state legislature created the North
Carolina Low-Level Radioactive Waste Management Authority and
specified a schedule of deadlines for making decisions.
The authority soon fell behind its deadlines and incurred public
wrath. For one thing, its advisory committee was stacked with more
industry representatives—from nuclear power, the business
community, and state administration—than citizens. The committee
later vetoed a proposal to seat more citizens, fearing such a move
might “dilute” the quality of its decisions. Nor could the committee
reach consensus on a plan for public involvement; citizen members
pushed for extensive participation, but industry and government
representatives favored more controlled input. Ultimately (and past
the original deadline) the authority adopted a Public Participation
Plan (PPP) and spent $2 million on an extensive public relations
campaign: mass mailings, a mobile information van, speakers’
bureau, school curriculum, traveling exhibits, toll-free information
line, dissemination of authority documents and meeting minutes,
media news releases and public service announcements,
backgrounders, fact sheets, media kits, talk-show interviews, photo
ops, a regular newsletter, and printed and audiovisual materials sent
to libraries statewide. Public comment, however, was invited only at
the end of the process after the authority had completed its
deliberations and presented its case.
Public anger mounted and, when Wake County was chosen to host
the low-level nuclear waste site, the public felt the decision lacked
credibility. Two scholars at North Carolina State University studied
the controversy and concluded that the public was not won over
because the authority maintained “ideological control of language
and values vested in the siting process by the belief in the efficacy
of science and technology to solve all problems.” [1] Thus the
authority saw its PPP as a way to “correct” public opinion, viewed
public participation as a “controlled” process in which it “received”
comments, and disdained public emotion, which it felt had no place
in a scientific and technical issue. The two scholars acknowledged
that the authority acted conscientiously within its own assumptions
of public good. But its public relations were “based on a one-way,
asymmetric, elitist communication process” that was itself based on
an overly mechanistic SMCR (source-message-channel-receiver)
communication model. [2]
1. Which of Grunig and Grunig’s four models of public relations was
practiced by Waste Management Authority? Explain your answer.
2. On what resource, controlled by the general public, did the
authority depend? Explain why.
3. Do a SWOT analysis for the authority.
4. How might the authority have benefited from the coorientation
model? Work the case through the model yourself to explain
where misperceptions occurred and how they might have been
addressed.
5. Do you think the authority employed the hypodermic needle
theory of mass communication? Why or why not?
6. How might diffusion theory explain the spread of public discontent
over the process for siting the low-level nuclear-waste facility?
7. How did the beliefs, attitudes, and values of the scientific and
technical experts of the authority differ from those of most
citizens?
8. Using Lang and Lang’s collective dynamics model, describe how
public opinion about the nuclear waste issue was formed.
END-OF-CHAPTER ASSESSMENT
1. Which one of the following is not one of the four models in Grunig and Grunig’s four models of public relations?
a. press agentry/publicity b. press relations c. public information d. two-way asymmetrical e. two-way symmetrical
2. Which of the following is not one of the rhetorical situations faced by organizations in external communications?
a. manage identity b. manager issues c. manage media d. manage risk e. manage crises
3. Which theory holds that when people encounter media coverage on an issue, they are sensitized to further such coverage and more likely to seek it out and think about it?
a. attribution theory b. schema theory c. framing theory d. social judgment theory e. priming theory
4. To what does the term impressions refer?
a. the percentage of people or homes tuned to a given program
b. the percentage of people or homes exposed to a medium c. the combined numbers of people or homes delivered by
the list of media within a media plan d. the percentage of different people or homes exposed to an
ad campaign within a designated time period e. the average number of times that people or homes are
exposed to an advertisement
5. The BASIC cycle of marketing communications is:
a. build knowledge, advance action, sustain awareness, initiate advocacy, create relevance
b. build relevance, advance awareness, sustain knowledge, initiate action, create advocacy
c. build awareness, advance advocacy, sustain action, initiate knowledge, create relevance
d. build awareness, advance knowledge, sustain relevance, initiate action, create advocacy
e. build relevance, advance awareness, sustain knowledge, initiate advocacy, create action
Answer Key
1. b
2. c
3. e
4. c
5. d
[1] Katz, S. B., & Miller, C. R. (1996). The low-level radioactive waste
siting controversy in North Carolina: Toward a rhetorical model of risk
communication. In C. G. Herndl & S. Brown (Eds.), Green culture:
Environmental rhetoric in contemporary America (pp. 111–140). Madison:
University of Wisconsin Press, p. 123.
[2] Katz, S. B., & Miller, C. R. (1996). The low-level radioactive waste
siting controversy in North Carolina: Toward a rhetorical model of risk
communication. In C. G. Herndl & S. Brown (Eds.), Green culture:
Environmental rhetoric in contemporary America (pp. 111–140). Madison:
University of Wisconsin Press, p. 134.
Chapter 15
The Professional Side of Organizational Communication
Organizational Change
One of the most common dilemmas the modern organization is faced with
involves change. Organizational change is a systematic approach for
developing and dealing with new situations and markets in an attempt to help an
organization reach its desired goals smoothly and successfully. When we attempt
to change an organization, it is key not only to think of the process as systematic
but also to look at change from a systems perspective. One of the biggest
mistakes an organization can make when attempting change is to think of change
as fixing a small problem instead of trying to see the underlying causes of the
problem, how this problem is affected by other parts of the system, and how the
problem affects other parts of the organization. Change management refers
then to the systematic application of tools and techniques to create structural,
cultural, and/or personnel modifications within an organization to help the
organization achieve a desired result. You’ll notice that this definition refers to a
variety of tools and techniques. This chapter explores only a handful of change-
management tools and techniques, because there are volumes written on the
subject elsewhere. The changes that are ultimately desired occur in one of three
categories: structural, cultural, and personnel. Structural changes are changes
within the organizational hierarchy or workflow processes in an attempt to make
the organization more effective and efficient. Cultural changes are the
systematic modification of an organization’s shared attitudes, behaviors, beliefs,
and values. Lastly, organizations can undergo personnel changes, or the
systematic analysis and education of individual employees or groups of
employees to ensure specific attitudes, knowledge, and skills needed to complete
organizational tasks.
Obviously, change isn’t easy. In fact, change can be a very time-consuming and
costly endeavor. To help organizations systematically think through
organizational change, Geri McArdle and Cheryl Hanson proposed an eight-step
change process model (Figure 15.1). [1]
Figure 15.1 Change Process Model
Change Management:
Cultural Changes:
Organizational Change:
Structural Changes:
Personnel Changes:
This basic model is designed to help change managers or consultants think
through the entire change process. You’ll notice that the majority of the model
involves the stages necessary for preparing for the change intervention. The rest
of this chapter examines a number of different ways change managers and
consultants can help organizations change. All the following change
management processes are commonly used by communication consultants who
specialize in organizational change.
KEY TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
The systematic application of tools and techniques to create structural, cultural, and/or personnel modifications within an organization to help the organization achieve a desired result.
The systematic modification of an organization’s shared attitudes, behaviors, beliefs, and values.
A systematic approach for developing and dealing with new situations and markets in an attempt to help an organization reach its desired goals smoothly and successfully.
Modifications within the organizational hierarchy or workflow processes in an attempt to make the organization more effective and efficient.
The systematic analysis and education of individual employees or groups of employees to ensure specific attitudes, knowledge, and skills needed to complete organizational tasks.
[1] McArdle, G., & Hanson, C. (2006). An eight-step change model
(Infoline No. 0608). Alexandria, VA: ASTD Press.
15.1 Organizational Development
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
1. Define the term organizational development.
2. Describe the simplified organizational-development model.
3. Analyze Kurt Lewin’s three-phase model of change.
4. Differentiate among the four steps in David Cooperrider and
Suresh Srivastva’s appreciative inquiry 4-D model.
In the introduction to this chapter, we briefly discussed the notion of
organizational change. Let’s face it, organizations (and people) generally do not
like change. One of the basic notions of systems theory is that organizations
strive toward equilibrium (or balance). Anyone attempting to change an
organization tries to get that organization (and the people within it) to allow for a
state of movement while a new form of equilibrium is found for the organization
(and its people). As such, systems generally try to avoid change at all costs and
only succumb to change when the majority of organization members are finally
on board. Anyone who has attempted to get an organization to alter its path with
the support of only a handful of people will know that change simply cannot be
facilitated with a few people. Although a handful of people may initiate change,
organizational change must be larger and more systematic for it to truly take root
and be effective. Everett Rogers, in his book Diffusion of Innovations, talks
about how people adapt to change. He places individuals in one of five
categories (see Figure 15.2). [1] As you can see, those who are most likely to
advance change within an organization are only 2.5 percent of any given
population. Furthermore, there are always those who will avoid change at all
costs (the 16 percent laggards). The purpose of change, then, is generally
focused on getting the early and late majorities on board. One way both external
and internal consultants can help organizations in their striving toward change is
through organizational development.
Figure 15.2 Diffusion of Innovations
What Is Organizational Development?
For our purposes, organizational development is defined as the use of
behavioral and social science research to enhance organizational and individual
performance through (1) the examination of organizations as large, complex
systems and (2) planned practice of changing and reinforcing organizational
processes, strategies, and structures to improve organizational outcomes. Let’s
break this definition down into a number of parts.
Behavioral and Social Science Research
Organizational development (OD) is fundamentally rooted in the literature of the
behavioral and social sciences. In fact, the goal of organizational development
consultants is to use the latest research from various fields in an effort to help an
organization change. As such, organizational development practitioners tend to
use a wide range of tactics that have proven useful in organizational research.
Whether that research comes from the fields of business,
industrial/organizational psychology, or organizational communication is of less
concern than the practical use of these ideas to make organizations, and their
members, stronger and healthier. For this reason, people who work in OD must
keep up with the latest in business research.
Performance Focused
Organizational development consultants are ultimately focused on performance
at both the individual and organizational levels. First, OD consultants seek out
appropriate intervention strategies that will help develop individuals or groups of
performers within the organization. Later in this chapter, we’ll focus specifically
on both training (Section 3) and human performance improvement (Section 4) as
both individual and group ways of improving organizational outcomes. For now,
we are going to focus on the more macro aspects of organizational development.
These performance-focused interventions are generally larger and more holistic
within an organization. The goal of these performance interventions is to help
organizations focus on change and reinforcement of this change.
Systems Perspective
Important factors for organizational development include both a larger systems
view of organizations and the systematic process for implementing
organizational change. First, OD consultants need to think of organizations as
large, complex entities that take on a life of their own. They have their own
intricate ways of behaving and responding, so getting a larger perspective of
what is occurring within an organization is a must for any OD practitioner.
Second, the process used by an organizational development consultant must be
systematic. We examine a number of different organizational development
intervention strategies in this chapter, all of which take a very systematic
approach to developing an organization. This notion is hardly new. Alan J. Dale
was one of the first US scholars to propose a systems model for OD. [2]
Although previous scholars had discussed the notions of systems thinking at the
organizational level, Dale’s model was the first to combine this knowledge into a
practitioner-focused model that could be used for organizational change and
reinforcement of that change.
Change and Reinforcement
The last part of our definition of OD is focused on the use of planned practice of
changing and reinforcing organizational processes, strategies, and structures to
improve organizational outcomes. We start with the notion that organizational
development should be a planned practice. In essence, OD should not be done on
a whim. Too many internal and external OD consultants just dive into
development without thinking through the development process. The goal of this
planned process is to help organizations both change and then reinforce the
change that occurs. Once the OD intervention has taken place, you cannot
simply stand back and think your job is over. If someone is not constantly
overseeing change, people will naturally slip back into old patterns of behaving
and thinking. As such, it’s important for an OD consultant to periodically check
in to ensure that the OD intervention is still working and being implemented as
originally intended.
Ultimately, the goal is to change/reinforce organizational processes, strategies,
and structures. First, OD consultants can focus on changing organizational
processes that are cumbersome and take too long. For example, imagine you
work in a department that uses a lot of copy paper for very important documents.
If your department has to order copy paper from a central supply warehouse that
makes deliveries only once a week, the process simply may not be quick enough
if you have pressing needs. Maybe your department is suddenly flooded with
documents that need copying, and you run out of paper. This, we might add, is a
real example from one of our schools. An OD consultant could look at this
process and realize it is cumbersome and inefficient. Maybe the department
should be allowed to order directly from an office-supply company during
periods of crisis, or maybe the warehouse needs more personnel to make
biweekly deliveries instead of weekly. We might add that many organizational
communication consultants examine these problematic communication processes
within an organization as an area of OD. Admittedly, depending on the OD
consultant’s background, he or she may have very different perceptions of the
process problems that are seen and eventually addressed. For this reason, having
an interdisciplinary consultant team can actually be very beneficial, because the
team would allow for a broader approach and scope for OD.
Second, OD consultants can focus on organizational strategies that will improve
the current products and services of an organization or help them realize new
ones. The goal of working with organizational strategies is to help the
organization realize what it can be and then what steps need to be taken to get
there. Every organization needs to revisit the basic mission and vision of the
organization periodically and see how an OD consultant can help them achieve
that mission and vision to a greater degree.
Lastly, OD consultants can focus on organizational structures that may be
cumbersome or problematic. The goal for these interventions is to examine
which structures within an organization are working and which ones are not.
Maybe an organization has too many midlevel managers who are cutting off
upper administration from what happens on the shop floor or in the field. The
OD consultant could recommend repurposing those midlevel managers in a way
that would increase information sharing. Other structures focus on workers’
abilities to efficiently complete a product or service. If there are too many checks
and balances that slow down the product development or service
implementation, the OD consultant could recommend cutting out layers of
oversight that are simply duplications. It’s often amazing how many
organizations do not even realize that individuals in different departments are
performing the same tasks. This redundancy is both costly and ineffective. As
organizational communication OD consultants, we often examine
communication structures and how both formal and informal communication
paths may cause problems or at least prevent highly effective internal and
external communication. (For more information about communication paths, see
Chapter 5.)
Simplified Organizational Development Model
For our purposes, we are going to look at a very simplified model for
organizational development. In this basic model (Figure 15.3), we are viewing
the OD consultant as an external party who first needs to gain entry into the
organization. Maybe the consultant is contacted by upper management or the
board of directors. Ultimately, the OD consultant is approached and asked for
her or his expertise. Generally, the consultant will speak to a range of key
stakeholders to get a better understanding of the perceived development needs. [3]
Figure 15.3 Simplified OD Model
Once the OD consultant has a firm grasp on the needs, he or she will move into
the contracting phase. The purpose of the consulting contract phase is to prepare
a written document explaining the OD process and what possible outcomes
would look like for the organization. The more specific an OD consultant can be
during this process, the easier it will be for both the consultant and the
organization to evaluate results. For example, if senior management expects to
see a completely overhauled organization in one month, they may be seeking a
highly unrealistic outcome. As such, it becomes the OD consultant’s job to help
clarify expectations.
Once the contract is signed, the OD consultant enters the organization at a
deeper level and looks for processes, strategies, and structures that may be
preventing the organization from achieving its goals. Remember, the OD process
is ultimately performance focused, so seeing the organization as a large system
with many working parts becomes crucial during this phase. For example, if one
department cannot work on new innovations until another department has
completed its process, the whole project timeline can be slowed down if the first
department has problems. This larger, systematic view helps the OD consultant
come up with possible OD intervention recommendations that fit within the
organization’s existing framework. In other words, one size does not fit all. Each
organization is unique and will need a slightly different OD approach.
After the organizational discovery period, the consultant will recommend ways
to change and/or reinforce existing processes, strategies, and/or structures. These
recommendations should be as specific as possible, taking the whole system into
consideration. For example, if an OD consultant is hired to examine nursing
processes in a hospital, the consultant would be highly constrained if he or she
could not also look at the processes and practices of physicians who interact with
nurses or how patients interact with nurses. Ultimately, the proposed OD
intervention should be able to view all sides of a problem.
The next phase of the OD model is to implement the recommendations.
Although implementation and evaluation are represented as separate processes
on the model, we argue that the two are highly intertwined. From the moment an
intervention is implemented, the OD consultant should be on hand to evaluate
the intervention and make appropriate changes. Eventually, the OD consultant
will want to produce a larger evaluation of the overall OD intervention for the
purposes of clearly articulating to the C-Suite what was done and what was
accomplished. As we discussed in Chapter 9, the C-Suite consists of those
individuals who exist in chairman-level positions within an organization (chief
executive officer, CEO; chief operations officer, COO; chief learning officer,
CLO; etc.). We’ll discuss evaluation in great detail in Section 3.
The final phase of the OD model is the recontracting or exit phase. Many
projects just end, so the OD consultant may hand off the OD intervention to
internal personnel who can keep the intervention running. At other times, OD
consultants may be asked to work on additional problems occurring within an
organization. Organizations often need improvement, and using an OD
consultant is a viable way to help organizations reach their goals.
Methods and Tools for Organizational Development
First, there are no clear-cut strategies for organizational development. Even the
Simplified Organizational Development Model is not 100 percent applicable in
every Organizational Development context. Thankfully, a number of different
strategies have been developed over the years to help OD consultants think
through their individual approaches. In this section, we examine two common
OD practices used today: action research and appreciative inquiry. [4]
Action Research
The first approach to organizational development that we are going to
specifically explore in this chapter is action research. Simply defined, action
research is “both a model and a process. In its simplest form, action research is a
process whereby research, or fact-finding, precedes action and follows it.” [5] To
call this a single approach is a misnomer. In fact, quite a few different
approaches that people have developed over the years fall into the category of
action research. Simply, the goal of action research is to conduct systematic
organizational research related to change (or fact finding) and then make
approach changes. Once changes are made, the process starts again in a never-
ending cycle of fact finding and changes.
The first person to make action research famous was social worker and
anthropologist John Collier. Collier was appointed by President Franklin D.
Roosevelt as the Commissioner of Indian Affairs. During Collier’s tenure as
commissioner, he recommended making small changes and then observing the
effects of those changes. After the effects of the previous changes were
observed, he would then try new changes. However, Collier wasn’t the only
person interested in this idea. A contemporary of Collier’s was German-born
immigrant Kurt Lewin. [6]
Lewin wasn’t exactly interested in organizational change. He was looking for
patterns that would aid in larger patterns of social change. In his eventual
publication in 1958 of the book Group Decision and Social Change, Lewin put
forth the first real model for change: unfreezing, changing, and refreezing. [7]
This simple model was designed to enable groups to think through how change
can happen within the larger social construct.
Unfreezing
First, an individual or organization must realize that change is necessary. Usually
this arises after the organization faces a problem. Maybe an organization is
realizing that its central product or service is losing traction in the larger
marketplace. Maybe another organization is rapidly understanding that when the
current CEO steps down in two months, there will be a huge leadership vacuum.
Whatever the reason, organizations face a change and must therefore react to
what is occurring within the environment or internally.
Changing
The second step in Lewin’s model is where action research takes traction. Lewin
argued that when organizations are faced with change, they must develop new
models and theories for handling and understanding change. However, these new
models and theories need to be tested, refined, and retested over time.
Refreezing
Once an organization has become comfortable with the new models and theories
for organizational behavior and processes, the organization refreezes. In essence,
these new models are no longer viewed as changes but become part of the status
quo.
Using Action Research in Organizational Development
Organizational development consultants often use action research as a tool for
helping organizations change and reinforce organizational processes, strategies,
and structures to improve organizational outcomes. In fact, the OD model
discussed in Figure 15.3 can easily be adapted to this model. The biggest change
is a feedback loop between recommend, implement, and evaluate. After each
evaluation, the OD consultant makes a new recommendation to be implemented
and evaluated. In this process, the organizational consultant could proceed in this
pattern of organizational change indefinitely, always striving to improve the
organization and help it achieve desired outcomes.
Appreciative Inquiry
In 1980, David Cooperrider and Suresh Srivastva were brought in to work with
the Cleveland Clinic on a large-scale organizational analysis that would
eventually become part of Cooperrider’s dissertation. [8] In 1987, the two
published a chapter titled “Appreciative Inquiry in Organizational Life,” which
was the first time the term appreciative inquiry (AI) was used. [9] The notion
behind appreciative inquiry suggests “the idea that collective strengths do more
than perform—they transform.” [10] In essence, AI practitioners use the AI
process to help organizations recognize their strengths in a manner that helps to
transform both the organization and the individuals within the organization.
By definition, appreciative inquiry “is the cooperative, coevolutionary search
for the best in people, their organizations, and the world around them. It involves
systematic discovery of what gives life to an organization or a community when
it is most effective and most capable in economic, ecological, human terms.” [11]
Where most OD consultants start by examining specific organizational
problems, the AI consultant sees the OD as a positive process for helping
organizations and individuals recognize their strengths. Where typical OD starts
with identifying the problem, AI OD starts with appreciating the best that
already exists within the organization. Therefore, AI attempts to help
organizations recognize and value their strengths, envision a future for the
organization, and engage in dialogue about what the organization should be. This
process is often referred to as more “humane,” because it doesn’t start with the
notion that organizations (and therefore their members) are problematic or
broken and need to be fixed. Instead, AI approaches organizations and
individuals as opportunities to be explored and wells of untapped experience and
resources. To help OD consultants adopt an AI approach, AI consultants follow
the 4-D cycle for AI (Figure 15.4).
Figure 15.4 4-D Model
Definition
The first step in the AI process (and not actually part of the true 4-D model), is
definition. Definition is very similarly to the contracting phase discussed in the
OD model in Figure 15.3. At this point, the AI consultant sets out to accomplish
three tasks: (1) decide what to learn about, (2) decide who should be involved,
and (3) decide how to involve those individuals. First, AI isn’t just a “fly by the
seat of your pants” process with no direction. Any OD consultant using AI
should start with a general idea of what he or she needs to learn more about
when starting the consulting process, usually by talking to various stakeholders
or the person involved in hiring the consultant. Part of that learning process is a
refinement of what is currently occurring, who is involved currently, and who
should be involved. Generally, the broader the range of people involved in the AI
process, the more useful the AI intervention will ultimately be. Lastly, the AI
practitioner needs to decide how he or she will encourage individuals to
participate in the AI process. AI is not simply a workshop that one goes to, but it
is a process of transformative change, so buy-in is necessary from all levels of
the organization when implementing.
Discovery
Once the AI consultant has defined the affirmative topic choice, he or she moves
into the 4-D model. The first step is discovery, which involves encouraging a
wide range of stakeholders to articulate what they view as the organization’s
strengths and best practices. During this step of the 4-D model, the AI consultant
must set the positive tone for the process. For this reason, great effort is spent
thinking about the types of questions that should be asked. For example, an AI
consultant wouldn’t say to a group of stakeholders, “Tell me about the current
weaknesses you see in the organization.” This type of question is inherently
nonaffirming and can even lead to blaming. Instead, ask questions that seek out
positive responses from organizational stakeholders to get a stronger grasp on
the current state of the organization.
Positive Questions
Diana Whitney, David Cooperrider, Amanda Trosten-Bloom, and Brian S.
Kaplan wrote a book specifically designed to help AI consultants frame
positive questions, The Encyclopedia of Positive Questions: Using
Appreciative Inquiry to Bring Out the Best in Your Organization. Here are
just five examples from this book:
1. Put yourself in your customers’ shoes. What do you think they would
say if we asked them what makes this organization best-in-class?
2. Tell me about a time when you received can-do coaching. What did it
help you to accomplish? What capacities did it help you discover?
3. Tell me about a time when compelling communication allowed you and
another person to really connect and to work together exceptionally
well. What was the situation? What was it about you, the other person,
and the communication that made it possible?
4. When has new technology helped to facilitate and further cooperation in
this organization? What was that experience like? What hope does it
give you for the future?
5. Where in the organization is participatory decision making at its best?
What contributes to it? How does it work? [12]
Dream
The second step in the AI model is the dream step. The dream step creates a
“clear results-oriented vision in relation to discovered potential and in relation to
questions of higher purpose, such as, ‘What is the world calling us to become?’” [13] In this step, participants involved in the AI process are asked to brainstorm
what the organization “might be” or “might become.” The goal here is not to
think about current roadblocks to the dream but simply to figure out what the
dream is and should be. During this step, AI consultants often have individuals
at various parts in the organizational hierarchy work with each other to “dream
big.” The goal here is to help break down hierarchical walls that often exist
between people and focus on how everyone can help the organization succeed.
Design
The fourth step in the process is really where the “rubber meets the road,” and
individuals participating in AI determine how to achieve the dream. According
to David Cooperrider, Diana Whitney, and Jacqueline Stavros, there are four
steps to the design process: (1) select design elements, (2) identify
internal/external relationships, (3) identify themes and engage in dialogue, and
(4) write provocative propositions. [14] First, individuals during the design phase
should select the design elements necessary to allow the dream to become
reality. Also during this period, ideas are fully clarified. For example, if the goal
of an organization is to increase customer service, then the group needs to define
what excellent customer service is before it can determine how to get there.
Second, individuals in the AI process need to identify internal and external
relationships. The goal here is to identify individuals both within and outside the
organization who contribute to building the organization’s positive core, or those
factors that make an organization and its people the best.
Third, the AI consultant will have individuals participating in the AI program
reexamine the data the consultant collected while he or she was defining the
affirmative topic choice. The goal is to have individuals look through the various
responses for themes that relate to the dream. These themes help feed the design.
Lastly, the AI consultant helps the individuals going through the AI process
write provocative propositions. The goal of provocative propositions is to put on
paper the desired qualities organization members want for their organization.
Destiny
The destiny step is where organization members initiate the change process and
keep its momentum in an effort to create ongoing positive change within the
organization. At this point, individuals and departments talk about how they can
help achieve the dream in specific, concrete ways. The “key to sustaining the
momentum is to build an ‘appreciative eye’ into all of the organization’s
systems, procedures, and ways of working.” [15]
KEY TAKEAWAY
Organizational development is defined as the use of behavioral
and social science research to enhance organizational and
individual performance through (1) the examination of
organizations as large, complex systems and (2) planned practice
of changing and reinforcing organizational processes, strategies,
and structures to improve organizational outcomes.
The simplified organizational development model consists of seven basic steps:
1. An organizational development consultant is asked to engage in some form of OD in the organizational entry step. Also during the organizational entry step, the OD consultant starts to gain a better understanding of the problem(s) facing the organization.
2. The OD consultant creates a consulting contract that specifies what the OD process will look like and the expected results.
3. The OD consultant further investigates the organization from a systems perspective in an attempt to gain a better understanding of underlying causes of problems.
4. The OD consultant makes recommendations for OD interventions to key stakeholders.
5. The OD consultant implements the agreed-upon OD intervention.
6. The OD consultant evaluates the OD intervention. There should be a constant loop between steps 4, 5, and 6, and changes should occur as necessary.
7. The OD consultant either hands off the OD intervention to
internal personnel or begins a new OD project.
Kurt Lewin explains that change happens in three distinct steps:
1. An organization is faced with some kind of problem and realizes that it must change (unfreezing).
2. The organization develops new models and theories for handling and understanding change, which are then tested, refined, and retested over time (changing).
3. Once an organization becomes comfortable with the new models and theories for organizational behavior and processes, the organization incorporates those changes into the status quo, and the change process stops (refreezing).
4. David Cooperrider and Suresh Srivastva originally created the 4-D model for appreciative inquiry in the 1980s. The 4- D model starts with the design phase. In the discovery step, the OD consultant encourages a wide range of stakeholders to articulate what they view as the organization’s strengths and best practices. In the second step, dream, the OD consultant has individuals think about what the organization can become. In the design step, the OD consultant has individuals complete four tasks: select design elements, identify internal/external relationships, identify themes and engage in dialogue, and write provocative propositions. Lastly, the OD consultant enters into the final step in the 4-D model, destiny. In the destiny step, individuals and departments talk about how they can help achieve the dream in specific, concrete ways.
EXERCISES
1. In the introduction to this chapter, we discussed the eight-step
Action Research:
Appreciative Inquiry:
change process model proposed by Geri McArdle and Cheryl
Hanson (Figure 15.1). Using the change model, outline how you
could use either action research or appreciative inquiry to ensure
organizational change.
2. Think about an organization that you currently belong to. If you
were to go about helping that organization change, which model
of organizational development (action research or appreciative
inquiry) would you want to use? Why?
3. One of the most important parts of the appreciative-inquiry process is asking questions positively. Reframe the following negatively worded questions and make them positive:
1. What’s wrong with your organization? 2. Why do you think your organization has its current
problems? 3. Tell about an incident that made you feel devalued in this
organization. 4. What improvements do you think this organization needs
to make? 5. What problems do you see with your current leadership?
Immediate supervisor? Upper management? CEO?
KEY TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
Organizational development method where an OD consultant conducts systematic organizational research related to change followed by an implementation of those changes. Once changes are made, the process starts again in a never-ending cycle of research and changes.
Organizational development method that focuses
Organizational Development:
on increasing the positive aspects of an organization and uses what the organization does well to further its goals instead of focusing on organizational problems and how to fix those problems.
The use of behavioral and social science research to enhance organizational and individual performance through (1) the examination of organizations as large, complex systems and (2) planned practice of changing and reinforcing organizational processes, strategies, and structures to improve organizational outcomes.
[1] Rogers, E. M. (1995). Diffusion of innovations (4th ed.). New York, NY:
Free Press.
[2] Dale, A. J. (1972). A systematic approach to organizational
development. Journal of Management Studies, 9, 57–73.
[3] Minahan, M., Vogel, J., Butler, L. E., & Taylor, H. B. (2013). Facilitation
101: The basics to get you on your feet. In J. Vogelsang et al. (Eds.),
Handbook for strategic HR: Best practices in organization development
from the OD network (pp. 35–45). New York, NY: American Management
Association.
[4] Haneberg, L. (2005). Organizational development basics. Alexandria,
VA: ASTD Press.
[5] Haneberg, L. (2005). Organizational development basics. Alexandria,
VA: ASTD Press, p. 21.
[6] Lewin, K. (1946). Action research and minority problems. Journal of
Social Issues, 2(4), 34–46. doi:10.1111/j.1540-4560.1946.tb02295.x
[7] Lewin, K. (1958). Group decision and social change. New York, NY:
Holt, Rinehart & Winston.
[8] Cooperrider, D. (1984). Appreciative inquiry: Toward a methodology
for understanding and enhancing organizational innovation (Doctoral
dissertation, Case Western Reserve University, Cleveland, OH).
[9] Cooperrider, D. L., & Srivasta, S. (1987). Appreciative inquiry in
organizational life. In W. Pasmore & R. Woodman (Eds.), Research in
organization change and development (pp. 129–169). Greenwich, CT:
JAI Press.
[10] Cooperrider, D. L., & Whitney, D. (2005). Appreciative inquiry: A
positive revolution in change. San Francisco, CA: Berrett-Koehler, p. 2.
[11] Cooperrider, D. L., & Whitney, D. (2005). Appreciative inquiry: A
positive revolution in change. San Francisco, CA: Berrett-Koehler, p. 8.
[12] Whitney, D., Cooperrider, D., Trosten-Bloom, A., & Kaplan, B. S.
(2005). Encyclopedia of positive questions: Using appreciative inquiry to
bring out the best in your organization (Vol. 1). Brunswick, OH: Crown
Custom, pp. 8, 10, 11, 14, & 19.
[13] Cooperrider, D. L., & Whitney, D. (2005). Appreciative inquiry: A
positive revolution in change. San Francisco, CA: Berrett-Koehler, p. 16.
[14] Cooperrider, D. L., Whitney, D., & Stavros, J. M. (2008). Appreciative
inquiry handbook for leaders of change (2nd ed.). San Francisco, CA:
Berrett-Koehler.
[15] Cooperrider, D. L., Whitney, D., & Stavros, J. M. (2008). Appreciative
inquiry handbook for leaders of change (2nd ed.). San Francisco, CA:
Berrett-Koehler, p. 47.
15.2 Communication Analyses and Audits
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
1. Differentiate between communication analyses and
communication audits.
2. Explain the difference between individual assessments and
organizational communication research.
3. Analyze the International Communication Association
organizational communication audit.
4. Explain Cal Downs and Michael Hazen’s Communication
Satisfaction Questionnaire.
5. Evaluate the parts of written organizational reports related to
communication assessments and audits.
People love to understand what works and what doesn’t work within an
organizational environment. One area that is commonly said to be problematic
involves communication within the organization. The next tool that’s available to
individuals who study organizational communication is the communication
analysis or audit.
Organizational Communication Analyses
For our purposes, we define communiction analysis and communication audit
with respect to their intended goals. A communication analysis is conducted
when a group of people sets out to examine a specific type of organizational
communication or a variable related to organizational communication. For
example, if your goal is to find out what type of leadership communication style
senior managers are using, you could find a mental measure that purportedly
examines leadership and hand it out to senior managers. Such a study is
generally done for an individual’s knowledge about her or his communication
style or conducted as part of general scientific research on the subject of
organizational communication.
Individual Assessments
People enjoy learning about themselves and how they fit, behave, and
communicate within the world around them. There is an entire industry set up to
help individuals “learn” more about how they lead, communicate, handle
conflict, negotiate, learn, and many other communicative and psychological
variables. These assessments can be very useful when attempting to diagnose
possible problems within an organization, if they are seen as diagnostic. For
example, imagine you’ve been brought into an organization as an external
consultant because the organization’s senior management isn’t receiving
information fast enough from those who work in the field. The senior
management just assumes it’s happening from a lack of training, so they want
you to “fix” their employees. You may think right off the bat that you may be
hearing about a problem related to organizational dissent or employee silence.
(We discussed both concepts in Chapter 5.)
To help you determine if your assumptions are correct, you could perform a
simple needs analysis at the beginning of training. You get permission to use the
organizational dissent scale and the employee silence/voice measures in your
training. Notice we do say that you need to get permission. By permission, we
are talking about getting permission from the author of the original scale herself
or himself. Research scales are generally allowed for use in academic
environments for research purposes, but when you want to use one of these
measures in a professional environment, you will need to have permission. Some
researchers will gladly give you permission via e-mail or request a nominal fee
for each participant completing the measure. The Educational Testing Service
(ETS), the same group that creates and administers the Scholastic Assessment
Test (SAT) and Graduate Record Examination (GRE), also has a large database
of research tests for perusal. This is a good database for finding possible
measures, but you would still need permission to use any test located in the
database.
Let’s say that you get permission to use the Employee Silence Scale. At the
beginning of a training workshop, you could hand out the scale to participants
and have them score themselves on the degree to which they feel they remain
silent or express themselves within the organization.
Employee Silence Scale
Instructions: The following are perceptions that individuals may have about
how they engage with others in the workplace. Please describe your
characteristic behavior (across time and across situations) by responding to
the following items:
Strongly Disagree Disagree Neutral Agree Strongly Agree
1 2 3 4 5
1. I really just don’t care, so I’m pretty unwilling to express my thoughts at
work. _____
2. I withhold ideas because my workplace will never change. _____
3. I keep my ideas about possible workplace solutions to myself. _____
4. I appear to express agreement at work because no one listens anyway.
_____
5. I just go along with the group because nothing will change. _____
6. To avoid “rocking the boat,” I just sit, smile, and nod my head in
agreement. _____
7. I don’t express ideas for workplace improvements to protect myself.
_____
8. I withhold solutions to problems because I’m just tired of having them
shot down. _____
9. I usually express agreement with the group because I’ve learned over
time that expressing disagreement just gets you in trouble. _____
10. I never make recommendations concerning issues that affect the
organization. _____
Scoring Information
Add your scores for items 1 to 10: _______________________
Explanation
Scores between 10 and 23 represent people who believe it’s possible to
openly share ideas in the workplace.
Scores between 24 and 37 represent people who believe that there are
definitely times when it’s not beneficial to speak up within the organization.
Scores between 38 and 50 represent people who have learned over time to
avoid communicating their concerns and ideas at work.
This measure was created for this text.
In the sidebar, you can see the Employee Silence Scale. In this case, you’ll
notice that the version handed out to workshop participants clearly comes with
information for interpreting an individual’s scores. These types of measures may
not be overly accurate, but they are often a great place to start a longer
conversation on the topics of employee silence and voice.
Organizational Communication Research
The second type of organizational communication assessment involves
organizational communication research. At this point, we are talking about any
qualitative or quantitative research conducted within an applied organizational
communication setting. As such, individuals would need to be aware of the rules
for conducting specific types of research to ensure that they are following best
practices. Applied organizational communication research is often conducted in
an effort to help an organization diagnose specific and pose solutions to those
problems. For example, maybe an organization is worried that an individual
employee’s silence levels are impacting her or his productivity and likelihood of
voluntarily leaving the organization. An external researcher could easily conduct
a survey study to ascertain if there is a relationship like this within the
organization itself.
Qualitative organizational communication researchers could also examine the
same phenomenon through the use of either interviews or focus groups related to
the topic. In an interview, the research would ask a set of questions (called an
interview schedule) designed to help the researcher focus the conversation. A
focus group is similar to the interview, but the participants in the group can help
expand on each other’s ideas.
One major caveat about any kind of organizational communication research
should be addressed. As a researcher, you are ethically obligated to ensure your
participants’ anonymity or privacy. The only way any of this works is if a
participant knows that the researcher will not divulge information that could be
traced back to the individual participant (whether positive or negative). Because
of the problems associated with this type of workplace research, some countries
have made it illegal outright.
Organizational Communication Audits
An organizational communication audit gives reference to a more thorough
understanding and evaluation of the communication practices and processes
within an organization. The real purposes for conducting an organizational
communication audit are to “put people’s tasks and interactions into the context
of a complex set of interactions that the participants may perceive differently.” [1]
Conducting Audits
In their book Assessing Organizational Communication: Strategic
Communication Audits, Cal Downs and Allyson Adrian discuss the processes
communication researchers should employee when conducting a communication
audit. Ultimately, they believed that there are six specific characteristics that
should always be followed.
Independence
The first characteristic of a communication audit is that it is independent of the
organization and conducted by independent auditors who are qualified to
conduct the audit. [2] This disconnect between the audit itself and the
organization and its people allows for more substantive results. If someone
involved in the audit is also a member of the organization, he or she could be too
entrenched within the organization to see specific communication patterns that
would be obvious to external auditors. If an in-house expert needs to be utilized,
that expert needs the ability to perform the audit independently from the
organization itself. Furthermore, only the tabulated data should be given to
internal organization members. One common mistake is to turn over the raw data
to the organization, because the data could potentially be used to track down
specific participants.
Professionalism
Individuals who conduct an organizational communication audit should be
trained professionals. In other words, no one should pick up an auditing
questionnaire and start handing it out if he or she doesn’t have a background in
conducting and analyzing this type of research. Ultimately, a communication
audit is a form of research, so it should be handled by people with research
expertise. The need for professionalism is one of the main reasons that in-house
experts or external experts should be used to conduct an audit.
Diagnostic Thoroughness
The goal of a communication auditor is to take a larger systems perspective on
the communication that occurs within the organization. An audit is “a diagnostic
process that collects important data to be used in constructing a realistic
description of the actual organization.” [3] A communication audit is part science
and part art. The scientific part enables a researcher to detach herself or himself
in a fashion that makes the patterns of communication clear; the art part helps
that researcher make usable judgments about what he or she is witnessing within
the organization itself.
Skilled Evaluation
Evaluating the results from an organizational communication audit takes
experience and knowledge. With regard to experience, the more practice an
individual has diagnosing an organization’s communication problems within a
specific context (e.g., educational, medical, information technology, banking),
the more he or she will start to learn the rules and norms for how communication
within those contexts occurs. The auditor can then use those norms to examine
data to find areas of strength and weakness. Having a broad academic
knowledge of current research in organizational communication and a variety of
theories of organizational communication will also help the auditor frame the
results he or she is seeing within the broader academic discussion.
Tailored Design
Although a number of preexisting communication audits can be utilized within
an organization, each organization is unique, so it is important to create an audit
that is specifically tailored for an individual organization. Some simple tailoring
could involve changing the wording of specific questions to include the name of
the company or a department within the organization or adding a handful of
questions that are unique to that organization. Maybe you’re performing a
communication audit for a large banking system. As such, you need to examine
not only how individuals communicate within the various branches but also how
the branches communicate with one another and how branches communicate to
the company headquarters. All these factors are unique lines of communication
that could be explored within this specific context. Remember, context is
everything, so assuming an “out of the box” communication audit can be
employed as is simply isn’t within the best practices of conducting an audit.
Furthermore, an organization may have a specific area of communication
concern that could be more thoroughly analyzed in the audit. Maybe the
organization is interested in how internal communication processes are affecting
the types of information sales representatives are receiving and then
communicating to customers. An off-the-shelf audit may not reflect these
specific lines of communication that are important to the organization, so new
questions should be added to an audit for these purposes.
Current Time Frame
The final characteristic of effective audits involves ensuring that the results are
understood as existing within a specific time frame. Imagine you are asked to
measure employee morale in a large discount shopping center. Let’s say that you
accidentally decide to conduct the evaluation on Black Friday (the day after
Thanksgiving). I’m betting you’ll realize that people working with customers on
Black Friday tend to be a bit more frazzled than on a typical working day. Even
if an audit is conducted over the course of a month, there are always possible
external factors that may impact how people communicate during this time
period. Someone could be taking care of a sick relative, getting a divorce, or
adjusting to a new position. Any of thousands of possible life events can alter
how people behave and communicate, so it’s the organizational auditor’s job to
clearly communicate that the audit is a snapshot of the organization. Although
the snapshot may be very informative, it is not going to be exactly the same from
day to day, week to week, month to month, and year to year.
Two Major Audit Types
Previously we mentioned that one place to start conducting an organizational
communication audit is to use one that is prepackaged, or “off the shelf.” An off-
the-shelf audit refers to an audit that has been previously designed and validated
as a tool for evaluating and understanding organizational communication. For
our purposes, we will briefly discuss two known organizational-communication
audits.
International Communication Association Communication Audit
Probably the best known and most widely used communication audit was
developed by Gerald M. Goldhaber during the 1970s in conjunction with the
International Communication Association (ICA). Although the audit itself
originally used a variety of different methodologies (communication diaries,
interviews, observations, etc.), the survey portion of the audit became the most
utilized aspect of the ICA communication audit. [4] The culminating work was a
book titled Auditing Organizational Communication Systems published in 1979. [5] Numerous books contain the full version of the ICA audit (along with a few
websites). We recommend looking at the article written by Sue DeWine and
Anita James to see the final version of the audit itself. [6]
The ICA audit consists of 122 questions spanning eight different sections. The
size and scope of the audit is one of the major reasons it has been very popular
for both consulting and research purposes.
ICA Organizational Communication Audit
1. Amount of information actively received about topics compared with
desired amount of information
2. Amount of information sent about topics compared with desired amount
of information sent
3. Amount of follow-up by people compared with the amount of follow-up
from people desired
4. Amount of information received from sources compared with amount of
information desired from sources
5. Timeliness of information received from key sources
6. Organizational communication relationships
7. Satisfaction with organizational outcomes
8. Amount of information received from channels now compared with
amount received from channels desired now
When examining the sidebar, you’ll see the eight dimensions highlighted on the
ICA audit. For each of the eight dimensions, workers are asked to respond to a
series of questions related to that general area. For example, under the topic of
“Follow-up Information Sent,” participants are asked to “indicate the amount of
action or follow-up that is and needs to be taken on information one sends to the
following,” which is followed by a list of potential communicative targets:
subordinates, coworkers, immediate supervisor, middle management, and top
management. [7] The goal of each section then is to get a more holistic look at an
individual worker’s perceptions of the larger communication environment.
There are a number of drawbacks to using the ICA audit in today’s
organizational environment. For example, the audit was designed before the
Internet was revolutionized in 1991. Many of the channels for information
dissemination are just not actively used in many organizations in this day and
age. This is one of the reasons making any kind of organizational
communication audit involves tailoring the audit for the individual
organizational context. Another downside to the ICA audit is the sheer length of
the audit itself. In a world where people are bombarded by surveys of every size,
shape, and form, getting them to complete a lengthy survey is increasingly
difficult. Unless you have buy-in from every level of management on the
importance of survey participation, getting people to complete the survey may be
very hard. Lastly, as a tool for organizational communication research, the ICA
audit is rarely used in the twenty-first century. The one noted exception is a
series of studies conducted at West Virginia University in 2009. In the first study,
the researchers attempted to determine if individual scores on the ICA audit
correlated with persons’ biological temperament and other communication traits
(communication apprehension and receiver apprehension). The results found no
relationship between the ICA audit and temperament, nor with communication
traits, which further validates the ICA audit as a tool for examining
organizational states (or specific snapshots in time). [8] In the second study, the
same research team examined whether the ICA audit could predict levels of
communication satisfaction. The results clearly showed that the ICA audit as a
whole was not related to communication satisfaction; however, organizational
relationships and perceived organizational outcomes were both positively related
to communication satisfaction. This set of findings helps illustrate that the
individual parts of the ICA audit do evaluate different phenomena that impact
how people think about their organizations and how they ultimately behave and
communicate within their organizations. [9]
Downs and Hazen’s Communication Satisfaction Questionnaire
The second communication audit we will discuss in this chapter is Cal Downs
and Michael Hazen’s communication satisfaction questionnaire. [10] The Downs
and Hazen communication satisfaction questionnaire may sound like a general
measure of an individual’s satisfaction, but it was specifically designed to
examine an individual’s level of communication satisfaction within an
organizational environment. After scouring the literature on communication
satisfaction, Downs and Hazen created a composite list of eleven items that had
been noted in the literature related to communication satisfaction.
From this composite list, Downs and Hazen set out to narrow the list using
statistical research methods. Ultimately, they narrowed the list to eight
dimensions that mark communication satisfaction in the workplace.
Eight Dimensions of Communication Satisfaction
1. Communication climate: Degree to which (a) communication within
the organization helps motivate workers to achieve goals, and (b)
workers’ attitudes toward communication within the organization are
healthy.
2. Supervisors: Degree of communication satisfaction (both upward and
downward) with one’s supervisor.
3. Organizational integration: Degree to which an individual feels he or
she is receiving information about the organization.
4. Media quality: Degree to which an individual is satisfied with the
various mediums (e.g., meetings, memos, e-mails, newsletters) used by
the organization to communicate with workers.
5. Horizontal/informal communication: Degree to which an individual
feels he or she is part of the “grapevine” and is receiving accurate and
timely information through the “grapevine.”
6. Organizational perspective: Degree to which an individual feels that
he or she is getting more macrolevel information about the organization
as a whole (e.g., financial standing, mission, vision).
7. Subordinates: Degree of communication satisfaction (both upward and
downward) with one’s subordinates.
8. Personal feedback: Degree to which an individual feels he or she is
receiving information from superiors about job performance and
expectations. [11]
In a study conducted to analyze communication satisfaction and job satisfaction,
Downs and Adrian found that all eight factors of organizational communication
satisfaction positively related to job satisfaction. The strongest relationship was
between subordinate communication satisfaction and job satisfaction. [12] In
another study, conducted by Philip Clampitt and Cal Downs, the researchers
examined the relationship between organizational communication satisfaction
and productivity. Overall, the research found that individuals who were satisfied
with their organizational communication tended to perceive themselves as more
productive than those who did not. [13]
Writing Reports
One of the most important parts of either organizational communication
assessments or audits is the follow-up report. One of the biggest mistakes novice
organizational consultants can make is not following up with individuals in the
C-suite after an analysis, audit, or intervention has been conducted. We briefly
explain the basic parts of a business report in this section in the order we would
recommend you present the elements.
Executive Summary
The first part of any report designed for the C-suite should be an executive
summary, which is a brief overview of the major findings and recommendations
after a project is completed. The executive summary should be as brief as
possible and no more than 5 to 10 percent of the length of the entire document.
Ideally, the shorter the executive summary, the better. If any part of a report is
actually read by people in the C-suite, it’s the executive summary. Although the
executive summary comes first in a written report, it’s actually one of the last
parts of the report to be written.
Table of Contents
After the executive summary should be a detailed table of contents. The table of
contents should enable readers to quickly find more information about specific
aspects of the report once the executive summary is read. For example, imagine
you just read an executive summary and saw some interesting statistics related to
organizational commitment. If the table of contents is clear, you should be able
to easily find out where the data exists within the larger document.
Introduction
The introduction to the report should be a brief overview of the background and
an initial discussion of the project’s scope. When you decide to conduct a
communication assessment/audit, it’s important to spell out the expectations with
key stakeholders. The introduction of the report helps remind the key
stakeholders about those initial agreements. The introduction should be brief and
to the point.
Description of Methodology
Once you’ve reminded people about the basic reasoning and scope of the
communication assessment/audit, it’s time to get into the nuts and bolts of what
was actually done. Whether you are conducting a survey, interviews, or focus
groups, you need to explain the process in detail. There is a big difference at this
point between writing academic reports and business reports. Academic reports
tend to focus on the technical aspects of what was done; business reports should
focus on explaining what was done in a clear fashion and without jargon.
Remember to be very explicit at this point, because it becomes very important
for people unfamiliar with research methods.
Findings
Once you’ve explained what you did within the assessment/audit, it’s time to
explain the findings in as clear a fashion as possible. If you have an audience
that is knowledgeable about statistics, you can explain more complicated data
analyses in detail. However, if you are writing for a more general audience, you
need to focus less on the statistics and more on what the numbers actually mean.
Although inclusion of statistics in any kind of quantitative report is necessary,
you want to discuss them in as simple a manner as humanly possible. In fact, the
more down to earth you can make the statistics, the better. If you’re conducting
qualitative research, you should focus less on how you went about finding the
specific patterns and themes and more on what those patterns and themes mean.
Recommendations
Once you’ve finished with the results, it’s time to draw some conclusions about
the findings and make specific recommendations. Many people who read
business reports will not have the technical knowhow to interpret research
results accurately. For this reason, it becomes very important to simplify the
discussions of the findings and make them more prescriptive. In academic
research, the focus is on being as objective as possible. Although objectivity is
important in business report writing, you also must provide subjective
interpretations of the findings along with proposed solutions. Remember, as an
internal expert or outside consultant, your job is to analyze the communicative
behavior within the organization and propose possible solutions for improving
the organization.
References
Just as you do in academic writing, you should reference key concepts within a
report and then cite them on a reference page, works cited page, or bibliography.
Three general formats are common in the business world: MLA (Modern
Language Association), APA (American Psychological Association), and
Chicago Manual of Style. As for which is the most appropriate, there is no
consensus, so use the citing format that you can use consistently.
Appendices
Last, but not least, are any appendices that you think are necessary for an
individual to fully understand the content within the report. Some common
appendices can include interview schedules, questionnaires, raw data, financial
data, answers to open-ended questions, and the like. The goal of the appendices
is to provide further clarification of what was discussed within the report itself.
Writing reports is a very important and necessary part of the organizational
communication assessment/audit process. However, you must realize that most
individuals in the C-suite who read the reports will not read the whole report (see
Table 15.1).
Table 15.1 C-Suite Reading Tendencies
Order Item Appears in Report Order Written Likelihood of an Executive Reading
Executive Summary 7 Always
Table of Contents 8 As needed
Introduction 1 Sometimes
Methodology 3 If interested
Findings 4 If interested
Recommendations 5 If unexpected
References 2 Always update as writing Rarely
Appendices 6 Rarely
KEY TAKEAWAY
Organizational communication analyses occur when research is
done to examine a specific communication phenomenon within an
organization. Organizational audits, on the other hand, attempt to
examine the larger picture of how communication functions within
an organization as a whole.
There are two forms of communication assessments. The first
type of communication assessment is the individual assessment.
Individual assessments are research measures designed to
diagnose organizational communication and inform individuals
about their communicative behaviors. Organizational
communication research, on the other hand, is qualitative or
quantitative research conducted within an applied organizational
communication setting for the purpose of understanding more
macrolevel organizational communication phenomena.
Gerald M. Goldhaber, in conjunction with the International
Communication Association, created the ICA organizational
communication audit. The purpose of the audit is to provide a
holistic look at how communication functions within an
organization in eight specific ways: (1) topical information
received, (2) information sent, (3) follow-up, (4) information
received from sources, (5) timeliness of information received, (6)
organizational communication relationships, (7) satisfaction with
organizational outcomes, and (8) various channels through which
information is received.
Cal Downs and Michael Hazen’s communication satisfaction
questionnaire is designed to evaluate five specific factors related
to an individual’s organizational communication satisfaction: (1)
communication climate satisfaction, (2) satisfaction with
supervisory communication, (3) satisfaction with subordinate
communication, (4) satisfaction with organizational integration, (5)
satisfaction with media quality, (6) satisfaction with
horizontal/informal communication, (7) satisfaction with
organizational perspective, and (8) satisfaction with personal
feedback.
Organizational reports are extremely important for both internal
and external organizational communication consultants.
Organizational reports are highly formulaic and are typically laid
out in the following manner: executive summary, table of contents,
introduction, description of methodology, findings,
recommendations, references, and appendices.
EXERCISES
1. Find a copy of the International Communication Association
organizational communication audit and complete the audit
thinking about your own workplace. What information do you gain
about how you perceive communication in the workplace?
2. Look at the eight characteristics of organizational communication
satisfaction. Thinking about your current working environment,
which do you think is your strongest communication area? Which
do you think is the weakest? Why?
3. Conduct a communication audit of a student organization. After
completing the audit, write a report using the methods discussed
in the chapter.
Communication Audit:
Communiction Analysis:
Executive Summary:
KEY TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
Form of applied organizational communication research designed to provide a more thorough understanding and evaluation of the communication practices and processes within an organization.
Form of organizational communication research conducted when researchers set out to examine a specific type of organizational communication or a variable related to organizational communication.
Part of an organizational report that provides a brief overview of major findings and recommendations after a project is completed.
[1] Downs, C. W., & Adrian, A. D. (2004). Assessing organizational
communication: Strategic communication audits. New York, NY: Guilford,
p. 6.
[2] Downs, C. W., & Adrian, A. D. (2004). Assessing organizational
communication: Strategic communication audits. New York, NY: Guilford.
[3] Downs, C. W., & Adrian, A. D. (2004). Assessing organizational
communication: Strategic communication audits. New York, NY: Guilford,
p. 7.
[4] Goldhaber, G. M., & Krivonos, P. D. (1977). The ICA communication
audit: Process, status, critique. Journal of Business Communication, 15,
41–55.
[5] Goldhaber, G. M. (1979). Auditing organizational communication
systems. Dubuque, IA: Kendall Hunt.
[6] DeWine, S., & James, A. C. (1988). Examining the communication
audit. Management Communication Quarterly, 2, 144–161.
[7] Downs, C. W., & Adrian, A. D. (2004). Assessing organizational
communication: Strategic communication audits. New York, NY: Guilford,
p. 128.
[8] Maki, S. M., Shimotsu, S., Avtgis, T. A., Kimble, N., Lilly, L., Petrovich,
A., & Ward, D. (2009). International Communication Association audit: An
exploratory investigation into trait or state. Human Communication, 12,
383–401.
[9] Frisby, B. N., Staggers, S. M., Allara, L. K., Dorinzi, L. M., Keffer, C.
M., & Avtgis, T. A. (2009). Convergent and predictive validity of the ICA
audit in healthcare organizations. Human Communication, 12, 267–281.
[10] Downs, C. W., & Hazen, M. D. (1977). A factor analytic study of
communication satisfaction. Journal of Business Communication, 14(3),
63–73.
[11] Downs, C. W., & Hazen, M. D. (1977). A factor analytic study of
communication satisfaction. Journal of Business Communication, 14(3),
63–73, p. 64.
[12] Downs, C. W., & Adrian, A. D. (2004). Assessing organizational
communication: Strategic communication audits. New York, NY: Guilford.
[13] Clampitt, P. G., & Downs, C. W. (1993). Employee perceptions of the
relationship between communication and productivity: A field study.
Journal of Business Communication, 30, 5–28.
15.3 Corporate Training
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
1. Differentiate among the three learning domains.
2. Define the term andragogy.
3. Explain instructional systems design and the ADDIE model.
4. Differentiate among Donald Kirkpatrick’s four levels of training
evaluation.
Since the Industrial Revolution began in 1770, organizations have been faced
with increasing needs to train their workforce. The first formalized training
program was created by DeWitt Clinton and the Masonic Grand Lodge of New
York, who established the first vocational-training facilities in 1809. Over the
next two hundred years, the face of training has definitely changed, but the
underlying goal is still the same. According to Ruth Clark, workforce learning
programs spend more than $100 billion annually in the United States alone. [1]
Until 1999, the common term used for workplace learning was training and
development. The American Society for Training and Development started using
the more inclusive term workplace learning and performance improvement
(WLP) to recognize the increased importance of a variety of different learning
interventions outside the traditional perspective of training and development. In
2014, The American Society for Training Development became the Association
for Talent Development as a singular term that encompasses both the training
and development sides of human capital. In this section, we explore the first part
of this term training, and we look at human performance improvement in Section
15.4.
Welcome to Training
To understand training, you should be aware of a number of background pieces
before getting started. For example, in communication, training is often seen as
the intersection of organizational communication and instructional
communication. The organizational communication aspect makes sense because
workplace learning is inherent to the organizational concept. Furthermore, many
of the topics that are commonly discussed in training courses are soft skill
courses involving communication topics such as communication skills, conflict
management, leadership, listening skills, and negotiation. We call these skills
“soft” because they refer to personal qualities that are deemed desirable and
enhance a worker’s interactions, performance, and career trajectory. We
differentiate soft skills from technical skills in training (sometimes referred to as
behavioral or “hard” skills), which refer to those physical behaviors requiring the
action, function, or reaction of a worker under normal or specified
circumstances. Technical skills can include anything from the correct handling of
a piece of machinery in a manufacturing plant to driving a school bus. These
skills are inherently about specific sequences of behavior.
Overall, the training field is full of opportunities for communication scholars.
Before we can get into the general process involved in creating training
programs, we need to explore two important concepts within the training field:
learning domains and adult learners.
Learning Domains
Organizations need to help individuals gain the necessary knowledge, skills, and
attitudes necessary to complete tasks in the workplace. The modern training
professional’s use of the terms knowledge, skills, and attitudes (KSAs) to help
explain the different types of training stems from a discussion that took place in
1948 during the American Psychological Association convention in Boston,
Massachusetts. Prior to 1948, one of the biggest problems in educational
assessment was a lack of a common vocabulary for discussing learning. An
educational researcher named Benjamin Bloom presented a series of conference
papers from 1949 to 1953 that developed a simple framework for discussing
learning. The culmination of this project was the publication of his book
Taxonomy of Educational Objectives: The Classification of Educational Goals;
Handbook I: Cognitive Domain in 1956. [2] In the original language, Bloom and
his colleagues discussed three domains of learning: cognitive, psychomotor, and
affective.
The cognitive (knowledge) domain of learning “includes those objectives which
deal with the recall or recognition of knowledge and the development of
intellectual abilities and skills.” [3] The cognitive domain was the real focus of
the book published in 1956. One of the important tools Bloom created in this
book was a taxonomy of cognitive learning. The version of Bloom’s taxonomy
presented in Figure 15.5 is the most recent version, which was updated by
Bloom’s student Lorin W. Anderson: (1) remember, (2) understand, (3) apply, (4)
analyze, (5) evaluate, and (6) create. [4]
Figure 15.5 Taxonomy of Cognitive Learning
The forms of cognitive learning at the bottom represent lower-order thinking
skills (LOTS); those at the top represent higher-order thinking skills (HOTS).
The goal of cognitive-based learning then is to help a learner move through the
lower levels of learning to the higher levels of learning.
The second domain of learning is the psychomotor domain, which is concerned
with learning specific skills or patterned sequences of behavior to accomplish a
specific task. For example, when you learned how to ride a bicycle, type, or
swim, you had to learn specific sequences of steps to help these skills become
rote. Bloom and his colleagues were less concerned with skill-based learning
because they did not see public education (primarily K–12) as the place for
learning skills. However, in corporate America, skill-based learning is extremely
important, because a considerable amount of the learning that occurs involves
skills needed to complete organizational tasks.
The final domain of learning discussed by Bloom and his colleagues is affective
learning. Bloom and his colleagues published the second book in the series in
1964 and subtitled it Handbook II: The Affective Domain. The researchers
defined affective learning as “objectives which emphasize a feeling tone, an
emotion, or a degree of acceptance or rejection. Affective objectives vary from
simple acceptance to selected phenomena to complex but inherently consistent
qualities of character and conscience [learning about] interests, attitudes,
appreciations, values, emotional sets or biases.” [5] Affective learning is
essentially the emotional response that people have toward learning or content.
Virginia Richmond, Joan Gorham, and Jason Wrench note that affective learning
is essential for the other two forms of learning. [6] The authors argue that if
people do not have a positive emotional reaction to learning, the content, or the
teacher/instructor, then it will be an uphill battle from the beginning for learning
to actually occur.
Adult Learners
The first person to really call attention to the difference between the ways
children learn and the ways adults learn was a German high school teacher in
1883 named Alexander Kapp. [7] Kapp took the traditional concept of pedagogy,
or the science of teaching children, and substituted the Greek prefix peda, which
means child, with the Greek prefix andra, which means adult. The term Kapp
ultimately coined was called andragogy, which is the science and art of teaching
adult learners. Unfortunately, the concept of child and adult learners really didn’t
take off until the 1970s, with the publication of a couple of books written by an
educational researcher named Malcolm. Knowles’s first book included a basic
discussion of the differences between andragogy and pedagogy. [8] In the second
book, he originally discussed four specific assumptions for adult learners, [9] but
these were expanded to six assumptions in later editions. [10]
Knowles’s Assumptions of Adult Learners
1. Need to Know: Adults need to understand the purpose of learning an
idea or skill.
2. Self-Concept: Adults need to take responsibility for their own learning
and do not like someone else’s will imposed on them.
3. Experience: Adults bring a wide array of experiences and knowledge to
learning that should be recognized and utilized.
4. Problem Solving: Adults want to learn ideas and skills that help them in
the “real” world with their “real” jobs.
5. Motivation: Adult learners are motivated by both external (e.g., job
promotions, pay raises, etc.) and internal motivators (e.g., the desire to
do well, self-actualize, etc.).
6. Application: Adults want to know how what they learn can be
immediately applied.
Knowles’s assumptions helped create a language that professional workplace-
learning specialists could use in describing and working with adult learners.
However, it should be noted that some scholars do not agree with Knowles’s
original assumptions of the difference between pedagogical and andragogical
learning models. In fact, in 1980 Knowles wrote: “I am at the point now of
seeing that andragogy is simply another model of assumptions about learners to
be used alongside the pedagogical model of assumptions, thereby providing two
alternative models for testing out the assumption as to their ‘fit’ with particular
situations. Furthermore, the models are probably most useful when seen not as
dichotomous but rather as two ends of a spectrum, with a realistic assumption in
a given situation falling in between the two ends.” [11] In essence, Knowles came
to the realization that combinations of andragogical and pedagogical principles
could be applied together when working with adult learners.
Instructional Systems Design
Instructional systems design (ISD) refers to “a system of procedures for
developing educational and training programs in a consistent and reliable
fashion.” [12] In essence, instructional systems design takes a methodical
appraisal of training needs and attempts to examine how instruction can be
Figure 15.6 ADDIE
Model
delivered to learners in the most effective way possible. One of the first (and still
most commonly discussed) models of instructional systems design was created
by a group of researchers at Florida State University in 1975 for the Department
of Defense (DOD). [13] The DOD development team created what was called the
Systems Approach to Training (SAT) model, which ultimately became ISD. In
the early 1980s, the SAT was updated for more general training purposes and the
ADDIE model was born. The ADDIE model is a simple five-step model that
helps instructional design professionals think through the training process by
analyzing, designing, developing, implementing, and evaluating training (Figure
15.6). Although ADDIE definitely has its naysayers, it’s still very common in
the instructional design literature and even in other factors of organizational
development as well. [14] The following discussion of the ADDIE model is
adapted from Virginia Richmond, Jason Wrench, and Joan Gorham’s 2009 book,
Communication, Affect, and Learning in the Classroom (used by permission). [15]
Analyze
According to Elaine Biech, George Piskurich, and Chuck
Hodell, the analysis phase of the ADDIE model “is the
process of gathering data to identify specific needs—the
who, what, where, when, and why of the design process.” [16] The analysis phase helps teachers and instructional
designers determine three basic aspects of learning:
knowledge level, learning needs, and appropriateness of
instruction.
First, during the analysis phase, the teacher or instructional
designer attempts to determine the current level of
knowledge target learners have about a specific topic. One
of the biggest missteps teachers and instructional designers
can make is to under- or overestimate the knowledge target
learners possess. All teachers have found themselves in
instructional situations where either the learners were
completely unprepared for the content of the lesson or the
lesson was too basic for the learners.
In addition to determining knowledge level, a fundamental aspect of the analysis
phase is to ascertain what the learning needs actually are. People often realize
that there is a problem but are not sure where the disconnect is occurring. For
this reason, teachers and instructional designers are often called upon to
determine the actual learning need. For example, one of the authors has a grade-
school teacher friend who recently found out that a student failed the reading
portion of a major standardized test. At first, some suspected that the student
may not be able to actually read. After analyzing the student in various
situations, it was determined that the student could read perfectly well and had
no problem with word recognition or recall. The disconnect occurred when the
student was asked to analyze what he had read. In essence, the student could
read the words but was then unable to do anything with what he had read. Going
back to Bloom’s taxonomy of cognitive learning, the student had knowledge of
reading but could not comprehend the reading. For this reason, spending a lot of
energy focusing on the knowledge aspects of reading with this student would not
help him progress or increase his comprehension.
The last part of the analysis phase of the ADDIE model is determining whether
or not instruction is the appropriate response. Whether it’s in a traditional
classroom or the corporate learning environment, some individuals will ascribe
every problem to a lack of instruction without seeing if there are other systemic
causes of problems. For example, many organizations will mandate diversity
training programs after a discrimination lawsuit is filed against the organization.
However, if the organization’s culture permits and encourages workplace
discrimination, then a simple training session may not effectively fix the
problem. Problems arise for many reasons that have nothing to do with actual
instruction. Unfortunately, organizations (both corporate and academic) like to
fix problems with learning, thinking that learning will be a quick fix. However, if
the problem is caused by a nonlearning source, instruction may not fix the
problem or may even exacerbate it. Solid analysis can often determine if the
underlying problem is related to instructional or other issues.
Design
Once a teacher or instructional designer has determined that instruction is the
appropriate method for handling a problem, the second step in the ADDIE model
is examined. Whether designing a specific instructional module (a sequence of
instruction centered around one content area) or an entire course (a longer
sequence of learning containing multiple modules), the design step is very
important. The design step of the ADDIE model is the part of the instructional
process where a teacher or instructional designer determines the objectives of
learning and how learning will eventually be evaluated and establishes a learning
design plan. In Chapter 16, we discuss the creation of instructional objectives in
more detail.
Thinking about evaluation during the design phase is very important because it
establishes an end point or target for the instructional process. Whether you are
focusing on cognitive, affective, or psychomotor learning, knowing how you will
measure specific learning endpoints is very important. For example, if your
instructional objective is to increase affective learning, evaluating your learners
using a multiple-choice test, which only measures cognitive recall, is not the
most appropriate method.
Lastly, during the design step of the ADDIE model, teachers and instructional
designers create a design plan. A design plan is a blueprint for developing the
content of the course. A good design plan starts with the basic objectives of the
instructional module and any additional materials that may be needed. Some
possible materials that may be listed in a design plan are “printed materials;
scripts and storyboards for computer-based projects; evaluation materials
including tests, quizzes, and other formal evaluations; lesson plans; staff
assignments and responsibilities; and a project management plan that includes
milestones and deadlines.” [17]
Develop
Once teachers and/or instructional designers have completed the design plan, the
actual process of building an instructional module begins. Where the design
phase is more theoretical, the development phase is the theory in practice. It’s
one thing to know that you need to address a specific content issue (design) and
another thing to develop a game that helps learners understand the content issue
(development). Whether a teacher or instructional designer is designing learning
for a physical classroom or an online classroom, everything that learners will
come in contact with is developed and tested during this phase of the ADDIE
model. Teachers or instructional designers will actually create learning materials
during this phase and then pilot test the materials by seeing how they work with
actual learners. Pilot testing can provide much-needed feedback for teachers and
instructional designers, because it can help determine whether or not the
instructional materials and strategies are effective before deploying the materials
and strategies to a larger audience.
Implement
The fourth phase of the ADDIE model involves the implementation of the
learning module or course with the actual learners. In an ideal world, we would
all be able to pilot test our instructional strategies before implementing them in a
classroom during the development phase, but quite often the step of piloting
materials, modules, and courses gets skipped either because there is no
participant pool for piloting materials or because of time factors. More often
than not, actual learners become the first guinea pigs for our newly developed
instructional materials and strategies.
Evaluate
In the ADDIE model, the final phase of instructional development is the
evaluation phase. In the evaluation phase, teachers and instructional designers
have two basic goals: (1) measure the effectiveness of the learning materials and
(2) determine participant learning. While feedback has been a constant along the
instructional design process, the evaluation phase is all about feedback. First,
teachers and instructional designers can ascertain whether specific instructional
material or strategy works. Every teacher has had instructional materials and
strategies that have just bombed in the classroom. Teachers and instructional
designers must ultimately determine if a specific material or strategy isn’t
working because it is faulty or the specific audience had problems, which would
call for a change in approach or in the material itself. For this reason, we always
recommend trying material and strategy with two different groups. If you find a
specific instructional material or strategy doesn’t work with either group,
chances are you need to redesign the material or rethink the strategy, or you
could opt to drop them from the learning module altogether.
In addition to determining if our instructional materials and strategies are
working, the evaluation phase is also when we determine if cognitive, affective,
and psychomotor learning have actually occurred. While the evaluation
strategies were determined during the design phase, the implementation of those
Figure 15.7 Four
Levels of Training
Evaluation
evaluation strategies occurs during the evaluation phase of the ADDIE model.
In 1954, Donald L. Kirkpatrick completed his dissertation titled Evaluating a
Human Relations Program for Supervisors, which reshaped how human
resources (and the field of training specifically) evaluated outcomes. Five years
later, Kirkpatrick discussed his dissertation in the Journal of the American
Society of Training Directors (now T+D). [18] In these articles, he expanded on
the systematic process for measuring training outcomes he developed in his
dissertation. Ultimately, he created a taxonomy of four levels of training
evaluation: reaction, learning, behavior, and results (Figure 15.7). We should
also note that Jason S. Wrench has argued that these four levels of evaluation can
be applied to a wide range of organizational development activities. [19]
Level 1: Reaction
The first level of training evaluation is the reaction level. In
level-one evaluation (reaction), trainers should evaluate
the emotional reaction that learners had to the training. In
higher education, we commonly refer to this level of
evaluation as student evaluations of instruction.
Unfortunately, many training programs rely almost entirely
on level-one reactions when evaluating their training
programs. Although level-one evaluation helps trainers
determine if learners responded affectively to both the
trainer and the content, it’s not the greatest determining
factor of actual learning. In fact, the research on the
relationship between trainee affective reactions and actual
cognitive and psychomotor learning is a mixed bag. Some
trainers go so far as to call these types of evaluations
“smiley sheets,” because of the emotional overtones of the
reactions. Furthermore, many trainers question whether an
individual learner is even the best judge of training content
or the trainer, but this level of evaluation maintains pretty
constant in most training programs.
When creating level-one evaluations, it’s important to pay
attention to three specific factors: end goal, question types, and measurement
standards. [20] First, when creating a reaction evaluation, you need to know what
type of reaction you really want from your learners. Do you want the reaction to
focus on the content of the training, the aesthetics of your e-learning program,
likeability of the trainer, and so on? If you don’t go into evaluating a training
program with a pretty clear idea of what needs to be evaluated, you’re almost
certain never to obtain useful information.
Second, you need to think through what types of questions you are going to ask.
If your goal is to gauge quick responses from participants, then you may decide
to use Likert scales. Likert scales are a series of questions about training that can
be measured using some kind of systematic scale. Table 15.2 contains a variety
of the types of anchors commonly used in Likert scales. [21]
Table 15.2 Likert Scale Example Anchors
1 2 3 4 5
Strongly Disagree Disagree Neutral Agree Strongly Agree
Never Rarely Sometimes Often Always
Not at all Somewhat Moderately Quite Extremely
Far below
average
Below
average Average Above average Far above average
F D C B A
NO No ? yes YES
Very dissatisfied Dissatisfied Neither dissatisfied nor satisfied Satisfied Very Satisfied
Figure 15.8 Likert Scales and Smiley Faces
As you can see in Figure 15.8, you can even use actual smiley faces on these
types of questionnaires, which is where the term “smiley sheets” probably comes
from!
Sample Likert Scale
Using the scale Strongly Disagree, Disagree, Neutral, Agree, Strongly Agree,
please answer the following questions about this training program:
1. I found this training program useful. _____
2. I could see how the information in this training program can be applied
on my job. _____
3. I believe the objectives given at the beginning of the training program
were clearly met. _____
4. This training program will help my organization reduce costs. _____
5. This training program will help my organization increase productivity.
_____
6. The trainer really seemed to get all the participants actively involved in
the training. _____
7. The trainer was clearly competent in her or his subject matter. _____
8. The trainer handled questions from people during the training session
with ease. _____
In addition to asking the more closed-ended questions commonly seen in a
Likert scale, you can also ask specific qualitative questions. Qualitative
questions on a level-one evaluation primarily focus on open-ended response
questions that will help the trainer fully understand what people are coming
away from the training with at the end of the session. The primary purpose of
open-ended questions during level one is to allow the participants to provide you
with feedback you didn’t think about asking or to provide feedback in more
depth than you get with a simple Likert scale.
Sample Open Questions
1. What was the most important thing you learned during today’s training?
2. If you could change one part of today’s training, what would it be and
why?
3. How do you plan on using today’s training when you are back on your
job?
4. How did the trainer help incorporate all learners in today’s training?
5. How would you summarize today’s training to another person?
6. Explain why you found today’s training useful. If you didn’t think
today’s training was useful, please tell us why.
The final factor you need to consider when creating level-one evaluations is how
you plan on evaluating the reactions consistently. One of the biggest mistakes
novice trainers make is not really thinking through how they plan to analyze and
report the data to relevant stakeholders. Having some kind of clearly objective
criteria to base your training reaction evaluations on is very important when
determining whether or not your objectives were met. For this reason, when
analyzing five-step Likert scales (like the ones presented earlier), Jason Wrench
recommends comparing the means from trainees on individual items to the
standards created by the Australian government: 1–1.8 strongly disagree, 1.81–
2.6 disagree, 2.61–3.4 neutral, 3.41–4.2 agree, 4.21–5.0 strongly agree. [22]
Although this method is far from perfect, it at least provides some kind of clear,
objective measurement standard to base individual items on. Qualitative data is
inherently more complicated to analyze objectively, but the individuals
conducting training evaluations should attempt to discuss what pattern of ideas
they see as an objective measure of the quality of the training program itself.
Level 2: Learning
The second form of evaluation that should occur refers to either behavioral or
cognitive learning and is called level-two evaluation (learning). Behavioral
learning examines whether a learner can complete a specific behavior given a
set of clear parameters. Parameters come in the form of the resources the learner
can use, the time in which the learner must complete the behavior, and the
degree of proficiency. For example, maybe you’ve been asked to provide
training on improving typing skills using an ergonomic keyboard. You bring
everyone into the training and have the participants learn how to use the
keyboard. After the training you tell the participants that they should be able to
type a standard memo (180 words) in under three minutes (or sixty-plus words
per minute). For learning purposes, if the learners can complete the task at hand,
then you can demonstrate that learning has occurred. However, there is one small
glitch with this example. What if the learners could already type sixty-plus
words per minute before the training program? To prevent this kind of guessing
game, we often conduct a pretest at the beginning of training to ensure that we
can differentiate the results at the end of training from where the participants
started.
The second type of learning that can be evaluated at level two is cognitive
learning. Cognitive learning examines the extent to which an individual can
recall knowledge at the various levels discussed in Bloom’s taxonomy of
learning. The primary way we determine someone’s cognitive learning is
through testing. Whether a trainer uses essay, short answer, true/false, multiple
choice, or a combination of all of the above testing techniques, the goal is to
determine whether information has been retained and can be utilized. For a
complete discussion on creating multiple-choice tests, we recommend reading
some of the books published by the American Society for Training and
Development (ASTD). [23]
Two types of cognitive tests can be developed: norm referenced and criterion
referenced. A norm-referenced test is designed to compare a learner’s scores
with other learners’ scores. Norm-referenced tests are commonly used to make
decisions about learners. For example, when you took the SAT (Scholastic
Assessment Test) or (American College Test) ACT, your score was probably
used to compare your application to other potential students’ applications. The
second type of test is a criterion-referenced test, or a test designed to determine
whether mastery has been achieved. In a criterion-referenced test, evaluators
determine a specific standard of success or failure, and then test takers are
judged based on that standard. For example, if the standard is an 80 percent
score on a test, and someone makes an 81 percent, then mastery is achieved.
Conversely, if someone makes a 79 percent, then mastery is not achieved. [24]
Criterion-referenced tests are generally used when an organization needs to
determine mastery of a subject. The American Society for Training and
Development has a certification program for training and development
professionals called the Certified Professional in Learning and Performance
(CPLP). The first part of this certification process is a criterion-referenced test.
In fact, many of the ideas discussed in this chapter (and elsewhere in this book)
should be known by CPLPs.
Level 3: Behavior
Level-three evaluation (behavior) is designed to determine whether an
individual is able to transfer what was learned in the classroom to her or his job.
A number of different strategies can be implemented to help determine whether
someone is able to take training and actually apply the training in her or his
workplace. Table 15.3 shows some common techniques for ascertaining
behavior.
Table 15.3 Evaluating Behavior
Pre- and
Postcomparisons
The goal of this method is to evaluate trainees prior to training and then evaluate those
same trainees after training has occurred. Evaluation could occur at one month, six
months, and twelve months to ensure application.
Observations This is a simple observational method. Here, a facilitator visits the trainee after training
and watches her or his behavior to check for accurate training implementation.
Trainee
Interviews
After training, interviews can be conducted with the trainee to see how he or she is
applying the training in his or her daily organizational life.
Other Interviews
Interviews can be conducted with other organizational stakeholders (supervisors,
subordinates, customers, etc.) to determine their perceptions of the trainee’s
implementation of content post training.
Focus Groups
This method is similar to other interviews, but instead of being one on one a facilitator
gets a group of stakeholders together to discuss the trainee’s implementation of training
content.
On-the-Job Tests The goal of this method is to give the trainee a behavioral or cognitive test while he or
she is working to see if the training can be immediately demonstrated while performing
actual work.
Transfer of training, or being able to take what one has learned during a training
program back to the job, is a very important part of the systematic analysis of
training. The purpose of training is to change knowledge, skills, and attitudes, so
ensuring that these changes actually occur within the workplace is extremely
important. One very critical part of this process involves the trainee’s immediate
supervisor. If a trainee is held responsible for training, and her or his supervisor
clearly expresses the importance of training, then the trainee is more likely to
retain information and apply it on the job. On the other hand, if a supervisor is
negative toward training and communicates that training is pointless, then the
trainee is less likely to use the training in the workplace. Getting buy-in from all
levels of an organization during training is very important to ensuring success.
Level 4: Results
The final level of evaluation, level-four evaluation (results), is concerned with
determining the overall impact that training has on an organization. Generally
speaking, the results level is focused on tangible outcomes that can be
communicated easily to the C-suite. In the business world, we often talk about
key performance indicators (KPIs). A key performance indicator is a measurable
value that an organization uses to evaluate the effectiveness of the organization
in meeting strategic business objectives. Typically, KPIs are easily counted, and
those KPIs that are more qualitative there are methods for quantifying those as
well. Table 15.4 illustrates outcome variables that are clearly quantitative and
those that are softer outcomes but can be quantified (often through the use of
survey data). Please note that the KPI Institute has a book with more than twenty
thousand KPIs that organizations can track. [25]
Table 15.4 Sources of Result Data
Quantitative Qualitative (But Can Be Quantified)
Customer complaints Customer satisfaction
Warranty claims Employee motivation
Number of accidents Job satisfaction
Defect rates Product launch success
Productivity Brand quality
Voluntary and involuntary turnover Perceptions of organizational justice
Absenteeism Unnovations
Sales per employee Product visibility
Delivery time Employee performance
New product/service lines Organizational commitment
Market share Organizational culture
Revenue Risk-taking behavior
Error rates Organizational ethics
Returns Individual creativity
Overall, evaluating training programs is extremely important because it
communicates to the C-suite that training is important and can have a direct
impact on organizational performance and the bottom line. You may be
wondering how often you should actually perform all four levels of evaluation.
The United States General Accounting Office created a 2004 policy brief
dictating the percentages of evaluation for each level for strategic training
programs within the federal government (Figure 15.9). [26] But how often does
this happen in the real world? The line chart in Figure 15.9 illustrates the actual
incidence of evaluation from a large survey of public corporations. [27]
Figure 15.9 How Often Evaluation Should Occur
KEY TAKEAWAY
Benjamin Bloom and his colleagues discussed three distinct
learning domains: cognitive, affective, and psychomotor. Cognitive
learning refers to recognition, recall, and evaluation of knowledge.
Psychomotor learning involves learning specific skills or patterned
sequences of behavior to accomplish tasks. Affective learning
involves an individual’s emotional response to both an instructor
and her or his content.
Originally coined by Alexander Kapp and then made popular by
Malcolm Knowles, andragogy refers to the science and art of
teaching adult learners. Adult learners bring more life experience
to the training environment, so approaching adult learning is a
fundamentally different process than approaching learning in the
traditional academic environment,
Instructional systems design is a systematic process used to
evaluate learner needs and the best ways to approach learning.
The most popular ISD model is the ADDIE model, originally
created for the US Department of Defense. The first step in the
ADDIE model is analysis, which refers to conducting a learner
needs analysis to ascertain what gaps in affective, cognitive, and
psychomotor learning currently exist. The first “D” in the ADDIE
model refers to the design stage. In the design stage, the
instructional designer determines the objectives of learning and
how learning will eventually be evaluated and establishes a
learning design plan. In the develop stage, the instructional
designer develops all facilitator and participant materials for the
training program. The “I” in ADDIE refers to implementation,
which occurs when the training session goes live and individuals
start going through the training itself. Lastly, the “E” stands for
evaluation. Evaluation refers to the systematic determination of
the results both for the training and for the organization.
Donald Kirkpatrick created a four-level model for evaluating
training programs. The first level is the reaction level, which
involves assessing the affective response trainees have toward
the training program. The second level, learning, examines
whether specific skills or knowledge were learned during the
training session. The third level, behavior, involves determining
whether learners can implement the training in their day-to-day
work. The final level of evaluation, results, examines the
economic impact that training has on the organization, using both
Behavioral Learning:
Cognitive Learning:
Instructional Systems Design:
tangible and intangible benefits as measures.
EXERCISES
1. Think about your own educational experiences. How have the
three domains of learning appeared in your education?
2. Imagine you’ve been asked to create a training program on
conflict in the workplace. How could you go about ensuring that
you have cognitive information being delivered at each of the six
levels of Bloom’s taxonomy of cognitive learning (remember,
understand, apply, analyze, evaluate, and create)?
3. You’ve been asked to create a training program for workplace
listening. Demonstrate your ability to apply the ADDIE model
(including Kirkpatrick’s four levels of evaluation) while creating this
training program.
KEY TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
Whether or not a learner can complete a specific behavior given a set of clear parameters.
The extent to which an individual can recall knowledge at the various levels discussed in Bloom’s taxonomy of learning.
A methodical appraisal of training that attempts to examine how instruction can be delivered to learners in the most effective way possible.
Level-Three Evaluation (Behavior):
Affective Learning:
Andragogy:
Cognitive :
Criterion-Referenced Test:
Level-Four Evaluation (Results):
Level-One Evaluation (Reaction):
Level-Two Evaluation (Learning):
Norm-Referenced Test:
Psychomotor Domain:
Soft Skill:
Technical Skills:
Level of evaluation discussed by Donald Kirkpatrick that examines whether learners can implement the training in their day-to-day work.
Domain of learning discussed by Benjamin Bloom and associated with the emotional response that people have toward learning or content.
The science and art of teaching adult learners.
Domain of learning discussed by Benjamin Bloom and associated with recognition, recall, and evaluation of knowledge.
Form of examination designed to determine whether mastery has been achieved through clearly established cut-off points of pass and fail.
Level of evaluation discussed by Donald Kirkpatrick that examines the economic impact that training has on the organization, using both tangible and intangible benefits as measures.
Level of evaluation discussed by Donald Kirkpatrick that assesses the emotional reaction that learners had to the training.
Level of evaluation discussed by Donald Kirkpatrick that examines whether specific skills or knowledge were learned during the training session.
Form of examination designed to compare a learner’s scores with other learners’ scores.
Domain of learning discussed by Benjamin Bloom and associated with acquiring specific skills or patterned sequences of behavior to accomplish a specific task.
Personal qualities that are deemed desirable and enhance a worker’s interactions, performance, and career trajectory.
Physical behaviors requiring the action, function, or reaction of a worker under normal or specified circumstances.
[1] Cark, R. C. (2010). Evidence-based training methods: A guide for
training professionals. Alexandria, VA: ASTD Press.
[2] Bloom, B. S., Engelhart, M. D., Furst, E. J., Hill, W. H., & Krathwohl,
D. R. (1956). Taxonomy of educational objectives: The classification of
educational goals. Handbook I: Cognitive domain. New York, NY: David
McKay.
[3] Bloom, B. S., Engelhart, M. D., Furst, E. J., Hill, W. H., & Krathwohl,
D. R. (1956). Taxonomy of educational objectives: The classification of
educational goals. Handbook I: Cognitive domain. New York, NY: David
McKay, p. 7.
[4] Anderson, L. W., & Krathwohl, D. R. (Eds.). (2001). A taxonomy for
learning, teaching, and assessing: A revision of Bloom’s taxonomy of
educational objectives (2nd ed.). Boston, MA: Allyn & Bacon; Krathwohl,
D. R. (2002). A revision of Bloom’s taxonomy: An overview. Theory into
Practice, 41, 212–218.
[5] Krathwohl, D. R., Bloom, B. S., & Masia, B. B. (1964). Taxonomy of
educational objectives; the classification of educational goals. Handbook
II: The affective domain. New York, NY: David McKay,
[6] Richmond, V. P., Wrench, J. S., & Gorham, J. (2001). Communication,
affect, and learning in the classroom. Acton, MA: Tapestry Press.
[7] Kapp, A. (1833). Die Andragogik ober Bildung im mannlichen Alter.
Platons Erziehungslehre, als Padgogik fur die Einzelnen und als
Staatspadagogik. Germany: Minden & Leipzig.
[8] Knowles, M. S. (1970). The modern practice of adult education:
Andragogy versus pedagogy. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice
Hall/Cambridge.
[9] Knowles, M. (1973). The adult learner: A neglected species. Houston,
TX: Gulf.
[10] Knowles, M. S., Holton, E. F., III, & Swanson, R. A. (2011). The adult
learner: The definitive classic in adult education and human resource
development (7th ed.). Burlington, MA: Elsevier.
[11] Knowles, M. S. (1980). The modern practice of adult education.
Cambridge, NY: Adult Education, p. 43.
[12] Gustsafson, K. L., & Branch, R. M. (2002). What is instructional
design? In R. A. Reiser & J. V. Dempsey (Eds.), Trends and issues in
instructional design and technology (pp. 17-25). Columbus, OH: Merrill
Prentice Hall, p. 17.
[13] Branson, R. K., Rayner, G. T., Cox, J. L., Furman, J. P., King, F. J., &
Hannum, W. H. (1975). Interservice procedures for instructional systems
development. (5 vols.). (TRADOC Pam 350-30 & NAVEDTRA 106A). Ft.
Monroe, VA: United States to Army Training and Doctrine Command.
(NTIS No. ADA 019 486 through ADA 019 490).
[14] Allen, M., & Sites, R. (2011). Leaving ADDIE for SAM: An agile
model for developing the best learning experiences. Alexandria, VA:
ASTD Press.
[15] Richmond, V. P., Wrench, J. S., & Gorham, J. (2009).
Communication, affect, and learning in the classroom (3rd ed.). [Online].
http://www.jasonswrench.com/pdf/affect_book.pdf
[16] Biech, E., Piskurich, G., & Hodell, C. (2006). Designing learning:
ASTD learning system module 1. Alexandria, VA: ASTD Press, p. 30.
[17] Biech, E., Piskurich, G., & Hodell, C. (2006). Designing learning:
ASTD learning system module 1. Alexandria, VA: ASTD Press, p. 33.
[18] Kirkpatrick, D. L. (1996). Techniques for evaluating training
programs. In D. P. Ely & T. Plomp (Eds.), Classic writings on instructional
technology, Vol. 1 (pp. 119-142). Englewood, CO: Libraries Unlimited.
[Original work published 1979]
[19] Wrench, J. S. (2013). Making sure your workplace communication
works: Determining the ROI on workplace communication campaigns. In
J. S. Wrench (Ed.), Workplace communication for the 21st century: Tools
and strategies that impact the bottom line: Vol. 1. Internal workplace
communication (pp. 355–377). Santa Barbara, CA: Praeger.
[20] Wrench, J. S. (2013). Making sure your workplace communication
works: Determining the ROI on workplace communication campaigns. In
J. S. Wrench (Ed.), Workplace communication for the 21st century: Tools
and strategies that impact the bottom line: Vol. 1. Internal workplace
communication (pp. 355–377). Santa Barbara, CA: Praeger.
[21] For more examples, see Wrench, J. S., Thomas-Maddox, C.,
Richmond, V. P., & McCroskey, J. C. (2013). Quantitative methods for
communication researchers: A hands on approach (2nd ed.). New York,
NY: Oxford University Press, p. 196. el:
[22] Wrench, J. S. (2013). Making sure your workplace communication
works: Determining the ROI on workplace communication campaigns. In
J. S. Wrench (Ed.), Workplace communication for the 21st century: Tools
and strategies that impact the bottom line: Vol. 1. Internal workplace
communication (pp. 355–377). Santa Barbara, CA: Praeger.
[23] Phillips, P. P. (Ed.). (2010). ASTD handbook for measuring and
evaluating training. Alexandria, VA: ASTD Press; Fein, M. (2012). Test
development: Fundamentals of certification and evaluation. Alexandria,
VA: ASTD Press.
[24] Shrock, S. A., & Coscarelli, W. C. (2010). Designing a criterion-
referenced test. In P. P. Phillips (Ed.), ASTD handbook for measuring and
evaluating training (pp. 73–84). Alexandria, VA: ASTD Press.
[25] KPI Institute. (2013). The KPI compendium: 20,000+ key
performance indicators used in practice. Melbourne, Australia: Author.
[26] US General Accounting Office. (2004). Human capital: A guide for
assessing strategic training and development efforts in the federal
government (GAO-04-546G). Retrieved from
http://www.gao.gov/assets/80/76803.pdf
[27] Phillips, P. P., & Phillips, J. J. (2005). Return on investment (ROI)
basics. Alexandria, VA: ASTD Press.
15.4 Human Performance Improvement
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
1. Define and explain performance, human performance
improvement, and optimal performance.
2. Explain the human performance improvement model.
3. Differentiate among the three types of environmental (or external)
scanning.
4. List and explain a variety of human performance improvement
interventions.
5. Discuss the talent management cycle and explain its purpose.
In Chapter 2, we introduced the concept of human performance improvement
(HPI) as a method for instilling ethics within an organizational setting. However,
we barely scratched the surface of HPI in Chapter 2, so this section discusses a
few more of the nuts and bolts of HPI and how organizational communication
practitioners add to the field. The HPI field got its start with the publication of
Thomas F. Gilbert’s seminal text Human Competence: Engineering Worthy
Performance in 1978. [1] In this book, Gilbert defined competence as a simple
mathematical equation: “Human competence is a function of worthy
performance (W), which is a function of the ratio of valuable accomplishments
(A) to costly behavior (B).” In other words, W=A/B. In essence, Gilbert saw
competence as a factor of an individual’s accomplishments (e.g., knowledge,
motivation, quality of work, quantity of work) divided by her or his costly
behavior (e.g., energy, money, and/or time spent reducing problematic
behaviors). The field of performance improvement has grown quite substantially
since this original conceptualization of human performance, but Gilbert’s work
is still considered the foundational work for the field itself. The rest of this
section examines a variety of concepts relevant to HPI plus a detailed discussion
of the HPI model first introduced in Chapter 2.
Important Concepts in HPI
To understand the field of human performance improvement, we need to explore
a number of very important definitions. This section defines the terms
performance, human performance improvement, and performance consultant.
Performance
Before defining what is meant by human performance improvement, we must
define what is meant by “performance” within an organizational setting. For our
purposes, we define performance as the accomplishment or execution of work-
related tasks measured against specific workplace standards (e.g., accuracy,
completeness, quantity, quality, speed). This definition involves three primary
aspects. First, we are looking at either the accomplishment (carrying out or
completing a task) or the execution (style or manner in which a task is
completed). Accomplishing something looks at whether or not an individual can
complete a given work-related task. Execution, on the other hand, questions how
an individual goes about completing a specific work-related task. In some
industries, accomplishing the task is all that matters. For example, maybe you
run a lawn-mowing business and your clients really don’t care how you cut the
grass as long it’s short. On the other hand, executing involves both
accomplishment and a specific standard that is applied that dictates whether or
not the accomplishment was successful. Where some clients may want their
grass just short (accomplishment), others may want to see perfect horizontal
lines in their front lawn (execution). Ultimately, the accomplishment and
execution are measured against the specific workplace standards for either one.
Now that we’ve explored what is meant by performance, let’s explore HPI as a
specific term.
Human Performance Improvement
As with most academic areas, there is not a consistent set of definitions related
to human performance improvement. In Chapter 2, we defined HPI as the
systematic process for identifying and analyzing human performance problems
and designing results-oriented interventions to improve people, processes, and
organizations. As you can see, performance interventions typically fall into one
of these three categories. Geary Rummler and Alan Brache believe that optimal
performance occurs when all three performance areas are in alignment, as seen
in Figure 15.10. [2]
Although the Association for Talent Development (ATD) prefers the term HPI,
the International Society for Performance Improvement (ISPI) also calls this
human performance technology. We prefer to avoid the term technology because
of associations with computers, cell phones, and other forms of electronic
technology. However, we want you (the reader) to understand that you may
come across the term human performance technology and be aware of the link
between the two.
HPI professionals examine the HPI process as one that involves multiple
organizational systems. As such, HPI practitioners need to look at an
organization as a living system with a number of wheels in motion that can be
affecting an individual’s performance or the organization’s performance as a
whole. Next, the goal of HPI is 100 percent practicality. Interventions should be
chosen because of their inherent utility and ability to actually improve people,
processes, or the organization as a whole.
Figure 15.10 Optimal Performance
Performance Consultant
According to Darlene Van Tiem, James Moseley, and Joan Dessinger, a
performance consultant is “the practitioner who actually leads and conducts the
improvement effort. Performance consultants apply the principles, processes,
tools, and techniques of performance improvement.” [3] In essence, a
performance consultant is the individual who uses the breadth of knowledge
gained from the social sciences in an effort to help an organization improve
performance. For our purposes, we will refer to this individual as a performance
consultant, but other common terms are HPI practitioner/professional or human
performance technologist. The concept is the same—an individual or group of
individuals who help an organization work through the systematic process of
helping people, processes, and organizations improve.
The HPI Model
Now that we’ve defined a number of basic terms related to human performance
improvement, we can examine the model proposed in this book for HPI. The
model proposed in Figure 15.11 is a synthesis and simplification of both the
ATD [4]and ISPI [5] HPI models.
Figure 15.11 Human Performance Improvement Model
Environmental Scanning
The first part of the HPI model is referred to as the environmental scan. When
looking for areas to improve in an organization, one of the most common
starting points is to conduct an environmental scan. Environmental scanning is
the gathering and analysis of information within an organization’s internal or
external environment to identify specific opportunities and threats to the
organization and its future. The purpose of an organizational scan is to locate
potential problems where a performance intervention can be used to improve
people, processes, and organizations. During the organizational scan, HPI
consultants seek a combination of factors external to the organization and those
within it.
External Scanning
External scanning refers to the examination of opportunities and threats to an
organization that exist in the external environment. The purpose of external
scanning is to ensure that an HPI consultant has the information he or she needs
to engage in performance improvement. Liam Fahey and V. K. Narayanan note
three general types of scanning that individuals within an organization can do:
irregular, periodic, and continuous. [6]
Irregular scanning refers to external organizational scanning as a result of a
specific need (often as a result of a crisis). For example, maybe an organization
recently found out that one of its employees has been making disparaging
remarks about her or his supervisor online. If an organization doesn’t have a
specific social media policy or is unaware of the law related to businesses and
social media, the organization will need to search its external environment for
information.
Periodic scanning refers to scanning that individuals or an organization
completes in an effort to get a regular picture of what is occurring within the
external environment. Periodic scanning tends to be purposeful and to happen at
regular intervals. One common type of periodic scanning involves reading trade
magazines and journals to keep on top of the most current practices within a
field. Such external sources enable an individual to see what new opportunities
and threats exist.
Continuous scanning refers to external scanning that occurs on an ongoing basis.
For example, if you are the public relations officer for a major corporation, you
may want to set up a Google alert with your company’s name. A Google alert
can be established to monitor any specific developing stories or key terms (like
your company’s name). You can set up the alerts to be sent to you via e-mail as
they occur, daily, or weekly. If your goal is to stay on top of your brand, industry,
or political climate, then you may need to receive information quickly and
decisively.
Improving Information Scanning
Christina Doyle identified ten relevant strategies for improving information
literacy:
1. Recognize the need for information.
2. Recognize the need for accurate and complete information.
3. Formulate questions based on needs.
4. Identify potential sources of information.
5. Develop successful search strategies.
6. Access sources including computer-based and other technology.
7. Evaluate information.
8. Organize information for practical application.
9. Integrate new information into an existing body of knowledge.
10. Use information in critical thinking and problem solving. [7]
Internal Scanning
Internal scanning refers to the examination of opportunities and threats that exist
within an organization and that are related to people, processes, and
organizations. In the sidebar, we identified a number of different characteristics
that are important to examine when conducting an internal scan. The primary
goal of internal scanning is to remind the organization that it must be mindful of
what is happening within the organization itself. One mistake that some senior
executives make involves focusing too much attention on the external
environment to the detriment of the internal environment. Organizations and
their leaders must attend to both external and internal scanning to have the most
up-to-date and accurate information possible when making performance
improvement decisions.
Gap Analysis
A gap analysis is the systematic examination of where current people,
processes, and organizational characteristics (e.g., mission, vision, strategic plan,
structures) exist at the beginning of a change effort in comparison to the desired
end state after a performance intervention. The goal of a gap analysis is fairly
straightforward: an HPI consultant wants to look at the starting point of where
people, processes, and organizational characteristics are as compared to specific,
tangible goals. The identification of problem areas (or gaps) is generally done
during external and internal scanning. Maybe a performance consultant wants to
instill the best practices for project management. If the consultant examines the
external world, he or she may find the best practices discussed by the Project
Management Institute (external scan - http://www.pmi.org). At the same time,
those best practices must be compared to the current state of project management
practices within the organization itself (internal scanning). The gap analysis
occurs when a performance consultant looks at the current state of project
management in the organization and clearly distinguishes it from the best
practices for project management as discussed by the Project Management
Institute. The difference between these two is the gap.
For the purposes of understanding gap analyses, three general gaps have been
identified in HPI research: knowledge, skill, and attitude. Notice that these gaps
directly relate to the three domains of learning discussed by Benjamin Bloom
and colleagues. [8]
Knowledge
The first typical gap that can be identified involves knowledge. Knowledge gaps
are gaps in an individual’s understanding of relevant facts, truths, or principles.
In essence, these are cognitive gaps and can often be dealt with through coaching
or training. Imagine you’re a performance consultant conducting a gap analysis,
and you find out that individuals simply do not know how to use a new
inventory system. The easiest way to improve performance would be to ensure
unilateral training for those individuals working with the inventory system.
Behavioral
The second type of gap is behavioral. Where knowledge gaps are focused on
cognitive deficits, behavioral gaps relate to the physical responses of an
individual as a result of specific actions, persons, or stimuli. In essence, any
physical movement a person can or should make within an organization is a
result of behavior. Behavioral gaps occur when a person should move in a
specific fashion as a result of actions, persons, or stimuli, but the person fails to
move. For example, maybe you’re a performance consultant, and you notice that
a good number of customer-service representatives are moving slowly because
they are “hunting and pecking” at the computer keyboards when keying in
customer information. Obviously, using one’s index fingers to find letters on a
keyboard takes considerably more time than using good typing skills. The gap
that exists is the current state of typing (hunting and pecking) as compared to
where the customer service representatives’ typing skills should be (sixty-plus
words per minute).
Attitude
The final type of gap commonly seen in performance improvement is attitude
gaps, or an individual’s learned predisposition or tendency to evaluate
(positively or negatively) activities, events, ideas, objects, or people. First, it’s
important to note that attitudes are learned. Whether the attitude was learned
growing up, in college, or even on the job, we all develop attitudes over the
course of our lives, and we bring these attitudes into the workplace. Research
indicates that attitudes are difficult to change but often have very important
ramifications within the organizational environment. Negative attitudes in the
workplace can be highly contagious, spreading like a plague until the
organizational environment becomes highly toxic and uncivil. In fact, business
consultant Mark Murphy goes so far as to recommend hiring people for their
attitude as much as hiring them for their skill sets. [9] A number of pop-
psychology books are built on the notion of changing your own or someone
else’s attitude. The reality is, an individual’s attitude can be changed, but it isn’t
something that happens quickly or easily. [10]
Root Cause Analysis
Once a gap (or a series of gaps) has been identified, the performance consultant
needs to conduct a root cause analysis. A root cause analysis is a systematic
problem-solving process that attempts to determine the origin of identified gaps
in the performance improvement process. One of the biggest mistakes some
people make is believing that they know the root cause of a problem without
actually analyzing the possible causes. People often believe they know the cause,
but equally often these perceptions are false or only superficial. Remember, HPI
is a systematic approach to improving organizational outcomes, so the HPI
consultant must examine the system as a whole to determine the actual nature of
possible causes. According to Ethan Sanders and Sivasailam Thiagarajan, there
are six basic causes for performance gaps: (1) knowledge, (2) information, (3)
structure/processes, (4) physical resources, (5) health, and (6) motives. [11]
Knowledge
The first common root cause occurs because of a lack of knowledge. Knowledge
root causes refer to either a lack of cognitive understanding or a lack of specific
skills necessary to achieve a desired performance state. Knowledge root causes
can be either technical or interpersonal in nature. Maybe a worker was simply
never shown the correct process for completing a task or has even learned the
wrong behaviors for completing a task. On the interpersonal side, maybe a
customer-service representative was never fully trained on how to handle a
disgruntled customer, which leads to inappropriate interpersonal interactions.
Information
The second common cause for gaps in performance involves information.
Information root causes occur because an individual does not have adequate or
correct information to complete her or his job. This is a common root cause that
organizational communication specialists are ideally trained for because of its
inherent communicative overtones. Information root causes often occur because
of rigid communication structures that do not allow for easy cross-division
interaction and communication. If a worker in marketing doesn’t have the most
recent information on a product being developed, he or she could end up making
mistakes related to a launch of the product because of lack of interaction with the
people making it.
Structure/Processes
The third common cause for gaps in performance occurs because of problems
with the organizational structure or its internal processes. First, if the internal
structure of an organization forces various departments to compete, you may
find turf battles within the organization that lead to a breakdown of cooperation.
Anytime the structure of an organization prevents optimal performance, the
organizational structure itself can cause a number of problems. On the other side,
often the processes within the organization can be at the root of specific gaps.
Some organizations have processes that are completely unwieldy and inefficient.
For example, maybe the process for an innovative initiative has so many layers
of bureaucracy that the organization cannot adjust quickly, enabling effective
innovation. Some organizations even have redundant processes that slow down
the organization’s effectiveness.
Physical Resources
The fourth common root cause for performance gaps occurs because of a lack of
physical resources for individuals. By physical resources, we are specifically
referring to the equipment and physical surroundings within an organization that
limit performance. Some common equipment resources include items such as
chairs, computers, desks, phones, software, and so on. A lack of any of these
tools can cause a performance gap. Other organizations have inappropriate
physical surroundings that prevent effective performance (e.g., heat, lighting,
ventilation). Whether an individual doesn’t have the appropriate equipment or
works in a physical environment not conducive to productivity, understanding
the physical resources involved in a performance gap is extremely important.
Health
The fifth common root cause of performance gaps involves an individual’s
physical and mental health. Physical health includes any kind of physical ailment
that prevents an individual from performing optimally. For example, one
common physical health issue involves repetitive strain injuries. Repetitive strain
injuries occur when an individual performs the same physical behavior over and
over again. A repetitive strain injury can cause an individual to feel pain,
numbness, tingling, or loss of feeling in the hands or arms. A common form of
repetitive strain injury is carpal tunnel syndrome, which is most often caused by
excessive typing over a long period of time. Imagine a worker whose job is to
type but who can no longer feel her or his fingers.
By mental health, we refer to any kind of emotional illness (e.g., anxiety,
depression) or negative psychological state (e.g., attention deficit and
hyperactivity disorder [ADHD], substance abuse) that interferes with
performance. Many organizations have an employee-assistance program (EAP)
to help individuals during these difficult times. For example, an individual
experiencing the death of a loved one or going through a breakup or divorce may
need the help of a mental-health professional to get through the rough patch.
Furthermore, individuals who are victims of inappropriate aggression, bullying,
discrimination, or harassment may find their performance level dropping.
Although an organization cannot prevent psychological trauma occurring outside
the organization’s walls, it can prevent and stop forms of psychological trauma
occurring within the organization. On the other hand, imagine you’re an
individual who has ADHD and is forced to work in an office environment with
more than a hundred other workers in open cubicles. This constant bombardment
of movement and noise could lead to a serious downturn in your overall
performance.
Motives
The final common root cause identified by Sanders and Thiagarajan involves
motives. By motives, Sanders and Thiagarajan are specifically referring to an
individual’s level of employee motivation. A number of factors can cause
inadequate employee motivation: lack of feedback, conflicting values,
organizational orientation, lack of appreciation, job satisfaction, lack of
organizational commitment, and so on. In fact, there is a wealth of research that
examines all the facets that lead to employee motivation in the workplace. [12] In
many ways, the motive root cause is the affective root cause. It’s the emotional
causes that underlie many of the other root causes, so if they are not addressed
adequately performance interventions may fall flat. As Sanders and Thiagarajan
note, “Notice that knowledge, information, structure, resources, and health are
categories of root causes, and they are examples of root causes that create
motivational performance barriers. This is because all these items can have the
residual effect of lowering a performer’s motivation to produce valuable
outputs.” [13]
Intervention Selection
Once the root cause of a performance problem is identified, it’s time to think
through possible performance interventions. Darlene Van Tiem, James Moseley,
and Joan Dessinger identified eight common interventions used by HPI
consultants: (1) learning, (2) performance support, (3) job analysis/work design,
(4) personal development, (5) human resources development, (6) organizational
communication, (7) organizational design and development, and (8) financial
systems. [14]
Learning
As discussed earlier in Section 15.3 one of the first tools that can improve
human performance in the workplace is traditional training interventions.
Whether through face-to-face, e-learning, or blended learning interventions,
training is still a very important intervention when people do not have the
requisite knowledge, skills, and attitudes to perform a specific job.
Performance Support
The second common form of performance improvement intervention is referred
to as performance support. Performance support refers to any repositories of
information, processes, or expert perspectives that help workers increase
efficiency and quality on the job. In today’s world, a number of common
performance support systems are readily available for organizational users. For
our purposes, we will explore two of them briefly: job aids and electronic
performance support systems.
A job aid is any device or tool designed for use on a job, which provides
information and/or instructions to help a user perform a specific task. In fact, our
world is filled with job aids, but we don’t always call them such. For example,
when you read the instructions on the back of a microwave dinner box, you’re
reading a job aid of sorts. These instructions are designed to teach you, the
hungry user, how to accurately cook the meal for optimum quality. The
workplace is filled with necessary job aids, from flow charts that explain specific
processes to quick-reference cards to help you easily navigate a software
package. For some simple examples of job aids, check out http://jobaids.info.
An electronic performance support system (EPSS) is simply a job aid that has
been turned into an electronic repository. Many organizations have realized over
the last few decades that it’s very important to keep knowledge within an
organization, so they started developing knowledge management processes. One
of the first (and widely used) definitions of knowledge management comes from
Thomas Davenport, who defined knowledge management as the process of
capturing, distributing, and effectively using knowledge. [15] Today, knowledge
management is viewed as a variety of practices and strategies that help
organizations capture, create, and distribute both explicit and tacit knowledge.
Michael Polanyi originally distinguished between two types of knowledge that
he called explicit and tacit knowledge. [16] Explicit knowledge is knowledge
that has been clearly documented and shared with others. This book is an
example of explicit knowledge. Tacit knowledge is knowledge that an
individual has in her or his head based on experience, insight, and judgments
made along the way. The basic goal of knowledge management is to take the
tacit knowledge that organizational workers have and capture it in some medium
in an effort to make it explicit. Management theorist Peter Drucker was the first
major researcher to call attention to the growing importance of knowledge in the
modern organizational landscape. [17] As the United States went from a
production-based economy (most workers were paid on their ability to produce
goods) to a knowledge-based economy (most workers are paid for their intellect
and experience), Drucker noticed that individuals were being increasingly
utilized to add to an organization’s products and services by applying their
intellect.
What is the role of the EPSS in all this knowledge? EPSSs are designed to help
an organization capture this tacit knowledge in a manner to make it explicit.
Organizations will often utilize a software package called a content management
system (CMS) to help the organization collect and maintain knowledge. Most of
you are familiar with a learning management system of some kind: Blackboard,
Moodle, Angel, Web CT, and the like. CMSs, on the other hand, are designed to
help organizations create, edit, and locate content. Instead of allowing instructors
to facilitate classes online, organizations use these tools to house vast amounts of
information and make it readily available at their employees’ fingertips. In
essence, an EPSS is an electronic form of a job aid.
Job Analysis/Work Design
The next common intervention form is the job analysis/work design. Job
analyses and work designs attempt to determine how jobs can be redesigned to
improve effectiveness and employee health and comfort. First, some jobs may
involve tasks that are not very effective. This aspect recalls the Frederick Taylor
time-and-motion studies discussed in Chapter 3. The goal of an HPI practitioner
is to work with employees in an attempt to make the sequence of steps utilized to
perform a task more effective and efficient. Second, some job analyses and work
designs are undertaken to improve employee psychological and physical health.
Maybe a high-stress job needs to have more frequent required breaks to ensure
optimum performance. One such job is that of air traffic controllers (the people
responsible for helping planes take off and land). Research has shown that in
these jobs, performance starts to deteriorate after just two hours working. As
such, performance improvement experts recommend that air traffic controllers
be forced to take a break (and stand up and stretch) at least every two hours.
Physically, some jobs may lead to repetitive stress syndrome, which occurs when
people perform the same movements over and over again (like typing). As such,
HPI consultants often need to examine the ergonomics of the working
environment to alleviate or at least lessen the impact that these repetitive
motions have on workers.
Personal Development
Another common HPI intervention involves personal development, which can
include coaching/mentoring, effective supervisory feedback, and talent
management. In Chapter 7, we discussed coaching and mentoring and effective
supervisory feedback, so we will just focus quickly on talent management. In
Chapter 3, we introduced you to Frederick Herzberg’s motivator-hygiene theory. [18] The basic concept behind this theory is that some factors motivate employees
(achievement, recognition, personal growth, etc.), and other factors are perceived
as baseline expectations that, when not met, will lead to demotivation (e.g., job
relationships, work-life balance, job security). One of the motivators discussed
here is the notion of personal growth. Because individuals are often knowledge
workers today, it’s in an organization’s best interest to keep workers motivated.
The Association for Talent Development proposed the following definition for
talent management. They defined talent management as “a holistic approach to
optimizing human capital, which enables an organization to drive short- and
long-term results by building culture, engagement, capability, and capacity
through integrated talent acquisition, development, and deployment processes
that are aligned to business goals.” [19] They arrived at this definition after a
detailed survey of the field and a national survey of 518 people involved in talent
management in a variety of different fields. More than 80 percent of those
surveyed agreed with the basic definition with only 2 percent outright
disagreeing with the definition. Figure 15.12 represents the basic talent-
management cycle.
Figure 15.12 Talent Management Cycle
The first step in the talent management cycle involves the recruitment and
selection of employees. We spent a lot of time in Chapter 10 discussing best
practices for recruiting and retaining new employees, so we will not rehash that
discussion here.
Once an organization has recruited an employee, the organization goes through
an orientation and training phase. The orientation phase includes both formal
orientation to the organization and informal socialization. (See Chapter 10 for
more on this subject.) Furthermore, during this period, the organization will
provide any necessary training that an employee needs to complete her or his
job.
After a general orientation period has ended, the organization will start a process
of assessing the employee’s talents and will attempt to manage the employee in a
manner that best suits her or his talents. At this point, people who specialize in
talent management really focus on how to use a knowledge worker to the best of
her or his abilities. Furthermore, the talent manager will start a process of
determining what further knowledge, skills, and attitudes an individual employee
needs to best accomplish her or his job. Many parts go into talent management at
this point. Everything from ensuring an employee stays motivated to helping the
employee fit into the formal and informal organization can fall under the basics
of talent management. In fact, there’s an online magazine called Talent
Management (http://talentmgt.com) that you can access for free to see the
current trends and issues being faced and discussed in the talent management
field.
Although we represent talent assessment and management and career planning
and mentoring as separate phases in the cycle, these two often overlap and
happen simultaneously. We discussed mentoring and coaching in Chapter 7, so
let’s focus on the notion of career planning. Career planning involves helping
organization members align their knowledge and skills with both their individual
needs and the needs of the organization itself. For example, maybe an
organization member is interested in expanding her or his computer skills and
knowledge of database applications. The organization may also need someone to
specialize in FileMaker Pro. In this case, the individual’s needs (to become more
knowledgeable about databases) are in alignment with the organization’s needs.
Admittedly, this is not always the case, so there is often a mismatch between an
individual’s needs and the organization’s needs. When this occurs, it is often the
responsibility of the immediate supervisor or human resources to either refocus
the employee’s needs or have a longer discussion about person-organization fit.
Next in the talent management cycle is leadership succession planning.
Leadership is often in short supply within organizations, so ensuring that there is
a “leadership pipeline” is extremely important. A leadership pipeline is the
process of ensuring that there is adequate talent at the bottom of the hierarchy
that is progressively given increased duties and responsibilities in an effort to
ensure the next generation of leadership for the organization. One problem that
organizations often face is when a leader leaves an organization for another job,
retires, or dies, resulting in a leadership vacuum within the organization.
Organizations must always be concerned with developing the next generation of
leadership if the organization is to be self-sustaining.
Lastly, as new leaders emerge, are developed, and take leadership positions, the
organization needs to determine current and future employee needs. Part of the
talent management cycle involves future thinking. Not only may an organization
need to replace an individual worker who takes on a leadership position, but the
organization also needs to plan strategically for needs that will emerge in the
future. If you keep replacing the same workers who do the same jobs over and
over again, you’ll end up in a rut and the organization will not grow.
Human Resources Development
The next common HPI intervention involves human resources development. HR
development specifically refers to interventions HR professionals can implement
to increase performance (e.g., staffing, compensation, bonuses, employee
evaluation). When we examine performance problems, we can see that many
stem from simple HR matters. When these HR matters are resolved, the
performance will improve.
Organizational Communication
Obviously, for communication experts, organizational communication as an
actual HPI intervention makes sense. Many performance problems exist within
an organization because of inadequate communication networks, information
hoarding, or incivility, among other examples. Communication researchers are
ideally suited to help with these interventions, which generally start with an
organizational communication analysis. Once an analysis is complete, the
organizational communication consultant can help an organization see its
communication problems and propose strategies for maximizing communication
in the future.
Organization Design and Development
The next common intervention used by HPI consultants consists of interventions
that focus on one of three factors: empowerment, proaction, and values. First,
organizations can enact empowerment interventions, which are designed to
enable individuals and teams to engage in problem-solving activities and see
their recommendations to the end result. These interventions can help
individuals become more effective at working in teams. They can also help
determine how best to implement virtual teams. These interventions can focus on
helping employees with the decision-making process. The second type of
interventions is referred to as organizational proaction, which means that the
organization is actively implementing change (often radically). Some common
strategies include strategic planning, appreciative inquiry, benchmarking, and
outsourcing. The final type of intervention that falls into this category is
interventions that help explain what an organization values. Every organization
has a different set of values. Some organizations clearly articulate these values,
while others demonstrate what they value in how they conduct business. Some
common values include diversity, ethics, social responsibility, and the like.
These interventions often start with a simple SWOT analysis (strengths,
weaknesses, opportunities, and threats) in an effort to help the organization grow.
The purpose here is to find areas where the organization is currently lacking and
fix it through one of the intervention methods.
Financial Systems
The final form of common intervention discussed by Van Tiem, Moseley, and
Dessinger is financial-systems interventions. [20] Van Tiem, Moseley, and
Dessinger note that “the financial system’s primary role is to move savings from
one business or individual into investments for another business or individual.” [21] As such, the HPI interventions associated with financial systems deal with an
organization’s economics and financial business practices. Van Tiem, Moseley,
and Dessinger identified six common financial systems interventions: (1) open
book management, (2) profit versus cost center, (3) financial forecasting, (4)
capital investment and spending, (5) cash-flow analysis, and (6) mergers,
acquisitions, and/or joint ventures. For our purposes, going into the intricate
differences that exist between these various financial intervention types is less
important than understanding the importance of a transparent process for
communicating the financial state of the organization. HPI consultants must have
a working knowledge of these various areas if they are going to communicate
with accounts, the finance division, or the chief financial officer. HPI consultants
will often perform the intermediary role between the financial arm of an
organization and the other workers within the organization itself. Furthermore,
having a working knowledge of finance enables HPI consultants to communicate
in the language often utilized in the C-suite.
Change Management and Maintenance
Once an HPI consultant decides the best intervention (or combination of
interventions) needed to solve the problem, the consultant builds the business
case for organizational leaders and then starts the process of implementing the
intervention. These interventions will always involve some kind of change. As
discussed in Section 15.1, most change interventions fail simply because their
implementation has not been adequately determined before forging ahead. James
Moseley and Nancy Hastings developed a simple four-step model for
understanding implementation: planning, doing, stabilizing, and
institutionalizing. [22] First, interventions should be planned. Some of the basic
tasks involved in planning can include securing resources, ensuring buy-in from
top management, pilot testing interventions, and identifying potential risks. After
the intervention has been planned, it’s time to venture to the second stage of the
model, doing. Doing refers to actual implementation of the intervention.
However, just because an intervention is enacted doesn’t mean that the HPI
consultant’s job is over. In fact, the doing stage is still marked by a number of
key elements: ensuring the launch is marketed, identifying any problems with
the intervention that were not predicted (e.g., transfer issues, ethical issues), and
modifying the intervention as necessary. Although an intervention may be
piloted, we often have no idea whether the intervention will be 100 percent
successful until it is fully implemented. After doing, the next implementation
stage is stabilizing. During stabilizing, the intervention is fine tuned, and key
stakeholders are kept aware of the success or problems with the intervention.
The HPI consultant also needs to research how the intervention is actually
impacting people, their work, and the workplace as a whole. Lastly, HPI
consultants enter into the last stage of a performance intervention, which is
ensuring the intervention is institutionalized. The goal of institutionalization is
threefold: (1) ensure the intervention will stay in place after the intervention is
officially “over,” (2) publicize the success of the intervention to various
stakeholders, and (3) determine any modifications necessary for future
performance interventions.
Implementation Evaluation
Although evaluation should be completed at all levels of the HPI process, there
does come a point when the HPI intervention has been officially “completed,” so
an HPI consultant needs to examine the overall effectiveness of the intervention
itself. As discussed earlier in this chapter, the most common approach to
evaluating HPI interventions is the one developed to examine training
interventions: reaction, learning, behavior, results, and return on investment.
Modern organizations are results-driven entities, so demonstrating an HPI’s
impact on the bottom line is very important to securing the future of other HPI
interventions within the organization.
KEY TAKEAWAY
Performance is defined as the accomplishment or execution of
work-related tasks measured against specific workplace
standards (e.g., accuracy, completeness, quantity, quality, speed).
Human performance improvement is the systematic process for
identifying and analyzing human performance problems and
designing results-oriented interventions to improve people,
processes, and organizations. According to Geary Rummler and
Alan Brache, optimal performance occurs when people,
processes, and organizational factors are in alignment.
The concept of human performance improvement (HPI) presented
in the text starts with an environmental scan, in which an HPI
consultant looks for problems occurring within the organization or
ways to improve the organization. After conducting a scan, the
HPI consultant will determine if the problems or areas for
improvement are caused by gaps in knowledge, skills, and/or
attitudes. After examining the gaps, the HPI consultant tries to
find the root cause of the gaps. Once the HPI consultant has
determined important root causes, he or she will then select the
most appropriate intervention to fix the problems or improve the
organization. The intervention is eventually implemented and then
goes into a state of maintenance as it becomes routine within the
organization. Lastly, the HPI consultant will evaluate the
effectiveness of the HPI intervention and communicate these
findings to upper management. At this point, the HPI consultant
can either hand off the intervention to internal personnel or
engage in a new HPI intervention.
Environmental or external scanning involves looking for opportunities and threats that exist outside the organization. There are three different ways that organization members conduct external scans:
1. Members can engage in irregular scanning, or scanning that occurs because of a specific need that arises within the organization.
2. Organizations can engage in periodic scanning, which occurs when an organization scans the external environment on a regular basis to ascertain new ideas, trends, or behavioral patterns within a given industry.
3. Organizations can engage in continuous scanning, in which the organization is constantly looking for new ideas, trends, services, products, behavioral patterns, and so on.
HPI consultants can use a number of different tools to correct
gaps occurring in knowledge, skills, and attitudes. In this chapter,
we examined eight specific HPI interventions: (1) learning, (2)
performance support, (3) job analysis/work design, (4) personal
development, (5) human resources development, (6)
organizational communication, (7) organizational design and
development, and (8) financial systems.
The talent management cycle helps organizations think through
the creation of new leaders from selection through retirement.
First, talent managers seek out qualified candidates for
organizational positions. Once in the organization, talent
managers proceed with the orientation and socialization of new
talent into the organization. Over time, talent is assessed as the
organization tries to align organizational needs with employee
talent. In conjunction with assessment and management,
organization members also engage in career planning and
mentoring. Those with leadership potential are eventually placed
in the leadership pipeline. Lastly, the organization must always be
thinking ahead to the next generation of talent. As such, the
organization must be engaged in determining both future needs
and what the next generation of talent should look like.
EXERCISES
1. Look at an organization that you currently belong to. Walk through
Explicit Knowledge:
Performance Support:
Tacit Knowledge:
Gap Analysis:
Human Performance Improvement:
Job Aid:
the human performance improvement model. What kind of results
would you expect to see?
2. Which do you think is more important in human performance
improvement, internal or external scanning? Why? How would
you recommend your organization improve its current scanning
techniques?
3. Examine a recent issue of Talent
Management (http://talentmgt.com). What trends do you see
currently facing the talent management field? How can
organizational communication scholars help?
KEY TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
Knowledge that has been clearly documented and shared with others. This book is an example of explicit knowledge.
Any repositories of information, processes, or expert perspectives that help workers increase efficiency and quality on the job.
Knowledge that an individual has in her or his head based on experience, insight, and judgments made along the way.
The systematic examination of where current people, processes, and organizational characteristics (e.g., mission, vision, strategic plan, structures) exist at the beginning of a change effort in comparison to the desired end state after a performance intervention.
The systematic process for identifying and analyzing employee problems and designing results- oriented interventions to improve people, processes, and organizations.
Any device or tool designed for use on a job, which provides
Knowledge Management:
Leadership Pipeline:
Performance :
Root Cause Analysis:
information and/or instructions to help a user perform a specific task.
A variety of practices and strategies that help organizations capture, create, and distribute both explicit and tacit knowledge.
The process of ensuring that there is adequate talent at the bottom of the hierarchy, which is progressively given increased duties and responsibilities in an effort to ensure the next generation of leadership for the organization.
The accomplishment or execution of work-related tasks measured against specific workplace standards (e.g., accuracy, completeness, quantity, quality, speed).
A systematic problem-solving process that attempts to determine the origin of identified gaps in the performance- improvement process.
[1] Gilbert, T. F. (2007). Human competence: Engineering worthy
performance (tribute, ed.) San Francisco, CA: Pfeiffer.
[2] Rummler, G., & Brache, A. (2013). Improving performance: How to
manage the white space on the organization chart (3rd ed.). San
Francisco, CA: Jossey-Bass.
[3] Van Tiem, D. M., Moseley, J. L., & Dessinger, J. C. (2012).
Fundamentals of performance improvement: Optimizing results through
people, processes, and organizations (3rd ed.). San Francisco, CA:
Pfeiffer, p. 6.
[4] Dent, J., & Anderson, P. (2000). Fundamentals of HPI (Infoline No.
9811). Alexandria, VA: ASTD Press.
[5] Van Tiem, D. M., Moseley, J. L., & Dessinger, J. C. (2012).
Fundamentals of performance improvement: Optimizing results through
people, processes, and organizations (3rd ed.). San Francisco, CA:
Pfeiffer, p. 43.
[6] Fahey, L., & Narayanan, V. K. (1986). Macroenvironmental analysis
for strategic management. St. Paul, MN: West.
[7] Doyle, C. S. (1994). Information literacy in an information society: A
concept for the information age. (Information Resources Publications, 4–
194). Syracuse, NY: Center for Science and Technology, p. 8.
[8] Bloom, B. S., Engelhart, M. D., Furst, E. J., Hill, W. H., & Krathwohl,
D. R. (1956). Taxonomy of educational objectives: The classification of
educational goals. Handbook I: Cognitive domain. New York, NY: David
McKay.
[9] Murphy, M. (2012). Hiring for attitudes: A revolutionary approach to
recruiting and selecting people with both tremendous skills and superb
attitude. New York, NY: McGraw-Hill.
[10] Maio, G., & Haddock, G. (2010). The psychology of attitudes and
attitude change. Los Angeles, CA: Sage.
[11] Sanders, E., & Thiagarajan, S. (2002). Performance intervention
maps (2nd ed.). Alexandria, VA: ASTD Press.
[12] Latham, G. P. (2007). Work motivation: History, theory, research, and
practice. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
[13] Sanders, E., & Thiagarajan, S. (2002). Performance intervention
maps (2nd ed.). Alexandria, VA: ASTD Press, p. x.
[14] Van Tiem, D. M., Moseley, J. L., & Dessinger, J. C. (2012).
Fundamentals of performance improvement: Optimizing results through
people, processes, and organizations (3rd ed.). San Francisco, CA:
Pfeiffer, p. 6.
[15] Davenport, T. H. (1994). Saving IT’s soul: Human-centered
information management. Harvard Business Review, 72(2), 119–131;
Davenport, T. H., & Prusak, L. (1998). Working knowledge: How
organizations manage what they know. Boston, MA: Harvard Business
School Press.
[16] Polanyi, M. (1967). The tacit dimension. New York, NY: Anchor
Books.
[17] Drucker, P. (1959). Landmarks of tomorrow: A report on the new
“post-modern” world. New York, NY: Harper.
[18] Herzberg, F., Mausner, B., & Snyderman, B. S. (1959). The
motivation to work. New York, NY: Wiley.
[19] Paradise, A. (2009). Talent management defined. T+D, 63(5), 68–69,
p. 69. Emphasis in original.
[20] Van Tiem, D. M., Moseley, J. L., & Dessinger, J. C. (2012).
Fundamentals of performance improvement: Optimizing results through
people, processes, and organizations (3rd ed.). San Francisco, CA:
Pfeiffer.
[21] Van Tiem, D. M., Moseley, J. L., & Dessinger, J. C. (2012).
Fundamentals of performance improvement: Optimizing results through
people, processes, and organizations (3rd ed.). San Francisco, CA:
Pfeiffer, p. 395.
[22] Mosley, J. L., & Hastings, N. B. (2005). Implementation: The
forgotten link on the intervention chain. Performance Improvement, 44(4),
8–14.
15.5 Chapter Exercises
REAL-WORLD CASE STUDY
Kris and Janette were asked by a large retail company (Big Box) to
conduct quarterly diversity training. At first, Kris and Janette were
excited to be working with Big Box as they tried to improve diversity
within the organization. Their first training session went off without a
hitch. Everyone was impressed with the quality of the program.
However, when Kris and Janette questioned whether the senior
management had any desire to examine the results of both level-
one and level-two evaluations, the senior management didn’t really
want to see results. In fact, Kris and Janette were told to stop
wasting time evaluating the training and just let the employees get
back to work.
Over the next two quarters, Kris and Janette became quite
disillusioned with the whole process. Clearly, Big Box said they
wanted to encourage and promote diversity, but the organization
didn’t seem to care about the impact the diversity training was
having. Although Kris and Janette were being well compensated for
their time and energy, they began to worry that their training was just
another box senior management felt the need to check off their to-
do lists.
1. Do you think Kris and Janette should keep training at Big Box?
Why or why not?
2. Why do you think the senior management were so reluctant to
look at the training results? Should Kris and Janette have
provided the results anyway?
3. If you were Kris and Janette, how would you communicate the
importance of diversity training in the workplace?
END-OF-CHAPTER ASSESSMENT
1. Paula is hired as an organizational-development consultant who specializes in appreciative inquiry. During which part of the 4-D model would she ask the following question: “Tell me about a moment when you were inspired by your organization’s leadership”?
a. define b. discovery c. dream d. design e. destiny
2. Elaine is pretty sick and tired of being bombarded by e-mails. In fact, she’s receiving so many e-mails that many receive no response because they get lost in her in-box over time. What aspect of Cal Downs and Michael Hazen’s communication satisfaction questionnaire is Elaine not satisfied with?
a. organizational integration b. horizontal/informal communication c. media quality d. organizational perspective e. personal feedback
3. Karla has an inherent fear of computers. She’s always afraid that she’s going to mess up somehow and break the computer. Her boss recently informed her that she is going to be attending a two-day workshop on using the company’s new financial software package. What domain of learning could prevent Karla from getting a full learning experience?
a. affective b. behavioral c. cognitive d. psychomotor e. evaluation
4. Lou is engaging in the systematic process for identifying and analyzing human performance problems and designing results-oriented interventions to improve people, processes, and organizations. What is Lou engaging in?
a. organizational development b. communication assessment c. action research d. training e. human performance improvement
5. Ken is in the process of trying to figure out how to use a theme in Microsoft Visio 2013. He pulls out a laminated card that contains brief instructions for using Microsoft Visio. What
is Ken using?
a. job aid b. task tool c. performance aid d. job utility e. performance implement
Answer Key
1. b
2. c
3. a
4. e
5. a
Chapter 16
Appendix: Your First Job Out of College
In the Beginning
From the start of your academic college career, you take class after class to learn
about important concepts and items. You test your mastery of your knowledge
comprehension through examinations and projects. At times, you might have
been asked to write a research paper, complete a project/portfolio, and/or
perform a service-learning project. Then, after the completion of all your
courses, you are no longer in the comfort of your typical classroom. You have
your new job. Even though you don’t have formal exams, you are still being
tested daily. Your grades are no longer an indicator of your performance; rather,
you have performance reviews from your superiors. Your work now impacts the
entire organization, your supervisors, your managers, and possibly your
coworkers. You are an integral part of your organization. You are like that
specific part that helps the organization run more smoothly. However, if that part
is broken or not working, then your employer can easily find another part/person
to replace you. In this chapter, we will discuss some ways to help you get your
desired job, advice for your employment interviews, and ways to succeed in your
first job. These suggestions are practical but provide helpful and important
information, so you can be successful as you hunt for and land your desired job.
16.1 You Have a Degree in Organizational
Communication?
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
1. Formulate an answer to the question “what is organizational
communication?”
2. Describe how you can sell a degree in organizational
communication to future employers.
3. Select the competencies of communication professionals that you
already have and those you still need to acquire.
4. Learn to prepare for your future today.
I’m betting at some point in your collegiate career you’ve faced the infamous
question, “You’re getting a degree in organizational communication? What’s
that?” Or, “You’re getting a degree in organizational communication? Can you
come organize my house?” This is the question that everyone in organizational
communication will face at some point in her or his lifetime. First, there is no
correct way of answering this question. In fact, a lot of getting a degree in
organizational communication is selling the degree to potential employers. As
we’ve discussed throughout this book, there isn’t an agreed-upon definition of
“organizational communication,” so you shouldn’t be surprised that there’s not
one specific way to view your degree.
Are employers looking for skills that you’ve learned while in college? In a joint
study published by the Chronicle of Higher Education and Marketplace,
researchers found that 78.8 percent of CEOs believed communication skills
(both oral and written) were paramount for success in the modern workplace.
However, only 60.5 percent of CEOs believed college students were prepared. [1]
In a second study conducted by the Society for Human Resource Management,
49 percent of HR managers believed that recent college graduates lacked writing
skills (grammar, spelling, etc.), and 35 percent believed college graduates lacked
business writing skills (memos, reports, e-mails, proposals, etc.). [2] As you can
see, communication is an important part of the modern organization, but many
CEOs and HR managers are having a problem finding qualified candidates.
Selling Yourself and Your Degree
Wayne Pace and Don Faules described the skills of an organizational
communication major in the following manner: “They apply their knowledge in
public contact positions in organizations, such as sales, marketing, public
relations, advertising, fund raising, and community affairs…they may apply their
knowledge in development positions in organizations, such as counseling, career
development, organization development, internal consulting, technical training,
and management development, as well as general management (both line and
staff) positions.” [3]
As you can see from this attempt to define what organizational communication
majors do, there is quite a wide variety of different areas that organizational
communication majors can venture into. Unlike majors that have specific titles
associated with them (broadcast journalism, psychology, social work, business,
etc.), organizational communication majors often have to educate potential
employers about their degrees and the different skill sets that they possess. [4]
Some common skills that individuals in organizational communication learn
include the following:
Relational skills (interpersonal, group/team, etc.)
Presentational skills
Analytical/critical thinking skills
Listening skills
Computer skills
Research skills
Writing skills
This is just a short list of some basic skills that organizational communication
majors should walk away with upon graduation. Obviously, all these skills will
be slightly different depending on the program you attend. Some organizational
communication major programs will emphasize relational skills over listening
skills or emphasize presentational skills over computer skills. However, all
organizational communication majors should have exposure to at least some of
these skills along the way. In addition to these basic skills, there are many
specific skills that you may learn depending on the courses you take:
Project management skills
Intercultural skills
Conflict management/negotiation skills
Quantitative-reasoning skills
Decision-making skills
Social-media skills
Production skills (e.g., website creation, video production, e-learning
creation).
This is hardly a representative sample of all the different skills that you will
learn as an organizational communication major, but we hope these will get you
thinking about the skills that you are developing in college. Lastly,
organizational communication programs often have a variety of specialized
communication courses to help you improve your cognitive understanding of
organizations. Some classes you may have in your program could include the
following:
Training and Development
Human Performance Improvement
Leadership
Group/Team Communication
Conflict Management
Negotiation
Advanced Public Speaking
Research Methods
Organizational Culture
Workplace Relationships
Organizational Development
Consulting
Business and Professional Communication
Managerial Communication
Computer-Mediated Communication ganizaB
Again, this list is hardly exhaustive but is designed to serve as a list of potential
classes you could have in your program.
So you may be thinking that this sounds all well and good, but why would a
potential employer be looking for these skills? Marcel Robles conducted a study
examining executive perceptions of soft skills (personal attributes that help an
individual interact effectively with others in the workplace and that enhance job
performance and career prospects). He found the top ten most important soft
skills were ranked by executives as follows: [5]
10. Work ethic
9. Team skills
8. Flexibility
7. Professionalism
6. Positive attitude
5.Interpersonal skills
4. Responsibility
3. Courtesy
2. Communication
1. Integrity
When you look at this list, all the items have aspects of communication or
involve facets of organizational communication that we’ve discussed in this
book. In fact, if you’re smart about how you craft your cover letter and résumé,
you can actually emphasize how your degree in organizational communication
hits on all ten of these soft skills. Again, it’s about how you package and sell
your degree and yourself.
Organizational Communication Professionals Today
Jason Wrench (yes, one of our coauthors) examined the world of modern
organizational communication jobs and attempted to develop a competency
model to help guide discussions on the professionalization of the field. [6] The
notion of competency dates back to 1995, when a group of several hundred HR
managers came together in Johannesburg, South Africa, to determine the specific
skills needed for a range of different jobs. As part of this discussion, they
defined a competency as “a cluster of related knowledge, skills, and attitudes
that affects a major part of one’s job (a role or responsibility), that correlates
with performance on that job, that can be measured against well-accepted
standards, and that can be improved via training and development.” [7] However,
most occupations do not rely on one specific competency. Instead, they rely on a
set of interrelated competencies that are often called competency models.
Anntoinette Lucia and Richard Lepsinger defined a competency model as
describing “the particular combination of knowledge, skills, and characteristics
needed to effectively perform a role in an organization and…used as a human
resource tool for selection, training and development, appraisal, and succession
planning.” [8] You may be wondering why competency models are useful.
According to the Employment and Training Administration (ETA) of the United
States Department of Labor, there are four reasons competency models are
helpful for modern organizations:
1. Identify specific employer skill needs.
2. Develop competency-based curricula and training models.
3. Develop industry-defined performance indicators, skill standards, and
certifications.
4. Develop resources for career exploration and guidance. [9]
As you can see from this list, competency models help industries and
organizations develop conceptual ideas about what it means to be a professional
within a specific occupation. The American Society for Training and
Development (now the Society for Talent Development) has a competency
model for individuals interested in training and development. They argue for the
necessity of having a competency model in the following way:
Training professionals, managers, and leaders will use the Competency
Model to:
better understand the field
identify jobs in the profession that best match their skills and interests
become certified in the profession
select, appraise, reward, develop, coach, or improve the performance of
career training and development staff
find insight into what training and development competencies are
needed by line operating managers and subject matter experts who
conduct ad hoc or informal training
link individual performance goals to organizational goals and strategies
for individuals in the learning function
focus and unify ways that organizations build their training and
development staff [10]
Now, not everyone will agree that a competency model is a good idea. In fact,
many academics will find even the discussion of a competency model within the
field of organizational communication highly problematic. However, we believe
this model will help you think about the skills and knowledge you’ve learned
while pursuing your degree and further think about how you can market yourself
in the future. Figure 16.1 presents the Workplace Communication Professional
Competency Model. You’ll notice that the model is shaped like a pyramid, with
the competencies becoming more specific and advanced as you move up the
model itself. Figure 16.1 provides a full detailed list of the competency model.
Figure 16.1 Workplace Communication Professional Competency Model
Workplace Communication Professional Competency Model
1. Foundations of Workplace Communication [11]
1. Interpersonal Skills
1. Demonstrating concern for others: Shows sincere interest in others and their concerns, and demonstrates sensitivity to the needs and feelings of others; helps others resolve sensitive interpersonal problems as appropriate; looks for ways to help people, and pitches in to help others.
2. Demonstrating insight into behavior: Recognizes and accurately interprets the verbal and nonverbal behavior of others; shows insight into the actions and motives of others, and recognizes when relationships with others are strained.
3. Maintaining open communication: Maintains open lines of communication with others; encourages others to approach him/her with problems and successes; establishes a high degree of trust and credibility with others.
4. Respecting diversity: Demonstrates sensitivity and respect for the opinions, perspectives, customs and individual differences of others; values diversity of people and ideas.
5. Working with diverse people: Is flexible and open-minded when dealing with a wide range of people; listens to and considers others’ viewpoints; works well and develops effective relationships with diverse personalities.
6. Learning about other cultures: Takes action to learn about and understand the climate, orientation, needs, and values of other groups, organizations, or cultures.
2. Ethical Understanding
1. Behaving ethically: Abides by a strict code of ethics and behavior; chooses an ethical course of action and does the right thing, even in the face of opposition; encourages others to behave accordingly.
2. Acting fairly: Treats others with honesty, fairness, and respect; makes decisions that are objective and reflect the just treatment of others.
3. Taking responsibility: Takes responsibility for accomplishing
work goals within accepted timeframes; accepts responsibility for one’s decisions and actions and for those of one’s group, team, or department; attempts to learn from mistakes.
4. Communicating ethically: Demonstrates respect in one’s communication with coworkers, colleagues, and customers; communicates in a manner that is in the best interest for one’s company, community, and environment; complies with applicable ethical credos including the National Communication Association’s Credo for Ethical Communication and the International Association for Business Communicators’ Code of Ethics for Professional Communicators.*
5. Business ethics: Demonstrates respect for coworkers, colleagues, and customers; acts in the best interest of the company, the community, and the environment; complies with applicable laws and rules governing work and reports loss, waste, or theft or company property to appropriate personnel.
3. Professionalism
1. Demonstrating self-control: Demonstrates self-control by maintaining composure and keeping emotions in check even in very difficult situations; deals calmly and effectively with stressful situations.
2. Professional appearance: Maintains a professional demeanor; dresses appropriately for occupation and its requirements; and maintains appropriate personal hygiene.
3. Substance abuse: Is free from substance abuse. 4. Maintains a positive attitude: Projects a professional image of
oneself and the organization; demonstrates a positive attitude toward work; takes pride in one’s work and the work of the organization.
4. Initiative
1. Persisting: Pursues work with energy, drive, and a strong accomplishment orientation; persists and expends extra effort
to accomplish tasks even when conditions are difficult or deadlines are tight; persists at a task or problem despite interruptions, obstacles, or setbacks.
2. Taking initiative: Goes beyond the routine demands of the job; takes initiative in seeking out new work challenges and increasing the variety and scope of one’s job; seeks opportunities to influence events and originate action; assists others who have less experience or have heavy workloads.
3. Setting challenging goals: Establishes and maintains personally challenging but realistic work goals; exerts effort toward task mastery; brings issues to closure by pushing forward until a resolution is achieved.
4. Working independently: Develops own ways of doing things; is able to perform effectively even with minimal direction, support, or approval and without direct supervision.
5. Achievement motivation: Intrinsically driven to succeed and excel; strives to exceed standards and expectations; exhibits confidence in capabilities and an expectation to succeed in future activities.
5. Dependability and Reliability
1. Fulfilling obligations: Behaves consistently and predictably; is reliable, responsible, and dependable in fulfilling obligations; diligently follows through on commitments and consistently meets deadlines.
2. Showing up on time: Demonstrates regular and punctual attendance; rarely is late for meetings or appointments.
3. Attending to details: Diligently checks work to ensure that all essential details have been considered; notices errors or inconsistencies that others have missed, and takes prompt, thorough action to correct errors.
4. Complying with policies: Follows written and verbal directions; complies with organizational rules, policies, and procedures.
6. Willingness to Learn
1. Demonstrating an interest in learning: Demonstrates an interest in personal learning and development; seeks feedback from multiple sources about how to improve and develop, and modifies behavior based on feedback or self-analysis of past mistakes.
2. Participating in training: Takes steps to develop and maintain knowledge, skills, and expertise necessary to achieve positive results; participates fully in relevant training programs and actively pursues other opportunities to develop knowledge and skills.
3. Anticipating changes in work: Anticipates changes in work demands and searches for and participates in assignments or training that address these changing demands; treats unexpected circumstances as opportunities to learn.
4. Identifying career interests: Takes charge of personal career development by identifying occupational interests, strengths, options, and opportunities; makes insightful career-planning decisions based on integration and consideration of others’ feedback, and seeks out additional training to pursue career goals.
2. Academic Competencies
1. Reading/Comprehension
1. Comprehension: Locates, understands, and interprets written information in prose and in documents such as manuals, reports, memos, letters, forms, graphs, charts, tables, calendars, schedules, signs, notices, applications, and directions; understands the purpose of written materials; attains meaning and comprehends core ideas.
2. Attention to detail: Identifies main ideas; notes details and facts; detects inconsistencies; identifies implied meaning and details; identifies missing information; identifies trends.
3. Integration: Critically evaluates and analyzes information in
written materials; integrates and synthesizes information from multiple written materials.
4. Application: Integrates what is learned from written materials with prior knowledge; applies what is learned from written material to follow instructions and complete specific tasks; applies what is learned from written material to future situations.
2. Writing
1. Organization and development: Creates documents such as letters, directions, manuals, reports, graphs, and flow charts; communicates thoughts, ideas, information, messages, and other written information, which may contain technical material, in a logical, organized and coherent manner; ideas are well developed with supporting information and examples.
2. Mechanics: Uses standard syntax and sentence structure; uses correct spelling, punctuation, and capitalization; uses appropriate grammar (e.g., correct tense, subject-verb agreement, no missing words).
3. Tone: Writes in a manner appropriate for business; uses language appropriate for the target audience; uses appropriate tone and word choice (e.g., writing is professional and courteous).
3. Mathematics/Statistics
1. Quantification: Reads and writes numbers; counts and places numbers in sequence; recognizes whether one number is larger than another.
2. Computation: Adds, subtracts, multiplies, and divides with whole numbers, fractions, decimals, and percents; calculates averages, ratios, proportions and rates; converts decimals to fractions; converts fractions to percents.
3. Physical measurement and estimation: Takes measurements of time, temperature, distances, length, width, height, perimeter, area, volume, weight, velocity, and speed; uses and reports
measurements correctly; converts from one measurement to another (e.g., from standard to metric).
4. Psychological/communication measurement and evaluation: The ability to plan, implement, and evaluate psychometrics related to psychology and communication.*
5. Application: Performs basic math computations accurately; translates practical problems into useful mathematical expressions, and uses appropriate mathematical formulas and techniques.
4. Science and Technology
1. Comprehension: Understands basic scientific principles and to use commonly available technology; understands the scientific method (i.e., identifies problems, collects information, forms opinions, and draws conclusions); understands overall intent and proper procedures for set-up and operation of equipment.
2. Application: Applies basic scientific principles and technology to complete tasks.
5. Listening and Speaking
1. Speaking: Expresses information to individuals or groups taking into account the audience and the nature of the information (e.g., technical or controversial); speaks clearly and confidently; information is organized in a logical manner; speaks using common English conventions including proper grammar, tone and pace; tracks audience responses and reacts appropriately to those responses; effectively uses eye contact and nonverbal expression.
2. Listening: Receives, attends to, interprets, understands, and responds to verbal messages and other cues; picks out important information in verbal messages; understands complex instructions; appreciates feelings and concerns of verbal messages.
3. Two-way communication: Practices meaningful two-way communication (i.e., speaks clearly, pays close attention and
seeks to understand others, listens attentively, and clarifies information); attends to nonverbal cues and responds appropriately.
4. Persuasion/influence: Influences others; persuasively presents thoughts and ideas; gains commitment and ensures support for proposed ideas.
6. Critical and Analytical Thinking
1. Reasoning: Possesses sufficient inductive and deductive reasoning ability to perform job successfully; critically reviews, analyzes, synthesizes, compares, and interprets information; draws conclusions from relevant and/or missing information; understands the principles underlying the relationship among facts and applies this understanding when solving problems.
2. Mental agility: Identifies connections between issues; quickly understands, orients to, and learns new assignments; shifts gears and changes direction when working on multiple projects or issues.
7. Active Learning
1. Learning strategies: Applies a range of learning techniques to acquire new knowledge and skills; processes and retains information; identifies when it is necessary to acquire new knowledge and skills.
2. Application: Integrates newly learned knowledge and skills with existing knowledge and skills; uses newly learned knowledge and skills to complete specific tasks; uses newly learned knowledge and skills in new or unfamiliar situations.
8. Computer Skills
1. Comprehending the basics: Understands and efficiently uses basic computer hardware (e.g., PCs, printers) and software (e.g., word processing software, spreadsheet software) to
perform tasks; understands common computer terminology (e.g., program, operating system) and is familiar with the fundamental capabilities of computers.
2. Entering data: Enters data into computer files quickly, with an acceptable degree of accuracy; double-checks data entry carefully; notices when data are missing or look wrong and takes steps to ensure computer files are complete and accurate.
3. Preparing documents: Uses word processing programs to create, edit, and retrieve document files; types materials quickly and accurately; checks work carefully and identifies/corrects typographical errors; uses basic reference materials and tools (e.g., spell check) to ensure accuracy.
3. Workplace Competencies
1. Teamwork
1. Acknowledging team membership and role: Accepts membership in the team; shows loyalty to the team; determines when to be a leader and when to be a follower depending on what is needed to achieve the team’s goals and objectives; encourages others to express their ideas and opinions; identifies and draws upon team members’ strengths and weaknesses to achieve results; learns from other team members.
2. Establishing productive relationships: Develops constructive and cooperative working relationships with others; exhibits tact and diplomacy and strives to build consensus; shows sensitivity to the thoughts and opinions of other team members; delivers constructive criticism and voices objections to others’ ideas and opinions in a supportive, nonaccusatory manner; responds appropriately to positive and negative feedback.
3. Identifying with the team and its goals: Identifies the goals, norms, values, and customs of the team; is a team player and contributes to the group’s effort; uses a group approach to
identify problems and develop solutions based on group consensus; effectively communicates with all members of the group or team to achieve team goals and objectives.
4. Resolving conflicts: Brings others together to reconcile differences; handles conflicts maturely by exercising a give- and-take approach to achieve positive results for all parties; reaches formal or informal agreements that promote mutual goals and interests, and obtains commitment to those agreements from individuals or groups.
2. Adaptability/Flexibility
1. Employing unique analyses: Employs unique analyses and generates new, innovative ideas in complex areas; integrates seemingly unrelated information to develop creative solutions; develops innovative methods of obtaining or using resources when insufficient resources are available.
2. Entertaining new ideas: Is open to considering new ways of doing things; actively seeks out and carefully considers the merits of new approaches to work; willingly embraces new approaches when appropriate and discards approaches that are no longer working.
3. Dealing with ambiguity: Takes effective action when necessary without having to have all the necessary facts in hand; easily changes gears in response to unpredictable or unexpected events, pressures, situations, and job demands; effectively changes plans, goals, actions, or priorities to deal with changing situations.
3. Planning and Organizing
1. Planning: Approaches work in a methodical manner; plans and schedules tasks so that work is completed on time; keeps track of details to ensure work is performed accurately and completely.
2. Prioritizing: Prioritizes various competing tasks and performs them quickly and efficiently according to their urgency; finds
new ways of organizing work area or planning work to accomplish work more efficiently.
3. Allocating resources: Estimates resources needed for project completion; allocates time and resources effectively and coordinates efforts with all affected parties; keeps all parties informed of progress and all relevant changes to project timelines.
4. Anticipating obstacles: Anticipates obstacles to project completion and develops contingency plans to address them; takes necessary corrective action when projects go off-track.
4. Creative Thinking
1. Generating innovative solutions: Uses information, knowledge, and beliefs to generate original, innovative solutions to problems; reframes problems in a different light to find fresh approaches; entertains wide-ranging possibilities others may miss; takes advantage of difficult or unusual situations to develop unique approaches and useful solutions.
2. Seeing the big picture: Has broad knowledge and perspective; pieces together seemingly unrelated data to identify patterns and trends and to see a bigger picture; understands the pieces of a system as a whole and appreciates the consequences of actions on other parts of the system; possesses a big-picture view of the situation.
5. Working with Tools and Technology
1. Selecting tools: Selects and applies appropriate tools or technological solutions to frequently encountered problems; carefully considers which tools or technological solutions are appropriate for a given job, and consistently chooses the best tool or technological solution for the problem at hand.
2. Keeping current: Demonstrates an interest in learning about new and emerging tools and technologies; seeks out opportunities to improve knowledge of tools and technologies that may assist in streamlining work and improving
productivity. 3. Troubleshooting: Learns how to maintain and troubleshoot
tools and technologies.
6. Problem Solving and Decision Making
1. Identifying the problem: Anticipates or recognizes the existence of a problem; identifies the true nature of the problem by analyzing its component parts; uses all available reference systems to locate and obtain information relevant to the problem; recalls previously learned information that is relevant to the problem.
2. Locating, gathering, and organizing relevant information: Effectively uses both internal resources (e.g., internal computer networks, company filing systems) and external resources (e.g., Internet search engines) to locate and gather information; examines information obtained for relevance and completeness; recognizes important gaps in existing information and takes steps to eliminate those gaps; organizes/reorganizes information as appropriate to gain a better understanding of the problem.
3. Generating alternatives: Integrates previously learned and externally obtained information to generate a variety of high- quality alternative approaches to the problem; skillfully uses logic and analysis to identify the strengths and weaknesses, the costs and benefits, and the short- and long-term consequences of different approaches.
4. Choosing a solution: Decisively chooses the best solution after contemplating available approaches to the problem; makes difficult decisions even in highly ambiguous or ill-defined situations; quickly chooses an effective solution without assistance when appropriate.
5. Implementing the solution: Commits to a solution in a timely manner, and develops a realistic approach for implementing the chosen solution; observes and evaluates the outcomes of implementing the solution to assess the need for alternative approaches and to identify lessons learned.
7. Workplace Computer Applications
1. Keyboarding and word processing: Skillfully uses word- processing software; streamlines document processing by employing a variety of common software functions; uses correct style and format, even when confronted by uncommon requirements that deviate from standard guides; consults appropriate manuals when uncertain about the correct style and format.
2. Internet applications: Effectively uses the Internet and web- based tools to manage basic workplace tasks (e.g., timekeeping, maintaining employee records, conducting information searches); understands and performs Internet functions requiring the use of log-in and password information; is aware of company guidelines surrounding Internet usage and complies with those guidelines.
3. E-mailing: Composes professional e-mails to communicate business-related information to coworkers, colleagues, and customers; understands the company e-mail system and its basic functions (e.g., replying to or forwarding messages, using electronic address books, attaching files); ensures that key stakeholders are kept informed of communications by copying (i.e., CCing) them on important e-mails when appropriate.
4. Social networking: The ability to leverage Web 2.0 applications to further one’s ability to network with coworkers, professional peers, clients, and other organizational stakeholders.*
5. Spreadsheets/statistical software: Uses spreadsheet software to enter, manipulate, edit, and format text and numerical data; effectively creates and saves worksheets, charts, and graphs that are well organized, attractive, and useful.*
6. Presentation software: The ability to competently utilize a range of presentation software packages (e.g., PowerPoint, Prezi, Slide Rocket, etc.) in a manner that enhances one’s oral presentation of specific informative or persuasive content.*
8. Scheduling and Coordinating
1. Arranging: Makes arrangements (e.g., for traveling, meetings) that fulfill all requirements as efficiently and economically as possible; handles all aspects of arrangements thoroughly and completely with little or no supervision.
2. Informing: Responds to the schedules of others affected by arrangements; informs others of arrangements, giving them complete, accurate, and timely information; insures that others receive needed materials in time.
3. Verifying: Takes steps to verify all arrangements; recognizes problems, generates effective alternatives, and takes corrective action.
4. Coordinating in distributed environments: Coordinates schedules of colleagues, coworkers, and clients in regional locations (i.e., across time zones) to ensure that inconvenience is minimized and productivity is enhanced; leverages technology (e.g., Internet, teleconference) to facilitate information sharing in distributed work environments; takes advantage of team member availability throughout business hours in multiple time zones to enhance productivity.
5. Shiftwork: Effectively coordinates the transition of employees at the beginning and end of each work shift; disseminates crucial information in an organized manner to rapidly bring employees up to speed at the start of their shifts; ensures that employees are updated on work completed on past shifts and work that still needs to be completed.
9. Checking, Examining, and Recording
1. Detecting errors: Detects and corrects errors, even under time pressure; notices errors or inconsistencies; forwards or processes forms in a timely and accurate manner.
2. Completing forms: Selects and completes appropriate forms quickly and completely; attends to and follows through on important information in paperwork; expedites forms, orders or advances that require immediate attention.
3. Obtaining information: Obtains appropriate information, signatures, and approvals promptly; verifies that all information is present and accurate before forwarding materials.
4. Maintaining logs: Keeps logs, records, and files that are up-to- date and readily accessible; updates logs, files, and records, noting important changes in status.
10. Business Fundamentals
1. Situational awareness: Understands the organization’s mission and functions; recognizes one’s role in the functioning of the company and understands the potential impact one’s own performance can have on the success of the organization; grasps the potential impact of the company’s well-being on employees.
2. Market knowledge: Understands market trends in the industry and the company’s position in the market; knows who the company’s primary competitors are, and stays current on organizational strategies to maintain competitiveness.
4. Communication Professional Competencies [12]
1. Communication Skills
1. Writing/editing: Writing clear, concise materials that are free of spelling, grammar, and punctuation problems for diverse audiences.
2. Web content/writing: Understand best practices for web-based content that meets organizational goals and end-user needs.
3. Editing/layout: Skills related to planning, editing, and publishing written materials for a range of business goals.
4. Writing proposals/requests for proposals (RFPs): Ability to write a business proposal and write a request for a proposal that aligns with strategic business goals.
5. Secondary research: Ability to locate, organize, and present
relevant literature on topics of importance for organizational needs.
6. Primary research: Ability to conduct and present original research that either (1) helps determine the organization’s needs and/or goals, or (2) evaluates communication campaigns after they’ve been implemented to determine effectiveness.
7. Presentation preparation: The ability create effective presentation materials using a range of presentation software and other visual aids for one’s self or other organizational members.
8. Presentation delivery: The ability to orally and nonverbally communicate a specific informative or persuasive message to further an organization’s goals.
9. Meeting participation: The ability to prepare for meetings and competently contribute during meetings with a variety organizational stakeholders.
10. Meeting management: The ability to put together an agenda, run a meeting effectively and efficiently, and prepare accurate and timely minutes that report the happenings of meetings for a variety of stakeholders.
2. Knowledge Area Skills
1. Marketing communication: The ability to conduct effective marketing research that leads to marketing plans that can be implemented and then evaluated for effectiveness in improving brand awareness and/or market share.
2. Brand management: Understand an organization’s brand elements and how to position that brand for a variety of stakeholders.
3. Employee communications: Develop, write, edit, and produce materials designed for internal communication.
4. Media relations: Effectively interact with media representatives and deliver timely and accurate information that helps further an organization’s goals.
5. Issues management: Prioritize and proactively address concerns that could negatively affect an organization or its
success. 6. Crisis communication planning: Create a clear and concrete
plan for how communication will occur during a crisis to ensure a consistent message is transmitted to various stakeholders.
7. Stakeholder relations: Prioritizing and proactively establishing methods for communicating, interacting, and maintaining a mutually beneficial relationship with various stakeholder groups.
8. Consulting skills: Providing advice to various organizational stakeholders outside one’s division in an effort to help further the organization’s goals.
9. Problem solving skills: The ability to think through the specific details of a problem to reach a solution.
10. Decision making skills: The ability to examine a specific problem facing an organization, develop possible decision alternatives, evaluate those alternatives using specific criteria, and come to a decision that furthers the organization’s goals.
3. Management Skills
1. Ethics: Know and implement ethical standards for both business and communication ethics.
2. Communication planning: Develop and implement strategic communications for a range of organizational goals.
3. Crisis communication: The ability to plan and implement an organization’s crisis communication plan.
4. Database management: Ability to create and maintain a database for a range of organizational purposes.
5. Knowledge management: Create and maintain electronic content management systems to enable the gathering and sharing of knowledge throughout an organization.
6. Project management: The ability to take a project from its inception through the measurement and analysis of the project post-implementation.
7. Time management: The ability to organize one’s priorities in an effort to meet organizational/stakeholder deadlines.
8. Vendor management: Work with vendors outside the organization to find products and/or services to help an organization achieve its basic goals.
9. Budgeting: The ability to set a budget, work with budgeting software, and evaluate project returns-on-investments.
10. Professional development: Seeks out additional developmental opportunities to maximize strengths and minimize known personal weaknesses.
5. Two Functions of Workplace Communication Professionals
1. Internal Communication: Create and distribute informative and persuasive communication targeted specifically at internal organizational stakeholders.
2. External communication: Create and distribute informative and persuasive communication target specifically at external organizational stakeholders.
Source: Wrench, J. S. (2013). How strategic workplace communication can
save your organization. In J. S. Wrench (Ed.), Workplace communication for
the 21st century: Tools and strategies that impact the bottom line: Vol. 2.
External workplace communication (pp. 1–37). Santa Barbara, CA: Praeger.
As you can see from this competency model, a wide range of both skills and
necessary knowledge are needed to be a competent communication professional
today. Thankfully, there are organizations like the International Association of
Business Communicators (IABC) designed to help people solidify their skills
and knowledge even after they graduate from college. You may be wondering
how you can best use the competency model to further your education and
eventual career. Think of the competency model as a career development plan.
Obviously, you cannot be an expert in every facet of the competency model—no
one is. As such, you need to determine which skills and cognitive areas are the
most important for the types of jobs you may be interested in pursuing in the
future.
Preparing for the Future Today
One of the biggest mistakes that many college students make today is putting off
thinking about where their future is actually heading. Let’s face it, it’s very easy
to get comfortable during your college years and not really think about where
you’re going. Admittedly, this isn’t a problem that all college students face.
Some students come into college knowing exactly what they want to do for the
rest of their lives, but this is hardly the case for most students. Thankfully, your
college years can be a great opportunity to explore a wide range of different
areas that may interest you. In fact, one of the basic purposes of general
education requirements at colleges and universities is to expose you to a wide
variety of possibilities.
Many college students wait until their senior year to start thinking about what
comes after graduation. If you’re one of those individuals, then you are getting
to the party a little late, so let’s get you up to speed.
Sharpen Those Skills
Even though we talked about thinking through your own competencies, it’s
worth repeating that college is a good time to sharpen your skills. If you want to
learn a new skill, take a class. Even classes that you think may be only
tangentially related can actually be useful later in life. For example, one of our
coauthors, Jason Wrench, decided to take a course in playwriting in graduate
school, because he was allowed one course outside the department. You may be
wondering what playwriting has to do with communication studies. Admittedly,
not much. However, the skills he learned in that class (character formation, plot,
structuring a story, etc.) are all skills that he’s used to write a number of case
studies for different books and even edit three volumes of case studies on topics
including organizational communication, [13] public relations, [14] and sport
communication. [15] In other words, you never know when a course you’re
interested in may come in handy later in life.
Figure Out Your Answer
Earlier in this chapter we asked, “What do you do with a degree in
organizational communication?” We provided a couple of ideas to think about
with regard to your answer; however, you should start thinking about how you
will answer that question for yourself and your potential employers. One of our
coauthors always asks this question at the beginning of a senior seminar in
organizational communication. It always amazes our coauthor how few of his
students have really worked through their answers (and most of them are on the
verge of graduating and are already interviewing for jobs). In the business world,
you’ll hear the term elevator pitch, or a concise presentation describing a person,
profession, project, service, or organization covering only the critical aspects in
under thirty seconds. It’s basically a sales pitch that can be completed in the
length of time it takes to ride an elevator. You just have to sell yourself as the
product in question. If you google the term elevator pitch, you will find
countless websites designed to help you craft your elevator pitch. There is no
right or wrong way to do this. However, the goal should be conciseness and
clarity. Here’s a quick template that can be somewhat helpful:
1. My name is ____________and I’m an expert in _________ with a
passion for X.
2. I’ve gotten to this point through my academic and career experiences at
X, X, and X.
3. As an individual, here’s what I bring to a future employer: XYZ skills
(soft and hard).
4. I’m seeking opportunities where I can do XYZ.
Let’s look at two examples of this:
Hi, my name is George, and I am an expert in organizational
communication with a passion for helping organizations develop and keep
their talent. I have a BA in Organizational Communication from XYZ
University and have previously worked in a number of companies
developing their talent. As an individual, I bring a wide range of both
practical and theoretical knowledge related to modern talent development.
Currently, I’m seeking midlevel jobs where I can utilize my talents.
or
Hi, my name is Jennifer, and I am currently a junior at XYZ University. I
am majoring in Organizational Communication with a specific interest in
conflict management and negotiation. This summer I did an internship with
the XYZ Group, where I shadowed and worked in the Human Resources
department. I had the opportunity to sit in on a number of personnel
coaching situations and negotiation sessions. Ever since I can remember I
have had an interest in how people communicate and interact within the
workplace. I’m hoping to get another internship next summer to learn more
about conflict management and negotiation. As a communication major, I
am at ease working and interacting with a broad range of people. I enjoy
assisting others and bring my academic knowledge and the practical
experience I’ve learned to every new opportunity.
You’ll notice that both elevator pitches contain the same basic components, even
though they may not necessarily present them in the same order.
Join Professional Associations
You name an industry, and we guarantee that there is a professional association
associated with that industry. Most of these industries offer steep discounts for
students still enrolled in college. If your goal is to go on to graduate school, then
we highly recommend joining an academic professional organization. For
example, in the field of communication studies there are a number of
organizations that could be beneficial to you:
International Communication Association
National Communication Association
Four regional communication associations (eastern, southern, central, and
western)
Broadcast Educators Association
There is even a wide range of associations for specific industries. Some common
industries and groups that organizational communication majors may find
beneficial include the following:
International Association for Business Communicators
Association for Talent Development (formerly the American Society for
Training and Development)
Public Relations Society of America
Society for Human Resource Management
American Management Association
International Association for Conflict Management
Association for Conflict Resolution
eMarketing Association
International Social Media Association
International Association of Administrative Professionals
American Business Women’s Association
Project Management Institute
International Leadership Association
As you can see from this list, there are a lot of different professional associations
you could investigate in an effort to start learning more about a specific field
today.
Know Your Business Etiquette
We are not etiquette experts; however, we have all interviewed people over the
years and have been amazed by the types of people who show up for interviews.
It’s like the old adage says, “You never get a second chance to make a first
impression.” Sadly, many first impressions are not the ones potential employees
should be making. Although we cannot begin to venture into all the important
facets of business etiquette (how to eat on an interview, how to introduce
yourself, how to follow up to an interview, how to use e-mail professionally,
etc.), there are many books on this subject. [16] You may also want to check with
your campus’s career resource center because such centers often offer training
programs in business etiquette.
Clean Up Your Internet Presence
In today’s world, most of you have been online since you were very young and
do not think twice about some of the content that you put online. As we
discussed in Chapter 2, many organizations are looking at your Internet presence
to determine if you are hirable. Although this may not seem fair, it’s the reality
of the world we live in. As such, you need to know what is on the Internet about
you. Admittedly, if you have a more common name, this process may be harder.
Let’s look at our own coauthors for a second. When you search for Jason S.
Wrench, you are going to find close to a hundred thousand hits, all related to our
coauthor. In fact, there are only two Jason Wrenchs in the entire country (and
both live in upstate New York). What about Narissra Punyanunt-Carter? There
you’ll find around five hundred hits, including her research, books, and an article
about speed dating that cited her. When you look up Mark Ward, you’ll find
about 120 million hits. However, on the first page of Google we find that the
Mark Wards include a UK footballer, a statistics professor at Purdue University,
a web designer, and a technology reporter for the BBC. As you can see, our first
two coauthors have more unusual names than our third coauthor. However, once
we look for Mark Ward Sr., we immediately start finding information about our
coauthor. So even though “Mark Ward” is common, adding that other
characteristic narrows the field quite quickly. For this reason, you need to look
up yourself and all the variations of your name. If you happen to be named John
Smith, type in John Smith and your hometown or John Smith and your birth
date. You may be surprised at how much information actually exists about you
on the Internet.
Some people freak about the Internet and decide to abandon it and keep a very
low profile. Although this may make your name nonexistent online, the lack of
an online presence raises red flags as well. In fact, it’s very common today for
businesses to seek “social proof” that you are who you say you are. According to
the 2013 JobVite social recruiting survey, in a 1,600-person sample of recruiting
and HR professionals, 94 percent (a 4 percent increase from 2012) said they are
currently recruiting future employees using social media, and 78 percent have
made a hire through social media. [17] As the report notes, “LinkedIn remains the
king of searching (96 percent), contacting (94 percent), vetting (92 percent) and
keeping tab of candidates (93 percent).” Not having a social presence is
preventing potential recruiters from finding you. Furthermore, many recruiters
question that a candidate might have something to hide if no information is
found online.
Network, Network, Network
Our last major suggestion is to network, network, network. Getting a job is often
admittedly about who you know more than what you know. Some organizations
screen applicants blindly, but many will give a leg up to someone they already
know. In fact, one of the reasons internships are such an important part of higher
education is because these internships often lead to full-time jobs. Even if the
internship organization doesn’t have anything for you, your internship supervisor
may have other connections in the field.
Another way to network is through those professional associations we discussed
earlier. If possible, attend their conferences and conventions. If you cannot
attend, find out if the associations have LISTSERVs, Facebook pages, Twitter
accounts, or LinkedIn groups that you could take advantage of. These new
digital forms of networking can help you learn about the modern challenges
these industries are facing. The more you know about what is facing an industry
when you meet and interact with people from that industry, the more impressive
you will look. One note, however: avoid jumping into the conversation right off
the bat. Remember, the goal is to network, so you need to see how the group
functions and operates first. Many college students forget that these types of
groups are seen as professional (even on Facebook), so you need to ensure that
you mind your Ps and Qs when you are interacting within an online world.
KEY TAKEAWAY
There is no one specific definition of organizational
communication. However, you can learn to sell your degree and
the skills you learned in college.
Selling your degree involves helping future employers see how
you bring specific and interesting skills and knowledge to their
organization that others do not possess.
College students must start thinking about their futures earlier and
earlier in the twenty-first century. Good jobs are often hard to
come by, so the earlier you get started, the better off you’ll be in
the long run.
EXERCISES
1. Go through the different competencies for workplace
professionals in organizational communication. Put checks next to
those that you think you are average on. Put check-pluses next to
those that you are above average on. And put a check-minus next
to those that you are not yet up to average on. From your
interpretation of the different competencies, where should you put
in more work?
2. Create your thirty-second elevator pitch. Try it out on a few of your
family members and friends and get their responses.
3. If you are not a member already, go ahead and create a
professional LinkedIn profile. Then find at last one group to join
that involves a possible industry you would like to see yourself in,
in the future. Watch the various discussions in the group for at
least a week and make a list of all the major topics you see
people talking about within the field.
[1] The Chronicle of Higher Education and Marketplace. (2013). Survey
of employers who hire recent college graduates with bachelor’s degrees.
Retrieved from https://chronicle.com/items/biz/pdf/Employers Survey -
Annotated Instrument.pdf
[2] Society for Human Resource Management. (2013, June 11). SHRM
survey findings: Hiring 2013 college graduates. Retrieved from
http://www.shrm.org/Research/SurveyFindings/Articles/Pages/Hiring2013CollegeGraduates.aspx
[3] Pace, R. W., & Faules, D. F. (1994). Organizational communication
(3rd ed.). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall, p. 358.
[4] McDermott, K. (2013). Why not a communication studies major.
Amazon Digital Services: Author.
[5] Robles, M. M. (2012). Executive perceptions of the top 10 soft skills
needed in today’s workplace. Business Communication Quarterly, 75,
453–465. doi:10.1177/1080569912460400
[6] Wrench, J. S. (2013). How strategic workplace communication can
save your organization. In J. S. Wrench (Ed.), Workplace communication
for the 21st century: Tools and strategies that impact the bottom line: Vol.
2. External workplace communication (pp. 1–37). Santa Barbara, CA:
Praeger. MS
[7] Parry, S. B. (1996). The quest for competencies. Training, 33, 48–56,
p. 50.
[8] Lucia, A. D., & Lepsinger, R. (1999). The art and science of
competency models: Pinpointing critical success factors in organizations.
San Francisco, CA: Jossey-Bass/Pfeiffer, p. 5.
[9] Career One Stop. (2014). ETA industry competency initiative.
Retrieved from Career One Stop. (2014). ETA industry competency
initiative. Retrieved from
http://www.careeronestop.org/competencymodel/ETA_industry_competency_initiative.aspx
[10] Arneson, J., Rothwell, W. J., & Naughton, J. (2013). ASTD
competency study: The training and development profession redefined.
Alexandria, VA: ASTD Press, p. 5.
[11] All definitions (unless marked with an asterisk) come from Career
One Stop’s Competency Model Clearing House (2012,
http://www.careeronestop.org/), which is freely available from the
Department of Labor.
[12] Definitions contained in the last two parts of the model
(Communication Professional Competencies and Two Functions of
Workplace Communication Professionals) were specifically created for
the Workplace Communication Competency Model. Wrench, J. S. (2013).
How strategic workplace communication can save your organization. In J.
S. Wrench (Ed.), Workplace communication for the 21st century: Tools
and strategies that impact the bottom line: Vol. 2. External workplace
communication (pp. 1–37). Santa Barbara, CA: Praeger.
[13] Wrench, J. S. (Ed.). (2012). Casing organizational communication.
Dubuque, IA: Kendall Hunt.
[14] Wrench, J. S., Schuman, J., & Flayhan, D. (2014). Casing public
relations. Dubuque, IA: Kendall Hunt.
[15] Tucker, D. L., & Wrench, J. S. (in press). Casing sport
communication. Dubuque, IA: Kendall Hunt.
[16] Cook, R. A., Cook, G. O., & Munter, M. (2011). Guide to business
etiquette (2nd ed.). Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall.
[17] JobVite. (2013). 2013 social recruiting survey results. San Mateo,
CA: Author.
16.2 Get That First Job
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
1. Understand résumés and curriculum vitae.
2. Realize the importance of the résumé/vita for finding jobs.
3. Be able to write a good cover letter.
© Thinkstock/iStock
Tips for Finding Jobs
There are many ways to find jobs. You can do a search on the Internet or in local
newspapers. Many colleges will have career fairs. This gives you the ability to
meet face to face several potential employers in one location. Another way you
can find jobs is to network though friends and family. Some of your best
resources for finding a job can come from the people you already know and
associate with. In addition, you might consider doing an internship. Internships
give you experience and can allow you to network with people you might
typically not come into contact with. Some organizations will often hire their
interns, because they have personal direct contact with their job performance.
Most important, when looking for that perfect job, you need to be flexible. You
might search other similar positions or look in various geographic locations. The
key is to keep applying and trying, because new jobs are always being created,
and if an employer sees your application often, then he or she knows that you are
highly interested.
Target Your Résumé/Curriculum Vitae
Most organizations that you will apply to typically require a formal process. This
might include an application, interview, and submission of your curriculum
vitae (CV or vita for short) or résumé. For many students, a résumé/vita is
your way of advertising yourself when you are not present, and it can help get
you an interview. It highlights your accomplishments, training, education,
experiences, and qualifications. For that reason, you need to modify and adapt
your résumé/vita to the specific job that you are applying for. To write and
prepare a good résumé will take some time and energy. Just like writing a
research paper, you will need to do some research. You will have to investigate
the organization and ways to tailor your résumé for that organization.
When researching the organization, try to find information that can help your
vita stand out among all the others. Usually, the job description and the desired
skills in the employment ad will highlight what the employer is looking for. You
should also arrange for an informal meeting if possible. Most organizations are
open to these meetings because they can give you a better perspective of what
you will be doing. You can mention your informal visit in your cover letter or
interview because it illustrates that you are interested and motivated to work for
that particular organization.
Your résumé can be chronological, functional, or a mixture. A chronological
résumé highlights your most recent experiences first and provides a timeline of
your past experiences. This style showcases how you have grown and
developed. Functional résumés focus on your skills and abilities. Functional
résumés are noteworthy because they display your professional skills effectively.
Some people like to use a combination of both styles. Be sure to keep your
résumé short and concise. It should be easy to read and should highlight your
strengths while minimizing your weaknesses. Be sure to keep your résumé to
one page.
Each job advertisement will have certain requirements or desired skills that
employers want. You should make sure that you include those skills in your
résumé. Find the best examples of your experiences and ways to emphasize them
to employers. Your résumé/vita is a reflection of who you are, and you need to
make sure that there are no careless errors or grammatical mistakes. Choose
paper that is professional and high quality. Your vita/résumé needs to be neat and
organized. Use bullet points and short sentences rather than being too wordy.
Moreover, you should use words that employers seek in future employees, such
as good communication skills, team player, and flexible. These words can help
set you apart from the other candidates.
When you list your employment history, start with your most recent experience
and provide a brief synopsis. You should focus on what you learned or gained
from each experience. List any achievements or honors that you are proud of and
what makes you unique. Avoid giving personal details such as your age or
marital status. Communicate how your interests are related to the job. In
addition, provide the names and contact information of at least two references
from your professional/academic career.
Cover Letter
Although a lot of information was covered on how to write your vita/résumé,
you should also spend some time on your cover letter. Your letter is the first
thing that your employer will read. Hence you should strive to make a good first
impression. In your cover letter, you can talk about your experiences and
accentuate your best features. Your goal in this letter is to provide a nice
summary of your interest in the job and what you can provide. Make sure your
cover letter is professional and printed on quality paper.
It is important that you address the letter to the specific person whenever his or
her name is provided. If you are not sure of the name, try to find out. If that is
not possible, then you should state in your letter the specific job that you are
applying for. Clearly state who you are and why you are applying for the job.
Next, present noteworthy details in your résumé/vita. You could mention why
you are applying to this particular organization and why you would like to work
for them. End your letter positively with an expectation to hear from the
organization in the future.
Résumé/Vita Checklist
Make it professional.
Use quality bond paper, 8½ x 11 inches.
Keep it free of errors and clean.
Send an original rather than a copy.
Use action verbs (managed, created, organized).
Quantify whenever possible (supervised four employees, obtained $2
million grant, raised $250,000).
Organize your experiences from most recent to least recent.
Focus on experiences and achievements.
Avoid using hard-to-read fonts and unusual colors.
Proofread for spelling and grammar errors.
Ask for feedback on your vita/résumé.
Curriculum Vitae (CV Or Vita For Short):
Résumé:
KEY TAKEAWAY
Your résumé/vita is important when applying for jobs.
Do your research.
Make sure that your vita/résumé is professional.
EXERCISES
1. Look for organizations that you would like to apply to and see
which experiences/skills they are looking for most. Is there a
theme?
2. Create two résumés for the same job and ask people what they
like and do not like about them.
3. Create two different cover letters for the same job and ask people
what they like and do not like about them.
KEY TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
Also known as curriculum vitae. Document commonly used in medical and academic institutions. Gives an overview of your experiences and qualifications.
Document that lists your skills and experiences for employment purposes.
16.3 The Job Interview
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
1. Learn what to do before the interview.
2. Discuss what to do during the interview.
3. Discover what to do after the interview.
Before the Interview
After searching and searching for your desired job and then spending time
writing the perfect vita/résumé as well as cover letter, you might apply for some
jobs and never hear back from them. However, you might apply for some jobs
and will most likely get an interview. Do not get discouraged if you don’t hear
back from some organizations. The key is to keep networking and trying to work
on your vita/résumé.
Many people put a lot of time and effort into the steps before the interview (the
cover letter and résumé), but they put hardly any time into practicing for the
interview. You need to prepare yourself for the job interview. Ask friends and
family members to conduct mock interviews if necessary. Many college
campuses have career placement centers that can help as well. In addition, many
Internet sites offer sample questions that employers like to ask future employees.
You need to be able to sell yourself in the best possible way to the organization.
Because a great résumé isn’t the only thing organizations look at, you need to
prepare well for your job interview. You should do a self-analysis to determine
what you value, admire, do well, accomplish, and would like to achieve.
Research as much as you can about the organization. Then, in your interview,
you can share this information with your interviewer. Your interviewer can ask
you specific questions about the organization, and your answers will show that
you are prepared and interested. At the same time, avoid questions that deal with
salary and promotion at the beginning of your interview. Asking about salary
and promotion gives interviewers a bad impression and the perception that you
are more interested in advancement than in being hired.
Besides researching the company profile on the Internet, ask others about the
organization. Figure out why you want to work for this organization as opposed
to other similar organizations. Try to determine what problems or issues the
organization is dealing with and how you can be an integral part in helping
resolve them.
When going to your job interview, it is best to wear a business suit and select
basic colors such as navy, black, gray, or brown. Choose clothes that are
comfortable and stylish. Your confidence will show when you present yourself in
the best way possible. Even if you do not have the funds to purchase the best
outfit, you can use accessories to make a strong impression. These accessories
could be a nice briefcase, tie, scarf, or cuff links. Every business setting has its
own specific rules and norms for how people look and behave. As such, you
want to make sure you fit in. One simple way to fit in is to know how to dress
appropriately in the professional world. Even in higher education where dress is
often more relaxed than in other industries, there are still norms. Any body-
adornments that make you stick out in a professional environment will detract
from your credibility in many organizations (e.g., brightly dyed hair, giant ear
rings, facial tattoos, rumpled clothes, etc.). One of our coauthors actually knows
a CEO who decides whether or not to really listen to an interviewee based on the
condition of the applicant’s shoes. The CEO believes that if the shoes are
polished and well kept, then the applicant is someone who knows how to pay
attention to details.
During the Interview
You need to pay attention to your interviewer. Research shows that interviewers
who converge their speaking style and nonverbal behaviors to the interviewer are
more likely to get higher ratings and possible job offers. You need to also
elucidate aspects that are not obvious to the interviewer. An interviewer may not
realize that you are an artist or a math prodigy. You should highlight how you are
different from all the other candidates applying for the job. Most important, you
need to relax your nerves before your interview. Some people get so excited,
anxious, or nervous about their interview that they lose their train of thought
and/or say things without thinking. You need to stay calm and focused.
Successful Interviewing Checklist
Be calm and focused.
Dress appropriately and professionally.
Be on time and courteous.
Bring extra copies of your résumé and work.
Ask appropriate questions.
Offer time to listen to the interviewer.
Research the organization and be able to offer insights.
Present yourself in the best light possible.
Offer credentials.
Follow up with a thank-you note.
After the Interview
After your interview, you might think that it is over, but it is not. You should
send an e-mail or hand write a thank-you note to your interviewer. Not only is it
a nice gesture, but it can also influence whether or not you get hired. Many
employers can remember people who do not send notes. When you send a thank-
you note, it communicates that you are enthusiastic and interested in the job. As
with all your communications with the organization, make sure that there are no
spelling or grammatical mistakes.
KEY TAKEAWAY
Before the interview, be prepared, dress appropriately, and be
prompt.
During the interview, be sure to stay calm and engaged.
After the interview, be sure to write a thank-you note.
EXERCISES
Search on the Internet and find appropriate job interview attire.
Discuss your findings with the class.
Conduct a mock interview. Find a friend and pretend to be the
interviewer and then the interviewee. What did you notice?
Write a thank-you note. Discuss whether or not it is appropriate to
write it electronically and send it via e-mail or if it is better to hand
write it. What are the implications and perceptions?
16.4 Getting, Keepting, and Succeeding in Your First
Job
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
1. Discuss nonverbal communication.
2. Explain the importance of dress.
3. Elucidate the importance of chronemics.
@ Thinkstock/iStock
Nonverbal communication is the stimulation of meaning in the mind of another
via nonverbal channels. You convey a great deal of information without saying a
word. The way you use nonverbal communication in the workplace is an
important factor in the workplace environment.
You need to dress appropriately. Observe other people in the organization whom
you admire and feel could be role models. Pay particular attention to how they
dress. You need to dress in a similar fashion to the role you hope to one day
attain.
Try to be punctual or a little early to all work events and meetings. Don’t take an
overly long lunch hour or too many breaks. The more you are not working, the
more others might think you don’t care about your work. In the same fashion,
you need to manage your time wisely. Do not turn in late work. Everyone
appreciates work completed on time. If you are consistently late on projects, then
you delay the progress of the organization and possibly cost the organization
money.
Be sure to listen to others. Even though you may think you know what to do in a
particular situation, you should observe and listen to what others say. You may
be tempted to gossip, but you should try your best to refrain from gossip because
sometimes the gossip may not be true. In addition, you might lose others’ trust if
you engage in gossip.
If this is an organization that you see a future with for several years, then you
might seek an advisor or mentor who can help you achieve your organizational
goals. This person can help you understand the corporate culture and what is
inappropriate and appropriate in this work setting.
KEY TAKEAWAY
Nonverbal communication can impact how other people view you.
Always dress for success.
Always be prompt and timely.
EXERCISES
1. Discuss if you think nonverbal communication is important to
keeping your job.
2. Create a list of all the important things that employees should do if
they want to be promoted. How does your list compare to those of
other students?
3. How much time should one devote to a new job? How much
would you devote? Why?
16.5 Chapter Exercises
REAL-WORLD CASE STUDY
Stacy just finished college with honors. She is excited about the
possibility of working in the field with her communication degree.
Many of her fellow communication majors are pursing graduate
degrees. Stacy is sick of school and would like to find a job to gain
some experience before continuing her education. She has applied
for many jobs but has gotten only one offer. The organization said
they can offer her a set starting salary, and they are not willing to
negotiate. Stacy feels as though she has no other options.
She takes the job but finds that many of her coworkers are older
men who are not interested in her ideas. Many of her coworkers like
her working there because she is attractive, and they even tell her
how beautiful they think she is compared to employees who have
worked there in the past. Even though Stacy knows that she is
pretty, she feels like she only got this job because of her looks.
At her job, she is given so many restrictions and rules that she feels
like she is not able to do her job effectively. Due to budget cuts, she
is not able to get the materials she needs to do her job well.
Moreover, none of her coworkers will help her because they think
she is too young and inexperienced.
1. If you were Stacy, what would you do about your salary? Would
you try to negotiate with the risk of losing the job and/or lack of
other job opportunities?
2. How would you handle the comments about physical
attractiveness? How would you deal with the comments about
your youthfulness and inexperience?
3. How might you advise others who are looking to work with that
organization?
4. How would you communicate internally with others and externally
with others about the organization?
END-OF-CHAPTER ASSESSMENT
1. Which is the most important for applying for a job?
a. a good cover letter b. a good résumé c. a good interview d. a good background of experiences/skills e. all of the above
2. Your résumé should include all of the following except:
a. your skills b. your experiences c. your name d. your contact information
e. your astrological sign
3. Which of the following is appropriate to put on your résumé?
a. age b. religious preference c. career objective d. lies e. health issues
4. Which of the following is best to mention in your cover letter?
a. your photograph b. your criminal record c. your negative thoughts d. your political identity e. your informal visit to the organization
5. The best thing you can do during an interview is to be:
a. calm b. witty c. anxious d. talkative e. indifferent
Answer Key
1. e
2. e
3. c
4. e
5. a
- Agreement
- About the Authors
- Acknowledgments
- Preface
- 1. Introduction to Organizational Communication: Why Communication Matters
- What is an Organization?
- What is Communication?
- History of Organizational Communication
- Approaches to Organizational Communication Research
- Chapter Exercises
- 2. Organizational Communication Ethics
- Nature of Ethics
- Business Ethics
- Communication Ethics
- Organizational Communication Ethics
- Chapter Exercises
- 3. Classical Theories of Organizational Communication
- The Classical Perspective
- Human Relations Theories
- Human Resources Theories
- Chapter Exercises
- 4. Modern Theories of Organizational Communication
- Rethinking the Organization
- Rethinking Communication
- Representative Modern Theories
- Chapter Exercises
- 5. Communicating Between and Among Internal Stakeholders
- Formal Communication Networks
- Informal Communication Networks
- Chapter Exercises
- 6. Organizational Communication Climate, Culture, and Globalization
- Organizational Climate
- Organizational Culture
- Globalization and Organizations
- Chapter Exercises
- 7. Leader and Follower Behaviors and Perspectives
- Approaches to Leadership
- Followership
- Mentoring and Coaching
- Chapter Exercises
- 8. Organizational Identity and Diversity
- Identity and the Organization
- Identity and the Organization Member
- Diversity and the Organization
- Chapter Exercises
- 9. Teams in the Workplace
- Group
- Types of Teams
- The Downside to Teams
- Group Communication Roles
- Chapter Exercises
- 10. Recruiting, Socializing, and Disengaging
- Recruiting
- Socializing
- Disengaging
- Chapter Exercises
- 11. Technology in Organizations
- Technology, Society, and the Organization
- Technology and Organizational Structure
- Technology and Organizational Communication
- Chapter Exercises
- 12. Stress, Conflict, and Negotiation
- Stress
- Conflict
- Negotiation
- Chapter Exercises
- 13. The Dark Side of Organizational Communication
- Aggression in the Workplace
- Dysfunctional Organizational Behaviors
- Employee Deviance
- Outcomes of the Dark Side
- Chapter Exercises
- 14. Corporate Communications: Communicating with External Stakeholders
- Public Relations
- Advertising and Marketing
- Chapter Exercises
- 15. The Professional Side of Organizational Communication
- Organizational Development
- Communication Analyses and Audits
- Corporate Training
- Human Performance Improvement
- Chapter Exercises
- 16. Appendix: Your First Job Out of College
- You Have a Degree in Organizational Communication?
- Get That First Job
- The Job Interview
- Getting, Keepting, and Succeeding in Your First Job
- Chapter Exercises